investigation of hydrogen chemisorption on the …

197
INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE TUNGSTEN (100) SURFACE BY STEPHEN PARKER WITHROW B.S., Cornell University, 1967 M.S., University of Illinois, 1969 THESIS Submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in Physics in the Graduate College of the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, 1975 Urbana, Illinois

Upload: others

Post on 21-Nov-2021

5 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …

INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE TUNGSTEN (100) SURFACE

BY

STEPHEN PARKER WITHROW

BS Cornell University 1967 MS University of Illinois 1969

THESIS

Submitted in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in Physics

in the Graduate College of the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign 1975

Urbana Illinois

INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE TUNGSTEN (100) SURFACE

Stephen Parker Withrow PhD Department of Physics

University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign 1975

A new apparatus for surface studies has been constructed and placed

in operation The instrument incorporates a monoenergetic beam of electrons

a high resolution high sensitivity electrostatic energy spectrometer

for electrons and ions plus other hardware and electronics necessary to

perform work function measurements Auger electron spectroscopy electron

stimulated desorption of ions low energy electron diffraction and electron

scattering energy loss measurements It has been used to investigate

geometric energetic and kinetic properties associated with the chemisorpshy

tion of hydrogen on a single crystal tungsten (100) surface over a temperashy

ture range from 600 c to -1500 C

Auger spectroscopy data indicate heating thecrystl11 to 2206degK

is sufficient to clean the surface of carbon and oxygen Howeverweakl

structure is observed between 475 eV and 520 eV Possible sources of this

structure have been considered

The work function changes observed at both 60 0 C and -1500 C as a

function of exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen are equivalent within

experimental error The full monolayer changes in work function with hydrogen

adsorption are 098 eV and 092 eV at the two temperatures respectively

Cooling the clean surface from 2200 C to _1500 C increases the work function

~ 005 eV

Hydrogen ions are desorbed from the dosed tungsten surface following

electron impact The distribution in energy of these ions has a Gaussian

line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 eV and a full width

at half maximum of 26 eV The ion yield is found to be coverage dependent

reaching a maximum at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV for desorpshy

tion at 600C and -150oC respectively The total desorption cross section

-20 2 0for H+ from the S2 hydrogen state 1S calculated to be 5xlO cm at 60 C

-19 2 0and 12xlO cm at -150 C

A new hydrogen binding state labeled the fast state has been

observed and characterized using ESD techniques This state is desorbable

if the undosed crystal is cooled below room temperature It is populated to

-4 a very low coverage ~10 monolayer by adsorption from the background of

some other t han H T e tota esorpt10n cross cm2spec1es 2 hId sect1on 10- 17 and

energy distribution of the fast state are markedly different than for the S

states

LEED pattern changes observed as a function of hydrogen coverage

are in good agreement with results published in the literature The intenshy

sity of the c(2x2) pattern associated with the S2 hydrogen state maximizes

at a work function change with adsorption of 015 eV LEED elastic intensity

profiles have been obtained for several low index beams These are compared

to theoretical microscopic model calculations and to published experimental

profiles A c(2x2) LEED pattern is obtained if the crystal is cooled below

room temperature Attempts have been made to correlate the appearance of this

pattern to changes in measurements taken in this low temperature range with

other techniques No significant bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen was

found No evidence was found from work function and electron scattering

experiments to support the hypothesis that the low temperature c(2x2)

pattern results from hydrogen on the surface In addition the fast hydrogen

state is not believed to be responsible for the c(2x2) pattern LEED

intensity profiles from the undosed cold surface c(2x2) pattern and from the

c(2x2) pattern associated with the ~2 hydrogen state are not identical an

indication that the atomic geometry responsible for the two patterns may not

be the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been obtained as a

function of hydrogen coverage for loss energies of 0 eV ~ w lt 40 eV Hydrogen

adsorption has a marked effect on the spectra Fine structure in the data

has been discussed and compared to photoemission data Cooling the clean

crystal below room temperature causes only a slight change in the energy loss

spectrum

iii

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I would like to sincerely thank my advisor Professor F M Propst

for guidance given throughout the course of this research and for his knowledge

of surface research which helped shape this work Dr C B Duke for many

helpful conversations and for assistance in the analysis of the data my wife

Lois for her patience and steadfast encouragement my parents and parents-inshy

law for their generous and needed support Paul Luscher and John Wendelken for

their creativity and cooperation in the design of the apparatus and for many

interesting scientific discussions Jim Burkstrand and Chris Foster for their

friendship and technical help on many occasions Bob Bales George Bouck Bob

Fults Bill Beaulin Lyle Bandy and Bill Lawrence for design assistance and

expert workmanship in the construction of the apparatus Nick Vassos and Bill

Thrasher for the imaginative and superior work in materials processing necesshy

sary in the construction of the instrument Gene Gardner and co-workers for

able assistance in electronics Bob MacFarlane and assistants for their high

quality draftmanship Jack Gladin and Jim Gray for an excellent job on the

photography needed for this research Bob Ebeling for his cooperation in the

print shop Chris Fleener for an excellent typing of the manuscript and the

rest of the staff of the Coordinated Science Laboratory whose efforts have

been gratefully appreciated during my tenure as a graduate student

bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter Page

1 MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

11 Introduction and Motivationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

12 Review of Literature bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

121 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4 122 Thermal Desorptionbull o 4 123 LEED and HEEDbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 7 124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and

Photoemissionbullbullbull 100 bullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbull

125 Electron Stimulated Desorptionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 12 126 Work Functionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 13o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

1 27 Chemical Probes bullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull 14I) O

128 Chemisorption Models bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 15 1 29 Theoretical Treatment bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 19 1 210 Literature Surnmaryo 20

13 Review of Experimental Techniques bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 21

2 EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull ~ bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

21 CGeneral Description bull 22

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shieldingbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 25

24 Energy Spectrometer 29

25 Spectrometer Electronics bullbull 45o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

26 LEED Display System 490 bullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull I)

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 51

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 57

29 Gas Handling System o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 62

210 Mass Spectrometer bullbullbullbull o 64

3 EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE AND RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

31 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

32 Experimental Procedure o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current

Measurements 6811 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull

323 Target Temperature Measurement bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 325 Ion Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 72o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

v

33 Ion Species Identificationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 74

34 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 77

35 u+ Ion Desorption Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 351 ut Ion Energy Distributionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 352 Desorption Curve Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 93 353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State a+ Ion

Signal 4) 96

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 98

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull lll

37 Electron Scattering Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 119

4 DISCUSSION OF RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

42 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 127

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 129 431 Room Temperature Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 130 432 Low Temperature Fast State Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 135 433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull142

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 145

45 Electron Scattering Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 161

5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull165

REFERENCES 171

APPENDIX A 0 176 poundI

APPENDIX B 9 c 179

APPENDIX C 0 182 0 bull

VITA 190lilt bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbull

1

CHAPTER 1

MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

11 Introduction and Motivation

The experimental investigation of chemisorption of gases onto metallic

surfaces has uncovered in the past decade a baffling complexity of adsorption

geometries and binding state kinetics and energetics A growing interest in

surface phenomena generated by the questions raised in these researches and

by the long anticipated use of the answers has led to the rapid development

of new surface probing techniques and to an increase in the availability of new

technologies compatible with surface research Aided by the new technologies

and techniques chemisorption research has been undertaken on many different

systems (system =solid substrate + gas adsorbate) under a wide range of

environmental conditions Surface theoreticians have proposed microscopic and

phenomenological models with which data have been analyzed and compared A

large experimental and theoretical literature in the field has resulted

The study of adsorption on metal surfaces has among its primary

objectives a detailed description of the physical geometry of the atoms in the

surface layers and a quantitative understanding of electronic and chemical

surface phenomena While considerable progress has been made in documenting

gas-surface phenomena it has been only in the past three years that any

credible claims to understanding specific surface overlayer geometries have

1been made At the same time many basic questions involving system kinetics

and energetics have not been adequately resolved 2

It has become apparent from the failure of the research effort to

satisfy the above objectives and from seemingly conflicting data that adequate

2

characterization is basic to all surface experimentation The need for such

characterization has been strongly emphasized by disagreement between quasishy

similar research performed at different locations Small impurity concentrashy

tions small changes in crystal orientation minor temperature differences etc

often have considerable effects on experimental measurements

A corollary to the necessity of being able to characterize the

surface is the importance of being able to control the surface characterization

In order to compare data it is necessary to reproduce all experimental paramshy

eters accurately The theory to which experimental data are compared is

constrained by complexity to be based on ideal clean substrates with a

definable gas-surface interaction It is desirable to be able to choose the

adsorbate-substrate system and experimental parameters that can also be used

with theoretical models Of course compromises are inevitable

One approach in surface research has been to incorporate several

experimental techniques into one apparatus At the present time this approach

is increasingly more common A combination of surface sensitive probes offers

many advantages It provides for more checks of the data against results

published in the literature It allows for better characterization of the

experimental parameters It allows surface phenomena to be probed in more than

one way in order to eliminate ambiguities andor to reinforce conclusions It

eliminates the uncertainties that arise from data taken at different locations

using the techniques separately hence it allows better correlations between

data taken using the different techniques

In this study several aspects of the chemisorption interaction of

hydrogen with the low index (100) plane of single crystal tungsten denoted

3

W(100) have been investigated The choice of the tungsten-hydrogen system is

motivated by several factors The literature raises questions on the unusual

state behavior observed when hydrogen adsorbs on W(100) questions which our

apparatus is especially well-suited to study In addition the interaction of

hydrogen with close packed planes of single crystal metals including W(100)

is of particular interest to theoreticians since hydrogen is the simplest

molecular gas as detailed in Sections 128 and 129 below recent theories

of chemisorption have been applied to the hydrogen-tungsten system Tungsten

was chosen as the substrate metal because of its relative ease of preparation

and cleaning and because the large body of literature on the hydrogen-tungsten

system indicates wide interest in this interaction

In particular this research is concentrated in three areas Tung~

sten when cleaned and subsequently cooled to below room temperature exhibits

an anomalous centered (2x2) denoted C(2x2) low energy electron diffraction

pattern The possibility that this is caused by hydrogen diffusing from the

bulk or adsorbing from the background has been investigated Secondly the

room temperature and low temperature hydrogen adsorption binding states have

been studied using electron stimulated desorption and electron spectroscopy

Finally low energy electron diffraction has been used in an investigation of

the atomic geometry of the clean tungsten surface and the geometry of one of

the hydrogen binding states

The remaining sections of this chapter summarize literature relating

to this research Chapter 2 details the construction and performance of the

experimental apparatus A presentation of the experimental data is made in

Chapter 3 A discussion of the results is made in Chapter 4 A summaryof

4

the research and conclusions from it are given in Chapter 5

12 Review of Literature

121 Introduction

Experimental investigation of the adsorption of hydrogen on tungsten

has been carried out using field emitter tips macroscopic polycrystalline

surfaces and all the low index orientation single crystal faces including

W(lOO) From the wide range of results it is clear that the substrate exerts

a strong influence on the adsorption properties The question has been raised

whether adsorption models postulated from polycrystalline substrates can be

3extended even qualitatively to single crystal systems Likewise there are

such sharp differences in the chemisorption behavior of hydrogen onto the

different single crystal tungsten surfaces that the specific physical process

governing adsorption on each face appears to be unique to that face This

review will therefore be concerned for the most part with literature dealing

with hydrogen adsorption on W(lOO) the gas-substrate system used in this

research

The following data review is presented in subsections each concenshy

trating on a specific experimental technique or class of experiments Subsecshy

tion 127 includes some gas mixing literature which was considered relevant

and Subsection 129 gives a bibliography of some related chemisorption

theoretical papers

122 Thermal Desorption

One technique widely employed in investigation of the kinetics of gas

456adsorption has been thermal or flash desorption By monitoring the system

5

pressure changes of a species while rapidly heating the crystal inferences

can be made on the existence of binding states adsorption energies and reaction

7 8 order Heating is accomplished by a focussed light beam electron bombardshy

7 9ment or ohmic losses bull

The strongest indication that hydrogen exhibits multiple state

adsorption behavior on W(lOO) comes from flash desorption data Tamm and

8Schmidt 7 and Madey and Yates found for room temperature adsorption that two

large peaks are observed in the plot of pressure of H2 versus temperature

These peaks are centered at 4500 K and approximately 550oK Only hydrogen

molecules are observed to be desorbed from the surface Using desorption rate

456theory the lower temperature (~l) state is found to obey first order

kinetics the peak temperature being independent of initial coverage The

higher temperature (~2) state obeys second order kinetics the peak temperature

moving down from approximately 5800 K to 5500 K as the initial coverage is

increased

In addition to the two main peaks several small peaks comprising a

total of less than 10 percent of the desorbed hydrogen are observed during a

flash when the crystal is cooled to nitrogen temperature before hydrogen

exposure These states are believed to result from adsorption onto edges and

other non-(lOO) crystal orientations 8

The dependence of the desorption energy Ed on coverage is weak

~l 8 ~2 8with Ed = 252 kcallmole and Ed = 323 kcalmole As would be predicted

from this result the ~2 state is largely populated before the ~l state begins

to fill The ratio of the populations in the states at full coverage n~1n~2

8 lOis 2111 Jelend and Menzel point out that the cross section for electron

6

desorption (see Subsection 125) from the ~1 state is considerably smaller

than that of the ~2 state a result not predicted from the experimental flash

desorption binding energies

11Tibbetts using a stepped temperature flash desorption technique

has shown that hydrogen is bound to the surface of po1ycrysta11ine tungsten

W(110) and W(lll) with a distribution of binding energies ranging from

162 kca1mo1e (07 eV) to 415 kca1mo1e (lS eV) Using this technique

desorption at a constant temperature from a distribution of states can be easily

distinguished from desorption from a state with a unique binding energy While

he did not extend his work to W(100) these results suggest that hydrogen does

not bind to the surface at a few energies but rather with a range of binding

energies Tibbetts also shows that the determination of the order of the

desorption process is difficult for adsorption into a range of binding energies

In experiments using a combination of hydrogen and deuterium as room

temperature adsorbates the elemental composition of the desorbed ~1 and ~2

states shows complete isotopic mixing between the states7S independent of the

adsorption sequence or ratios However for low temperature adsorption

complete state conversion is not observed for all the additional small peaks

Where mixing is observed atomic adsorption is suggested Where mixing is not

observed molecular adsorption is inferred

Some theoretical models indicate that multiple peak flash desorption

spectra may be due to binding energy changes caused by adsorbate-adsorbate

interactions12 or order-disorder transactions during f1ash3 13 rather than

actual distinct multiple binding states under the adsorption conditions

7

123 LEED and HEED

Low energy electron diffraction or LEED refers to the coherent

scattering of a monoenergetic focused electron beam from the surface of a

crystalline solid Electrons in the energy range 0 lt E lt 300 eV interact

strongly with the ion cores and valence electrons of the solid The inelastic

mean free path is on the order of 10 X As a consequence electrons which are

observed elastically have been backscattered within the first several surface

layers in the solid making LEED a surface sensitive probe 14 15 The periodic

translational symmetry of the surface leads to the momentum conservation laws

I

= (11)~I ~II + g

= (2mEh2)t sin reg (12)~II

where ~II is the momentum parallel to the surface of the emerging electron and

~ is the parallel momentum of the incident electron The vector g is a

reciprocal lattice vector of the solid surface and reg is the polar angle of the

incident beam As a result of the conservation laws the scattered electrons

emerge in a series of beams called a spot pattern which is a manifestation

of the surface symmetry The beams are labelled by their corresponding g

vectors Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores is

extracted from the plot of elastically scattered electron intensity versus

16 17incident energy called elastic intensity profiles or I-V curves

Changes in the LEED spot pattern resulting from hydrogen adsorption

18onto W(lOO) at room temperature have been reported by Estrup and Anderson and

19by Yonehara and Schmidt As hydrogen is adsorbed at room temperature the

8

(lxl) pattern characteristic of clean tungsten changes into a weak C(2x2)

pattern at a hydrogen coverage e of less than 005 monolayer (where e = 1

15 2monolayer at a coverage of 2xlO hydrogen atomsem which is 2 hydrogen atoms

for each surface tungsten atom) The (1212) spots become sharp and intense

with increased hydrogen adsorption reaching a maxima in intensity at approxishy

19 18mately 015 monolayer or e = 025 monolayer (Coverage in both cases was

determined by flash desorption) The (1212) spots split into four new spots

which move apart continuously and upon further hydrogen adsorption eventually

19form 13-order streaks at a coverage of ~ 035 monolayer These in turn

change at higher coverage into poorly developed 14-order features with the

(012) spots missing Finally near e = 10 all extra diffraction features

are gone and the LEED pattern returns to a (lxl) symmetry This series of LEED

pattern changes is reversible with coverage

For hydrogen adsorption at 1950 K the C(2x2) pattern develops

maximizes in intensity at e ~ 18 and splits into four beams similar to room

temperature adsorption However the higher coverage LEED structures third

19 0order streaks and fourth order spots are not observed At 78 K adsorption

of hydrogen produces half-order C(2x2) spots that maximize in intensity at

e ~ 027 Additional hydrogen adsorption beyond this causes the half-order

19spot intensity to decrease but with no splitting of the spots

If clean W(lOO) is allowed to cool below room temperature a sharp

19and intense C(2x2) pattern is observed even though total coverage due to the

background of H2 and CO is less than e = 001 as determined by flash desorption

measurements The intensity of these half-order beams can be altered by

additional hydrogen adsorption or by various hydrogen and oxygen heat treatmenm

9

l9Yonehara and Schmidt have postulated that the extra spots may result from

hydrogen endothermally soluble in tungsten diffusing to the surface Possible

alternative explanations include the reconstruction of the clean tungsten

surface or impurity over layer adsorption from the background It should be

20noted that Plummer and Bell saw no effects upon cooling their field emitter

tip to 78 0 K that they could attribute to hydrogen diffusion to the surface

Elastic intensity profiles for several beams have been measured by

18 21Estrup and Anderson and by Papageorgopoulos and Chen at room temperature

Estrup and Anderson reported profiles for (00) and (1212) tEED lJeams out

to 300 eV The intensity variation for the (OO) beam was found to be indepenshy

dent of hydrogen coverage a manifestation of the relatively weak scattering

cross section of a hydrogen ion core relative to that of tungsten The

additional beams observed on adsorption would be expected to be more sensitive

13to the adsorbed overlayer Estrup found the intensity of the (1212) beams

for H W(100) and D W(100) to decrease as a function of temperature between2 2

300o

K and 6000 K at a constant incident energy but neither obeyed the Debyeshy

22Waller relation Estrup interpreted this result to imply the adsorbed

species are directly involved in the diffraction process

19Yonehara examined the tEED spot intensities as a function of

temperature down to liquid nitrogen temperatures His results are examined

in the data discussion in Chapter 4

The hydrogen-WlOO) system has also been studied using high energy

electron diffraction or HEED23 This technique utilizes the strong forward

scattering of high energy electrons in probing the surface by having the

incident beam strike the solid at grazing incidence The resulting diffraction

10

patterns are sensitive to the translational symmetry of the surface As in

LEED a diffraction pattern with C(2x2) symmetry is observed during initial

hydrogen adsorption With further hydrogen exposure the beams broaden some

splitting is observed and eventually the half-order intensity decreases

completely The width of the observed half-order beams has been interpreted to

indicate hydrogen initially adsorbs into a large number of small square or

rectangular domains each consisting of 20 to 25 atoms with sides parallel to

the [100J directions

124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and Photoemission

The electronic structure of the surface layers of solids can be

characterized by electron emission spectroscopies Such techniques require a

surface sensitive perturbation on the gas-solid system leading to an electron

yield A spectrometer is used to energy analyze the emitted or scattered

24 25electrons In electron scatter~ng a monoenergetic beam of electrons is

directed onto a crystal The inelastically scattered signal containing

quantitative information about electronic excitations at the surface is

measured as a function of energy loss Field emission is a technique in which

application of a high positive electric field to the surface lowers the potenshy

26tia1 barrier for electrons to tunnel out of the system The total energy

distribution of electrons emitted as a result of the applied field contains

bull 27 28spectroscopic data on the adsorbed spec~es Structure induced by the

adsorbate in the elastic tunneling spectrum is thought to be a measure of the

d f i h f h d b 2930e1ectron~c ens~ty 0 states n t e v~c~n~ty 0 tea sor ate The

inelastic tunneling spectrum reveals discrete excitation energies in the

11

gas-surface system In photoemission or ftotoelectron spectroscopy an incident

monochromatic light beam incident on the solid induces emission of electrons by

interband transitions with or without an inelastic scattering after the initial

31 exc i tat~on

The vibrational spectrum of hydrogen adsorbed on the tungsten (100)

32surface has been observed by Propst and Piper using inelastic low energy

20electron scattering and by Plummer and Bell using field emission Propst

and Piper found two peaks in the energy loss distribution E - E pr~mary scattered

at 135 meV and 69 meV for all coverages used up to saturation These results

are interpreted as indicating hydrogen atoms are multiply bonded to tungsten

33atoms No losses near 550 meV the vibrational energy of molecular hydrogen

were observed Plummer and Bell measured the total energy distribution of

field emitted electrons from tungsten (100) as a function of coverage of

hydrogen and deuterium at several temperatures Discrete losses at 100 meV

and 50 meV for deuterium which correspond to the 135 meV and 69 meV vibrational

losses observed by Propst and Piper were evident for deuterium in the a state2

No discrete energy losses at 550 meV or 390 meV the molecular vibrational

levels of H2 and D2 respectively were measured Hence there was no observable

molecular adsorption at room temperature

Additional structure in the field emission total energy distribution

is observed as a function of hydrogen adsorption The clean surface spectrum

has two peaks 04 eV and 15 eV down from the Fermi level which have been

d ifi d h h d f d h h f 34 A h d ~ ent e as ~g ens~ty 0 states assoc~ate w~t t e sur ace s y rogen

(or deuterium) coverage increases between 0 and 5xl014 atomscm2

ie while

the ~2 state is filling the surface states disappear and the field emitted

12

energy distribution changes from that of clean tungsten to a spectrum indicative

of resonance tunneling through a level positioned 09 eV below the Fermi energy

There is a shoulder at -11 eV and an energy dependent background With

further adsorption up to saturation this energy distribution characteristic

of the ~2 state shifts to a broad level centered at 26 eV below the Fermi

level This is interpreted to indicate that the ~1 state does not adsorb on

top of the ~2 state

35The photoemission results of Wac1awski and P1ummer and Feuerbacher

36and Fitton are in agreement with those obtained using the field emission

technique As hydrogen adsorbs on the surface emission from the 04 eV

surface state decreases The level 09 eV down from the Fermi energy as well

as a level 5 eV down remain unchanged by adsorption At full coverage a strong

peak at -25 eV is observed

125 Electron Stimulated Desorption

Desorption of energetic ions and neutrals from a gas over layer can

be induced by electron bombardment This process termed electron stimulated

desorption or ESD37383940 is described below in the discussion of the data

in Chapter 4 In brief intensity and energy measurements of the ion yield can

be interpreted in terms of the parameters characterizing the binding energy

curve of the adsorbed state and adsorption states can be classified by cross

section for desorption_ ion energy distributions primary energy threshold for

desorption etc

ESD has been employed to study adsorption kinetics for the hydrogenshy

41 ~ tungsten (100) system Madey obtained a coverage dependence yield of H ions

13

observing an ion signal during the initial stages of hydrogen adsorption that

reached a maximum at a coverage of e = 017 and then decayed to zero yield

23 2after e = 075 the maximum cross section obtained was 18x10- cm at a

primary electron energy of 100 eV Tamm and Schmidt7 reported a maximum cross

section for H+ desorption of 10- 21 cm 2bull Benninghoven Loebach and Treitz42

10and Je1end and Menze1 obtained qualitatively similar (to Madey) coverage

dependencies on tungsten ribbons which were believed to be predominantly of

(100) crystallites the main difference between these results and Madeys is

the observation of a residual signal at high hydrogen coverage

The cross section results indicate that the a state even though it2

is more tightly bound than the a state provides more hydrogen ions upon1

electron impact The cross section for ion desorption from the a1 state is

d41 10-25est1mate to be 1ess t han cm2 bull

+No energy distributions of the desorbed H ions have been reported

The dependence of the desorption cross section on the primary electron energy

10has not been investigated Je1end and Menzel found their results independent

of temperature for temperatures above room temperature No ESD results for

otemperatures less than 300 K have been reported

126 Work Function

The work function is the minimum amount of energy required to remove

43 an electron from a meta1 An adsorbate may alter the potential barrier for

electrons at the surface and hence change the work function Such is the case

for hydrogen on W(100) Hydrogen adsorbs as an electronegative ion on W(100)

thereby increasing the work function

14

44Using a retarding potential current-voltage techn~que Madey and

8Yates reported a linear relation between work function change and hydrogen

coverage over the entire coverage range for adsorption occurring at a

temperature 0 f 2= 300 0 K Coverages were determined by flash desorption

Total work function change at one monolayer was found to be 090 eV which

corresponds to a constant dipole moment per adsorbed atom of 015 Debye

15 2(assuming a total coverage of 15xlO atomsem)

Estrup and Anderson18 using the retarding potential technique and

Plummer and Bel120 using a field emission Fowler-Nordheim plot45 found a

work function change versus coverage relationship which deviated only slightly

8from being linear in near agreement with the results of Madey and Yates

46 47Becker using field emission and Armstrong using a retarding potential

technique found a work function change for the H W(100) system of approximately2

48090 eV when e = 10 Hopkins and Pender obtained an anomalously low value

49of 054 eV while Collins and Blott obtained a high value of 109 eV for the

same coverage

127 Chemical Probes

Hydrogen adsorption has also been studied using a chemical probe

ie by coadsorbing some additional different gas with the hydrogen and

observing the effect this additional species had on results obtained using

techniques discussed in previous sections

50Yates and Madey found using flash desorption that CO coadsorption

onto a hydrogen monolayer displaces both the Sl and S2 binding states with

near unity probability in doing so initially replacing these states with a

15

less tightly bound hydrogen state After high CO exposure no hydrogen remains

on the surface if the coadsorption is done at room temperature At lower

temperatures only about 10 percent of the hydrogen is desorbed Jelend and

Menzel lO 5l found that the ionic and total desorption cross sections for

hydrogen the sticking probability and bond strength of hydrogen are all

affected by preadsorption of CO or oxygen Yates and Madey3 found that N2

slowly replaces preadsorbed hydrogen at temperatures greater than 300oC Below

2730

K the displacement of hydrogen by N2 does not occur

These results all show that small impurity concentrations of CO N

and 0 if intentionally introduced do affect the resulting hydrogen chemishy

sorption properties These experiments underscore the necessity of surface

chemical characterization

128 Chemisorption Models

7 18 19 52 Several models have been proposed to account for the

experimental results from hydrogen chemisorption on W(lOO) Each of these

models embodies some combination of the following three phenomenological

assumptions 1) The tungsten surface is ideal planar and free of contamishy

nants 2) There are available two types of adsorbates namely hydrogen atoms

53and molecules 3) There are three high symmetry logical bonding sites on

a BCC (100) face usually designated by the letters A B and C These

positions are A a bridge site with 2 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen

equidistant from two adjacent surface tungsten atoms B a four fold symmetric

site with 5 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen located on a surface normal that

passes through the center of a surface primitive unit cell and C the hydrogen

16

located directly above a surfac~ atom with one nearest neighbor There are

15 152x10 A sitescm2 and 1x10 B ore sites~m2 on middotW(100)

The proposed models attempt to explain or at least be consistent

with empirical results presented in Sections 121 through 127 A summary

of salient features of the reported research includes a) a linear work function

15change with coverage b) a saturation coverage of between 15 and 20x10 H

2atomscm c) a coverage dependent adsorption layer symmetry including a we11shy

ordered surface at low coverages d) the appearance at low temperatures of a

surface translational symmetry not equivalent to room temperature clean

tungsten e) adsorption into states which produces a two state thermal desorpshy

tion spectrum with relative coverages in the two states of nQ n = 21 f) a ~1 ~2

coverage dependence for the observed electronic structure including the

absence at high coverage of structure observed at low coverages and g) no

observed vibrational levels which correspond to free H2 molecule

Following is a short review of several proposed surface models

18Estrup and Anderson account for their LEED spot pattern results

using a model wherein the hydrogen molecules dissociate upon adsorption and

migrate initially to form islands of hydrogen atoms located at type A sites in

a e(2x2) structure Dissociation is assumed since the e(2x2) pattern maximizes

15 2at a coverage of 25x10 mo1ecu1escm whereas without dissociation it would

maX1m1ze at 5 1015 mo ecu1es cm2bull e site adsorptionx 1 Although type B or type

could also produce the initial e(2x2) LEED pattern these sites are rejected

15 2because of the following 1) There are only 1x10 B or e sitescm This is

not enough sites to accommodate a full monolayer coverage if all binding is

atomic and if it is into equivalent sites as suggested by the linear work

17

function change with coverage 2) While a complete 14-order LEED pattern is

possible with type B or type C sites it is not possible to produce a 14-order

54pattern with (012) spots missing using B or C sites As the adsorption

14 2proceeds past a surface density of 5xlO hydrogen atomscm the adatoms conshy

tinuously rearrange into long period superlattices with antiphase domains

that produce successively the 12-order spot splitting the 13-order streak

(only partly ordered domains) the 14-order pattern and finally the (lxl)

full coverage structure

This model has been criticized for not accounting for the two

observed binding states and for predicting a maximum in intensity of the half

order spots at e = 025 these beams maximize at less than that coverage In

addition the authors themselves questioned the idea of well-ordered super-

lattices

In order to explain the relative intensity of the two states at

saturation seen in flash desorption n~~ = 21 Tamm and Schmidt7

propose a 1 2

model wherein the initial hydrogen adsorption is atomic and at B sites in a

C(2x2) pattern At full coverage the remaining B sites are filled with

hydrogen molecules B sites are chosen over C sites using molecular orbital

55arguments A sites are rejected as there are too many to satisfy this model

This model satisfies the second order kinetics observed for the ~2 state and

the first order kinetics observed for the ~l state In addition it explains

14 2 7 their saturation coverage of gt 3xl0 moleculescm One weakness of this

model pointed out by Tamm and Schmidt is that it is not obvious the model can

account for the observed LEED and work function results Also no molecular

vibrations have been observed

18

19yonehara and Schmidt propose a three bonding state model that is

more consistent with the low temperature LEED results In their model an

additional state labeled ~3 is always present at the surface in A or B

2sites with a density of 5xl014 atomscm bull This state orders on the surface at

low temperatures to give the C(2x2) pattern observed At room and higher

temperatures it goes into solution (or perhaps disorders) becoming invisible

to LEED In the type A site model adsorption from the background fills in the

remaining A sites sequentially with the ~2 and ~l states This model is similar

18to that proposed by Estrup and Anderson except that the ~3 state although

invisible to LEED at room and higher temperatures occupies 14 of the type A

sites This model eliminates the stoichiometric objection to Estrup and

Andersons model The model depends on the possibility of type A sites being

occupied by states with considerably different properties If the ~3 state

occupies type B sites ~2 state adsorption fills in the remaining type B sites

and then ~l hydrogen adsorbs into random or possibly type C sites This

second model does not explain satisfactorily work function or LEED spot pattern

experimental data

56Propst found using a point defect type calculation that only a

B-site model of adsorption would produce the observed vibrational energies of

5769 meV and 135 meV Park using LEED intensity arguments found that only

adsorption into sites with 4-fold symmetry on the (100) surface (type B or type

C sites) would be consistent with broadening and splitting of the half-order

beams while the integral beams remain sharp

8Madey and Yates offer a critique of several of the proposed models

19

No adsorption geometry adequately accounts for all the observed data

It is possible that surface hydrogen mobility adsorbate-adsorbate interactions

tungsten surface reconstruction and other surface phenomenon must be better

understood before this system can be adequately characterized

129 Theoretical Treatment

Several theoretical treatments of hydrogen-tungsten chemisorption

phenomenon have been reported in the literature as discussed below

7 18 19 52 The most elementary geometric models already have been

mentioned in Section 128 Grimley58 considers the hydrogen on W(lOO) system

59in an Anderson-Hamiltonian formalism Anders and Hansen obtain the relative

bonding energies of hydrogen chemisorbed at the three high symmetry adsorption

sites of W(lOO) using an extended Ruckel molecular orbital theory Their

results indicated a preference for hydrogen adsorption at type C sites

60Schrieffer offers a review on the theory of chemisorption in which he

concludes the Hartree-Fock approximation to the Anderson model for hydrogenshy

61metal adsorption is invalid Newns using the same approximation also shows

62the one-electron HF theory to be invalid Schrieffer and Gomer study the

exchange interaction between the adatom and the solid which results from the

nonorthogonality of the adatom and solid wave functions Smith Ying

h 63 64 h h d 1 h bl band Ko n lnvestlgate t e y rogen-meta c emlsorptlon pro em y

requiring complete self-consistency between the three-dimensional electrostatic

potential used and charge density obtained They calculate electron scattering

resonance levels and ground state vibrational frequency Jennings and McRae

using a multiple scattering LEED theory (but neglecting inelastic collision

65

20

damping) show that there can be half-order beams of high intensity in the H -W2

k W b 66 1 b dsystem even t hough h ydrogen 1S a wea scatterer e1n erg app 1es a on-

energy bond-order model of chemisorption to the hydrogen-W(100) system and

predicts binding energies for the molecular state and atomic state of hydrogen

on W(100) to be 262 kca1mo1e and 322 kca1mo1e respectively

1210 Literature Summary

Some conclusions can be drawn concerning the state of understanding

of the hydrogen-tungsten system and in particular the H W(100) system2

Despite considerable research experimental uncertainties still exist

in the H W(100) interaction It is still not clear if hydrogen adsorbs as a2

molecule The preponderance of evidence from electron scattering vibrational

levels field emission and H -D gas mixing flash desorption measurements2 2

indkates most hydrogen probably adsorbs atomically Multiple state behavior

is exhibited It is not known however if this observed state behavior is a

result of distinct hydrogen-tungsten interactions it is believed that to a

large extent it is driven by coverage dependent adsorbate-adsorbate interacshy

tions There is no model that can successfully incorporate the measured work

function flash desorption and ESD parameters The adsorption sites are not 15 15 2

known Total coverage at one monolayer is between 15xlO and 2x10 atomsem

which is more than the number of surface tungsten atomscm2 in the (100) face

LEED results at different temperatures indicate a possible temperature depenshy

dence for the adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO) Particularly confusing is

the anomalous LEED result obtained at low temperatures for the clean surface

Only small adsorption temperature dependencies are found in sticking probability

21

work function changes and flash desorption results

13 Review of Experimental Techniques

As indicated in Section 11 this research has been undertaken in an

attempt to characterize more fully the hydrogen-W(lOO) interaction A multi-

technique spectrometer has been used Chapter 2 gives a discussion of the

instrument This instrument is capable of making work function Auger electron

spectroscopy electron scattering ESD (including a pulsed time-of-flight mode)

and LEED measurements These techniques except AES have been well-reviewed

43 44 67 68 24 25 3 37 3839 40 as referenced prevlously (work function AES ES ESD

151617LEED ) Their use in this research can be summarized as follows work

function changes are a measure of adsorption coverage Auger electron

spectroscopy has been used to characterize the contamination of the experimental

surface ES and ESD are sensitive probes of surface and adsorption parameters

Time-of-flight has been used to determine the ion species desorbed LEED has

been used here to indicate the orientation of the surface and to attempt to

take initial data useful in calculation of overlayer geometries A more

detailed discussion of these techniques as used in this research is given in

Section 32

A discussion of the instrument constructed and used for this research

is given in Chapter 2 Sections 31 and 32 deal wIth organization and

experimental procedures Experimental data are presented starting with Section

33 A discussion of the data and conclusions from the research are given in

Chapter 4

22

CHAPTER 2

EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS

21 General Description

The apparatus used in this research is designed to probe an experishy

mental macroscopic crystal with several surface sensitive techniques It

combines an electron gun which focuses a monoenergetic beam of electrons onto

the crystal a new high resolution electrostatic spectrometer capable of energy

analysis of electrons and ions a low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system

and a crystal manipulator The crystal manipulator allows positioning of the

experimental sample and provides sample cooling heating and electrical

biasing Also included in the apparatus are a mass spectrometer and a gas

handling system System electronics allow the spectrometer to perform work

function electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated desorption

Auger electron spectroscopy and low energy electron diffraction measurements

The spectrometer can be operated over a wide range of primary electron energies

and currents and analyzer pass energies It can be biased in both electron and

ion pass modes and in a pulsed time-of-flight mode for species identification

An external spot photometer is used for LEED intensity measurements The

instrument is housed in an ultrahigh vacuum chamber A schematic diagram of

the overall system is given in Figure 21 The construction and performance

characteristics of each of the components are discussed in the following

sections of Chapter 2

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shielding

The requirement that the experimental surface has to remain clean

23

Analyzer Support

Magnetic Shielding

Ion Gauge

Analyzer

Crystal Target

Window

Openings in Magnetic Shield to Gas Jet and Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer

LEED Screen Viewing Mi rror

To Ion Pumps _

Analyzer Wiring Feedthroughs

Liquid Nitrogen Dewar for Cooling Strap Heat Sink

Insulator

Crystal Manipulator

Cooling Strop

Titanium Sublimotion Pump

Figure 21 Schematic diagram of mu1titechnique apparatus

24

while making measurements necessitates housing the apparatus in an ultrahigh

vacuum chamber A commercial Varian vacuum chamber and pumping station have

been used Ultrahigh vacuum was achieved in several steps after the chamber

-2 was rough pumped down to 10 Torr using cryosorb pumps main system pumping

was accomplished using a 400 litersec ion pump and a titanium sublimator

oAfter a bakeout of 24 hours at temperatures up to 270 C to outgas the system

-10walls the system pressure read about lxlO Torr as measured with a Bayard-

Alpert ion gauge The pressure decreased somewhat during the first weeks of

spectrometer operation after bakeout The final system background pressure

-11 was less than 8xlO Torr or below the x-ray limit of the gauge When

-10operating in the Auger mode the background rose to lxlO Torr presumably

because of the large currents involved A mass spectrometer scan indicated

that the main components of the background were H2 CO CO2 and H 0 The ion2

gauge which can affect the composition of the background was turned off while

taking data except if noted otherwise

In an electrostatic deflection analyzer such as used here magnetic

fields can introduce spurious results In order to reduce the earths magnetic

field in the region of electron or ion trajectories three concentric cylinders

of Eagle AAA ultrahigh nickel steel alloy magnetic shielding are placed around

the spectrometer The shielding is mounted on a stainless steel and ceramic

support which rests in a groove in the inside wall of the vacuum chamber This

shielding is electrically isolated so it can be floated at any desired voltage

The ambient magnetic field in the target region is less than 5 milliGauss

The region inside the shielding and below the spectrometer (the

region shown in Figure 214) is referred to in this work as the experimental

25

chamber There are apertures cut in the magnetic shielding which allow the

crystal to be put in (and out of) the experimental chamber Apertures also

allow line-of-sight access to this region of the gas dosing jet mass spectromshy

eter and allow the crystal to be viewed

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics

The electron gun provides the incident focused electron beam used

in all the surface probing techniques Figures 22 and 23 show a schematic

drawing of the electron gun and a photograph of the gun assembled and disshy

dOf d f dOd b P 0 69assembled h a mo 1 1e verS10n 0 a gun eS1gne y er1aT e gun 1S The

comporients of the gun are a thermal cathode or source of electrons three

electrodes and four deflection plates The cathode is a Philips Metalonics

Type M barium calcium aluminate impregnated tungsten emitter The cathode was

0generally operated at 875 C with the heating accomplished indirectly with a

tungsten filament behind the heater The electrons emitted are focused into

a beam by two lenses the crossover formed by the lens action of the control

grid and first anode is focused onto the target by a second lens formed by the

first anode and second anode The incident primary beam thus formed can be

deflected along two axes in the target face by means of deflection plates

located at the entrance to the drift tube

The guns electronic circuitry is shown in Figure 24 Three 6 V

lead storage batteries in series power the cathode heater through an integrated

circuit voltage regulator The gun electrodes are biased using a resistor

chain voltage divider circuit This arrangement scales the guns lenses thus

keeping the beam focused as the primary beam energy is changed by varying the

26

Heat Shield

Cathode Heater

Cathode

Control Grid

First Anode

Second Anode

Coaxial Cathode Heater Feed through

~~f-------+-+-~ Paraxial Ray Aperture

---J7j7j--shy -~f-~ Accelerating ~~pt=-=a~~ or Decelerating

Lens Region

Deflection Plates

SP-1Oeuro7

Figure 22 Schematic diagram of electron gun

I)

-J

Figure 23 Photograph of electron gun assembled and disassembled

~ ~1 ~

h

I __-t--------+--

Defl + ---t---------

i---VV----110K I10K 93K

Supply

BHK 2000

I

Dec Mode

Ace 15K Mode

10K I 15K

l8V Leod

Gun X Deflection Plates (Y Defl Plates Rotate 90 not shown)

Storage Batteries

tv 00

Acc Mode Connections

To First Anode

To Second Anode X Defl shy

X

To Gun Deflection

Plates 10K 10K 57K 15K55K

1-_________----1+I Electron Gun

sp- 1125

Figure 24 Diagram of the electron guns biasing circuitry

29

gun power supply a Kepco BHK-2000 supply The gun can be operated in two

modes In the accelerating mode (ace mode) the second anode is biased more

positive than the first anode With this biasing the gun has been operated

from 30 V to 1825 V primary energy In the decelerating mode (dec mode) the

first anode is biased more positive than the second anode This allows for

higher field gradients at the cathode surface resulting in higher currents at

lower energies In the dec mode the gun can be operated from 10 V to 200 V

A spatial profile of the primary beam was taken using a two grid

retarding field analyzer mounted on the target manipulator at the position of

the target Electrode bias settings that optimized the beam line shape were

determined over the guns energy range These results are summarized in

Figure 25 The spatial full width at half maximum of the spot intensity is

less than 025 mm at 1825 V less than 075 mm at 100 V (dec mode) and about

25 mm at 10 V The energy width of the primary beam can be estimated by

retarding the primary beam between the drift tube and target At E = 100 eVpr1

the current to the target goes from 90 maximum to 10 maximum over a retarding

voltage of ~V $ 0360 meV This is an upper estimate on the energy spread in

the primary beam A lower limit would be the thermal spread of the cathode

~ 2kT or about 200 meV

24 Energy Spectrometer

A schematic diagram of the spectrometer used in this research to

energy analyze electrons and ions is given in Figure 26 The spectrometers

operation can be summarized as follows Electrons and ions originating at

the target with some energy distribution are accelerated or decelerated to the

Dec Mode --1r+shy

Probe Aperture Diameter

+10

E~

~ ~ 10Decelerating Lens Dec Mode aJLL- c E 0- E ~ ~ -051=-- Accelerating Lens Acc Mode Q)O - a WU)

o 200 600 1000 1400

E ~Ugt o Q)()cme=)

Q)

cO ~ e+- (+-Clo OQ)Q)loc

-lolo Wllaquo

u-

Electron Beam Energy Epri (eV) w o

Epri= 10eV Electron Beam Spatial Profiles Epri =1745 eV Epri =100eVf Epd=1000 eV Ace ModeAce Mode Aee Mode

-05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 Probe Aperture Position (mm)

SP-1084

Figure 25 Spatial characteristics of primary electron beam Top panel - Full width at half maximum of beam as a function of primary energy Bottom panel - Line shape of beam at several primary energies

-10 0

31

Cylindrical Electrostatic Analyzer

Spherical Elect rostat ic Analyzer

~____- __Gylindrical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

Coaxial Repulsion Cylinder

--__-___Spherical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

~-- Electron Gun

Deflection Plates

-Gun Wiring

Concentric ~--- Deflection

Spheres

~-- LEED Screen

Scattered Electrons SP-l066

and Desorbed Ions

Figure 26 Schematic diagram of energy spectrometer

32

pass energy of the spectrometer by three spherical sector grids prior to

entering the spherical analyzer section of the instrument (An annular slot

cut in the LEED screen which is located between the grids and the spherical

analyzer allows particles to pass into the analyzer) Energy selection is

accomplished by a combination of two electrostatic deflection analyzers The

first is a high resolution spherical deflection analyzer This is backed by

a cylindrical mirror-type electrostatic analyzer referred to in this work as

the cylindrical or tandem analyzer Particles that pass through the spectromshy

eter impinge on the first dynode of a high gain electron multiplier The

output signal of this multiplier is detected using the electronics discussed

in Section 25

The spectrometer is constructed mainly of 304 stainless steel which

has been hydrogen and vacuum fired to reduce residual magnetism to less than

5 milliGauss Most interior surfaces have been rhodium plated to eliminate

surface charging problems Final design dimensions used in the spectrometer

are listed in Table 21 Refer to Figure 27 for a diagram of the variables

used in this table

The emission angle at the ta~get of the central trajectory that

passes 1nto t he spectrometer 1S 350 bull The entrance aperture (slot) accepts

particles that originate within plusmn0045 radians of this central ray making a

total solid angle accepted of 032 steradians

The spherical electrostatic deflection analyzer section is a

70spherical velocity selector of the type first investigated by Purcell The

analyzer is designed to focus an object spot of electrons or ions originating

at the front surface plane of the target onto the first energy resolution

33

TABLE 21 FINAL DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR SPECTROMETER

SPHERICAL ANALYZER

l Inner sphere radius 342 cmr l

2 Outer sphere radius r 419 cm2

3 Radius of central ray a = 381 cm

04 Emission angle of central ray e = 35

05 Angular range of accepted rays 3244

0 - 3756

6 Angle subtended between entrance and exit planes of spherical analyzer section ~ = 51660

7 Acceptance solid angle of spectrometer 032 steradians

8 Diameter of first ERA D 025 cm

9 Distance of target from center of spherical analyzer P 665 cm

10 Distance of first ERA from center of spherical analyzer Q 1328 cm

CYLINDRICAL ANALYZER

11 Distance from first ERA to entrance diaphram S = 330 cm

12 Distance between entrance and exit diaphrams T 399 cm

13 Distance from exit diaphram to second ERA U = 330 cm

14 Inner cylinder radius Rl = 0099 cm

15 Distance from second ERA to electron multiplier V ~ 254 cm

16 Radius of entrance aperture R2 099 cm

17 Radius of repulsion electrode R3 = 330 cm

18 Radius of exit aperture R4 093 cm

19 Width of exit aperture G 037 cm

20 Diameter of second ERA E 044 cm

21 Width of entrance aperture F = 053 cm

34

Plane of First ERA

~

D

Spherical Analyzer

First ERA

I

I1 I~~ f F

S

]R4 II f ~

R3

11 [1

I II

U v~ cT t t

Plane of Plane of First ERA Second ERA

Cylindrical Analyzer

Figure 27 Schematic diagram of particle trajectories in spherical analyzer section Spatial configuration of tandem cylindrical analyzer section also shown

35

aperture or image plane The spatial configuration of the analyzer is such

as to give maximum reduced dispersibn according to the relations derived by

Purcell The magnification of the source at maximum reduced dispersion is 2

Diaphrams at the entrance and exit apertures of the spherical analyzer are

designed to minimize problems caused by the fringing fields as discussed by

71Herzog

Initial tests using only the spherical analyzer indicated electrons

that scattered from the interior surfaces could be passed through the first

energy resolving aperture over a range of analyzer pass energies To eliminate

this erroneOus signal a second low resolution cylindrical mirror-type

72electrostatic analyzer was designed and constructed by P Luscher

Electrons or ions that pass through the first energy resolving

aperture at the correct energy are deflected by the repulsion electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer and pass through the second energy resolving aperture

This signal impinges on the first dynode of the electron multiplier Trajectory

tracing calculations indicated that the cylindrical analyzer would eliminate

the scattered signal if this second analyzer had a full width energy resolution

~EE = 028 where E is the energy of the particle executing the pass pass

correct central trajectory through the spectrometer This is not a stringent

design requirement

The energy resolution of the spectrometer is defined as the ratio

~EEp where ~E is the width of the line shape passed as the spectrometer is

scanned in pass energy for a monochromatic source of particles with energy Ep

For the spectrometer configuration here the energy resolution is determined

by the resolution achieved in the high resolution spherical analyzer section

36

at least down to low pass energies Line shape broadening effects in the

spherical analyzer originate from three sources 1) the finite diameter D

of the first energy resolving aperture 2) the finite radius R of the source

disk and 3) the use of a finite range of emission angles of particles from

the crystal surface which can enter and be passed by the spectrometer This

third source of line broadening results from the spherical analyzer having

imperfect second order focusing at the first energy resolving aperture The

effect on the line shape of the finite range of emission angles goes as the

square of the acceptance half width which in this analyzer is small In

the calculation of energy resolution below the third source of line broadening

will not be considered

A numerical value for the energy resolution for the spectrometer

used in this research can be calctilated To do so it is necessary to derive

an expression for 6EEp in terms of the diameter D and radius R given above

In the calculation below these two sources of line broadening will be

considered independent and the effective line shape and energy resolution

from each will be calculated separately Following an analysis by Purcell an

energy resolution can be expressed in terms of the velocity resolution S bull ~

S is defined by ~

where v is the velocity of a particle which the analyzer passes along the pass

central trajectory when and v is the velocity of a particle withset at Epass ~

slightly different energy E bullbull (For convenience E and v will be ~ pass pass

shortened to Ep and vp in the following discussion Lower case subscripts are

37

used to distinguish this derivation from the defined energy resolution above)

A resolution can be calculated as follows

(22)

Using Equation 21 this becomes

(23)

(24)

If the line shape width ~E is written as

fiE = E - E = (E - E ) + (E - Emn) (25)max max p pm~n ~

then the energy resolution can be expressed as

(26)

D and R can be related to Q and Q bull as shown belowf-I max f-Im~n

Line shape broadening due to the finite diameter D of the first

energy resolving aperture (1st ERA) can be calculated from the velocity

70dispersion given by Purcell

(27)

9 00 ~ (28)

Refer to Figure 27 for a definition of the variables in these equations

38

Assume a current j(a) emanating from the center of the target

along xl with energy distribution

j (e) = 1 (29)

All of this current crosses the plane of the 1st ERA at a position d given by

d = Y2cOS a = 900 acos a (210)

A 1st ERA of diameter D will pass all the current for which Y2 Y2 leading

to the relation for the limiting values of 13

(211)

D bull cos a a lt D cos a (212)2 bull 900 - 2 bull 900

The energy resolution due to a finite 1st ERA is then calculated from Equation

26 to be

~E (~st ERA) = 2 [053D + 053DJ = 02l2D (213) P

For D = 025 cm (010 in) this evaluates to

8E (1st ERA) = 0021 (214)E P

The line shape of the current distribution resulting from the finite 1st ERA

is a unit function for the allowable e values (Equation 214) since all the

current j(S) is passed by the 1st ERA and j(S) is a unit function in S

The above line shape and resolution have been obtained effectively

by varying the energy of the signal current (via Equation 29) rather than

39

using a monochromatic current source and varying the pass energy as initially

used in defining the spectrometer resolution That the results given in

Equation 214 are the same as would be obtained from a more complicated

calculation using a monochromatic current source can be seen by considering a

monochromatic source v == (1 + l)vp and noting that it will be deflected tol

the edge of the 1st ERA by a pass energy Ep

Line shape broadening and an energy resolution due to a finite radius

to the source disk can be determined in a manner analogous to that used above

Consider a point source of particles at the 1st ERA that travel back through

the analyzer Such reverse trajectories would cross the target plane at a

position

(215)

where for these reverse trajectories using Equation 27

Yl = 491 a (216)

p being a variable representing the radius at which these trajectories cross

the plane of the target p is analogous to d in the earlier calculation

Using reciprocity particles emanating from a position on the target at radius

p with a velocity corresponding to S will cross the plane of the 1st ERA at

the axis For a source of radius R the line width is found by using the

arguments leading up to Equation 211 to be

R bull cos e S lt R cos e (217)491 ~ 491

For a spot size 2R == 1 rom (0039 in) the energy resolution due to a finite

source disk is

40

A (source) = 2[017R + 017R] (218)E p

~ (source) 013 for 2R = 1 mm (219)E p

At low primary energies for which the beam spot size is greater than 1 mm

the above broadening and resolution due to spot size are correspondingly larger

The line shape associated with a finite source disk is linearly

proportional to~ The functional dependence of source current on ~ which

essentially determines the line shape due to the finite source is not given

by Equation 29 Rather it can be obtained by assuming uniform emission over

the area of the source knowing that ~ and the radial position at the source

p are linearly related by Equation 216 and using the area relation

(220)

(221)

If the current from the source with velocity (1 + ~)v that passes the 1st ERA p

is designated JI(~) then

(222)

49lmiddotApJ I (~l) 0 2TT cos e ~ 1 (223)

From Equation 223 the line shape of the current due to finite source is seen

to be linearly related to ~

41

The overall resolution of the instrument can be approximated by the

sum of the two resolutions calculated above which is approximately 2

Experimentally the resolution of the spectrometer is measured as the full

width at half maximum (FWHM) of the elastic peak The bottom panel of Figure

28 shows the FWHM of the elastic peak as a function of the spectrometer pass

energy At 90 eV the experimental energy resolution is

bE FWEM 2 (224)Ep = ~ = 90 = 022

which is close to the theoretical calculations

The effective resolution of the spectrometer can be greatly increased

by retarding the beam using the three grids located between the target and

spherical analyzer This can be seen by repeating the calculation of Equation

224 using data from Figure 28 at a lower energy The measured effective

energy resolution of the spectrometer varies between 22 percent and 06

percent as the elastic peak is retarded by 10 percent to 90 percent of its

initial value Over this same range the intensity decreases almost 98 percent

Hence increased resolution is obtained at the expense of signal intensity

This is shown in the top panel of Figure 28 The solid curve in the top panel

is the transmission function of the spectrometer for a primary beam of 100 eV

The transmission function shows the fractional decrease in signal passed by

the spectrometer as a function of pass energy of the spectrometer The data

points were taken by retarding the 100 eV elastic peak between the grids until

it was passed by the spectrometer The transmission function is the ratio of

the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer at E to the peakpass

42

Figure 28 Top panel - Transmission function of spectrometer This function was obtained by retarding the 100 eV elastically scattered electron signal between the spectrometer grids and then measuring the ratio of the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer to the peak signal passed at Epass = E = 100 eV Bottom panel - Full width at half maX1mum of ~K~ elastically scattered electron signal passed by the spectrometer when the 100 eV signalis retarded using the grids to an energy E

pass

43

09

08

07

c006 U ()

E()05 c e 1-04

03

02

01

Epri =100eV

~ -Transmission of Spectrometer

Peak Intensity at Eposs Peak Intensity at Epass 100 eV

--Transmission for flEE Constant

() +shy

o gt-

20

10

Full Width at Half Maximum of Elastic Peak

100 eVEpri =

o~oo 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Spectrometer Pass Energy J Epass (eV) SP-1l22

0

44

signal passed at E = E i = 100 eV The dotted line in Figure 28 pass pr

indicates the transmission function for ~ = constant for a monochromatic

point source Deviations from the straight line are due 1) to the nonidea1

elastic peak (ie finite breadth) and spectrometer geometry 2) to field

penetration at the grids as a function of the retarding potential (which was

varied to obtain the graph) and 3) to the varying response of the electron

multiplier as a function of the voltage of the electrons incident on the

multiplier For the data presented here electrons were incident on the

multiplier with an energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer The

bottom panel of Figure 28 shows the experimental full width at half maximum

of the elastic peak as a function of pass energy (in this case pass energy =

(100 eV - retarding voltage))

The energy spectrometer has been operated successfully in both the

electron and ion pass modes over a pass energy range from 2 eV to 400 eV

The spectrometer is normally operated at a fixed pass energy and ideally

fixed energy resolution Energy sweeps are made by retardation (acceleration)

of electrons or ions between the first (screen grid) and third (tEED grid)

grids prior to entering the spherical analyzer section of the spectrometer

The third grid which was added primarily to eliminate charging problems

associated with the LEED screen (see Section 26) also improved the effective

resolution this improvement is due to decreased field penetration of the

applied retarding (accelerating) potential since the retarding (accelerating)

can be done over a 50 percent longer distance In addition the third grid is

made of smaller mesh which also reduces field penetration

45

The spectrometer is supported vertically from the electrical feedshy

through turret as shown in Figure 29 This assembly attaches at the top of

the main vacuum chamber (see Figure 21) and can be removed completely wired

independent of other parts of the instrument

The electron multiplier is an EMI model 96434B detector with 17

BeCu venetial blind dynode stages

25 Spectrometer Electronics

Figure 210 shows a schematic diagram of the electronic circuitry

used for taking electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated

desorption and Auger electron spectroscopy measurements Some details for

example capacitors used to eliminate noise and some switches used to change

from one mode to another are not shown Only the most common biasing

arrangement used in this work will be discussed

In the electron pass mode (including Auger measurements) the LEED

grid LEED screen Herzog diaphrams driftspace and center electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer are grounded Energy sweeps of the spectrometer are made

by varying the retardation or acceleration voltage applied between the three

73grids A variable frequency variable height floating sawtooth generator

plus a variable dc offset bias are summed at the inverting input of a Kepco

OPS-2000 operational power supply the output of which biases the three grids

through a resistor chain When the output signal from the multiplier is being

detected using a phase sensitive detector a 3 kHz sinusoidal signal is also

fed into the summing junction VT the target bias with respect to the screen

grid is zero in the electron pass mode The spherical analyzer deflecting

46

Figure 29 Photograph showing support of spectrometer from electrical feedthrough turret

W(100) Crystal

lOOK

Vr=O-6V

Dec Mode

Ace Mode (E Il

VOFFS

VOFFS=O-6V

Ratemeter ~

INlOO

=

Drift Space

epUISion Electrode

i -----In

(Ion Mode Only)

Jshy-l

Hamner N-780A Ortec 410 Linear Amp

Pulse Count Mode

Synchronous Detection Mode

PAR PAR Type A HR-8 Preamp

47K To Recorder Y

SP-1126

Figure 210 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer electronics for operation in the electron pass and ion pass modes

48

electrodes and the repulsion electrode of the cylindrical analyzer are scaled

using a resistor chain powered by a second OPS-2000 operational amplifier power

supply The voltage scaling for these electrodes was determined from particle

trajectory calculations The voltage applied to the repulsion electrode using

this resistor chain can be varied using a potentiometer this adjustment can

in effect vary the resolution of the cylindrical analyzer The OPS-2000

supply also biases the outer electrodes of the analyzer deflection plates by

means of a separate resistor chain The inner electrodes of these deflection

plates are fixed at the potential of the analyzers Herzog diaphrams The

ripple voltage on the output of both operational power supplies is less than

20 meV at 100 eV

Electrons impinge on the first dynode of the multiplier with an

energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer plus a voltage equal to

(R (36MO + R raquoV where R is shown in Figure 210 and V is the voltagem m M m M

across the multiplier In the synchronous detection mode V was variedM

between 1100 V and 1700 V In the pulse counting mode the voltage was normally

set at 2800 V The output of the multiplier after being passed by an

isolation capacitor is either pulse counted with a ratemeter or is detected

using a PAR HR-8 phase sensitive detector The reference signal for the HR-8

is either 3 kHz when taking dN(E)dE distributions (see Section 324 and

2Appendix B) or Auger data or 6 kHz when taking d N(E)dE distributions

When the spectrometer is operated in the ion pass mode the polarity

of the biasing on the analyzer deflecting electrodes is switched In addition

the positive pole of the electron mUltiplier supply is grounded This biasing

arrangement causes the ions to impinge on the multiplier at an energy

49

E pass + VM

which was usually 3040 kV In the ion pass mode the spectromshy

eter is generally operated at E = 40 eV This requires an acceleration of pass

the ions between the screen and LEED grids since the initial ion energies are

between 0 eV and 10 eV In addition to accelerating between the grids the

ions were normally accelerated between the target and screen grid using VT

in order to facilitate interpretation of the data as discussed in Section

325

The electronic circuitry for operating the analyzer in the time-ofshy

flight mode is identical to that just described for the ~on pass mode except

a pulsed voltage is applied to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a

schematic of this arrangement Unlike continuous operation in this mode ions

can enter the analyzer only during the on pulse In the lower part of

Figure 211 the energy of an ion is shown as a function of its position in the

spectrometer with the pulse on and off

In the work function mode the target is fixed at ground potential

through a picoammeter Retardation of the incident current is accomplished by

driving the drift tube positive in voltage

26 LEED Display System

The low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system consists of a

phosphor-coated screen located at the entrance to the spherical analyzer and

othree grids The screen a 1096 stainless steel sector (of which approxishy

omatelya 98 sector is visible) was coated with a P-l phosphor The first

two grids are constructed of 50 mesh rhodium-coated stainless steel The

LEED screen and these two grids are operated as a standard two grid LEED

50

II

Vr V

Ion Trajectory

ACC

Linear Amp Preamp

To Oscilloscope Trace

VRG~+ To O~oopeP I If Trace and Time u se t Base Trigger Genera or -

(l)~ os

CIgt () o cC u (l) E t gt - C N a (l) (l) (u~CIgt (l) 0 ~ shy - c 0 c 0 0 ti (l) ac o c

()

f- (j) a (j)lt f-lt u ~----~~------~~ ~I

0 1--A I ----5----------------

ElON I

VACC

I (l) ()

5 Q

gt CIgt t c

~---J8w c o H

SP-I027

EPAS S + V L-____________________---- M

Figure 211 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer for operation in the time-of-f1ight mode

51

system with the retarding grid biased to pass only electrons elastically

scattered from the target and with the LEED screen accelerating voltage

normally set at 5000 V Slots cut through the screen allow electrons and

ions to pass into the spectrometer Initial operation of the instrument

indicated that charging of the LEED screen caused a significant perturbation

on electron trajectories below 100 eV The third grid a 100 mesh stainless

s tee 1 spherical sector is loca ted 0050 em in front of the LEED screen to

alleviate this problem

An aluminum-coated glass plate mirror located below the spectrometer

reflects the LEED screen through a 6Lch indo in the chamber wall (see

Figure 21) LEED spot intensities are measured through this window using a

Gamma Scientific Model 2000 telephotometer

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly

The crystal manipulator assembly is shown schematically in Figure

212 and a photograph is given in Figure 213 The assembly is designed to

provide thermal and electrical control of the target while allowing the

target face to be rotatable between the gas dosing port the LEED screenshy

energy spectrometer position and the quadrupole mass spectrometer This

rotation is indicated in Figure 214 The manipulator assembly is composed

of a commercial Physical Electronics specimen manipulator a long shaft which

supports the rotary electrical connections a liquid nitrogen dewaI and

aluminum foil strap to provide target cooling and a target mounting assembly

The long shaft of the manipulator assembly is constructed of

different materials as follows A1 0 for electrical isolation (Figure 2122 3

52

Figure 212 Schematic diagram of the target manipulation and thermal control system showing (1) kovar-glass-kovar dewar insulation (2) Miniconflat flanges (3) Physical Electronics Industries specimen manipulator Model 10-501M mounted on 8 inch od Conflat flange (4) six 5 kV - 150 A electrical feedthroughs (5) clamp assembly (6) A1 03 rod (7) molybdenum spring2(8) stainless steel electr1cal connectors (9) electrical connecshytion (1 shown) (10) A1203 spacers (11) Pyrex plates (12) molybshydenum (13) 001 wall stainless tube (14) Pyrex tubes (15) tantalum rods (16) copper rod (17) vacuum chamber wall (18) liquid riitrogen dewar (19) 001 wall stainless tube (20) copper radiation shield (21) strap-to-dewar clamp (22) crystal support (23) 12 pole heater (24) strap-to-copper rod clamp (25) aluminum foil strap (26) pancake heater supp~rt~ (27) thermocouple (28) crystal (29) pancake heater (30) tanta~ lum section (31) molybdenum section (32) molybdenum-to-copper rod clamp assembly

53

Jl ~

Figure 213 Photograph of crystal manipulator The retarding field analyzer used to characterize the primary electron beam is shown mounted on the manipulator in place of the tungsten crystal mounting assembly

55

Magnetic Shielding

Tungsten Crystal

Energy Spectrometer and LEED Gas Dosing Optics Aperture

To Gas Bottle

Line -of-Sight Quadrupole Mass Crystal Holder Spectrometer and Manipulator

SP-1072

Figure 214 Schematic of the experimental chamber of the apparatus (see Section 22 for a discussion of the experimental chamber) Rotation of the crystal is indicated by the dotted line

56

no 6) molybdenum rod (no 12) 304 stainless steel tubing for thermal

isolation (no 13) and copper rod (no 16) Six electrical leads separated

by glass discs (no 11) wind around the shaft ~his configuration allows for

rotary motion of the shaft while still providing electrical control at the

targetJ The electrical leads then enter glass tubing parallel to the shaft

and end up at the target mounting assembly For clarity only one of these

leads is shown in Figure 212

An aluminum foil strap (no 25) made of 150 pieces of 254 cm x ~254

em x 00025 cm foil connects the liquid nitorgen reservoir to the copper rod

end of the manipulator shaft This provides conduction cooling to the target

A copper radiation shield (no 20) is constructed around the strap This

cooling system is sufficient to cool the target from flash temperatures to

approximately -1500

C in 5 minutes

The tungsten single crystal target is supported 095 cm above a

tantalum and molybdenum right angle mount (nos 30 31) on one 0038 cm

diameter tungsten wire The wire was spot-welded to the back face of the

tungsten disc prior to its final electropolishing The target is heated by

electron bombardment of its back face from a tungsten pancake heater (no 29)

The target can also be heated by conduction through its support wire using a

25 watt 12 pole 25L6 RCA heater which is mounted inside the tantalum part

of the right angle mount as shown dotted in Figure 212 (no 23) Using this

heater the target temperature can be varied between -20oC and -150

0 C Tungsten

and tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple leads 0076 cm in diameter are spot-

welded to the side of the target The thermocouple wires are each supported

by being fed along the axis of a tungsten wire helix (not shown in Figure

57

212) The helices are made of 025 cm diameter wire and are spot-welded to

supports near the center of the molybdenum part of the right angle mount

Calibration of the thermocouple was made out of the vacuum chamber using a

copper-constantan reference thermocouple The calibration procedure is

described in Appendix A and the calibration is given in Figure A1

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures

The experimental sample is a single crystal tungsten disc cut from

a (100) oriented tungsten rod using a diamond impregnated stainless wire in a

string saw The tungsten rod supplied by Metals Research Ltd was taken

from the purest 75 cm of a triply zone refined 25 cm length

Both the front and back surfaces of the disc were polished using in

succession 15 micron 3 micron and 1 micron alumina After being mechanishy

cally polished the crystal was e1ectropo1ished using a 1 NaOH solution The

final dimensions of the target disc are 0033 cm (013 in) thick and approxishy

mate1y 080 cm in diameter

After the final e1ectropo1ish the orientation of both the front and

back surfaces was checked using an x-ray diffractometer and was determined to

be within 0100 of the (100) face A back reflection Laue picture of the final

surface showed sharp well-defined beams indicating a high degree of crystalshy

line order

The target was o 74cleaned initially by heating to at least 2200 K in

a -61x10 Torr oxygen atmosphere for 9 hr to remove carbon The choice of

temperature and time were somewhat arbitrary as there is considerable debate

in the literature as to the proper method for cleaning tungsten for surface

58

research 74 A standard method7 1823 has been to heat the target to some

temperature above 11000 K (commonly above 20000 K) in an oxygen environment for

times varying up to 200 hr or more This process is generally followed by a

high temperature degassing in ultrahigh vacuum However there is evidence

othat if the temperature is held above 2000 K bulk carbon will not diffuse to

75 74the surface The possibility of thermal etching must also be considered

For the tungsten used in this research the amount of contamination

on the surface was determined using Auger spectroscopy Figure 215 is an

Auger spectrum taken from a dirty surface showing the Auger peaks resolved in

our system Carbon oxygen and tungsten peaks are seen clearly Also shown

76in Figure 215 are theoretical Auger transition energies for C 0 and W

with the relative theoretical strengths of the transitions indicated by the

normalized height of the lines In Figure 216 are shown Auger spectra taken

after different crystal treatments or under different experimental conditions

Curve a shows the spectrum taken after saturating the surface with CO Note

the carbon and oxygen peaks There is no measurable carbon peak after a

flash as seen in curve b Structure does remain between 475 eV and 525 eV

It is doubtful that this structure is a result of oxygen contamination since

there are normally three oxygen Auger peaks with the 490 eV oxygen peak

stronger than the 475 eV oxygen peak in this spectrum no 490 eV peak is

observed In order to reduce any oxygen contamination the target was heat

0 treated to 2200 K in a hydrogen atmosphere of 5x10- 7 Torr for 4 minutes 74

The structure above 475 eV is seen to remain unchanged as seen in curve c

This is a further indication that this structure is not oxygen Curve d shows

that sitting in a 400 eV 4 ~ primary beam close to typical operating

59

Carbon Oxygen

o 100

dN(E) dE

200 300 400 500 600 Electron Energy (eV) SP-U44

Figure 215 Auger electron spectrums obtained at different instrument sensitivities from dirty tungsten crystal Also shown in upper part of figure are theoretical Auger transitions for tungsten carbon and oxygen calculated by Coghlan and C1ausing76 Heights of the lines represent relative theoshyretical strengths of the transitions

60

(a) CO Monolayer

~5Ab) Heate~toCleon x25

d ~5dN(E) dE (e) Heat Treated

x25 in H2

_~5 ~ (d) 400V4fLA

x25 Primary Beam for

25~

d x5

(e) 1700V 211-A Primary Beam for 10 Min

200 300 400 500 Electron Energy (eV) SP-1l45

Figure 216 Comparison of Auger electron spectrums taken over the energy range 200 eV to 550 eV under different experimental condition

61

conditions for 25 minutes causes only a slight change in the slope of the

curve at the energy at which the carbon peak occurs (Note that curve d was

taken with a primary beam of 1700 eV after the crystal had been sitting in

the lower energy beam for 25 minutes) The absence of the carbon peak in curve

d means that the crystal surface is not contaminated from the gun while taking

measurements After bombarding the target for 10 minutes with a primary beam

of 1700 eV and 21 ~ typical Auger spectroscopy beam conditions a carbon

peak is observed as shown in curve e Using the peak to peak height of the

272 ~V carbon peak obtained near CO saturation as an indication of carbon

monolayer coverage the electron gun in the Auger mode is seen to deposit

approximately 013 monolayer of carbon in 10 minutes

From the above results it is concluded that the tungsten surface

could be flashed clean and that no carbon or oxygen contamination is deposited

during most experimental measurements Some carbon is deposited when operating

in the Auger mode Two unexpected small peaks are observed between 475 eV

and 525 eV Identification of the source of this weak structure could not be

made with certainty although two possible causes are worth noting The

unexpected structure could be tungsten Auger transitions Theoretically

several relatively strong tungsten peaks have been predicted at 477 eV and

486 eV and also between 510 eV and 520 eV However no observations of

tungsten transitions in this energy range have been reported in the experimenshy

tal literature A second possible source of this structure mighL be chromium

There is considerable chromium in the spectrometers stainless steel parts and

chromium Auger peaks occur at 489 eV and 529 eV However if it is assumed

that Auger spectroscopy is sensitive to one percent of a monolayer it would

62

13 2require surface coverages of 10 chromium atomscm or more to yield these

peaks It is extremely unlikely that either 1) a concentration of chromium

this large could diffuse to the tungsten surface from the stainless parts or

2) enough chromium could be sputtered (at the ambient pressure) into the backshy

ground from the stainless parts and subsequently adsorb onto the surface A

spark vaporization mass spectroscopy analysis of a tungsten sample cut from

the same boule as the tungsten used in this research revealed no chromium

thus eliminating the possibility of a bulk chromium concentration in the

crystal Hence although the weak structure corresponds to some degree to

chromium Auger lines it is believed that the crystal is not contaminated with

this element In an Auger spectrum taken between 500 eV and 900 eV (not shown)

some additional very weak structure was seen but none of it could be

attributed to any specific element

o 77In this research the crystal was always flashed to gt 2200 K for 30

seconds prior to experimentation Any reference to a clean tungsten surface

means that this procedure has been followed

The crystal surface exhibited what appeared to be furrows which

increased in density during the course of the research Because the coolest

part of the crystal during a flash that region next to the tungsten wire

support remained visibly polished and flat it is believed that the uneven

appearance was temperature related

29 Gas Handling System

The gas handling system used to obtain adsorption overlayers is

shown in Figure 217 Research grade hydrogen (impurity level less than 2

To Quadrupole Moss Spectrometer

Alternate Gas Source Control Valve

Thermocouple Gouge

Plenum

~-----Viewing Port

Jet Position Adjustment

Ion Gouge

Cryosorb Pump

0 t)

S-1l28

Figure 217 Schematic drawing of gas handling system

64

ppm) is admitted from a glass flash into a pyrex manifold and stainless steel

reservoir Reservoir pressure was kept near 50 microns as read using a

thermocouple gauge From the reservoir hydrogen is admitted into the vacuum

system through a 126 cm diameter tube by opening valve A Figure 217 or is

admitted as a gas jet by opening valve B The jet is formed as hydrogen

effuses through a small orifice at the end of a 063 cm dia tube78J~9 Leaking

hydrogen through the 126 em diameter tube increases the background and is used

when hydrogen is to be adsorbed from the background The jet can be used

with the target rotated in front of the gas dosing port for rapid over layer

adsorption with a low hydrogen background pressure The gas jet is designed

so that only that fraction of the effusing gas which will strike the target is

allowed to pass through an aperture in a skimmer The rest of the gas jet is

reflected back from the skimmer and out of the experimental chamber When the

target is rotated up to face the spectrometer the gas jet if left on passes

out of the experimental chamber through holes in the opposite side of the

magnetic shielding

The gas manifold and reservoir can be pumped down to less than 1

micron using a liquid nitrogen cryosorb pump

210 Mass Spectrometer

A quadrupole mass spectrometer Varian Residual Gas Analyzer Model

974-0003 is mounted on a vacuum chamber port opposite the gas jet port In

this research it was used for vacuum chamber leak testing and determination of

the components of the background pressure

65

CHAPrER 3

EXPERIMENTAL PFGCEDURE AND RESULTS

31 Introduction

The experimental data taken on the hydrogen-W(lOO) system are

presented in this chapter The apparatus used in obtaining the data has been

discussed previously in Chapter 2 A further explanation of experimental

procedures used in measuring parameters follows in Section 32 The experishy

mental results are presented in the remaining sections of this chapter A

general discussion of the data is given in Chapter 4 and a summary of the

research is given in Chapter 5

32 Experimental Procedure

321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements

Contact potential measurements in this case the difference between

the work functions of the target and of the cathode in the electron gun are

43 44measured using a retarding potential techn1que The primary or incident

electron beam current is retarded between the electron gun drift tube and the

target The measured current to the target goes to zero at a retarding voltage

VR

given by

V = (rn + V - rn ) + E (31)R Tcath sc TW pr1

where Cfgtcath is the cathode work function CfgtW is the W(lOO) work function Vsc

is the potential due to space charge immediately in front of the cathode and

E is the applied potential between the cathode and the drift tube Changespr1

66

in the work function of the target ~ are calculated by measuring changes

in VR

LlVR

From Equation 3la change in V is found to equalR

(32)

with the assumptions of constant rn h V and E The assumptions usedTcat sc pr1

are reasonable since the cathode in thermal equilibrium and since it

is exposed to very small changes in the ambient during the measurements The

applied potential E i can be maintained constant pr

A typical retarding potential curve is given in Figure 31 The

electron current to the target the ordinate in this figure is given by

(33)

where I i is the current incident on the target from the electron gun and pr

I (E N) the secondary current represents the electron current leavingsec pri

the target surface This secondary current is a function of both primary

47electron energy and hydrogen coverage Because of the dependence on coverage

the intensity and line shape of the retarding potential curves change somewhat

upon adsorption

In determining LlVR

or equivalently the target work function change

a retarding potential curve taken from the clean tungsten surface and a curve

taken after hydrogen adsorption are normalized at a position on the curve where

the target current begins to falloff sharply (position A in Figure 31) The

work function change is then measured as the voltage difference between the

two curves at half the normalized height

Changes in the work function of 001 eV can be resolved The

10

(J)

c I

I

AE lt( l-~ c Q)

-

05 U ~ I I ~ Q) 0) shy0 I-

omiddot ~ middot 10 20 30

Cathode Potential-Target Potential (volts)

SP-1142 Figure 31 Retarding potential curve showing the current to the target as

a function of the difference in applied potential between the electron gun cathode and the target The curve is shifted in energy with changes in hydrogen coverage due to changes in the target work function 6~ 6~ is measured as the difference between two retarding curves at the height A2

68

measurement was sensitive to target rotation position because of the retarding

field in the target region However with the target positioning stop used

the retarding potential curve could be repeated with an accuracy better than

002 eV after rotating the target Since the work function change is the

difference between two such curves the error in the measurement is ~004 eV

Changes in hydrogen coverage are monitored by changes in the work

function of the tungst~n tlurface No experimental attempts have been made

to calibrate the measureci ork fUllction change to an absolute change in the

coverage of atomssurface area Such a calibration requires an accurate measure

of system pumping speed or dosing flux However as discussed in Section 34

such a calibration can be made using results from the literature

322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current Measurements

The total electron beam current incident on the target Ipri is

measured by biasing the target at a potential of +45 volts with respect to the

surrounding experimental chamber Tests indicated that the current measured

in this manner is within 3 percent of the total current leaving the electron

gun which is also I The current leaving the gun is measured by summingprJ

electron currents to the target grids LEED screen magnetic shielding

analyzer Herzog diaphrams and front shield plate This current sum measureshy

ment of I was more difficult to make experimentally than biasing the targetprJ

at +45 volts

The primary electron energy E refers to the energy of theprJ

incident electrons referenced to the vacuum level Themiddotpritnarymiddot energy is

measured between the cathode and drift tube of the electron gun A contact

potential correction between the guns cathode and the target of between

69

-17 eV and -22 eV has been applied to the measured primary energy given in

the data This correction is found by using the measured cut off potential VR

and Equation 31 The spread in the correction is a result of th~ change in

space charge and hence change in V which occurs when the potential gradientsc

at the cathode is altered by changing the voltage on the control grid The

control grid voltage determines the potential fields in the region of the

cathode surface and hence affects the emitted current and space charge

323 Target Temperature Measurement

Prior to taking any data the target was cleaned by rapid electron

bombardment heating (flashing) at gt 22000 K for 30 seconds Figure 32 shows

the temperature of the target versus time from end of flash with and without

liquid nitrogen in the dewar Residual heat in the crystal supports due

to previous flashes does affect the temperature versus time curves somewhat

The higher temperature data were normally taken starting 3 to 4 minutes after

flashing at a target temperature of 600 C + lSoC Data taken under these

conditions are sometimes referred to as room terr~erature or higher temperature

data Low temperature data were taken starting 4 to S minutes after flaShing

when the target temperature was less than -l45 0 C

324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements

The electron scattering data consists of the electron signal emanating

from the target in the acceptance solid angle of the spectrometer following

impingement of the primary electron beam on the target An energy distribution

of these electrons is taken by fixing the pass energy of the spectrometer at

E and sweeping a retarding or accelerating voltage between the screen gridpass

and LEED grid as described previously in Section 25 The output current of

70 300~----~----~----~--------------------

200

-u 1000

-~ J

e ltlgt 0 E ~ -ltlgt ~ 0 ~

Liquid Nitrogen in Dewar

-100

-2000~----~----~----~----~----~----~61 2 345

Time from Flash (min) SP-ll40

Figure 32 Temperature of the tungsten crystal versus time elapsed since a crystal flash The upper curve represents the temperature versus time relation when there is no crystal cooling The lower curve shows this relation when there is liquid nitrogen in the cooling dewar

71

the electron multiplier N(E) is pulse counted or as discussed below Cld in

Appendix B synchronously detected

N(E) is proportional to the electron current originating at the

target with energy between E and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance

solid angle of the analyzer This distribution consists of rapidly varying

true secondary and characteristic loss structure interpretable in terms of

transitions and collective oscillations in the target plus a smoothly varying

background In order to separate the structure from the background the energy

distribution is electronically differentiated using a technique proposed by

67Harrls As shown in Appendix B a signal proportional to the first or to

the second derivative of N(E) is obtained by synchronously detecting the

appropriate harmonic of the output of the electron multiplier The relation

between the electron signal N(E) and the synchronously detected signal can

be seen from Equations B4 through B9 In these equations it is assumed a

peaked structure G(E) being inv~stigatedcan be represented by a Gaussian

centered at E with standard deviation o The detected first harmonic of o

N(E) has structure which has a peak-to-peak height proportional to G(E plusmn a)o

The detected second harmonic of N(E) has structure at E proportional to o

G(E ) a2 In addition there is t contribution to the detected signal from o

the background Since the background which can be represented by a polynomial

in energy is slowly varying the higher order terms which remairr in the difshy

feren tiated signals are small

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as

is commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in taking electron

scattering characteristic energy loss measurements

72

325 Ion Measurements

g+ ions desorbed from the crystal following electron impact could

be detected by the spectrometer when operated in the ion pass mode It was

found convenient to operate the instrument at a pass energy of 40 eV in this

mode operation at a lower pass energy while increasing the resolution

decreased the already weak signal intensity Since the ions have between 0 eV

and 10 eV energy when desorbed acceleration between the target and spectromshy

eter was necessary An accelerating voltage V (the output of an OPS-2000 acc

power supply) was applied between the screen grid and the entrance to the

spectrometer In addition a second accelerating voltage V was appliedT

between the target and the screen grid This latter voltage was needed in

order to energetically separate the ion signal which originated at the target

from a background signal produced by 1) ions electron desorbed from the screen

grid andor other surfaces in the experimental chamber and 2) ionization of

the background The ions that passed into the spectrometer were accelerated

into the first dynode of the electron multiplier The output pulses of the

multiplier were amplified and then counted with a ratemeter

Prior to taking ion data the target was flashed and allowed to

cool to the experimental temperature It was then exposed to hydrogen with

the hydrogen coverage being monitored using work function measurements Ion

energy distributions were taken by fixing E and V and sweeping the pass T

accelerating voltage V Desorption curve measurements which are a measureshyacc

ment of the decrease of the ion signal in the electron beam were taken by

fixing V V and E and monitoring the ion signal as a function of acc T pass

time

73

The kinetic energy of the detected ions is equal to the spectrometer

pass energy E minus the acceleration of the ions between the target and pass

spectrometer V + VT

plus a contact potential correction term due to the acc

difference in work functions of the clean target and surfaces of the spectromshy

eter The pass and acceleration energies are chosen for each experiment The

contact potential difference between the tungsten target and the rhodium

coated stainless steel surfaces of the spectrometer is less than 015 eV

This was determined using a retarding potential measurement between the

target and screen grid Dosing the target with hydrogen did not change the

work function of the grid Hence it is assumed that 015 eV can be used for

the correction at all target hydrogen coverages Since this correction is

on the order of the error in the measurement it has not been made in the

data

The analyzer is operated in a time-of-f1ight mode by applying a

pulsed voltage to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a schematic of this

arrangement Incident ions can enter the analyzer only during the pulse By

measuring the path length d = ab (see Figure 211) from the retarding grid

to the electron multiplier knowing the pass energy E of the spectromshypass

eter and experimentally measuring the time for the entering species to

traverse the distance d the mass of singly-charged ions passing through the

analyzer can be calculated using the following formulation of the distance

equals velocity times time equation

m _ dxrt J 2 (34)La J2E(X~

74

The flight time is measured by making a trace on an oscilloscope of both the

pulse applied to the retarding grid that allows ions to pass into the specshy

trometer and also the output pulses of the linear amplifier The flight time

t is the time difference between these two signals minus the transmission

time of the pulse from the first dynode of the electron multiplier to the

oscilloscope This transmission time is estimated to be several hundred

nanoseconds

The data taken in this research is presented in the remaining

sections of this chapter

33 Ion Species Identification

The ion species desorbed from the tungsten crystal by electron imshy

pact are identified using a time-of-flight technique as described above For

these measurements the spectrometer was set to pass 40 eV ions A total

acceleration voltage V + V of 370 eV was applied between the crystalT acc

and the entrance to the spectrometer Hence the energy of the ions origishy

nating at the crystal surface and passed by the spectrometer was 3 eV (3 eV

corresponds to the maximum in intensity of the ion energy dist~ibution given

in Section 35) Figure 33 shows an oscilloscope trace obtained when opershy

ating in the time-of-flight mode The trace was taken by applying a 22 ~sec

4pulse to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl0 pulsessec) This is the

large pulse at the left in the figure Several output pulses from the linear

amplifier can be seen approximately 4~sec after the retarding grid pulse

These are pulses that have been produced by the electron multiplier following

ion impingement onto the first dynode Taking into consideration the transshy

mission time the experimental flight time is 37~sec Using Equation 34

75

ill22fLsec Window Amplifier Output Pulses

o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Time (fLsec)

Time of Flight (H+) =J2~m ES 40 eV d=029 m

~ 33 fLsec

Figure 33 Oscilloscope trace showing the pulses observed when operating the spectrometer in the time-of-flight mode The 22 ~sec trace at the left is the analyzer on pulse applied to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl04 pulsessec) During this pulse ions pass into the spectrometer Several output pulses from the linear amplifier resulting from ions striking the electron multiplier can be seen delayed by their flight time in the spectrometer and the pulse transmission time from the multiplier to the oscilloscope The output pulses have been enhanced for reproduction purposes

76

with the analyzer pass energy of 40 eV a path length of 029 m and a time of

37 ~sec the mass of the desorbed ions is calculated to be 14 amu The unshy

certainty in this calculation is estimated to be~05 amu Sources of error

include the estimate of transmission time and the uncertainty in the time difshy

ference read from the oscilloscope trace In adqition over part of the path

length (the region between the retarding and LEED grids and in the cylindrical

analyzer) the ions have less than 40 eV energy Hence from this calculation

alone it is not possible to identify the ions as H+ However in experiments

in which the length of the retarding grid pulse was shortened to~ 1 ~ sec

flight times that differed by gt1 ~sec could be distinguished on the oscilloshy

scope The calculated flight time for ions of mass one is 3 3 ~ sec and for

ions of mass two is 46 ~sec or 13 ~sec longer Thus H+ could be resolved

from Hiions The ions detected in the time-of-flight experiment of Figure 33

+have been identified as H For certain spectrometer biasing conditions

+pulses appear on the oscilloscope 1 5 ~ sec later than the H pulses The ions

causing these pulses have been identified as having mass two

When oxygen is adsorbed on the surface the signal pulses on the osshy

cilloscope occur approximately 135 ~sec after the retarding grid pulse This

is in good agreement with the expected flight time for 0+ ions

+In addition to the H ions observed after adsorbing hydrogen from the

jet H+ ions were unexpectedly desorbed by electron impact from the undosed

tungsten surface upon cooling the crystal to below OoC Possible sources for

the hydrogen desorbed under these conditions are discussed in Chapter 4

If E is set at 40 eV set at 0 eV and V varied above pass VT acc

40 eV no ions originating at the crystal surface can be passed by the spectromshy

77

eter However with these biasing conditions both H+ and H + ions are obshy2

served This ion signal has to originate at the walls of the experimental

+ +chamber from a ESD process andor from the ambient Both the H and H2 sigshy

nals increased when H2 was admitted into the background from the gas handling

system an indication that at least part of the signal origtnates from ionizashy

tion in the background It is not easy to determine the intensity of the

+ +H or H2 desorbed from the chamber walls However it is possible to show that

ionization of ambient H2 could be a serious noise problem The cross section

+ -17 2for electron impact ionization of H2 to H2 is 48xlO cm and of H2

22xlO-17 cm2 for 400 eV electrons 80 An electron current of lxlO-6 A at 400

eV would produce about llxlO3 H2+ ions per cm3-Torr-sec and 5xl012 H + ions

3 per cm -Torr-sec Thus it is reasonable to assume that at the background presshy

sures here a sizable ion Signal is produced although most of it undoubtedly

is not detected In the ESD eXperiments performed here it was desired to

detect only ions produced at the surface of the crystal It has been possible

to bias the spectrometer such that this is the case Almost none of the extra

signal has the correct energy to pass through the spectrometer when V isT

held several volts positive and when V is kept less than E - V bull acc pass T

34 Work Function Results

Work function changes resulting from hydrogen adsorption have been

monitored as a measure of hydrogen coverage Figure 34 shows the tungsten

surface work function change as a function of exposure to hydrogen The crysshy

tal was at 600 C for this experiment To obtain this data the crystal was roshy

tated into the gas jet dosed for a measured time and then rotated back to a

position in front of the spectrometer where a retarding potential curve was

78

Figure 34 Change in work function 6~ of a room temperature tungsten (100) surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption 6~ is plotted versus exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen For comparison the results reported by Madey820 are also shown Exposures for the data taken here have been determined by normalizing the measured adsorption time to Madeys absolute exposure at a work function change ~ of 041 eV

------o 0 Withrow

10

08

gt06 OJ--amplt]04

02

0~013

Madey and Yates

Max bcp=~~

Data Normalized at bcp =041

0

10M 101610~ Exposure (Moleculescm2) SP-1121

80

S o Max ltltgt=09S-~ 6 A Max ltltgt =092 --eshy

lt34 o Adsorption at 60degC A Adsorption at -150degC

2

20 40 60 SO 100 120 140 160 ISO 200 220 Exposure (arbitrary units)

SP-1214

Figure 35 Comparison of work function changes at 600 C and -lSOoC resulting from hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten (100)

OlO~i--~----~--~----~--~----~--~--~~--~~

- W(lOO)gt (J) 008

- shy

-u 006 o o

00 ~ 004 --Sshy

I 002-I shy--S- 0

-200 -100 o 100 200 Temperature (OC) SP-U56

Figure 36 Change in the work function of the undosed tungsten (100) surface versus crystal temperature for the temperature range -150oC to 220oC The ordinate in the graph represents the work function at temperature T measured with respect to the work function at 220degC The data was obtained in three_separate experimental runs indicated by different symbols as discussed in the text

82

taken This procedure was followed repeatedly without closing the jet in order

to assure a constant hydrogen flux (molecm2-sec) from the jet onto the

-8crystal face An incident primary electron current oflt2xlO A at a primary

energy of 100 eV was used The saturation coverage work function change

8tCP ) is 098 + 004 eV For comparison results obtained by Madey and Yates

max

for the work function change resulting from adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO)

are given in Figure 34 Absolute exposures for the data taken here have been

obtained by normalizing the dose time to Madey and Yates exposure at a work

function change of 041 eV Using this normalization good agreement beshy

tween their results and the data obtained here is found

The work function change of the tungsten surface as a function of hyshy

drogen exposure was also measured when the crystal was at -150degC The data are

given in Figure 35 The procedure used in obtaining the 600 c data was fallowed

in taking these data The maximum work function change at this lowtemperature

is 092 + 004 eV

The dependence of the work function on crystal temperature is shown

in Figure 36 The work function is seen to decrease 005 eV as the temperashy

ture is raised from -lSOoC to 220degC The data in this figure were obtained in a

series of retarding potential curve measurements taken at different crystal

temperatures The temperature was varied by radiation heating the ~rystal on

its back face using the pancake heater It was found impossible to take decent

retarding potential curves when the crystal was heated more than about ISOoC

above its initial temperature As the current through the pancake heater was

increased electron emission from this heater also increased This emission

current interfered with the retarding potential measurement when it became a

83

fraction of the incident current The three different symbols in Figure 36

represent data taken when the initial temperature prior to heating was -150oC

work function change has been reported Assuming this result and using the

-1350 C and 50oC The change in work function with temperature was reversible

In this research no attempts have been made to measure absolute covshy

erages Coverages are defined in terms of ~ the measured work function

change As discussed in Section 126 a linear relation between coverage and

8

room temperature data taken here cover~ge and work function can be described

by the expression

e = 102 ~ (35)

where ~ is measured in eVe e represents coverage in fraction of a mon6laye~

15 2 8 A monolayer is assumed to be 2xlO H atomscm Estimates of coverage in this

work will be made by measuring work function changes and using Equation 35

However it should be noted that the data will be presented in terms of the

measured quantity~ and therefore are not dependent on any assumptions

made relating coverage and work function

35 H+ Ion DesoEPtion Measurements

The electron stimulated desorption of H+ ions from the W(lOO) surface

has been studi~d under different experimental conditions Detection of the

ion signal has been discussed in Section 325 The results follow below

351 H+ Ion Energy Distribution

Ions desorbed from a surface by electron impact have a characteristic

distribution in energy This distribution is dependent on the adsorption states

from which the ions originate In the simple models used to describe this

phenomena changes in the observed energy distribution except some intensity

84

changes result from changes in the adsorption states Hence this measurement

can be used to characterize the states from which ions are desorbed A theore~

ieal discussion of the ion energy distribution is given in Appendix C

Figure 37 shows the energy distribution of H+ ions electron desorbed

-6from W(IOO) using a primary beam current of IxlO A at an energy of 400 eV

This current was sufficiently low such that the energy distribution was obtained

without desorbing the hydrogen coverage to any extent The choice of 400 eV for

the primary energy was to some extent arbitrary although it was found that

below 400 eV the ion signal was weaker and the measurements required more time

to take To obtain the data the crystal was flashed and then allowed to cool

several minutes to 60oC It was then dosed with hydrogen from the jet until a

work function change of 018 eV corresponding to a substantial coverage in the

~2 state was measured The distribution was obtained by scanning V while acc

holding V at 4 volts The distribution has an intensity maximum at 3 + 05 eVT

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV No correction to the energy scale

has been made for the target-spectrometer contact potential difference since

this amounts to only 015 eV which is smaller than the accuracy in the meashy

s~remertt A small part of the detected ion signal which did not originate at

the crystal surface has been subtracted out The amount of this contribution

was determined by monitoring the ion signal from the flashed undosed surface

This extra signal amounted to no more than 10 percent of the total signal and

was entirely on the low side of the energy distribution

+For comparison the energy distributions of H ions produced by elecshy

tron impact of gas phase hydrogen81 and hydrogen-covered polycrystalline tungshy

82sten are included in Figure 37 All three curves have been normalized to

the same peak intensity The three curves have characteristically different

85

Figure 37 Energy distribution of H+ ions from a tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen Hydrogen coverage for this measurement corresponds to a work function change of 018 eV (approximately 019 monolaYS2) F~r comparison the energy distribution reported by Nishijima of H ions des orbed from hydrogen covered polyshycrystalline tungsten is given ASIo shown is an ion energy distribution obtained by Hagstrum from gas phase hydrogen The three distributions have been normalized at their peak intensities

-Ugt-

Q)

gtshyc o

H

+ r

86

H+ Ion Energy Distribution

- Withrow H2 W(lOO) -- Nishijima H2 I W (polycrystol) _- HagstrumH2 gas

1 J

ii ~ I I iiI ~ I

iii middot VI 1

I I bull

o 2 468

H+ Ion Energy (eV)

87

distributions in energy

Energy distributiol1s of H+ ions taken at different hydrogen coverages

are shown in Figure 38 Experimental conditions for these measurements were

the same as used to obtain the previous figure There is no change in peak

position or line shape as a function of coverage except for heavy dosings

where the distribution appears to be slightly broader The maximum intensity

is a function of coverage as discussed below

Figure 39 shows a series of ion energy distributions taken after

adsorption from the jet with the target temperature approximately -150o

C For

these data the target was flashed and allowed to cool 5 minutes before

adsorption All other experimental conditions were identical to the correshy

sponding 600

C data The distributions peak at 3 eV (except at high coverage

where the peak appears to be slightly higher) and have full widths at half

maxima of 26 eV identical to the results found for 600 C adsorption The

high energy tail of these low temperature distributions appears to be somewhat

wider than the corresponding higher temperature data however

After flashing the target to 22000 K and allowing it to cool five

ominutes to a temperature of lt-145 C hydrogen ions can be detected without

dosing the surface from the jet An energy distribution for this signal is

shown in Figure 310 A time-of-flight measurement confirmed that the observed

signal is indeed H+ ions The energy distribution peaks at 25 05 eVvith a

full width at half maximum of 58 eV The peak intensity of the ion signal

obtained without dosing depends on the previous history of the sample and on

the experimental parameters as discussed in Section 35~ This intensity

change is indicated by arrows in Figure 310 For this measurement the

88

H+ from H2 W (100) T=600C

Zero Levels

fI)

cshy s gt

~

c-0 ~

0 ~ --0

CIgt

gt-shyc 0

1-1

+J

o 2 4 6

6cent= OSSeV

6cent=06geV

6cent=045eV

6cent=0lSeV

Acent=OlOeV

Acent=003eV

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1l96

Figure 38 Comparison of energy distributions of g+ ions desorbed from a 600 c tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

89

-ffl middotcshy

l

gtshy 0 shy

0 0-0 ltlgt

gt= C 0

H

+I

H+ from H2 W(100) T =-150degC

Zero Levels

Dcp=067 eV

Dcp= 043eV

---_Dcp=Olle~

___

Dcp=017eV

D_cp=004eV

o 246 H+lon Energy (eV)

SP-1197

Figure 39 Comparison of energy distributions of H+ ions desorbed from a low temperature (-lSOOC) tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

90

--(J) H+ from Undosed W(lOO)

T=l50degC

H+ from H2 Dosed W

ot 60degC

-0

-Q)

~l ~ + I O~~~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~ o 2 4 6

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1202

Figure 310 Energy distribution obtained from a flashed but undo sed tungsten (100) surface which has been cooled to -150oC For comparison the energy distribution of a+ ions from the tungsten (100) surface after dosing with hydrogen is shown by the dashed line The two distributions are normalized at their maximum intensities The intensity of the ion signal from the undosed surface changes as a function of sample history as discussed in the text This is indicated by the arrow

I

91

primary energy was 400 eVe A relatively low incident electron current

of lxlO-7 A was used so that the coverage in the surface state being probed

would not be strongly depleted during the measurement This state has a high

desorption cross section as calculated in Chapter 4 and hence depletion is

a possibility It should be noted that the same energy distribution is obshy

tained from the low temperature state using a beam current of 2xlO-6 A The

latter high current measurement reflects the distribution in energy of H+ ions

desorbed from the fast state when its coverage is in equilibriumll as disshy

cussed in Section 352

The intensity of the ion signal desorbed from the surface at both

60 0 C and -1500 C is strongly coverage dependent In Figure 311 is plotted the

intensity of the 3 eV H+ ion signal as a function of work function change upon

adsorption of hydrogen The signals from the 60 0 C and -lSOoC surfaces have

maximum intensities at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV respecshy

tively This difference indicates that adsorption at the low temperature

differs somewhat from that at 600C At higher hydrogen coverages theion

signals decrease to less than 15 of their peak intensities indicating that

the cross section for ion desorption decreases as the ll state fills The

41 reason for this decrease is not well understood although Madey has sug~_

gested that it results from a coverage dependent rate of reneutralization of

the ions produced by the incident beam At near monolayer coverages the 3 eV

ion signal increased somewhat

The data in Figur~ 311 are normalized at the peak intensity The

absolute maximum yields at the two temperatures are the same within 25

Also shown normalized at the peak intensity are Madeys intensity versus

41 coverage data for hydrogen adsorbed on W(lOO) at room temperature The

--

en + ~ H from H2 W (100) J ~ ~ Withrow 60degC ~ 0 Withrow -150degC shye __ -- Madey 22degCA

c

C li)

gtshy 0

c N

o H + I o x ~

cf c

o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Il cp (eV)

Figure 311 Intensity of the 3 eV g+ ion signal from the tungsten (1ampH)-1195 surface as a function of the change in work function resulting from hydrogen adsorption Data for adsorption at 600 C and -l50oC are plotted For comparison the results obtained by Madey4 from a room temperature tungsten (100) surface are included

93

maximum in his ion signal occurs for the same coverage as the maximum in the

room temperature data taken here His results are more sharply peaked howshy

ever This difference may be due to the different conditions under which the

two sets of data were obtained Madeys results represent ions desorbed in a

narrow cone normal to the surface whereas the spectrometer used here collected

only those ions desorbed from the surface at 350 + 2 120 Madey also used a

lower primary energy

352 Desorption Curve Measurements

The H+ ion signal is observed to decrease with time if a primary

electron beam current of sufficient intensity per surface area is used A

theoretical description of this measurement referred to as a desorption

curve is given in Appendix C It can be shown that the expected ion signal

decreases to an equilibrium value The rate of decay of the desorption curve

and the equilibrium value are used to calculate parameters characteristic of

the adsorption state being probed

Figure 312 shows the decay of the 3 eV H+ ion signal from tungsten

(100) initially covered with hydrogen to a work function change of 010 eV

oThe temperature of the crystal for this measurement was 60 C An incident

-6 -3 2current of 5xlO A (a current density of 25xlO Aem) at a primary energy

of 400 eV was used The decrease in ion yield is seen to be quite slow The

equilibrium value shown in this figure iH+ was estimated from the equil

analysis of the data in Chapter 4

+As noted above H ions could be desorbed from a cold but undosed

tungsten (100) surface The desorption curve for this undosed state is shown

in Figure 313 For this data the crystal was flashed and allowed to cool

5 minutes to -150o

C Then the incident electron current was turned on (see

94

I I I t I I I I I H+ from H2 W(l00) Epri =400 eV-(f) Ipri =5 X 10-6 A

a ~rp =010 eV82000r- shy

-(f)

c (l) I- shy iHquil-c

-~1000 shyo

H + I

t I I I I I o 100 200 300 400

Time (sec) SP-1203

Figure 312 Change in the a+ ion current during electron obombardment of a 60 C tungampten (100) surface

Hydrogen was initially adsorbed to a coverage of 010 monolayer

95

200 -()

a ~160 gt

if) -c ~120 c

H c ~ 80

+r 40

H+ Ions fromW(lOO) Epri=400eV

Ipri=lA

Temp =- 1500 C

IH~qUil ------------shy

Figure 313 Change in the a+ ion current during electron bombardment of a flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface cooled to -150oC

140

96

Section 354 for a discussion of how the current was controlled) and the

ion signal decay monitored The signal is seen to undergo a rapid decay It

reaches its equilibrium value in several minutes in sharp contrast with the

desorption curve obtained after hydrogen dosing at room temperature An inshy

-6 -4 2cident current of lxlO A (a current density of 5lxlO Alcm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV was used to take the desorption curve from the undosed cold

surface This current density is only 20 percent of the value used for the

room temperature data of Figure 312 It was found convenient to use this

smaller value since the decay of the ion signal was so rapid Additional

desorption measurements on this fast decaying or fast state are given in

the following two sections

A desorption curve obtained after dosing the cold tungsten (100)

surface with hydrogen is shown in Figure 314 The data were taken using a

-6 -3 2primary current of 3xlO A (a current density of 15xlO Acm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV The surface was dosed to a work function change of 007 eV

Initially there is a rapid decay of the ion signal which is similar to the

desorption curve obtained from the fast state Following this initial decaYt

the signal continues to fall for a time but at a much slower rate of decay

This desorption pattern different than either of the desorption curves given

in Figures 312 or 313 can be described in ter~ of simultaneous desorption

from two adsorption states This is discussed further in Chapter 4

+353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State H Ion Signal

The ion yield from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface

has been studied as a function of temperature These data were obtained by

continuously monitoring both the tungsten temperature and the 3 eV H+ ion

97

-() a u

t gt

800()

c (J) +shy

~600 c o

+ H

400 r

200

o

Figure 314

r-

i-

r-shy

I I I I I I I I I

H+ from H2 W(lOO Epri =400eV

I I I

o 100

Iprl =3xlO-6 A

ilq= O07eV T=-150degC

I 1 I I

T

I

-

-

-

200 300 400 Time (sec)

Change in the H+ ion current during electron bombardment oof a -150 C tungsten (100) surface Hydrogen was

initially adsorbed to a coverage of 007 monolayer

98

signal following a crystal flash The current for this measurement was

-6 -4 2IxlO A (a current density of 5lx10 Aem) The primary energy was 400

eV As can be determined from the previous section this current density was

such that the electron beam caused Significant perturbations on the hydrogen

state during the measurement None the less several conclusions can be inshy

ferred from the intensity versus temperature data presented in Figure 315

The ion signal from the fast hydrogen state is strongly temperature dependent

+ 0The H intensity is seen to increase sharply below approximately -50 C The

results are reversible with temperature the ion signal decreases if the crysshy

tal is heated and the signal returns to its original intensity when the crysshy

tal cools back down

Several mechanisms could be responsible for the appearance of a

H+ ion signal below room temperature For example a temperature dependent

bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen could produce a desorbable hydrogen

state Likewise adsorption from the background rtight pro(luce desorbable H+

only below room temperature In order to better understand the fast state

some additional measurements were made as described in the following section

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State

Additional experiments were performed to further elucidate the nature

of the low temperature fast state Experiments were made to determine the

source of hydrogen which populates this state The effect of co-adsorption

of hydrogen from the jet with this state was probed In addition the possishy

bility that the appearance of the state was related to surface contamination

was investigated Possible correlations between the fast state hydrogen and

the low temperature LEED phenomena described in Section 123 were probed

99

50----~----~----r---_~--_r----_--_

20

-(J)-c

gt l shye ~10 c l shye gt

00 -c Q)-~ 5 c o

H

+ I

2

-150 -100 -50 0 100 150 Temperature (OC)

Figure 315 Intensity of the 3 eV a+ ion signal from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface as a function of tungsten temperature

-200

100

In these measurements it was desired to study the appearance of

+the fast state H ion signal without the complicating effects of simultaneous

significant depletion of this hydrogen state with the primary electron beam

This possibility exists since the cross section for electron sesorption of

the fast state is high as shown in Chapter 4 It was found that a measure

of the change of coverage in the fast state could be obtained in experiments

in which the electron beam was turned off for short times During the time

the gun was off referred to as adsorption times the fast state populated

The increase in the coverage in this state during the adsorption time could be

monitored by taking a desorption curve right after the adsorption time The

change in coverage is assumed proportional to the difference iH+ - iH+ initial equi1

where iH+ is the ion intensity immediately after turning the gun back on initial

and ~+ has been discussed above The difference iH+ - iH+ will equil initial equi1

be referred to as ~iH+(adsorption time) The rate of increase in coverage of

the fast state is assumed proportional to ~~+(adsorption time)adsorption

time

To turn the gun off the control grid was biased 6 volts negative

with respect to the cathode This method of controlling the gun current

kept the cathode temperature constant during the adsorption time while at

the same time no current could reach the crystal The primary beam could be

turned off (or subsequently back on) in fractions of a second No effects on

the observed measurements could be attributed to this biasing procedure

The change in the population of the fast state has been monitored as

a function of the tungsten crystal temperature Figure 316 shows the results

of a series of measurements each done at a different crystal temperature in

101

() --c s gtshy

0 -0

0 100-~ 0shy+Q)

J 50

0 shy

+S a J

-150 -100 -50 a 50 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1215

Figure 316 The quantity igt - i~ measured initial eqpil

from desorption curves from Ehe fast state as a function of crystal temperature

102

which the above procedure has been used with adsorption times of 150 seconds

From the desorption curves taken following the adsorption times the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) has been calculated This quantity is plotted versusH

the crystal temperature in Figure 316 The quantity 6iH+(adsorption time)

ie the fast state signal is small and less than 5 of the maximum signal

owhen the temperature of the tungsten crystal is higher than OOC Below 0 C

the change in population in the fast state during the adsorption time inshy

creases as the temperature decreases This temperature dependence is in

agreement with the the results of Figure 315 which was taken continuously

with a high primary current as the crystal was cooled after a flash Thus the

procedure used to obtain Figure 316 appears reasonable

The rate of population of the fast state can be an indication of the

source of hydrogen as discussed in Chapter 4 The rate of population of this

state has been investigated as a function of adsorption time using the proceshy

dure given above Figure 317 shows a plot of the quantity 6i +(adsorptionH

time) versus adsorption time From the figure it is concluded that the rate

of popUlation is constant in time at least for coverages of the fast state

obtained in 26 minutes

The effect of co-adsorption of hydrogen from the jet on the fast

state has been probed The purpose of these measurements has been to detershy

mine if hydrogen (H2) from the gas dosing system is the source of the fast

state In a series of measurements the cold crystal surface was dosed with

hydrogen and then an ESD ion signal monitored until it reached equilibrium

Following this the fast state was allowed to populate during an adsorption

time of 150 seconds Finally a desorption curve from the co-adsorbed fast

lO3

Growth of H+ Ion Yield with Electron Gun Off T=-150degC--(f) c

s gt 0-0 0-

J 0shy

+0gt r

0 +shy

+pound r

200

100

SP-122J

Figure 317 The quantity igt bull i~ff measured from initial flequil

desorption curves from the fast state as a function of adsorption time Adsorption time is defined in the text

104

state and dosed hydrogen states was taken In Figure 318 the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) calculated from these desorption curves is plotted versusH

work function change due to adsorption from the jet For low doaes of hydroshy

gen (6cplt 010 eV) there is almost no change in the quantity t~+(adsorption

time) ie the rapid decay of the ion signal characteristic of the fast

state is observed However preadsorption of hydrogen from the jet clearly

affects the ion signal from the fast state for 6cplt010 eV The signal is

decreased forhy5irogen coverages in the 13 state in qualitative agreement1

with the data presented in Figure 311

For ~lt 010 eV the change in coverage in the fast state during

adsorption times of 150 seconds is seen to be independent of the amount of

hydrogen in the dosed or 13 2 state This result was used in a series of

experiments in which the rate of population of the fast state was measured

2at different hydrogen background pressures The flux (molecules per cm per

second) of H2 onto the surface from the background is directly proportional

to the partial pressure of hydrogen If H2 is the source of the fast state

changing the background pressure would be expected to have an effect on the

measured change in coverage in the fast state as long as the total adsorption

is lower than about 010 monolayer (which corresponds to a work function

change of 010 eV) For the data in Figure 318 the background pressure of

-11hydrogen was less than 7xlO Torr (the Bayard-Alpert gauge pressure) In

a series of experiments this hydrogen pressure was raised by letting gas in

from the the gas handling system for times ranging from one to two minutes

While the pressure was raised the electron gun was turned off so that simulshy

taneous adsorption into the fast state and the 13 2 state could take place The

105

() --C J

gt 10shy

0 10shy-0 10shy

S

0shy

+lt11 c

2-+~ c

200

100

0

8

DCP(eV) SP-1222

Figure 318 The quantity iHt 1nitial

desorption curves from

- iHplusmn measured from equil

the low temperature hydrogen dosed surface as a function of work function change ~~ ~~ results from hydrogen coverage

o 1 2 3 4 5 6

106

total hydrogen coverage in the Sz state was kept below 10 percent of a monoshy

layer Desorption curves were then taken and the quantity 8iH+(adsorption

time) calculated An interesting result was obtained It was found that the

coverage in the fast state was unrelated to the background pressure of HZ and

hence unrelated to the total impingement of HZ Even though experiments were

made in which the background pressure was varied over two orders of magnitude

the change in coverage in the fast state during equal adsorption times was

always the same Hence it is concluded that the fast state is not populated

by hydrogen added to the background from the gas handling system

It was found however that the fast state signal intensity could be

correlated to a pressure reading under certain experimental conditions

Normally during flashing the crystal manipulator was rotated so that the

tungsten crystal faced away from the entrance to the spectrometer (a rotation

oof 180 from the crystal position shown in Figure Z14) This normal flashing

posi tion is referred to as the down position The crystal could also be

flashed while it was in the IIUp position or facing the s~ectrometer It was

observed that when the crystal was flashed in the up position an increase in

the ion signal from the fast state could be obtained over that measured when

the crystal was flashed in the down position This unexpected result sugshy

gested that the fast state might be correlated to a thermal instrumental

effect Radiation heating from the crystal raised the temperature of the

surrounding experimental chamber surfaces If the crystal is close to the

surfaces during a flash as for example when flashed in the up position the

heating is greater One consequence of greater heating would be an enhanced

thermal desorption from the surfaces and a higher pressure in the experimental

107

chamber Hence the incident flux of gas thermally desorbed from the chamber

surfaces would be increased Unfortunately the best test of this hypothesis

a measurement of the temperature of the surfaces in the experimental chamber

could not be made However an interesting pressure related result could be

obtained when the x-ray current in the Bayard-Alpert gauge (which is equivalent

to approximately 7xlO-11 Torr pressure) was nulled out so that ambient pressure

-12increases at the gauge of as little as 05xlO Torr could be easily detected

It was observed that during a crystal flash when the crystal was in the up

position the gauge pressure showed a maximum pressure burst of approximately

3x10-l0 Torr This was higher than the pressure burst when the crystal was

flashed in the down position a strong indication that some surfaces in the

experimental chamber became hotter during an up flash When the crystal was

flashed in the down position the pressure fell quickly after the flash was

terminated to the nulled or equilibrium level However after a flash in the

up position the pressure fell to a quasi-equilibrium level which was higher

-12than the true equilibrium pressure by as much as 2xlO Torr The quasi-

equilibrium pressure was dependent on the number of prev~ous flashes in the

up position and on how long after flashing the pressure was read Once the

crystal had been flashed in the up position the pressure remained elevated

for several hours slowly decreasing to the equilibrium level It should be

noted that these pressure increases are read outside the experimental chamber

The actual pressure increase in the experimental chamber and hence the inshy

creased gas flux at the crystal surface can only be estimated to be proshy

portional to the gauge pressure

The magnitude of the pressure increases following a flash in the

108

up position was linearly related to both the change in coverage of the fast

state during the adsorption time and to the desorption curve equilibrium level

This can be seen from the data presented in Figure 319 The lower panel shows

the results of a series of measurements in which desorption curves were taken

after letting the fast state populate for adsorption times of 150 seconds

The ordinate in the lower panel is 6ia+ (adsorption1 time) The abscissa in the

figure is the increase in pressure over the equilibrium pressure as a result of

flashes in the up position The change in ion yield is seen to be directly

proportional to the observed pressure increase The top panel shows the equishy

librium ion signal observed for the desorption curves plotted versus the same

pressure increase as the lower panel A direct proportionality between the

equilibrium ion signal and the pressure increase is seen These two linear

results would be expected if the fast state populated as a result of adsorption

from the background This is discussed further in Chapter 4 On the other

hand no dependence of the fast state ion signal on background pressure would

be expected if the source of the hydrogen were bulk to surface diffusion Thus

while there may be hydrogen on the surface which is not desorbed by incident

electrons it can be concluded from this measurement that the fast state is

populated by adsorption from the ambient

A possible explanation for the fast state is suggested by the work

51of Jelend and Menzel They found that co-adsorption of oxygen or CO with

hydrogen leads to the ~ hydrogen state which has similar characteristics as

the fast state observed here The possibility that impurities are on the surshy

face in the temperature range in which the fast state is observed has been inshy

vestigated using Auger electron spectroscopy andel~tTon stimulated desorption in

lO9

Figure 319 Lower panel - The quantity iH+ - ig+ measured from initial eaui1

desorption curves from the fast state as S tunction of gauge pressure change The fast state populated during adsorption times of 150 seconds The pressure change results from flashing the tungsten crystal while it is in the up position Upper panel - Equilibrium ion current iH+ measured from the

-equildesorpt~on curves taken for the data in the lower panel

110

-(J)-C J gt 0 -0 0

100-s

+1)cr

J

C-+ J

0

--(J)

c J 200 gt 0 -0 0-

s +1)

cr J

- 100 I 2

012

Gauge Pressure Change (X10-12 Torr)

111

the time of flight mode In order to test for these elements the flashed

tungsten surface was cooled with the gun turned off allowing the fast state

to populate Total adsorption times of up to 15 minutes were used times in

which a strong fast state signal could be obtained However no carbon or

oxygen Auger peaks were observed and no desorbed oxygen or carbon ions that

could be attributed to the fast state were monitored with ESD Hence any

oxygen or CO present on the surface would have had a coverage below the deshy

tection sensitivity of the techniques used or less than approximately 1 pershy

cent of a monolayer It can be noted here that coverage calculations given in

Chapter 4 indicate the fast state hydrogen coverage is well below 1

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data

The low energy electron diffraction (LEE D) system used here has

been described previously in Section 26 LEED data has been optained using

hydrogen coverage crystal temperature and primary electron energy as

variable parameters as described below

The symmetry of the LEED spot pattern has been noted as a function

of hydrogen coverage at room temperature Results from these observations are

in good agreement with previously reported research (see Section 123) Half

order diffraction spots become visible with initial hydrogen coverage The

intensity of the half order spots maximize at a coverage corresponding to

~~ = 015 eV at a primary energy of 115 eVe Additional adsorption causes

the half order spots to split into four poorly defined spots This pattern

upon further adsorption becomes blurred At full coverage a (lxl) pattern

is observed Figure 320 shows a photograph of the LEED pattern observed

from a clean room temperature tungsten surface and also the c(2x2) LEED patshy

112

W(100)

Clean

T=60degC Epri = 1387eV

(1 xl) Clean (100) Surface

W (100)

Do 4gt =015eV

T =-150degC

Epri =115eV

C (2x2) Hydrogen Overoyer

SP-1200

Figure 320 Photo~raDh of LEED screen showing a clean (lxl) pattern and a c(2x2) pattern Models of possible surface atom configurations for the LEED patterns are also shown

113

tern that occurs with a hydrogen over1ayer in the ~2 state

When the crystal is cooled to below room temperatures half order

spots are visible without any dosing of the crystal from the gas system

Graphs of LEED spot intensity versus primary electron energy called

elastic intensity profiles are shown in Figures 321 322 and 323 for the

(10) (11) and (1212) diffraction beams A normally incident primary

electron beam was used in these measurements Data were taken at two tempera-

o 0tures 60 C and -150 C for both the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorbed on

the surface to a coverage corresponding to a ~~ of 015 eV This coverage corshy

responds to the maximum in intensity for the 115 eV half order beams All obshy

servable equivalent beams show the same line shape and peak positions There

are some intensity differences between equivalent beams probably due to an

uneven phosphor coating of the LEED screen particularly near its edge bull

Small misalignments might also affect the intensities The effect of hydrogen

adsorption on the intensity profiles is seen to be small except above 100 eV

in the (11) beam profile and below 50 eV in the (1212) beam profile Some

small shifts (~ 2 eV) in the energy positions of the peaks are observed as a

function of coverage but not as a function of temperature

The intensities of the (1212) (10) and (11) spots have been

measured as a function of crystal temperature for the clean (flashed) surface

These results are presented in Figures 324 and 325 using a semilogarithmic

scale The data were obtained by continuously monitoring both the tungsten

temperature and the intensity of the beams following a crystal flash Primary

energies of 115 eV for the (1212) beam 1105 eV and 67 eV for the (10)

beam and 113 eV for the (11) beam and currents of 10xlO-6 A were used The

114

- (j) +shyC l

gt 1loshy0 0 loshy+shy0

loshy0

- 0gt

+shy(j)

c Q) +shyC

H

o

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j = 0deg g=(10)

T =60degC Clean

T =-150degC fjcent = 015 eV

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l109

Figure 321 Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degc and -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsoroed in the S2 state

llS

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

U)-C J

1

-~ l0shy

a loshy

0 0l0shya-~-U) 0c OJ

C -H

o

o

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-lloa

8i =0deg g = (1 1)

T = 60degC Clean

T =60degC IJcp = 015 eV

T = -150degC IJcp = 015 eV

Figure 322 Elastic intensity profiles for the (11) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsorbed in the 62 state

116

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j =00

g = (12 12 )

o 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l107

Figure 323 Elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A vJork function change Acp of 015 eV corresponds to hydrocn adsorbed in the 13

2 state

117

100~--~--~----~--~-------~--------

--VI

c s gtshyt shyc -t shycl

010 -

gtshy-VI c Q)

c -I-f

tr c Q)

a

WOOO) 81 =0deg

9 = (ItO) 0-

-0- Epri = 1105 eV --0-- -0shy -0

9 = (ItI)

0 Epri= 113 eV =0shy o 0 0

9 = (ItO) Epri= 67 eV

0

Figure 324 Temperature dependence of (10) and (11) LEED beams from a flashed tungsten (100) surface Primary energies used are indicated on the graph

118

W (100) 9 =(12 t 12)

8j=0deg50

CJ)-

~ 5 o Q)

Q

2

-100 o 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1l55 Figure 325 Temperature dependence of the (1212) LEED

beam from flashed tungsten (100) surface A primary electron energy of 115 eV was used

200

119

intensities of the (10) and (11) beams are seen to increase exponentially

(linearly on the semilogarithmic scale) as the temperature is lowered The

intensity of the (1212) order beam also increases as the temperature is

lowered Down to approximately -750 C the rate of increase with temperature is

ogreater than that for the integral order beams Below -75 C the intensity

changes at about the same rate as the integral order beams The results are

reversible with temperature

In Sections 353 and 354 a hydrogen ion signal has been reported

from the flashed surface LEED measurements have been made to ascertain if

this ion yield from the fast state could be correlated to the intensity of the

LEED spots After flashing the crystal the photometer signal from the

(1212) beam was measured as the crystal cooled to -lS0 0 C Then the incishy

dent electron current was turned off for 300 seconds in order to allow the

fast state to populate When the electron current was turned back on the

photometer signal immediately returned to the same intensity as obtained prior

to turning off the incident current There was no decay in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the desorption curve phenomena seen with

the ion signal The intensity of the photometer signal from the (10) and

(11) beams as well as from the background was monitored ilsing this same

procedure In no case was there any structure observed in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the rapid decay in the fast state ion

yield

37 Electron Scattering Data

The electron signal backscattered from the crystal has been observed

as a function of hydrogen coverage and crystal temperature using synchronous

120

detection of the second harmonic of the energy distribution N(E) as disshy

cussed in Appendix B and in Section 324

Figure 326 shows the characteristic loss structure for electrons

scattered from a clean room temperature tungsten (100) surface and also from

this surface after dosing with hydrogen The abscissa in this figure represhy

sents electron loss energy w where 0 eV s w s 40 eV A primary~nergy of

-6110 eV and a primary current of lxlO A were used to take these data Since

25for tungsten true secondary structure extends out to 60 eV there is no

overlap of secondary and characteristic loss structure down to losses of 50

eV when operating at 110 eV primary energy The data of Figure 326 were taken

in the second derivative mode in order to suppress the background The data

were taken at a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV with a 1 volt peak to peak

oscillation on the retarding potential

Coverage dependent changes in the spectra are seen The peak at

w = 25 eV in the clean spectrum decays as the hydrogen coverage in increased

At the same time the narrow peak at 4 eV becomes broader and a peak grows at

a loss energy of 75 eV The structure at 210 eV in the clean spectrum moves

down in loss energy as hydrogen adsorbs Below w ~ 30 eV very little change

in the spectra as a function of hydrogen coverage is observed

Figure 327 shows characteristic loss structure for electrons

oscattered from a tungsten surface cooled to -150 C The data were taken using

the same electron gun and spectrometer operating conditions as used for the

data of Figure 326 The low temperature clean spectrum is nearly identical

to that obtained at the higher temperature The only change is a slight enshy

hancement of the shoulder at about 45 eV Changes in the clean spectrum with

121

Figure 326 oCharacteristic electron energy loss spectra from a 60 C

tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverages A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modulation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

---

N w -0 shyw-Z

N -0

I

122

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl=110 eV Iprl c5xlO-6 A

T= 60degC Modulation =1 V Peak to Peak

6ltl 080eV

060eV

O 35eV

023eV

014eV

003eV

Clean

o

SP-1219

123

Figure 327 Characteristic electron energy loss spectra from a -lSOoC tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverage A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modushylation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

124

N lJJ 0

~ lJJ Z N 0 I

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl =110 eV Iprl =5x10-6 A T=-150degC Modulation 1 V Peak to Peak

bcent OS6eV

O5geV

O35eV

O25eV

O16eV

O05eV

Cleon

SP-1220

-~--------~- -- -----------

125

hydrogen adsorption are identical to those seen for adsorption at the higher

temperature

Loss spectra were also taken for 0 eV ~ w ~ 10 eV from the flashed

but undosed cold surface after turning off the electron gun for 10 minutes

These measurements were made to see if the fast state hydrogen would affect

the loss measurements No changes in the electron loss spectrum from those

taken immediately after cooling the flashed crystal were found

A discussion of the data presented in this chapter follows in

Chapter 4

126

CHAPTER 4

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

Hydrogen chemisorption on single crystal tungsten (100) has been

probed in this research using complementary surface sensitive techniques

Auger measurements have been given in Section 28 Work function ESD LEED

and electron scattering results have been given in Chapter 3 A discussion

of this data is presented here

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental condition using Auger electron spectroscopy The procedures

used have been previously described with the spectrometer electronics Section

25 The Auger data have been given and discussed in Section 28 A brief

summary of these results follows

Tungsten carbon and oxygen Auger transitions have been observed

using this technique It can be seen from Figure 216 that after flashing the

cryLl to 2200oK no structures attributable to carbon or oxygen Auger elecshy

trons remain in the Auger spectrum The Auger measurement is estimated to

be sensitive to approximately 1 percent coverage Operation of the electron

gun in the high current high voltage Auger mode results in a slow deposition

of carbon from the background Since the Auger mode is used to chemically

characterize the surface the net effect of this beam related contamination

is an overestimation of the carbon impurity concentration at the surface

Some weak structure in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface

occurs between 475 eV and 525 eV No definite conclusions regarding the

127

origin of these peaks can be made The possibility that the structure results

from transitions in tungsten andor other elements is discussed in Chapter 2

83It is worth noting that Watts Jones and Hopkins recently published an

Auger spectrum from a flashed W(lOO) surface in which weak structure can be

seen at approximately the same energies as the unidentified structure observed

here This similarity lends support to the hypothesis that the peaks are

tungsten Auger transitions However it does not rule out other possibilities

The similarity of the data indicates at least that if the structure in

question results from some contaminate the problem is not unique to the

apparatus here It should be emphasized that work function ESD and LEED

data taken here are in good agreement with the literature any possible

contamination has not had a noticeable effect on the measurements

42 Work Function Results

Retarding potential work function measurements have been taken as

a measure of hydrogen coverage Plots of work function changes versus

exposure to hydrogen are presented in Figures 34 and 35 Adsorption of

hydrogen at 600 C yields a maximum work function change of 098 plusmn 004 eV

This is within 10 percent of 090 eV the most consistent monolayer coverage

work function chan~e reported in the literature for the H2 on W(lOO)

8 18 46 47 84system As argued by Armstrong agreement with the values from

the literature is an indication of good (100) orientation This is because

the work function of a faceted surface is a weighted average over the work

44functions of the facets Since hydrogen adsorption increases the work

function of the (100) face far more than the expected facet orientations a

128

faceted (100) surface would have a lower full coverage work function change

than a true (100) surface

Hydrogen adsorption onto W(lOO) at low temperatures increases the

work function by 092 plusmn 004 eV at full coverage This is slightly lower

than the room temperature maximum increase although within experimental

error the two measurements are the same

The increase in work function with hydrogen coverage can be intershy

preted using a simple model in which each adsorbed hydrogen atom acts as a

negative dipole at the surface The work function change on adsorption

43 6~ can be shown to equal the total added dipole moment at the surface

divided by the permittivity Using this and assuming a hydrogen coverage of

15 22xlO atomsem for a 6~ of 098 eV the average dipole moment permax

adsorbed hydrogen atom is calculated to be -013 Debye This result can be

compared to a theoretical account of the dipole moment of a hydrogen ion

63adsorbed onto metal surfaces given by Smith Ying and Kohn Their

calculation indicates that in order to observe a negative dipole moment the

hydrogen ion must be closer than 061 Kto the top plane of substrate ion

cores This would be an upper estimate of the proximity of the hydrogen atoms

to the tungsten substrate The minimum theoretical dipole moment per

63 -2 adsorbed hydrogen ion obtained by Smith et al is -lxlO au (1 au

equals 24 Debye) This value is lower than the observed value of -013

Debye by a factor of 5

o 0Cooling a clean tungsten (100) crystal from 200 C to -150 C

results in a work function increase of approximately 005 eV as shown in

Figure 36 This is an average change with temperature d~dT of 14xlO -4

129

oeV K The temperature dependence of work function for tungsten in this

temperature range has not previously been reported However temperature

dependent changes in work function of this magnitude have been reported for

85 86 85 86Cu Ag Na and K and have been described theoret~ca11y in terms of

both a thermal expansion of the crystal lattice and a temperature dependence

of the crystal electronic structure The work function change observed

here is quantitatively in agreement with experimental data for other elements

and with a theoretical model that describes the temperature dependence solely

in terms of intrinsic properties of a clean metal surface While perturbashy

tions on the crystal surface such as gas adsorption from the background or

bulk to surface diffusion can reasonably be expected to affect the work

function it is not necessary to invoke these causes to explain the changes

seen on cooling the crystal

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results

Under electron bombardment H+ ions can be desorbed from the

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface and from the low temperature undosed

surface The theory that describes this ESD process was first proposed by

37 38Redhead and by Menzel and Gomer A discussion of their model including a

derivation of the energy distribution of ions from the surface is given in

Appendix C In addition a discussion of the ESD phenomena in terms of

surface kinetics is also given in this appendix

ESD has been used to study the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system at

ocrystal temperatures from slightly above room temperature to -150 C Energy

distributions of It ions desorption curves and ion yield versus temperaturemiddot

and coverage data have been obtained

130

431 Room Temperature Results

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from room temperature

W(lOO) is given by the solid curve in Figure 37 The distribution has a

Gaussian line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 plusmn 05 eV

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV The line shape of the energy

distribution remains virtually unchanged as a function of hydrogen coverage

at least to near saturation coverage as shown by the curves in Figure 38

Near full coverage the distribution appears to broaden somewhat This latter

change requires further study which has not been done here

From Equation Cl of Appendix C the energy distribution of the

desorbed ions is given by the expression

(41)

where x is the coordinate normal to the surface Ions that start at x X ]

desorb with energy V N is the surface density of hydrogen atoms adsorbed in

the ground state ~ is the cross section for electron induced excitation ex

of hydrogen from the ground state to the ionic state I~G(xi)12 is the

probability density of hydrogen at Xi P(x ) is the probability that an ioni

starts from the position x and escapes from the surface as an ion and J

dV(X)dxlxi is the slope of the ion-metal interaction evaluated at Xi The

line shape of the energy distribution depends on the metal-neutral intershy

action VG(x) via ~G and depends on the ion-metal interaction V(x) via P(x)

and the slope dV(x)dx

--------------------------~-~~----------------

131

One manifestation of multistate adsorption in which VG(x) and V(x)

are dependent on the binding state is a change in the experimentally

observed energy distribution Multistate adsorption has been observed with

ESD for some systems for example as a function of oxygen coverage on

W(lOO)25 A similar result might be expected for hydrogen adsorption on

W(lOO) since two states ~l and ~2 are seen in thermal desorption spectra

However from the ion energy distribution line shapes for hydrogen on W(lOO)

no evidence of multistate adsorption as a function of coverage is seen The

line shapes of the energy distribution curves are the same at hydrogen

coverages corresponding to both thermal desorption states Hence coverage

dependent interactions which have been proposed to account for the thermal

desorption results and other phenomena reported for this system are not

observed using this technique

Another conclusion to be drawn from the energy distributions is

that the ions originate at an energy position which remains constant with

respect to the Fermi level of the tungsten independent of hydrogen coverage

A shift of nearly a volt in the work function is observed as hydrogen

adsorbs However the ion energy distribution which would be sensitive to

changes of this magnitude if it shifted with the work function remains

fixed in energy

The decay of the room temperature 3 eV a+ ion yield is shown in

Figure 312 A theoretical account of the desorption curve measurement has

been given in Appendix C From that discussion it is seen that a semi logshy

arithmic plot of i ~ - i ~ versus time yields a straight line The totalH Hequil desorption cross section of the adsorption state being probed can be

132

1determined from the slope of the straight line - T where T is given by

T e = (42)

je is the current density used to obtain the desorption curve and e is the

unit of electric charg~

The discussion of the desorption process leading to Equation 42

is based on the assumptions that the total desorption cross section and the

hydrogen sticking probability are independent of hydrogen coverage N The

validity of these assumptions for the hydrogen on tungsten (100) systems

should be examined An indication that the ionic cross section is indepenshy

dent of N for low coverages can be gotten from data presented in Figure 311

The H+ ion yield versus work function change is nearly linear for A~ lt 01 eV

8If coverage is linearly related to work function change as shown by Madey

then the ion yield is directly proportional to N in this low coverage region

A direct proportionality between ion yield and coverage satisfies

Equation C5 only if the ionic desorption cross section Qtis not a

function of coverage In a series of experiments it has been observed that

the equilibrium ion yield which is proportional to the ratio Q+Qt as

given by Equation C8 is independent of N for low coverages Since Q+ and

an expression proportional to Q+Qt are both independent of N it is assumed

tthat Q is a180 independent of N

The dependence of the sticking probability on coverage has been

reported in the literature for the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system Tamm and

87Schmidt found s(N) to be independent of N for coverages of less than 15

133

41 percent Madey found s(N) to be proportional to (l-NN ) Hence the

max

assumption that the sticking probability is independent of N appears valid

to within ~ 10 percent for low coverages For coverages less than 10 the

analysis in Appendix C of the desorption curve measurements can be applied to

the data

A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ for the desorption curve ~quil

shown in Figure 312 is given in Figure 41 The equilibrium level has been

chosen approximately 5 lower than the ion intensity obtained after monishy

toring the decay curve 30 minutes (the final recorded data) since it appeared

from the data the signal was still slowly decreasing In addition with

this correction the data give a better fit to the predicted straight line

t -20 2From the slope of the line -lIT and Equation 41 a Q (400 eV) of 5xlO cm

is calculated Without making the 5 correction in iH+ the best visual equil

straight line fit to the data gives a Qt(400 eV) approximately three times

larger Because the initial hydrogen coverage for this data was 010 monoshy

layerp this cross section represents the total desorption cross section

from the ~2 hydrogen adsorption state ie represents ~ (400 eV) For 2

coverages corresponding to the ~l state the assumptions leading up to

tEquation 42 are not valid and no attempt has been made to calculate 93 bull t 1

The value obtained for 93 (400 eV) is somewhat larger than the cross section 2

38results reported by Menzel and Gomer for hydrogen desorption from a field

emitter tip and is a factor of 10 lower than reported by Jelend and

Menzel10 for desorption from a tungsten ribbon The latter researchers

corrected for readsorption effects which would partly explain their higher

value The value of ~2(400 eV) found here is over three orders of

134

500----~----~--~------------~----

400

- 300 ()

a 0- CT Q)

+ I I 200

+ I

100~__~_____~____~____~__~____~__~ o 200 400 600 800 1000

Time (sec)

SP-1198

Figure 41 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iHt asequil

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 312

----------- -------shy

51

135

magnitude smaller than the total cross section found by Jelend and Menzel

for hydrogen coadsorption with either carbon monoxide or oxygen This is a

verification that these contaminants are not present to any great extent

432 Low Temperature Fast State Results

oIf the tungsten crystal was flashed to 2200 K and subsequently

allowed to cool below room temperature H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface The state from which this hydrogen is desorbed has been labeled

the fast state Experiments have been made to characterize the energetics

and kinetics of this undosed state and also to address the important question

of the origin of the hydrogen which is desorbed These data are discussed

below

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from the fast state

shown in Figure 310 is considerably broader than the distribution obtained

after room temperature hydrogen dosing into the ~ states The peak intensity

is somewhat lower in energy 05 eV than the peak obtained from the ~

states The distribution has a tail extending up several electron volts on

the high energy side It should be noted that the same energy distribution

line shape could be obtained from the state at any position on its desorpshy

tion curve that is the broad distribution is not an anomalous result

reflecting a depletion of the hydrogen fast state during the measurement

A low primary current of lxlO- 7 A was used to take the distribution in

Figure 310 so that electron desorption effects were minimal From a

comparison of energy distributions as given in Figure 310 it is possible

to conclude that the fast state is a separate state from the ~ states

136

This conclusion is supported by cross section calculations below

The intensity of the ion yield from the fast state is temperature

dependent As shown in Figures 315 and 316 the ion yield increases as

the temperature is lowered This phenomena is reversible Using the

assumption that the ion yield is proportional to coverage it is concluded

that the fast state coverage is a function of temperature

The desorption curve obtained from the undosed tungsten (100)

surface has been measured and is given in Figure 313 The decay time is

seen to be extremely rapid compared to the analogous measurement taken after

hydrogen dosing at room temperature A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ ~quil

measured from the data in Figure 313 is given in Figure 42 The total

tdesorption cross section for the fast state Qf(400 eV) calculated from the

slope of the straight line in Figure 42 is -17lxlO 2 cm This is nearly

three orders of magnitude higher than ~2(400 eV)

Since Q~(400 eV) is on the same order of magnitude as the cross

section obtained for hydrogen desorption from carbon monoxide or oxygen

51contaminated surfaces the possibility that the fast state results from

surface contamination has been examined No direct evidence was obtained to

support such a hypothesis No carbon or oxygen peaks were observed in Auger

electron spectra from the cold surface It is estimated that these spectra

were sensitive to 1 percent of a monolayer coverage No carbon or oxygen

ions that could be attributed to the fast state phenomena were observed in

time of flight measurements It might be noted that Jelend and Menzel

observed the high cross section state labeled ~ at room temperature after

simultaneously adsorbing hydrogen plus CO or oxygen Almost no fast state

137

100

-fJ)

Q U

50 J CT

+0gt I I

+ I

10~~~--~~~~~~--~~~--~~~~

o 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Time (sec)

sp- J~4l

Figure 42 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iH+ as equi1

a function of time The data are illeasured from the desorption curve given in Figure 313

138

o lOhydrogen was detected here above 0 c Jelend and Menzel did not observe

any H+ ion yield from a cleaned surface if cooled to _13 0 C Since the gt

signal is weak at that temperature it is possible their apparatus did not

detect it It is also possible that they did not populate their surface

with hydrogen by cooling In any case its not possible to make any

simple correlations between the fast state and the contamination related x

state However as discussed below the equivalence of the two states

cannot be ruled out

It is of interest to determine the origin of the hydrogen which

populates the fast state There are several possibilities This state

could populate as a result of adsorption from the background Alternatively

88 89 hydrogen since it is endothermically soluble in tungsten m~ght

diffuse from interstitial sites to surface sites as the temperature of the

crystal is lowered A discussion of these phenomena has been given in

19Appendix C The latter suggestion has been offered as a possible

explanation of the c(2x2) LEED pattern observed on cooling In addition a

combination of these two processes could be occurring

Experiments have been performed in which the coverage in the fast

state has been monitored as a function of both adsorption time and system

background pressure If the source is external the dependence of N on

adsorption time and ambient pressure can be determined by solving Equation

C4 For the case of no incident electron beam (je = 0) and if the sticking

probability is assumed constant with coverage (probably a good assumption

since the change in coverage due to adsorption from the background would be

extremely small at the experimental ambient pressures) then the change in

139

coverage in the fast state would be expected to be linearly related to the

time during which adsorption occurs ie linearly proportional to the

variable adsorption time Furthermore for a fixed adsorption time the

coverage would be expected to be linearly proportional to the partial pressure

of the populating species

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

40 pressure is considerably more invo1ved Several points can be made

however from the discussion in Appendix C The time dependence of N due

to diffusion could be similar to that expected from background adsorption

ie linear with adsorption time However background pressure doesnt

enter into the diffusion process If the fast state phenomena is only

diffusion related the coverage N would be expected to be independent of

background pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence

for adsorption from the background

The rate of populating the fast state has been measured by turning

off the electron gun for various time intervals (setting j = 0) referred to e

as adsorption times and observing the build up of the ion signal while the

gun is off The increase in the fast state is then assumed proportional to

the increase in the ion yield i ~ - i ~ when the electron gun is Hinitia1 Hequi1

turned back on The dependence of the population rate on adsorption time is

shown in Figure 317 N is found to be linearly related to adsorption time

As discussed above this time behavior can reasonably be expected to be

observed for either an external or an internal source

The rate of population of the fast state has also been observed as

140

a function of hydrogen pressure admitted to the background from the gas

handling system As discussed in Section 354 the rate of population did

not depend on the impingement rate from the hydrogen background Hence it

is concluded that hydrogen from the gas handling system does not populate

the fast state This does not rule out external adsorption however Other

sources of hydrogen in the ambient such as rrt H H2 in an excited state or

hydrogen from a simple compound such as H 0 could be the source2

Although the population of the fast state was not affected by the

background pressure of hydrogen (H ) from the gas handling system there is2

evidence that this state does result from adsorption from an external source

This conclusion is based on experiments in which the Bayard Alpert gauge

sensitivity was increased by nulling out the x-ray limiting current Changes

-12in the background pressure on the order of 2xlO Torr were observed experishy

mentally if the crystal was flashed while it was facing the spectrometer

One explanation of this observation is that a flash in the up position warms

experimental chamber surfaces most likely the grids and electron gun drift

tube The resulting pressure increase occurs because of an increased rate of

thermal desorption from these surfaces The linear dependence of the

equilibrium current i ~ with pressure change as found experimentallyHequil

and shown in the top panel of Figure 319 is expected if external adsorption

populates the fast state This can be seen from Equation C9 Likewise the

rate of change of coverage in the fast state is seen to be proportional to

the pressure change in the lower panel of Figure 319 This is also expected

for external adsorption If bulk to surface diffusion were the source of the

hydrogen no dependence on pressure would be expected Hence Figure 319

141

indicates that hydrogen becomes desorbable because of adsorption from the

background It is not possible to say what species is adsorbing

An interesting calculation that can be made from the current nulling

experiments is an estimate of the coverage in the adsorption state responsible

for the fast state hydrogen ions Since the relation

(43)

can be obtained easily from Equation C9 and since ~i + is on the same Hequil

order as iH+ the background partial pressure that populates the undosed equil

-12state is on the same order of magnitude as ~P or about lxlO Torr The

coverage N at equilibrium can now be obtained by setting Equation C4 equal

-12to O At a pressure of 10 Torr the impingement rate of hydrogen molecules

9 2 90 for example is 15xlO moleculescm -sec and the impingement rate of other

species would be of this same magnitude Assuming a sticking probability of

-17 21 a total desorption cross section of 10 cm as calculated and a current

-4 2density of 5lxlO Acm the surface coverage in the fast state would be

~ 10-11

atomscm2 or 10-4 monolayer This calculation depends on the

assumption that the pressure change at the crystal face in the experimental

chamber is the same as measured at the gauge Experiments performed in which

the crystal was rotated to the down position after flashing in the up position

indicated that the flux of the populating species at the surface was about

twice as great when the crystal faced the spectrometer than when it faced

down Since the pressure at the bottom of the experimental chamber should

142

be about the same as the gauge pressure the calculated coverage could be

low by 50 percent It should be noted however that this is still 50 times

too low to amount to 1 percent of a monolayer

From the above discussion it can be concluded that the fast

state is related to both the temperature of the crystal and to the

background pressure of some unidentified species It is not possible to

determine if this state is a separate state from the K hydrogen state

previously reported even though it appears under different circumstances

In fact since the coverage in the state is so low Auger spectroscopy

would not be sensitive to any contamination of this same magnitude The

possibility of undetected contamination accompanying the fast state cannot

be ruled out It is possible that the adsorbing species does not contain

hydrogen as such but rather is a species which promotes a small amount

of surface hydrogen (from the background or diffusion) to the fast state

It can also be concluded that since coverages less than 1 percent of a

monolayer would not be expected to strongly alter the LEED spot symmetry

the half order spots seen on cooling do not arise from the fast state

433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results

ESD measurements have been made on the low temperature tungsten

crystal after dosing with hydrogen from the jet Energy distributions at

different coverages of hydrogen are given in Figure 39 The distributions

143

are seen to have a peak at 3 ~ 05 eV in agreement with the peak positions

in the data obtained from the ~ states at 60oC However the energy distri shy

butions are somewhat broader than the higher temperature data The fast

state yields a broad energy distribution and it is possible that the results

of Figure 39 represent simultaneous desorption from both the fast state and

the ~ states This hypothesis can be tested by analyzing a desorption curve

from the low temperature dosed surface If two states with different cross

sections are being desorbed then a semilogarithmic plot of the desorption

curve should be the sum of two straight lines The quantity i ~ - i ~ H HSquil

measured from the data of Figure 315 is plotted in Figure 43 The curve

can be separated into two straight line segments from which total desorption

17 19 2 cross sections of 16xlO- cm2 and 12xlO- cm are calculated These

cross sections correspond within plusmn 60 percent to the calculated values of

t tQf(400 eV) and QS2(400 eV) Hence it is concluded that at low temperatures

the fast state and S-like states co-adsorb

It should be noted however that the interaction of hydrogen from

the jet with the tungsten surface at low temperatures is not exactly the

o same as at 60 C This can be seen from the plot of 3 eV ion yield versus

work function change given in Figure 311 At both 600 C and at -lSOoC the

results are qualitatively similar the ion yield increases steeply with

initial hydrogen adsorption reaches a maximum and then decreases to less

than lS percent of the maximum value with additional hydrogen adsorption

Hence it is assumed that a similar phenomena is occurring at both temperashy

tures However the work function change at maximum intensity for the low

temperature measurement was found to be repeatedly lower by 007 eV than the

144

SP-H24

Figure 43 Semilogarithmic plot of the quantity ia+ - ia+ as equ~l

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 314

145

peak ~ntens~ty for measurements taken at 600 C If the expression relating

coverage to work function change Equation 35 is valid at both 600

C and

at -1500 C then the 007 eV shift would represent a dosed coverage difference

of 7 of a monolayer The ion yield at the low temperature would maximize at

a dosed coverage of 11 which is 40 lower than the coverage for the maximum

ion yield at the higher temperature If the decrease in ion yield for higher

hydrogen coverages arises from interactions between adsorbed atoms these calshy

culations suggest that the interactions observe a different coverage dependence

at the two temperatures Alternate explanations are possible for the measured

difference Equation 35 may not be valid at both temperatures It is possible

that the work function change per adsorbed atom is smaller at the lower tempshy

erature and the dosed coverages are the same at the ion yield maximas It is

also possible that hydrogen not visible in ESD or electron loss spectroscopy

measurements~ but capable of interacting with dosed hydrogen~ diffuses to the

surface at the low temperature This latter alternative~ while a possible exshy

planation for the LEED phenomena would raise many questions as to why such

hydrogen is not detectable with other techniques

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements

Low energy electron diffraction measurements made on the clean and

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface have been presented in Section 36 The

symmetry of the LEED patterns has been noted as a function of hydrogen coverage

and crystal temperature Elastic intensity profiles for three LEED beams are

given in Figures 321 through 323 LEED beam intensities as a function of

temperature have been monitored These are given in Figures 324 and 325

General agreement between symmetry patterns seen here and those

published in the literature18 19 is good The (lxl) LEED pattern

146

characteristic of clean tungsten at room temperature changes into a c(2x2)

pattern with initial hydrogen adsorption With further adsorption the LEED

pattern splits into four spots becomes blurred and finally at full coverage

returns to a (lx1) pattern When the crystal is cooled to temperatures below

room temperatures half order spots become visible without any dosing of the

crystal from the gas system

The intensity of the room temperature half order spots maximizes at

a coverage corresponding to ~~ = 015 eV or 015 monolayer using Equation

35 This is close to the 016 monolayer coverage at which Yonehara and

19 18Schmidt found these beams to maximize Estrup and Anderson on the

other hand observed sharp and intense half order LEED spots at a coverage

of 029 monolayer The coverages reported here were calculated from work

function changes using the linear relation between work function change and

coverage obtained by Madey by a flash desorption technique In both other

18experiments 19 coverage was measured directly using flash desorption The

c(2x2) pattern is associated with the ~2 adsorption state The structures

proposed to account for this state as given in Section 128 predict that

the maximum of the half order spots should occur at 025 monolayer coverage

15(one monolayer being 2x10 atomscm2) Estrup and Andersons measurement is

closest to this coverage While it is not known why there is such a large

discrepancy between the results it should be noted that determination of

coverage using flash desorption techniques is difficult with large uncershy

tainties in pressure gauge calibration and system volume The results given

here in terms of ~~ should be considerably more accurate

_ _____---__---shy

147

Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) (11) and (1212) LEED

beams are given in Figures 321 through 323 respectively The profiles

o 0 were taken at 60 C and -150 C from both a clean tungsten surface and a

surface dosed with hydrogen to 015 monolayer (This coverage corresponded

to the observed maximum in the half order pattern) As seen in these three

figures corresponding clean room temperature and low temperature profiles are

nearly identical Adsorption of hydrogen to a coverage of 015 does cause

some changes in the clean profiles with the same changes being observed at

both temperatures Hydrogen adsorption considerably enhances the 42 eV peak

observed in the (1212) profile and shifts it in energy approximately + 1 eVe

Adsorption also leads to a change from a single peak to a double peaked

structure of decreased intensity in the (11) profile above 100 eVe Adsorption

causes very little change in the (10) profile line shape above 60 eV

although the 65 eV 835 eV and 110 eV peaks are lowered in energy approxishy

mately 15 eV 05 eV and 15 eV respectively Between 30 eV and 60 eV

there are some adsorption effects on the profiles

These elastic intensity profiles can be compared to corresponding

data previously reported in the literature In Figure 44 a comparison is

made between clean surface (10) and (11) profiles taken here and reported

9lby Wei The agreement is good except in the energy range below 50 eVe

This poor agreement below 50 eV is also true for the (00) beam which is not

compared here The low energy discrepancies may be caused by the ambient

magnetic field present in Weis target region In fact it is surprising

that the data agrees as well as it does considering the different experimenshy

tal conditions under which the two sets of data were obtained Figure 45

148

Figure 44 Comparison of (11) and (10) elastic intensity profiles from the clean tungsten (100) surface Data includes profiles taken here at 60degC and -150degC and results reported by Wei94 bull

149

() --c 1

gt 0-Q 0-gt-()

c OJ-c

H

o 50 100 150 200

xl

xl

X2

Elastic Intensity Profiles W (100) Clean 8i = 0deg

g = (11)

g = (10)

Withrow (-150degC)

Withrow (60degC)

Wei (250-300degC)

Pr imary Energy (eV) SP-1l92

150

Figure 45 Comparison of (1212) elastic intensity profiles from tungsten (100) surface after hydrogen adsorption into the ~2 state Data includes profiles obtained here and results reported by Estrup and Anderson18 and Papageorgopoulos and Chen2l

0

151

- ()-

--()

c Q)-c H

Elastic Intensity Profiles H2 on W(lOO) 8j =0deg 9 = (1212)

Withrow

Estrup and Anderson

Papageorgopoulos and Chen

o 50 100 150 Primary Energy (eV) SP-1l93

200

152

shows a comparison of elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam taken

after hydrogen adsorption From the general appearance of the data Estrup

18and Andersons profi1e appears shifted up in energy about 5 eV with respect

to the profile taken here This suggests the possibility of a discrepancy

in the energy measurement The line shapes are similar howeve~ although

Estrup and Anderson found one well-defined peak around 75 eV whereas in this

work a peak at 67 eV and an additional shoulder between 85 eV and 90 eV is

21seen Papageorgopou1os and Chen did not observe the large peak below 50 eV

nor the double peaked structure above 100 eV reported by both other researchers

These discrepancies cou1deasi1y be due to a residual magnetic field in the

work of Papageorgopou1os and Chen It can be concluded from these comparishy

sons that control over experimental conditions is crucial for the reproduction

of data

Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores

16 17 can be extracted from a sufficient set of elastic intensity proh1es

Although the data base is small here a preliminary analysis of the clean

tungsten data has been conducted by Duke using a microscopic quantum-field

16theory formalism of low energy electron diffraction In this formalism a

model for the electron-solid interaction is used in an attempt to match

theoretical line shape predictions to experimentally observed elastic LEED

intensity profiles An important feature of this microscopic approach is the

strong interactions between the incident electron and valence electrons in

the solid The inelastic mean free path A is about 3-8 X for most ee

materials for electron energies of 30 ~ E S 200 As a consequence electrons

which are observed elastically have been backscattered within the first

--------------

153

several surface layers of the solid and hence LEED elastic profiles are

surface sensitive Elastic backscattering of the electrons is described by

short range electron-ion core interactions Information on the configurashy

tion of the surface ion cores is extracted from the elastic energy profiles

by varying parameters in the theory and obtaining the best fit to the data

Theoretical analysis of elastic energy profiles from tungsten at energies

above 100 eV is computationally difficult because of the large number of

phase shifts needed to describe the electron-ion core scattering Hence the

exp arimental profiles were taken only for energies E 1gt 125 eV pr~

Comparisons of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity

profiles for the (00) (10) and (11) beams are given in Figure 46 The

theoretical fit to the experimental data was made by taking an inelastic

mean free path Aee equal to 8 K and an inner potential Vl which represents

t he rea1 part 0 f h 1 1 i on16 equa1 to 8 eV Thetee ectron-e ectron 1nteract

agreement in peak position is good for the (10) beam in the range

25 eV lt E lt 125 eV and for the (11) beam in the range 60 eV lt E lt 100 eV ~ ~ ~ ~

The theoretical and experimental line shapes of the (10) beam show remarkable

agreement but the line shapes of the (11) beam do not fit as well For the

(00) beam the theoretical profile is not similar to the experimental plot

except for the peak at 117 eV Most of this discrepancy for the (00) beam

probably arises from the differences in theoretical and experimental incishy

dence and aximuthal angles used to obtain the profiles The theoretical

profile was calculated assuming a primary electron beam normally incident

experimentally this is not possible with the spectrometer ~sed here since

the (00) beam would not be visible on the LEED screen under these conditions

~~ ~~-----------

---------------------~------------------

154

o

III C

~ C

H 1 o

1

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

-Experiment Withrow and Luscher

g =(00)

o-o-oTheory Duke T = 10 K ej =cpj =0 V=8eVI Aee 811

o 140 SP-1l91

Figure 46 Comparison of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity profiles for clean tungsten (100) surface Theoretical results have been calculated by Duke

155

Data has been obtained for the temperature dependence of clean

elastic intensity profiles No differences in the clean surface (10) and

(11) profiles taken at 600 C and -1500 C are seen even though the LEED pattern

symmetry changes from a (lxl) pattern to a c(2x2) pattern Apparently these

two elastic intensity profiles are not sensitive to the scattering geometry

changes that are manifested in the LEED pattern change

19 92 It has been speculated that the extra half order spots may

result from hydrogen on the surface As shown above the (10) and (11)

profiles dont change even though the half order spots appear on cooling

This may not be surprising if the extra spots seen on cooling the undosed

crystal are related to hydrogen on the surface The cross section for hydrogen

92 93backscattering 1S very weak compared to scattering from tungsten While

a priori it is not necessarily true that the addition of a weak scatterer will

have little effect on intensity profiles this does seem to be the case for

hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten Adsorption of hydrogen has no effect on

18the (00) profile from tungsten (100) and it was found here that~daorption

of hydrogen has very little effect on the (10) beam profile out to 015

monolayer coverage as can be concluded from Figure 321 On the other hand

it is true that adsorption of hydrogen did alter the (11) beam A second

explanation for the extra spots seen on cooling the crystal is that they

result from a tungsten surface reconstruction No theoretical calculations

have been performed which would indicate how reconstruction would affect the

intensity profiles The sensitivity of the profiles to an hypothesized

surface atom reconstruction could be determined from calculations similar to

those leading to the theoretical profiles given in Figure 46 Such a

156

theoretical calculation would be of interest as it would help evaluate how

much credence should be given to a reconstruction hypothesis

More than one atomic geometry may be associated with a given surface

translational symmetry ie associated with the same LEED spot pattern

Different geometries however would be manifested via differences in the

1intensity profiles associated with the same spot pattern After hydrogen

o 0adsorption to 015 monolayer at 60 C and -150 C both the LEED pattern symmetr~

c(2x2) and the elastic intensity profiles are the same Thus this data would indicate hydrogen adsorbs into the same surface atomic geometry at the two

temperatures A comparison of elastic intensity profiles from the undosed and

hydrogen dosed cold surface is given in Figure 47 The LEED pattern for both

conditions has a c(2x2) symmetry The profiles are not the same particularly

the (11) profile above 100 eV and the (1212) profile below 50 eV Hence

the atomic geometry responsible for the two sets of profiles may be different

even though the observed pattern symmetry c(2x2) is the same

The intensity dependence on temperature of the LEED beams has been

observed The intensity of integral order beams monitored from the clean

surface increases with decreasing temperature as shown in Figure 324 The

22 95 exponential temperature dependence obtained is pred1cted from a kinematic

treatment of electron scattering in which thermal vibrations are included via

an effective Debye-Waller factor Experimental Debye temperatures aD can

be calculated from the slopes of the straight lines in Figure 324 22 96

For the (10) beam taken with a primary energy of 1105 eV aD is

calculated to be 280oK 97 This is on the order of the Debye temperature for

~ 0bulk tungsten and higher than the Debye temperature of 183 K found by

157

Figure 47 Comparison of experimental (10) (11) and (1212) elastic intensity profiles from a cold tungsten (100) surface for hydrogen adsorption in the fast state (undosed surface) and in the ~2 state

158

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(100)

g (10)

1 o

o

OJ 0deg T -150degC Undosed and Dosed with H2

shyCl shy+shy 1 0 shyCl

o gt +shy(J)

c Q)

C 0 H

g (1212)

1

o

o

o 140

159

Estrup13 for the (10) beam for intensities taken between 6000K and 8000K

0The Debye temperature for the (11) beam is calculated to be 410 K The

middot h 1 1 95va1ues 0f eD f ound h ere seem to be anoma1ous 1y h19 S1nce ca cu at10ns

indicate that the surface Debye temperature should be lower than the bulk

Debye temperature

The temperature dependence of the half order beam is not the same

as found for the integer order beams Figure 325 shows that the intensity

of this beam increases at different exponential rates over two temperature

regions Down to about -750C the intensity increase is exponential but with

a steeper temperature dependence than observed with the integer order beams

Below -75oC the intensity increases at approximately the same exponential

rate as the integer order beams This same result is found at primary

energies of both 42 eV and 115 eV The effect is reversible with temperature

Yonehara and Schmidt19 measured the temperature dependence of the half order

beams and fit their results to a straight line on a linear scale However

for the data they took immediately after flashing to 25000K an exponential

dependence as found here appears to be as good if not better fit

0Below -75 C the half order beam intensity increases at approximately

the same exponential rate as the integer order beams This suggests that in

this lower temperature region the intensity increase can be explained by the

0 0Debye-Wa1ler factor However between 100 C and -75 C it is not known why

the (1212) spots appear and then increase in intensity so strongly

The intensity dependence on temperature of the (1212) beam

below OoC can be compared to the temperature dependence of the fast state H+

ion intensity These data are given in Figures 312 and 325 Because the

----------------~~ ~~~~~

160

a+ ion yield from the fast state also increases with decreasing temperature

a possible correlation between the appearance of this ion signal and the

appearance of the half order beams is suggested It is tempting to hypothesize

that the fast state is adsorbed into a c(2x2) array and hence half order spots

are produced on cooling However this connection probably cannot be made

For one thing the estimated coverage of the fast state is several orders of

magnitude below a coverage reasonably expected to exert an influence on the

LEED pattern In addition while the fast state has a high total desorption

cross section with the ion signal decaying rapidly after turning oriltthe

electron gun no evidence of this type of behavior is found for the LEED spot

intensities if a corresponding experiment is made A depletion of the fast

state in the electron beam does not affect the half order LEED spot intensities

oFinally in the region below middot75 C the ion signal increases reversibly with

temperature at a steep rate while the LEED spot intensity increases reversshy

ib1y at a slow rate ie the intensity correlation is not good in this

range These arguments do not refute the possibility that the half order

spots are a hydrogen phenomena They strongly indicate however that a

correlation cannot be made between the hydrogen ions observed from the undosed

surface and the appearance of the half order spots aside from the obvious

result that they both occur over the same temperature range It would appear

more reasonable to suggest that the formation of a c(2x2) scattering symmetry

on the surface via reconstruction or some other mechanism provides a

binding site into which a species from the ambient can adsorb and subseshy

quent1y be desorbed The identity of that species is not known

-----------shy

161

45 Electron Scattering Results

Energy loss spectra for electrons scattered from the clean and

hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surface are given in Figures 326 and 327

The second derivative mode has been employed in order to suppress background

as discussed in Appendix B Data have been presented for energy losses

between a and 40 eV for a primary electron beam energy of 110 eV

Several general comments can be made A comparison of the clean

spectra taken at the two temperatures shows they are nearly identical The

only difference is a slight enhancement in the low temperature data of the

shoulder at w = 75 eV (barely evident in the figures) It might be noted

that adsorption of hydrogen produces as peak at 75 eV and the small change

in the low temperature spectrum near this energy may be an indication of a

small hydrogen coverage An attempt was made to observe effects of the fast

state on the clean spectrum After cooling the crystal the fast state was

allowed to populate by turning the gun off for adsorption times of 10 minutes

The spectrum taken after preparing the crystal in this way was identical to

those obtained immediately after cooling Hence fast state hydrogen does

not perturb the electronic structure unlike ~ state hydrogen This result

is not surprising because of the very low coverages calculated for the fast

state from the desorption measurement

Hydrogen adsorption into the ~ states perturbs the clean surface

o 0loss spectrum The same changes are observed at both 60 C and -150 C The

most dramatic changes that occur with increasing coverage are the growth of

a 75 eV loss the movement down in loss energy of the structure at 21 eV in

the clean spectrum and the annihilation of the peak at 25 eV In addition

the loss peak at 107 eV decreases in intensity somewhat

162

Definite changes in the loss spectra are seen (for example at

w = 75 eV) for work function changes of 003 eV This is a coverage of only

3 percent hydrogen At coverages corresponding to a work function change of

015 eV the 75 eV peak is well-developed and the 21 eV structure has moved

down ~ 1 eV While hydrogen is adsorbing at room temperature from 0 to 15

percent of a monolayer half order spots develop in the LEED pattern As

noted before half order spots also develop in the LEED pattern by cooling the

ocrystal to -150 C However electron loss measurements from the cold flashed

surface dont show any changes that correspond to hydrogen on the surface

Thus no correlation can be drawn using electron loss measurements between

the half order patterns obtained by hydrogen dosing and by cooling the crystal

Interpretation of the structure in the energy loss spectra taken

here is nontrivial Although the data incorporates information on the elecshy

tronic structure of the surface and near surface region ie represents

bulk and surface single particle transitions and collective oscillations

both theoretical and experimental complexities arise in attempting to extract

electronic structure from the data While the electron energy loss has been

measured with high resolution information on the momentum transfer ~ q

involved in the electron solid inelastic interaction is not retained since

1) the analyzer integrates over a wide range of ~ qs and 2) the backscattered

electron has undergone at least two collisions - an inelastic scattering

with an accompanying momentum transfer which is not enough to turn the

electron around and an elastic scattering which does Hence the analyzer is

expected to be sensitive to loss mechanisms which are well-defined in energy

but relatively independent of momentum transfer Transitions satisfying these

163

conditions are possible in tungsten Luscher has shown25 that at least one

relatively flat and narrow d-band in tungsten located near the Fermi level

acts as the final state for electron excitations involving core electrons

This d-band may be operative as a final state for transitions involving

valence and adsorbate electrons as well

25The structure at 210 eV and 255 eV has been identified as

resulting from surface and bulk plasmons Adsorption of hydrogen increases

the energy of the surface plasmon but does not affect the energy of the bulk

plasmon

The energy losses at 381 eV 346 eV and 324 eV remain constant

as a function of hydrogen coverage These losses correspond in both relative

strengths and separation in energy to tungsten core electron excitations from

he 5 an (doublet ) eve 1s f ound h at 36 Vt p d 4f 1 1nmiddot x-ray p otoem1SS10n 99 9 e

333 eV and 311 eV below the Fermi level A comparison of these photo-

emission values to the energy losses observed here would indicate the position

of the final state operative in the energy loss measurements is 13 eV above

the Fermi level

It would be convenient to use this value) 13 eV for the final

state energy in interpreting the rest of the sharply peaked structure arising

from electron transitions There are difficulties with such an approach

however The data being compared in calculating the final state energy

location have been obtained with two techniques that perturb the adsorbateshy

plus-solid system in distinctly different ways The observed energy losses

in electron scattering are strongly influenced by interband oscillators

electron screening and relaxation effects and these perturbations are not

164

constant as a function of loss energy Hence extension of the 13 eV value

in interpreting data at other loss energies may not be valid None the less

using the 13 eV final state the peaks in the clean ELS spectrum at 25 eV

and 40 eV would correspond to peaks in the photoemission spectra at 12 eV

(25 eV - 13 eV) and at 27 eV (40 eV - 13 eV) respectively There is

no obvious correspondence between these peaks and structure seen in clean

35 36surface photoemission spectra The structure changes on adsorption in

the ELS spectra for 0 eV S w ~ 4 eV may reflect the sharp photoemission loss

which appears at 25 eV as hydrogen coverage increases The strong 75 eV

energy loss which appears in the ELS spectra as hydrogen adsorbs onto the

crystal would correspond to structure in photoemission data near 62 eV

(75 eV - 13 eV) Recently photoemission peaks at 52 eV and between

10068 eV and 78 eV have been reported From these comparisons it can be

seen that quantitative interpretation of the fine structure in the energy

loss measurements cannot be made with this simple model

165

CHAPTER 5

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

An experimental apparatus for surface research has been designed

constructed and successfully placed in operation It incorporates the

necessary hardware and electronics for performing several complementary

surface probing techniques including Auger electron spectroscopy retarding

potential work function measurements low energy electron diffraction electron

energy loss spectroscopy and electron stimulated desorption of ions System

electronics allow the instrument to be easily switched between the techniques

The apparatus has been used to study the chemisorption of hydrogen on a

tungsten single crystal surface over the temperature range 600C to -150

0C

The instrument combines an electron gun with an energy spectrometer

a LEED display system and a crystal manipulator The electron gun is capable

of focusing a monoenergetic electron current of up to 21 ~A onto a

macroscopic sample The gun has been operated from 5 eV to 1800 eV The

high resolution high sensitivity spectrometer consists of a retarding field

analyzer in series with two electrostatic deflection analyzers The energy

resolution of the spectrometer is 21 without using the retarding field

analyzer This can be improved to less than 1 under some conditions by

applying a retarding field The spectrometer output can be detected using

a atemeter or using modulation techniques The instrument has been used to

analyze electron and ion signals from the sample and to determine the charge

to mass ratio of desorbed ions The experimental sample a tungsten crystal

which has been polished to within 01 0 of the (100) face is mounted on the

166

end of a crystal manipulator The manipulator is used to position the sample

as needed A two grid LEED display system has been used to study LEED

pattern symmetry The intensities of LEED spots have been monitored with a

spot photometer

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental conditions using Auger electron spectroscopy The Auger

spectrum obtained after flashing the crystal to 22000 K is free of carbon and

oxygen Auger structure The electron gun could be operated under normal

experimental conditions without contaminating the surface but a carbon Auger

peak appears if high gun currents and voltages are used This effect Crul

be taken into consideration when interpreting the data Some weak structure

in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface is seen between 475 eV and

525 eVa It is not possible to conclusively determine if this structure

results from Auger transitions in tungsten or from some other source

Retarding potential work function measurements have been made as

a reproducible measure of hydrogen coverage Adsorption of hydrogen onto

othe tungsten (100) crystal at 60 C yields a maximum work function change of

098 plusmn 004 eVa This is in good agreement with previously reported values

The work function change with exposure to hydrogen for the tungsten sample

at -lSOoc was found to be the same within experimental accuracy as found

at higher temperature The maximum work function change at -lSOoc is

092 plusmn 004 eVa Cooling the flashed crystal from 2200 C to -lSOoC resulted

in an increase in the work function of approximately 005 eVa An intrinsic

(clean surface) temperature dependence of this magnitude appears reasonable

from theoretical considerations

167

The time-of-flight technique employed for mass analysis was found

to work well Ion species H+ and 0+ as well as H + have been identified2

Relative intensities of the ion yields could only be estimated with this

technique as instrumented H+ ions are electron desorbed from the surface

after adsorption of hydrogen In addition H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface after a flash if the crystal was cooled below room temperature No

HZ+ ions were desorbed from the crystal However H2+ and H+ ions produced

by ionization of the background and also by ESD from surfaces in the experishy

mental chamber were detected under certain operating conditions This signal

could be separated from the ions originating at the crystal surface by biasing

the crystal several volts positive with respect to the spectrometer

The distribution in energy of H+ ions electron desorbed from a 60 0 C

tungsten (100) surface has been observed The distribution has a normal line

shape with a peak intensity at 30 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a half width

of Z6 eV No evidence of distinct ~l and ~Z adsorption states was found in

the energy distribution line shape the distribution is the same for coverages

corresponding to both the ~Z adsorption state and the ~l plus ~2 adsorption

states The intensity of the U+ ion signal is coverage dependent The deshy

pendence found here is in agreement with previously reported work The maxshy

imum in intensity of the ion yield occurs for a work function change of 018

eV The total desorption cross section for hydrogen ions from the ~2 state

is 5xlO-ZO cmZ bull

An H+ ion signal can be desorbed from the undosed (100) surface if

the crystal temperature is lowered below room temperature T~fs represents

a previously unreported hydrogen adsorption state Experiments in which

the pressure was carefully monitored indicate that this hydrogen results

168

from adsorption onto the crystal from the background However the state

labeled the fast state is not populated by the adsorption of H2 from the

gas handling system The adsorbing species that populates the fast state

is not known Hydrogen coverage in the fast state is estimated to be ~10-4

monolayer which is an extremely small coverage The fast state hydrogen

desorbs with a broad energy distribution which has a peak intensity at

25 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a tail extending up to gt9 eV The total

17 2desorption cross section for H+ from this state is high lxlO- cm This is

on the same order of magnitude as the cross section for desorption of the

~ hydrogen state However no evidence of CO or oxygen contaminants which

are associated with the ~ state was found The techniques used to chemshy

ically characterize the surface were sensitive to about 1 percent of a mono-

layer so these two contaminants could have been present at coverages less

than 1 percent

Hydrogen (H2) dosed onto the low temperature surface co-adsorbs

with the fast state in a separate e state This can be concluded from energy

distribution and desorption curve measurements The maximum ion yield obshy

tainable from the low temperature surface occurs for a work function change

of 011 eV This is 007 eV lower than the maximum in the ion yield from

the room temperature hydrogen dosed surface This difference may indicate

that the mechanism responsible for the decrease in ion yield as the ~l state

fills is operative at a lower hydrogen coverage at low temperatures An

alternative possibility is that hydrogen coverage at the low temperature can

not be measured by the same expression relating coverage to work function

change as used at the higher temperature

169

Low energy electron diffraction pattern changes observed as a

function of hydrogen coverage on the room temperature surface are in agreeshy

ment with those reported in the literature The surface translational symshy

metry is strongly coverage dependent The maximum in the c(2x2) pattern

associated with the ~2 state occurs at a work function change of 015 eV for

room temperature adsorption If the crystal is flashed to ~22000K and then

cooled below room temperature the (lxl) pattern characteristic of the clean

surface changes into a c(2x2) pattern Since H+ ions can be electron desorbed

from the flashed surface if the crystal is cooled to this same temperature

range and since the ~2 state hydrogen is known to produce a c(2x2) pattern

it has been suggested that the low temperature c(2x2) LEED pattern may result

from hydrogen on the surface However no evidence was found to support this

hypothesis The ions desorbed from the cold surface did not originate from

the f 2 state but from a distinctly different state labeled the fast state

It is questioned whether the low coverage in the fast state is sufficient to

produce half order LEED spots There is no indication from the ELS measureshy

ments that hydrogen has diffused to the surface from the bulk Electron

energy loss spectra show almost no change on cooling the crystal below room

temperature These spectra are sensitive to electronic structure changes

resulting from hydrogen adsorption of as little as 3 percent of a monolayer

The (10) and (11) LEED beam intensity profiles taken from the undosed surface

are not changed by cooling the crystal It would be of interest to compare

this experimental result to theoretical elastic intensity profile calculations

from both a normal and a recons tructed tungsten surface This would help

determine if reconstruction is a viable explanation for the cold surface

170

c(2x2) phenomenon

Low energy electron diffraction elastic intensity profiles for

several beams have been reported from the clean tungsten (100) surface and

from this surface dosed with hydrogen in the ~2 state These profiles have

been compared to published data where possible Careful control over expershy

imental parameters is essential in order to obtain agreement between the data

The clean surface intensity profiles have been compared to preliminary theoretshy

ical calculations While fair agreement Catl be obtained both experimental

and theoretical problems must be solved before a reliable calculation of

atomic geometry for the hydrogen over layer can be made A comparison of

experimental profiles for the low temperature undosed and hydrogen dosed

c(2x2) patterns suggests that the atomic geometries responsible for these

identical patterns arenot the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been presented as a

f~~ction of hydrogen coverage Changes in the electronic structure at the

surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption are observed Structure due to

the surface and hulk plasmons are identified and peaks due to tungsten

Sp and 4f core level transitions can be identified by comparison to published

photoemission data Interpretation of other structure in the spectra requires

more study

171

REFERENCES

1 C B Duke Jap J App1 Phys 13 (1974) to be published

2 For example see R R Ford Advan Catalysis 21 51 (1970) for review of CO adsorption on transition metals or J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chern Phys 54 4969 (1971) and T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et PrPri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155 for a review of hydrogen adsorption on tungsten (100)

3 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Vac Sci Techno1 ~ 63 (1971)

4 P A Redhead Vacuum~ 203 (1962)

5 G Ehrlich Advan Catalysis 14 221 (1963)

6 L A Petermann Progress in Surface Science vol 3 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1972) p 1

7 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chern Phys 21 5352 (1969)

8 T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et Propri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155

9 D L Adams and L H Germer Sur Sci 23 419 (1970)

10 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 40 295 (1973)

11 G Tibbetts PhD thesis University of Illinois 1967

12 D L Adams Sur Sci 42 12 (1974)

13 P J Estrup The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 191

14 C B Duke and C W Tucker Jr Sur Sci 11 231 (1969)

15 C B Duke Electron Emission Spectroscopy edited by W Dekeyser et a1 (D Reidel Publishing Co Dordrecht Holland 1973) p 1

16 C B Duke N O Lipari and G E Laramore J Vac Sci Techno1 11 180 (1974)

17 M G Laga11y T C Ngoc and M B Webb Phys Rev Lett 26 1557 (1971)

172

18 P J Estrup and J Anderson J Chern Phys 45 2254 (1966)

19 K Yonehara and L D Schmidt Sur Sci 12 238 (1971)

20 E W Plummer and A E Bell J Vac Sci Techno1 2 583 (1972) bull

21 C A Papageorgopoulos and J M Chen Sur Sc i 39 283 (1973)

22 R F Wallis B C Clark and R Herman The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 171

23 M R Leggett and R A Armstrong Sur Sci 24 404 (1971)

24 D Edwards Jr PhD thesis University of Illinois 1970

25 P E Luscher PhD thesis Northwestern University 1974 to be published

26 R Gomer Field Emission and Field Ionization (Harvard U Press Cambridge Ma ss 1961)

27 R D Young Phys Rev 113 110 (1959)

28 J W Gadzuk and E W Plummer Rev Mod Phys 45 487 (1973)

29 C B Duke and M E Alpounderieff J Chern Phys 46 923 (1967)

30 J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Bl 2110 (1970)

31 C N Berglund and W E Spicer Phys Rev 136 part A Al030 (1964)

32 F M Propst and T C Piper J Vac Sci Technol ~ 53 (1967)

33 G Herzberg Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure I Spectra of Diatomic Molecules (D Van Nostrand New York 1963) 2nd ed

34 E W Plummer and J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Lett 25 1493 (1970)

35 B J Waclawski and E W Plummer Phys Rev Lett 29 783 (1972)

36 B Feuerbacher and B Fitton Phys Rev Lett 29 786 (1972)

37 P A Redhead Can J Phys 42 886 (1964)

38 D Menzel and R Gomer J Chern Phys 41 3311 (1964)

39 D Lichtman and R McQuistan Progress in Nuclear Energy Analytical Chemistry edited by H A Elion and D C Stewart (Pergamon Press New York 1965) series 9 vol 4 p 93

173

40 U N Ageev and N I Ionov Progress in Surface Science vol 5 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1974) p 1

41 T E Madey Sur Sci 36 281 (1973)

42 A Benninghoven E Loebach and N Treitz J Vac Sci Techno1 2 600 (1972)

43 L W Swanson A E Bell C H Hinrichs L C Crouser and B E Evans Literature Review of Adsorption on Metal Surfaces vol 1 NASA CR-72402 (NASA Lewis Research Center Cleveland Ohio 1967) p 76

44 R V Culver and F C Tompkins Advan Catalysis l 67 (1959)

45 See reference 43 p 49

46 J A Becker Actes du 2ieme Congres International de 1a Cata1yse (Edition Technip Paris 1961) 1777

47 R A Armstrong Can J Phys 44 1753 (1966)

48 B J Hopkins and K R Pender Sur Sci ~ 316 (1966)

49 R A Collins and B H B1ott J App1 Phys 40 5390 (1969)

50 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chem Phys 54 4969 (1971)

51 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 42 485 (1974)

52 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 52 1150 (1970)

53 See reference 7 Fig 8

54 K Fujiwara J Phys Soc Japan 11 7 (1957)

55 G D Bond Disc Faraday Soc 41 200 (1966)

56 F M Propst unpublished

57 R L Park The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 281

58 T B Grime1y Adsorption-Desorption Phenomena edited by F Ricca (Academic Press New York 1972) p 215

59 L W Anders R S Hansen and L S Bartell J Chern Phys 595277(1973)

60 J R Schrieffer J Vac Sci Techno1 2 561 (1972)

174

61 D M Newns Phys Rev 178 1123 (1969)

62 J R Schrieffer and R Gomer Sur Sci 25 315 (1971)

63 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn Phys Rev Lett 30 610 (1973)

64 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn to be published

65 P J Jennings and E G McRae Sur Sci 23 363 (1970)

66 W H Weinberg J Vac Soc Technol lQ 89 (1973)

67 L A Harris J Appl Phys 39 1419 (1968)

68 C C Chang Sur Sci 25 53 (1971)

69 T Cooper PhD thesis University of Illinois Urbana Illinois 1970

70 E M Purcell Phys Rev 54 818 (1938)

71 R Herzog Zeits F Physik 89 449 (1934)

72 Coordinated Science Laboratory Progress Report for July 1970 through June 1971 University of Illinois Urbana Illinois

73 See for example Handbook and Catalog of Operational Amplifiers BurrshyBrown Research Corp 1969 p 44

74 R W Jnyner J Rickman and M W Roberts Sur Sci 39 445 (1973)

75 C Lea and C H B Mee Sur Sci 11 332 (1971)

76 W A Coghlan and R E Clausing A Catalog of Calculated Auger Transitions for the Elements ORNL-TM-3576 (Oak Ridge National Lab Oak Ridge Tenn 1971)

77 As read by optical pyrometer the edge of the target measured 22000 K and the center 2500oK

78 B B Dayton Trans 3rd AVS National Vacuum Symposium 1956 (Pergamon Press New York 1957) p 5

79 T E Madey Sur Sci 33 355 (1972)

80 S C Brown Basic Data of Plasma Physics (Technology Press of MIT Cambridge Mass and John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 115

81 H D Hagstrum Rev Mod Phys 23 185 (1951)

175

82 M Nishijima PhD thesis University of Illinois 1969

83 G D Watts A R Jones and B J Hopkins Sur Sci 45 705 (1974)

84 R A Armstrong Sur Sc i sect 478 (1967)

85 E H B1evis and C R Crowell Phys Rev 133 part A A580 (1964)

86 C R Crowell and R A Armstrong Phys Rev 114 1500 (1959)

87 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 55 4253 (1971)

88 R Frauenfelder J Vac Sci Technol sect 388 (1969)

89 G E Moore and F C Unterwald J Chem Phys 40 2639 (1964)

90 S Dushman Scientific Foundations of Vacuum Technigue (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 19

91 P S P Wei J Chem Phys 53 2939 (1970)

92 J C Tracy private communication

93 J J Lander and J Morrison J Appl Phys 34 3517 (1963)

94 M Fink and A C Yates Atomic Data (to be published)

95 G E Laramore and C B Duke Phys Rev ~ I 4783 (1970)

96 J F Wendelken PhD thesis University of Illinois 1975

97 An inner potential of 8 eV has been assumed in this calculation

98 A Guinier X-Ray Diffraction (W H Freeman and Co San Francisco 1963) p 192

99 K Seigbahn C Nordling A Fahlman R Nordberg K Hamrin J Helman G Johansson T Bergmark S E Karlsson K Lindgren and B Lindberg ESCA - Atomic Molecular and Solid State Structure Studied by Means of Electron Spectroscopy (Almqvist Wiksells Uppsala 1967)

100 W F Egelhoff and D L Perry Phys Rev Lett 34 93 (1975)

176

APPENDIX A

A tungsten tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple spot-welded to the

side of the crystal is used to measure target temperatures The thermocouple

was calibrated against a copper-constantan standard A low temperature

freezing slush of isopentane (2-methylbutane) was made in a dewar by adding

liquid nitrogen (Isopentane freezes at -15989degC) The solution was allowed

to slowly warm up to room temperature over three hours during which a semi-

static calibration was made The reference junction was kept in a slush of

distilled ice water The calibration is shown in Figure AI

Using an identical technique a tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26

rhenium thermocouple was also calibrated as shown in Figure A2 TIlis thermoshy

couple does not have an inflection point in the range 00 to -195degC and it

00 h t t1mes more sens1t1ve over t he temperature range to -lSOoC than the1S e1g

tungstentungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple A tungsten-S rhenium wire should

spot-weld to tungsten more readily than a pure tungsten wire Thus because

of its increased sensitivity and ease of attaching to the tungsten crystal a

tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple appears a better

temperature sensor for low temperature research on tungsten

In the apparatus used the wires associated with the target manipulashy

tor including the thermocouple leads wind around the manipulator shaft to

provide rotational motion In order to get the 76 mm (003 in) diameter

thermocouple wires to wind smoothly around the shaft it was found necessary to

spring load them by turning a short segment of the wires into a 16 mm diameter

spring Unfortunately the tungsten-5 rhenium wire available proved too

brittle to turn into a spring and thus could not be used

012 _ ___r____~_-r____~_-r____~_ ___r______r___r____r__r___

C- WI W-26 Re Thermocouple Calibration Reference Junction at OdegC W Lead +

~ 008-lJ

W-26 Re LeadshyiE w 004 ~ 0shy

8J

0 o E

t-shy-I -I

Q)

c -004 tshy

-008 I I I I I I I

-200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 shy

Temperature (OC) SP-1069

Figure Al Calibration curve for W-5 ReW-26 Re thermocouple

o

-gt -04E -lL ~ w -OS 2 0shy

8J -12

o E

W-5 Re I W-26 Re Thermocouple Co libration Reference Junct ion at OdegC W-5Re Lead + W-26 Re Leadshy

J shy --shy~ ~ t- 16 0----

-20 I I

-200 -ISO -160 -140 -120 -100 -SO -60 -40 -20 0

Temperature (OC)

SP-1l73

Figure A2 Calibration curve for WW-26 Re thermocouple

-J 00

179

APPENDIX B

When operating the spectrometer in the electron mode at an effective

pass energy E the output current of the electron multiplier N(E) is proporshy

tional to the electron current originating at the target with energy between E

and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance solid angle of the analyzer

An energy distribution of the electron signal from the target can be measured

by sweeping the effective pass energy of the instrument This distribution

consists of rapidly varying true secondary and characteristic loss structure

interpretable in terms of electron transitions and collective oscillations in

the target plus a smoothly varying background In order to separate the

structure ~rom the background the energy distribution is electronically

67differentiated using a technique proposed by Harrismiddot A small sinusoidal

oscillation is applied to the effective pass energy of the spectrometer so

that the energy of the electrons passing through the spectrometer oscillates

around the instantaneous dc pass energy E If the detected current N(E) is 3

expanded in a Taylors series around the energy E where the sinusoidal 3

oscillation is E-E = K sin wt the first four terms are 3

N(E) N(E ) + K dN (E l (1 - cos 2wt)3 dE

E=E E=E i3

(3 sin wt - sin 3wt) +

E=E 3

Rearranging

180

dN(E) ) + K3 term + S1n wt (B2)N(E) = N(E ) + + K dE(i E=E

i

K2 d2N(E) 4 )+ K term + cos 2wt + + ( 4 2dE E=E1

The coefficients of the sin wt and cos 2wt terms are found to be proportional

respectively to the first two derivatives of N(E) providing K is small enough

such that the higher order terms in K can be dropped Under this assumption

a signal proportional to the first or second derivative of N(E) is obtained

by synchronously detecting the appropriate harmonic of the output

If a peak structure in the output signal is represented by a

Gaussian G(E) centered at E and the background represented by a polynomialo

in E B(E) then N(E) and the first two derivatives of N(E) evaluated at E o

become

N(E) = B(E) + G(E) (B3) -~(E-EO)2

2 d N(E) = a + bE + cE + + 1 e 2 (B4)

(2TT)2

2N(E=E ) = a + bE + cE + d 1 (B5)o o 0 cr (2TT)2

dN(E) = b + 2cE + 0 (B6)o E=E

dE

o

-d 1 = 2c + (B7)1 2 0 (2TT)2 0

E=E o

- -

2

181

From Equation B6 the first derivative evaluated at E has no contribution o

from the structure G(E) Extremum points in dN(E)dE occur at (E ~ E )2 = 0 o

if the background terms of order 3 or greater are not considered Using this

result in Equation B6 gives

~dltplusmng) edN(E) = b + 2c (E to) + bull I (B8)dE

0- 0 (2n)2E=E + 0

0shy

The relation between the original signal N(E) and the synchronously

detected signals can be seen from Equations B4 through B8 There is some

background suppression in both modes If N(E) is slowly varying the higher

order background terms that remain are small The peak to peak height of

the first harmonic signal is

1dN dN = 4ccr + - 2cb 1 e-2~-2crG(E-E ~ 0) (B9)

dE dE 0 (2n)2 0

E=E -0E=E +u o o

The intensity of the second harmonic signal evaluated at E is approximately 0

proportional to1 G(E) Hence using the stated assumptions the detected 0 2 0

first and second harmonics of N(E) contain structure which is directly

proportional to G(E)

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as is

commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in looking at

electron scattering energy loss measurements

182

APPENDIX C

The process of desorption of ions from a surface by electron

bombardment is referred to as electron stimulated desorption The theory to

account for this phenomenon was independently proposed by Redhead37 and by

38Menzel and Gomer A brief explanation of their model follows

In Figure Cl schematic potential energy diagrams are given for the

metal plus ground state adsorbate CM + A) and metal plus ionic state (M- + A+)

as a function of separation distance x of the adsorbing atom or ion from the

metal surface These two curves are labeled VG(x) and V(x) for the ground

state and ionic state respectively The nature of these interactions has

been described37 8l and several interaction calculations for hydrogen on metal

59 63surfaces have been g~ven The zero in potential energy in Figure 41 is

defined as the energy of the ion A+ at rest at infinity from the surface of M

The nucleus of the chemisorbed adsorbate is located at the minimum in the

ground state potential energy curve The wave function ~G(x) of the adsorbate

in the ground state on the surface is shown centered at a position x which ~

corresponds to the minimum in energy of VG

VG determines ~G(x) Vertical

transitions from the ground state to the ionic state (labeled 1 in the

diagram) are induced by incident electron bombardment of the surface

Secondary electrons leaving the surface also can cause such transitions

Once excited the ion is subjected to a repulsive force and moves away from

the surface (indicated by 2) The ionized adsorbate can be neutralized as it

leaves the surface and hence desorb as a neutral (indicated by 3) or it can

be de-excited back to the ground state and not desorb (indicated by 4) Ions

183

V(x)

gt ~ Ion ~ ~ 2 )III V(xi)(I) c +E K M-+A+w 0 f (v)+=c (I) +shy0 Cl

14 3 I-ltP Neutral

M+A

Ede t

ltPG (x)

~

DistanceX SP-1201

Figuze Cl Schematic diagram of adsorbate-metal interactions showing the transitions involved in the theory of electron stimulated desorption

184

that originate at x x leave the surface with energy V(x) The energyL L

80distribution of the desorbed ions f(V(xraquo is determined by the reflectionL

2of the probability density distribution I~G(xi)1 through the ionic state

energy curve This can be given by the expression

P(x ) f(V(xraquo

L (Cl)L ~~Ix = x

L

where N is the number of species A adsorbed in the ground state per unit

area a is the cross section for excitation of the species A from the groundex

state to the ionic state (transition 1) ~G(x) is defined above and P(x ) isi

the probability that an ion starts from the position x = x and moves awayL

from the L gLvensurface without being neutralized P(x) can be by373881

P(x ) exp(- J~dx ~)i x v(x) (C2)

i

where R(x) is the rate that the ions produced at the surface by electron

impact are reneutralized v(x) is the velocity of the ion at a distance x

from the surface This depends explicitly on V(x) as shown by Equation C3

for an ion of mass M and charge q

2q (V(X i ) - V(Xraquo)21

v(x) ( M (C3)

Additional complexities for example multiple initial and ionic states or

electron induced state conversion can be added to this simple model

185

The mass transport occurring at the surface during an ESD measurement

can be described in a kinetic treatment which relates the observed ion signal

to physical parameters characteristic of the experimental conditions The

change with time of the surface coverage per area of an adsorbate dNdt is

given by the rate of arrival of the adsorbate onto the surface minus the rate

of desorption from the surface In the simplest formulation of these proshy

cesses only adsorption from the background and desorption due to electron

bombardment need be considered The electron stimulated desorption flux of

ions is assumed proportional to the electron current density j and to the e

surface coverage per unit area N The proportionality constant is

tthe total desorption cross section Q (NE ) Qt(NE ) is in general a pr~ pr~

function of both the coverage and the primary electron energy For the

simple model given above the total desorption cross section is the sum of

the ionic Q+ and neutral Qn desorption cross sections The adsorption

rate is equal to the striking rate times the sticking probability s(N)

which in general is a function of the coverage The time dependence of N can

now be written as

j Qt(NE )N dNdt = s(N)yP _ ~ pu (C 4)e

where P is the partial pressure of the adsorbing species and y is a constant

equal to the number of molecules that strike unit area of the surface per unit

time and pressure

The measured electron stimulated desorption yield of A ions i + isA

assumed proportional to the incident current i the coverage of A per unit e

area N and the detection efficiency of the instrument G The proportionality

186

constant is the ionic desorption cross section Q+(NE ) (Since the only pr~

adsorbate being considered in this work is hydrogen the subscript A will be

replaced by H) This relation for iH+ can be written

= i Q+(NE )NG (CS)e pr~

Equation C4 can be solved for N in closed form under certain

simplifying assumptions The dependence of the cross section on primary

energy does not affect the form of the solution (if the primary energy is

kept constant) Then Qt can be written Qt (E ) if the cross section canpri

be shown to be independent of coverage This is not the case in general so

its validity for each metal-adsorbate system has to be examined This is

done in the text for H2 adsorbed on W(100) so the assumption will be assumed

here Likewise the sticking probability will be assumed independent of N

Equation C4 can now be solved to yield

(C6)

N is the initial hydrogen coverage at t o and T is given by ~

(C7)

Combining Equations CS and C6 gives for the g+ ion yield

(C8)

187

where i is the initial ion yield at t = 0 and iH+ is given byH~ equil

+ esyPAG ~ (C9)

Q

Equation C8 shows that the H+ yield decreases with time to a

saturation value iH+ This decay of the ESD ion yield with time is equil

called a desorption curve A semilogarithmic plot of iH+ - i + versusHequil time should yield a straight line the slope of which is -17 From this

slope and the definition of 7 the total desorption cross section charactershy

izing the hydrogen binding state can be calculated

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

1S considerably more dbull40 a diffusionpressure ~nvo1ve Conceptually such

process can be considered in two steps 1) the diffusion of hydrogen from the

bulk to just inside the surface or to a near surface layer and 2) the

jumping from this configuration to surface sites Diffusion from the bulk to

the near surface layer could be described by Ficks law If N is the conshy

centration of hydrogen in the near surface layer and N the surface concentrashy

tion of hydrogen then the time dependence of N + N due to bulk diffusion

can be written as

d(N+Nl _ D dn (C 10)dt - dx

where D is the diffusion constant for hydrogen in tungsten and dndx is the

concentration gradient of hydrogen just inside the surface The coverage N

in surface sites will change as a result of hydrogen jumping from the near

188

surface layer to the surface and vice versa The rate of jumping to the

surface d( N )dt can be assumed proportional to the concentration Nt

and to some function f(N) which describes the availability of surface sites

The diffusion rate to the surface from the near surface layer would also be

exponentially dependent on an activation barrier energy E The reversebs

flux from the surface to the near surface layer can be written in an

equivalent form An expression for the change in surface concentration with

time due to diffusion to and from the near surface layer can be written as

-E kT -E kTb~~ = CbsNte s f(N) - CsbNe sb g(N) (ClI)

The first term on the right-hand side represents the rate of diffusion from

the near surface layer to the surface and the second term represents the

rate of diffusion from the surface back to the near surface layer cbs and

are constants Esb and g(N) correspond toE and f(N) respectivelycsb bs

A term representing depletion of the surface state due to incident electron

bombardment similar to the second term on the right of Equation C4 could

be added in Equation Cll This has been omitted since only the case je = 0

will be considered here In principle an expression for N can now be

obtained by solving Equations ClO and Cll A general solution is not easily

obtained However it is evident that the time dependence of N due to

diffusion could realistically be similar to that expected from background

adsorption For example for the isothermal case if Nt is assumed constant

and f(N) assumed equal to (1 - NN ) assumptions that are reasonable for max

small coverages it can be shown from Equation 44 that N increases

189

exponentially in time to an equilibrium value For N small this solution

would be approximately linear in time the same result obtained for the time

dependence of background adsorption However background pressure doesnt

enter into the above diffusion calculation If the fast state phenomena is

diffusion related N would be expected to be independent of background

pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence for

adsorption from the background

_ _

190

VITA

Stephen Parker Withrow was born in Washington DC on February 2

1945 He attended Northwestern Senior High School in Hyattsville Maryland

graduating in 1963 He enrolled at Cornell University in Ithaca New York in

September 1963 In June 1967 he received a Bachelor of Science in

Engineering Physics In September 1967 he enrolled in the Physics Department

at the University of Illinois in Urbana Illinois He received his Masters

of Science in Physics in February 1969 He served at a Teaching Assistant

in the Physics Department for four years and also as a Research Assistant in

the Coordinated Science Laboratory while doing his thesis research He is

the coauthor of the publication Environmentally Assisted Crack Growth in

Glass G M Sinclair and S P Withrow Naval Research Laboratory Report

6635

_-------------shy-----------_ bull

Page 2: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …

INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE TUNGSTEN (100) SURFACE

Stephen Parker Withrow PhD Department of Physics

University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign 1975

A new apparatus for surface studies has been constructed and placed

in operation The instrument incorporates a monoenergetic beam of electrons

a high resolution high sensitivity electrostatic energy spectrometer

for electrons and ions plus other hardware and electronics necessary to

perform work function measurements Auger electron spectroscopy electron

stimulated desorption of ions low energy electron diffraction and electron

scattering energy loss measurements It has been used to investigate

geometric energetic and kinetic properties associated with the chemisorpshy

tion of hydrogen on a single crystal tungsten (100) surface over a temperashy

ture range from 600 c to -1500 C

Auger spectroscopy data indicate heating thecrystl11 to 2206degK

is sufficient to clean the surface of carbon and oxygen Howeverweakl

structure is observed between 475 eV and 520 eV Possible sources of this

structure have been considered

The work function changes observed at both 60 0 C and -1500 C as a

function of exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen are equivalent within

experimental error The full monolayer changes in work function with hydrogen

adsorption are 098 eV and 092 eV at the two temperatures respectively

Cooling the clean surface from 2200 C to _1500 C increases the work function

~ 005 eV

Hydrogen ions are desorbed from the dosed tungsten surface following

electron impact The distribution in energy of these ions has a Gaussian

line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 eV and a full width

at half maximum of 26 eV The ion yield is found to be coverage dependent

reaching a maximum at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV for desorpshy

tion at 600C and -150oC respectively The total desorption cross section

-20 2 0for H+ from the S2 hydrogen state 1S calculated to be 5xlO cm at 60 C

-19 2 0and 12xlO cm at -150 C

A new hydrogen binding state labeled the fast state has been

observed and characterized using ESD techniques This state is desorbable

if the undosed crystal is cooled below room temperature It is populated to

-4 a very low coverage ~10 monolayer by adsorption from the background of

some other t han H T e tota esorpt10n cross cm2spec1es 2 hId sect1on 10- 17 and

energy distribution of the fast state are markedly different than for the S

states

LEED pattern changes observed as a function of hydrogen coverage

are in good agreement with results published in the literature The intenshy

sity of the c(2x2) pattern associated with the S2 hydrogen state maximizes

at a work function change with adsorption of 015 eV LEED elastic intensity

profiles have been obtained for several low index beams These are compared

to theoretical microscopic model calculations and to published experimental

profiles A c(2x2) LEED pattern is obtained if the crystal is cooled below

room temperature Attempts have been made to correlate the appearance of this

pattern to changes in measurements taken in this low temperature range with

other techniques No significant bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen was

found No evidence was found from work function and electron scattering

experiments to support the hypothesis that the low temperature c(2x2)

pattern results from hydrogen on the surface In addition the fast hydrogen

state is not believed to be responsible for the c(2x2) pattern LEED

intensity profiles from the undosed cold surface c(2x2) pattern and from the

c(2x2) pattern associated with the ~2 hydrogen state are not identical an

indication that the atomic geometry responsible for the two patterns may not

be the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been obtained as a

function of hydrogen coverage for loss energies of 0 eV ~ w lt 40 eV Hydrogen

adsorption has a marked effect on the spectra Fine structure in the data

has been discussed and compared to photoemission data Cooling the clean

crystal below room temperature causes only a slight change in the energy loss

spectrum

iii

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I would like to sincerely thank my advisor Professor F M Propst

for guidance given throughout the course of this research and for his knowledge

of surface research which helped shape this work Dr C B Duke for many

helpful conversations and for assistance in the analysis of the data my wife

Lois for her patience and steadfast encouragement my parents and parents-inshy

law for their generous and needed support Paul Luscher and John Wendelken for

their creativity and cooperation in the design of the apparatus and for many

interesting scientific discussions Jim Burkstrand and Chris Foster for their

friendship and technical help on many occasions Bob Bales George Bouck Bob

Fults Bill Beaulin Lyle Bandy and Bill Lawrence for design assistance and

expert workmanship in the construction of the apparatus Nick Vassos and Bill

Thrasher for the imaginative and superior work in materials processing necesshy

sary in the construction of the instrument Gene Gardner and co-workers for

able assistance in electronics Bob MacFarlane and assistants for their high

quality draftmanship Jack Gladin and Jim Gray for an excellent job on the

photography needed for this research Bob Ebeling for his cooperation in the

print shop Chris Fleener for an excellent typing of the manuscript and the

rest of the staff of the Coordinated Science Laboratory whose efforts have

been gratefully appreciated during my tenure as a graduate student

bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter Page

1 MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

11 Introduction and Motivationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

12 Review of Literature bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

121 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4 122 Thermal Desorptionbull o 4 123 LEED and HEEDbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 7 124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and

Photoemissionbullbullbull 100 bullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbull

125 Electron Stimulated Desorptionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 12 126 Work Functionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 13o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

1 27 Chemical Probes bullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull 14I) O

128 Chemisorption Models bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 15 1 29 Theoretical Treatment bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 19 1 210 Literature Surnmaryo 20

13 Review of Experimental Techniques bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 21

2 EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull ~ bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

21 CGeneral Description bull 22

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shieldingbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 25

24 Energy Spectrometer 29

25 Spectrometer Electronics bullbull 45o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

26 LEED Display System 490 bullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull I)

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 51

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 57

29 Gas Handling System o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 62

210 Mass Spectrometer bullbullbullbull o 64

3 EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE AND RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

31 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

32 Experimental Procedure o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current

Measurements 6811 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull

323 Target Temperature Measurement bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 325 Ion Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 72o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

v

33 Ion Species Identificationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 74

34 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 77

35 u+ Ion Desorption Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 351 ut Ion Energy Distributionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 352 Desorption Curve Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 93 353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State a+ Ion

Signal 4) 96

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 98

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull lll

37 Electron Scattering Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 119

4 DISCUSSION OF RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

42 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 127

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 129 431 Room Temperature Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 130 432 Low Temperature Fast State Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 135 433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull142

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 145

45 Electron Scattering Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 161

5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull165

REFERENCES 171

APPENDIX A 0 176 poundI

APPENDIX B 9 c 179

APPENDIX C 0 182 0 bull

VITA 190lilt bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbull

1

CHAPTER 1

MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

11 Introduction and Motivation

The experimental investigation of chemisorption of gases onto metallic

surfaces has uncovered in the past decade a baffling complexity of adsorption

geometries and binding state kinetics and energetics A growing interest in

surface phenomena generated by the questions raised in these researches and

by the long anticipated use of the answers has led to the rapid development

of new surface probing techniques and to an increase in the availability of new

technologies compatible with surface research Aided by the new technologies

and techniques chemisorption research has been undertaken on many different

systems (system =solid substrate + gas adsorbate) under a wide range of

environmental conditions Surface theoreticians have proposed microscopic and

phenomenological models with which data have been analyzed and compared A

large experimental and theoretical literature in the field has resulted

The study of adsorption on metal surfaces has among its primary

objectives a detailed description of the physical geometry of the atoms in the

surface layers and a quantitative understanding of electronic and chemical

surface phenomena While considerable progress has been made in documenting

gas-surface phenomena it has been only in the past three years that any

credible claims to understanding specific surface overlayer geometries have

1been made At the same time many basic questions involving system kinetics

and energetics have not been adequately resolved 2

It has become apparent from the failure of the research effort to

satisfy the above objectives and from seemingly conflicting data that adequate

2

characterization is basic to all surface experimentation The need for such

characterization has been strongly emphasized by disagreement between quasishy

similar research performed at different locations Small impurity concentrashy

tions small changes in crystal orientation minor temperature differences etc

often have considerable effects on experimental measurements

A corollary to the necessity of being able to characterize the

surface is the importance of being able to control the surface characterization

In order to compare data it is necessary to reproduce all experimental paramshy

eters accurately The theory to which experimental data are compared is

constrained by complexity to be based on ideal clean substrates with a

definable gas-surface interaction It is desirable to be able to choose the

adsorbate-substrate system and experimental parameters that can also be used

with theoretical models Of course compromises are inevitable

One approach in surface research has been to incorporate several

experimental techniques into one apparatus At the present time this approach

is increasingly more common A combination of surface sensitive probes offers

many advantages It provides for more checks of the data against results

published in the literature It allows for better characterization of the

experimental parameters It allows surface phenomena to be probed in more than

one way in order to eliminate ambiguities andor to reinforce conclusions It

eliminates the uncertainties that arise from data taken at different locations

using the techniques separately hence it allows better correlations between

data taken using the different techniques

In this study several aspects of the chemisorption interaction of

hydrogen with the low index (100) plane of single crystal tungsten denoted

3

W(100) have been investigated The choice of the tungsten-hydrogen system is

motivated by several factors The literature raises questions on the unusual

state behavior observed when hydrogen adsorbs on W(100) questions which our

apparatus is especially well-suited to study In addition the interaction of

hydrogen with close packed planes of single crystal metals including W(100)

is of particular interest to theoreticians since hydrogen is the simplest

molecular gas as detailed in Sections 128 and 129 below recent theories

of chemisorption have been applied to the hydrogen-tungsten system Tungsten

was chosen as the substrate metal because of its relative ease of preparation

and cleaning and because the large body of literature on the hydrogen-tungsten

system indicates wide interest in this interaction

In particular this research is concentrated in three areas Tung~

sten when cleaned and subsequently cooled to below room temperature exhibits

an anomalous centered (2x2) denoted C(2x2) low energy electron diffraction

pattern The possibility that this is caused by hydrogen diffusing from the

bulk or adsorbing from the background has been investigated Secondly the

room temperature and low temperature hydrogen adsorption binding states have

been studied using electron stimulated desorption and electron spectroscopy

Finally low energy electron diffraction has been used in an investigation of

the atomic geometry of the clean tungsten surface and the geometry of one of

the hydrogen binding states

The remaining sections of this chapter summarize literature relating

to this research Chapter 2 details the construction and performance of the

experimental apparatus A presentation of the experimental data is made in

Chapter 3 A discussion of the results is made in Chapter 4 A summaryof

4

the research and conclusions from it are given in Chapter 5

12 Review of Literature

121 Introduction

Experimental investigation of the adsorption of hydrogen on tungsten

has been carried out using field emitter tips macroscopic polycrystalline

surfaces and all the low index orientation single crystal faces including

W(lOO) From the wide range of results it is clear that the substrate exerts

a strong influence on the adsorption properties The question has been raised

whether adsorption models postulated from polycrystalline substrates can be

3extended even qualitatively to single crystal systems Likewise there are

such sharp differences in the chemisorption behavior of hydrogen onto the

different single crystal tungsten surfaces that the specific physical process

governing adsorption on each face appears to be unique to that face This

review will therefore be concerned for the most part with literature dealing

with hydrogen adsorption on W(lOO) the gas-substrate system used in this

research

The following data review is presented in subsections each concenshy

trating on a specific experimental technique or class of experiments Subsecshy

tion 127 includes some gas mixing literature which was considered relevant

and Subsection 129 gives a bibliography of some related chemisorption

theoretical papers

122 Thermal Desorption

One technique widely employed in investigation of the kinetics of gas

456adsorption has been thermal or flash desorption By monitoring the system

5

pressure changes of a species while rapidly heating the crystal inferences

can be made on the existence of binding states adsorption energies and reaction

7 8 order Heating is accomplished by a focussed light beam electron bombardshy

7 9ment or ohmic losses bull

The strongest indication that hydrogen exhibits multiple state

adsorption behavior on W(lOO) comes from flash desorption data Tamm and

8Schmidt 7 and Madey and Yates found for room temperature adsorption that two

large peaks are observed in the plot of pressure of H2 versus temperature

These peaks are centered at 4500 K and approximately 550oK Only hydrogen

molecules are observed to be desorbed from the surface Using desorption rate

456theory the lower temperature (~l) state is found to obey first order

kinetics the peak temperature being independent of initial coverage The

higher temperature (~2) state obeys second order kinetics the peak temperature

moving down from approximately 5800 K to 5500 K as the initial coverage is

increased

In addition to the two main peaks several small peaks comprising a

total of less than 10 percent of the desorbed hydrogen are observed during a

flash when the crystal is cooled to nitrogen temperature before hydrogen

exposure These states are believed to result from adsorption onto edges and

other non-(lOO) crystal orientations 8

The dependence of the desorption energy Ed on coverage is weak

~l 8 ~2 8with Ed = 252 kcallmole and Ed = 323 kcalmole As would be predicted

from this result the ~2 state is largely populated before the ~l state begins

to fill The ratio of the populations in the states at full coverage n~1n~2

8 lOis 2111 Jelend and Menzel point out that the cross section for electron

6

desorption (see Subsection 125) from the ~1 state is considerably smaller

than that of the ~2 state a result not predicted from the experimental flash

desorption binding energies

11Tibbetts using a stepped temperature flash desorption technique

has shown that hydrogen is bound to the surface of po1ycrysta11ine tungsten

W(110) and W(lll) with a distribution of binding energies ranging from

162 kca1mo1e (07 eV) to 415 kca1mo1e (lS eV) Using this technique

desorption at a constant temperature from a distribution of states can be easily

distinguished from desorption from a state with a unique binding energy While

he did not extend his work to W(100) these results suggest that hydrogen does

not bind to the surface at a few energies but rather with a range of binding

energies Tibbetts also shows that the determination of the order of the

desorption process is difficult for adsorption into a range of binding energies

In experiments using a combination of hydrogen and deuterium as room

temperature adsorbates the elemental composition of the desorbed ~1 and ~2

states shows complete isotopic mixing between the states7S independent of the

adsorption sequence or ratios However for low temperature adsorption

complete state conversion is not observed for all the additional small peaks

Where mixing is observed atomic adsorption is suggested Where mixing is not

observed molecular adsorption is inferred

Some theoretical models indicate that multiple peak flash desorption

spectra may be due to binding energy changes caused by adsorbate-adsorbate

interactions12 or order-disorder transactions during f1ash3 13 rather than

actual distinct multiple binding states under the adsorption conditions

7

123 LEED and HEED

Low energy electron diffraction or LEED refers to the coherent

scattering of a monoenergetic focused electron beam from the surface of a

crystalline solid Electrons in the energy range 0 lt E lt 300 eV interact

strongly with the ion cores and valence electrons of the solid The inelastic

mean free path is on the order of 10 X As a consequence electrons which are

observed elastically have been backscattered within the first several surface

layers in the solid making LEED a surface sensitive probe 14 15 The periodic

translational symmetry of the surface leads to the momentum conservation laws

I

= (11)~I ~II + g

= (2mEh2)t sin reg (12)~II

where ~II is the momentum parallel to the surface of the emerging electron and

~ is the parallel momentum of the incident electron The vector g is a

reciprocal lattice vector of the solid surface and reg is the polar angle of the

incident beam As a result of the conservation laws the scattered electrons

emerge in a series of beams called a spot pattern which is a manifestation

of the surface symmetry The beams are labelled by their corresponding g

vectors Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores is

extracted from the plot of elastically scattered electron intensity versus

16 17incident energy called elastic intensity profiles or I-V curves

Changes in the LEED spot pattern resulting from hydrogen adsorption

18onto W(lOO) at room temperature have been reported by Estrup and Anderson and

19by Yonehara and Schmidt As hydrogen is adsorbed at room temperature the

8

(lxl) pattern characteristic of clean tungsten changes into a weak C(2x2)

pattern at a hydrogen coverage e of less than 005 monolayer (where e = 1

15 2monolayer at a coverage of 2xlO hydrogen atomsem which is 2 hydrogen atoms

for each surface tungsten atom) The (1212) spots become sharp and intense

with increased hydrogen adsorption reaching a maxima in intensity at approxishy

19 18mately 015 monolayer or e = 025 monolayer (Coverage in both cases was

determined by flash desorption) The (1212) spots split into four new spots

which move apart continuously and upon further hydrogen adsorption eventually

19form 13-order streaks at a coverage of ~ 035 monolayer These in turn

change at higher coverage into poorly developed 14-order features with the

(012) spots missing Finally near e = 10 all extra diffraction features

are gone and the LEED pattern returns to a (lxl) symmetry This series of LEED

pattern changes is reversible with coverage

For hydrogen adsorption at 1950 K the C(2x2) pattern develops

maximizes in intensity at e ~ 18 and splits into four beams similar to room

temperature adsorption However the higher coverage LEED structures third

19 0order streaks and fourth order spots are not observed At 78 K adsorption

of hydrogen produces half-order C(2x2) spots that maximize in intensity at

e ~ 027 Additional hydrogen adsorption beyond this causes the half-order

19spot intensity to decrease but with no splitting of the spots

If clean W(lOO) is allowed to cool below room temperature a sharp

19and intense C(2x2) pattern is observed even though total coverage due to the

background of H2 and CO is less than e = 001 as determined by flash desorption

measurements The intensity of these half-order beams can be altered by

additional hydrogen adsorption or by various hydrogen and oxygen heat treatmenm

9

l9Yonehara and Schmidt have postulated that the extra spots may result from

hydrogen endothermally soluble in tungsten diffusing to the surface Possible

alternative explanations include the reconstruction of the clean tungsten

surface or impurity over layer adsorption from the background It should be

20noted that Plummer and Bell saw no effects upon cooling their field emitter

tip to 78 0 K that they could attribute to hydrogen diffusion to the surface

Elastic intensity profiles for several beams have been measured by

18 21Estrup and Anderson and by Papageorgopoulos and Chen at room temperature

Estrup and Anderson reported profiles for (00) and (1212) tEED lJeams out

to 300 eV The intensity variation for the (OO) beam was found to be indepenshy

dent of hydrogen coverage a manifestation of the relatively weak scattering

cross section of a hydrogen ion core relative to that of tungsten The

additional beams observed on adsorption would be expected to be more sensitive

13to the adsorbed overlayer Estrup found the intensity of the (1212) beams

for H W(100) and D W(100) to decrease as a function of temperature between2 2

300o

K and 6000 K at a constant incident energy but neither obeyed the Debyeshy

22Waller relation Estrup interpreted this result to imply the adsorbed

species are directly involved in the diffraction process

19Yonehara examined the tEED spot intensities as a function of

temperature down to liquid nitrogen temperatures His results are examined

in the data discussion in Chapter 4

The hydrogen-WlOO) system has also been studied using high energy

electron diffraction or HEED23 This technique utilizes the strong forward

scattering of high energy electrons in probing the surface by having the

incident beam strike the solid at grazing incidence The resulting diffraction

10

patterns are sensitive to the translational symmetry of the surface As in

LEED a diffraction pattern with C(2x2) symmetry is observed during initial

hydrogen adsorption With further hydrogen exposure the beams broaden some

splitting is observed and eventually the half-order intensity decreases

completely The width of the observed half-order beams has been interpreted to

indicate hydrogen initially adsorbs into a large number of small square or

rectangular domains each consisting of 20 to 25 atoms with sides parallel to

the [100J directions

124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and Photoemission

The electronic structure of the surface layers of solids can be

characterized by electron emission spectroscopies Such techniques require a

surface sensitive perturbation on the gas-solid system leading to an electron

yield A spectrometer is used to energy analyze the emitted or scattered

24 25electrons In electron scatter~ng a monoenergetic beam of electrons is

directed onto a crystal The inelastically scattered signal containing

quantitative information about electronic excitations at the surface is

measured as a function of energy loss Field emission is a technique in which

application of a high positive electric field to the surface lowers the potenshy

26tia1 barrier for electrons to tunnel out of the system The total energy

distribution of electrons emitted as a result of the applied field contains

bull 27 28spectroscopic data on the adsorbed spec~es Structure induced by the

adsorbate in the elastic tunneling spectrum is thought to be a measure of the

d f i h f h d b 2930e1ectron~c ens~ty 0 states n t e v~c~n~ty 0 tea sor ate The

inelastic tunneling spectrum reveals discrete excitation energies in the

11

gas-surface system In photoemission or ftotoelectron spectroscopy an incident

monochromatic light beam incident on the solid induces emission of electrons by

interband transitions with or without an inelastic scattering after the initial

31 exc i tat~on

The vibrational spectrum of hydrogen adsorbed on the tungsten (100)

32surface has been observed by Propst and Piper using inelastic low energy

20electron scattering and by Plummer and Bell using field emission Propst

and Piper found two peaks in the energy loss distribution E - E pr~mary scattered

at 135 meV and 69 meV for all coverages used up to saturation These results

are interpreted as indicating hydrogen atoms are multiply bonded to tungsten

33atoms No losses near 550 meV the vibrational energy of molecular hydrogen

were observed Plummer and Bell measured the total energy distribution of

field emitted electrons from tungsten (100) as a function of coverage of

hydrogen and deuterium at several temperatures Discrete losses at 100 meV

and 50 meV for deuterium which correspond to the 135 meV and 69 meV vibrational

losses observed by Propst and Piper were evident for deuterium in the a state2

No discrete energy losses at 550 meV or 390 meV the molecular vibrational

levels of H2 and D2 respectively were measured Hence there was no observable

molecular adsorption at room temperature

Additional structure in the field emission total energy distribution

is observed as a function of hydrogen adsorption The clean surface spectrum

has two peaks 04 eV and 15 eV down from the Fermi level which have been

d ifi d h h d f d h h f 34 A h d ~ ent e as ~g ens~ty 0 states assoc~ate w~t t e sur ace s y rogen

(or deuterium) coverage increases between 0 and 5xl014 atomscm2

ie while

the ~2 state is filling the surface states disappear and the field emitted

12

energy distribution changes from that of clean tungsten to a spectrum indicative

of resonance tunneling through a level positioned 09 eV below the Fermi energy

There is a shoulder at -11 eV and an energy dependent background With

further adsorption up to saturation this energy distribution characteristic

of the ~2 state shifts to a broad level centered at 26 eV below the Fermi

level This is interpreted to indicate that the ~1 state does not adsorb on

top of the ~2 state

35The photoemission results of Wac1awski and P1ummer and Feuerbacher

36and Fitton are in agreement with those obtained using the field emission

technique As hydrogen adsorbs on the surface emission from the 04 eV

surface state decreases The level 09 eV down from the Fermi energy as well

as a level 5 eV down remain unchanged by adsorption At full coverage a strong

peak at -25 eV is observed

125 Electron Stimulated Desorption

Desorption of energetic ions and neutrals from a gas over layer can

be induced by electron bombardment This process termed electron stimulated

desorption or ESD37383940 is described below in the discussion of the data

in Chapter 4 In brief intensity and energy measurements of the ion yield can

be interpreted in terms of the parameters characterizing the binding energy

curve of the adsorbed state and adsorption states can be classified by cross

section for desorption_ ion energy distributions primary energy threshold for

desorption etc

ESD has been employed to study adsorption kinetics for the hydrogenshy

41 ~ tungsten (100) system Madey obtained a coverage dependence yield of H ions

13

observing an ion signal during the initial stages of hydrogen adsorption that

reached a maximum at a coverage of e = 017 and then decayed to zero yield

23 2after e = 075 the maximum cross section obtained was 18x10- cm at a

primary electron energy of 100 eV Tamm and Schmidt7 reported a maximum cross

section for H+ desorption of 10- 21 cm 2bull Benninghoven Loebach and Treitz42

10and Je1end and Menze1 obtained qualitatively similar (to Madey) coverage

dependencies on tungsten ribbons which were believed to be predominantly of

(100) crystallites the main difference between these results and Madeys is

the observation of a residual signal at high hydrogen coverage

The cross section results indicate that the a state even though it2

is more tightly bound than the a state provides more hydrogen ions upon1

electron impact The cross section for ion desorption from the a1 state is

d41 10-25est1mate to be 1ess t han cm2 bull

+No energy distributions of the desorbed H ions have been reported

The dependence of the desorption cross section on the primary electron energy

10has not been investigated Je1end and Menzel found their results independent

of temperature for temperatures above room temperature No ESD results for

otemperatures less than 300 K have been reported

126 Work Function

The work function is the minimum amount of energy required to remove

43 an electron from a meta1 An adsorbate may alter the potential barrier for

electrons at the surface and hence change the work function Such is the case

for hydrogen on W(100) Hydrogen adsorbs as an electronegative ion on W(100)

thereby increasing the work function

14

44Using a retarding potential current-voltage techn~que Madey and

8Yates reported a linear relation between work function change and hydrogen

coverage over the entire coverage range for adsorption occurring at a

temperature 0 f 2= 300 0 K Coverages were determined by flash desorption

Total work function change at one monolayer was found to be 090 eV which

corresponds to a constant dipole moment per adsorbed atom of 015 Debye

15 2(assuming a total coverage of 15xlO atomsem)

Estrup and Anderson18 using the retarding potential technique and

Plummer and Bel120 using a field emission Fowler-Nordheim plot45 found a

work function change versus coverage relationship which deviated only slightly

8from being linear in near agreement with the results of Madey and Yates

46 47Becker using field emission and Armstrong using a retarding potential

technique found a work function change for the H W(100) system of approximately2

48090 eV when e = 10 Hopkins and Pender obtained an anomalously low value

49of 054 eV while Collins and Blott obtained a high value of 109 eV for the

same coverage

127 Chemical Probes

Hydrogen adsorption has also been studied using a chemical probe

ie by coadsorbing some additional different gas with the hydrogen and

observing the effect this additional species had on results obtained using

techniques discussed in previous sections

50Yates and Madey found using flash desorption that CO coadsorption

onto a hydrogen monolayer displaces both the Sl and S2 binding states with

near unity probability in doing so initially replacing these states with a

15

less tightly bound hydrogen state After high CO exposure no hydrogen remains

on the surface if the coadsorption is done at room temperature At lower

temperatures only about 10 percent of the hydrogen is desorbed Jelend and

Menzel lO 5l found that the ionic and total desorption cross sections for

hydrogen the sticking probability and bond strength of hydrogen are all

affected by preadsorption of CO or oxygen Yates and Madey3 found that N2

slowly replaces preadsorbed hydrogen at temperatures greater than 300oC Below

2730

K the displacement of hydrogen by N2 does not occur

These results all show that small impurity concentrations of CO N

and 0 if intentionally introduced do affect the resulting hydrogen chemishy

sorption properties These experiments underscore the necessity of surface

chemical characterization

128 Chemisorption Models

7 18 19 52 Several models have been proposed to account for the

experimental results from hydrogen chemisorption on W(lOO) Each of these

models embodies some combination of the following three phenomenological

assumptions 1) The tungsten surface is ideal planar and free of contamishy

nants 2) There are available two types of adsorbates namely hydrogen atoms

53and molecules 3) There are three high symmetry logical bonding sites on

a BCC (100) face usually designated by the letters A B and C These

positions are A a bridge site with 2 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen

equidistant from two adjacent surface tungsten atoms B a four fold symmetric

site with 5 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen located on a surface normal that

passes through the center of a surface primitive unit cell and C the hydrogen

16

located directly above a surfac~ atom with one nearest neighbor There are

15 152x10 A sitescm2 and 1x10 B ore sites~m2 on middotW(100)

The proposed models attempt to explain or at least be consistent

with empirical results presented in Sections 121 through 127 A summary

of salient features of the reported research includes a) a linear work function

15change with coverage b) a saturation coverage of between 15 and 20x10 H

2atomscm c) a coverage dependent adsorption layer symmetry including a we11shy

ordered surface at low coverages d) the appearance at low temperatures of a

surface translational symmetry not equivalent to room temperature clean

tungsten e) adsorption into states which produces a two state thermal desorpshy

tion spectrum with relative coverages in the two states of nQ n = 21 f) a ~1 ~2

coverage dependence for the observed electronic structure including the

absence at high coverage of structure observed at low coverages and g) no

observed vibrational levels which correspond to free H2 molecule

Following is a short review of several proposed surface models

18Estrup and Anderson account for their LEED spot pattern results

using a model wherein the hydrogen molecules dissociate upon adsorption and

migrate initially to form islands of hydrogen atoms located at type A sites in

a e(2x2) structure Dissociation is assumed since the e(2x2) pattern maximizes

15 2at a coverage of 25x10 mo1ecu1escm whereas without dissociation it would

maX1m1ze at 5 1015 mo ecu1es cm2bull e site adsorptionx 1 Although type B or type

could also produce the initial e(2x2) LEED pattern these sites are rejected

15 2because of the following 1) There are only 1x10 B or e sitescm This is

not enough sites to accommodate a full monolayer coverage if all binding is

atomic and if it is into equivalent sites as suggested by the linear work

17

function change with coverage 2) While a complete 14-order LEED pattern is

possible with type B or type C sites it is not possible to produce a 14-order

54pattern with (012) spots missing using B or C sites As the adsorption

14 2proceeds past a surface density of 5xlO hydrogen atomscm the adatoms conshy

tinuously rearrange into long period superlattices with antiphase domains

that produce successively the 12-order spot splitting the 13-order streak

(only partly ordered domains) the 14-order pattern and finally the (lxl)

full coverage structure

This model has been criticized for not accounting for the two

observed binding states and for predicting a maximum in intensity of the half

order spots at e = 025 these beams maximize at less than that coverage In

addition the authors themselves questioned the idea of well-ordered super-

lattices

In order to explain the relative intensity of the two states at

saturation seen in flash desorption n~~ = 21 Tamm and Schmidt7

propose a 1 2

model wherein the initial hydrogen adsorption is atomic and at B sites in a

C(2x2) pattern At full coverage the remaining B sites are filled with

hydrogen molecules B sites are chosen over C sites using molecular orbital

55arguments A sites are rejected as there are too many to satisfy this model

This model satisfies the second order kinetics observed for the ~2 state and

the first order kinetics observed for the ~l state In addition it explains

14 2 7 their saturation coverage of gt 3xl0 moleculescm One weakness of this

model pointed out by Tamm and Schmidt is that it is not obvious the model can

account for the observed LEED and work function results Also no molecular

vibrations have been observed

18

19yonehara and Schmidt propose a three bonding state model that is

more consistent with the low temperature LEED results In their model an

additional state labeled ~3 is always present at the surface in A or B

2sites with a density of 5xl014 atomscm bull This state orders on the surface at

low temperatures to give the C(2x2) pattern observed At room and higher

temperatures it goes into solution (or perhaps disorders) becoming invisible

to LEED In the type A site model adsorption from the background fills in the

remaining A sites sequentially with the ~2 and ~l states This model is similar

18to that proposed by Estrup and Anderson except that the ~3 state although

invisible to LEED at room and higher temperatures occupies 14 of the type A

sites This model eliminates the stoichiometric objection to Estrup and

Andersons model The model depends on the possibility of type A sites being

occupied by states with considerably different properties If the ~3 state

occupies type B sites ~2 state adsorption fills in the remaining type B sites

and then ~l hydrogen adsorbs into random or possibly type C sites This

second model does not explain satisfactorily work function or LEED spot pattern

experimental data

56Propst found using a point defect type calculation that only a

B-site model of adsorption would produce the observed vibrational energies of

5769 meV and 135 meV Park using LEED intensity arguments found that only

adsorption into sites with 4-fold symmetry on the (100) surface (type B or type

C sites) would be consistent with broadening and splitting of the half-order

beams while the integral beams remain sharp

8Madey and Yates offer a critique of several of the proposed models

19

No adsorption geometry adequately accounts for all the observed data

It is possible that surface hydrogen mobility adsorbate-adsorbate interactions

tungsten surface reconstruction and other surface phenomenon must be better

understood before this system can be adequately characterized

129 Theoretical Treatment

Several theoretical treatments of hydrogen-tungsten chemisorption

phenomenon have been reported in the literature as discussed below

7 18 19 52 The most elementary geometric models already have been

mentioned in Section 128 Grimley58 considers the hydrogen on W(lOO) system

59in an Anderson-Hamiltonian formalism Anders and Hansen obtain the relative

bonding energies of hydrogen chemisorbed at the three high symmetry adsorption

sites of W(lOO) using an extended Ruckel molecular orbital theory Their

results indicated a preference for hydrogen adsorption at type C sites

60Schrieffer offers a review on the theory of chemisorption in which he

concludes the Hartree-Fock approximation to the Anderson model for hydrogenshy

61metal adsorption is invalid Newns using the same approximation also shows

62the one-electron HF theory to be invalid Schrieffer and Gomer study the

exchange interaction between the adatom and the solid which results from the

nonorthogonality of the adatom and solid wave functions Smith Ying

h 63 64 h h d 1 h bl band Ko n lnvestlgate t e y rogen-meta c emlsorptlon pro em y

requiring complete self-consistency between the three-dimensional electrostatic

potential used and charge density obtained They calculate electron scattering

resonance levels and ground state vibrational frequency Jennings and McRae

using a multiple scattering LEED theory (but neglecting inelastic collision

65

20

damping) show that there can be half-order beams of high intensity in the H -W2

k W b 66 1 b dsystem even t hough h ydrogen 1S a wea scatterer e1n erg app 1es a on-

energy bond-order model of chemisorption to the hydrogen-W(100) system and

predicts binding energies for the molecular state and atomic state of hydrogen

on W(100) to be 262 kca1mo1e and 322 kca1mo1e respectively

1210 Literature Summary

Some conclusions can be drawn concerning the state of understanding

of the hydrogen-tungsten system and in particular the H W(100) system2

Despite considerable research experimental uncertainties still exist

in the H W(100) interaction It is still not clear if hydrogen adsorbs as a2

molecule The preponderance of evidence from electron scattering vibrational

levels field emission and H -D gas mixing flash desorption measurements2 2

indkates most hydrogen probably adsorbs atomically Multiple state behavior

is exhibited It is not known however if this observed state behavior is a

result of distinct hydrogen-tungsten interactions it is believed that to a

large extent it is driven by coverage dependent adsorbate-adsorbate interacshy

tions There is no model that can successfully incorporate the measured work

function flash desorption and ESD parameters The adsorption sites are not 15 15 2

known Total coverage at one monolayer is between 15xlO and 2x10 atomsem

which is more than the number of surface tungsten atomscm2 in the (100) face

LEED results at different temperatures indicate a possible temperature depenshy

dence for the adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO) Particularly confusing is

the anomalous LEED result obtained at low temperatures for the clean surface

Only small adsorption temperature dependencies are found in sticking probability

21

work function changes and flash desorption results

13 Review of Experimental Techniques

As indicated in Section 11 this research has been undertaken in an

attempt to characterize more fully the hydrogen-W(lOO) interaction A multi-

technique spectrometer has been used Chapter 2 gives a discussion of the

instrument This instrument is capable of making work function Auger electron

spectroscopy electron scattering ESD (including a pulsed time-of-flight mode)

and LEED measurements These techniques except AES have been well-reviewed

43 44 67 68 24 25 3 37 3839 40 as referenced prevlously (work function AES ES ESD

151617LEED ) Their use in this research can be summarized as follows work

function changes are a measure of adsorption coverage Auger electron

spectroscopy has been used to characterize the contamination of the experimental

surface ES and ESD are sensitive probes of surface and adsorption parameters

Time-of-flight has been used to determine the ion species desorbed LEED has

been used here to indicate the orientation of the surface and to attempt to

take initial data useful in calculation of overlayer geometries A more

detailed discussion of these techniques as used in this research is given in

Section 32

A discussion of the instrument constructed and used for this research

is given in Chapter 2 Sections 31 and 32 deal wIth organization and

experimental procedures Experimental data are presented starting with Section

33 A discussion of the data and conclusions from the research are given in

Chapter 4

22

CHAPTER 2

EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS

21 General Description

The apparatus used in this research is designed to probe an experishy

mental macroscopic crystal with several surface sensitive techniques It

combines an electron gun which focuses a monoenergetic beam of electrons onto

the crystal a new high resolution electrostatic spectrometer capable of energy

analysis of electrons and ions a low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system

and a crystal manipulator The crystal manipulator allows positioning of the

experimental sample and provides sample cooling heating and electrical

biasing Also included in the apparatus are a mass spectrometer and a gas

handling system System electronics allow the spectrometer to perform work

function electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated desorption

Auger electron spectroscopy and low energy electron diffraction measurements

The spectrometer can be operated over a wide range of primary electron energies

and currents and analyzer pass energies It can be biased in both electron and

ion pass modes and in a pulsed time-of-flight mode for species identification

An external spot photometer is used for LEED intensity measurements The

instrument is housed in an ultrahigh vacuum chamber A schematic diagram of

the overall system is given in Figure 21 The construction and performance

characteristics of each of the components are discussed in the following

sections of Chapter 2

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shielding

The requirement that the experimental surface has to remain clean

23

Analyzer Support

Magnetic Shielding

Ion Gauge

Analyzer

Crystal Target

Window

Openings in Magnetic Shield to Gas Jet and Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer

LEED Screen Viewing Mi rror

To Ion Pumps _

Analyzer Wiring Feedthroughs

Liquid Nitrogen Dewar for Cooling Strap Heat Sink

Insulator

Crystal Manipulator

Cooling Strop

Titanium Sublimotion Pump

Figure 21 Schematic diagram of mu1titechnique apparatus

24

while making measurements necessitates housing the apparatus in an ultrahigh

vacuum chamber A commercial Varian vacuum chamber and pumping station have

been used Ultrahigh vacuum was achieved in several steps after the chamber

-2 was rough pumped down to 10 Torr using cryosorb pumps main system pumping

was accomplished using a 400 litersec ion pump and a titanium sublimator

oAfter a bakeout of 24 hours at temperatures up to 270 C to outgas the system

-10walls the system pressure read about lxlO Torr as measured with a Bayard-

Alpert ion gauge The pressure decreased somewhat during the first weeks of

spectrometer operation after bakeout The final system background pressure

-11 was less than 8xlO Torr or below the x-ray limit of the gauge When

-10operating in the Auger mode the background rose to lxlO Torr presumably

because of the large currents involved A mass spectrometer scan indicated

that the main components of the background were H2 CO CO2 and H 0 The ion2

gauge which can affect the composition of the background was turned off while

taking data except if noted otherwise

In an electrostatic deflection analyzer such as used here magnetic

fields can introduce spurious results In order to reduce the earths magnetic

field in the region of electron or ion trajectories three concentric cylinders

of Eagle AAA ultrahigh nickel steel alloy magnetic shielding are placed around

the spectrometer The shielding is mounted on a stainless steel and ceramic

support which rests in a groove in the inside wall of the vacuum chamber This

shielding is electrically isolated so it can be floated at any desired voltage

The ambient magnetic field in the target region is less than 5 milliGauss

The region inside the shielding and below the spectrometer (the

region shown in Figure 214) is referred to in this work as the experimental

25

chamber There are apertures cut in the magnetic shielding which allow the

crystal to be put in (and out of) the experimental chamber Apertures also

allow line-of-sight access to this region of the gas dosing jet mass spectromshy

eter and allow the crystal to be viewed

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics

The electron gun provides the incident focused electron beam used

in all the surface probing techniques Figures 22 and 23 show a schematic

drawing of the electron gun and a photograph of the gun assembled and disshy

dOf d f dOd b P 0 69assembled h a mo 1 1e verS10n 0 a gun eS1gne y er1aT e gun 1S The

comporients of the gun are a thermal cathode or source of electrons three

electrodes and four deflection plates The cathode is a Philips Metalonics

Type M barium calcium aluminate impregnated tungsten emitter The cathode was

0generally operated at 875 C with the heating accomplished indirectly with a

tungsten filament behind the heater The electrons emitted are focused into

a beam by two lenses the crossover formed by the lens action of the control

grid and first anode is focused onto the target by a second lens formed by the

first anode and second anode The incident primary beam thus formed can be

deflected along two axes in the target face by means of deflection plates

located at the entrance to the drift tube

The guns electronic circuitry is shown in Figure 24 Three 6 V

lead storage batteries in series power the cathode heater through an integrated

circuit voltage regulator The gun electrodes are biased using a resistor

chain voltage divider circuit This arrangement scales the guns lenses thus

keeping the beam focused as the primary beam energy is changed by varying the

26

Heat Shield

Cathode Heater

Cathode

Control Grid

First Anode

Second Anode

Coaxial Cathode Heater Feed through

~~f-------+-+-~ Paraxial Ray Aperture

---J7j7j--shy -~f-~ Accelerating ~~pt=-=a~~ or Decelerating

Lens Region

Deflection Plates

SP-1Oeuro7

Figure 22 Schematic diagram of electron gun

I)

-J

Figure 23 Photograph of electron gun assembled and disassembled

~ ~1 ~

h

I __-t--------+--

Defl + ---t---------

i---VV----110K I10K 93K

Supply

BHK 2000

I

Dec Mode

Ace 15K Mode

10K I 15K

l8V Leod

Gun X Deflection Plates (Y Defl Plates Rotate 90 not shown)

Storage Batteries

tv 00

Acc Mode Connections

To First Anode

To Second Anode X Defl shy

X

To Gun Deflection

Plates 10K 10K 57K 15K55K

1-_________----1+I Electron Gun

sp- 1125

Figure 24 Diagram of the electron guns biasing circuitry

29

gun power supply a Kepco BHK-2000 supply The gun can be operated in two

modes In the accelerating mode (ace mode) the second anode is biased more

positive than the first anode With this biasing the gun has been operated

from 30 V to 1825 V primary energy In the decelerating mode (dec mode) the

first anode is biased more positive than the second anode This allows for

higher field gradients at the cathode surface resulting in higher currents at

lower energies In the dec mode the gun can be operated from 10 V to 200 V

A spatial profile of the primary beam was taken using a two grid

retarding field analyzer mounted on the target manipulator at the position of

the target Electrode bias settings that optimized the beam line shape were

determined over the guns energy range These results are summarized in

Figure 25 The spatial full width at half maximum of the spot intensity is

less than 025 mm at 1825 V less than 075 mm at 100 V (dec mode) and about

25 mm at 10 V The energy width of the primary beam can be estimated by

retarding the primary beam between the drift tube and target At E = 100 eVpr1

the current to the target goes from 90 maximum to 10 maximum over a retarding

voltage of ~V $ 0360 meV This is an upper estimate on the energy spread in

the primary beam A lower limit would be the thermal spread of the cathode

~ 2kT or about 200 meV

24 Energy Spectrometer

A schematic diagram of the spectrometer used in this research to

energy analyze electrons and ions is given in Figure 26 The spectrometers

operation can be summarized as follows Electrons and ions originating at

the target with some energy distribution are accelerated or decelerated to the

Dec Mode --1r+shy

Probe Aperture Diameter

+10

E~

~ ~ 10Decelerating Lens Dec Mode aJLL- c E 0- E ~ ~ -051=-- Accelerating Lens Acc Mode Q)O - a WU)

o 200 600 1000 1400

E ~Ugt o Q)()cme=)

Q)

cO ~ e+- (+-Clo OQ)Q)loc

-lolo Wllaquo

u-

Electron Beam Energy Epri (eV) w o

Epri= 10eV Electron Beam Spatial Profiles Epri =1745 eV Epri =100eVf Epd=1000 eV Ace ModeAce Mode Aee Mode

-05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 Probe Aperture Position (mm)

SP-1084

Figure 25 Spatial characteristics of primary electron beam Top panel - Full width at half maximum of beam as a function of primary energy Bottom panel - Line shape of beam at several primary energies

-10 0

31

Cylindrical Electrostatic Analyzer

Spherical Elect rostat ic Analyzer

~____- __Gylindrical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

Coaxial Repulsion Cylinder

--__-___Spherical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

~-- Electron Gun

Deflection Plates

-Gun Wiring

Concentric ~--- Deflection

Spheres

~-- LEED Screen

Scattered Electrons SP-l066

and Desorbed Ions

Figure 26 Schematic diagram of energy spectrometer

32

pass energy of the spectrometer by three spherical sector grids prior to

entering the spherical analyzer section of the instrument (An annular slot

cut in the LEED screen which is located between the grids and the spherical

analyzer allows particles to pass into the analyzer) Energy selection is

accomplished by a combination of two electrostatic deflection analyzers The

first is a high resolution spherical deflection analyzer This is backed by

a cylindrical mirror-type electrostatic analyzer referred to in this work as

the cylindrical or tandem analyzer Particles that pass through the spectromshy

eter impinge on the first dynode of a high gain electron multiplier The

output signal of this multiplier is detected using the electronics discussed

in Section 25

The spectrometer is constructed mainly of 304 stainless steel which

has been hydrogen and vacuum fired to reduce residual magnetism to less than

5 milliGauss Most interior surfaces have been rhodium plated to eliminate

surface charging problems Final design dimensions used in the spectrometer

are listed in Table 21 Refer to Figure 27 for a diagram of the variables

used in this table

The emission angle at the ta~get of the central trajectory that

passes 1nto t he spectrometer 1S 350 bull The entrance aperture (slot) accepts

particles that originate within plusmn0045 radians of this central ray making a

total solid angle accepted of 032 steradians

The spherical electrostatic deflection analyzer section is a

70spherical velocity selector of the type first investigated by Purcell The

analyzer is designed to focus an object spot of electrons or ions originating

at the front surface plane of the target onto the first energy resolution

33

TABLE 21 FINAL DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR SPECTROMETER

SPHERICAL ANALYZER

l Inner sphere radius 342 cmr l

2 Outer sphere radius r 419 cm2

3 Radius of central ray a = 381 cm

04 Emission angle of central ray e = 35

05 Angular range of accepted rays 3244

0 - 3756

6 Angle subtended between entrance and exit planes of spherical analyzer section ~ = 51660

7 Acceptance solid angle of spectrometer 032 steradians

8 Diameter of first ERA D 025 cm

9 Distance of target from center of spherical analyzer P 665 cm

10 Distance of first ERA from center of spherical analyzer Q 1328 cm

CYLINDRICAL ANALYZER

11 Distance from first ERA to entrance diaphram S = 330 cm

12 Distance between entrance and exit diaphrams T 399 cm

13 Distance from exit diaphram to second ERA U = 330 cm

14 Inner cylinder radius Rl = 0099 cm

15 Distance from second ERA to electron multiplier V ~ 254 cm

16 Radius of entrance aperture R2 099 cm

17 Radius of repulsion electrode R3 = 330 cm

18 Radius of exit aperture R4 093 cm

19 Width of exit aperture G 037 cm

20 Diameter of second ERA E 044 cm

21 Width of entrance aperture F = 053 cm

34

Plane of First ERA

~

D

Spherical Analyzer

First ERA

I

I1 I~~ f F

S

]R4 II f ~

R3

11 [1

I II

U v~ cT t t

Plane of Plane of First ERA Second ERA

Cylindrical Analyzer

Figure 27 Schematic diagram of particle trajectories in spherical analyzer section Spatial configuration of tandem cylindrical analyzer section also shown

35

aperture or image plane The spatial configuration of the analyzer is such

as to give maximum reduced dispersibn according to the relations derived by

Purcell The magnification of the source at maximum reduced dispersion is 2

Diaphrams at the entrance and exit apertures of the spherical analyzer are

designed to minimize problems caused by the fringing fields as discussed by

71Herzog

Initial tests using only the spherical analyzer indicated electrons

that scattered from the interior surfaces could be passed through the first

energy resolving aperture over a range of analyzer pass energies To eliminate

this erroneOus signal a second low resolution cylindrical mirror-type

72electrostatic analyzer was designed and constructed by P Luscher

Electrons or ions that pass through the first energy resolving

aperture at the correct energy are deflected by the repulsion electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer and pass through the second energy resolving aperture

This signal impinges on the first dynode of the electron multiplier Trajectory

tracing calculations indicated that the cylindrical analyzer would eliminate

the scattered signal if this second analyzer had a full width energy resolution

~EE = 028 where E is the energy of the particle executing the pass pass

correct central trajectory through the spectrometer This is not a stringent

design requirement

The energy resolution of the spectrometer is defined as the ratio

~EEp where ~E is the width of the line shape passed as the spectrometer is

scanned in pass energy for a monochromatic source of particles with energy Ep

For the spectrometer configuration here the energy resolution is determined

by the resolution achieved in the high resolution spherical analyzer section

36

at least down to low pass energies Line shape broadening effects in the

spherical analyzer originate from three sources 1) the finite diameter D

of the first energy resolving aperture 2) the finite radius R of the source

disk and 3) the use of a finite range of emission angles of particles from

the crystal surface which can enter and be passed by the spectrometer This

third source of line broadening results from the spherical analyzer having

imperfect second order focusing at the first energy resolving aperture The

effect on the line shape of the finite range of emission angles goes as the

square of the acceptance half width which in this analyzer is small In

the calculation of energy resolution below the third source of line broadening

will not be considered

A numerical value for the energy resolution for the spectrometer

used in this research can be calctilated To do so it is necessary to derive

an expression for 6EEp in terms of the diameter D and radius R given above

In the calculation below these two sources of line broadening will be

considered independent and the effective line shape and energy resolution

from each will be calculated separately Following an analysis by Purcell an

energy resolution can be expressed in terms of the velocity resolution S bull ~

S is defined by ~

where v is the velocity of a particle which the analyzer passes along the pass

central trajectory when and v is the velocity of a particle withset at Epass ~

slightly different energy E bullbull (For convenience E and v will be ~ pass pass

shortened to Ep and vp in the following discussion Lower case subscripts are

37

used to distinguish this derivation from the defined energy resolution above)

A resolution can be calculated as follows

(22)

Using Equation 21 this becomes

(23)

(24)

If the line shape width ~E is written as

fiE = E - E = (E - E ) + (E - Emn) (25)max max p pm~n ~

then the energy resolution can be expressed as

(26)

D and R can be related to Q and Q bull as shown belowf-I max f-Im~n

Line shape broadening due to the finite diameter D of the first

energy resolving aperture (1st ERA) can be calculated from the velocity

70dispersion given by Purcell

(27)

9 00 ~ (28)

Refer to Figure 27 for a definition of the variables in these equations

38

Assume a current j(a) emanating from the center of the target

along xl with energy distribution

j (e) = 1 (29)

All of this current crosses the plane of the 1st ERA at a position d given by

d = Y2cOS a = 900 acos a (210)

A 1st ERA of diameter D will pass all the current for which Y2 Y2 leading

to the relation for the limiting values of 13

(211)

D bull cos a a lt D cos a (212)2 bull 900 - 2 bull 900

The energy resolution due to a finite 1st ERA is then calculated from Equation

26 to be

~E (~st ERA) = 2 [053D + 053DJ = 02l2D (213) P

For D = 025 cm (010 in) this evaluates to

8E (1st ERA) = 0021 (214)E P

The line shape of the current distribution resulting from the finite 1st ERA

is a unit function for the allowable e values (Equation 214) since all the

current j(S) is passed by the 1st ERA and j(S) is a unit function in S

The above line shape and resolution have been obtained effectively

by varying the energy of the signal current (via Equation 29) rather than

39

using a monochromatic current source and varying the pass energy as initially

used in defining the spectrometer resolution That the results given in

Equation 214 are the same as would be obtained from a more complicated

calculation using a monochromatic current source can be seen by considering a

monochromatic source v == (1 + l)vp and noting that it will be deflected tol

the edge of the 1st ERA by a pass energy Ep

Line shape broadening and an energy resolution due to a finite radius

to the source disk can be determined in a manner analogous to that used above

Consider a point source of particles at the 1st ERA that travel back through

the analyzer Such reverse trajectories would cross the target plane at a

position

(215)

where for these reverse trajectories using Equation 27

Yl = 491 a (216)

p being a variable representing the radius at which these trajectories cross

the plane of the target p is analogous to d in the earlier calculation

Using reciprocity particles emanating from a position on the target at radius

p with a velocity corresponding to S will cross the plane of the 1st ERA at

the axis For a source of radius R the line width is found by using the

arguments leading up to Equation 211 to be

R bull cos e S lt R cos e (217)491 ~ 491

For a spot size 2R == 1 rom (0039 in) the energy resolution due to a finite

source disk is

40

A (source) = 2[017R + 017R] (218)E p

~ (source) 013 for 2R = 1 mm (219)E p

At low primary energies for which the beam spot size is greater than 1 mm

the above broadening and resolution due to spot size are correspondingly larger

The line shape associated with a finite source disk is linearly

proportional to~ The functional dependence of source current on ~ which

essentially determines the line shape due to the finite source is not given

by Equation 29 Rather it can be obtained by assuming uniform emission over

the area of the source knowing that ~ and the radial position at the source

p are linearly related by Equation 216 and using the area relation

(220)

(221)

If the current from the source with velocity (1 + ~)v that passes the 1st ERA p

is designated JI(~) then

(222)

49lmiddotApJ I (~l) 0 2TT cos e ~ 1 (223)

From Equation 223 the line shape of the current due to finite source is seen

to be linearly related to ~

41

The overall resolution of the instrument can be approximated by the

sum of the two resolutions calculated above which is approximately 2

Experimentally the resolution of the spectrometer is measured as the full

width at half maximum (FWHM) of the elastic peak The bottom panel of Figure

28 shows the FWHM of the elastic peak as a function of the spectrometer pass

energy At 90 eV the experimental energy resolution is

bE FWEM 2 (224)Ep = ~ = 90 = 022

which is close to the theoretical calculations

The effective resolution of the spectrometer can be greatly increased

by retarding the beam using the three grids located between the target and

spherical analyzer This can be seen by repeating the calculation of Equation

224 using data from Figure 28 at a lower energy The measured effective

energy resolution of the spectrometer varies between 22 percent and 06

percent as the elastic peak is retarded by 10 percent to 90 percent of its

initial value Over this same range the intensity decreases almost 98 percent

Hence increased resolution is obtained at the expense of signal intensity

This is shown in the top panel of Figure 28 The solid curve in the top panel

is the transmission function of the spectrometer for a primary beam of 100 eV

The transmission function shows the fractional decrease in signal passed by

the spectrometer as a function of pass energy of the spectrometer The data

points were taken by retarding the 100 eV elastic peak between the grids until

it was passed by the spectrometer The transmission function is the ratio of

the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer at E to the peakpass

42

Figure 28 Top panel - Transmission function of spectrometer This function was obtained by retarding the 100 eV elastically scattered electron signal between the spectrometer grids and then measuring the ratio of the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer to the peak signal passed at Epass = E = 100 eV Bottom panel - Full width at half maX1mum of ~K~ elastically scattered electron signal passed by the spectrometer when the 100 eV signalis retarded using the grids to an energy E

pass

43

09

08

07

c006 U ()

E()05 c e 1-04

03

02

01

Epri =100eV

~ -Transmission of Spectrometer

Peak Intensity at Eposs Peak Intensity at Epass 100 eV

--Transmission for flEE Constant

() +shy

o gt-

20

10

Full Width at Half Maximum of Elastic Peak

100 eVEpri =

o~oo 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Spectrometer Pass Energy J Epass (eV) SP-1l22

0

44

signal passed at E = E i = 100 eV The dotted line in Figure 28 pass pr

indicates the transmission function for ~ = constant for a monochromatic

point source Deviations from the straight line are due 1) to the nonidea1

elastic peak (ie finite breadth) and spectrometer geometry 2) to field

penetration at the grids as a function of the retarding potential (which was

varied to obtain the graph) and 3) to the varying response of the electron

multiplier as a function of the voltage of the electrons incident on the

multiplier For the data presented here electrons were incident on the

multiplier with an energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer The

bottom panel of Figure 28 shows the experimental full width at half maximum

of the elastic peak as a function of pass energy (in this case pass energy =

(100 eV - retarding voltage))

The energy spectrometer has been operated successfully in both the

electron and ion pass modes over a pass energy range from 2 eV to 400 eV

The spectrometer is normally operated at a fixed pass energy and ideally

fixed energy resolution Energy sweeps are made by retardation (acceleration)

of electrons or ions between the first (screen grid) and third (tEED grid)

grids prior to entering the spherical analyzer section of the spectrometer

The third grid which was added primarily to eliminate charging problems

associated with the LEED screen (see Section 26) also improved the effective

resolution this improvement is due to decreased field penetration of the

applied retarding (accelerating) potential since the retarding (accelerating)

can be done over a 50 percent longer distance In addition the third grid is

made of smaller mesh which also reduces field penetration

45

The spectrometer is supported vertically from the electrical feedshy

through turret as shown in Figure 29 This assembly attaches at the top of

the main vacuum chamber (see Figure 21) and can be removed completely wired

independent of other parts of the instrument

The electron multiplier is an EMI model 96434B detector with 17

BeCu venetial blind dynode stages

25 Spectrometer Electronics

Figure 210 shows a schematic diagram of the electronic circuitry

used for taking electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated

desorption and Auger electron spectroscopy measurements Some details for

example capacitors used to eliminate noise and some switches used to change

from one mode to another are not shown Only the most common biasing

arrangement used in this work will be discussed

In the electron pass mode (including Auger measurements) the LEED

grid LEED screen Herzog diaphrams driftspace and center electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer are grounded Energy sweeps of the spectrometer are made

by varying the retardation or acceleration voltage applied between the three

73grids A variable frequency variable height floating sawtooth generator

plus a variable dc offset bias are summed at the inverting input of a Kepco

OPS-2000 operational power supply the output of which biases the three grids

through a resistor chain When the output signal from the multiplier is being

detected using a phase sensitive detector a 3 kHz sinusoidal signal is also

fed into the summing junction VT the target bias with respect to the screen

grid is zero in the electron pass mode The spherical analyzer deflecting

46

Figure 29 Photograph showing support of spectrometer from electrical feedthrough turret

W(100) Crystal

lOOK

Vr=O-6V

Dec Mode

Ace Mode (E Il

VOFFS

VOFFS=O-6V

Ratemeter ~

INlOO

=

Drift Space

epUISion Electrode

i -----In

(Ion Mode Only)

Jshy-l

Hamner N-780A Ortec 410 Linear Amp

Pulse Count Mode

Synchronous Detection Mode

PAR PAR Type A HR-8 Preamp

47K To Recorder Y

SP-1126

Figure 210 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer electronics for operation in the electron pass and ion pass modes

48

electrodes and the repulsion electrode of the cylindrical analyzer are scaled

using a resistor chain powered by a second OPS-2000 operational amplifier power

supply The voltage scaling for these electrodes was determined from particle

trajectory calculations The voltage applied to the repulsion electrode using

this resistor chain can be varied using a potentiometer this adjustment can

in effect vary the resolution of the cylindrical analyzer The OPS-2000

supply also biases the outer electrodes of the analyzer deflection plates by

means of a separate resistor chain The inner electrodes of these deflection

plates are fixed at the potential of the analyzers Herzog diaphrams The

ripple voltage on the output of both operational power supplies is less than

20 meV at 100 eV

Electrons impinge on the first dynode of the multiplier with an

energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer plus a voltage equal to

(R (36MO + R raquoV where R is shown in Figure 210 and V is the voltagem m M m M

across the multiplier In the synchronous detection mode V was variedM

between 1100 V and 1700 V In the pulse counting mode the voltage was normally

set at 2800 V The output of the multiplier after being passed by an

isolation capacitor is either pulse counted with a ratemeter or is detected

using a PAR HR-8 phase sensitive detector The reference signal for the HR-8

is either 3 kHz when taking dN(E)dE distributions (see Section 324 and

2Appendix B) or Auger data or 6 kHz when taking d N(E)dE distributions

When the spectrometer is operated in the ion pass mode the polarity

of the biasing on the analyzer deflecting electrodes is switched In addition

the positive pole of the electron mUltiplier supply is grounded This biasing

arrangement causes the ions to impinge on the multiplier at an energy

49

E pass + VM

which was usually 3040 kV In the ion pass mode the spectromshy

eter is generally operated at E = 40 eV This requires an acceleration of pass

the ions between the screen and LEED grids since the initial ion energies are

between 0 eV and 10 eV In addition to accelerating between the grids the

ions were normally accelerated between the target and screen grid using VT

in order to facilitate interpretation of the data as discussed in Section

325

The electronic circuitry for operating the analyzer in the time-ofshy

flight mode is identical to that just described for the ~on pass mode except

a pulsed voltage is applied to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a

schematic of this arrangement Unlike continuous operation in this mode ions

can enter the analyzer only during the on pulse In the lower part of

Figure 211 the energy of an ion is shown as a function of its position in the

spectrometer with the pulse on and off

In the work function mode the target is fixed at ground potential

through a picoammeter Retardation of the incident current is accomplished by

driving the drift tube positive in voltage

26 LEED Display System

The low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system consists of a

phosphor-coated screen located at the entrance to the spherical analyzer and

othree grids The screen a 1096 stainless steel sector (of which approxishy

omatelya 98 sector is visible) was coated with a P-l phosphor The first

two grids are constructed of 50 mesh rhodium-coated stainless steel The

LEED screen and these two grids are operated as a standard two grid LEED

50

II

Vr V

Ion Trajectory

ACC

Linear Amp Preamp

To Oscilloscope Trace

VRG~+ To O~oopeP I If Trace and Time u se t Base Trigger Genera or -

(l)~ os

CIgt () o cC u (l) E t gt - C N a (l) (l) (u~CIgt (l) 0 ~ shy - c 0 c 0 0 ti (l) ac o c

()

f- (j) a (j)lt f-lt u ~----~~------~~ ~I

0 1--A I ----5----------------

ElON I

VACC

I (l) ()

5 Q

gt CIgt t c

~---J8w c o H

SP-I027

EPAS S + V L-____________________---- M

Figure 211 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer for operation in the time-of-f1ight mode

51

system with the retarding grid biased to pass only electrons elastically

scattered from the target and with the LEED screen accelerating voltage

normally set at 5000 V Slots cut through the screen allow electrons and

ions to pass into the spectrometer Initial operation of the instrument

indicated that charging of the LEED screen caused a significant perturbation

on electron trajectories below 100 eV The third grid a 100 mesh stainless

s tee 1 spherical sector is loca ted 0050 em in front of the LEED screen to

alleviate this problem

An aluminum-coated glass plate mirror located below the spectrometer

reflects the LEED screen through a 6Lch indo in the chamber wall (see

Figure 21) LEED spot intensities are measured through this window using a

Gamma Scientific Model 2000 telephotometer

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly

The crystal manipulator assembly is shown schematically in Figure

212 and a photograph is given in Figure 213 The assembly is designed to

provide thermal and electrical control of the target while allowing the

target face to be rotatable between the gas dosing port the LEED screenshy

energy spectrometer position and the quadrupole mass spectrometer This

rotation is indicated in Figure 214 The manipulator assembly is composed

of a commercial Physical Electronics specimen manipulator a long shaft which

supports the rotary electrical connections a liquid nitrogen dewaI and

aluminum foil strap to provide target cooling and a target mounting assembly

The long shaft of the manipulator assembly is constructed of

different materials as follows A1 0 for electrical isolation (Figure 2122 3

52

Figure 212 Schematic diagram of the target manipulation and thermal control system showing (1) kovar-glass-kovar dewar insulation (2) Miniconflat flanges (3) Physical Electronics Industries specimen manipulator Model 10-501M mounted on 8 inch od Conflat flange (4) six 5 kV - 150 A electrical feedthroughs (5) clamp assembly (6) A1 03 rod (7) molybdenum spring2(8) stainless steel electr1cal connectors (9) electrical connecshytion (1 shown) (10) A1203 spacers (11) Pyrex plates (12) molybshydenum (13) 001 wall stainless tube (14) Pyrex tubes (15) tantalum rods (16) copper rod (17) vacuum chamber wall (18) liquid riitrogen dewar (19) 001 wall stainless tube (20) copper radiation shield (21) strap-to-dewar clamp (22) crystal support (23) 12 pole heater (24) strap-to-copper rod clamp (25) aluminum foil strap (26) pancake heater supp~rt~ (27) thermocouple (28) crystal (29) pancake heater (30) tanta~ lum section (31) molybdenum section (32) molybdenum-to-copper rod clamp assembly

53

Jl ~

Figure 213 Photograph of crystal manipulator The retarding field analyzer used to characterize the primary electron beam is shown mounted on the manipulator in place of the tungsten crystal mounting assembly

55

Magnetic Shielding

Tungsten Crystal

Energy Spectrometer and LEED Gas Dosing Optics Aperture

To Gas Bottle

Line -of-Sight Quadrupole Mass Crystal Holder Spectrometer and Manipulator

SP-1072

Figure 214 Schematic of the experimental chamber of the apparatus (see Section 22 for a discussion of the experimental chamber) Rotation of the crystal is indicated by the dotted line

56

no 6) molybdenum rod (no 12) 304 stainless steel tubing for thermal

isolation (no 13) and copper rod (no 16) Six electrical leads separated

by glass discs (no 11) wind around the shaft ~his configuration allows for

rotary motion of the shaft while still providing electrical control at the

targetJ The electrical leads then enter glass tubing parallel to the shaft

and end up at the target mounting assembly For clarity only one of these

leads is shown in Figure 212

An aluminum foil strap (no 25) made of 150 pieces of 254 cm x ~254

em x 00025 cm foil connects the liquid nitorgen reservoir to the copper rod

end of the manipulator shaft This provides conduction cooling to the target

A copper radiation shield (no 20) is constructed around the strap This

cooling system is sufficient to cool the target from flash temperatures to

approximately -1500

C in 5 minutes

The tungsten single crystal target is supported 095 cm above a

tantalum and molybdenum right angle mount (nos 30 31) on one 0038 cm

diameter tungsten wire The wire was spot-welded to the back face of the

tungsten disc prior to its final electropolishing The target is heated by

electron bombardment of its back face from a tungsten pancake heater (no 29)

The target can also be heated by conduction through its support wire using a

25 watt 12 pole 25L6 RCA heater which is mounted inside the tantalum part

of the right angle mount as shown dotted in Figure 212 (no 23) Using this

heater the target temperature can be varied between -20oC and -150

0 C Tungsten

and tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple leads 0076 cm in diameter are spot-

welded to the side of the target The thermocouple wires are each supported

by being fed along the axis of a tungsten wire helix (not shown in Figure

57

212) The helices are made of 025 cm diameter wire and are spot-welded to

supports near the center of the molybdenum part of the right angle mount

Calibration of the thermocouple was made out of the vacuum chamber using a

copper-constantan reference thermocouple The calibration procedure is

described in Appendix A and the calibration is given in Figure A1

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures

The experimental sample is a single crystal tungsten disc cut from

a (100) oriented tungsten rod using a diamond impregnated stainless wire in a

string saw The tungsten rod supplied by Metals Research Ltd was taken

from the purest 75 cm of a triply zone refined 25 cm length

Both the front and back surfaces of the disc were polished using in

succession 15 micron 3 micron and 1 micron alumina After being mechanishy

cally polished the crystal was e1ectropo1ished using a 1 NaOH solution The

final dimensions of the target disc are 0033 cm (013 in) thick and approxishy

mate1y 080 cm in diameter

After the final e1ectropo1ish the orientation of both the front and

back surfaces was checked using an x-ray diffractometer and was determined to

be within 0100 of the (100) face A back reflection Laue picture of the final

surface showed sharp well-defined beams indicating a high degree of crystalshy

line order

The target was o 74cleaned initially by heating to at least 2200 K in

a -61x10 Torr oxygen atmosphere for 9 hr to remove carbon The choice of

temperature and time were somewhat arbitrary as there is considerable debate

in the literature as to the proper method for cleaning tungsten for surface

58

research 74 A standard method7 1823 has been to heat the target to some

temperature above 11000 K (commonly above 20000 K) in an oxygen environment for

times varying up to 200 hr or more This process is generally followed by a

high temperature degassing in ultrahigh vacuum However there is evidence

othat if the temperature is held above 2000 K bulk carbon will not diffuse to

75 74the surface The possibility of thermal etching must also be considered

For the tungsten used in this research the amount of contamination

on the surface was determined using Auger spectroscopy Figure 215 is an

Auger spectrum taken from a dirty surface showing the Auger peaks resolved in

our system Carbon oxygen and tungsten peaks are seen clearly Also shown

76in Figure 215 are theoretical Auger transition energies for C 0 and W

with the relative theoretical strengths of the transitions indicated by the

normalized height of the lines In Figure 216 are shown Auger spectra taken

after different crystal treatments or under different experimental conditions

Curve a shows the spectrum taken after saturating the surface with CO Note

the carbon and oxygen peaks There is no measurable carbon peak after a

flash as seen in curve b Structure does remain between 475 eV and 525 eV

It is doubtful that this structure is a result of oxygen contamination since

there are normally three oxygen Auger peaks with the 490 eV oxygen peak

stronger than the 475 eV oxygen peak in this spectrum no 490 eV peak is

observed In order to reduce any oxygen contamination the target was heat

0 treated to 2200 K in a hydrogen atmosphere of 5x10- 7 Torr for 4 minutes 74

The structure above 475 eV is seen to remain unchanged as seen in curve c

This is a further indication that this structure is not oxygen Curve d shows

that sitting in a 400 eV 4 ~ primary beam close to typical operating

59

Carbon Oxygen

o 100

dN(E) dE

200 300 400 500 600 Electron Energy (eV) SP-U44

Figure 215 Auger electron spectrums obtained at different instrument sensitivities from dirty tungsten crystal Also shown in upper part of figure are theoretical Auger transitions for tungsten carbon and oxygen calculated by Coghlan and C1ausing76 Heights of the lines represent relative theoshyretical strengths of the transitions

60

(a) CO Monolayer

~5Ab) Heate~toCleon x25

d ~5dN(E) dE (e) Heat Treated

x25 in H2

_~5 ~ (d) 400V4fLA

x25 Primary Beam for

25~

d x5

(e) 1700V 211-A Primary Beam for 10 Min

200 300 400 500 Electron Energy (eV) SP-1l45

Figure 216 Comparison of Auger electron spectrums taken over the energy range 200 eV to 550 eV under different experimental condition

61

conditions for 25 minutes causes only a slight change in the slope of the

curve at the energy at which the carbon peak occurs (Note that curve d was

taken with a primary beam of 1700 eV after the crystal had been sitting in

the lower energy beam for 25 minutes) The absence of the carbon peak in curve

d means that the crystal surface is not contaminated from the gun while taking

measurements After bombarding the target for 10 minutes with a primary beam

of 1700 eV and 21 ~ typical Auger spectroscopy beam conditions a carbon

peak is observed as shown in curve e Using the peak to peak height of the

272 ~V carbon peak obtained near CO saturation as an indication of carbon

monolayer coverage the electron gun in the Auger mode is seen to deposit

approximately 013 monolayer of carbon in 10 minutes

From the above results it is concluded that the tungsten surface

could be flashed clean and that no carbon or oxygen contamination is deposited

during most experimental measurements Some carbon is deposited when operating

in the Auger mode Two unexpected small peaks are observed between 475 eV

and 525 eV Identification of the source of this weak structure could not be

made with certainty although two possible causes are worth noting The

unexpected structure could be tungsten Auger transitions Theoretically

several relatively strong tungsten peaks have been predicted at 477 eV and

486 eV and also between 510 eV and 520 eV However no observations of

tungsten transitions in this energy range have been reported in the experimenshy

tal literature A second possible source of this structure mighL be chromium

There is considerable chromium in the spectrometers stainless steel parts and

chromium Auger peaks occur at 489 eV and 529 eV However if it is assumed

that Auger spectroscopy is sensitive to one percent of a monolayer it would

62

13 2require surface coverages of 10 chromium atomscm or more to yield these

peaks It is extremely unlikely that either 1) a concentration of chromium

this large could diffuse to the tungsten surface from the stainless parts or

2) enough chromium could be sputtered (at the ambient pressure) into the backshy

ground from the stainless parts and subsequently adsorb onto the surface A

spark vaporization mass spectroscopy analysis of a tungsten sample cut from

the same boule as the tungsten used in this research revealed no chromium

thus eliminating the possibility of a bulk chromium concentration in the

crystal Hence although the weak structure corresponds to some degree to

chromium Auger lines it is believed that the crystal is not contaminated with

this element In an Auger spectrum taken between 500 eV and 900 eV (not shown)

some additional very weak structure was seen but none of it could be

attributed to any specific element

o 77In this research the crystal was always flashed to gt 2200 K for 30

seconds prior to experimentation Any reference to a clean tungsten surface

means that this procedure has been followed

The crystal surface exhibited what appeared to be furrows which

increased in density during the course of the research Because the coolest

part of the crystal during a flash that region next to the tungsten wire

support remained visibly polished and flat it is believed that the uneven

appearance was temperature related

29 Gas Handling System

The gas handling system used to obtain adsorption overlayers is

shown in Figure 217 Research grade hydrogen (impurity level less than 2

To Quadrupole Moss Spectrometer

Alternate Gas Source Control Valve

Thermocouple Gouge

Plenum

~-----Viewing Port

Jet Position Adjustment

Ion Gouge

Cryosorb Pump

0 t)

S-1l28

Figure 217 Schematic drawing of gas handling system

64

ppm) is admitted from a glass flash into a pyrex manifold and stainless steel

reservoir Reservoir pressure was kept near 50 microns as read using a

thermocouple gauge From the reservoir hydrogen is admitted into the vacuum

system through a 126 cm diameter tube by opening valve A Figure 217 or is

admitted as a gas jet by opening valve B The jet is formed as hydrogen

effuses through a small orifice at the end of a 063 cm dia tube78J~9 Leaking

hydrogen through the 126 em diameter tube increases the background and is used

when hydrogen is to be adsorbed from the background The jet can be used

with the target rotated in front of the gas dosing port for rapid over layer

adsorption with a low hydrogen background pressure The gas jet is designed

so that only that fraction of the effusing gas which will strike the target is

allowed to pass through an aperture in a skimmer The rest of the gas jet is

reflected back from the skimmer and out of the experimental chamber When the

target is rotated up to face the spectrometer the gas jet if left on passes

out of the experimental chamber through holes in the opposite side of the

magnetic shielding

The gas manifold and reservoir can be pumped down to less than 1

micron using a liquid nitrogen cryosorb pump

210 Mass Spectrometer

A quadrupole mass spectrometer Varian Residual Gas Analyzer Model

974-0003 is mounted on a vacuum chamber port opposite the gas jet port In

this research it was used for vacuum chamber leak testing and determination of

the components of the background pressure

65

CHAPrER 3

EXPERIMENTAL PFGCEDURE AND RESULTS

31 Introduction

The experimental data taken on the hydrogen-W(lOO) system are

presented in this chapter The apparatus used in obtaining the data has been

discussed previously in Chapter 2 A further explanation of experimental

procedures used in measuring parameters follows in Section 32 The experishy

mental results are presented in the remaining sections of this chapter A

general discussion of the data is given in Chapter 4 and a summary of the

research is given in Chapter 5

32 Experimental Procedure

321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements

Contact potential measurements in this case the difference between

the work functions of the target and of the cathode in the electron gun are

43 44measured using a retarding potential techn1que The primary or incident

electron beam current is retarded between the electron gun drift tube and the

target The measured current to the target goes to zero at a retarding voltage

VR

given by

V = (rn + V - rn ) + E (31)R Tcath sc TW pr1

where Cfgtcath is the cathode work function CfgtW is the W(lOO) work function Vsc

is the potential due to space charge immediately in front of the cathode and

E is the applied potential between the cathode and the drift tube Changespr1

66

in the work function of the target ~ are calculated by measuring changes

in VR

LlVR

From Equation 3la change in V is found to equalR

(32)

with the assumptions of constant rn h V and E The assumptions usedTcat sc pr1

are reasonable since the cathode in thermal equilibrium and since it

is exposed to very small changes in the ambient during the measurements The

applied potential E i can be maintained constant pr

A typical retarding potential curve is given in Figure 31 The

electron current to the target the ordinate in this figure is given by

(33)

where I i is the current incident on the target from the electron gun and pr

I (E N) the secondary current represents the electron current leavingsec pri

the target surface This secondary current is a function of both primary

47electron energy and hydrogen coverage Because of the dependence on coverage

the intensity and line shape of the retarding potential curves change somewhat

upon adsorption

In determining LlVR

or equivalently the target work function change

a retarding potential curve taken from the clean tungsten surface and a curve

taken after hydrogen adsorption are normalized at a position on the curve where

the target current begins to falloff sharply (position A in Figure 31) The

work function change is then measured as the voltage difference between the

two curves at half the normalized height

Changes in the work function of 001 eV can be resolved The

10

(J)

c I

I

AE lt( l-~ c Q)

-

05 U ~ I I ~ Q) 0) shy0 I-

omiddot ~ middot 10 20 30

Cathode Potential-Target Potential (volts)

SP-1142 Figure 31 Retarding potential curve showing the current to the target as

a function of the difference in applied potential between the electron gun cathode and the target The curve is shifted in energy with changes in hydrogen coverage due to changes in the target work function 6~ 6~ is measured as the difference between two retarding curves at the height A2

68

measurement was sensitive to target rotation position because of the retarding

field in the target region However with the target positioning stop used

the retarding potential curve could be repeated with an accuracy better than

002 eV after rotating the target Since the work function change is the

difference between two such curves the error in the measurement is ~004 eV

Changes in hydrogen coverage are monitored by changes in the work

function of the tungst~n tlurface No experimental attempts have been made

to calibrate the measureci ork fUllction change to an absolute change in the

coverage of atomssurface area Such a calibration requires an accurate measure

of system pumping speed or dosing flux However as discussed in Section 34

such a calibration can be made using results from the literature

322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current Measurements

The total electron beam current incident on the target Ipri is

measured by biasing the target at a potential of +45 volts with respect to the

surrounding experimental chamber Tests indicated that the current measured

in this manner is within 3 percent of the total current leaving the electron

gun which is also I The current leaving the gun is measured by summingprJ

electron currents to the target grids LEED screen magnetic shielding

analyzer Herzog diaphrams and front shield plate This current sum measureshy

ment of I was more difficult to make experimentally than biasing the targetprJ

at +45 volts

The primary electron energy E refers to the energy of theprJ

incident electrons referenced to the vacuum level Themiddotpritnarymiddot energy is

measured between the cathode and drift tube of the electron gun A contact

potential correction between the guns cathode and the target of between

69

-17 eV and -22 eV has been applied to the measured primary energy given in

the data This correction is found by using the measured cut off potential VR

and Equation 31 The spread in the correction is a result of th~ change in

space charge and hence change in V which occurs when the potential gradientsc

at the cathode is altered by changing the voltage on the control grid The

control grid voltage determines the potential fields in the region of the

cathode surface and hence affects the emitted current and space charge

323 Target Temperature Measurement

Prior to taking any data the target was cleaned by rapid electron

bombardment heating (flashing) at gt 22000 K for 30 seconds Figure 32 shows

the temperature of the target versus time from end of flash with and without

liquid nitrogen in the dewar Residual heat in the crystal supports due

to previous flashes does affect the temperature versus time curves somewhat

The higher temperature data were normally taken starting 3 to 4 minutes after

flashing at a target temperature of 600 C + lSoC Data taken under these

conditions are sometimes referred to as room terr~erature or higher temperature

data Low temperature data were taken starting 4 to S minutes after flaShing

when the target temperature was less than -l45 0 C

324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements

The electron scattering data consists of the electron signal emanating

from the target in the acceptance solid angle of the spectrometer following

impingement of the primary electron beam on the target An energy distribution

of these electrons is taken by fixing the pass energy of the spectrometer at

E and sweeping a retarding or accelerating voltage between the screen gridpass

and LEED grid as described previously in Section 25 The output current of

70 300~----~----~----~--------------------

200

-u 1000

-~ J

e ltlgt 0 E ~ -ltlgt ~ 0 ~

Liquid Nitrogen in Dewar

-100

-2000~----~----~----~----~----~----~61 2 345

Time from Flash (min) SP-ll40

Figure 32 Temperature of the tungsten crystal versus time elapsed since a crystal flash The upper curve represents the temperature versus time relation when there is no crystal cooling The lower curve shows this relation when there is liquid nitrogen in the cooling dewar

71

the electron multiplier N(E) is pulse counted or as discussed below Cld in

Appendix B synchronously detected

N(E) is proportional to the electron current originating at the

target with energy between E and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance

solid angle of the analyzer This distribution consists of rapidly varying

true secondary and characteristic loss structure interpretable in terms of

transitions and collective oscillations in the target plus a smoothly varying

background In order to separate the structure from the background the energy

distribution is electronically differentiated using a technique proposed by

67Harrls As shown in Appendix B a signal proportional to the first or to

the second derivative of N(E) is obtained by synchronously detecting the

appropriate harmonic of the output of the electron multiplier The relation

between the electron signal N(E) and the synchronously detected signal can

be seen from Equations B4 through B9 In these equations it is assumed a

peaked structure G(E) being inv~stigatedcan be represented by a Gaussian

centered at E with standard deviation o The detected first harmonic of o

N(E) has structure which has a peak-to-peak height proportional to G(E plusmn a)o

The detected second harmonic of N(E) has structure at E proportional to o

G(E ) a2 In addition there is t contribution to the detected signal from o

the background Since the background which can be represented by a polynomial

in energy is slowly varying the higher order terms which remairr in the difshy

feren tiated signals are small

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as

is commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in taking electron

scattering characteristic energy loss measurements

72

325 Ion Measurements

g+ ions desorbed from the crystal following electron impact could

be detected by the spectrometer when operated in the ion pass mode It was

found convenient to operate the instrument at a pass energy of 40 eV in this

mode operation at a lower pass energy while increasing the resolution

decreased the already weak signal intensity Since the ions have between 0 eV

and 10 eV energy when desorbed acceleration between the target and spectromshy

eter was necessary An accelerating voltage V (the output of an OPS-2000 acc

power supply) was applied between the screen grid and the entrance to the

spectrometer In addition a second accelerating voltage V was appliedT

between the target and the screen grid This latter voltage was needed in

order to energetically separate the ion signal which originated at the target

from a background signal produced by 1) ions electron desorbed from the screen

grid andor other surfaces in the experimental chamber and 2) ionization of

the background The ions that passed into the spectrometer were accelerated

into the first dynode of the electron multiplier The output pulses of the

multiplier were amplified and then counted with a ratemeter

Prior to taking ion data the target was flashed and allowed to

cool to the experimental temperature It was then exposed to hydrogen with

the hydrogen coverage being monitored using work function measurements Ion

energy distributions were taken by fixing E and V and sweeping the pass T

accelerating voltage V Desorption curve measurements which are a measureshyacc

ment of the decrease of the ion signal in the electron beam were taken by

fixing V V and E and monitoring the ion signal as a function of acc T pass

time

73

The kinetic energy of the detected ions is equal to the spectrometer

pass energy E minus the acceleration of the ions between the target and pass

spectrometer V + VT

plus a contact potential correction term due to the acc

difference in work functions of the clean target and surfaces of the spectromshy

eter The pass and acceleration energies are chosen for each experiment The

contact potential difference between the tungsten target and the rhodium

coated stainless steel surfaces of the spectrometer is less than 015 eV

This was determined using a retarding potential measurement between the

target and screen grid Dosing the target with hydrogen did not change the

work function of the grid Hence it is assumed that 015 eV can be used for

the correction at all target hydrogen coverages Since this correction is

on the order of the error in the measurement it has not been made in the

data

The analyzer is operated in a time-of-f1ight mode by applying a

pulsed voltage to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a schematic of this

arrangement Incident ions can enter the analyzer only during the pulse By

measuring the path length d = ab (see Figure 211) from the retarding grid

to the electron multiplier knowing the pass energy E of the spectromshypass

eter and experimentally measuring the time for the entering species to

traverse the distance d the mass of singly-charged ions passing through the

analyzer can be calculated using the following formulation of the distance

equals velocity times time equation

m _ dxrt J 2 (34)La J2E(X~

74

The flight time is measured by making a trace on an oscilloscope of both the

pulse applied to the retarding grid that allows ions to pass into the specshy

trometer and also the output pulses of the linear amplifier The flight time

t is the time difference between these two signals minus the transmission

time of the pulse from the first dynode of the electron multiplier to the

oscilloscope This transmission time is estimated to be several hundred

nanoseconds

The data taken in this research is presented in the remaining

sections of this chapter

33 Ion Species Identification

The ion species desorbed from the tungsten crystal by electron imshy

pact are identified using a time-of-flight technique as described above For

these measurements the spectrometer was set to pass 40 eV ions A total

acceleration voltage V + V of 370 eV was applied between the crystalT acc

and the entrance to the spectrometer Hence the energy of the ions origishy

nating at the crystal surface and passed by the spectrometer was 3 eV (3 eV

corresponds to the maximum in intensity of the ion energy dist~ibution given

in Section 35) Figure 33 shows an oscilloscope trace obtained when opershy

ating in the time-of-flight mode The trace was taken by applying a 22 ~sec

4pulse to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl0 pulsessec) This is the

large pulse at the left in the figure Several output pulses from the linear

amplifier can be seen approximately 4~sec after the retarding grid pulse

These are pulses that have been produced by the electron multiplier following

ion impingement onto the first dynode Taking into consideration the transshy

mission time the experimental flight time is 37~sec Using Equation 34

75

ill22fLsec Window Amplifier Output Pulses

o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Time (fLsec)

Time of Flight (H+) =J2~m ES 40 eV d=029 m

~ 33 fLsec

Figure 33 Oscilloscope trace showing the pulses observed when operating the spectrometer in the time-of-flight mode The 22 ~sec trace at the left is the analyzer on pulse applied to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl04 pulsessec) During this pulse ions pass into the spectrometer Several output pulses from the linear amplifier resulting from ions striking the electron multiplier can be seen delayed by their flight time in the spectrometer and the pulse transmission time from the multiplier to the oscilloscope The output pulses have been enhanced for reproduction purposes

76

with the analyzer pass energy of 40 eV a path length of 029 m and a time of

37 ~sec the mass of the desorbed ions is calculated to be 14 amu The unshy

certainty in this calculation is estimated to be~05 amu Sources of error

include the estimate of transmission time and the uncertainty in the time difshy

ference read from the oscilloscope trace In adqition over part of the path

length (the region between the retarding and LEED grids and in the cylindrical

analyzer) the ions have less than 40 eV energy Hence from this calculation

alone it is not possible to identify the ions as H+ However in experiments

in which the length of the retarding grid pulse was shortened to~ 1 ~ sec

flight times that differed by gt1 ~sec could be distinguished on the oscilloshy

scope The calculated flight time for ions of mass one is 3 3 ~ sec and for

ions of mass two is 46 ~sec or 13 ~sec longer Thus H+ could be resolved

from Hiions The ions detected in the time-of-flight experiment of Figure 33

+have been identified as H For certain spectrometer biasing conditions

+pulses appear on the oscilloscope 1 5 ~ sec later than the H pulses The ions

causing these pulses have been identified as having mass two

When oxygen is adsorbed on the surface the signal pulses on the osshy

cilloscope occur approximately 135 ~sec after the retarding grid pulse This

is in good agreement with the expected flight time for 0+ ions

+In addition to the H ions observed after adsorbing hydrogen from the

jet H+ ions were unexpectedly desorbed by electron impact from the undosed

tungsten surface upon cooling the crystal to below OoC Possible sources for

the hydrogen desorbed under these conditions are discussed in Chapter 4

If E is set at 40 eV set at 0 eV and V varied above pass VT acc

40 eV no ions originating at the crystal surface can be passed by the spectromshy

77

eter However with these biasing conditions both H+ and H + ions are obshy2

served This ion signal has to originate at the walls of the experimental

+ +chamber from a ESD process andor from the ambient Both the H and H2 sigshy

nals increased when H2 was admitted into the background from the gas handling

system an indication that at least part of the signal origtnates from ionizashy

tion in the background It is not easy to determine the intensity of the

+ +H or H2 desorbed from the chamber walls However it is possible to show that

ionization of ambient H2 could be a serious noise problem The cross section

+ -17 2for electron impact ionization of H2 to H2 is 48xlO cm and of H2

22xlO-17 cm2 for 400 eV electrons 80 An electron current of lxlO-6 A at 400

eV would produce about llxlO3 H2+ ions per cm3-Torr-sec and 5xl012 H + ions

3 per cm -Torr-sec Thus it is reasonable to assume that at the background presshy

sures here a sizable ion Signal is produced although most of it undoubtedly

is not detected In the ESD eXperiments performed here it was desired to

detect only ions produced at the surface of the crystal It has been possible

to bias the spectrometer such that this is the case Almost none of the extra

signal has the correct energy to pass through the spectrometer when V isT

held several volts positive and when V is kept less than E - V bull acc pass T

34 Work Function Results

Work function changes resulting from hydrogen adsorption have been

monitored as a measure of hydrogen coverage Figure 34 shows the tungsten

surface work function change as a function of exposure to hydrogen The crysshy

tal was at 600 C for this experiment To obtain this data the crystal was roshy

tated into the gas jet dosed for a measured time and then rotated back to a

position in front of the spectrometer where a retarding potential curve was

78

Figure 34 Change in work function 6~ of a room temperature tungsten (100) surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption 6~ is plotted versus exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen For comparison the results reported by Madey820 are also shown Exposures for the data taken here have been determined by normalizing the measured adsorption time to Madeys absolute exposure at a work function change ~ of 041 eV

------o 0 Withrow

10

08

gt06 OJ--amplt]04

02

0~013

Madey and Yates

Max bcp=~~

Data Normalized at bcp =041

0

10M 101610~ Exposure (Moleculescm2) SP-1121

80

S o Max ltltgt=09S-~ 6 A Max ltltgt =092 --eshy

lt34 o Adsorption at 60degC A Adsorption at -150degC

2

20 40 60 SO 100 120 140 160 ISO 200 220 Exposure (arbitrary units)

SP-1214

Figure 35 Comparison of work function changes at 600 C and -lSOoC resulting from hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten (100)

OlO~i--~----~--~----~--~----~--~--~~--~~

- W(lOO)gt (J) 008

- shy

-u 006 o o

00 ~ 004 --Sshy

I 002-I shy--S- 0

-200 -100 o 100 200 Temperature (OC) SP-U56

Figure 36 Change in the work function of the undosed tungsten (100) surface versus crystal temperature for the temperature range -150oC to 220oC The ordinate in the graph represents the work function at temperature T measured with respect to the work function at 220degC The data was obtained in three_separate experimental runs indicated by different symbols as discussed in the text

82

taken This procedure was followed repeatedly without closing the jet in order

to assure a constant hydrogen flux (molecm2-sec) from the jet onto the

-8crystal face An incident primary electron current oflt2xlO A at a primary

energy of 100 eV was used The saturation coverage work function change

8tCP ) is 098 + 004 eV For comparison results obtained by Madey and Yates

max

for the work function change resulting from adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO)

are given in Figure 34 Absolute exposures for the data taken here have been

obtained by normalizing the dose time to Madey and Yates exposure at a work

function change of 041 eV Using this normalization good agreement beshy

tween their results and the data obtained here is found

The work function change of the tungsten surface as a function of hyshy

drogen exposure was also measured when the crystal was at -150degC The data are

given in Figure 35 The procedure used in obtaining the 600 c data was fallowed

in taking these data The maximum work function change at this lowtemperature

is 092 + 004 eV

The dependence of the work function on crystal temperature is shown

in Figure 36 The work function is seen to decrease 005 eV as the temperashy

ture is raised from -lSOoC to 220degC The data in this figure were obtained in a

series of retarding potential curve measurements taken at different crystal

temperatures The temperature was varied by radiation heating the ~rystal on

its back face using the pancake heater It was found impossible to take decent

retarding potential curves when the crystal was heated more than about ISOoC

above its initial temperature As the current through the pancake heater was

increased electron emission from this heater also increased This emission

current interfered with the retarding potential measurement when it became a

83

fraction of the incident current The three different symbols in Figure 36

represent data taken when the initial temperature prior to heating was -150oC

work function change has been reported Assuming this result and using the

-1350 C and 50oC The change in work function with temperature was reversible

In this research no attempts have been made to measure absolute covshy

erages Coverages are defined in terms of ~ the measured work function

change As discussed in Section 126 a linear relation between coverage and

8

room temperature data taken here cover~ge and work function can be described

by the expression

e = 102 ~ (35)

where ~ is measured in eVe e represents coverage in fraction of a mon6laye~

15 2 8 A monolayer is assumed to be 2xlO H atomscm Estimates of coverage in this

work will be made by measuring work function changes and using Equation 35

However it should be noted that the data will be presented in terms of the

measured quantity~ and therefore are not dependent on any assumptions

made relating coverage and work function

35 H+ Ion DesoEPtion Measurements

The electron stimulated desorption of H+ ions from the W(lOO) surface

has been studi~d under different experimental conditions Detection of the

ion signal has been discussed in Section 325 The results follow below

351 H+ Ion Energy Distribution

Ions desorbed from a surface by electron impact have a characteristic

distribution in energy This distribution is dependent on the adsorption states

from which the ions originate In the simple models used to describe this

phenomena changes in the observed energy distribution except some intensity

84

changes result from changes in the adsorption states Hence this measurement

can be used to characterize the states from which ions are desorbed A theore~

ieal discussion of the ion energy distribution is given in Appendix C

Figure 37 shows the energy distribution of H+ ions electron desorbed

-6from W(IOO) using a primary beam current of IxlO A at an energy of 400 eV

This current was sufficiently low such that the energy distribution was obtained

without desorbing the hydrogen coverage to any extent The choice of 400 eV for

the primary energy was to some extent arbitrary although it was found that

below 400 eV the ion signal was weaker and the measurements required more time

to take To obtain the data the crystal was flashed and then allowed to cool

several minutes to 60oC It was then dosed with hydrogen from the jet until a

work function change of 018 eV corresponding to a substantial coverage in the

~2 state was measured The distribution was obtained by scanning V while acc

holding V at 4 volts The distribution has an intensity maximum at 3 + 05 eVT

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV No correction to the energy scale

has been made for the target-spectrometer contact potential difference since

this amounts to only 015 eV which is smaller than the accuracy in the meashy

s~remertt A small part of the detected ion signal which did not originate at

the crystal surface has been subtracted out The amount of this contribution

was determined by monitoring the ion signal from the flashed undosed surface

This extra signal amounted to no more than 10 percent of the total signal and

was entirely on the low side of the energy distribution

+For comparison the energy distributions of H ions produced by elecshy

tron impact of gas phase hydrogen81 and hydrogen-covered polycrystalline tungshy

82sten are included in Figure 37 All three curves have been normalized to

the same peak intensity The three curves have characteristically different

85

Figure 37 Energy distribution of H+ ions from a tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen Hydrogen coverage for this measurement corresponds to a work function change of 018 eV (approximately 019 monolaYS2) F~r comparison the energy distribution reported by Nishijima of H ions des orbed from hydrogen covered polyshycrystalline tungsten is given ASIo shown is an ion energy distribution obtained by Hagstrum from gas phase hydrogen The three distributions have been normalized at their peak intensities

-Ugt-

Q)

gtshyc o

H

+ r

86

H+ Ion Energy Distribution

- Withrow H2 W(lOO) -- Nishijima H2 I W (polycrystol) _- HagstrumH2 gas

1 J

ii ~ I I iiI ~ I

iii middot VI 1

I I bull

o 2 468

H+ Ion Energy (eV)

87

distributions in energy

Energy distributiol1s of H+ ions taken at different hydrogen coverages

are shown in Figure 38 Experimental conditions for these measurements were

the same as used to obtain the previous figure There is no change in peak

position or line shape as a function of coverage except for heavy dosings

where the distribution appears to be slightly broader The maximum intensity

is a function of coverage as discussed below

Figure 39 shows a series of ion energy distributions taken after

adsorption from the jet with the target temperature approximately -150o

C For

these data the target was flashed and allowed to cool 5 minutes before

adsorption All other experimental conditions were identical to the correshy

sponding 600

C data The distributions peak at 3 eV (except at high coverage

where the peak appears to be slightly higher) and have full widths at half

maxima of 26 eV identical to the results found for 600 C adsorption The

high energy tail of these low temperature distributions appears to be somewhat

wider than the corresponding higher temperature data however

After flashing the target to 22000 K and allowing it to cool five

ominutes to a temperature of lt-145 C hydrogen ions can be detected without

dosing the surface from the jet An energy distribution for this signal is

shown in Figure 310 A time-of-flight measurement confirmed that the observed

signal is indeed H+ ions The energy distribution peaks at 25 05 eVvith a

full width at half maximum of 58 eV The peak intensity of the ion signal

obtained without dosing depends on the previous history of the sample and on

the experimental parameters as discussed in Section 35~ This intensity

change is indicated by arrows in Figure 310 For this measurement the

88

H+ from H2 W (100) T=600C

Zero Levels

fI)

cshy s gt

~

c-0 ~

0 ~ --0

CIgt

gt-shyc 0

1-1

+J

o 2 4 6

6cent= OSSeV

6cent=06geV

6cent=045eV

6cent=0lSeV

Acent=OlOeV

Acent=003eV

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1l96

Figure 38 Comparison of energy distributions of g+ ions desorbed from a 600 c tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

89

-ffl middotcshy

l

gtshy 0 shy

0 0-0 ltlgt

gt= C 0

H

+I

H+ from H2 W(100) T =-150degC

Zero Levels

Dcp=067 eV

Dcp= 043eV

---_Dcp=Olle~

___

Dcp=017eV

D_cp=004eV

o 246 H+lon Energy (eV)

SP-1197

Figure 39 Comparison of energy distributions of H+ ions desorbed from a low temperature (-lSOOC) tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

90

--(J) H+ from Undosed W(lOO)

T=l50degC

H+ from H2 Dosed W

ot 60degC

-0

-Q)

~l ~ + I O~~~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~ o 2 4 6

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1202

Figure 310 Energy distribution obtained from a flashed but undo sed tungsten (100) surface which has been cooled to -150oC For comparison the energy distribution of a+ ions from the tungsten (100) surface after dosing with hydrogen is shown by the dashed line The two distributions are normalized at their maximum intensities The intensity of the ion signal from the undosed surface changes as a function of sample history as discussed in the text This is indicated by the arrow

I

91

primary energy was 400 eVe A relatively low incident electron current

of lxlO-7 A was used so that the coverage in the surface state being probed

would not be strongly depleted during the measurement This state has a high

desorption cross section as calculated in Chapter 4 and hence depletion is

a possibility It should be noted that the same energy distribution is obshy

tained from the low temperature state using a beam current of 2xlO-6 A The

latter high current measurement reflects the distribution in energy of H+ ions

desorbed from the fast state when its coverage is in equilibriumll as disshy

cussed in Section 352

The intensity of the ion signal desorbed from the surface at both

60 0 C and -1500 C is strongly coverage dependent In Figure 311 is plotted the

intensity of the 3 eV H+ ion signal as a function of work function change upon

adsorption of hydrogen The signals from the 60 0 C and -lSOoC surfaces have

maximum intensities at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV respecshy

tively This difference indicates that adsorption at the low temperature

differs somewhat from that at 600C At higher hydrogen coverages theion

signals decrease to less than 15 of their peak intensities indicating that

the cross section for ion desorption decreases as the ll state fills The

41 reason for this decrease is not well understood although Madey has sug~_

gested that it results from a coverage dependent rate of reneutralization of

the ions produced by the incident beam At near monolayer coverages the 3 eV

ion signal increased somewhat

The data in Figur~ 311 are normalized at the peak intensity The

absolute maximum yields at the two temperatures are the same within 25

Also shown normalized at the peak intensity are Madeys intensity versus

41 coverage data for hydrogen adsorbed on W(lOO) at room temperature The

--

en + ~ H from H2 W (100) J ~ ~ Withrow 60degC ~ 0 Withrow -150degC shye __ -- Madey 22degCA

c

C li)

gtshy 0

c N

o H + I o x ~

cf c

o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Il cp (eV)

Figure 311 Intensity of the 3 eV g+ ion signal from the tungsten (1ampH)-1195 surface as a function of the change in work function resulting from hydrogen adsorption Data for adsorption at 600 C and -l50oC are plotted For comparison the results obtained by Madey4 from a room temperature tungsten (100) surface are included

93

maximum in his ion signal occurs for the same coverage as the maximum in the

room temperature data taken here His results are more sharply peaked howshy

ever This difference may be due to the different conditions under which the

two sets of data were obtained Madeys results represent ions desorbed in a

narrow cone normal to the surface whereas the spectrometer used here collected

only those ions desorbed from the surface at 350 + 2 120 Madey also used a

lower primary energy

352 Desorption Curve Measurements

The H+ ion signal is observed to decrease with time if a primary

electron beam current of sufficient intensity per surface area is used A

theoretical description of this measurement referred to as a desorption

curve is given in Appendix C It can be shown that the expected ion signal

decreases to an equilibrium value The rate of decay of the desorption curve

and the equilibrium value are used to calculate parameters characteristic of

the adsorption state being probed

Figure 312 shows the decay of the 3 eV H+ ion signal from tungsten

(100) initially covered with hydrogen to a work function change of 010 eV

oThe temperature of the crystal for this measurement was 60 C An incident

-6 -3 2current of 5xlO A (a current density of 25xlO Aem) at a primary energy

of 400 eV was used The decrease in ion yield is seen to be quite slow The

equilibrium value shown in this figure iH+ was estimated from the equil

analysis of the data in Chapter 4

+As noted above H ions could be desorbed from a cold but undosed

tungsten (100) surface The desorption curve for this undosed state is shown

in Figure 313 For this data the crystal was flashed and allowed to cool

5 minutes to -150o

C Then the incident electron current was turned on (see

94

I I I t I I I I I H+ from H2 W(l00) Epri =400 eV-(f) Ipri =5 X 10-6 A

a ~rp =010 eV82000r- shy

-(f)

c (l) I- shy iHquil-c

-~1000 shyo

H + I

t I I I I I o 100 200 300 400

Time (sec) SP-1203

Figure 312 Change in the a+ ion current during electron obombardment of a 60 C tungampten (100) surface

Hydrogen was initially adsorbed to a coverage of 010 monolayer

95

200 -()

a ~160 gt

if) -c ~120 c

H c ~ 80

+r 40

H+ Ions fromW(lOO) Epri=400eV

Ipri=lA

Temp =- 1500 C

IH~qUil ------------shy

Figure 313 Change in the a+ ion current during electron bombardment of a flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface cooled to -150oC

140

96

Section 354 for a discussion of how the current was controlled) and the

ion signal decay monitored The signal is seen to undergo a rapid decay It

reaches its equilibrium value in several minutes in sharp contrast with the

desorption curve obtained after hydrogen dosing at room temperature An inshy

-6 -4 2cident current of lxlO A (a current density of 5lxlO Alcm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV was used to take the desorption curve from the undosed cold

surface This current density is only 20 percent of the value used for the

room temperature data of Figure 312 It was found convenient to use this

smaller value since the decay of the ion signal was so rapid Additional

desorption measurements on this fast decaying or fast state are given in

the following two sections

A desorption curve obtained after dosing the cold tungsten (100)

surface with hydrogen is shown in Figure 314 The data were taken using a

-6 -3 2primary current of 3xlO A (a current density of 15xlO Acm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV The surface was dosed to a work function change of 007 eV

Initially there is a rapid decay of the ion signal which is similar to the

desorption curve obtained from the fast state Following this initial decaYt

the signal continues to fall for a time but at a much slower rate of decay

This desorption pattern different than either of the desorption curves given

in Figures 312 or 313 can be described in ter~ of simultaneous desorption

from two adsorption states This is discussed further in Chapter 4

+353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State H Ion Signal

The ion yield from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface

has been studied as a function of temperature These data were obtained by

continuously monitoring both the tungsten temperature and the 3 eV H+ ion

97

-() a u

t gt

800()

c (J) +shy

~600 c o

+ H

400 r

200

o

Figure 314

r-

i-

r-shy

I I I I I I I I I

H+ from H2 W(lOO Epri =400eV

I I I

o 100

Iprl =3xlO-6 A

ilq= O07eV T=-150degC

I 1 I I

T

I

-

-

-

200 300 400 Time (sec)

Change in the H+ ion current during electron bombardment oof a -150 C tungsten (100) surface Hydrogen was

initially adsorbed to a coverage of 007 monolayer

98

signal following a crystal flash The current for this measurement was

-6 -4 2IxlO A (a current density of 5lx10 Aem) The primary energy was 400

eV As can be determined from the previous section this current density was

such that the electron beam caused Significant perturbations on the hydrogen

state during the measurement None the less several conclusions can be inshy

ferred from the intensity versus temperature data presented in Figure 315

The ion signal from the fast hydrogen state is strongly temperature dependent

+ 0The H intensity is seen to increase sharply below approximately -50 C The

results are reversible with temperature the ion signal decreases if the crysshy

tal is heated and the signal returns to its original intensity when the crysshy

tal cools back down

Several mechanisms could be responsible for the appearance of a

H+ ion signal below room temperature For example a temperature dependent

bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen could produce a desorbable hydrogen

state Likewise adsorption from the background rtight pro(luce desorbable H+

only below room temperature In order to better understand the fast state

some additional measurements were made as described in the following section

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State

Additional experiments were performed to further elucidate the nature

of the low temperature fast state Experiments were made to determine the

source of hydrogen which populates this state The effect of co-adsorption

of hydrogen from the jet with this state was probed In addition the possishy

bility that the appearance of the state was related to surface contamination

was investigated Possible correlations between the fast state hydrogen and

the low temperature LEED phenomena described in Section 123 were probed

99

50----~----~----r---_~--_r----_--_

20

-(J)-c

gt l shye ~10 c l shye gt

00 -c Q)-~ 5 c o

H

+ I

2

-150 -100 -50 0 100 150 Temperature (OC)

Figure 315 Intensity of the 3 eV a+ ion signal from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface as a function of tungsten temperature

-200

100

In these measurements it was desired to study the appearance of

+the fast state H ion signal without the complicating effects of simultaneous

significant depletion of this hydrogen state with the primary electron beam

This possibility exists since the cross section for electron sesorption of

the fast state is high as shown in Chapter 4 It was found that a measure

of the change of coverage in the fast state could be obtained in experiments

in which the electron beam was turned off for short times During the time

the gun was off referred to as adsorption times the fast state populated

The increase in the coverage in this state during the adsorption time could be

monitored by taking a desorption curve right after the adsorption time The

change in coverage is assumed proportional to the difference iH+ - iH+ initial equi1

where iH+ is the ion intensity immediately after turning the gun back on initial

and ~+ has been discussed above The difference iH+ - iH+ will equil initial equi1

be referred to as ~iH+(adsorption time) The rate of increase in coverage of

the fast state is assumed proportional to ~~+(adsorption time)adsorption

time

To turn the gun off the control grid was biased 6 volts negative

with respect to the cathode This method of controlling the gun current

kept the cathode temperature constant during the adsorption time while at

the same time no current could reach the crystal The primary beam could be

turned off (or subsequently back on) in fractions of a second No effects on

the observed measurements could be attributed to this biasing procedure

The change in the population of the fast state has been monitored as

a function of the tungsten crystal temperature Figure 316 shows the results

of a series of measurements each done at a different crystal temperature in

101

() --c s gtshy

0 -0

0 100-~ 0shy+Q)

J 50

0 shy

+S a J

-150 -100 -50 a 50 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1215

Figure 316 The quantity igt - i~ measured initial eqpil

from desorption curves from Ehe fast state as a function of crystal temperature

102

which the above procedure has been used with adsorption times of 150 seconds

From the desorption curves taken following the adsorption times the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) has been calculated This quantity is plotted versusH

the crystal temperature in Figure 316 The quantity 6iH+(adsorption time)

ie the fast state signal is small and less than 5 of the maximum signal

owhen the temperature of the tungsten crystal is higher than OOC Below 0 C

the change in population in the fast state during the adsorption time inshy

creases as the temperature decreases This temperature dependence is in

agreement with the the results of Figure 315 which was taken continuously

with a high primary current as the crystal was cooled after a flash Thus the

procedure used to obtain Figure 316 appears reasonable

The rate of population of the fast state can be an indication of the

source of hydrogen as discussed in Chapter 4 The rate of population of this

state has been investigated as a function of adsorption time using the proceshy

dure given above Figure 317 shows a plot of the quantity 6i +(adsorptionH

time) versus adsorption time From the figure it is concluded that the rate

of popUlation is constant in time at least for coverages of the fast state

obtained in 26 minutes

The effect of co-adsorption of hydrogen from the jet on the fast

state has been probed The purpose of these measurements has been to detershy

mine if hydrogen (H2) from the gas dosing system is the source of the fast

state In a series of measurements the cold crystal surface was dosed with

hydrogen and then an ESD ion signal monitored until it reached equilibrium

Following this the fast state was allowed to populate during an adsorption

time of 150 seconds Finally a desorption curve from the co-adsorbed fast

lO3

Growth of H+ Ion Yield with Electron Gun Off T=-150degC--(f) c

s gt 0-0 0-

J 0shy

+0gt r

0 +shy

+pound r

200

100

SP-122J

Figure 317 The quantity igt bull i~ff measured from initial flequil

desorption curves from the fast state as a function of adsorption time Adsorption time is defined in the text

104

state and dosed hydrogen states was taken In Figure 318 the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) calculated from these desorption curves is plotted versusH

work function change due to adsorption from the jet For low doaes of hydroshy

gen (6cplt 010 eV) there is almost no change in the quantity t~+(adsorption

time) ie the rapid decay of the ion signal characteristic of the fast

state is observed However preadsorption of hydrogen from the jet clearly

affects the ion signal from the fast state for 6cplt010 eV The signal is

decreased forhy5irogen coverages in the 13 state in qualitative agreement1

with the data presented in Figure 311

For ~lt 010 eV the change in coverage in the fast state during

adsorption times of 150 seconds is seen to be independent of the amount of

hydrogen in the dosed or 13 2 state This result was used in a series of

experiments in which the rate of population of the fast state was measured

2at different hydrogen background pressures The flux (molecules per cm per

second) of H2 onto the surface from the background is directly proportional

to the partial pressure of hydrogen If H2 is the source of the fast state

changing the background pressure would be expected to have an effect on the

measured change in coverage in the fast state as long as the total adsorption

is lower than about 010 monolayer (which corresponds to a work function

change of 010 eV) For the data in Figure 318 the background pressure of

-11hydrogen was less than 7xlO Torr (the Bayard-Alpert gauge pressure) In

a series of experiments this hydrogen pressure was raised by letting gas in

from the the gas handling system for times ranging from one to two minutes

While the pressure was raised the electron gun was turned off so that simulshy

taneous adsorption into the fast state and the 13 2 state could take place The

105

() --C J

gt 10shy

0 10shy-0 10shy

S

0shy

+lt11 c

2-+~ c

200

100

0

8

DCP(eV) SP-1222

Figure 318 The quantity iHt 1nitial

desorption curves from

- iHplusmn measured from equil

the low temperature hydrogen dosed surface as a function of work function change ~~ ~~ results from hydrogen coverage

o 1 2 3 4 5 6

106

total hydrogen coverage in the Sz state was kept below 10 percent of a monoshy

layer Desorption curves were then taken and the quantity 8iH+(adsorption

time) calculated An interesting result was obtained It was found that the

coverage in the fast state was unrelated to the background pressure of HZ and

hence unrelated to the total impingement of HZ Even though experiments were

made in which the background pressure was varied over two orders of magnitude

the change in coverage in the fast state during equal adsorption times was

always the same Hence it is concluded that the fast state is not populated

by hydrogen added to the background from the gas handling system

It was found however that the fast state signal intensity could be

correlated to a pressure reading under certain experimental conditions

Normally during flashing the crystal manipulator was rotated so that the

tungsten crystal faced away from the entrance to the spectrometer (a rotation

oof 180 from the crystal position shown in Figure Z14) This normal flashing

posi tion is referred to as the down position The crystal could also be

flashed while it was in the IIUp position or facing the s~ectrometer It was

observed that when the crystal was flashed in the up position an increase in

the ion signal from the fast state could be obtained over that measured when

the crystal was flashed in the down position This unexpected result sugshy

gested that the fast state might be correlated to a thermal instrumental

effect Radiation heating from the crystal raised the temperature of the

surrounding experimental chamber surfaces If the crystal is close to the

surfaces during a flash as for example when flashed in the up position the

heating is greater One consequence of greater heating would be an enhanced

thermal desorption from the surfaces and a higher pressure in the experimental

107

chamber Hence the incident flux of gas thermally desorbed from the chamber

surfaces would be increased Unfortunately the best test of this hypothesis

a measurement of the temperature of the surfaces in the experimental chamber

could not be made However an interesting pressure related result could be

obtained when the x-ray current in the Bayard-Alpert gauge (which is equivalent

to approximately 7xlO-11 Torr pressure) was nulled out so that ambient pressure

-12increases at the gauge of as little as 05xlO Torr could be easily detected

It was observed that during a crystal flash when the crystal was in the up

position the gauge pressure showed a maximum pressure burst of approximately

3x10-l0 Torr This was higher than the pressure burst when the crystal was

flashed in the down position a strong indication that some surfaces in the

experimental chamber became hotter during an up flash When the crystal was

flashed in the down position the pressure fell quickly after the flash was

terminated to the nulled or equilibrium level However after a flash in the

up position the pressure fell to a quasi-equilibrium level which was higher

-12than the true equilibrium pressure by as much as 2xlO Torr The quasi-

equilibrium pressure was dependent on the number of prev~ous flashes in the

up position and on how long after flashing the pressure was read Once the

crystal had been flashed in the up position the pressure remained elevated

for several hours slowly decreasing to the equilibrium level It should be

noted that these pressure increases are read outside the experimental chamber

The actual pressure increase in the experimental chamber and hence the inshy

creased gas flux at the crystal surface can only be estimated to be proshy

portional to the gauge pressure

The magnitude of the pressure increases following a flash in the

108

up position was linearly related to both the change in coverage of the fast

state during the adsorption time and to the desorption curve equilibrium level

This can be seen from the data presented in Figure 319 The lower panel shows

the results of a series of measurements in which desorption curves were taken

after letting the fast state populate for adsorption times of 150 seconds

The ordinate in the lower panel is 6ia+ (adsorption1 time) The abscissa in the

figure is the increase in pressure over the equilibrium pressure as a result of

flashes in the up position The change in ion yield is seen to be directly

proportional to the observed pressure increase The top panel shows the equishy

librium ion signal observed for the desorption curves plotted versus the same

pressure increase as the lower panel A direct proportionality between the

equilibrium ion signal and the pressure increase is seen These two linear

results would be expected if the fast state populated as a result of adsorption

from the background This is discussed further in Chapter 4 On the other

hand no dependence of the fast state ion signal on background pressure would

be expected if the source of the hydrogen were bulk to surface diffusion Thus

while there may be hydrogen on the surface which is not desorbed by incident

electrons it can be concluded from this measurement that the fast state is

populated by adsorption from the ambient

A possible explanation for the fast state is suggested by the work

51of Jelend and Menzel They found that co-adsorption of oxygen or CO with

hydrogen leads to the ~ hydrogen state which has similar characteristics as

the fast state observed here The possibility that impurities are on the surshy

face in the temperature range in which the fast state is observed has been inshy

vestigated using Auger electron spectroscopy andel~tTon stimulated desorption in

lO9

Figure 319 Lower panel - The quantity iH+ - ig+ measured from initial eaui1

desorption curves from the fast state as S tunction of gauge pressure change The fast state populated during adsorption times of 150 seconds The pressure change results from flashing the tungsten crystal while it is in the up position Upper panel - Equilibrium ion current iH+ measured from the

-equildesorpt~on curves taken for the data in the lower panel

110

-(J)-C J gt 0 -0 0

100-s

+1)cr

J

C-+ J

0

--(J)

c J 200 gt 0 -0 0-

s +1)

cr J

- 100 I 2

012

Gauge Pressure Change (X10-12 Torr)

111

the time of flight mode In order to test for these elements the flashed

tungsten surface was cooled with the gun turned off allowing the fast state

to populate Total adsorption times of up to 15 minutes were used times in

which a strong fast state signal could be obtained However no carbon or

oxygen Auger peaks were observed and no desorbed oxygen or carbon ions that

could be attributed to the fast state were monitored with ESD Hence any

oxygen or CO present on the surface would have had a coverage below the deshy

tection sensitivity of the techniques used or less than approximately 1 pershy

cent of a monolayer It can be noted here that coverage calculations given in

Chapter 4 indicate the fast state hydrogen coverage is well below 1

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data

The low energy electron diffraction (LEE D) system used here has

been described previously in Section 26 LEED data has been optained using

hydrogen coverage crystal temperature and primary electron energy as

variable parameters as described below

The symmetry of the LEED spot pattern has been noted as a function

of hydrogen coverage at room temperature Results from these observations are

in good agreement with previously reported research (see Section 123) Half

order diffraction spots become visible with initial hydrogen coverage The

intensity of the half order spots maximize at a coverage corresponding to

~~ = 015 eV at a primary energy of 115 eVe Additional adsorption causes

the half order spots to split into four poorly defined spots This pattern

upon further adsorption becomes blurred At full coverage a (lxl) pattern

is observed Figure 320 shows a photograph of the LEED pattern observed

from a clean room temperature tungsten surface and also the c(2x2) LEED patshy

112

W(100)

Clean

T=60degC Epri = 1387eV

(1 xl) Clean (100) Surface

W (100)

Do 4gt =015eV

T =-150degC

Epri =115eV

C (2x2) Hydrogen Overoyer

SP-1200

Figure 320 Photo~raDh of LEED screen showing a clean (lxl) pattern and a c(2x2) pattern Models of possible surface atom configurations for the LEED patterns are also shown

113

tern that occurs with a hydrogen over1ayer in the ~2 state

When the crystal is cooled to below room temperatures half order

spots are visible without any dosing of the crystal from the gas system

Graphs of LEED spot intensity versus primary electron energy called

elastic intensity profiles are shown in Figures 321 322 and 323 for the

(10) (11) and (1212) diffraction beams A normally incident primary

electron beam was used in these measurements Data were taken at two tempera-

o 0tures 60 C and -150 C for both the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorbed on

the surface to a coverage corresponding to a ~~ of 015 eV This coverage corshy

responds to the maximum in intensity for the 115 eV half order beams All obshy

servable equivalent beams show the same line shape and peak positions There

are some intensity differences between equivalent beams probably due to an

uneven phosphor coating of the LEED screen particularly near its edge bull

Small misalignments might also affect the intensities The effect of hydrogen

adsorption on the intensity profiles is seen to be small except above 100 eV

in the (11) beam profile and below 50 eV in the (1212) beam profile Some

small shifts (~ 2 eV) in the energy positions of the peaks are observed as a

function of coverage but not as a function of temperature

The intensities of the (1212) (10) and (11) spots have been

measured as a function of crystal temperature for the clean (flashed) surface

These results are presented in Figures 324 and 325 using a semilogarithmic

scale The data were obtained by continuously monitoring both the tungsten

temperature and the intensity of the beams following a crystal flash Primary

energies of 115 eV for the (1212) beam 1105 eV and 67 eV for the (10)

beam and 113 eV for the (11) beam and currents of 10xlO-6 A were used The

114

- (j) +shyC l

gt 1loshy0 0 loshy+shy0

loshy0

- 0gt

+shy(j)

c Q) +shyC

H

o

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j = 0deg g=(10)

T =60degC Clean

T =-150degC fjcent = 015 eV

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l109

Figure 321 Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degc and -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsoroed in the S2 state

llS

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

U)-C J

1

-~ l0shy

a loshy

0 0l0shya-~-U) 0c OJ

C -H

o

o

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-lloa

8i =0deg g = (1 1)

T = 60degC Clean

T =60degC IJcp = 015 eV

T = -150degC IJcp = 015 eV

Figure 322 Elastic intensity profiles for the (11) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsorbed in the 62 state

116

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j =00

g = (12 12 )

o 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l107

Figure 323 Elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A vJork function change Acp of 015 eV corresponds to hydrocn adsorbed in the 13

2 state

117

100~--~--~----~--~-------~--------

--VI

c s gtshyt shyc -t shycl

010 -

gtshy-VI c Q)

c -I-f

tr c Q)

a

WOOO) 81 =0deg

9 = (ItO) 0-

-0- Epri = 1105 eV --0-- -0shy -0

9 = (ItI)

0 Epri= 113 eV =0shy o 0 0

9 = (ItO) Epri= 67 eV

0

Figure 324 Temperature dependence of (10) and (11) LEED beams from a flashed tungsten (100) surface Primary energies used are indicated on the graph

118

W (100) 9 =(12 t 12)

8j=0deg50

CJ)-

~ 5 o Q)

Q

2

-100 o 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1l55 Figure 325 Temperature dependence of the (1212) LEED

beam from flashed tungsten (100) surface A primary electron energy of 115 eV was used

200

119

intensities of the (10) and (11) beams are seen to increase exponentially

(linearly on the semilogarithmic scale) as the temperature is lowered The

intensity of the (1212) order beam also increases as the temperature is

lowered Down to approximately -750 C the rate of increase with temperature is

ogreater than that for the integral order beams Below -75 C the intensity

changes at about the same rate as the integral order beams The results are

reversible with temperature

In Sections 353 and 354 a hydrogen ion signal has been reported

from the flashed surface LEED measurements have been made to ascertain if

this ion yield from the fast state could be correlated to the intensity of the

LEED spots After flashing the crystal the photometer signal from the

(1212) beam was measured as the crystal cooled to -lS0 0 C Then the incishy

dent electron current was turned off for 300 seconds in order to allow the

fast state to populate When the electron current was turned back on the

photometer signal immediately returned to the same intensity as obtained prior

to turning off the incident current There was no decay in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the desorption curve phenomena seen with

the ion signal The intensity of the photometer signal from the (10) and

(11) beams as well as from the background was monitored ilsing this same

procedure In no case was there any structure observed in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the rapid decay in the fast state ion

yield

37 Electron Scattering Data

The electron signal backscattered from the crystal has been observed

as a function of hydrogen coverage and crystal temperature using synchronous

120

detection of the second harmonic of the energy distribution N(E) as disshy

cussed in Appendix B and in Section 324

Figure 326 shows the characteristic loss structure for electrons

scattered from a clean room temperature tungsten (100) surface and also from

this surface after dosing with hydrogen The abscissa in this figure represhy

sents electron loss energy w where 0 eV s w s 40 eV A primary~nergy of

-6110 eV and a primary current of lxlO A were used to take these data Since

25for tungsten true secondary structure extends out to 60 eV there is no

overlap of secondary and characteristic loss structure down to losses of 50

eV when operating at 110 eV primary energy The data of Figure 326 were taken

in the second derivative mode in order to suppress the background The data

were taken at a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV with a 1 volt peak to peak

oscillation on the retarding potential

Coverage dependent changes in the spectra are seen The peak at

w = 25 eV in the clean spectrum decays as the hydrogen coverage in increased

At the same time the narrow peak at 4 eV becomes broader and a peak grows at

a loss energy of 75 eV The structure at 210 eV in the clean spectrum moves

down in loss energy as hydrogen adsorbs Below w ~ 30 eV very little change

in the spectra as a function of hydrogen coverage is observed

Figure 327 shows characteristic loss structure for electrons

oscattered from a tungsten surface cooled to -150 C The data were taken using

the same electron gun and spectrometer operating conditions as used for the

data of Figure 326 The low temperature clean spectrum is nearly identical

to that obtained at the higher temperature The only change is a slight enshy

hancement of the shoulder at about 45 eV Changes in the clean spectrum with

121

Figure 326 oCharacteristic electron energy loss spectra from a 60 C

tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverages A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modulation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

---

N w -0 shyw-Z

N -0

I

122

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl=110 eV Iprl c5xlO-6 A

T= 60degC Modulation =1 V Peak to Peak

6ltl 080eV

060eV

O 35eV

023eV

014eV

003eV

Clean

o

SP-1219

123

Figure 327 Characteristic electron energy loss spectra from a -lSOoC tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverage A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modushylation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

124

N lJJ 0

~ lJJ Z N 0 I

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl =110 eV Iprl =5x10-6 A T=-150degC Modulation 1 V Peak to Peak

bcent OS6eV

O5geV

O35eV

O25eV

O16eV

O05eV

Cleon

SP-1220

-~--------~- -- -----------

125

hydrogen adsorption are identical to those seen for adsorption at the higher

temperature

Loss spectra were also taken for 0 eV ~ w ~ 10 eV from the flashed

but undosed cold surface after turning off the electron gun for 10 minutes

These measurements were made to see if the fast state hydrogen would affect

the loss measurements No changes in the electron loss spectrum from those

taken immediately after cooling the flashed crystal were found

A discussion of the data presented in this chapter follows in

Chapter 4

126

CHAPTER 4

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

Hydrogen chemisorption on single crystal tungsten (100) has been

probed in this research using complementary surface sensitive techniques

Auger measurements have been given in Section 28 Work function ESD LEED

and electron scattering results have been given in Chapter 3 A discussion

of this data is presented here

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental condition using Auger electron spectroscopy The procedures

used have been previously described with the spectrometer electronics Section

25 The Auger data have been given and discussed in Section 28 A brief

summary of these results follows

Tungsten carbon and oxygen Auger transitions have been observed

using this technique It can be seen from Figure 216 that after flashing the

cryLl to 2200oK no structures attributable to carbon or oxygen Auger elecshy

trons remain in the Auger spectrum The Auger measurement is estimated to

be sensitive to approximately 1 percent coverage Operation of the electron

gun in the high current high voltage Auger mode results in a slow deposition

of carbon from the background Since the Auger mode is used to chemically

characterize the surface the net effect of this beam related contamination

is an overestimation of the carbon impurity concentration at the surface

Some weak structure in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface

occurs between 475 eV and 525 eV No definite conclusions regarding the

127

origin of these peaks can be made The possibility that the structure results

from transitions in tungsten andor other elements is discussed in Chapter 2

83It is worth noting that Watts Jones and Hopkins recently published an

Auger spectrum from a flashed W(lOO) surface in which weak structure can be

seen at approximately the same energies as the unidentified structure observed

here This similarity lends support to the hypothesis that the peaks are

tungsten Auger transitions However it does not rule out other possibilities

The similarity of the data indicates at least that if the structure in

question results from some contaminate the problem is not unique to the

apparatus here It should be emphasized that work function ESD and LEED

data taken here are in good agreement with the literature any possible

contamination has not had a noticeable effect on the measurements

42 Work Function Results

Retarding potential work function measurements have been taken as

a measure of hydrogen coverage Plots of work function changes versus

exposure to hydrogen are presented in Figures 34 and 35 Adsorption of

hydrogen at 600 C yields a maximum work function change of 098 plusmn 004 eV

This is within 10 percent of 090 eV the most consistent monolayer coverage

work function chan~e reported in the literature for the H2 on W(lOO)

8 18 46 47 84system As argued by Armstrong agreement with the values from

the literature is an indication of good (100) orientation This is because

the work function of a faceted surface is a weighted average over the work

44functions of the facets Since hydrogen adsorption increases the work

function of the (100) face far more than the expected facet orientations a

128

faceted (100) surface would have a lower full coverage work function change

than a true (100) surface

Hydrogen adsorption onto W(lOO) at low temperatures increases the

work function by 092 plusmn 004 eV at full coverage This is slightly lower

than the room temperature maximum increase although within experimental

error the two measurements are the same

The increase in work function with hydrogen coverage can be intershy

preted using a simple model in which each adsorbed hydrogen atom acts as a

negative dipole at the surface The work function change on adsorption

43 6~ can be shown to equal the total added dipole moment at the surface

divided by the permittivity Using this and assuming a hydrogen coverage of

15 22xlO atomsem for a 6~ of 098 eV the average dipole moment permax

adsorbed hydrogen atom is calculated to be -013 Debye This result can be

compared to a theoretical account of the dipole moment of a hydrogen ion

63adsorbed onto metal surfaces given by Smith Ying and Kohn Their

calculation indicates that in order to observe a negative dipole moment the

hydrogen ion must be closer than 061 Kto the top plane of substrate ion

cores This would be an upper estimate of the proximity of the hydrogen atoms

to the tungsten substrate The minimum theoretical dipole moment per

63 -2 adsorbed hydrogen ion obtained by Smith et al is -lxlO au (1 au

equals 24 Debye) This value is lower than the observed value of -013

Debye by a factor of 5

o 0Cooling a clean tungsten (100) crystal from 200 C to -150 C

results in a work function increase of approximately 005 eV as shown in

Figure 36 This is an average change with temperature d~dT of 14xlO -4

129

oeV K The temperature dependence of work function for tungsten in this

temperature range has not previously been reported However temperature

dependent changes in work function of this magnitude have been reported for

85 86 85 86Cu Ag Na and K and have been described theoret~ca11y in terms of

both a thermal expansion of the crystal lattice and a temperature dependence

of the crystal electronic structure The work function change observed

here is quantitatively in agreement with experimental data for other elements

and with a theoretical model that describes the temperature dependence solely

in terms of intrinsic properties of a clean metal surface While perturbashy

tions on the crystal surface such as gas adsorption from the background or

bulk to surface diffusion can reasonably be expected to affect the work

function it is not necessary to invoke these causes to explain the changes

seen on cooling the crystal

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results

Under electron bombardment H+ ions can be desorbed from the

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface and from the low temperature undosed

surface The theory that describes this ESD process was first proposed by

37 38Redhead and by Menzel and Gomer A discussion of their model including a

derivation of the energy distribution of ions from the surface is given in

Appendix C In addition a discussion of the ESD phenomena in terms of

surface kinetics is also given in this appendix

ESD has been used to study the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system at

ocrystal temperatures from slightly above room temperature to -150 C Energy

distributions of It ions desorption curves and ion yield versus temperaturemiddot

and coverage data have been obtained

130

431 Room Temperature Results

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from room temperature

W(lOO) is given by the solid curve in Figure 37 The distribution has a

Gaussian line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 plusmn 05 eV

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV The line shape of the energy

distribution remains virtually unchanged as a function of hydrogen coverage

at least to near saturation coverage as shown by the curves in Figure 38

Near full coverage the distribution appears to broaden somewhat This latter

change requires further study which has not been done here

From Equation Cl of Appendix C the energy distribution of the

desorbed ions is given by the expression

(41)

where x is the coordinate normal to the surface Ions that start at x X ]

desorb with energy V N is the surface density of hydrogen atoms adsorbed in

the ground state ~ is the cross section for electron induced excitation ex

of hydrogen from the ground state to the ionic state I~G(xi)12 is the

probability density of hydrogen at Xi P(x ) is the probability that an ioni

starts from the position x and escapes from the surface as an ion and J

dV(X)dxlxi is the slope of the ion-metal interaction evaluated at Xi The

line shape of the energy distribution depends on the metal-neutral intershy

action VG(x) via ~G and depends on the ion-metal interaction V(x) via P(x)

and the slope dV(x)dx

--------------------------~-~~----------------

131

One manifestation of multistate adsorption in which VG(x) and V(x)

are dependent on the binding state is a change in the experimentally

observed energy distribution Multistate adsorption has been observed with

ESD for some systems for example as a function of oxygen coverage on

W(lOO)25 A similar result might be expected for hydrogen adsorption on

W(lOO) since two states ~l and ~2 are seen in thermal desorption spectra

However from the ion energy distribution line shapes for hydrogen on W(lOO)

no evidence of multistate adsorption as a function of coverage is seen The

line shapes of the energy distribution curves are the same at hydrogen

coverages corresponding to both thermal desorption states Hence coverage

dependent interactions which have been proposed to account for the thermal

desorption results and other phenomena reported for this system are not

observed using this technique

Another conclusion to be drawn from the energy distributions is

that the ions originate at an energy position which remains constant with

respect to the Fermi level of the tungsten independent of hydrogen coverage

A shift of nearly a volt in the work function is observed as hydrogen

adsorbs However the ion energy distribution which would be sensitive to

changes of this magnitude if it shifted with the work function remains

fixed in energy

The decay of the room temperature 3 eV a+ ion yield is shown in

Figure 312 A theoretical account of the desorption curve measurement has

been given in Appendix C From that discussion it is seen that a semi logshy

arithmic plot of i ~ - i ~ versus time yields a straight line The totalH Hequil desorption cross section of the adsorption state being probed can be

132

1determined from the slope of the straight line - T where T is given by

T e = (42)

je is the current density used to obtain the desorption curve and e is the

unit of electric charg~

The discussion of the desorption process leading to Equation 42

is based on the assumptions that the total desorption cross section and the

hydrogen sticking probability are independent of hydrogen coverage N The

validity of these assumptions for the hydrogen on tungsten (100) systems

should be examined An indication that the ionic cross section is indepenshy

dent of N for low coverages can be gotten from data presented in Figure 311

The H+ ion yield versus work function change is nearly linear for A~ lt 01 eV

8If coverage is linearly related to work function change as shown by Madey

then the ion yield is directly proportional to N in this low coverage region

A direct proportionality between ion yield and coverage satisfies

Equation C5 only if the ionic desorption cross section Qtis not a

function of coverage In a series of experiments it has been observed that

the equilibrium ion yield which is proportional to the ratio Q+Qt as

given by Equation C8 is independent of N for low coverages Since Q+ and

an expression proportional to Q+Qt are both independent of N it is assumed

tthat Q is a180 independent of N

The dependence of the sticking probability on coverage has been

reported in the literature for the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system Tamm and

87Schmidt found s(N) to be independent of N for coverages of less than 15

133

41 percent Madey found s(N) to be proportional to (l-NN ) Hence the

max

assumption that the sticking probability is independent of N appears valid

to within ~ 10 percent for low coverages For coverages less than 10 the

analysis in Appendix C of the desorption curve measurements can be applied to

the data

A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ for the desorption curve ~quil

shown in Figure 312 is given in Figure 41 The equilibrium level has been

chosen approximately 5 lower than the ion intensity obtained after monishy

toring the decay curve 30 minutes (the final recorded data) since it appeared

from the data the signal was still slowly decreasing In addition with

this correction the data give a better fit to the predicted straight line

t -20 2From the slope of the line -lIT and Equation 41 a Q (400 eV) of 5xlO cm

is calculated Without making the 5 correction in iH+ the best visual equil

straight line fit to the data gives a Qt(400 eV) approximately three times

larger Because the initial hydrogen coverage for this data was 010 monoshy

layerp this cross section represents the total desorption cross section

from the ~2 hydrogen adsorption state ie represents ~ (400 eV) For 2

coverages corresponding to the ~l state the assumptions leading up to

tEquation 42 are not valid and no attempt has been made to calculate 93 bull t 1

The value obtained for 93 (400 eV) is somewhat larger than the cross section 2

38results reported by Menzel and Gomer for hydrogen desorption from a field

emitter tip and is a factor of 10 lower than reported by Jelend and

Menzel10 for desorption from a tungsten ribbon The latter researchers

corrected for readsorption effects which would partly explain their higher

value The value of ~2(400 eV) found here is over three orders of

134

500----~----~--~------------~----

400

- 300 ()

a 0- CT Q)

+ I I 200

+ I

100~__~_____~____~____~__~____~__~ o 200 400 600 800 1000

Time (sec)

SP-1198

Figure 41 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iHt asequil

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 312

----------- -------shy

51

135

magnitude smaller than the total cross section found by Jelend and Menzel

for hydrogen coadsorption with either carbon monoxide or oxygen This is a

verification that these contaminants are not present to any great extent

432 Low Temperature Fast State Results

oIf the tungsten crystal was flashed to 2200 K and subsequently

allowed to cool below room temperature H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface The state from which this hydrogen is desorbed has been labeled

the fast state Experiments have been made to characterize the energetics

and kinetics of this undosed state and also to address the important question

of the origin of the hydrogen which is desorbed These data are discussed

below

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from the fast state

shown in Figure 310 is considerably broader than the distribution obtained

after room temperature hydrogen dosing into the ~ states The peak intensity

is somewhat lower in energy 05 eV than the peak obtained from the ~

states The distribution has a tail extending up several electron volts on

the high energy side It should be noted that the same energy distribution

line shape could be obtained from the state at any position on its desorpshy

tion curve that is the broad distribution is not an anomalous result

reflecting a depletion of the hydrogen fast state during the measurement

A low primary current of lxlO- 7 A was used to take the distribution in

Figure 310 so that electron desorption effects were minimal From a

comparison of energy distributions as given in Figure 310 it is possible

to conclude that the fast state is a separate state from the ~ states

136

This conclusion is supported by cross section calculations below

The intensity of the ion yield from the fast state is temperature

dependent As shown in Figures 315 and 316 the ion yield increases as

the temperature is lowered This phenomena is reversible Using the

assumption that the ion yield is proportional to coverage it is concluded

that the fast state coverage is a function of temperature

The desorption curve obtained from the undosed tungsten (100)

surface has been measured and is given in Figure 313 The decay time is

seen to be extremely rapid compared to the analogous measurement taken after

hydrogen dosing at room temperature A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ ~quil

measured from the data in Figure 313 is given in Figure 42 The total

tdesorption cross section for the fast state Qf(400 eV) calculated from the

slope of the straight line in Figure 42 is -17lxlO 2 cm This is nearly

three orders of magnitude higher than ~2(400 eV)

Since Q~(400 eV) is on the same order of magnitude as the cross

section obtained for hydrogen desorption from carbon monoxide or oxygen

51contaminated surfaces the possibility that the fast state results from

surface contamination has been examined No direct evidence was obtained to

support such a hypothesis No carbon or oxygen peaks were observed in Auger

electron spectra from the cold surface It is estimated that these spectra

were sensitive to 1 percent of a monolayer coverage No carbon or oxygen

ions that could be attributed to the fast state phenomena were observed in

time of flight measurements It might be noted that Jelend and Menzel

observed the high cross section state labeled ~ at room temperature after

simultaneously adsorbing hydrogen plus CO or oxygen Almost no fast state

137

100

-fJ)

Q U

50 J CT

+0gt I I

+ I

10~~~--~~~~~~--~~~--~~~~

o 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Time (sec)

sp- J~4l

Figure 42 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iH+ as equi1

a function of time The data are illeasured from the desorption curve given in Figure 313

138

o lOhydrogen was detected here above 0 c Jelend and Menzel did not observe

any H+ ion yield from a cleaned surface if cooled to _13 0 C Since the gt

signal is weak at that temperature it is possible their apparatus did not

detect it It is also possible that they did not populate their surface

with hydrogen by cooling In any case its not possible to make any

simple correlations between the fast state and the contamination related x

state However as discussed below the equivalence of the two states

cannot be ruled out

It is of interest to determine the origin of the hydrogen which

populates the fast state There are several possibilities This state

could populate as a result of adsorption from the background Alternatively

88 89 hydrogen since it is endothermically soluble in tungsten m~ght

diffuse from interstitial sites to surface sites as the temperature of the

crystal is lowered A discussion of these phenomena has been given in

19Appendix C The latter suggestion has been offered as a possible

explanation of the c(2x2) LEED pattern observed on cooling In addition a

combination of these two processes could be occurring

Experiments have been performed in which the coverage in the fast

state has been monitored as a function of both adsorption time and system

background pressure If the source is external the dependence of N on

adsorption time and ambient pressure can be determined by solving Equation

C4 For the case of no incident electron beam (je = 0) and if the sticking

probability is assumed constant with coverage (probably a good assumption

since the change in coverage due to adsorption from the background would be

extremely small at the experimental ambient pressures) then the change in

139

coverage in the fast state would be expected to be linearly related to the

time during which adsorption occurs ie linearly proportional to the

variable adsorption time Furthermore for a fixed adsorption time the

coverage would be expected to be linearly proportional to the partial pressure

of the populating species

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

40 pressure is considerably more invo1ved Several points can be made

however from the discussion in Appendix C The time dependence of N due

to diffusion could be similar to that expected from background adsorption

ie linear with adsorption time However background pressure doesnt

enter into the diffusion process If the fast state phenomena is only

diffusion related the coverage N would be expected to be independent of

background pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence

for adsorption from the background

The rate of populating the fast state has been measured by turning

off the electron gun for various time intervals (setting j = 0) referred to e

as adsorption times and observing the build up of the ion signal while the

gun is off The increase in the fast state is then assumed proportional to

the increase in the ion yield i ~ - i ~ when the electron gun is Hinitia1 Hequi1

turned back on The dependence of the population rate on adsorption time is

shown in Figure 317 N is found to be linearly related to adsorption time

As discussed above this time behavior can reasonably be expected to be

observed for either an external or an internal source

The rate of population of the fast state has also been observed as

140

a function of hydrogen pressure admitted to the background from the gas

handling system As discussed in Section 354 the rate of population did

not depend on the impingement rate from the hydrogen background Hence it

is concluded that hydrogen from the gas handling system does not populate

the fast state This does not rule out external adsorption however Other

sources of hydrogen in the ambient such as rrt H H2 in an excited state or

hydrogen from a simple compound such as H 0 could be the source2

Although the population of the fast state was not affected by the

background pressure of hydrogen (H ) from the gas handling system there is2

evidence that this state does result from adsorption from an external source

This conclusion is based on experiments in which the Bayard Alpert gauge

sensitivity was increased by nulling out the x-ray limiting current Changes

-12in the background pressure on the order of 2xlO Torr were observed experishy

mentally if the crystal was flashed while it was facing the spectrometer

One explanation of this observation is that a flash in the up position warms

experimental chamber surfaces most likely the grids and electron gun drift

tube The resulting pressure increase occurs because of an increased rate of

thermal desorption from these surfaces The linear dependence of the

equilibrium current i ~ with pressure change as found experimentallyHequil

and shown in the top panel of Figure 319 is expected if external adsorption

populates the fast state This can be seen from Equation C9 Likewise the

rate of change of coverage in the fast state is seen to be proportional to

the pressure change in the lower panel of Figure 319 This is also expected

for external adsorption If bulk to surface diffusion were the source of the

hydrogen no dependence on pressure would be expected Hence Figure 319

141

indicates that hydrogen becomes desorbable because of adsorption from the

background It is not possible to say what species is adsorbing

An interesting calculation that can be made from the current nulling

experiments is an estimate of the coverage in the adsorption state responsible

for the fast state hydrogen ions Since the relation

(43)

can be obtained easily from Equation C9 and since ~i + is on the same Hequil

order as iH+ the background partial pressure that populates the undosed equil

-12state is on the same order of magnitude as ~P or about lxlO Torr The

coverage N at equilibrium can now be obtained by setting Equation C4 equal

-12to O At a pressure of 10 Torr the impingement rate of hydrogen molecules

9 2 90 for example is 15xlO moleculescm -sec and the impingement rate of other

species would be of this same magnitude Assuming a sticking probability of

-17 21 a total desorption cross section of 10 cm as calculated and a current

-4 2density of 5lxlO Acm the surface coverage in the fast state would be

~ 10-11

atomscm2 or 10-4 monolayer This calculation depends on the

assumption that the pressure change at the crystal face in the experimental

chamber is the same as measured at the gauge Experiments performed in which

the crystal was rotated to the down position after flashing in the up position

indicated that the flux of the populating species at the surface was about

twice as great when the crystal faced the spectrometer than when it faced

down Since the pressure at the bottom of the experimental chamber should

142

be about the same as the gauge pressure the calculated coverage could be

low by 50 percent It should be noted however that this is still 50 times

too low to amount to 1 percent of a monolayer

From the above discussion it can be concluded that the fast

state is related to both the temperature of the crystal and to the

background pressure of some unidentified species It is not possible to

determine if this state is a separate state from the K hydrogen state

previously reported even though it appears under different circumstances

In fact since the coverage in the state is so low Auger spectroscopy

would not be sensitive to any contamination of this same magnitude The

possibility of undetected contamination accompanying the fast state cannot

be ruled out It is possible that the adsorbing species does not contain

hydrogen as such but rather is a species which promotes a small amount

of surface hydrogen (from the background or diffusion) to the fast state

It can also be concluded that since coverages less than 1 percent of a

monolayer would not be expected to strongly alter the LEED spot symmetry

the half order spots seen on cooling do not arise from the fast state

433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results

ESD measurements have been made on the low temperature tungsten

crystal after dosing with hydrogen from the jet Energy distributions at

different coverages of hydrogen are given in Figure 39 The distributions

143

are seen to have a peak at 3 ~ 05 eV in agreement with the peak positions

in the data obtained from the ~ states at 60oC However the energy distri shy

butions are somewhat broader than the higher temperature data The fast

state yields a broad energy distribution and it is possible that the results

of Figure 39 represent simultaneous desorption from both the fast state and

the ~ states This hypothesis can be tested by analyzing a desorption curve

from the low temperature dosed surface If two states with different cross

sections are being desorbed then a semilogarithmic plot of the desorption

curve should be the sum of two straight lines The quantity i ~ - i ~ H HSquil

measured from the data of Figure 315 is plotted in Figure 43 The curve

can be separated into two straight line segments from which total desorption

17 19 2 cross sections of 16xlO- cm2 and 12xlO- cm are calculated These

cross sections correspond within plusmn 60 percent to the calculated values of

t tQf(400 eV) and QS2(400 eV) Hence it is concluded that at low temperatures

the fast state and S-like states co-adsorb

It should be noted however that the interaction of hydrogen from

the jet with the tungsten surface at low temperatures is not exactly the

o same as at 60 C This can be seen from the plot of 3 eV ion yield versus

work function change given in Figure 311 At both 600 C and at -lSOoC the

results are qualitatively similar the ion yield increases steeply with

initial hydrogen adsorption reaches a maximum and then decreases to less

than lS percent of the maximum value with additional hydrogen adsorption

Hence it is assumed that a similar phenomena is occurring at both temperashy

tures However the work function change at maximum intensity for the low

temperature measurement was found to be repeatedly lower by 007 eV than the

144

SP-H24

Figure 43 Semilogarithmic plot of the quantity ia+ - ia+ as equ~l

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 314

145

peak ~ntens~ty for measurements taken at 600 C If the expression relating

coverage to work function change Equation 35 is valid at both 600

C and

at -1500 C then the 007 eV shift would represent a dosed coverage difference

of 7 of a monolayer The ion yield at the low temperature would maximize at

a dosed coverage of 11 which is 40 lower than the coverage for the maximum

ion yield at the higher temperature If the decrease in ion yield for higher

hydrogen coverages arises from interactions between adsorbed atoms these calshy

culations suggest that the interactions observe a different coverage dependence

at the two temperatures Alternate explanations are possible for the measured

difference Equation 35 may not be valid at both temperatures It is possible

that the work function change per adsorbed atom is smaller at the lower tempshy

erature and the dosed coverages are the same at the ion yield maximas It is

also possible that hydrogen not visible in ESD or electron loss spectroscopy

measurements~ but capable of interacting with dosed hydrogen~ diffuses to the

surface at the low temperature This latter alternative~ while a possible exshy

planation for the LEED phenomena would raise many questions as to why such

hydrogen is not detectable with other techniques

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements

Low energy electron diffraction measurements made on the clean and

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface have been presented in Section 36 The

symmetry of the LEED patterns has been noted as a function of hydrogen coverage

and crystal temperature Elastic intensity profiles for three LEED beams are

given in Figures 321 through 323 LEED beam intensities as a function of

temperature have been monitored These are given in Figures 324 and 325

General agreement between symmetry patterns seen here and those

published in the literature18 19 is good The (lxl) LEED pattern

146

characteristic of clean tungsten at room temperature changes into a c(2x2)

pattern with initial hydrogen adsorption With further adsorption the LEED

pattern splits into four spots becomes blurred and finally at full coverage

returns to a (lx1) pattern When the crystal is cooled to temperatures below

room temperatures half order spots become visible without any dosing of the

crystal from the gas system

The intensity of the room temperature half order spots maximizes at

a coverage corresponding to ~~ = 015 eV or 015 monolayer using Equation

35 This is close to the 016 monolayer coverage at which Yonehara and

19 18Schmidt found these beams to maximize Estrup and Anderson on the

other hand observed sharp and intense half order LEED spots at a coverage

of 029 monolayer The coverages reported here were calculated from work

function changes using the linear relation between work function change and

coverage obtained by Madey by a flash desorption technique In both other

18experiments 19 coverage was measured directly using flash desorption The

c(2x2) pattern is associated with the ~2 adsorption state The structures

proposed to account for this state as given in Section 128 predict that

the maximum of the half order spots should occur at 025 monolayer coverage

15(one monolayer being 2x10 atomscm2) Estrup and Andersons measurement is

closest to this coverage While it is not known why there is such a large

discrepancy between the results it should be noted that determination of

coverage using flash desorption techniques is difficult with large uncershy

tainties in pressure gauge calibration and system volume The results given

here in terms of ~~ should be considerably more accurate

_ _____---__---shy

147

Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) (11) and (1212) LEED

beams are given in Figures 321 through 323 respectively The profiles

o 0 were taken at 60 C and -150 C from both a clean tungsten surface and a

surface dosed with hydrogen to 015 monolayer (This coverage corresponded

to the observed maximum in the half order pattern) As seen in these three

figures corresponding clean room temperature and low temperature profiles are

nearly identical Adsorption of hydrogen to a coverage of 015 does cause

some changes in the clean profiles with the same changes being observed at

both temperatures Hydrogen adsorption considerably enhances the 42 eV peak

observed in the (1212) profile and shifts it in energy approximately + 1 eVe

Adsorption also leads to a change from a single peak to a double peaked

structure of decreased intensity in the (11) profile above 100 eVe Adsorption

causes very little change in the (10) profile line shape above 60 eV

although the 65 eV 835 eV and 110 eV peaks are lowered in energy approxishy

mately 15 eV 05 eV and 15 eV respectively Between 30 eV and 60 eV

there are some adsorption effects on the profiles

These elastic intensity profiles can be compared to corresponding

data previously reported in the literature In Figure 44 a comparison is

made between clean surface (10) and (11) profiles taken here and reported

9lby Wei The agreement is good except in the energy range below 50 eVe

This poor agreement below 50 eV is also true for the (00) beam which is not

compared here The low energy discrepancies may be caused by the ambient

magnetic field present in Weis target region In fact it is surprising

that the data agrees as well as it does considering the different experimenshy

tal conditions under which the two sets of data were obtained Figure 45

148

Figure 44 Comparison of (11) and (10) elastic intensity profiles from the clean tungsten (100) surface Data includes profiles taken here at 60degC and -150degC and results reported by Wei94 bull

149

() --c 1

gt 0-Q 0-gt-()

c OJ-c

H

o 50 100 150 200

xl

xl

X2

Elastic Intensity Profiles W (100) Clean 8i = 0deg

g = (11)

g = (10)

Withrow (-150degC)

Withrow (60degC)

Wei (250-300degC)

Pr imary Energy (eV) SP-1l92

150

Figure 45 Comparison of (1212) elastic intensity profiles from tungsten (100) surface after hydrogen adsorption into the ~2 state Data includes profiles obtained here and results reported by Estrup and Anderson18 and Papageorgopoulos and Chen2l

0

151

- ()-

--()

c Q)-c H

Elastic Intensity Profiles H2 on W(lOO) 8j =0deg 9 = (1212)

Withrow

Estrup and Anderson

Papageorgopoulos and Chen

o 50 100 150 Primary Energy (eV) SP-1l93

200

152

shows a comparison of elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam taken

after hydrogen adsorption From the general appearance of the data Estrup

18and Andersons profi1e appears shifted up in energy about 5 eV with respect

to the profile taken here This suggests the possibility of a discrepancy

in the energy measurement The line shapes are similar howeve~ although

Estrup and Anderson found one well-defined peak around 75 eV whereas in this

work a peak at 67 eV and an additional shoulder between 85 eV and 90 eV is

21seen Papageorgopou1os and Chen did not observe the large peak below 50 eV

nor the double peaked structure above 100 eV reported by both other researchers

These discrepancies cou1deasi1y be due to a residual magnetic field in the

work of Papageorgopou1os and Chen It can be concluded from these comparishy

sons that control over experimental conditions is crucial for the reproduction

of data

Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores

16 17 can be extracted from a sufficient set of elastic intensity proh1es

Although the data base is small here a preliminary analysis of the clean

tungsten data has been conducted by Duke using a microscopic quantum-field

16theory formalism of low energy electron diffraction In this formalism a

model for the electron-solid interaction is used in an attempt to match

theoretical line shape predictions to experimentally observed elastic LEED

intensity profiles An important feature of this microscopic approach is the

strong interactions between the incident electron and valence electrons in

the solid The inelastic mean free path A is about 3-8 X for most ee

materials for electron energies of 30 ~ E S 200 As a consequence electrons

which are observed elastically have been backscattered within the first

--------------

153

several surface layers of the solid and hence LEED elastic profiles are

surface sensitive Elastic backscattering of the electrons is described by

short range electron-ion core interactions Information on the configurashy

tion of the surface ion cores is extracted from the elastic energy profiles

by varying parameters in the theory and obtaining the best fit to the data

Theoretical analysis of elastic energy profiles from tungsten at energies

above 100 eV is computationally difficult because of the large number of

phase shifts needed to describe the electron-ion core scattering Hence the

exp arimental profiles were taken only for energies E 1gt 125 eV pr~

Comparisons of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity

profiles for the (00) (10) and (11) beams are given in Figure 46 The

theoretical fit to the experimental data was made by taking an inelastic

mean free path Aee equal to 8 K and an inner potential Vl which represents

t he rea1 part 0 f h 1 1 i on16 equa1 to 8 eV Thetee ectron-e ectron 1nteract

agreement in peak position is good for the (10) beam in the range

25 eV lt E lt 125 eV and for the (11) beam in the range 60 eV lt E lt 100 eV ~ ~ ~ ~

The theoretical and experimental line shapes of the (10) beam show remarkable

agreement but the line shapes of the (11) beam do not fit as well For the

(00) beam the theoretical profile is not similar to the experimental plot

except for the peak at 117 eV Most of this discrepancy for the (00) beam

probably arises from the differences in theoretical and experimental incishy

dence and aximuthal angles used to obtain the profiles The theoretical

profile was calculated assuming a primary electron beam normally incident

experimentally this is not possible with the spectrometer ~sed here since

the (00) beam would not be visible on the LEED screen under these conditions

~~ ~~-----------

---------------------~------------------

154

o

III C

~ C

H 1 o

1

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

-Experiment Withrow and Luscher

g =(00)

o-o-oTheory Duke T = 10 K ej =cpj =0 V=8eVI Aee 811

o 140 SP-1l91

Figure 46 Comparison of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity profiles for clean tungsten (100) surface Theoretical results have been calculated by Duke

155

Data has been obtained for the temperature dependence of clean

elastic intensity profiles No differences in the clean surface (10) and

(11) profiles taken at 600 C and -1500 C are seen even though the LEED pattern

symmetry changes from a (lxl) pattern to a c(2x2) pattern Apparently these

two elastic intensity profiles are not sensitive to the scattering geometry

changes that are manifested in the LEED pattern change

19 92 It has been speculated that the extra half order spots may

result from hydrogen on the surface As shown above the (10) and (11)

profiles dont change even though the half order spots appear on cooling

This may not be surprising if the extra spots seen on cooling the undosed

crystal are related to hydrogen on the surface The cross section for hydrogen

92 93backscattering 1S very weak compared to scattering from tungsten While

a priori it is not necessarily true that the addition of a weak scatterer will

have little effect on intensity profiles this does seem to be the case for

hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten Adsorption of hydrogen has no effect on

18the (00) profile from tungsten (100) and it was found here that~daorption

of hydrogen has very little effect on the (10) beam profile out to 015

monolayer coverage as can be concluded from Figure 321 On the other hand

it is true that adsorption of hydrogen did alter the (11) beam A second

explanation for the extra spots seen on cooling the crystal is that they

result from a tungsten surface reconstruction No theoretical calculations

have been performed which would indicate how reconstruction would affect the

intensity profiles The sensitivity of the profiles to an hypothesized

surface atom reconstruction could be determined from calculations similar to

those leading to the theoretical profiles given in Figure 46 Such a

156

theoretical calculation would be of interest as it would help evaluate how

much credence should be given to a reconstruction hypothesis

More than one atomic geometry may be associated with a given surface

translational symmetry ie associated with the same LEED spot pattern

Different geometries however would be manifested via differences in the

1intensity profiles associated with the same spot pattern After hydrogen

o 0adsorption to 015 monolayer at 60 C and -150 C both the LEED pattern symmetr~

c(2x2) and the elastic intensity profiles are the same Thus this data would indicate hydrogen adsorbs into the same surface atomic geometry at the two

temperatures A comparison of elastic intensity profiles from the undosed and

hydrogen dosed cold surface is given in Figure 47 The LEED pattern for both

conditions has a c(2x2) symmetry The profiles are not the same particularly

the (11) profile above 100 eV and the (1212) profile below 50 eV Hence

the atomic geometry responsible for the two sets of profiles may be different

even though the observed pattern symmetry c(2x2) is the same

The intensity dependence on temperature of the LEED beams has been

observed The intensity of integral order beams monitored from the clean

surface increases with decreasing temperature as shown in Figure 324 The

22 95 exponential temperature dependence obtained is pred1cted from a kinematic

treatment of electron scattering in which thermal vibrations are included via

an effective Debye-Waller factor Experimental Debye temperatures aD can

be calculated from the slopes of the straight lines in Figure 324 22 96

For the (10) beam taken with a primary energy of 1105 eV aD is

calculated to be 280oK 97 This is on the order of the Debye temperature for

~ 0bulk tungsten and higher than the Debye temperature of 183 K found by

157

Figure 47 Comparison of experimental (10) (11) and (1212) elastic intensity profiles from a cold tungsten (100) surface for hydrogen adsorption in the fast state (undosed surface) and in the ~2 state

158

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(100)

g (10)

1 o

o

OJ 0deg T -150degC Undosed and Dosed with H2

shyCl shy+shy 1 0 shyCl

o gt +shy(J)

c Q)

C 0 H

g (1212)

1

o

o

o 140

159

Estrup13 for the (10) beam for intensities taken between 6000K and 8000K

0The Debye temperature for the (11) beam is calculated to be 410 K The

middot h 1 1 95va1ues 0f eD f ound h ere seem to be anoma1ous 1y h19 S1nce ca cu at10ns

indicate that the surface Debye temperature should be lower than the bulk

Debye temperature

The temperature dependence of the half order beam is not the same

as found for the integer order beams Figure 325 shows that the intensity

of this beam increases at different exponential rates over two temperature

regions Down to about -750C the intensity increase is exponential but with

a steeper temperature dependence than observed with the integer order beams

Below -75oC the intensity increases at approximately the same exponential

rate as the integer order beams This same result is found at primary

energies of both 42 eV and 115 eV The effect is reversible with temperature

Yonehara and Schmidt19 measured the temperature dependence of the half order

beams and fit their results to a straight line on a linear scale However

for the data they took immediately after flashing to 25000K an exponential

dependence as found here appears to be as good if not better fit

0Below -75 C the half order beam intensity increases at approximately

the same exponential rate as the integer order beams This suggests that in

this lower temperature region the intensity increase can be explained by the

0 0Debye-Wa1ler factor However between 100 C and -75 C it is not known why

the (1212) spots appear and then increase in intensity so strongly

The intensity dependence on temperature of the (1212) beam

below OoC can be compared to the temperature dependence of the fast state H+

ion intensity These data are given in Figures 312 and 325 Because the

----------------~~ ~~~~~

160

a+ ion yield from the fast state also increases with decreasing temperature

a possible correlation between the appearance of this ion signal and the

appearance of the half order beams is suggested It is tempting to hypothesize

that the fast state is adsorbed into a c(2x2) array and hence half order spots

are produced on cooling However this connection probably cannot be made

For one thing the estimated coverage of the fast state is several orders of

magnitude below a coverage reasonably expected to exert an influence on the

LEED pattern In addition while the fast state has a high total desorption

cross section with the ion signal decaying rapidly after turning oriltthe

electron gun no evidence of this type of behavior is found for the LEED spot

intensities if a corresponding experiment is made A depletion of the fast

state in the electron beam does not affect the half order LEED spot intensities

oFinally in the region below middot75 C the ion signal increases reversibly with

temperature at a steep rate while the LEED spot intensity increases reversshy

ib1y at a slow rate ie the intensity correlation is not good in this

range These arguments do not refute the possibility that the half order

spots are a hydrogen phenomena They strongly indicate however that a

correlation cannot be made between the hydrogen ions observed from the undosed

surface and the appearance of the half order spots aside from the obvious

result that they both occur over the same temperature range It would appear

more reasonable to suggest that the formation of a c(2x2) scattering symmetry

on the surface via reconstruction or some other mechanism provides a

binding site into which a species from the ambient can adsorb and subseshy

quent1y be desorbed The identity of that species is not known

-----------shy

161

45 Electron Scattering Results

Energy loss spectra for electrons scattered from the clean and

hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surface are given in Figures 326 and 327

The second derivative mode has been employed in order to suppress background

as discussed in Appendix B Data have been presented for energy losses

between a and 40 eV for a primary electron beam energy of 110 eV

Several general comments can be made A comparison of the clean

spectra taken at the two temperatures shows they are nearly identical The

only difference is a slight enhancement in the low temperature data of the

shoulder at w = 75 eV (barely evident in the figures) It might be noted

that adsorption of hydrogen produces as peak at 75 eV and the small change

in the low temperature spectrum near this energy may be an indication of a

small hydrogen coverage An attempt was made to observe effects of the fast

state on the clean spectrum After cooling the crystal the fast state was

allowed to populate by turning the gun off for adsorption times of 10 minutes

The spectrum taken after preparing the crystal in this way was identical to

those obtained immediately after cooling Hence fast state hydrogen does

not perturb the electronic structure unlike ~ state hydrogen This result

is not surprising because of the very low coverages calculated for the fast

state from the desorption measurement

Hydrogen adsorption into the ~ states perturbs the clean surface

o 0loss spectrum The same changes are observed at both 60 C and -150 C The

most dramatic changes that occur with increasing coverage are the growth of

a 75 eV loss the movement down in loss energy of the structure at 21 eV in

the clean spectrum and the annihilation of the peak at 25 eV In addition

the loss peak at 107 eV decreases in intensity somewhat

162

Definite changes in the loss spectra are seen (for example at

w = 75 eV) for work function changes of 003 eV This is a coverage of only

3 percent hydrogen At coverages corresponding to a work function change of

015 eV the 75 eV peak is well-developed and the 21 eV structure has moved

down ~ 1 eV While hydrogen is adsorbing at room temperature from 0 to 15

percent of a monolayer half order spots develop in the LEED pattern As

noted before half order spots also develop in the LEED pattern by cooling the

ocrystal to -150 C However electron loss measurements from the cold flashed

surface dont show any changes that correspond to hydrogen on the surface

Thus no correlation can be drawn using electron loss measurements between

the half order patterns obtained by hydrogen dosing and by cooling the crystal

Interpretation of the structure in the energy loss spectra taken

here is nontrivial Although the data incorporates information on the elecshy

tronic structure of the surface and near surface region ie represents

bulk and surface single particle transitions and collective oscillations

both theoretical and experimental complexities arise in attempting to extract

electronic structure from the data While the electron energy loss has been

measured with high resolution information on the momentum transfer ~ q

involved in the electron solid inelastic interaction is not retained since

1) the analyzer integrates over a wide range of ~ qs and 2) the backscattered

electron has undergone at least two collisions - an inelastic scattering

with an accompanying momentum transfer which is not enough to turn the

electron around and an elastic scattering which does Hence the analyzer is

expected to be sensitive to loss mechanisms which are well-defined in energy

but relatively independent of momentum transfer Transitions satisfying these

163

conditions are possible in tungsten Luscher has shown25 that at least one

relatively flat and narrow d-band in tungsten located near the Fermi level

acts as the final state for electron excitations involving core electrons

This d-band may be operative as a final state for transitions involving

valence and adsorbate electrons as well

25The structure at 210 eV and 255 eV has been identified as

resulting from surface and bulk plasmons Adsorption of hydrogen increases

the energy of the surface plasmon but does not affect the energy of the bulk

plasmon

The energy losses at 381 eV 346 eV and 324 eV remain constant

as a function of hydrogen coverage These losses correspond in both relative

strengths and separation in energy to tungsten core electron excitations from

he 5 an (doublet ) eve 1s f ound h at 36 Vt p d 4f 1 1nmiddot x-ray p otoem1SS10n 99 9 e

333 eV and 311 eV below the Fermi level A comparison of these photo-

emission values to the energy losses observed here would indicate the position

of the final state operative in the energy loss measurements is 13 eV above

the Fermi level

It would be convenient to use this value) 13 eV for the final

state energy in interpreting the rest of the sharply peaked structure arising

from electron transitions There are difficulties with such an approach

however The data being compared in calculating the final state energy

location have been obtained with two techniques that perturb the adsorbateshy

plus-solid system in distinctly different ways The observed energy losses

in electron scattering are strongly influenced by interband oscillators

electron screening and relaxation effects and these perturbations are not

164

constant as a function of loss energy Hence extension of the 13 eV value

in interpreting data at other loss energies may not be valid None the less

using the 13 eV final state the peaks in the clean ELS spectrum at 25 eV

and 40 eV would correspond to peaks in the photoemission spectra at 12 eV

(25 eV - 13 eV) and at 27 eV (40 eV - 13 eV) respectively There is

no obvious correspondence between these peaks and structure seen in clean

35 36surface photoemission spectra The structure changes on adsorption in

the ELS spectra for 0 eV S w ~ 4 eV may reflect the sharp photoemission loss

which appears at 25 eV as hydrogen coverage increases The strong 75 eV

energy loss which appears in the ELS spectra as hydrogen adsorbs onto the

crystal would correspond to structure in photoemission data near 62 eV

(75 eV - 13 eV) Recently photoemission peaks at 52 eV and between

10068 eV and 78 eV have been reported From these comparisons it can be

seen that quantitative interpretation of the fine structure in the energy

loss measurements cannot be made with this simple model

165

CHAPTER 5

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

An experimental apparatus for surface research has been designed

constructed and successfully placed in operation It incorporates the

necessary hardware and electronics for performing several complementary

surface probing techniques including Auger electron spectroscopy retarding

potential work function measurements low energy electron diffraction electron

energy loss spectroscopy and electron stimulated desorption of ions System

electronics allow the instrument to be easily switched between the techniques

The apparatus has been used to study the chemisorption of hydrogen on a

tungsten single crystal surface over the temperature range 600C to -150

0C

The instrument combines an electron gun with an energy spectrometer

a LEED display system and a crystal manipulator The electron gun is capable

of focusing a monoenergetic electron current of up to 21 ~A onto a

macroscopic sample The gun has been operated from 5 eV to 1800 eV The

high resolution high sensitivity spectrometer consists of a retarding field

analyzer in series with two electrostatic deflection analyzers The energy

resolution of the spectrometer is 21 without using the retarding field

analyzer This can be improved to less than 1 under some conditions by

applying a retarding field The spectrometer output can be detected using

a atemeter or using modulation techniques The instrument has been used to

analyze electron and ion signals from the sample and to determine the charge

to mass ratio of desorbed ions The experimental sample a tungsten crystal

which has been polished to within 01 0 of the (100) face is mounted on the

166

end of a crystal manipulator The manipulator is used to position the sample

as needed A two grid LEED display system has been used to study LEED

pattern symmetry The intensities of LEED spots have been monitored with a

spot photometer

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental conditions using Auger electron spectroscopy The Auger

spectrum obtained after flashing the crystal to 22000 K is free of carbon and

oxygen Auger structure The electron gun could be operated under normal

experimental conditions without contaminating the surface but a carbon Auger

peak appears if high gun currents and voltages are used This effect Crul

be taken into consideration when interpreting the data Some weak structure

in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface is seen between 475 eV and

525 eVa It is not possible to conclusively determine if this structure

results from Auger transitions in tungsten or from some other source

Retarding potential work function measurements have been made as

a reproducible measure of hydrogen coverage Adsorption of hydrogen onto

othe tungsten (100) crystal at 60 C yields a maximum work function change of

098 plusmn 004 eVa This is in good agreement with previously reported values

The work function change with exposure to hydrogen for the tungsten sample

at -lSOoc was found to be the same within experimental accuracy as found

at higher temperature The maximum work function change at -lSOoc is

092 plusmn 004 eVa Cooling the flashed crystal from 2200 C to -lSOoC resulted

in an increase in the work function of approximately 005 eVa An intrinsic

(clean surface) temperature dependence of this magnitude appears reasonable

from theoretical considerations

167

The time-of-flight technique employed for mass analysis was found

to work well Ion species H+ and 0+ as well as H + have been identified2

Relative intensities of the ion yields could only be estimated with this

technique as instrumented H+ ions are electron desorbed from the surface

after adsorption of hydrogen In addition H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface after a flash if the crystal was cooled below room temperature No

HZ+ ions were desorbed from the crystal However H2+ and H+ ions produced

by ionization of the background and also by ESD from surfaces in the experishy

mental chamber were detected under certain operating conditions This signal

could be separated from the ions originating at the crystal surface by biasing

the crystal several volts positive with respect to the spectrometer

The distribution in energy of H+ ions electron desorbed from a 60 0 C

tungsten (100) surface has been observed The distribution has a normal line

shape with a peak intensity at 30 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a half width

of Z6 eV No evidence of distinct ~l and ~Z adsorption states was found in

the energy distribution line shape the distribution is the same for coverages

corresponding to both the ~Z adsorption state and the ~l plus ~2 adsorption

states The intensity of the U+ ion signal is coverage dependent The deshy

pendence found here is in agreement with previously reported work The maxshy

imum in intensity of the ion yield occurs for a work function change of 018

eV The total desorption cross section for hydrogen ions from the ~2 state

is 5xlO-ZO cmZ bull

An H+ ion signal can be desorbed from the undosed (100) surface if

the crystal temperature is lowered below room temperature T~fs represents

a previously unreported hydrogen adsorption state Experiments in which

the pressure was carefully monitored indicate that this hydrogen results

168

from adsorption onto the crystal from the background However the state

labeled the fast state is not populated by the adsorption of H2 from the

gas handling system The adsorbing species that populates the fast state

is not known Hydrogen coverage in the fast state is estimated to be ~10-4

monolayer which is an extremely small coverage The fast state hydrogen

desorbs with a broad energy distribution which has a peak intensity at

25 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a tail extending up to gt9 eV The total

17 2desorption cross section for H+ from this state is high lxlO- cm This is

on the same order of magnitude as the cross section for desorption of the

~ hydrogen state However no evidence of CO or oxygen contaminants which

are associated with the ~ state was found The techniques used to chemshy

ically characterize the surface were sensitive to about 1 percent of a mono-

layer so these two contaminants could have been present at coverages less

than 1 percent

Hydrogen (H2) dosed onto the low temperature surface co-adsorbs

with the fast state in a separate e state This can be concluded from energy

distribution and desorption curve measurements The maximum ion yield obshy

tainable from the low temperature surface occurs for a work function change

of 011 eV This is 007 eV lower than the maximum in the ion yield from

the room temperature hydrogen dosed surface This difference may indicate

that the mechanism responsible for the decrease in ion yield as the ~l state

fills is operative at a lower hydrogen coverage at low temperatures An

alternative possibility is that hydrogen coverage at the low temperature can

not be measured by the same expression relating coverage to work function

change as used at the higher temperature

169

Low energy electron diffraction pattern changes observed as a

function of hydrogen coverage on the room temperature surface are in agreeshy

ment with those reported in the literature The surface translational symshy

metry is strongly coverage dependent The maximum in the c(2x2) pattern

associated with the ~2 state occurs at a work function change of 015 eV for

room temperature adsorption If the crystal is flashed to ~22000K and then

cooled below room temperature the (lxl) pattern characteristic of the clean

surface changes into a c(2x2) pattern Since H+ ions can be electron desorbed

from the flashed surface if the crystal is cooled to this same temperature

range and since the ~2 state hydrogen is known to produce a c(2x2) pattern

it has been suggested that the low temperature c(2x2) LEED pattern may result

from hydrogen on the surface However no evidence was found to support this

hypothesis The ions desorbed from the cold surface did not originate from

the f 2 state but from a distinctly different state labeled the fast state

It is questioned whether the low coverage in the fast state is sufficient to

produce half order LEED spots There is no indication from the ELS measureshy

ments that hydrogen has diffused to the surface from the bulk Electron

energy loss spectra show almost no change on cooling the crystal below room

temperature These spectra are sensitive to electronic structure changes

resulting from hydrogen adsorption of as little as 3 percent of a monolayer

The (10) and (11) LEED beam intensity profiles taken from the undosed surface

are not changed by cooling the crystal It would be of interest to compare

this experimental result to theoretical elastic intensity profile calculations

from both a normal and a recons tructed tungsten surface This would help

determine if reconstruction is a viable explanation for the cold surface

170

c(2x2) phenomenon

Low energy electron diffraction elastic intensity profiles for

several beams have been reported from the clean tungsten (100) surface and

from this surface dosed with hydrogen in the ~2 state These profiles have

been compared to published data where possible Careful control over expershy

imental parameters is essential in order to obtain agreement between the data

The clean surface intensity profiles have been compared to preliminary theoretshy

ical calculations While fair agreement Catl be obtained both experimental

and theoretical problems must be solved before a reliable calculation of

atomic geometry for the hydrogen over layer can be made A comparison of

experimental profiles for the low temperature undosed and hydrogen dosed

c(2x2) patterns suggests that the atomic geometries responsible for these

identical patterns arenot the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been presented as a

f~~ction of hydrogen coverage Changes in the electronic structure at the

surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption are observed Structure due to

the surface and hulk plasmons are identified and peaks due to tungsten

Sp and 4f core level transitions can be identified by comparison to published

photoemission data Interpretation of other structure in the spectra requires

more study

171

REFERENCES

1 C B Duke Jap J App1 Phys 13 (1974) to be published

2 For example see R R Ford Advan Catalysis 21 51 (1970) for review of CO adsorption on transition metals or J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chern Phys 54 4969 (1971) and T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et PrPri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155 for a review of hydrogen adsorption on tungsten (100)

3 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Vac Sci Techno1 ~ 63 (1971)

4 P A Redhead Vacuum~ 203 (1962)

5 G Ehrlich Advan Catalysis 14 221 (1963)

6 L A Petermann Progress in Surface Science vol 3 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1972) p 1

7 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chern Phys 21 5352 (1969)

8 T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et Propri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155

9 D L Adams and L H Germer Sur Sci 23 419 (1970)

10 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 40 295 (1973)

11 G Tibbetts PhD thesis University of Illinois 1967

12 D L Adams Sur Sci 42 12 (1974)

13 P J Estrup The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 191

14 C B Duke and C W Tucker Jr Sur Sci 11 231 (1969)

15 C B Duke Electron Emission Spectroscopy edited by W Dekeyser et a1 (D Reidel Publishing Co Dordrecht Holland 1973) p 1

16 C B Duke N O Lipari and G E Laramore J Vac Sci Techno1 11 180 (1974)

17 M G Laga11y T C Ngoc and M B Webb Phys Rev Lett 26 1557 (1971)

172

18 P J Estrup and J Anderson J Chern Phys 45 2254 (1966)

19 K Yonehara and L D Schmidt Sur Sci 12 238 (1971)

20 E W Plummer and A E Bell J Vac Sci Techno1 2 583 (1972) bull

21 C A Papageorgopoulos and J M Chen Sur Sc i 39 283 (1973)

22 R F Wallis B C Clark and R Herman The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 171

23 M R Leggett and R A Armstrong Sur Sci 24 404 (1971)

24 D Edwards Jr PhD thesis University of Illinois 1970

25 P E Luscher PhD thesis Northwestern University 1974 to be published

26 R Gomer Field Emission and Field Ionization (Harvard U Press Cambridge Ma ss 1961)

27 R D Young Phys Rev 113 110 (1959)

28 J W Gadzuk and E W Plummer Rev Mod Phys 45 487 (1973)

29 C B Duke and M E Alpounderieff J Chern Phys 46 923 (1967)

30 J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Bl 2110 (1970)

31 C N Berglund and W E Spicer Phys Rev 136 part A Al030 (1964)

32 F M Propst and T C Piper J Vac Sci Technol ~ 53 (1967)

33 G Herzberg Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure I Spectra of Diatomic Molecules (D Van Nostrand New York 1963) 2nd ed

34 E W Plummer and J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Lett 25 1493 (1970)

35 B J Waclawski and E W Plummer Phys Rev Lett 29 783 (1972)

36 B Feuerbacher and B Fitton Phys Rev Lett 29 786 (1972)

37 P A Redhead Can J Phys 42 886 (1964)

38 D Menzel and R Gomer J Chern Phys 41 3311 (1964)

39 D Lichtman and R McQuistan Progress in Nuclear Energy Analytical Chemistry edited by H A Elion and D C Stewart (Pergamon Press New York 1965) series 9 vol 4 p 93

173

40 U N Ageev and N I Ionov Progress in Surface Science vol 5 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1974) p 1

41 T E Madey Sur Sci 36 281 (1973)

42 A Benninghoven E Loebach and N Treitz J Vac Sci Techno1 2 600 (1972)

43 L W Swanson A E Bell C H Hinrichs L C Crouser and B E Evans Literature Review of Adsorption on Metal Surfaces vol 1 NASA CR-72402 (NASA Lewis Research Center Cleveland Ohio 1967) p 76

44 R V Culver and F C Tompkins Advan Catalysis l 67 (1959)

45 See reference 43 p 49

46 J A Becker Actes du 2ieme Congres International de 1a Cata1yse (Edition Technip Paris 1961) 1777

47 R A Armstrong Can J Phys 44 1753 (1966)

48 B J Hopkins and K R Pender Sur Sci ~ 316 (1966)

49 R A Collins and B H B1ott J App1 Phys 40 5390 (1969)

50 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chem Phys 54 4969 (1971)

51 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 42 485 (1974)

52 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 52 1150 (1970)

53 See reference 7 Fig 8

54 K Fujiwara J Phys Soc Japan 11 7 (1957)

55 G D Bond Disc Faraday Soc 41 200 (1966)

56 F M Propst unpublished

57 R L Park The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 281

58 T B Grime1y Adsorption-Desorption Phenomena edited by F Ricca (Academic Press New York 1972) p 215

59 L W Anders R S Hansen and L S Bartell J Chern Phys 595277(1973)

60 J R Schrieffer J Vac Sci Techno1 2 561 (1972)

174

61 D M Newns Phys Rev 178 1123 (1969)

62 J R Schrieffer and R Gomer Sur Sci 25 315 (1971)

63 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn Phys Rev Lett 30 610 (1973)

64 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn to be published

65 P J Jennings and E G McRae Sur Sci 23 363 (1970)

66 W H Weinberg J Vac Soc Technol lQ 89 (1973)

67 L A Harris J Appl Phys 39 1419 (1968)

68 C C Chang Sur Sci 25 53 (1971)

69 T Cooper PhD thesis University of Illinois Urbana Illinois 1970

70 E M Purcell Phys Rev 54 818 (1938)

71 R Herzog Zeits F Physik 89 449 (1934)

72 Coordinated Science Laboratory Progress Report for July 1970 through June 1971 University of Illinois Urbana Illinois

73 See for example Handbook and Catalog of Operational Amplifiers BurrshyBrown Research Corp 1969 p 44

74 R W Jnyner J Rickman and M W Roberts Sur Sci 39 445 (1973)

75 C Lea and C H B Mee Sur Sci 11 332 (1971)

76 W A Coghlan and R E Clausing A Catalog of Calculated Auger Transitions for the Elements ORNL-TM-3576 (Oak Ridge National Lab Oak Ridge Tenn 1971)

77 As read by optical pyrometer the edge of the target measured 22000 K and the center 2500oK

78 B B Dayton Trans 3rd AVS National Vacuum Symposium 1956 (Pergamon Press New York 1957) p 5

79 T E Madey Sur Sci 33 355 (1972)

80 S C Brown Basic Data of Plasma Physics (Technology Press of MIT Cambridge Mass and John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 115

81 H D Hagstrum Rev Mod Phys 23 185 (1951)

175

82 M Nishijima PhD thesis University of Illinois 1969

83 G D Watts A R Jones and B J Hopkins Sur Sci 45 705 (1974)

84 R A Armstrong Sur Sc i sect 478 (1967)

85 E H B1evis and C R Crowell Phys Rev 133 part A A580 (1964)

86 C R Crowell and R A Armstrong Phys Rev 114 1500 (1959)

87 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 55 4253 (1971)

88 R Frauenfelder J Vac Sci Technol sect 388 (1969)

89 G E Moore and F C Unterwald J Chem Phys 40 2639 (1964)

90 S Dushman Scientific Foundations of Vacuum Technigue (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 19

91 P S P Wei J Chem Phys 53 2939 (1970)

92 J C Tracy private communication

93 J J Lander and J Morrison J Appl Phys 34 3517 (1963)

94 M Fink and A C Yates Atomic Data (to be published)

95 G E Laramore and C B Duke Phys Rev ~ I 4783 (1970)

96 J F Wendelken PhD thesis University of Illinois 1975

97 An inner potential of 8 eV has been assumed in this calculation

98 A Guinier X-Ray Diffraction (W H Freeman and Co San Francisco 1963) p 192

99 K Seigbahn C Nordling A Fahlman R Nordberg K Hamrin J Helman G Johansson T Bergmark S E Karlsson K Lindgren and B Lindberg ESCA - Atomic Molecular and Solid State Structure Studied by Means of Electron Spectroscopy (Almqvist Wiksells Uppsala 1967)

100 W F Egelhoff and D L Perry Phys Rev Lett 34 93 (1975)

176

APPENDIX A

A tungsten tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple spot-welded to the

side of the crystal is used to measure target temperatures The thermocouple

was calibrated against a copper-constantan standard A low temperature

freezing slush of isopentane (2-methylbutane) was made in a dewar by adding

liquid nitrogen (Isopentane freezes at -15989degC) The solution was allowed

to slowly warm up to room temperature over three hours during which a semi-

static calibration was made The reference junction was kept in a slush of

distilled ice water The calibration is shown in Figure AI

Using an identical technique a tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26

rhenium thermocouple was also calibrated as shown in Figure A2 TIlis thermoshy

couple does not have an inflection point in the range 00 to -195degC and it

00 h t t1mes more sens1t1ve over t he temperature range to -lSOoC than the1S e1g

tungstentungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple A tungsten-S rhenium wire should

spot-weld to tungsten more readily than a pure tungsten wire Thus because

of its increased sensitivity and ease of attaching to the tungsten crystal a

tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple appears a better

temperature sensor for low temperature research on tungsten

In the apparatus used the wires associated with the target manipulashy

tor including the thermocouple leads wind around the manipulator shaft to

provide rotational motion In order to get the 76 mm (003 in) diameter

thermocouple wires to wind smoothly around the shaft it was found necessary to

spring load them by turning a short segment of the wires into a 16 mm diameter

spring Unfortunately the tungsten-5 rhenium wire available proved too

brittle to turn into a spring and thus could not be used

012 _ ___r____~_-r____~_-r____~_ ___r______r___r____r__r___

C- WI W-26 Re Thermocouple Calibration Reference Junction at OdegC W Lead +

~ 008-lJ

W-26 Re LeadshyiE w 004 ~ 0shy

8J

0 o E

t-shy-I -I

Q)

c -004 tshy

-008 I I I I I I I

-200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 shy

Temperature (OC) SP-1069

Figure Al Calibration curve for W-5 ReW-26 Re thermocouple

o

-gt -04E -lL ~ w -OS 2 0shy

8J -12

o E

W-5 Re I W-26 Re Thermocouple Co libration Reference Junct ion at OdegC W-5Re Lead + W-26 Re Leadshy

J shy --shy~ ~ t- 16 0----

-20 I I

-200 -ISO -160 -140 -120 -100 -SO -60 -40 -20 0

Temperature (OC)

SP-1l73

Figure A2 Calibration curve for WW-26 Re thermocouple

-J 00

179

APPENDIX B

When operating the spectrometer in the electron mode at an effective

pass energy E the output current of the electron multiplier N(E) is proporshy

tional to the electron current originating at the target with energy between E

and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance solid angle of the analyzer

An energy distribution of the electron signal from the target can be measured

by sweeping the effective pass energy of the instrument This distribution

consists of rapidly varying true secondary and characteristic loss structure

interpretable in terms of electron transitions and collective oscillations in

the target plus a smoothly varying background In order to separate the

structure ~rom the background the energy distribution is electronically

67differentiated using a technique proposed by Harrismiddot A small sinusoidal

oscillation is applied to the effective pass energy of the spectrometer so

that the energy of the electrons passing through the spectrometer oscillates

around the instantaneous dc pass energy E If the detected current N(E) is 3

expanded in a Taylors series around the energy E where the sinusoidal 3

oscillation is E-E = K sin wt the first four terms are 3

N(E) N(E ) + K dN (E l (1 - cos 2wt)3 dE

E=E E=E i3

(3 sin wt - sin 3wt) +

E=E 3

Rearranging

180

dN(E) ) + K3 term + S1n wt (B2)N(E) = N(E ) + + K dE(i E=E

i

K2 d2N(E) 4 )+ K term + cos 2wt + + ( 4 2dE E=E1

The coefficients of the sin wt and cos 2wt terms are found to be proportional

respectively to the first two derivatives of N(E) providing K is small enough

such that the higher order terms in K can be dropped Under this assumption

a signal proportional to the first or second derivative of N(E) is obtained

by synchronously detecting the appropriate harmonic of the output

If a peak structure in the output signal is represented by a

Gaussian G(E) centered at E and the background represented by a polynomialo

in E B(E) then N(E) and the first two derivatives of N(E) evaluated at E o

become

N(E) = B(E) + G(E) (B3) -~(E-EO)2

2 d N(E) = a + bE + cE + + 1 e 2 (B4)

(2TT)2

2N(E=E ) = a + bE + cE + d 1 (B5)o o 0 cr (2TT)2

dN(E) = b + 2cE + 0 (B6)o E=E

dE

o

-d 1 = 2c + (B7)1 2 0 (2TT)2 0

E=E o

- -

2

181

From Equation B6 the first derivative evaluated at E has no contribution o

from the structure G(E) Extremum points in dN(E)dE occur at (E ~ E )2 = 0 o

if the background terms of order 3 or greater are not considered Using this

result in Equation B6 gives

~dltplusmng) edN(E) = b + 2c (E to) + bull I (B8)dE

0- 0 (2n)2E=E + 0

0shy

The relation between the original signal N(E) and the synchronously

detected signals can be seen from Equations B4 through B8 There is some

background suppression in both modes If N(E) is slowly varying the higher

order background terms that remain are small The peak to peak height of

the first harmonic signal is

1dN dN = 4ccr + - 2cb 1 e-2~-2crG(E-E ~ 0) (B9)

dE dE 0 (2n)2 0

E=E -0E=E +u o o

The intensity of the second harmonic signal evaluated at E is approximately 0

proportional to1 G(E) Hence using the stated assumptions the detected 0 2 0

first and second harmonics of N(E) contain structure which is directly

proportional to G(E)

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as is

commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in looking at

electron scattering energy loss measurements

182

APPENDIX C

The process of desorption of ions from a surface by electron

bombardment is referred to as electron stimulated desorption The theory to

account for this phenomenon was independently proposed by Redhead37 and by

38Menzel and Gomer A brief explanation of their model follows

In Figure Cl schematic potential energy diagrams are given for the

metal plus ground state adsorbate CM + A) and metal plus ionic state (M- + A+)

as a function of separation distance x of the adsorbing atom or ion from the

metal surface These two curves are labeled VG(x) and V(x) for the ground

state and ionic state respectively The nature of these interactions has

been described37 8l and several interaction calculations for hydrogen on metal

59 63surfaces have been g~ven The zero in potential energy in Figure 41 is

defined as the energy of the ion A+ at rest at infinity from the surface of M

The nucleus of the chemisorbed adsorbate is located at the minimum in the

ground state potential energy curve The wave function ~G(x) of the adsorbate

in the ground state on the surface is shown centered at a position x which ~

corresponds to the minimum in energy of VG

VG determines ~G(x) Vertical

transitions from the ground state to the ionic state (labeled 1 in the

diagram) are induced by incident electron bombardment of the surface

Secondary electrons leaving the surface also can cause such transitions

Once excited the ion is subjected to a repulsive force and moves away from

the surface (indicated by 2) The ionized adsorbate can be neutralized as it

leaves the surface and hence desorb as a neutral (indicated by 3) or it can

be de-excited back to the ground state and not desorb (indicated by 4) Ions

183

V(x)

gt ~ Ion ~ ~ 2 )III V(xi)(I) c +E K M-+A+w 0 f (v)+=c (I) +shy0 Cl

14 3 I-ltP Neutral

M+A

Ede t

ltPG (x)

~

DistanceX SP-1201

Figuze Cl Schematic diagram of adsorbate-metal interactions showing the transitions involved in the theory of electron stimulated desorption

184

that originate at x x leave the surface with energy V(x) The energyL L

80distribution of the desorbed ions f(V(xraquo is determined by the reflectionL

2of the probability density distribution I~G(xi)1 through the ionic state

energy curve This can be given by the expression

P(x ) f(V(xraquo

L (Cl)L ~~Ix = x

L

where N is the number of species A adsorbed in the ground state per unit

area a is the cross section for excitation of the species A from the groundex

state to the ionic state (transition 1) ~G(x) is defined above and P(x ) isi

the probability that an ion starts from the position x = x and moves awayL

from the L gLvensurface without being neutralized P(x) can be by373881

P(x ) exp(- J~dx ~)i x v(x) (C2)

i

where R(x) is the rate that the ions produced at the surface by electron

impact are reneutralized v(x) is the velocity of the ion at a distance x

from the surface This depends explicitly on V(x) as shown by Equation C3

for an ion of mass M and charge q

2q (V(X i ) - V(Xraquo)21

v(x) ( M (C3)

Additional complexities for example multiple initial and ionic states or

electron induced state conversion can be added to this simple model

185

The mass transport occurring at the surface during an ESD measurement

can be described in a kinetic treatment which relates the observed ion signal

to physical parameters characteristic of the experimental conditions The

change with time of the surface coverage per area of an adsorbate dNdt is

given by the rate of arrival of the adsorbate onto the surface minus the rate

of desorption from the surface In the simplest formulation of these proshy

cesses only adsorption from the background and desorption due to electron

bombardment need be considered The electron stimulated desorption flux of

ions is assumed proportional to the electron current density j and to the e

surface coverage per unit area N The proportionality constant is

tthe total desorption cross section Q (NE ) Qt(NE ) is in general a pr~ pr~

function of both the coverage and the primary electron energy For the

simple model given above the total desorption cross section is the sum of

the ionic Q+ and neutral Qn desorption cross sections The adsorption

rate is equal to the striking rate times the sticking probability s(N)

which in general is a function of the coverage The time dependence of N can

now be written as

j Qt(NE )N dNdt = s(N)yP _ ~ pu (C 4)e

where P is the partial pressure of the adsorbing species and y is a constant

equal to the number of molecules that strike unit area of the surface per unit

time and pressure

The measured electron stimulated desorption yield of A ions i + isA

assumed proportional to the incident current i the coverage of A per unit e

area N and the detection efficiency of the instrument G The proportionality

186

constant is the ionic desorption cross section Q+(NE ) (Since the only pr~

adsorbate being considered in this work is hydrogen the subscript A will be

replaced by H) This relation for iH+ can be written

= i Q+(NE )NG (CS)e pr~

Equation C4 can be solved for N in closed form under certain

simplifying assumptions The dependence of the cross section on primary

energy does not affect the form of the solution (if the primary energy is

kept constant) Then Qt can be written Qt (E ) if the cross section canpri

be shown to be independent of coverage This is not the case in general so

its validity for each metal-adsorbate system has to be examined This is

done in the text for H2 adsorbed on W(100) so the assumption will be assumed

here Likewise the sticking probability will be assumed independent of N

Equation C4 can now be solved to yield

(C6)

N is the initial hydrogen coverage at t o and T is given by ~

(C7)

Combining Equations CS and C6 gives for the g+ ion yield

(C8)

187

where i is the initial ion yield at t = 0 and iH+ is given byH~ equil

+ esyPAG ~ (C9)

Q

Equation C8 shows that the H+ yield decreases with time to a

saturation value iH+ This decay of the ESD ion yield with time is equil

called a desorption curve A semilogarithmic plot of iH+ - i + versusHequil time should yield a straight line the slope of which is -17 From this

slope and the definition of 7 the total desorption cross section charactershy

izing the hydrogen binding state can be calculated

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

1S considerably more dbull40 a diffusionpressure ~nvo1ve Conceptually such

process can be considered in two steps 1) the diffusion of hydrogen from the

bulk to just inside the surface or to a near surface layer and 2) the

jumping from this configuration to surface sites Diffusion from the bulk to

the near surface layer could be described by Ficks law If N is the conshy

centration of hydrogen in the near surface layer and N the surface concentrashy

tion of hydrogen then the time dependence of N + N due to bulk diffusion

can be written as

d(N+Nl _ D dn (C 10)dt - dx

where D is the diffusion constant for hydrogen in tungsten and dndx is the

concentration gradient of hydrogen just inside the surface The coverage N

in surface sites will change as a result of hydrogen jumping from the near

188

surface layer to the surface and vice versa The rate of jumping to the

surface d( N )dt can be assumed proportional to the concentration Nt

and to some function f(N) which describes the availability of surface sites

The diffusion rate to the surface from the near surface layer would also be

exponentially dependent on an activation barrier energy E The reversebs

flux from the surface to the near surface layer can be written in an

equivalent form An expression for the change in surface concentration with

time due to diffusion to and from the near surface layer can be written as

-E kT -E kTb~~ = CbsNte s f(N) - CsbNe sb g(N) (ClI)

The first term on the right-hand side represents the rate of diffusion from

the near surface layer to the surface and the second term represents the

rate of diffusion from the surface back to the near surface layer cbs and

are constants Esb and g(N) correspond toE and f(N) respectivelycsb bs

A term representing depletion of the surface state due to incident electron

bombardment similar to the second term on the right of Equation C4 could

be added in Equation Cll This has been omitted since only the case je = 0

will be considered here In principle an expression for N can now be

obtained by solving Equations ClO and Cll A general solution is not easily

obtained However it is evident that the time dependence of N due to

diffusion could realistically be similar to that expected from background

adsorption For example for the isothermal case if Nt is assumed constant

and f(N) assumed equal to (1 - NN ) assumptions that are reasonable for max

small coverages it can be shown from Equation 44 that N increases

189

exponentially in time to an equilibrium value For N small this solution

would be approximately linear in time the same result obtained for the time

dependence of background adsorption However background pressure doesnt

enter into the above diffusion calculation If the fast state phenomena is

diffusion related N would be expected to be independent of background

pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence for

adsorption from the background

_ _

190

VITA

Stephen Parker Withrow was born in Washington DC on February 2

1945 He attended Northwestern Senior High School in Hyattsville Maryland

graduating in 1963 He enrolled at Cornell University in Ithaca New York in

September 1963 In June 1967 he received a Bachelor of Science in

Engineering Physics In September 1967 he enrolled in the Physics Department

at the University of Illinois in Urbana Illinois He received his Masters

of Science in Physics in February 1969 He served at a Teaching Assistant

in the Physics Department for four years and also as a Research Assistant in

the Coordinated Science Laboratory while doing his thesis research He is

the coauthor of the publication Environmentally Assisted Crack Growth in

Glass G M Sinclair and S P Withrow Naval Research Laboratory Report

6635

_-------------shy-----------_ bull

Page 3: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …

Hydrogen ions are desorbed from the dosed tungsten surface following

electron impact The distribution in energy of these ions has a Gaussian

line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 eV and a full width

at half maximum of 26 eV The ion yield is found to be coverage dependent

reaching a maximum at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV for desorpshy

tion at 600C and -150oC respectively The total desorption cross section

-20 2 0for H+ from the S2 hydrogen state 1S calculated to be 5xlO cm at 60 C

-19 2 0and 12xlO cm at -150 C

A new hydrogen binding state labeled the fast state has been

observed and characterized using ESD techniques This state is desorbable

if the undosed crystal is cooled below room temperature It is populated to

-4 a very low coverage ~10 monolayer by adsorption from the background of

some other t han H T e tota esorpt10n cross cm2spec1es 2 hId sect1on 10- 17 and

energy distribution of the fast state are markedly different than for the S

states

LEED pattern changes observed as a function of hydrogen coverage

are in good agreement with results published in the literature The intenshy

sity of the c(2x2) pattern associated with the S2 hydrogen state maximizes

at a work function change with adsorption of 015 eV LEED elastic intensity

profiles have been obtained for several low index beams These are compared

to theoretical microscopic model calculations and to published experimental

profiles A c(2x2) LEED pattern is obtained if the crystal is cooled below

room temperature Attempts have been made to correlate the appearance of this

pattern to changes in measurements taken in this low temperature range with

other techniques No significant bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen was

found No evidence was found from work function and electron scattering

experiments to support the hypothesis that the low temperature c(2x2)

pattern results from hydrogen on the surface In addition the fast hydrogen

state is not believed to be responsible for the c(2x2) pattern LEED

intensity profiles from the undosed cold surface c(2x2) pattern and from the

c(2x2) pattern associated with the ~2 hydrogen state are not identical an

indication that the atomic geometry responsible for the two patterns may not

be the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been obtained as a

function of hydrogen coverage for loss energies of 0 eV ~ w lt 40 eV Hydrogen

adsorption has a marked effect on the spectra Fine structure in the data

has been discussed and compared to photoemission data Cooling the clean

crystal below room temperature causes only a slight change in the energy loss

spectrum

iii

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I would like to sincerely thank my advisor Professor F M Propst

for guidance given throughout the course of this research and for his knowledge

of surface research which helped shape this work Dr C B Duke for many

helpful conversations and for assistance in the analysis of the data my wife

Lois for her patience and steadfast encouragement my parents and parents-inshy

law for their generous and needed support Paul Luscher and John Wendelken for

their creativity and cooperation in the design of the apparatus and for many

interesting scientific discussions Jim Burkstrand and Chris Foster for their

friendship and technical help on many occasions Bob Bales George Bouck Bob

Fults Bill Beaulin Lyle Bandy and Bill Lawrence for design assistance and

expert workmanship in the construction of the apparatus Nick Vassos and Bill

Thrasher for the imaginative and superior work in materials processing necesshy

sary in the construction of the instrument Gene Gardner and co-workers for

able assistance in electronics Bob MacFarlane and assistants for their high

quality draftmanship Jack Gladin and Jim Gray for an excellent job on the

photography needed for this research Bob Ebeling for his cooperation in the

print shop Chris Fleener for an excellent typing of the manuscript and the

rest of the staff of the Coordinated Science Laboratory whose efforts have

been gratefully appreciated during my tenure as a graduate student

bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter Page

1 MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

11 Introduction and Motivationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

12 Review of Literature bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

121 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4 122 Thermal Desorptionbull o 4 123 LEED and HEEDbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 7 124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and

Photoemissionbullbullbull 100 bullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbull

125 Electron Stimulated Desorptionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 12 126 Work Functionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 13o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

1 27 Chemical Probes bullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull 14I) O

128 Chemisorption Models bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 15 1 29 Theoretical Treatment bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 19 1 210 Literature Surnmaryo 20

13 Review of Experimental Techniques bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 21

2 EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull ~ bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

21 CGeneral Description bull 22

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shieldingbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 25

24 Energy Spectrometer 29

25 Spectrometer Electronics bullbull 45o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

26 LEED Display System 490 bullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull I)

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 51

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 57

29 Gas Handling System o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 62

210 Mass Spectrometer bullbullbullbull o 64

3 EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE AND RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

31 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

32 Experimental Procedure o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current

Measurements 6811 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull

323 Target Temperature Measurement bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 325 Ion Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 72o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

v

33 Ion Species Identificationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 74

34 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 77

35 u+ Ion Desorption Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 351 ut Ion Energy Distributionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 352 Desorption Curve Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 93 353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State a+ Ion

Signal 4) 96

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 98

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull lll

37 Electron Scattering Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 119

4 DISCUSSION OF RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

42 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 127

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 129 431 Room Temperature Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 130 432 Low Temperature Fast State Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 135 433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull142

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 145

45 Electron Scattering Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 161

5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull165

REFERENCES 171

APPENDIX A 0 176 poundI

APPENDIX B 9 c 179

APPENDIX C 0 182 0 bull

VITA 190lilt bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbull

1

CHAPTER 1

MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

11 Introduction and Motivation

The experimental investigation of chemisorption of gases onto metallic

surfaces has uncovered in the past decade a baffling complexity of adsorption

geometries and binding state kinetics and energetics A growing interest in

surface phenomena generated by the questions raised in these researches and

by the long anticipated use of the answers has led to the rapid development

of new surface probing techniques and to an increase in the availability of new

technologies compatible with surface research Aided by the new technologies

and techniques chemisorption research has been undertaken on many different

systems (system =solid substrate + gas adsorbate) under a wide range of

environmental conditions Surface theoreticians have proposed microscopic and

phenomenological models with which data have been analyzed and compared A

large experimental and theoretical literature in the field has resulted

The study of adsorption on metal surfaces has among its primary

objectives a detailed description of the physical geometry of the atoms in the

surface layers and a quantitative understanding of electronic and chemical

surface phenomena While considerable progress has been made in documenting

gas-surface phenomena it has been only in the past three years that any

credible claims to understanding specific surface overlayer geometries have

1been made At the same time many basic questions involving system kinetics

and energetics have not been adequately resolved 2

It has become apparent from the failure of the research effort to

satisfy the above objectives and from seemingly conflicting data that adequate

2

characterization is basic to all surface experimentation The need for such

characterization has been strongly emphasized by disagreement between quasishy

similar research performed at different locations Small impurity concentrashy

tions small changes in crystal orientation minor temperature differences etc

often have considerable effects on experimental measurements

A corollary to the necessity of being able to characterize the

surface is the importance of being able to control the surface characterization

In order to compare data it is necessary to reproduce all experimental paramshy

eters accurately The theory to which experimental data are compared is

constrained by complexity to be based on ideal clean substrates with a

definable gas-surface interaction It is desirable to be able to choose the

adsorbate-substrate system and experimental parameters that can also be used

with theoretical models Of course compromises are inevitable

One approach in surface research has been to incorporate several

experimental techniques into one apparatus At the present time this approach

is increasingly more common A combination of surface sensitive probes offers

many advantages It provides for more checks of the data against results

published in the literature It allows for better characterization of the

experimental parameters It allows surface phenomena to be probed in more than

one way in order to eliminate ambiguities andor to reinforce conclusions It

eliminates the uncertainties that arise from data taken at different locations

using the techniques separately hence it allows better correlations between

data taken using the different techniques

In this study several aspects of the chemisorption interaction of

hydrogen with the low index (100) plane of single crystal tungsten denoted

3

W(100) have been investigated The choice of the tungsten-hydrogen system is

motivated by several factors The literature raises questions on the unusual

state behavior observed when hydrogen adsorbs on W(100) questions which our

apparatus is especially well-suited to study In addition the interaction of

hydrogen with close packed planes of single crystal metals including W(100)

is of particular interest to theoreticians since hydrogen is the simplest

molecular gas as detailed in Sections 128 and 129 below recent theories

of chemisorption have been applied to the hydrogen-tungsten system Tungsten

was chosen as the substrate metal because of its relative ease of preparation

and cleaning and because the large body of literature on the hydrogen-tungsten

system indicates wide interest in this interaction

In particular this research is concentrated in three areas Tung~

sten when cleaned and subsequently cooled to below room temperature exhibits

an anomalous centered (2x2) denoted C(2x2) low energy electron diffraction

pattern The possibility that this is caused by hydrogen diffusing from the

bulk or adsorbing from the background has been investigated Secondly the

room temperature and low temperature hydrogen adsorption binding states have

been studied using electron stimulated desorption and electron spectroscopy

Finally low energy electron diffraction has been used in an investigation of

the atomic geometry of the clean tungsten surface and the geometry of one of

the hydrogen binding states

The remaining sections of this chapter summarize literature relating

to this research Chapter 2 details the construction and performance of the

experimental apparatus A presentation of the experimental data is made in

Chapter 3 A discussion of the results is made in Chapter 4 A summaryof

4

the research and conclusions from it are given in Chapter 5

12 Review of Literature

121 Introduction

Experimental investigation of the adsorption of hydrogen on tungsten

has been carried out using field emitter tips macroscopic polycrystalline

surfaces and all the low index orientation single crystal faces including

W(lOO) From the wide range of results it is clear that the substrate exerts

a strong influence on the adsorption properties The question has been raised

whether adsorption models postulated from polycrystalline substrates can be

3extended even qualitatively to single crystal systems Likewise there are

such sharp differences in the chemisorption behavior of hydrogen onto the

different single crystal tungsten surfaces that the specific physical process

governing adsorption on each face appears to be unique to that face This

review will therefore be concerned for the most part with literature dealing

with hydrogen adsorption on W(lOO) the gas-substrate system used in this

research

The following data review is presented in subsections each concenshy

trating on a specific experimental technique or class of experiments Subsecshy

tion 127 includes some gas mixing literature which was considered relevant

and Subsection 129 gives a bibliography of some related chemisorption

theoretical papers

122 Thermal Desorption

One technique widely employed in investigation of the kinetics of gas

456adsorption has been thermal or flash desorption By monitoring the system

5

pressure changes of a species while rapidly heating the crystal inferences

can be made on the existence of binding states adsorption energies and reaction

7 8 order Heating is accomplished by a focussed light beam electron bombardshy

7 9ment or ohmic losses bull

The strongest indication that hydrogen exhibits multiple state

adsorption behavior on W(lOO) comes from flash desorption data Tamm and

8Schmidt 7 and Madey and Yates found for room temperature adsorption that two

large peaks are observed in the plot of pressure of H2 versus temperature

These peaks are centered at 4500 K and approximately 550oK Only hydrogen

molecules are observed to be desorbed from the surface Using desorption rate

456theory the lower temperature (~l) state is found to obey first order

kinetics the peak temperature being independent of initial coverage The

higher temperature (~2) state obeys second order kinetics the peak temperature

moving down from approximately 5800 K to 5500 K as the initial coverage is

increased

In addition to the two main peaks several small peaks comprising a

total of less than 10 percent of the desorbed hydrogen are observed during a

flash when the crystal is cooled to nitrogen temperature before hydrogen

exposure These states are believed to result from adsorption onto edges and

other non-(lOO) crystal orientations 8

The dependence of the desorption energy Ed on coverage is weak

~l 8 ~2 8with Ed = 252 kcallmole and Ed = 323 kcalmole As would be predicted

from this result the ~2 state is largely populated before the ~l state begins

to fill The ratio of the populations in the states at full coverage n~1n~2

8 lOis 2111 Jelend and Menzel point out that the cross section for electron

6

desorption (see Subsection 125) from the ~1 state is considerably smaller

than that of the ~2 state a result not predicted from the experimental flash

desorption binding energies

11Tibbetts using a stepped temperature flash desorption technique

has shown that hydrogen is bound to the surface of po1ycrysta11ine tungsten

W(110) and W(lll) with a distribution of binding energies ranging from

162 kca1mo1e (07 eV) to 415 kca1mo1e (lS eV) Using this technique

desorption at a constant temperature from a distribution of states can be easily

distinguished from desorption from a state with a unique binding energy While

he did not extend his work to W(100) these results suggest that hydrogen does

not bind to the surface at a few energies but rather with a range of binding

energies Tibbetts also shows that the determination of the order of the

desorption process is difficult for adsorption into a range of binding energies

In experiments using a combination of hydrogen and deuterium as room

temperature adsorbates the elemental composition of the desorbed ~1 and ~2

states shows complete isotopic mixing between the states7S independent of the

adsorption sequence or ratios However for low temperature adsorption

complete state conversion is not observed for all the additional small peaks

Where mixing is observed atomic adsorption is suggested Where mixing is not

observed molecular adsorption is inferred

Some theoretical models indicate that multiple peak flash desorption

spectra may be due to binding energy changes caused by adsorbate-adsorbate

interactions12 or order-disorder transactions during f1ash3 13 rather than

actual distinct multiple binding states under the adsorption conditions

7

123 LEED and HEED

Low energy electron diffraction or LEED refers to the coherent

scattering of a monoenergetic focused electron beam from the surface of a

crystalline solid Electrons in the energy range 0 lt E lt 300 eV interact

strongly with the ion cores and valence electrons of the solid The inelastic

mean free path is on the order of 10 X As a consequence electrons which are

observed elastically have been backscattered within the first several surface

layers in the solid making LEED a surface sensitive probe 14 15 The periodic

translational symmetry of the surface leads to the momentum conservation laws

I

= (11)~I ~II + g

= (2mEh2)t sin reg (12)~II

where ~II is the momentum parallel to the surface of the emerging electron and

~ is the parallel momentum of the incident electron The vector g is a

reciprocal lattice vector of the solid surface and reg is the polar angle of the

incident beam As a result of the conservation laws the scattered electrons

emerge in a series of beams called a spot pattern which is a manifestation

of the surface symmetry The beams are labelled by their corresponding g

vectors Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores is

extracted from the plot of elastically scattered electron intensity versus

16 17incident energy called elastic intensity profiles or I-V curves

Changes in the LEED spot pattern resulting from hydrogen adsorption

18onto W(lOO) at room temperature have been reported by Estrup and Anderson and

19by Yonehara and Schmidt As hydrogen is adsorbed at room temperature the

8

(lxl) pattern characteristic of clean tungsten changes into a weak C(2x2)

pattern at a hydrogen coverage e of less than 005 monolayer (where e = 1

15 2monolayer at a coverage of 2xlO hydrogen atomsem which is 2 hydrogen atoms

for each surface tungsten atom) The (1212) spots become sharp and intense

with increased hydrogen adsorption reaching a maxima in intensity at approxishy

19 18mately 015 monolayer or e = 025 monolayer (Coverage in both cases was

determined by flash desorption) The (1212) spots split into four new spots

which move apart continuously and upon further hydrogen adsorption eventually

19form 13-order streaks at a coverage of ~ 035 monolayer These in turn

change at higher coverage into poorly developed 14-order features with the

(012) spots missing Finally near e = 10 all extra diffraction features

are gone and the LEED pattern returns to a (lxl) symmetry This series of LEED

pattern changes is reversible with coverage

For hydrogen adsorption at 1950 K the C(2x2) pattern develops

maximizes in intensity at e ~ 18 and splits into four beams similar to room

temperature adsorption However the higher coverage LEED structures third

19 0order streaks and fourth order spots are not observed At 78 K adsorption

of hydrogen produces half-order C(2x2) spots that maximize in intensity at

e ~ 027 Additional hydrogen adsorption beyond this causes the half-order

19spot intensity to decrease but with no splitting of the spots

If clean W(lOO) is allowed to cool below room temperature a sharp

19and intense C(2x2) pattern is observed even though total coverage due to the

background of H2 and CO is less than e = 001 as determined by flash desorption

measurements The intensity of these half-order beams can be altered by

additional hydrogen adsorption or by various hydrogen and oxygen heat treatmenm

9

l9Yonehara and Schmidt have postulated that the extra spots may result from

hydrogen endothermally soluble in tungsten diffusing to the surface Possible

alternative explanations include the reconstruction of the clean tungsten

surface or impurity over layer adsorption from the background It should be

20noted that Plummer and Bell saw no effects upon cooling their field emitter

tip to 78 0 K that they could attribute to hydrogen diffusion to the surface

Elastic intensity profiles for several beams have been measured by

18 21Estrup and Anderson and by Papageorgopoulos and Chen at room temperature

Estrup and Anderson reported profiles for (00) and (1212) tEED lJeams out

to 300 eV The intensity variation for the (OO) beam was found to be indepenshy

dent of hydrogen coverage a manifestation of the relatively weak scattering

cross section of a hydrogen ion core relative to that of tungsten The

additional beams observed on adsorption would be expected to be more sensitive

13to the adsorbed overlayer Estrup found the intensity of the (1212) beams

for H W(100) and D W(100) to decrease as a function of temperature between2 2

300o

K and 6000 K at a constant incident energy but neither obeyed the Debyeshy

22Waller relation Estrup interpreted this result to imply the adsorbed

species are directly involved in the diffraction process

19Yonehara examined the tEED spot intensities as a function of

temperature down to liquid nitrogen temperatures His results are examined

in the data discussion in Chapter 4

The hydrogen-WlOO) system has also been studied using high energy

electron diffraction or HEED23 This technique utilizes the strong forward

scattering of high energy electrons in probing the surface by having the

incident beam strike the solid at grazing incidence The resulting diffraction

10

patterns are sensitive to the translational symmetry of the surface As in

LEED a diffraction pattern with C(2x2) symmetry is observed during initial

hydrogen adsorption With further hydrogen exposure the beams broaden some

splitting is observed and eventually the half-order intensity decreases

completely The width of the observed half-order beams has been interpreted to

indicate hydrogen initially adsorbs into a large number of small square or

rectangular domains each consisting of 20 to 25 atoms with sides parallel to

the [100J directions

124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and Photoemission

The electronic structure of the surface layers of solids can be

characterized by electron emission spectroscopies Such techniques require a

surface sensitive perturbation on the gas-solid system leading to an electron

yield A spectrometer is used to energy analyze the emitted or scattered

24 25electrons In electron scatter~ng a monoenergetic beam of electrons is

directed onto a crystal The inelastically scattered signal containing

quantitative information about electronic excitations at the surface is

measured as a function of energy loss Field emission is a technique in which

application of a high positive electric field to the surface lowers the potenshy

26tia1 barrier for electrons to tunnel out of the system The total energy

distribution of electrons emitted as a result of the applied field contains

bull 27 28spectroscopic data on the adsorbed spec~es Structure induced by the

adsorbate in the elastic tunneling spectrum is thought to be a measure of the

d f i h f h d b 2930e1ectron~c ens~ty 0 states n t e v~c~n~ty 0 tea sor ate The

inelastic tunneling spectrum reveals discrete excitation energies in the

11

gas-surface system In photoemission or ftotoelectron spectroscopy an incident

monochromatic light beam incident on the solid induces emission of electrons by

interband transitions with or without an inelastic scattering after the initial

31 exc i tat~on

The vibrational spectrum of hydrogen adsorbed on the tungsten (100)

32surface has been observed by Propst and Piper using inelastic low energy

20electron scattering and by Plummer and Bell using field emission Propst

and Piper found two peaks in the energy loss distribution E - E pr~mary scattered

at 135 meV and 69 meV for all coverages used up to saturation These results

are interpreted as indicating hydrogen atoms are multiply bonded to tungsten

33atoms No losses near 550 meV the vibrational energy of molecular hydrogen

were observed Plummer and Bell measured the total energy distribution of

field emitted electrons from tungsten (100) as a function of coverage of

hydrogen and deuterium at several temperatures Discrete losses at 100 meV

and 50 meV for deuterium which correspond to the 135 meV and 69 meV vibrational

losses observed by Propst and Piper were evident for deuterium in the a state2

No discrete energy losses at 550 meV or 390 meV the molecular vibrational

levels of H2 and D2 respectively were measured Hence there was no observable

molecular adsorption at room temperature

Additional structure in the field emission total energy distribution

is observed as a function of hydrogen adsorption The clean surface spectrum

has two peaks 04 eV and 15 eV down from the Fermi level which have been

d ifi d h h d f d h h f 34 A h d ~ ent e as ~g ens~ty 0 states assoc~ate w~t t e sur ace s y rogen

(or deuterium) coverage increases between 0 and 5xl014 atomscm2

ie while

the ~2 state is filling the surface states disappear and the field emitted

12

energy distribution changes from that of clean tungsten to a spectrum indicative

of resonance tunneling through a level positioned 09 eV below the Fermi energy

There is a shoulder at -11 eV and an energy dependent background With

further adsorption up to saturation this energy distribution characteristic

of the ~2 state shifts to a broad level centered at 26 eV below the Fermi

level This is interpreted to indicate that the ~1 state does not adsorb on

top of the ~2 state

35The photoemission results of Wac1awski and P1ummer and Feuerbacher

36and Fitton are in agreement with those obtained using the field emission

technique As hydrogen adsorbs on the surface emission from the 04 eV

surface state decreases The level 09 eV down from the Fermi energy as well

as a level 5 eV down remain unchanged by adsorption At full coverage a strong

peak at -25 eV is observed

125 Electron Stimulated Desorption

Desorption of energetic ions and neutrals from a gas over layer can

be induced by electron bombardment This process termed electron stimulated

desorption or ESD37383940 is described below in the discussion of the data

in Chapter 4 In brief intensity and energy measurements of the ion yield can

be interpreted in terms of the parameters characterizing the binding energy

curve of the adsorbed state and adsorption states can be classified by cross

section for desorption_ ion energy distributions primary energy threshold for

desorption etc

ESD has been employed to study adsorption kinetics for the hydrogenshy

41 ~ tungsten (100) system Madey obtained a coverage dependence yield of H ions

13

observing an ion signal during the initial stages of hydrogen adsorption that

reached a maximum at a coverage of e = 017 and then decayed to zero yield

23 2after e = 075 the maximum cross section obtained was 18x10- cm at a

primary electron energy of 100 eV Tamm and Schmidt7 reported a maximum cross

section for H+ desorption of 10- 21 cm 2bull Benninghoven Loebach and Treitz42

10and Je1end and Menze1 obtained qualitatively similar (to Madey) coverage

dependencies on tungsten ribbons which were believed to be predominantly of

(100) crystallites the main difference between these results and Madeys is

the observation of a residual signal at high hydrogen coverage

The cross section results indicate that the a state even though it2

is more tightly bound than the a state provides more hydrogen ions upon1

electron impact The cross section for ion desorption from the a1 state is

d41 10-25est1mate to be 1ess t han cm2 bull

+No energy distributions of the desorbed H ions have been reported

The dependence of the desorption cross section on the primary electron energy

10has not been investigated Je1end and Menzel found their results independent

of temperature for temperatures above room temperature No ESD results for

otemperatures less than 300 K have been reported

126 Work Function

The work function is the minimum amount of energy required to remove

43 an electron from a meta1 An adsorbate may alter the potential barrier for

electrons at the surface and hence change the work function Such is the case

for hydrogen on W(100) Hydrogen adsorbs as an electronegative ion on W(100)

thereby increasing the work function

14

44Using a retarding potential current-voltage techn~que Madey and

8Yates reported a linear relation between work function change and hydrogen

coverage over the entire coverage range for adsorption occurring at a

temperature 0 f 2= 300 0 K Coverages were determined by flash desorption

Total work function change at one monolayer was found to be 090 eV which

corresponds to a constant dipole moment per adsorbed atom of 015 Debye

15 2(assuming a total coverage of 15xlO atomsem)

Estrup and Anderson18 using the retarding potential technique and

Plummer and Bel120 using a field emission Fowler-Nordheim plot45 found a

work function change versus coverage relationship which deviated only slightly

8from being linear in near agreement with the results of Madey and Yates

46 47Becker using field emission and Armstrong using a retarding potential

technique found a work function change for the H W(100) system of approximately2

48090 eV when e = 10 Hopkins and Pender obtained an anomalously low value

49of 054 eV while Collins and Blott obtained a high value of 109 eV for the

same coverage

127 Chemical Probes

Hydrogen adsorption has also been studied using a chemical probe

ie by coadsorbing some additional different gas with the hydrogen and

observing the effect this additional species had on results obtained using

techniques discussed in previous sections

50Yates and Madey found using flash desorption that CO coadsorption

onto a hydrogen monolayer displaces both the Sl and S2 binding states with

near unity probability in doing so initially replacing these states with a

15

less tightly bound hydrogen state After high CO exposure no hydrogen remains

on the surface if the coadsorption is done at room temperature At lower

temperatures only about 10 percent of the hydrogen is desorbed Jelend and

Menzel lO 5l found that the ionic and total desorption cross sections for

hydrogen the sticking probability and bond strength of hydrogen are all

affected by preadsorption of CO or oxygen Yates and Madey3 found that N2

slowly replaces preadsorbed hydrogen at temperatures greater than 300oC Below

2730

K the displacement of hydrogen by N2 does not occur

These results all show that small impurity concentrations of CO N

and 0 if intentionally introduced do affect the resulting hydrogen chemishy

sorption properties These experiments underscore the necessity of surface

chemical characterization

128 Chemisorption Models

7 18 19 52 Several models have been proposed to account for the

experimental results from hydrogen chemisorption on W(lOO) Each of these

models embodies some combination of the following three phenomenological

assumptions 1) The tungsten surface is ideal planar and free of contamishy

nants 2) There are available two types of adsorbates namely hydrogen atoms

53and molecules 3) There are three high symmetry logical bonding sites on

a BCC (100) face usually designated by the letters A B and C These

positions are A a bridge site with 2 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen

equidistant from two adjacent surface tungsten atoms B a four fold symmetric

site with 5 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen located on a surface normal that

passes through the center of a surface primitive unit cell and C the hydrogen

16

located directly above a surfac~ atom with one nearest neighbor There are

15 152x10 A sitescm2 and 1x10 B ore sites~m2 on middotW(100)

The proposed models attempt to explain or at least be consistent

with empirical results presented in Sections 121 through 127 A summary

of salient features of the reported research includes a) a linear work function

15change with coverage b) a saturation coverage of between 15 and 20x10 H

2atomscm c) a coverage dependent adsorption layer symmetry including a we11shy

ordered surface at low coverages d) the appearance at low temperatures of a

surface translational symmetry not equivalent to room temperature clean

tungsten e) adsorption into states which produces a two state thermal desorpshy

tion spectrum with relative coverages in the two states of nQ n = 21 f) a ~1 ~2

coverage dependence for the observed electronic structure including the

absence at high coverage of structure observed at low coverages and g) no

observed vibrational levels which correspond to free H2 molecule

Following is a short review of several proposed surface models

18Estrup and Anderson account for their LEED spot pattern results

using a model wherein the hydrogen molecules dissociate upon adsorption and

migrate initially to form islands of hydrogen atoms located at type A sites in

a e(2x2) structure Dissociation is assumed since the e(2x2) pattern maximizes

15 2at a coverage of 25x10 mo1ecu1escm whereas without dissociation it would

maX1m1ze at 5 1015 mo ecu1es cm2bull e site adsorptionx 1 Although type B or type

could also produce the initial e(2x2) LEED pattern these sites are rejected

15 2because of the following 1) There are only 1x10 B or e sitescm This is

not enough sites to accommodate a full monolayer coverage if all binding is

atomic and if it is into equivalent sites as suggested by the linear work

17

function change with coverage 2) While a complete 14-order LEED pattern is

possible with type B or type C sites it is not possible to produce a 14-order

54pattern with (012) spots missing using B or C sites As the adsorption

14 2proceeds past a surface density of 5xlO hydrogen atomscm the adatoms conshy

tinuously rearrange into long period superlattices with antiphase domains

that produce successively the 12-order spot splitting the 13-order streak

(only partly ordered domains) the 14-order pattern and finally the (lxl)

full coverage structure

This model has been criticized for not accounting for the two

observed binding states and for predicting a maximum in intensity of the half

order spots at e = 025 these beams maximize at less than that coverage In

addition the authors themselves questioned the idea of well-ordered super-

lattices

In order to explain the relative intensity of the two states at

saturation seen in flash desorption n~~ = 21 Tamm and Schmidt7

propose a 1 2

model wherein the initial hydrogen adsorption is atomic and at B sites in a

C(2x2) pattern At full coverage the remaining B sites are filled with

hydrogen molecules B sites are chosen over C sites using molecular orbital

55arguments A sites are rejected as there are too many to satisfy this model

This model satisfies the second order kinetics observed for the ~2 state and

the first order kinetics observed for the ~l state In addition it explains

14 2 7 their saturation coverage of gt 3xl0 moleculescm One weakness of this

model pointed out by Tamm and Schmidt is that it is not obvious the model can

account for the observed LEED and work function results Also no molecular

vibrations have been observed

18

19yonehara and Schmidt propose a three bonding state model that is

more consistent with the low temperature LEED results In their model an

additional state labeled ~3 is always present at the surface in A or B

2sites with a density of 5xl014 atomscm bull This state orders on the surface at

low temperatures to give the C(2x2) pattern observed At room and higher

temperatures it goes into solution (or perhaps disorders) becoming invisible

to LEED In the type A site model adsorption from the background fills in the

remaining A sites sequentially with the ~2 and ~l states This model is similar

18to that proposed by Estrup and Anderson except that the ~3 state although

invisible to LEED at room and higher temperatures occupies 14 of the type A

sites This model eliminates the stoichiometric objection to Estrup and

Andersons model The model depends on the possibility of type A sites being

occupied by states with considerably different properties If the ~3 state

occupies type B sites ~2 state adsorption fills in the remaining type B sites

and then ~l hydrogen adsorbs into random or possibly type C sites This

second model does not explain satisfactorily work function or LEED spot pattern

experimental data

56Propst found using a point defect type calculation that only a

B-site model of adsorption would produce the observed vibrational energies of

5769 meV and 135 meV Park using LEED intensity arguments found that only

adsorption into sites with 4-fold symmetry on the (100) surface (type B or type

C sites) would be consistent with broadening and splitting of the half-order

beams while the integral beams remain sharp

8Madey and Yates offer a critique of several of the proposed models

19

No adsorption geometry adequately accounts for all the observed data

It is possible that surface hydrogen mobility adsorbate-adsorbate interactions

tungsten surface reconstruction and other surface phenomenon must be better

understood before this system can be adequately characterized

129 Theoretical Treatment

Several theoretical treatments of hydrogen-tungsten chemisorption

phenomenon have been reported in the literature as discussed below

7 18 19 52 The most elementary geometric models already have been

mentioned in Section 128 Grimley58 considers the hydrogen on W(lOO) system

59in an Anderson-Hamiltonian formalism Anders and Hansen obtain the relative

bonding energies of hydrogen chemisorbed at the three high symmetry adsorption

sites of W(lOO) using an extended Ruckel molecular orbital theory Their

results indicated a preference for hydrogen adsorption at type C sites

60Schrieffer offers a review on the theory of chemisorption in which he

concludes the Hartree-Fock approximation to the Anderson model for hydrogenshy

61metal adsorption is invalid Newns using the same approximation also shows

62the one-electron HF theory to be invalid Schrieffer and Gomer study the

exchange interaction between the adatom and the solid which results from the

nonorthogonality of the adatom and solid wave functions Smith Ying

h 63 64 h h d 1 h bl band Ko n lnvestlgate t e y rogen-meta c emlsorptlon pro em y

requiring complete self-consistency between the three-dimensional electrostatic

potential used and charge density obtained They calculate electron scattering

resonance levels and ground state vibrational frequency Jennings and McRae

using a multiple scattering LEED theory (but neglecting inelastic collision

65

20

damping) show that there can be half-order beams of high intensity in the H -W2

k W b 66 1 b dsystem even t hough h ydrogen 1S a wea scatterer e1n erg app 1es a on-

energy bond-order model of chemisorption to the hydrogen-W(100) system and

predicts binding energies for the molecular state and atomic state of hydrogen

on W(100) to be 262 kca1mo1e and 322 kca1mo1e respectively

1210 Literature Summary

Some conclusions can be drawn concerning the state of understanding

of the hydrogen-tungsten system and in particular the H W(100) system2

Despite considerable research experimental uncertainties still exist

in the H W(100) interaction It is still not clear if hydrogen adsorbs as a2

molecule The preponderance of evidence from electron scattering vibrational

levels field emission and H -D gas mixing flash desorption measurements2 2

indkates most hydrogen probably adsorbs atomically Multiple state behavior

is exhibited It is not known however if this observed state behavior is a

result of distinct hydrogen-tungsten interactions it is believed that to a

large extent it is driven by coverage dependent adsorbate-adsorbate interacshy

tions There is no model that can successfully incorporate the measured work

function flash desorption and ESD parameters The adsorption sites are not 15 15 2

known Total coverage at one monolayer is between 15xlO and 2x10 atomsem

which is more than the number of surface tungsten atomscm2 in the (100) face

LEED results at different temperatures indicate a possible temperature depenshy

dence for the adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO) Particularly confusing is

the anomalous LEED result obtained at low temperatures for the clean surface

Only small adsorption temperature dependencies are found in sticking probability

21

work function changes and flash desorption results

13 Review of Experimental Techniques

As indicated in Section 11 this research has been undertaken in an

attempt to characterize more fully the hydrogen-W(lOO) interaction A multi-

technique spectrometer has been used Chapter 2 gives a discussion of the

instrument This instrument is capable of making work function Auger electron

spectroscopy electron scattering ESD (including a pulsed time-of-flight mode)

and LEED measurements These techniques except AES have been well-reviewed

43 44 67 68 24 25 3 37 3839 40 as referenced prevlously (work function AES ES ESD

151617LEED ) Their use in this research can be summarized as follows work

function changes are a measure of adsorption coverage Auger electron

spectroscopy has been used to characterize the contamination of the experimental

surface ES and ESD are sensitive probes of surface and adsorption parameters

Time-of-flight has been used to determine the ion species desorbed LEED has

been used here to indicate the orientation of the surface and to attempt to

take initial data useful in calculation of overlayer geometries A more

detailed discussion of these techniques as used in this research is given in

Section 32

A discussion of the instrument constructed and used for this research

is given in Chapter 2 Sections 31 and 32 deal wIth organization and

experimental procedures Experimental data are presented starting with Section

33 A discussion of the data and conclusions from the research are given in

Chapter 4

22

CHAPTER 2

EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS

21 General Description

The apparatus used in this research is designed to probe an experishy

mental macroscopic crystal with several surface sensitive techniques It

combines an electron gun which focuses a monoenergetic beam of electrons onto

the crystal a new high resolution electrostatic spectrometer capable of energy

analysis of electrons and ions a low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system

and a crystal manipulator The crystal manipulator allows positioning of the

experimental sample and provides sample cooling heating and electrical

biasing Also included in the apparatus are a mass spectrometer and a gas

handling system System electronics allow the spectrometer to perform work

function electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated desorption

Auger electron spectroscopy and low energy electron diffraction measurements

The spectrometer can be operated over a wide range of primary electron energies

and currents and analyzer pass energies It can be biased in both electron and

ion pass modes and in a pulsed time-of-flight mode for species identification

An external spot photometer is used for LEED intensity measurements The

instrument is housed in an ultrahigh vacuum chamber A schematic diagram of

the overall system is given in Figure 21 The construction and performance

characteristics of each of the components are discussed in the following

sections of Chapter 2

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shielding

The requirement that the experimental surface has to remain clean

23

Analyzer Support

Magnetic Shielding

Ion Gauge

Analyzer

Crystal Target

Window

Openings in Magnetic Shield to Gas Jet and Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer

LEED Screen Viewing Mi rror

To Ion Pumps _

Analyzer Wiring Feedthroughs

Liquid Nitrogen Dewar for Cooling Strap Heat Sink

Insulator

Crystal Manipulator

Cooling Strop

Titanium Sublimotion Pump

Figure 21 Schematic diagram of mu1titechnique apparatus

24

while making measurements necessitates housing the apparatus in an ultrahigh

vacuum chamber A commercial Varian vacuum chamber and pumping station have

been used Ultrahigh vacuum was achieved in several steps after the chamber

-2 was rough pumped down to 10 Torr using cryosorb pumps main system pumping

was accomplished using a 400 litersec ion pump and a titanium sublimator

oAfter a bakeout of 24 hours at temperatures up to 270 C to outgas the system

-10walls the system pressure read about lxlO Torr as measured with a Bayard-

Alpert ion gauge The pressure decreased somewhat during the first weeks of

spectrometer operation after bakeout The final system background pressure

-11 was less than 8xlO Torr or below the x-ray limit of the gauge When

-10operating in the Auger mode the background rose to lxlO Torr presumably

because of the large currents involved A mass spectrometer scan indicated

that the main components of the background were H2 CO CO2 and H 0 The ion2

gauge which can affect the composition of the background was turned off while

taking data except if noted otherwise

In an electrostatic deflection analyzer such as used here magnetic

fields can introduce spurious results In order to reduce the earths magnetic

field in the region of electron or ion trajectories three concentric cylinders

of Eagle AAA ultrahigh nickel steel alloy magnetic shielding are placed around

the spectrometer The shielding is mounted on a stainless steel and ceramic

support which rests in a groove in the inside wall of the vacuum chamber This

shielding is electrically isolated so it can be floated at any desired voltage

The ambient magnetic field in the target region is less than 5 milliGauss

The region inside the shielding and below the spectrometer (the

region shown in Figure 214) is referred to in this work as the experimental

25

chamber There are apertures cut in the magnetic shielding which allow the

crystal to be put in (and out of) the experimental chamber Apertures also

allow line-of-sight access to this region of the gas dosing jet mass spectromshy

eter and allow the crystal to be viewed

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics

The electron gun provides the incident focused electron beam used

in all the surface probing techniques Figures 22 and 23 show a schematic

drawing of the electron gun and a photograph of the gun assembled and disshy

dOf d f dOd b P 0 69assembled h a mo 1 1e verS10n 0 a gun eS1gne y er1aT e gun 1S The

comporients of the gun are a thermal cathode or source of electrons three

electrodes and four deflection plates The cathode is a Philips Metalonics

Type M barium calcium aluminate impregnated tungsten emitter The cathode was

0generally operated at 875 C with the heating accomplished indirectly with a

tungsten filament behind the heater The electrons emitted are focused into

a beam by two lenses the crossover formed by the lens action of the control

grid and first anode is focused onto the target by a second lens formed by the

first anode and second anode The incident primary beam thus formed can be

deflected along two axes in the target face by means of deflection plates

located at the entrance to the drift tube

The guns electronic circuitry is shown in Figure 24 Three 6 V

lead storage batteries in series power the cathode heater through an integrated

circuit voltage regulator The gun electrodes are biased using a resistor

chain voltage divider circuit This arrangement scales the guns lenses thus

keeping the beam focused as the primary beam energy is changed by varying the

26

Heat Shield

Cathode Heater

Cathode

Control Grid

First Anode

Second Anode

Coaxial Cathode Heater Feed through

~~f-------+-+-~ Paraxial Ray Aperture

---J7j7j--shy -~f-~ Accelerating ~~pt=-=a~~ or Decelerating

Lens Region

Deflection Plates

SP-1Oeuro7

Figure 22 Schematic diagram of electron gun

I)

-J

Figure 23 Photograph of electron gun assembled and disassembled

~ ~1 ~

h

I __-t--------+--

Defl + ---t---------

i---VV----110K I10K 93K

Supply

BHK 2000

I

Dec Mode

Ace 15K Mode

10K I 15K

l8V Leod

Gun X Deflection Plates (Y Defl Plates Rotate 90 not shown)

Storage Batteries

tv 00

Acc Mode Connections

To First Anode

To Second Anode X Defl shy

X

To Gun Deflection

Plates 10K 10K 57K 15K55K

1-_________----1+I Electron Gun

sp- 1125

Figure 24 Diagram of the electron guns biasing circuitry

29

gun power supply a Kepco BHK-2000 supply The gun can be operated in two

modes In the accelerating mode (ace mode) the second anode is biased more

positive than the first anode With this biasing the gun has been operated

from 30 V to 1825 V primary energy In the decelerating mode (dec mode) the

first anode is biased more positive than the second anode This allows for

higher field gradients at the cathode surface resulting in higher currents at

lower energies In the dec mode the gun can be operated from 10 V to 200 V

A spatial profile of the primary beam was taken using a two grid

retarding field analyzer mounted on the target manipulator at the position of

the target Electrode bias settings that optimized the beam line shape were

determined over the guns energy range These results are summarized in

Figure 25 The spatial full width at half maximum of the spot intensity is

less than 025 mm at 1825 V less than 075 mm at 100 V (dec mode) and about

25 mm at 10 V The energy width of the primary beam can be estimated by

retarding the primary beam between the drift tube and target At E = 100 eVpr1

the current to the target goes from 90 maximum to 10 maximum over a retarding

voltage of ~V $ 0360 meV This is an upper estimate on the energy spread in

the primary beam A lower limit would be the thermal spread of the cathode

~ 2kT or about 200 meV

24 Energy Spectrometer

A schematic diagram of the spectrometer used in this research to

energy analyze electrons and ions is given in Figure 26 The spectrometers

operation can be summarized as follows Electrons and ions originating at

the target with some energy distribution are accelerated or decelerated to the

Dec Mode --1r+shy

Probe Aperture Diameter

+10

E~

~ ~ 10Decelerating Lens Dec Mode aJLL- c E 0- E ~ ~ -051=-- Accelerating Lens Acc Mode Q)O - a WU)

o 200 600 1000 1400

E ~Ugt o Q)()cme=)

Q)

cO ~ e+- (+-Clo OQ)Q)loc

-lolo Wllaquo

u-

Electron Beam Energy Epri (eV) w o

Epri= 10eV Electron Beam Spatial Profiles Epri =1745 eV Epri =100eVf Epd=1000 eV Ace ModeAce Mode Aee Mode

-05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 Probe Aperture Position (mm)

SP-1084

Figure 25 Spatial characteristics of primary electron beam Top panel - Full width at half maximum of beam as a function of primary energy Bottom panel - Line shape of beam at several primary energies

-10 0

31

Cylindrical Electrostatic Analyzer

Spherical Elect rostat ic Analyzer

~____- __Gylindrical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

Coaxial Repulsion Cylinder

--__-___Spherical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

~-- Electron Gun

Deflection Plates

-Gun Wiring

Concentric ~--- Deflection

Spheres

~-- LEED Screen

Scattered Electrons SP-l066

and Desorbed Ions

Figure 26 Schematic diagram of energy spectrometer

32

pass energy of the spectrometer by three spherical sector grids prior to

entering the spherical analyzer section of the instrument (An annular slot

cut in the LEED screen which is located between the grids and the spherical

analyzer allows particles to pass into the analyzer) Energy selection is

accomplished by a combination of two electrostatic deflection analyzers The

first is a high resolution spherical deflection analyzer This is backed by

a cylindrical mirror-type electrostatic analyzer referred to in this work as

the cylindrical or tandem analyzer Particles that pass through the spectromshy

eter impinge on the first dynode of a high gain electron multiplier The

output signal of this multiplier is detected using the electronics discussed

in Section 25

The spectrometer is constructed mainly of 304 stainless steel which

has been hydrogen and vacuum fired to reduce residual magnetism to less than

5 milliGauss Most interior surfaces have been rhodium plated to eliminate

surface charging problems Final design dimensions used in the spectrometer

are listed in Table 21 Refer to Figure 27 for a diagram of the variables

used in this table

The emission angle at the ta~get of the central trajectory that

passes 1nto t he spectrometer 1S 350 bull The entrance aperture (slot) accepts

particles that originate within plusmn0045 radians of this central ray making a

total solid angle accepted of 032 steradians

The spherical electrostatic deflection analyzer section is a

70spherical velocity selector of the type first investigated by Purcell The

analyzer is designed to focus an object spot of electrons or ions originating

at the front surface plane of the target onto the first energy resolution

33

TABLE 21 FINAL DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR SPECTROMETER

SPHERICAL ANALYZER

l Inner sphere radius 342 cmr l

2 Outer sphere radius r 419 cm2

3 Radius of central ray a = 381 cm

04 Emission angle of central ray e = 35

05 Angular range of accepted rays 3244

0 - 3756

6 Angle subtended between entrance and exit planes of spherical analyzer section ~ = 51660

7 Acceptance solid angle of spectrometer 032 steradians

8 Diameter of first ERA D 025 cm

9 Distance of target from center of spherical analyzer P 665 cm

10 Distance of first ERA from center of spherical analyzer Q 1328 cm

CYLINDRICAL ANALYZER

11 Distance from first ERA to entrance diaphram S = 330 cm

12 Distance between entrance and exit diaphrams T 399 cm

13 Distance from exit diaphram to second ERA U = 330 cm

14 Inner cylinder radius Rl = 0099 cm

15 Distance from second ERA to electron multiplier V ~ 254 cm

16 Radius of entrance aperture R2 099 cm

17 Radius of repulsion electrode R3 = 330 cm

18 Radius of exit aperture R4 093 cm

19 Width of exit aperture G 037 cm

20 Diameter of second ERA E 044 cm

21 Width of entrance aperture F = 053 cm

34

Plane of First ERA

~

D

Spherical Analyzer

First ERA

I

I1 I~~ f F

S

]R4 II f ~

R3

11 [1

I II

U v~ cT t t

Plane of Plane of First ERA Second ERA

Cylindrical Analyzer

Figure 27 Schematic diagram of particle trajectories in spherical analyzer section Spatial configuration of tandem cylindrical analyzer section also shown

35

aperture or image plane The spatial configuration of the analyzer is such

as to give maximum reduced dispersibn according to the relations derived by

Purcell The magnification of the source at maximum reduced dispersion is 2

Diaphrams at the entrance and exit apertures of the spherical analyzer are

designed to minimize problems caused by the fringing fields as discussed by

71Herzog

Initial tests using only the spherical analyzer indicated electrons

that scattered from the interior surfaces could be passed through the first

energy resolving aperture over a range of analyzer pass energies To eliminate

this erroneOus signal a second low resolution cylindrical mirror-type

72electrostatic analyzer was designed and constructed by P Luscher

Electrons or ions that pass through the first energy resolving

aperture at the correct energy are deflected by the repulsion electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer and pass through the second energy resolving aperture

This signal impinges on the first dynode of the electron multiplier Trajectory

tracing calculations indicated that the cylindrical analyzer would eliminate

the scattered signal if this second analyzer had a full width energy resolution

~EE = 028 where E is the energy of the particle executing the pass pass

correct central trajectory through the spectrometer This is not a stringent

design requirement

The energy resolution of the spectrometer is defined as the ratio

~EEp where ~E is the width of the line shape passed as the spectrometer is

scanned in pass energy for a monochromatic source of particles with energy Ep

For the spectrometer configuration here the energy resolution is determined

by the resolution achieved in the high resolution spherical analyzer section

36

at least down to low pass energies Line shape broadening effects in the

spherical analyzer originate from three sources 1) the finite diameter D

of the first energy resolving aperture 2) the finite radius R of the source

disk and 3) the use of a finite range of emission angles of particles from

the crystal surface which can enter and be passed by the spectrometer This

third source of line broadening results from the spherical analyzer having

imperfect second order focusing at the first energy resolving aperture The

effect on the line shape of the finite range of emission angles goes as the

square of the acceptance half width which in this analyzer is small In

the calculation of energy resolution below the third source of line broadening

will not be considered

A numerical value for the energy resolution for the spectrometer

used in this research can be calctilated To do so it is necessary to derive

an expression for 6EEp in terms of the diameter D and radius R given above

In the calculation below these two sources of line broadening will be

considered independent and the effective line shape and energy resolution

from each will be calculated separately Following an analysis by Purcell an

energy resolution can be expressed in terms of the velocity resolution S bull ~

S is defined by ~

where v is the velocity of a particle which the analyzer passes along the pass

central trajectory when and v is the velocity of a particle withset at Epass ~

slightly different energy E bullbull (For convenience E and v will be ~ pass pass

shortened to Ep and vp in the following discussion Lower case subscripts are

37

used to distinguish this derivation from the defined energy resolution above)

A resolution can be calculated as follows

(22)

Using Equation 21 this becomes

(23)

(24)

If the line shape width ~E is written as

fiE = E - E = (E - E ) + (E - Emn) (25)max max p pm~n ~

then the energy resolution can be expressed as

(26)

D and R can be related to Q and Q bull as shown belowf-I max f-Im~n

Line shape broadening due to the finite diameter D of the first

energy resolving aperture (1st ERA) can be calculated from the velocity

70dispersion given by Purcell

(27)

9 00 ~ (28)

Refer to Figure 27 for a definition of the variables in these equations

38

Assume a current j(a) emanating from the center of the target

along xl with energy distribution

j (e) = 1 (29)

All of this current crosses the plane of the 1st ERA at a position d given by

d = Y2cOS a = 900 acos a (210)

A 1st ERA of diameter D will pass all the current for which Y2 Y2 leading

to the relation for the limiting values of 13

(211)

D bull cos a a lt D cos a (212)2 bull 900 - 2 bull 900

The energy resolution due to a finite 1st ERA is then calculated from Equation

26 to be

~E (~st ERA) = 2 [053D + 053DJ = 02l2D (213) P

For D = 025 cm (010 in) this evaluates to

8E (1st ERA) = 0021 (214)E P

The line shape of the current distribution resulting from the finite 1st ERA

is a unit function for the allowable e values (Equation 214) since all the

current j(S) is passed by the 1st ERA and j(S) is a unit function in S

The above line shape and resolution have been obtained effectively

by varying the energy of the signal current (via Equation 29) rather than

39

using a monochromatic current source and varying the pass energy as initially

used in defining the spectrometer resolution That the results given in

Equation 214 are the same as would be obtained from a more complicated

calculation using a monochromatic current source can be seen by considering a

monochromatic source v == (1 + l)vp and noting that it will be deflected tol

the edge of the 1st ERA by a pass energy Ep

Line shape broadening and an energy resolution due to a finite radius

to the source disk can be determined in a manner analogous to that used above

Consider a point source of particles at the 1st ERA that travel back through

the analyzer Such reverse trajectories would cross the target plane at a

position

(215)

where for these reverse trajectories using Equation 27

Yl = 491 a (216)

p being a variable representing the radius at which these trajectories cross

the plane of the target p is analogous to d in the earlier calculation

Using reciprocity particles emanating from a position on the target at radius

p with a velocity corresponding to S will cross the plane of the 1st ERA at

the axis For a source of radius R the line width is found by using the

arguments leading up to Equation 211 to be

R bull cos e S lt R cos e (217)491 ~ 491

For a spot size 2R == 1 rom (0039 in) the energy resolution due to a finite

source disk is

40

A (source) = 2[017R + 017R] (218)E p

~ (source) 013 for 2R = 1 mm (219)E p

At low primary energies for which the beam spot size is greater than 1 mm

the above broadening and resolution due to spot size are correspondingly larger

The line shape associated with a finite source disk is linearly

proportional to~ The functional dependence of source current on ~ which

essentially determines the line shape due to the finite source is not given

by Equation 29 Rather it can be obtained by assuming uniform emission over

the area of the source knowing that ~ and the radial position at the source

p are linearly related by Equation 216 and using the area relation

(220)

(221)

If the current from the source with velocity (1 + ~)v that passes the 1st ERA p

is designated JI(~) then

(222)

49lmiddotApJ I (~l) 0 2TT cos e ~ 1 (223)

From Equation 223 the line shape of the current due to finite source is seen

to be linearly related to ~

41

The overall resolution of the instrument can be approximated by the

sum of the two resolutions calculated above which is approximately 2

Experimentally the resolution of the spectrometer is measured as the full

width at half maximum (FWHM) of the elastic peak The bottom panel of Figure

28 shows the FWHM of the elastic peak as a function of the spectrometer pass

energy At 90 eV the experimental energy resolution is

bE FWEM 2 (224)Ep = ~ = 90 = 022

which is close to the theoretical calculations

The effective resolution of the spectrometer can be greatly increased

by retarding the beam using the three grids located between the target and

spherical analyzer This can be seen by repeating the calculation of Equation

224 using data from Figure 28 at a lower energy The measured effective

energy resolution of the spectrometer varies between 22 percent and 06

percent as the elastic peak is retarded by 10 percent to 90 percent of its

initial value Over this same range the intensity decreases almost 98 percent

Hence increased resolution is obtained at the expense of signal intensity

This is shown in the top panel of Figure 28 The solid curve in the top panel

is the transmission function of the spectrometer for a primary beam of 100 eV

The transmission function shows the fractional decrease in signal passed by

the spectrometer as a function of pass energy of the spectrometer The data

points were taken by retarding the 100 eV elastic peak between the grids until

it was passed by the spectrometer The transmission function is the ratio of

the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer at E to the peakpass

42

Figure 28 Top panel - Transmission function of spectrometer This function was obtained by retarding the 100 eV elastically scattered electron signal between the spectrometer grids and then measuring the ratio of the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer to the peak signal passed at Epass = E = 100 eV Bottom panel - Full width at half maX1mum of ~K~ elastically scattered electron signal passed by the spectrometer when the 100 eV signalis retarded using the grids to an energy E

pass

43

09

08

07

c006 U ()

E()05 c e 1-04

03

02

01

Epri =100eV

~ -Transmission of Spectrometer

Peak Intensity at Eposs Peak Intensity at Epass 100 eV

--Transmission for flEE Constant

() +shy

o gt-

20

10

Full Width at Half Maximum of Elastic Peak

100 eVEpri =

o~oo 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Spectrometer Pass Energy J Epass (eV) SP-1l22

0

44

signal passed at E = E i = 100 eV The dotted line in Figure 28 pass pr

indicates the transmission function for ~ = constant for a monochromatic

point source Deviations from the straight line are due 1) to the nonidea1

elastic peak (ie finite breadth) and spectrometer geometry 2) to field

penetration at the grids as a function of the retarding potential (which was

varied to obtain the graph) and 3) to the varying response of the electron

multiplier as a function of the voltage of the electrons incident on the

multiplier For the data presented here electrons were incident on the

multiplier with an energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer The

bottom panel of Figure 28 shows the experimental full width at half maximum

of the elastic peak as a function of pass energy (in this case pass energy =

(100 eV - retarding voltage))

The energy spectrometer has been operated successfully in both the

electron and ion pass modes over a pass energy range from 2 eV to 400 eV

The spectrometer is normally operated at a fixed pass energy and ideally

fixed energy resolution Energy sweeps are made by retardation (acceleration)

of electrons or ions between the first (screen grid) and third (tEED grid)

grids prior to entering the spherical analyzer section of the spectrometer

The third grid which was added primarily to eliminate charging problems

associated with the LEED screen (see Section 26) also improved the effective

resolution this improvement is due to decreased field penetration of the

applied retarding (accelerating) potential since the retarding (accelerating)

can be done over a 50 percent longer distance In addition the third grid is

made of smaller mesh which also reduces field penetration

45

The spectrometer is supported vertically from the electrical feedshy

through turret as shown in Figure 29 This assembly attaches at the top of

the main vacuum chamber (see Figure 21) and can be removed completely wired

independent of other parts of the instrument

The electron multiplier is an EMI model 96434B detector with 17

BeCu venetial blind dynode stages

25 Spectrometer Electronics

Figure 210 shows a schematic diagram of the electronic circuitry

used for taking electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated

desorption and Auger electron spectroscopy measurements Some details for

example capacitors used to eliminate noise and some switches used to change

from one mode to another are not shown Only the most common biasing

arrangement used in this work will be discussed

In the electron pass mode (including Auger measurements) the LEED

grid LEED screen Herzog diaphrams driftspace and center electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer are grounded Energy sweeps of the spectrometer are made

by varying the retardation or acceleration voltage applied between the three

73grids A variable frequency variable height floating sawtooth generator

plus a variable dc offset bias are summed at the inverting input of a Kepco

OPS-2000 operational power supply the output of which biases the three grids

through a resistor chain When the output signal from the multiplier is being

detected using a phase sensitive detector a 3 kHz sinusoidal signal is also

fed into the summing junction VT the target bias with respect to the screen

grid is zero in the electron pass mode The spherical analyzer deflecting

46

Figure 29 Photograph showing support of spectrometer from electrical feedthrough turret

W(100) Crystal

lOOK

Vr=O-6V

Dec Mode

Ace Mode (E Il

VOFFS

VOFFS=O-6V

Ratemeter ~

INlOO

=

Drift Space

epUISion Electrode

i -----In

(Ion Mode Only)

Jshy-l

Hamner N-780A Ortec 410 Linear Amp

Pulse Count Mode

Synchronous Detection Mode

PAR PAR Type A HR-8 Preamp

47K To Recorder Y

SP-1126

Figure 210 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer electronics for operation in the electron pass and ion pass modes

48

electrodes and the repulsion electrode of the cylindrical analyzer are scaled

using a resistor chain powered by a second OPS-2000 operational amplifier power

supply The voltage scaling for these electrodes was determined from particle

trajectory calculations The voltage applied to the repulsion electrode using

this resistor chain can be varied using a potentiometer this adjustment can

in effect vary the resolution of the cylindrical analyzer The OPS-2000

supply also biases the outer electrodes of the analyzer deflection plates by

means of a separate resistor chain The inner electrodes of these deflection

plates are fixed at the potential of the analyzers Herzog diaphrams The

ripple voltage on the output of both operational power supplies is less than

20 meV at 100 eV

Electrons impinge on the first dynode of the multiplier with an

energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer plus a voltage equal to

(R (36MO + R raquoV where R is shown in Figure 210 and V is the voltagem m M m M

across the multiplier In the synchronous detection mode V was variedM

between 1100 V and 1700 V In the pulse counting mode the voltage was normally

set at 2800 V The output of the multiplier after being passed by an

isolation capacitor is either pulse counted with a ratemeter or is detected

using a PAR HR-8 phase sensitive detector The reference signal for the HR-8

is either 3 kHz when taking dN(E)dE distributions (see Section 324 and

2Appendix B) or Auger data or 6 kHz when taking d N(E)dE distributions

When the spectrometer is operated in the ion pass mode the polarity

of the biasing on the analyzer deflecting electrodes is switched In addition

the positive pole of the electron mUltiplier supply is grounded This biasing

arrangement causes the ions to impinge on the multiplier at an energy

49

E pass + VM

which was usually 3040 kV In the ion pass mode the spectromshy

eter is generally operated at E = 40 eV This requires an acceleration of pass

the ions between the screen and LEED grids since the initial ion energies are

between 0 eV and 10 eV In addition to accelerating between the grids the

ions were normally accelerated between the target and screen grid using VT

in order to facilitate interpretation of the data as discussed in Section

325

The electronic circuitry for operating the analyzer in the time-ofshy

flight mode is identical to that just described for the ~on pass mode except

a pulsed voltage is applied to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a

schematic of this arrangement Unlike continuous operation in this mode ions

can enter the analyzer only during the on pulse In the lower part of

Figure 211 the energy of an ion is shown as a function of its position in the

spectrometer with the pulse on and off

In the work function mode the target is fixed at ground potential

through a picoammeter Retardation of the incident current is accomplished by

driving the drift tube positive in voltage

26 LEED Display System

The low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system consists of a

phosphor-coated screen located at the entrance to the spherical analyzer and

othree grids The screen a 1096 stainless steel sector (of which approxishy

omatelya 98 sector is visible) was coated with a P-l phosphor The first

two grids are constructed of 50 mesh rhodium-coated stainless steel The

LEED screen and these two grids are operated as a standard two grid LEED

50

II

Vr V

Ion Trajectory

ACC

Linear Amp Preamp

To Oscilloscope Trace

VRG~+ To O~oopeP I If Trace and Time u se t Base Trigger Genera or -

(l)~ os

CIgt () o cC u (l) E t gt - C N a (l) (l) (u~CIgt (l) 0 ~ shy - c 0 c 0 0 ti (l) ac o c

()

f- (j) a (j)lt f-lt u ~----~~------~~ ~I

0 1--A I ----5----------------

ElON I

VACC

I (l) ()

5 Q

gt CIgt t c

~---J8w c o H

SP-I027

EPAS S + V L-____________________---- M

Figure 211 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer for operation in the time-of-f1ight mode

51

system with the retarding grid biased to pass only electrons elastically

scattered from the target and with the LEED screen accelerating voltage

normally set at 5000 V Slots cut through the screen allow electrons and

ions to pass into the spectrometer Initial operation of the instrument

indicated that charging of the LEED screen caused a significant perturbation

on electron trajectories below 100 eV The third grid a 100 mesh stainless

s tee 1 spherical sector is loca ted 0050 em in front of the LEED screen to

alleviate this problem

An aluminum-coated glass plate mirror located below the spectrometer

reflects the LEED screen through a 6Lch indo in the chamber wall (see

Figure 21) LEED spot intensities are measured through this window using a

Gamma Scientific Model 2000 telephotometer

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly

The crystal manipulator assembly is shown schematically in Figure

212 and a photograph is given in Figure 213 The assembly is designed to

provide thermal and electrical control of the target while allowing the

target face to be rotatable between the gas dosing port the LEED screenshy

energy spectrometer position and the quadrupole mass spectrometer This

rotation is indicated in Figure 214 The manipulator assembly is composed

of a commercial Physical Electronics specimen manipulator a long shaft which

supports the rotary electrical connections a liquid nitrogen dewaI and

aluminum foil strap to provide target cooling and a target mounting assembly

The long shaft of the manipulator assembly is constructed of

different materials as follows A1 0 for electrical isolation (Figure 2122 3

52

Figure 212 Schematic diagram of the target manipulation and thermal control system showing (1) kovar-glass-kovar dewar insulation (2) Miniconflat flanges (3) Physical Electronics Industries specimen manipulator Model 10-501M mounted on 8 inch od Conflat flange (4) six 5 kV - 150 A electrical feedthroughs (5) clamp assembly (6) A1 03 rod (7) molybdenum spring2(8) stainless steel electr1cal connectors (9) electrical connecshytion (1 shown) (10) A1203 spacers (11) Pyrex plates (12) molybshydenum (13) 001 wall stainless tube (14) Pyrex tubes (15) tantalum rods (16) copper rod (17) vacuum chamber wall (18) liquid riitrogen dewar (19) 001 wall stainless tube (20) copper radiation shield (21) strap-to-dewar clamp (22) crystal support (23) 12 pole heater (24) strap-to-copper rod clamp (25) aluminum foil strap (26) pancake heater supp~rt~ (27) thermocouple (28) crystal (29) pancake heater (30) tanta~ lum section (31) molybdenum section (32) molybdenum-to-copper rod clamp assembly

53

Jl ~

Figure 213 Photograph of crystal manipulator The retarding field analyzer used to characterize the primary electron beam is shown mounted on the manipulator in place of the tungsten crystal mounting assembly

55

Magnetic Shielding

Tungsten Crystal

Energy Spectrometer and LEED Gas Dosing Optics Aperture

To Gas Bottle

Line -of-Sight Quadrupole Mass Crystal Holder Spectrometer and Manipulator

SP-1072

Figure 214 Schematic of the experimental chamber of the apparatus (see Section 22 for a discussion of the experimental chamber) Rotation of the crystal is indicated by the dotted line

56

no 6) molybdenum rod (no 12) 304 stainless steel tubing for thermal

isolation (no 13) and copper rod (no 16) Six electrical leads separated

by glass discs (no 11) wind around the shaft ~his configuration allows for

rotary motion of the shaft while still providing electrical control at the

targetJ The electrical leads then enter glass tubing parallel to the shaft

and end up at the target mounting assembly For clarity only one of these

leads is shown in Figure 212

An aluminum foil strap (no 25) made of 150 pieces of 254 cm x ~254

em x 00025 cm foil connects the liquid nitorgen reservoir to the copper rod

end of the manipulator shaft This provides conduction cooling to the target

A copper radiation shield (no 20) is constructed around the strap This

cooling system is sufficient to cool the target from flash temperatures to

approximately -1500

C in 5 minutes

The tungsten single crystal target is supported 095 cm above a

tantalum and molybdenum right angle mount (nos 30 31) on one 0038 cm

diameter tungsten wire The wire was spot-welded to the back face of the

tungsten disc prior to its final electropolishing The target is heated by

electron bombardment of its back face from a tungsten pancake heater (no 29)

The target can also be heated by conduction through its support wire using a

25 watt 12 pole 25L6 RCA heater which is mounted inside the tantalum part

of the right angle mount as shown dotted in Figure 212 (no 23) Using this

heater the target temperature can be varied between -20oC and -150

0 C Tungsten

and tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple leads 0076 cm in diameter are spot-

welded to the side of the target The thermocouple wires are each supported

by being fed along the axis of a tungsten wire helix (not shown in Figure

57

212) The helices are made of 025 cm diameter wire and are spot-welded to

supports near the center of the molybdenum part of the right angle mount

Calibration of the thermocouple was made out of the vacuum chamber using a

copper-constantan reference thermocouple The calibration procedure is

described in Appendix A and the calibration is given in Figure A1

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures

The experimental sample is a single crystal tungsten disc cut from

a (100) oriented tungsten rod using a diamond impregnated stainless wire in a

string saw The tungsten rod supplied by Metals Research Ltd was taken

from the purest 75 cm of a triply zone refined 25 cm length

Both the front and back surfaces of the disc were polished using in

succession 15 micron 3 micron and 1 micron alumina After being mechanishy

cally polished the crystal was e1ectropo1ished using a 1 NaOH solution The

final dimensions of the target disc are 0033 cm (013 in) thick and approxishy

mate1y 080 cm in diameter

After the final e1ectropo1ish the orientation of both the front and

back surfaces was checked using an x-ray diffractometer and was determined to

be within 0100 of the (100) face A back reflection Laue picture of the final

surface showed sharp well-defined beams indicating a high degree of crystalshy

line order

The target was o 74cleaned initially by heating to at least 2200 K in

a -61x10 Torr oxygen atmosphere for 9 hr to remove carbon The choice of

temperature and time were somewhat arbitrary as there is considerable debate

in the literature as to the proper method for cleaning tungsten for surface

58

research 74 A standard method7 1823 has been to heat the target to some

temperature above 11000 K (commonly above 20000 K) in an oxygen environment for

times varying up to 200 hr or more This process is generally followed by a

high temperature degassing in ultrahigh vacuum However there is evidence

othat if the temperature is held above 2000 K bulk carbon will not diffuse to

75 74the surface The possibility of thermal etching must also be considered

For the tungsten used in this research the amount of contamination

on the surface was determined using Auger spectroscopy Figure 215 is an

Auger spectrum taken from a dirty surface showing the Auger peaks resolved in

our system Carbon oxygen and tungsten peaks are seen clearly Also shown

76in Figure 215 are theoretical Auger transition energies for C 0 and W

with the relative theoretical strengths of the transitions indicated by the

normalized height of the lines In Figure 216 are shown Auger spectra taken

after different crystal treatments or under different experimental conditions

Curve a shows the spectrum taken after saturating the surface with CO Note

the carbon and oxygen peaks There is no measurable carbon peak after a

flash as seen in curve b Structure does remain between 475 eV and 525 eV

It is doubtful that this structure is a result of oxygen contamination since

there are normally three oxygen Auger peaks with the 490 eV oxygen peak

stronger than the 475 eV oxygen peak in this spectrum no 490 eV peak is

observed In order to reduce any oxygen contamination the target was heat

0 treated to 2200 K in a hydrogen atmosphere of 5x10- 7 Torr for 4 minutes 74

The structure above 475 eV is seen to remain unchanged as seen in curve c

This is a further indication that this structure is not oxygen Curve d shows

that sitting in a 400 eV 4 ~ primary beam close to typical operating

59

Carbon Oxygen

o 100

dN(E) dE

200 300 400 500 600 Electron Energy (eV) SP-U44

Figure 215 Auger electron spectrums obtained at different instrument sensitivities from dirty tungsten crystal Also shown in upper part of figure are theoretical Auger transitions for tungsten carbon and oxygen calculated by Coghlan and C1ausing76 Heights of the lines represent relative theoshyretical strengths of the transitions

60

(a) CO Monolayer

~5Ab) Heate~toCleon x25

d ~5dN(E) dE (e) Heat Treated

x25 in H2

_~5 ~ (d) 400V4fLA

x25 Primary Beam for

25~

d x5

(e) 1700V 211-A Primary Beam for 10 Min

200 300 400 500 Electron Energy (eV) SP-1l45

Figure 216 Comparison of Auger electron spectrums taken over the energy range 200 eV to 550 eV under different experimental condition

61

conditions for 25 minutes causes only a slight change in the slope of the

curve at the energy at which the carbon peak occurs (Note that curve d was

taken with a primary beam of 1700 eV after the crystal had been sitting in

the lower energy beam for 25 minutes) The absence of the carbon peak in curve

d means that the crystal surface is not contaminated from the gun while taking

measurements After bombarding the target for 10 minutes with a primary beam

of 1700 eV and 21 ~ typical Auger spectroscopy beam conditions a carbon

peak is observed as shown in curve e Using the peak to peak height of the

272 ~V carbon peak obtained near CO saturation as an indication of carbon

monolayer coverage the electron gun in the Auger mode is seen to deposit

approximately 013 monolayer of carbon in 10 minutes

From the above results it is concluded that the tungsten surface

could be flashed clean and that no carbon or oxygen contamination is deposited

during most experimental measurements Some carbon is deposited when operating

in the Auger mode Two unexpected small peaks are observed between 475 eV

and 525 eV Identification of the source of this weak structure could not be

made with certainty although two possible causes are worth noting The

unexpected structure could be tungsten Auger transitions Theoretically

several relatively strong tungsten peaks have been predicted at 477 eV and

486 eV and also between 510 eV and 520 eV However no observations of

tungsten transitions in this energy range have been reported in the experimenshy

tal literature A second possible source of this structure mighL be chromium

There is considerable chromium in the spectrometers stainless steel parts and

chromium Auger peaks occur at 489 eV and 529 eV However if it is assumed

that Auger spectroscopy is sensitive to one percent of a monolayer it would

62

13 2require surface coverages of 10 chromium atomscm or more to yield these

peaks It is extremely unlikely that either 1) a concentration of chromium

this large could diffuse to the tungsten surface from the stainless parts or

2) enough chromium could be sputtered (at the ambient pressure) into the backshy

ground from the stainless parts and subsequently adsorb onto the surface A

spark vaporization mass spectroscopy analysis of a tungsten sample cut from

the same boule as the tungsten used in this research revealed no chromium

thus eliminating the possibility of a bulk chromium concentration in the

crystal Hence although the weak structure corresponds to some degree to

chromium Auger lines it is believed that the crystal is not contaminated with

this element In an Auger spectrum taken between 500 eV and 900 eV (not shown)

some additional very weak structure was seen but none of it could be

attributed to any specific element

o 77In this research the crystal was always flashed to gt 2200 K for 30

seconds prior to experimentation Any reference to a clean tungsten surface

means that this procedure has been followed

The crystal surface exhibited what appeared to be furrows which

increased in density during the course of the research Because the coolest

part of the crystal during a flash that region next to the tungsten wire

support remained visibly polished and flat it is believed that the uneven

appearance was temperature related

29 Gas Handling System

The gas handling system used to obtain adsorption overlayers is

shown in Figure 217 Research grade hydrogen (impurity level less than 2

To Quadrupole Moss Spectrometer

Alternate Gas Source Control Valve

Thermocouple Gouge

Plenum

~-----Viewing Port

Jet Position Adjustment

Ion Gouge

Cryosorb Pump

0 t)

S-1l28

Figure 217 Schematic drawing of gas handling system

64

ppm) is admitted from a glass flash into a pyrex manifold and stainless steel

reservoir Reservoir pressure was kept near 50 microns as read using a

thermocouple gauge From the reservoir hydrogen is admitted into the vacuum

system through a 126 cm diameter tube by opening valve A Figure 217 or is

admitted as a gas jet by opening valve B The jet is formed as hydrogen

effuses through a small orifice at the end of a 063 cm dia tube78J~9 Leaking

hydrogen through the 126 em diameter tube increases the background and is used

when hydrogen is to be adsorbed from the background The jet can be used

with the target rotated in front of the gas dosing port for rapid over layer

adsorption with a low hydrogen background pressure The gas jet is designed

so that only that fraction of the effusing gas which will strike the target is

allowed to pass through an aperture in a skimmer The rest of the gas jet is

reflected back from the skimmer and out of the experimental chamber When the

target is rotated up to face the spectrometer the gas jet if left on passes

out of the experimental chamber through holes in the opposite side of the

magnetic shielding

The gas manifold and reservoir can be pumped down to less than 1

micron using a liquid nitrogen cryosorb pump

210 Mass Spectrometer

A quadrupole mass spectrometer Varian Residual Gas Analyzer Model

974-0003 is mounted on a vacuum chamber port opposite the gas jet port In

this research it was used for vacuum chamber leak testing and determination of

the components of the background pressure

65

CHAPrER 3

EXPERIMENTAL PFGCEDURE AND RESULTS

31 Introduction

The experimental data taken on the hydrogen-W(lOO) system are

presented in this chapter The apparatus used in obtaining the data has been

discussed previously in Chapter 2 A further explanation of experimental

procedures used in measuring parameters follows in Section 32 The experishy

mental results are presented in the remaining sections of this chapter A

general discussion of the data is given in Chapter 4 and a summary of the

research is given in Chapter 5

32 Experimental Procedure

321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements

Contact potential measurements in this case the difference between

the work functions of the target and of the cathode in the electron gun are

43 44measured using a retarding potential techn1que The primary or incident

electron beam current is retarded between the electron gun drift tube and the

target The measured current to the target goes to zero at a retarding voltage

VR

given by

V = (rn + V - rn ) + E (31)R Tcath sc TW pr1

where Cfgtcath is the cathode work function CfgtW is the W(lOO) work function Vsc

is the potential due to space charge immediately in front of the cathode and

E is the applied potential between the cathode and the drift tube Changespr1

66

in the work function of the target ~ are calculated by measuring changes

in VR

LlVR

From Equation 3la change in V is found to equalR

(32)

with the assumptions of constant rn h V and E The assumptions usedTcat sc pr1

are reasonable since the cathode in thermal equilibrium and since it

is exposed to very small changes in the ambient during the measurements The

applied potential E i can be maintained constant pr

A typical retarding potential curve is given in Figure 31 The

electron current to the target the ordinate in this figure is given by

(33)

where I i is the current incident on the target from the electron gun and pr

I (E N) the secondary current represents the electron current leavingsec pri

the target surface This secondary current is a function of both primary

47electron energy and hydrogen coverage Because of the dependence on coverage

the intensity and line shape of the retarding potential curves change somewhat

upon adsorption

In determining LlVR

or equivalently the target work function change

a retarding potential curve taken from the clean tungsten surface and a curve

taken after hydrogen adsorption are normalized at a position on the curve where

the target current begins to falloff sharply (position A in Figure 31) The

work function change is then measured as the voltage difference between the

two curves at half the normalized height

Changes in the work function of 001 eV can be resolved The

10

(J)

c I

I

AE lt( l-~ c Q)

-

05 U ~ I I ~ Q) 0) shy0 I-

omiddot ~ middot 10 20 30

Cathode Potential-Target Potential (volts)

SP-1142 Figure 31 Retarding potential curve showing the current to the target as

a function of the difference in applied potential between the electron gun cathode and the target The curve is shifted in energy with changes in hydrogen coverage due to changes in the target work function 6~ 6~ is measured as the difference between two retarding curves at the height A2

68

measurement was sensitive to target rotation position because of the retarding

field in the target region However with the target positioning stop used

the retarding potential curve could be repeated with an accuracy better than

002 eV after rotating the target Since the work function change is the

difference between two such curves the error in the measurement is ~004 eV

Changes in hydrogen coverage are monitored by changes in the work

function of the tungst~n tlurface No experimental attempts have been made

to calibrate the measureci ork fUllction change to an absolute change in the

coverage of atomssurface area Such a calibration requires an accurate measure

of system pumping speed or dosing flux However as discussed in Section 34

such a calibration can be made using results from the literature

322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current Measurements

The total electron beam current incident on the target Ipri is

measured by biasing the target at a potential of +45 volts with respect to the

surrounding experimental chamber Tests indicated that the current measured

in this manner is within 3 percent of the total current leaving the electron

gun which is also I The current leaving the gun is measured by summingprJ

electron currents to the target grids LEED screen magnetic shielding

analyzer Herzog diaphrams and front shield plate This current sum measureshy

ment of I was more difficult to make experimentally than biasing the targetprJ

at +45 volts

The primary electron energy E refers to the energy of theprJ

incident electrons referenced to the vacuum level Themiddotpritnarymiddot energy is

measured between the cathode and drift tube of the electron gun A contact

potential correction between the guns cathode and the target of between

69

-17 eV and -22 eV has been applied to the measured primary energy given in

the data This correction is found by using the measured cut off potential VR

and Equation 31 The spread in the correction is a result of th~ change in

space charge and hence change in V which occurs when the potential gradientsc

at the cathode is altered by changing the voltage on the control grid The

control grid voltage determines the potential fields in the region of the

cathode surface and hence affects the emitted current and space charge

323 Target Temperature Measurement

Prior to taking any data the target was cleaned by rapid electron

bombardment heating (flashing) at gt 22000 K for 30 seconds Figure 32 shows

the temperature of the target versus time from end of flash with and without

liquid nitrogen in the dewar Residual heat in the crystal supports due

to previous flashes does affect the temperature versus time curves somewhat

The higher temperature data were normally taken starting 3 to 4 minutes after

flashing at a target temperature of 600 C + lSoC Data taken under these

conditions are sometimes referred to as room terr~erature or higher temperature

data Low temperature data were taken starting 4 to S minutes after flaShing

when the target temperature was less than -l45 0 C

324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements

The electron scattering data consists of the electron signal emanating

from the target in the acceptance solid angle of the spectrometer following

impingement of the primary electron beam on the target An energy distribution

of these electrons is taken by fixing the pass energy of the spectrometer at

E and sweeping a retarding or accelerating voltage between the screen gridpass

and LEED grid as described previously in Section 25 The output current of

70 300~----~----~----~--------------------

200

-u 1000

-~ J

e ltlgt 0 E ~ -ltlgt ~ 0 ~

Liquid Nitrogen in Dewar

-100

-2000~----~----~----~----~----~----~61 2 345

Time from Flash (min) SP-ll40

Figure 32 Temperature of the tungsten crystal versus time elapsed since a crystal flash The upper curve represents the temperature versus time relation when there is no crystal cooling The lower curve shows this relation when there is liquid nitrogen in the cooling dewar

71

the electron multiplier N(E) is pulse counted or as discussed below Cld in

Appendix B synchronously detected

N(E) is proportional to the electron current originating at the

target with energy between E and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance

solid angle of the analyzer This distribution consists of rapidly varying

true secondary and characteristic loss structure interpretable in terms of

transitions and collective oscillations in the target plus a smoothly varying

background In order to separate the structure from the background the energy

distribution is electronically differentiated using a technique proposed by

67Harrls As shown in Appendix B a signal proportional to the first or to

the second derivative of N(E) is obtained by synchronously detecting the

appropriate harmonic of the output of the electron multiplier The relation

between the electron signal N(E) and the synchronously detected signal can

be seen from Equations B4 through B9 In these equations it is assumed a

peaked structure G(E) being inv~stigatedcan be represented by a Gaussian

centered at E with standard deviation o The detected first harmonic of o

N(E) has structure which has a peak-to-peak height proportional to G(E plusmn a)o

The detected second harmonic of N(E) has structure at E proportional to o

G(E ) a2 In addition there is t contribution to the detected signal from o

the background Since the background which can be represented by a polynomial

in energy is slowly varying the higher order terms which remairr in the difshy

feren tiated signals are small

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as

is commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in taking electron

scattering characteristic energy loss measurements

72

325 Ion Measurements

g+ ions desorbed from the crystal following electron impact could

be detected by the spectrometer when operated in the ion pass mode It was

found convenient to operate the instrument at a pass energy of 40 eV in this

mode operation at a lower pass energy while increasing the resolution

decreased the already weak signal intensity Since the ions have between 0 eV

and 10 eV energy when desorbed acceleration between the target and spectromshy

eter was necessary An accelerating voltage V (the output of an OPS-2000 acc

power supply) was applied between the screen grid and the entrance to the

spectrometer In addition a second accelerating voltage V was appliedT

between the target and the screen grid This latter voltage was needed in

order to energetically separate the ion signal which originated at the target

from a background signal produced by 1) ions electron desorbed from the screen

grid andor other surfaces in the experimental chamber and 2) ionization of

the background The ions that passed into the spectrometer were accelerated

into the first dynode of the electron multiplier The output pulses of the

multiplier were amplified and then counted with a ratemeter

Prior to taking ion data the target was flashed and allowed to

cool to the experimental temperature It was then exposed to hydrogen with

the hydrogen coverage being monitored using work function measurements Ion

energy distributions were taken by fixing E and V and sweeping the pass T

accelerating voltage V Desorption curve measurements which are a measureshyacc

ment of the decrease of the ion signal in the electron beam were taken by

fixing V V and E and monitoring the ion signal as a function of acc T pass

time

73

The kinetic energy of the detected ions is equal to the spectrometer

pass energy E minus the acceleration of the ions between the target and pass

spectrometer V + VT

plus a contact potential correction term due to the acc

difference in work functions of the clean target and surfaces of the spectromshy

eter The pass and acceleration energies are chosen for each experiment The

contact potential difference between the tungsten target and the rhodium

coated stainless steel surfaces of the spectrometer is less than 015 eV

This was determined using a retarding potential measurement between the

target and screen grid Dosing the target with hydrogen did not change the

work function of the grid Hence it is assumed that 015 eV can be used for

the correction at all target hydrogen coverages Since this correction is

on the order of the error in the measurement it has not been made in the

data

The analyzer is operated in a time-of-f1ight mode by applying a

pulsed voltage to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a schematic of this

arrangement Incident ions can enter the analyzer only during the pulse By

measuring the path length d = ab (see Figure 211) from the retarding grid

to the electron multiplier knowing the pass energy E of the spectromshypass

eter and experimentally measuring the time for the entering species to

traverse the distance d the mass of singly-charged ions passing through the

analyzer can be calculated using the following formulation of the distance

equals velocity times time equation

m _ dxrt J 2 (34)La J2E(X~

74

The flight time is measured by making a trace on an oscilloscope of both the

pulse applied to the retarding grid that allows ions to pass into the specshy

trometer and also the output pulses of the linear amplifier The flight time

t is the time difference between these two signals minus the transmission

time of the pulse from the first dynode of the electron multiplier to the

oscilloscope This transmission time is estimated to be several hundred

nanoseconds

The data taken in this research is presented in the remaining

sections of this chapter

33 Ion Species Identification

The ion species desorbed from the tungsten crystal by electron imshy

pact are identified using a time-of-flight technique as described above For

these measurements the spectrometer was set to pass 40 eV ions A total

acceleration voltage V + V of 370 eV was applied between the crystalT acc

and the entrance to the spectrometer Hence the energy of the ions origishy

nating at the crystal surface and passed by the spectrometer was 3 eV (3 eV

corresponds to the maximum in intensity of the ion energy dist~ibution given

in Section 35) Figure 33 shows an oscilloscope trace obtained when opershy

ating in the time-of-flight mode The trace was taken by applying a 22 ~sec

4pulse to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl0 pulsessec) This is the

large pulse at the left in the figure Several output pulses from the linear

amplifier can be seen approximately 4~sec after the retarding grid pulse

These are pulses that have been produced by the electron multiplier following

ion impingement onto the first dynode Taking into consideration the transshy

mission time the experimental flight time is 37~sec Using Equation 34

75

ill22fLsec Window Amplifier Output Pulses

o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Time (fLsec)

Time of Flight (H+) =J2~m ES 40 eV d=029 m

~ 33 fLsec

Figure 33 Oscilloscope trace showing the pulses observed when operating the spectrometer in the time-of-flight mode The 22 ~sec trace at the left is the analyzer on pulse applied to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl04 pulsessec) During this pulse ions pass into the spectrometer Several output pulses from the linear amplifier resulting from ions striking the electron multiplier can be seen delayed by their flight time in the spectrometer and the pulse transmission time from the multiplier to the oscilloscope The output pulses have been enhanced for reproduction purposes

76

with the analyzer pass energy of 40 eV a path length of 029 m and a time of

37 ~sec the mass of the desorbed ions is calculated to be 14 amu The unshy

certainty in this calculation is estimated to be~05 amu Sources of error

include the estimate of transmission time and the uncertainty in the time difshy

ference read from the oscilloscope trace In adqition over part of the path

length (the region between the retarding and LEED grids and in the cylindrical

analyzer) the ions have less than 40 eV energy Hence from this calculation

alone it is not possible to identify the ions as H+ However in experiments

in which the length of the retarding grid pulse was shortened to~ 1 ~ sec

flight times that differed by gt1 ~sec could be distinguished on the oscilloshy

scope The calculated flight time for ions of mass one is 3 3 ~ sec and for

ions of mass two is 46 ~sec or 13 ~sec longer Thus H+ could be resolved

from Hiions The ions detected in the time-of-flight experiment of Figure 33

+have been identified as H For certain spectrometer biasing conditions

+pulses appear on the oscilloscope 1 5 ~ sec later than the H pulses The ions

causing these pulses have been identified as having mass two

When oxygen is adsorbed on the surface the signal pulses on the osshy

cilloscope occur approximately 135 ~sec after the retarding grid pulse This

is in good agreement with the expected flight time for 0+ ions

+In addition to the H ions observed after adsorbing hydrogen from the

jet H+ ions were unexpectedly desorbed by electron impact from the undosed

tungsten surface upon cooling the crystal to below OoC Possible sources for

the hydrogen desorbed under these conditions are discussed in Chapter 4

If E is set at 40 eV set at 0 eV and V varied above pass VT acc

40 eV no ions originating at the crystal surface can be passed by the spectromshy

77

eter However with these biasing conditions both H+ and H + ions are obshy2

served This ion signal has to originate at the walls of the experimental

+ +chamber from a ESD process andor from the ambient Both the H and H2 sigshy

nals increased when H2 was admitted into the background from the gas handling

system an indication that at least part of the signal origtnates from ionizashy

tion in the background It is not easy to determine the intensity of the

+ +H or H2 desorbed from the chamber walls However it is possible to show that

ionization of ambient H2 could be a serious noise problem The cross section

+ -17 2for electron impact ionization of H2 to H2 is 48xlO cm and of H2

22xlO-17 cm2 for 400 eV electrons 80 An electron current of lxlO-6 A at 400

eV would produce about llxlO3 H2+ ions per cm3-Torr-sec and 5xl012 H + ions

3 per cm -Torr-sec Thus it is reasonable to assume that at the background presshy

sures here a sizable ion Signal is produced although most of it undoubtedly

is not detected In the ESD eXperiments performed here it was desired to

detect only ions produced at the surface of the crystal It has been possible

to bias the spectrometer such that this is the case Almost none of the extra

signal has the correct energy to pass through the spectrometer when V isT

held several volts positive and when V is kept less than E - V bull acc pass T

34 Work Function Results

Work function changes resulting from hydrogen adsorption have been

monitored as a measure of hydrogen coverage Figure 34 shows the tungsten

surface work function change as a function of exposure to hydrogen The crysshy

tal was at 600 C for this experiment To obtain this data the crystal was roshy

tated into the gas jet dosed for a measured time and then rotated back to a

position in front of the spectrometer where a retarding potential curve was

78

Figure 34 Change in work function 6~ of a room temperature tungsten (100) surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption 6~ is plotted versus exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen For comparison the results reported by Madey820 are also shown Exposures for the data taken here have been determined by normalizing the measured adsorption time to Madeys absolute exposure at a work function change ~ of 041 eV

------o 0 Withrow

10

08

gt06 OJ--amplt]04

02

0~013

Madey and Yates

Max bcp=~~

Data Normalized at bcp =041

0

10M 101610~ Exposure (Moleculescm2) SP-1121

80

S o Max ltltgt=09S-~ 6 A Max ltltgt =092 --eshy

lt34 o Adsorption at 60degC A Adsorption at -150degC

2

20 40 60 SO 100 120 140 160 ISO 200 220 Exposure (arbitrary units)

SP-1214

Figure 35 Comparison of work function changes at 600 C and -lSOoC resulting from hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten (100)

OlO~i--~----~--~----~--~----~--~--~~--~~

- W(lOO)gt (J) 008

- shy

-u 006 o o

00 ~ 004 --Sshy

I 002-I shy--S- 0

-200 -100 o 100 200 Temperature (OC) SP-U56

Figure 36 Change in the work function of the undosed tungsten (100) surface versus crystal temperature for the temperature range -150oC to 220oC The ordinate in the graph represents the work function at temperature T measured with respect to the work function at 220degC The data was obtained in three_separate experimental runs indicated by different symbols as discussed in the text

82

taken This procedure was followed repeatedly without closing the jet in order

to assure a constant hydrogen flux (molecm2-sec) from the jet onto the

-8crystal face An incident primary electron current oflt2xlO A at a primary

energy of 100 eV was used The saturation coverage work function change

8tCP ) is 098 + 004 eV For comparison results obtained by Madey and Yates

max

for the work function change resulting from adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO)

are given in Figure 34 Absolute exposures for the data taken here have been

obtained by normalizing the dose time to Madey and Yates exposure at a work

function change of 041 eV Using this normalization good agreement beshy

tween their results and the data obtained here is found

The work function change of the tungsten surface as a function of hyshy

drogen exposure was also measured when the crystal was at -150degC The data are

given in Figure 35 The procedure used in obtaining the 600 c data was fallowed

in taking these data The maximum work function change at this lowtemperature

is 092 + 004 eV

The dependence of the work function on crystal temperature is shown

in Figure 36 The work function is seen to decrease 005 eV as the temperashy

ture is raised from -lSOoC to 220degC The data in this figure were obtained in a

series of retarding potential curve measurements taken at different crystal

temperatures The temperature was varied by radiation heating the ~rystal on

its back face using the pancake heater It was found impossible to take decent

retarding potential curves when the crystal was heated more than about ISOoC

above its initial temperature As the current through the pancake heater was

increased electron emission from this heater also increased This emission

current interfered with the retarding potential measurement when it became a

83

fraction of the incident current The three different symbols in Figure 36

represent data taken when the initial temperature prior to heating was -150oC

work function change has been reported Assuming this result and using the

-1350 C and 50oC The change in work function with temperature was reversible

In this research no attempts have been made to measure absolute covshy

erages Coverages are defined in terms of ~ the measured work function

change As discussed in Section 126 a linear relation between coverage and

8

room temperature data taken here cover~ge and work function can be described

by the expression

e = 102 ~ (35)

where ~ is measured in eVe e represents coverage in fraction of a mon6laye~

15 2 8 A monolayer is assumed to be 2xlO H atomscm Estimates of coverage in this

work will be made by measuring work function changes and using Equation 35

However it should be noted that the data will be presented in terms of the

measured quantity~ and therefore are not dependent on any assumptions

made relating coverage and work function

35 H+ Ion DesoEPtion Measurements

The electron stimulated desorption of H+ ions from the W(lOO) surface

has been studi~d under different experimental conditions Detection of the

ion signal has been discussed in Section 325 The results follow below

351 H+ Ion Energy Distribution

Ions desorbed from a surface by electron impact have a characteristic

distribution in energy This distribution is dependent on the adsorption states

from which the ions originate In the simple models used to describe this

phenomena changes in the observed energy distribution except some intensity

84

changes result from changes in the adsorption states Hence this measurement

can be used to characterize the states from which ions are desorbed A theore~

ieal discussion of the ion energy distribution is given in Appendix C

Figure 37 shows the energy distribution of H+ ions electron desorbed

-6from W(IOO) using a primary beam current of IxlO A at an energy of 400 eV

This current was sufficiently low such that the energy distribution was obtained

without desorbing the hydrogen coverage to any extent The choice of 400 eV for

the primary energy was to some extent arbitrary although it was found that

below 400 eV the ion signal was weaker and the measurements required more time

to take To obtain the data the crystal was flashed and then allowed to cool

several minutes to 60oC It was then dosed with hydrogen from the jet until a

work function change of 018 eV corresponding to a substantial coverage in the

~2 state was measured The distribution was obtained by scanning V while acc

holding V at 4 volts The distribution has an intensity maximum at 3 + 05 eVT

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV No correction to the energy scale

has been made for the target-spectrometer contact potential difference since

this amounts to only 015 eV which is smaller than the accuracy in the meashy

s~remertt A small part of the detected ion signal which did not originate at

the crystal surface has been subtracted out The amount of this contribution

was determined by monitoring the ion signal from the flashed undosed surface

This extra signal amounted to no more than 10 percent of the total signal and

was entirely on the low side of the energy distribution

+For comparison the energy distributions of H ions produced by elecshy

tron impact of gas phase hydrogen81 and hydrogen-covered polycrystalline tungshy

82sten are included in Figure 37 All three curves have been normalized to

the same peak intensity The three curves have characteristically different

85

Figure 37 Energy distribution of H+ ions from a tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen Hydrogen coverage for this measurement corresponds to a work function change of 018 eV (approximately 019 monolaYS2) F~r comparison the energy distribution reported by Nishijima of H ions des orbed from hydrogen covered polyshycrystalline tungsten is given ASIo shown is an ion energy distribution obtained by Hagstrum from gas phase hydrogen The three distributions have been normalized at their peak intensities

-Ugt-

Q)

gtshyc o

H

+ r

86

H+ Ion Energy Distribution

- Withrow H2 W(lOO) -- Nishijima H2 I W (polycrystol) _- HagstrumH2 gas

1 J

ii ~ I I iiI ~ I

iii middot VI 1

I I bull

o 2 468

H+ Ion Energy (eV)

87

distributions in energy

Energy distributiol1s of H+ ions taken at different hydrogen coverages

are shown in Figure 38 Experimental conditions for these measurements were

the same as used to obtain the previous figure There is no change in peak

position or line shape as a function of coverage except for heavy dosings

where the distribution appears to be slightly broader The maximum intensity

is a function of coverage as discussed below

Figure 39 shows a series of ion energy distributions taken after

adsorption from the jet with the target temperature approximately -150o

C For

these data the target was flashed and allowed to cool 5 minutes before

adsorption All other experimental conditions were identical to the correshy

sponding 600

C data The distributions peak at 3 eV (except at high coverage

where the peak appears to be slightly higher) and have full widths at half

maxima of 26 eV identical to the results found for 600 C adsorption The

high energy tail of these low temperature distributions appears to be somewhat

wider than the corresponding higher temperature data however

After flashing the target to 22000 K and allowing it to cool five

ominutes to a temperature of lt-145 C hydrogen ions can be detected without

dosing the surface from the jet An energy distribution for this signal is

shown in Figure 310 A time-of-flight measurement confirmed that the observed

signal is indeed H+ ions The energy distribution peaks at 25 05 eVvith a

full width at half maximum of 58 eV The peak intensity of the ion signal

obtained without dosing depends on the previous history of the sample and on

the experimental parameters as discussed in Section 35~ This intensity

change is indicated by arrows in Figure 310 For this measurement the

88

H+ from H2 W (100) T=600C

Zero Levels

fI)

cshy s gt

~

c-0 ~

0 ~ --0

CIgt

gt-shyc 0

1-1

+J

o 2 4 6

6cent= OSSeV

6cent=06geV

6cent=045eV

6cent=0lSeV

Acent=OlOeV

Acent=003eV

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1l96

Figure 38 Comparison of energy distributions of g+ ions desorbed from a 600 c tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

89

-ffl middotcshy

l

gtshy 0 shy

0 0-0 ltlgt

gt= C 0

H

+I

H+ from H2 W(100) T =-150degC

Zero Levels

Dcp=067 eV

Dcp= 043eV

---_Dcp=Olle~

___

Dcp=017eV

D_cp=004eV

o 246 H+lon Energy (eV)

SP-1197

Figure 39 Comparison of energy distributions of H+ ions desorbed from a low temperature (-lSOOC) tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

90

--(J) H+ from Undosed W(lOO)

T=l50degC

H+ from H2 Dosed W

ot 60degC

-0

-Q)

~l ~ + I O~~~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~ o 2 4 6

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1202

Figure 310 Energy distribution obtained from a flashed but undo sed tungsten (100) surface which has been cooled to -150oC For comparison the energy distribution of a+ ions from the tungsten (100) surface after dosing with hydrogen is shown by the dashed line The two distributions are normalized at their maximum intensities The intensity of the ion signal from the undosed surface changes as a function of sample history as discussed in the text This is indicated by the arrow

I

91

primary energy was 400 eVe A relatively low incident electron current

of lxlO-7 A was used so that the coverage in the surface state being probed

would not be strongly depleted during the measurement This state has a high

desorption cross section as calculated in Chapter 4 and hence depletion is

a possibility It should be noted that the same energy distribution is obshy

tained from the low temperature state using a beam current of 2xlO-6 A The

latter high current measurement reflects the distribution in energy of H+ ions

desorbed from the fast state when its coverage is in equilibriumll as disshy

cussed in Section 352

The intensity of the ion signal desorbed from the surface at both

60 0 C and -1500 C is strongly coverage dependent In Figure 311 is plotted the

intensity of the 3 eV H+ ion signal as a function of work function change upon

adsorption of hydrogen The signals from the 60 0 C and -lSOoC surfaces have

maximum intensities at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV respecshy

tively This difference indicates that adsorption at the low temperature

differs somewhat from that at 600C At higher hydrogen coverages theion

signals decrease to less than 15 of their peak intensities indicating that

the cross section for ion desorption decreases as the ll state fills The

41 reason for this decrease is not well understood although Madey has sug~_

gested that it results from a coverage dependent rate of reneutralization of

the ions produced by the incident beam At near monolayer coverages the 3 eV

ion signal increased somewhat

The data in Figur~ 311 are normalized at the peak intensity The

absolute maximum yields at the two temperatures are the same within 25

Also shown normalized at the peak intensity are Madeys intensity versus

41 coverage data for hydrogen adsorbed on W(lOO) at room temperature The

--

en + ~ H from H2 W (100) J ~ ~ Withrow 60degC ~ 0 Withrow -150degC shye __ -- Madey 22degCA

c

C li)

gtshy 0

c N

o H + I o x ~

cf c

o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Il cp (eV)

Figure 311 Intensity of the 3 eV g+ ion signal from the tungsten (1ampH)-1195 surface as a function of the change in work function resulting from hydrogen adsorption Data for adsorption at 600 C and -l50oC are plotted For comparison the results obtained by Madey4 from a room temperature tungsten (100) surface are included

93

maximum in his ion signal occurs for the same coverage as the maximum in the

room temperature data taken here His results are more sharply peaked howshy

ever This difference may be due to the different conditions under which the

two sets of data were obtained Madeys results represent ions desorbed in a

narrow cone normal to the surface whereas the spectrometer used here collected

only those ions desorbed from the surface at 350 + 2 120 Madey also used a

lower primary energy

352 Desorption Curve Measurements

The H+ ion signal is observed to decrease with time if a primary

electron beam current of sufficient intensity per surface area is used A

theoretical description of this measurement referred to as a desorption

curve is given in Appendix C It can be shown that the expected ion signal

decreases to an equilibrium value The rate of decay of the desorption curve

and the equilibrium value are used to calculate parameters characteristic of

the adsorption state being probed

Figure 312 shows the decay of the 3 eV H+ ion signal from tungsten

(100) initially covered with hydrogen to a work function change of 010 eV

oThe temperature of the crystal for this measurement was 60 C An incident

-6 -3 2current of 5xlO A (a current density of 25xlO Aem) at a primary energy

of 400 eV was used The decrease in ion yield is seen to be quite slow The

equilibrium value shown in this figure iH+ was estimated from the equil

analysis of the data in Chapter 4

+As noted above H ions could be desorbed from a cold but undosed

tungsten (100) surface The desorption curve for this undosed state is shown

in Figure 313 For this data the crystal was flashed and allowed to cool

5 minutes to -150o

C Then the incident electron current was turned on (see

94

I I I t I I I I I H+ from H2 W(l00) Epri =400 eV-(f) Ipri =5 X 10-6 A

a ~rp =010 eV82000r- shy

-(f)

c (l) I- shy iHquil-c

-~1000 shyo

H + I

t I I I I I o 100 200 300 400

Time (sec) SP-1203

Figure 312 Change in the a+ ion current during electron obombardment of a 60 C tungampten (100) surface

Hydrogen was initially adsorbed to a coverage of 010 monolayer

95

200 -()

a ~160 gt

if) -c ~120 c

H c ~ 80

+r 40

H+ Ions fromW(lOO) Epri=400eV

Ipri=lA

Temp =- 1500 C

IH~qUil ------------shy

Figure 313 Change in the a+ ion current during electron bombardment of a flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface cooled to -150oC

140

96

Section 354 for a discussion of how the current was controlled) and the

ion signal decay monitored The signal is seen to undergo a rapid decay It

reaches its equilibrium value in several minutes in sharp contrast with the

desorption curve obtained after hydrogen dosing at room temperature An inshy

-6 -4 2cident current of lxlO A (a current density of 5lxlO Alcm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV was used to take the desorption curve from the undosed cold

surface This current density is only 20 percent of the value used for the

room temperature data of Figure 312 It was found convenient to use this

smaller value since the decay of the ion signal was so rapid Additional

desorption measurements on this fast decaying or fast state are given in

the following two sections

A desorption curve obtained after dosing the cold tungsten (100)

surface with hydrogen is shown in Figure 314 The data were taken using a

-6 -3 2primary current of 3xlO A (a current density of 15xlO Acm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV The surface was dosed to a work function change of 007 eV

Initially there is a rapid decay of the ion signal which is similar to the

desorption curve obtained from the fast state Following this initial decaYt

the signal continues to fall for a time but at a much slower rate of decay

This desorption pattern different than either of the desorption curves given

in Figures 312 or 313 can be described in ter~ of simultaneous desorption

from two adsorption states This is discussed further in Chapter 4

+353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State H Ion Signal

The ion yield from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface

has been studied as a function of temperature These data were obtained by

continuously monitoring both the tungsten temperature and the 3 eV H+ ion

97

-() a u

t gt

800()

c (J) +shy

~600 c o

+ H

400 r

200

o

Figure 314

r-

i-

r-shy

I I I I I I I I I

H+ from H2 W(lOO Epri =400eV

I I I

o 100

Iprl =3xlO-6 A

ilq= O07eV T=-150degC

I 1 I I

T

I

-

-

-

200 300 400 Time (sec)

Change in the H+ ion current during electron bombardment oof a -150 C tungsten (100) surface Hydrogen was

initially adsorbed to a coverage of 007 monolayer

98

signal following a crystal flash The current for this measurement was

-6 -4 2IxlO A (a current density of 5lx10 Aem) The primary energy was 400

eV As can be determined from the previous section this current density was

such that the electron beam caused Significant perturbations on the hydrogen

state during the measurement None the less several conclusions can be inshy

ferred from the intensity versus temperature data presented in Figure 315

The ion signal from the fast hydrogen state is strongly temperature dependent

+ 0The H intensity is seen to increase sharply below approximately -50 C The

results are reversible with temperature the ion signal decreases if the crysshy

tal is heated and the signal returns to its original intensity when the crysshy

tal cools back down

Several mechanisms could be responsible for the appearance of a

H+ ion signal below room temperature For example a temperature dependent

bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen could produce a desorbable hydrogen

state Likewise adsorption from the background rtight pro(luce desorbable H+

only below room temperature In order to better understand the fast state

some additional measurements were made as described in the following section

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State

Additional experiments were performed to further elucidate the nature

of the low temperature fast state Experiments were made to determine the

source of hydrogen which populates this state The effect of co-adsorption

of hydrogen from the jet with this state was probed In addition the possishy

bility that the appearance of the state was related to surface contamination

was investigated Possible correlations between the fast state hydrogen and

the low temperature LEED phenomena described in Section 123 were probed

99

50----~----~----r---_~--_r----_--_

20

-(J)-c

gt l shye ~10 c l shye gt

00 -c Q)-~ 5 c o

H

+ I

2

-150 -100 -50 0 100 150 Temperature (OC)

Figure 315 Intensity of the 3 eV a+ ion signal from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface as a function of tungsten temperature

-200

100

In these measurements it was desired to study the appearance of

+the fast state H ion signal without the complicating effects of simultaneous

significant depletion of this hydrogen state with the primary electron beam

This possibility exists since the cross section for electron sesorption of

the fast state is high as shown in Chapter 4 It was found that a measure

of the change of coverage in the fast state could be obtained in experiments

in which the electron beam was turned off for short times During the time

the gun was off referred to as adsorption times the fast state populated

The increase in the coverage in this state during the adsorption time could be

monitored by taking a desorption curve right after the adsorption time The

change in coverage is assumed proportional to the difference iH+ - iH+ initial equi1

where iH+ is the ion intensity immediately after turning the gun back on initial

and ~+ has been discussed above The difference iH+ - iH+ will equil initial equi1

be referred to as ~iH+(adsorption time) The rate of increase in coverage of

the fast state is assumed proportional to ~~+(adsorption time)adsorption

time

To turn the gun off the control grid was biased 6 volts negative

with respect to the cathode This method of controlling the gun current

kept the cathode temperature constant during the adsorption time while at

the same time no current could reach the crystal The primary beam could be

turned off (or subsequently back on) in fractions of a second No effects on

the observed measurements could be attributed to this biasing procedure

The change in the population of the fast state has been monitored as

a function of the tungsten crystal temperature Figure 316 shows the results

of a series of measurements each done at a different crystal temperature in

101

() --c s gtshy

0 -0

0 100-~ 0shy+Q)

J 50

0 shy

+S a J

-150 -100 -50 a 50 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1215

Figure 316 The quantity igt - i~ measured initial eqpil

from desorption curves from Ehe fast state as a function of crystal temperature

102

which the above procedure has been used with adsorption times of 150 seconds

From the desorption curves taken following the adsorption times the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) has been calculated This quantity is plotted versusH

the crystal temperature in Figure 316 The quantity 6iH+(adsorption time)

ie the fast state signal is small and less than 5 of the maximum signal

owhen the temperature of the tungsten crystal is higher than OOC Below 0 C

the change in population in the fast state during the adsorption time inshy

creases as the temperature decreases This temperature dependence is in

agreement with the the results of Figure 315 which was taken continuously

with a high primary current as the crystal was cooled after a flash Thus the

procedure used to obtain Figure 316 appears reasonable

The rate of population of the fast state can be an indication of the

source of hydrogen as discussed in Chapter 4 The rate of population of this

state has been investigated as a function of adsorption time using the proceshy

dure given above Figure 317 shows a plot of the quantity 6i +(adsorptionH

time) versus adsorption time From the figure it is concluded that the rate

of popUlation is constant in time at least for coverages of the fast state

obtained in 26 minutes

The effect of co-adsorption of hydrogen from the jet on the fast

state has been probed The purpose of these measurements has been to detershy

mine if hydrogen (H2) from the gas dosing system is the source of the fast

state In a series of measurements the cold crystal surface was dosed with

hydrogen and then an ESD ion signal monitored until it reached equilibrium

Following this the fast state was allowed to populate during an adsorption

time of 150 seconds Finally a desorption curve from the co-adsorbed fast

lO3

Growth of H+ Ion Yield with Electron Gun Off T=-150degC--(f) c

s gt 0-0 0-

J 0shy

+0gt r

0 +shy

+pound r

200

100

SP-122J

Figure 317 The quantity igt bull i~ff measured from initial flequil

desorption curves from the fast state as a function of adsorption time Adsorption time is defined in the text

104

state and dosed hydrogen states was taken In Figure 318 the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) calculated from these desorption curves is plotted versusH

work function change due to adsorption from the jet For low doaes of hydroshy

gen (6cplt 010 eV) there is almost no change in the quantity t~+(adsorption

time) ie the rapid decay of the ion signal characteristic of the fast

state is observed However preadsorption of hydrogen from the jet clearly

affects the ion signal from the fast state for 6cplt010 eV The signal is

decreased forhy5irogen coverages in the 13 state in qualitative agreement1

with the data presented in Figure 311

For ~lt 010 eV the change in coverage in the fast state during

adsorption times of 150 seconds is seen to be independent of the amount of

hydrogen in the dosed or 13 2 state This result was used in a series of

experiments in which the rate of population of the fast state was measured

2at different hydrogen background pressures The flux (molecules per cm per

second) of H2 onto the surface from the background is directly proportional

to the partial pressure of hydrogen If H2 is the source of the fast state

changing the background pressure would be expected to have an effect on the

measured change in coverage in the fast state as long as the total adsorption

is lower than about 010 monolayer (which corresponds to a work function

change of 010 eV) For the data in Figure 318 the background pressure of

-11hydrogen was less than 7xlO Torr (the Bayard-Alpert gauge pressure) In

a series of experiments this hydrogen pressure was raised by letting gas in

from the the gas handling system for times ranging from one to two minutes

While the pressure was raised the electron gun was turned off so that simulshy

taneous adsorption into the fast state and the 13 2 state could take place The

105

() --C J

gt 10shy

0 10shy-0 10shy

S

0shy

+lt11 c

2-+~ c

200

100

0

8

DCP(eV) SP-1222

Figure 318 The quantity iHt 1nitial

desorption curves from

- iHplusmn measured from equil

the low temperature hydrogen dosed surface as a function of work function change ~~ ~~ results from hydrogen coverage

o 1 2 3 4 5 6

106

total hydrogen coverage in the Sz state was kept below 10 percent of a monoshy

layer Desorption curves were then taken and the quantity 8iH+(adsorption

time) calculated An interesting result was obtained It was found that the

coverage in the fast state was unrelated to the background pressure of HZ and

hence unrelated to the total impingement of HZ Even though experiments were

made in which the background pressure was varied over two orders of magnitude

the change in coverage in the fast state during equal adsorption times was

always the same Hence it is concluded that the fast state is not populated

by hydrogen added to the background from the gas handling system

It was found however that the fast state signal intensity could be

correlated to a pressure reading under certain experimental conditions

Normally during flashing the crystal manipulator was rotated so that the

tungsten crystal faced away from the entrance to the spectrometer (a rotation

oof 180 from the crystal position shown in Figure Z14) This normal flashing

posi tion is referred to as the down position The crystal could also be

flashed while it was in the IIUp position or facing the s~ectrometer It was

observed that when the crystal was flashed in the up position an increase in

the ion signal from the fast state could be obtained over that measured when

the crystal was flashed in the down position This unexpected result sugshy

gested that the fast state might be correlated to a thermal instrumental

effect Radiation heating from the crystal raised the temperature of the

surrounding experimental chamber surfaces If the crystal is close to the

surfaces during a flash as for example when flashed in the up position the

heating is greater One consequence of greater heating would be an enhanced

thermal desorption from the surfaces and a higher pressure in the experimental

107

chamber Hence the incident flux of gas thermally desorbed from the chamber

surfaces would be increased Unfortunately the best test of this hypothesis

a measurement of the temperature of the surfaces in the experimental chamber

could not be made However an interesting pressure related result could be

obtained when the x-ray current in the Bayard-Alpert gauge (which is equivalent

to approximately 7xlO-11 Torr pressure) was nulled out so that ambient pressure

-12increases at the gauge of as little as 05xlO Torr could be easily detected

It was observed that during a crystal flash when the crystal was in the up

position the gauge pressure showed a maximum pressure burst of approximately

3x10-l0 Torr This was higher than the pressure burst when the crystal was

flashed in the down position a strong indication that some surfaces in the

experimental chamber became hotter during an up flash When the crystal was

flashed in the down position the pressure fell quickly after the flash was

terminated to the nulled or equilibrium level However after a flash in the

up position the pressure fell to a quasi-equilibrium level which was higher

-12than the true equilibrium pressure by as much as 2xlO Torr The quasi-

equilibrium pressure was dependent on the number of prev~ous flashes in the

up position and on how long after flashing the pressure was read Once the

crystal had been flashed in the up position the pressure remained elevated

for several hours slowly decreasing to the equilibrium level It should be

noted that these pressure increases are read outside the experimental chamber

The actual pressure increase in the experimental chamber and hence the inshy

creased gas flux at the crystal surface can only be estimated to be proshy

portional to the gauge pressure

The magnitude of the pressure increases following a flash in the

108

up position was linearly related to both the change in coverage of the fast

state during the adsorption time and to the desorption curve equilibrium level

This can be seen from the data presented in Figure 319 The lower panel shows

the results of a series of measurements in which desorption curves were taken

after letting the fast state populate for adsorption times of 150 seconds

The ordinate in the lower panel is 6ia+ (adsorption1 time) The abscissa in the

figure is the increase in pressure over the equilibrium pressure as a result of

flashes in the up position The change in ion yield is seen to be directly

proportional to the observed pressure increase The top panel shows the equishy

librium ion signal observed for the desorption curves plotted versus the same

pressure increase as the lower panel A direct proportionality between the

equilibrium ion signal and the pressure increase is seen These two linear

results would be expected if the fast state populated as a result of adsorption

from the background This is discussed further in Chapter 4 On the other

hand no dependence of the fast state ion signal on background pressure would

be expected if the source of the hydrogen were bulk to surface diffusion Thus

while there may be hydrogen on the surface which is not desorbed by incident

electrons it can be concluded from this measurement that the fast state is

populated by adsorption from the ambient

A possible explanation for the fast state is suggested by the work

51of Jelend and Menzel They found that co-adsorption of oxygen or CO with

hydrogen leads to the ~ hydrogen state which has similar characteristics as

the fast state observed here The possibility that impurities are on the surshy

face in the temperature range in which the fast state is observed has been inshy

vestigated using Auger electron spectroscopy andel~tTon stimulated desorption in

lO9

Figure 319 Lower panel - The quantity iH+ - ig+ measured from initial eaui1

desorption curves from the fast state as S tunction of gauge pressure change The fast state populated during adsorption times of 150 seconds The pressure change results from flashing the tungsten crystal while it is in the up position Upper panel - Equilibrium ion current iH+ measured from the

-equildesorpt~on curves taken for the data in the lower panel

110

-(J)-C J gt 0 -0 0

100-s

+1)cr

J

C-+ J

0

--(J)

c J 200 gt 0 -0 0-

s +1)

cr J

- 100 I 2

012

Gauge Pressure Change (X10-12 Torr)

111

the time of flight mode In order to test for these elements the flashed

tungsten surface was cooled with the gun turned off allowing the fast state

to populate Total adsorption times of up to 15 minutes were used times in

which a strong fast state signal could be obtained However no carbon or

oxygen Auger peaks were observed and no desorbed oxygen or carbon ions that

could be attributed to the fast state were monitored with ESD Hence any

oxygen or CO present on the surface would have had a coverage below the deshy

tection sensitivity of the techniques used or less than approximately 1 pershy

cent of a monolayer It can be noted here that coverage calculations given in

Chapter 4 indicate the fast state hydrogen coverage is well below 1

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data

The low energy electron diffraction (LEE D) system used here has

been described previously in Section 26 LEED data has been optained using

hydrogen coverage crystal temperature and primary electron energy as

variable parameters as described below

The symmetry of the LEED spot pattern has been noted as a function

of hydrogen coverage at room temperature Results from these observations are

in good agreement with previously reported research (see Section 123) Half

order diffraction spots become visible with initial hydrogen coverage The

intensity of the half order spots maximize at a coverage corresponding to

~~ = 015 eV at a primary energy of 115 eVe Additional adsorption causes

the half order spots to split into four poorly defined spots This pattern

upon further adsorption becomes blurred At full coverage a (lxl) pattern

is observed Figure 320 shows a photograph of the LEED pattern observed

from a clean room temperature tungsten surface and also the c(2x2) LEED patshy

112

W(100)

Clean

T=60degC Epri = 1387eV

(1 xl) Clean (100) Surface

W (100)

Do 4gt =015eV

T =-150degC

Epri =115eV

C (2x2) Hydrogen Overoyer

SP-1200

Figure 320 Photo~raDh of LEED screen showing a clean (lxl) pattern and a c(2x2) pattern Models of possible surface atom configurations for the LEED patterns are also shown

113

tern that occurs with a hydrogen over1ayer in the ~2 state

When the crystal is cooled to below room temperatures half order

spots are visible without any dosing of the crystal from the gas system

Graphs of LEED spot intensity versus primary electron energy called

elastic intensity profiles are shown in Figures 321 322 and 323 for the

(10) (11) and (1212) diffraction beams A normally incident primary

electron beam was used in these measurements Data were taken at two tempera-

o 0tures 60 C and -150 C for both the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorbed on

the surface to a coverage corresponding to a ~~ of 015 eV This coverage corshy

responds to the maximum in intensity for the 115 eV half order beams All obshy

servable equivalent beams show the same line shape and peak positions There

are some intensity differences between equivalent beams probably due to an

uneven phosphor coating of the LEED screen particularly near its edge bull

Small misalignments might also affect the intensities The effect of hydrogen

adsorption on the intensity profiles is seen to be small except above 100 eV

in the (11) beam profile and below 50 eV in the (1212) beam profile Some

small shifts (~ 2 eV) in the energy positions of the peaks are observed as a

function of coverage but not as a function of temperature

The intensities of the (1212) (10) and (11) spots have been

measured as a function of crystal temperature for the clean (flashed) surface

These results are presented in Figures 324 and 325 using a semilogarithmic

scale The data were obtained by continuously monitoring both the tungsten

temperature and the intensity of the beams following a crystal flash Primary

energies of 115 eV for the (1212) beam 1105 eV and 67 eV for the (10)

beam and 113 eV for the (11) beam and currents of 10xlO-6 A were used The

114

- (j) +shyC l

gt 1loshy0 0 loshy+shy0

loshy0

- 0gt

+shy(j)

c Q) +shyC

H

o

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j = 0deg g=(10)

T =60degC Clean

T =-150degC fjcent = 015 eV

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l109

Figure 321 Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degc and -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsoroed in the S2 state

llS

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

U)-C J

1

-~ l0shy

a loshy

0 0l0shya-~-U) 0c OJ

C -H

o

o

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-lloa

8i =0deg g = (1 1)

T = 60degC Clean

T =60degC IJcp = 015 eV

T = -150degC IJcp = 015 eV

Figure 322 Elastic intensity profiles for the (11) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsorbed in the 62 state

116

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j =00

g = (12 12 )

o 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l107

Figure 323 Elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A vJork function change Acp of 015 eV corresponds to hydrocn adsorbed in the 13

2 state

117

100~--~--~----~--~-------~--------

--VI

c s gtshyt shyc -t shycl

010 -

gtshy-VI c Q)

c -I-f

tr c Q)

a

WOOO) 81 =0deg

9 = (ItO) 0-

-0- Epri = 1105 eV --0-- -0shy -0

9 = (ItI)

0 Epri= 113 eV =0shy o 0 0

9 = (ItO) Epri= 67 eV

0

Figure 324 Temperature dependence of (10) and (11) LEED beams from a flashed tungsten (100) surface Primary energies used are indicated on the graph

118

W (100) 9 =(12 t 12)

8j=0deg50

CJ)-

~ 5 o Q)

Q

2

-100 o 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1l55 Figure 325 Temperature dependence of the (1212) LEED

beam from flashed tungsten (100) surface A primary electron energy of 115 eV was used

200

119

intensities of the (10) and (11) beams are seen to increase exponentially

(linearly on the semilogarithmic scale) as the temperature is lowered The

intensity of the (1212) order beam also increases as the temperature is

lowered Down to approximately -750 C the rate of increase with temperature is

ogreater than that for the integral order beams Below -75 C the intensity

changes at about the same rate as the integral order beams The results are

reversible with temperature

In Sections 353 and 354 a hydrogen ion signal has been reported

from the flashed surface LEED measurements have been made to ascertain if

this ion yield from the fast state could be correlated to the intensity of the

LEED spots After flashing the crystal the photometer signal from the

(1212) beam was measured as the crystal cooled to -lS0 0 C Then the incishy

dent electron current was turned off for 300 seconds in order to allow the

fast state to populate When the electron current was turned back on the

photometer signal immediately returned to the same intensity as obtained prior

to turning off the incident current There was no decay in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the desorption curve phenomena seen with

the ion signal The intensity of the photometer signal from the (10) and

(11) beams as well as from the background was monitored ilsing this same

procedure In no case was there any structure observed in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the rapid decay in the fast state ion

yield

37 Electron Scattering Data

The electron signal backscattered from the crystal has been observed

as a function of hydrogen coverage and crystal temperature using synchronous

120

detection of the second harmonic of the energy distribution N(E) as disshy

cussed in Appendix B and in Section 324

Figure 326 shows the characteristic loss structure for electrons

scattered from a clean room temperature tungsten (100) surface and also from

this surface after dosing with hydrogen The abscissa in this figure represhy

sents electron loss energy w where 0 eV s w s 40 eV A primary~nergy of

-6110 eV and a primary current of lxlO A were used to take these data Since

25for tungsten true secondary structure extends out to 60 eV there is no

overlap of secondary and characteristic loss structure down to losses of 50

eV when operating at 110 eV primary energy The data of Figure 326 were taken

in the second derivative mode in order to suppress the background The data

were taken at a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV with a 1 volt peak to peak

oscillation on the retarding potential

Coverage dependent changes in the spectra are seen The peak at

w = 25 eV in the clean spectrum decays as the hydrogen coverage in increased

At the same time the narrow peak at 4 eV becomes broader and a peak grows at

a loss energy of 75 eV The structure at 210 eV in the clean spectrum moves

down in loss energy as hydrogen adsorbs Below w ~ 30 eV very little change

in the spectra as a function of hydrogen coverage is observed

Figure 327 shows characteristic loss structure for electrons

oscattered from a tungsten surface cooled to -150 C The data were taken using

the same electron gun and spectrometer operating conditions as used for the

data of Figure 326 The low temperature clean spectrum is nearly identical

to that obtained at the higher temperature The only change is a slight enshy

hancement of the shoulder at about 45 eV Changes in the clean spectrum with

121

Figure 326 oCharacteristic electron energy loss spectra from a 60 C

tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverages A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modulation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

---

N w -0 shyw-Z

N -0

I

122

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl=110 eV Iprl c5xlO-6 A

T= 60degC Modulation =1 V Peak to Peak

6ltl 080eV

060eV

O 35eV

023eV

014eV

003eV

Clean

o

SP-1219

123

Figure 327 Characteristic electron energy loss spectra from a -lSOoC tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverage A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modushylation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

124

N lJJ 0

~ lJJ Z N 0 I

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl =110 eV Iprl =5x10-6 A T=-150degC Modulation 1 V Peak to Peak

bcent OS6eV

O5geV

O35eV

O25eV

O16eV

O05eV

Cleon

SP-1220

-~--------~- -- -----------

125

hydrogen adsorption are identical to those seen for adsorption at the higher

temperature

Loss spectra were also taken for 0 eV ~ w ~ 10 eV from the flashed

but undosed cold surface after turning off the electron gun for 10 minutes

These measurements were made to see if the fast state hydrogen would affect

the loss measurements No changes in the electron loss spectrum from those

taken immediately after cooling the flashed crystal were found

A discussion of the data presented in this chapter follows in

Chapter 4

126

CHAPTER 4

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

Hydrogen chemisorption on single crystal tungsten (100) has been

probed in this research using complementary surface sensitive techniques

Auger measurements have been given in Section 28 Work function ESD LEED

and electron scattering results have been given in Chapter 3 A discussion

of this data is presented here

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental condition using Auger electron spectroscopy The procedures

used have been previously described with the spectrometer electronics Section

25 The Auger data have been given and discussed in Section 28 A brief

summary of these results follows

Tungsten carbon and oxygen Auger transitions have been observed

using this technique It can be seen from Figure 216 that after flashing the

cryLl to 2200oK no structures attributable to carbon or oxygen Auger elecshy

trons remain in the Auger spectrum The Auger measurement is estimated to

be sensitive to approximately 1 percent coverage Operation of the electron

gun in the high current high voltage Auger mode results in a slow deposition

of carbon from the background Since the Auger mode is used to chemically

characterize the surface the net effect of this beam related contamination

is an overestimation of the carbon impurity concentration at the surface

Some weak structure in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface

occurs between 475 eV and 525 eV No definite conclusions regarding the

127

origin of these peaks can be made The possibility that the structure results

from transitions in tungsten andor other elements is discussed in Chapter 2

83It is worth noting that Watts Jones and Hopkins recently published an

Auger spectrum from a flashed W(lOO) surface in which weak structure can be

seen at approximately the same energies as the unidentified structure observed

here This similarity lends support to the hypothesis that the peaks are

tungsten Auger transitions However it does not rule out other possibilities

The similarity of the data indicates at least that if the structure in

question results from some contaminate the problem is not unique to the

apparatus here It should be emphasized that work function ESD and LEED

data taken here are in good agreement with the literature any possible

contamination has not had a noticeable effect on the measurements

42 Work Function Results

Retarding potential work function measurements have been taken as

a measure of hydrogen coverage Plots of work function changes versus

exposure to hydrogen are presented in Figures 34 and 35 Adsorption of

hydrogen at 600 C yields a maximum work function change of 098 plusmn 004 eV

This is within 10 percent of 090 eV the most consistent monolayer coverage

work function chan~e reported in the literature for the H2 on W(lOO)

8 18 46 47 84system As argued by Armstrong agreement with the values from

the literature is an indication of good (100) orientation This is because

the work function of a faceted surface is a weighted average over the work

44functions of the facets Since hydrogen adsorption increases the work

function of the (100) face far more than the expected facet orientations a

128

faceted (100) surface would have a lower full coverage work function change

than a true (100) surface

Hydrogen adsorption onto W(lOO) at low temperatures increases the

work function by 092 plusmn 004 eV at full coverage This is slightly lower

than the room temperature maximum increase although within experimental

error the two measurements are the same

The increase in work function with hydrogen coverage can be intershy

preted using a simple model in which each adsorbed hydrogen atom acts as a

negative dipole at the surface The work function change on adsorption

43 6~ can be shown to equal the total added dipole moment at the surface

divided by the permittivity Using this and assuming a hydrogen coverage of

15 22xlO atomsem for a 6~ of 098 eV the average dipole moment permax

adsorbed hydrogen atom is calculated to be -013 Debye This result can be

compared to a theoretical account of the dipole moment of a hydrogen ion

63adsorbed onto metal surfaces given by Smith Ying and Kohn Their

calculation indicates that in order to observe a negative dipole moment the

hydrogen ion must be closer than 061 Kto the top plane of substrate ion

cores This would be an upper estimate of the proximity of the hydrogen atoms

to the tungsten substrate The minimum theoretical dipole moment per

63 -2 adsorbed hydrogen ion obtained by Smith et al is -lxlO au (1 au

equals 24 Debye) This value is lower than the observed value of -013

Debye by a factor of 5

o 0Cooling a clean tungsten (100) crystal from 200 C to -150 C

results in a work function increase of approximately 005 eV as shown in

Figure 36 This is an average change with temperature d~dT of 14xlO -4

129

oeV K The temperature dependence of work function for tungsten in this

temperature range has not previously been reported However temperature

dependent changes in work function of this magnitude have been reported for

85 86 85 86Cu Ag Na and K and have been described theoret~ca11y in terms of

both a thermal expansion of the crystal lattice and a temperature dependence

of the crystal electronic structure The work function change observed

here is quantitatively in agreement with experimental data for other elements

and with a theoretical model that describes the temperature dependence solely

in terms of intrinsic properties of a clean metal surface While perturbashy

tions on the crystal surface such as gas adsorption from the background or

bulk to surface diffusion can reasonably be expected to affect the work

function it is not necessary to invoke these causes to explain the changes

seen on cooling the crystal

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results

Under electron bombardment H+ ions can be desorbed from the

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface and from the low temperature undosed

surface The theory that describes this ESD process was first proposed by

37 38Redhead and by Menzel and Gomer A discussion of their model including a

derivation of the energy distribution of ions from the surface is given in

Appendix C In addition a discussion of the ESD phenomena in terms of

surface kinetics is also given in this appendix

ESD has been used to study the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system at

ocrystal temperatures from slightly above room temperature to -150 C Energy

distributions of It ions desorption curves and ion yield versus temperaturemiddot

and coverage data have been obtained

130

431 Room Temperature Results

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from room temperature

W(lOO) is given by the solid curve in Figure 37 The distribution has a

Gaussian line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 plusmn 05 eV

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV The line shape of the energy

distribution remains virtually unchanged as a function of hydrogen coverage

at least to near saturation coverage as shown by the curves in Figure 38

Near full coverage the distribution appears to broaden somewhat This latter

change requires further study which has not been done here

From Equation Cl of Appendix C the energy distribution of the

desorbed ions is given by the expression

(41)

where x is the coordinate normal to the surface Ions that start at x X ]

desorb with energy V N is the surface density of hydrogen atoms adsorbed in

the ground state ~ is the cross section for electron induced excitation ex

of hydrogen from the ground state to the ionic state I~G(xi)12 is the

probability density of hydrogen at Xi P(x ) is the probability that an ioni

starts from the position x and escapes from the surface as an ion and J

dV(X)dxlxi is the slope of the ion-metal interaction evaluated at Xi The

line shape of the energy distribution depends on the metal-neutral intershy

action VG(x) via ~G and depends on the ion-metal interaction V(x) via P(x)

and the slope dV(x)dx

--------------------------~-~~----------------

131

One manifestation of multistate adsorption in which VG(x) and V(x)

are dependent on the binding state is a change in the experimentally

observed energy distribution Multistate adsorption has been observed with

ESD for some systems for example as a function of oxygen coverage on

W(lOO)25 A similar result might be expected for hydrogen adsorption on

W(lOO) since two states ~l and ~2 are seen in thermal desorption spectra

However from the ion energy distribution line shapes for hydrogen on W(lOO)

no evidence of multistate adsorption as a function of coverage is seen The

line shapes of the energy distribution curves are the same at hydrogen

coverages corresponding to both thermal desorption states Hence coverage

dependent interactions which have been proposed to account for the thermal

desorption results and other phenomena reported for this system are not

observed using this technique

Another conclusion to be drawn from the energy distributions is

that the ions originate at an energy position which remains constant with

respect to the Fermi level of the tungsten independent of hydrogen coverage

A shift of nearly a volt in the work function is observed as hydrogen

adsorbs However the ion energy distribution which would be sensitive to

changes of this magnitude if it shifted with the work function remains

fixed in energy

The decay of the room temperature 3 eV a+ ion yield is shown in

Figure 312 A theoretical account of the desorption curve measurement has

been given in Appendix C From that discussion it is seen that a semi logshy

arithmic plot of i ~ - i ~ versus time yields a straight line The totalH Hequil desorption cross section of the adsorption state being probed can be

132

1determined from the slope of the straight line - T where T is given by

T e = (42)

je is the current density used to obtain the desorption curve and e is the

unit of electric charg~

The discussion of the desorption process leading to Equation 42

is based on the assumptions that the total desorption cross section and the

hydrogen sticking probability are independent of hydrogen coverage N The

validity of these assumptions for the hydrogen on tungsten (100) systems

should be examined An indication that the ionic cross section is indepenshy

dent of N for low coverages can be gotten from data presented in Figure 311

The H+ ion yield versus work function change is nearly linear for A~ lt 01 eV

8If coverage is linearly related to work function change as shown by Madey

then the ion yield is directly proportional to N in this low coverage region

A direct proportionality between ion yield and coverage satisfies

Equation C5 only if the ionic desorption cross section Qtis not a

function of coverage In a series of experiments it has been observed that

the equilibrium ion yield which is proportional to the ratio Q+Qt as

given by Equation C8 is independent of N for low coverages Since Q+ and

an expression proportional to Q+Qt are both independent of N it is assumed

tthat Q is a180 independent of N

The dependence of the sticking probability on coverage has been

reported in the literature for the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system Tamm and

87Schmidt found s(N) to be independent of N for coverages of less than 15

133

41 percent Madey found s(N) to be proportional to (l-NN ) Hence the

max

assumption that the sticking probability is independent of N appears valid

to within ~ 10 percent for low coverages For coverages less than 10 the

analysis in Appendix C of the desorption curve measurements can be applied to

the data

A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ for the desorption curve ~quil

shown in Figure 312 is given in Figure 41 The equilibrium level has been

chosen approximately 5 lower than the ion intensity obtained after monishy

toring the decay curve 30 minutes (the final recorded data) since it appeared

from the data the signal was still slowly decreasing In addition with

this correction the data give a better fit to the predicted straight line

t -20 2From the slope of the line -lIT and Equation 41 a Q (400 eV) of 5xlO cm

is calculated Without making the 5 correction in iH+ the best visual equil

straight line fit to the data gives a Qt(400 eV) approximately three times

larger Because the initial hydrogen coverage for this data was 010 monoshy

layerp this cross section represents the total desorption cross section

from the ~2 hydrogen adsorption state ie represents ~ (400 eV) For 2

coverages corresponding to the ~l state the assumptions leading up to

tEquation 42 are not valid and no attempt has been made to calculate 93 bull t 1

The value obtained for 93 (400 eV) is somewhat larger than the cross section 2

38results reported by Menzel and Gomer for hydrogen desorption from a field

emitter tip and is a factor of 10 lower than reported by Jelend and

Menzel10 for desorption from a tungsten ribbon The latter researchers

corrected for readsorption effects which would partly explain their higher

value The value of ~2(400 eV) found here is over three orders of

134

500----~----~--~------------~----

400

- 300 ()

a 0- CT Q)

+ I I 200

+ I

100~__~_____~____~____~__~____~__~ o 200 400 600 800 1000

Time (sec)

SP-1198

Figure 41 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iHt asequil

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 312

----------- -------shy

51

135

magnitude smaller than the total cross section found by Jelend and Menzel

for hydrogen coadsorption with either carbon monoxide or oxygen This is a

verification that these contaminants are not present to any great extent

432 Low Temperature Fast State Results

oIf the tungsten crystal was flashed to 2200 K and subsequently

allowed to cool below room temperature H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface The state from which this hydrogen is desorbed has been labeled

the fast state Experiments have been made to characterize the energetics

and kinetics of this undosed state and also to address the important question

of the origin of the hydrogen which is desorbed These data are discussed

below

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from the fast state

shown in Figure 310 is considerably broader than the distribution obtained

after room temperature hydrogen dosing into the ~ states The peak intensity

is somewhat lower in energy 05 eV than the peak obtained from the ~

states The distribution has a tail extending up several electron volts on

the high energy side It should be noted that the same energy distribution

line shape could be obtained from the state at any position on its desorpshy

tion curve that is the broad distribution is not an anomalous result

reflecting a depletion of the hydrogen fast state during the measurement

A low primary current of lxlO- 7 A was used to take the distribution in

Figure 310 so that electron desorption effects were minimal From a

comparison of energy distributions as given in Figure 310 it is possible

to conclude that the fast state is a separate state from the ~ states

136

This conclusion is supported by cross section calculations below

The intensity of the ion yield from the fast state is temperature

dependent As shown in Figures 315 and 316 the ion yield increases as

the temperature is lowered This phenomena is reversible Using the

assumption that the ion yield is proportional to coverage it is concluded

that the fast state coverage is a function of temperature

The desorption curve obtained from the undosed tungsten (100)

surface has been measured and is given in Figure 313 The decay time is

seen to be extremely rapid compared to the analogous measurement taken after

hydrogen dosing at room temperature A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ ~quil

measured from the data in Figure 313 is given in Figure 42 The total

tdesorption cross section for the fast state Qf(400 eV) calculated from the

slope of the straight line in Figure 42 is -17lxlO 2 cm This is nearly

three orders of magnitude higher than ~2(400 eV)

Since Q~(400 eV) is on the same order of magnitude as the cross

section obtained for hydrogen desorption from carbon monoxide or oxygen

51contaminated surfaces the possibility that the fast state results from

surface contamination has been examined No direct evidence was obtained to

support such a hypothesis No carbon or oxygen peaks were observed in Auger

electron spectra from the cold surface It is estimated that these spectra

were sensitive to 1 percent of a monolayer coverage No carbon or oxygen

ions that could be attributed to the fast state phenomena were observed in

time of flight measurements It might be noted that Jelend and Menzel

observed the high cross section state labeled ~ at room temperature after

simultaneously adsorbing hydrogen plus CO or oxygen Almost no fast state

137

100

-fJ)

Q U

50 J CT

+0gt I I

+ I

10~~~--~~~~~~--~~~--~~~~

o 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Time (sec)

sp- J~4l

Figure 42 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iH+ as equi1

a function of time The data are illeasured from the desorption curve given in Figure 313

138

o lOhydrogen was detected here above 0 c Jelend and Menzel did not observe

any H+ ion yield from a cleaned surface if cooled to _13 0 C Since the gt

signal is weak at that temperature it is possible their apparatus did not

detect it It is also possible that they did not populate their surface

with hydrogen by cooling In any case its not possible to make any

simple correlations between the fast state and the contamination related x

state However as discussed below the equivalence of the two states

cannot be ruled out

It is of interest to determine the origin of the hydrogen which

populates the fast state There are several possibilities This state

could populate as a result of adsorption from the background Alternatively

88 89 hydrogen since it is endothermically soluble in tungsten m~ght

diffuse from interstitial sites to surface sites as the temperature of the

crystal is lowered A discussion of these phenomena has been given in

19Appendix C The latter suggestion has been offered as a possible

explanation of the c(2x2) LEED pattern observed on cooling In addition a

combination of these two processes could be occurring

Experiments have been performed in which the coverage in the fast

state has been monitored as a function of both adsorption time and system

background pressure If the source is external the dependence of N on

adsorption time and ambient pressure can be determined by solving Equation

C4 For the case of no incident electron beam (je = 0) and if the sticking

probability is assumed constant with coverage (probably a good assumption

since the change in coverage due to adsorption from the background would be

extremely small at the experimental ambient pressures) then the change in

139

coverage in the fast state would be expected to be linearly related to the

time during which adsorption occurs ie linearly proportional to the

variable adsorption time Furthermore for a fixed adsorption time the

coverage would be expected to be linearly proportional to the partial pressure

of the populating species

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

40 pressure is considerably more invo1ved Several points can be made

however from the discussion in Appendix C The time dependence of N due

to diffusion could be similar to that expected from background adsorption

ie linear with adsorption time However background pressure doesnt

enter into the diffusion process If the fast state phenomena is only

diffusion related the coverage N would be expected to be independent of

background pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence

for adsorption from the background

The rate of populating the fast state has been measured by turning

off the electron gun for various time intervals (setting j = 0) referred to e

as adsorption times and observing the build up of the ion signal while the

gun is off The increase in the fast state is then assumed proportional to

the increase in the ion yield i ~ - i ~ when the electron gun is Hinitia1 Hequi1

turned back on The dependence of the population rate on adsorption time is

shown in Figure 317 N is found to be linearly related to adsorption time

As discussed above this time behavior can reasonably be expected to be

observed for either an external or an internal source

The rate of population of the fast state has also been observed as

140

a function of hydrogen pressure admitted to the background from the gas

handling system As discussed in Section 354 the rate of population did

not depend on the impingement rate from the hydrogen background Hence it

is concluded that hydrogen from the gas handling system does not populate

the fast state This does not rule out external adsorption however Other

sources of hydrogen in the ambient such as rrt H H2 in an excited state or

hydrogen from a simple compound such as H 0 could be the source2

Although the population of the fast state was not affected by the

background pressure of hydrogen (H ) from the gas handling system there is2

evidence that this state does result from adsorption from an external source

This conclusion is based on experiments in which the Bayard Alpert gauge

sensitivity was increased by nulling out the x-ray limiting current Changes

-12in the background pressure on the order of 2xlO Torr were observed experishy

mentally if the crystal was flashed while it was facing the spectrometer

One explanation of this observation is that a flash in the up position warms

experimental chamber surfaces most likely the grids and electron gun drift

tube The resulting pressure increase occurs because of an increased rate of

thermal desorption from these surfaces The linear dependence of the

equilibrium current i ~ with pressure change as found experimentallyHequil

and shown in the top panel of Figure 319 is expected if external adsorption

populates the fast state This can be seen from Equation C9 Likewise the

rate of change of coverage in the fast state is seen to be proportional to

the pressure change in the lower panel of Figure 319 This is also expected

for external adsorption If bulk to surface diffusion were the source of the

hydrogen no dependence on pressure would be expected Hence Figure 319

141

indicates that hydrogen becomes desorbable because of adsorption from the

background It is not possible to say what species is adsorbing

An interesting calculation that can be made from the current nulling

experiments is an estimate of the coverage in the adsorption state responsible

for the fast state hydrogen ions Since the relation

(43)

can be obtained easily from Equation C9 and since ~i + is on the same Hequil

order as iH+ the background partial pressure that populates the undosed equil

-12state is on the same order of magnitude as ~P or about lxlO Torr The

coverage N at equilibrium can now be obtained by setting Equation C4 equal

-12to O At a pressure of 10 Torr the impingement rate of hydrogen molecules

9 2 90 for example is 15xlO moleculescm -sec and the impingement rate of other

species would be of this same magnitude Assuming a sticking probability of

-17 21 a total desorption cross section of 10 cm as calculated and a current

-4 2density of 5lxlO Acm the surface coverage in the fast state would be

~ 10-11

atomscm2 or 10-4 monolayer This calculation depends on the

assumption that the pressure change at the crystal face in the experimental

chamber is the same as measured at the gauge Experiments performed in which

the crystal was rotated to the down position after flashing in the up position

indicated that the flux of the populating species at the surface was about

twice as great when the crystal faced the spectrometer than when it faced

down Since the pressure at the bottom of the experimental chamber should

142

be about the same as the gauge pressure the calculated coverage could be

low by 50 percent It should be noted however that this is still 50 times

too low to amount to 1 percent of a monolayer

From the above discussion it can be concluded that the fast

state is related to both the temperature of the crystal and to the

background pressure of some unidentified species It is not possible to

determine if this state is a separate state from the K hydrogen state

previously reported even though it appears under different circumstances

In fact since the coverage in the state is so low Auger spectroscopy

would not be sensitive to any contamination of this same magnitude The

possibility of undetected contamination accompanying the fast state cannot

be ruled out It is possible that the adsorbing species does not contain

hydrogen as such but rather is a species which promotes a small amount

of surface hydrogen (from the background or diffusion) to the fast state

It can also be concluded that since coverages less than 1 percent of a

monolayer would not be expected to strongly alter the LEED spot symmetry

the half order spots seen on cooling do not arise from the fast state

433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results

ESD measurements have been made on the low temperature tungsten

crystal after dosing with hydrogen from the jet Energy distributions at

different coverages of hydrogen are given in Figure 39 The distributions

143

are seen to have a peak at 3 ~ 05 eV in agreement with the peak positions

in the data obtained from the ~ states at 60oC However the energy distri shy

butions are somewhat broader than the higher temperature data The fast

state yields a broad energy distribution and it is possible that the results

of Figure 39 represent simultaneous desorption from both the fast state and

the ~ states This hypothesis can be tested by analyzing a desorption curve

from the low temperature dosed surface If two states with different cross

sections are being desorbed then a semilogarithmic plot of the desorption

curve should be the sum of two straight lines The quantity i ~ - i ~ H HSquil

measured from the data of Figure 315 is plotted in Figure 43 The curve

can be separated into two straight line segments from which total desorption

17 19 2 cross sections of 16xlO- cm2 and 12xlO- cm are calculated These

cross sections correspond within plusmn 60 percent to the calculated values of

t tQf(400 eV) and QS2(400 eV) Hence it is concluded that at low temperatures

the fast state and S-like states co-adsorb

It should be noted however that the interaction of hydrogen from

the jet with the tungsten surface at low temperatures is not exactly the

o same as at 60 C This can be seen from the plot of 3 eV ion yield versus

work function change given in Figure 311 At both 600 C and at -lSOoC the

results are qualitatively similar the ion yield increases steeply with

initial hydrogen adsorption reaches a maximum and then decreases to less

than lS percent of the maximum value with additional hydrogen adsorption

Hence it is assumed that a similar phenomena is occurring at both temperashy

tures However the work function change at maximum intensity for the low

temperature measurement was found to be repeatedly lower by 007 eV than the

144

SP-H24

Figure 43 Semilogarithmic plot of the quantity ia+ - ia+ as equ~l

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 314

145

peak ~ntens~ty for measurements taken at 600 C If the expression relating

coverage to work function change Equation 35 is valid at both 600

C and

at -1500 C then the 007 eV shift would represent a dosed coverage difference

of 7 of a monolayer The ion yield at the low temperature would maximize at

a dosed coverage of 11 which is 40 lower than the coverage for the maximum

ion yield at the higher temperature If the decrease in ion yield for higher

hydrogen coverages arises from interactions between adsorbed atoms these calshy

culations suggest that the interactions observe a different coverage dependence

at the two temperatures Alternate explanations are possible for the measured

difference Equation 35 may not be valid at both temperatures It is possible

that the work function change per adsorbed atom is smaller at the lower tempshy

erature and the dosed coverages are the same at the ion yield maximas It is

also possible that hydrogen not visible in ESD or electron loss spectroscopy

measurements~ but capable of interacting with dosed hydrogen~ diffuses to the

surface at the low temperature This latter alternative~ while a possible exshy

planation for the LEED phenomena would raise many questions as to why such

hydrogen is not detectable with other techniques

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements

Low energy electron diffraction measurements made on the clean and

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface have been presented in Section 36 The

symmetry of the LEED patterns has been noted as a function of hydrogen coverage

and crystal temperature Elastic intensity profiles for three LEED beams are

given in Figures 321 through 323 LEED beam intensities as a function of

temperature have been monitored These are given in Figures 324 and 325

General agreement between symmetry patterns seen here and those

published in the literature18 19 is good The (lxl) LEED pattern

146

characteristic of clean tungsten at room temperature changes into a c(2x2)

pattern with initial hydrogen adsorption With further adsorption the LEED

pattern splits into four spots becomes blurred and finally at full coverage

returns to a (lx1) pattern When the crystal is cooled to temperatures below

room temperatures half order spots become visible without any dosing of the

crystal from the gas system

The intensity of the room temperature half order spots maximizes at

a coverage corresponding to ~~ = 015 eV or 015 monolayer using Equation

35 This is close to the 016 monolayer coverage at which Yonehara and

19 18Schmidt found these beams to maximize Estrup and Anderson on the

other hand observed sharp and intense half order LEED spots at a coverage

of 029 monolayer The coverages reported here were calculated from work

function changes using the linear relation between work function change and

coverage obtained by Madey by a flash desorption technique In both other

18experiments 19 coverage was measured directly using flash desorption The

c(2x2) pattern is associated with the ~2 adsorption state The structures

proposed to account for this state as given in Section 128 predict that

the maximum of the half order spots should occur at 025 monolayer coverage

15(one monolayer being 2x10 atomscm2) Estrup and Andersons measurement is

closest to this coverage While it is not known why there is such a large

discrepancy between the results it should be noted that determination of

coverage using flash desorption techniques is difficult with large uncershy

tainties in pressure gauge calibration and system volume The results given

here in terms of ~~ should be considerably more accurate

_ _____---__---shy

147

Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) (11) and (1212) LEED

beams are given in Figures 321 through 323 respectively The profiles

o 0 were taken at 60 C and -150 C from both a clean tungsten surface and a

surface dosed with hydrogen to 015 monolayer (This coverage corresponded

to the observed maximum in the half order pattern) As seen in these three

figures corresponding clean room temperature and low temperature profiles are

nearly identical Adsorption of hydrogen to a coverage of 015 does cause

some changes in the clean profiles with the same changes being observed at

both temperatures Hydrogen adsorption considerably enhances the 42 eV peak

observed in the (1212) profile and shifts it in energy approximately + 1 eVe

Adsorption also leads to a change from a single peak to a double peaked

structure of decreased intensity in the (11) profile above 100 eVe Adsorption

causes very little change in the (10) profile line shape above 60 eV

although the 65 eV 835 eV and 110 eV peaks are lowered in energy approxishy

mately 15 eV 05 eV and 15 eV respectively Between 30 eV and 60 eV

there are some adsorption effects on the profiles

These elastic intensity profiles can be compared to corresponding

data previously reported in the literature In Figure 44 a comparison is

made between clean surface (10) and (11) profiles taken here and reported

9lby Wei The agreement is good except in the energy range below 50 eVe

This poor agreement below 50 eV is also true for the (00) beam which is not

compared here The low energy discrepancies may be caused by the ambient

magnetic field present in Weis target region In fact it is surprising

that the data agrees as well as it does considering the different experimenshy

tal conditions under which the two sets of data were obtained Figure 45

148

Figure 44 Comparison of (11) and (10) elastic intensity profiles from the clean tungsten (100) surface Data includes profiles taken here at 60degC and -150degC and results reported by Wei94 bull

149

() --c 1

gt 0-Q 0-gt-()

c OJ-c

H

o 50 100 150 200

xl

xl

X2

Elastic Intensity Profiles W (100) Clean 8i = 0deg

g = (11)

g = (10)

Withrow (-150degC)

Withrow (60degC)

Wei (250-300degC)

Pr imary Energy (eV) SP-1l92

150

Figure 45 Comparison of (1212) elastic intensity profiles from tungsten (100) surface after hydrogen adsorption into the ~2 state Data includes profiles obtained here and results reported by Estrup and Anderson18 and Papageorgopoulos and Chen2l

0

151

- ()-

--()

c Q)-c H

Elastic Intensity Profiles H2 on W(lOO) 8j =0deg 9 = (1212)

Withrow

Estrup and Anderson

Papageorgopoulos and Chen

o 50 100 150 Primary Energy (eV) SP-1l93

200

152

shows a comparison of elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam taken

after hydrogen adsorption From the general appearance of the data Estrup

18and Andersons profi1e appears shifted up in energy about 5 eV with respect

to the profile taken here This suggests the possibility of a discrepancy

in the energy measurement The line shapes are similar howeve~ although

Estrup and Anderson found one well-defined peak around 75 eV whereas in this

work a peak at 67 eV and an additional shoulder between 85 eV and 90 eV is

21seen Papageorgopou1os and Chen did not observe the large peak below 50 eV

nor the double peaked structure above 100 eV reported by both other researchers

These discrepancies cou1deasi1y be due to a residual magnetic field in the

work of Papageorgopou1os and Chen It can be concluded from these comparishy

sons that control over experimental conditions is crucial for the reproduction

of data

Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores

16 17 can be extracted from a sufficient set of elastic intensity proh1es

Although the data base is small here a preliminary analysis of the clean

tungsten data has been conducted by Duke using a microscopic quantum-field

16theory formalism of low energy electron diffraction In this formalism a

model for the electron-solid interaction is used in an attempt to match

theoretical line shape predictions to experimentally observed elastic LEED

intensity profiles An important feature of this microscopic approach is the

strong interactions between the incident electron and valence electrons in

the solid The inelastic mean free path A is about 3-8 X for most ee

materials for electron energies of 30 ~ E S 200 As a consequence electrons

which are observed elastically have been backscattered within the first

--------------

153

several surface layers of the solid and hence LEED elastic profiles are

surface sensitive Elastic backscattering of the electrons is described by

short range electron-ion core interactions Information on the configurashy

tion of the surface ion cores is extracted from the elastic energy profiles

by varying parameters in the theory and obtaining the best fit to the data

Theoretical analysis of elastic energy profiles from tungsten at energies

above 100 eV is computationally difficult because of the large number of

phase shifts needed to describe the electron-ion core scattering Hence the

exp arimental profiles were taken only for energies E 1gt 125 eV pr~

Comparisons of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity

profiles for the (00) (10) and (11) beams are given in Figure 46 The

theoretical fit to the experimental data was made by taking an inelastic

mean free path Aee equal to 8 K and an inner potential Vl which represents

t he rea1 part 0 f h 1 1 i on16 equa1 to 8 eV Thetee ectron-e ectron 1nteract

agreement in peak position is good for the (10) beam in the range

25 eV lt E lt 125 eV and for the (11) beam in the range 60 eV lt E lt 100 eV ~ ~ ~ ~

The theoretical and experimental line shapes of the (10) beam show remarkable

agreement but the line shapes of the (11) beam do not fit as well For the

(00) beam the theoretical profile is not similar to the experimental plot

except for the peak at 117 eV Most of this discrepancy for the (00) beam

probably arises from the differences in theoretical and experimental incishy

dence and aximuthal angles used to obtain the profiles The theoretical

profile was calculated assuming a primary electron beam normally incident

experimentally this is not possible with the spectrometer ~sed here since

the (00) beam would not be visible on the LEED screen under these conditions

~~ ~~-----------

---------------------~------------------

154

o

III C

~ C

H 1 o

1

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

-Experiment Withrow and Luscher

g =(00)

o-o-oTheory Duke T = 10 K ej =cpj =0 V=8eVI Aee 811

o 140 SP-1l91

Figure 46 Comparison of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity profiles for clean tungsten (100) surface Theoretical results have been calculated by Duke

155

Data has been obtained for the temperature dependence of clean

elastic intensity profiles No differences in the clean surface (10) and

(11) profiles taken at 600 C and -1500 C are seen even though the LEED pattern

symmetry changes from a (lxl) pattern to a c(2x2) pattern Apparently these

two elastic intensity profiles are not sensitive to the scattering geometry

changes that are manifested in the LEED pattern change

19 92 It has been speculated that the extra half order spots may

result from hydrogen on the surface As shown above the (10) and (11)

profiles dont change even though the half order spots appear on cooling

This may not be surprising if the extra spots seen on cooling the undosed

crystal are related to hydrogen on the surface The cross section for hydrogen

92 93backscattering 1S very weak compared to scattering from tungsten While

a priori it is not necessarily true that the addition of a weak scatterer will

have little effect on intensity profiles this does seem to be the case for

hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten Adsorption of hydrogen has no effect on

18the (00) profile from tungsten (100) and it was found here that~daorption

of hydrogen has very little effect on the (10) beam profile out to 015

monolayer coverage as can be concluded from Figure 321 On the other hand

it is true that adsorption of hydrogen did alter the (11) beam A second

explanation for the extra spots seen on cooling the crystal is that they

result from a tungsten surface reconstruction No theoretical calculations

have been performed which would indicate how reconstruction would affect the

intensity profiles The sensitivity of the profiles to an hypothesized

surface atom reconstruction could be determined from calculations similar to

those leading to the theoretical profiles given in Figure 46 Such a

156

theoretical calculation would be of interest as it would help evaluate how

much credence should be given to a reconstruction hypothesis

More than one atomic geometry may be associated with a given surface

translational symmetry ie associated with the same LEED spot pattern

Different geometries however would be manifested via differences in the

1intensity profiles associated with the same spot pattern After hydrogen

o 0adsorption to 015 monolayer at 60 C and -150 C both the LEED pattern symmetr~

c(2x2) and the elastic intensity profiles are the same Thus this data would indicate hydrogen adsorbs into the same surface atomic geometry at the two

temperatures A comparison of elastic intensity profiles from the undosed and

hydrogen dosed cold surface is given in Figure 47 The LEED pattern for both

conditions has a c(2x2) symmetry The profiles are not the same particularly

the (11) profile above 100 eV and the (1212) profile below 50 eV Hence

the atomic geometry responsible for the two sets of profiles may be different

even though the observed pattern symmetry c(2x2) is the same

The intensity dependence on temperature of the LEED beams has been

observed The intensity of integral order beams monitored from the clean

surface increases with decreasing temperature as shown in Figure 324 The

22 95 exponential temperature dependence obtained is pred1cted from a kinematic

treatment of electron scattering in which thermal vibrations are included via

an effective Debye-Waller factor Experimental Debye temperatures aD can

be calculated from the slopes of the straight lines in Figure 324 22 96

For the (10) beam taken with a primary energy of 1105 eV aD is

calculated to be 280oK 97 This is on the order of the Debye temperature for

~ 0bulk tungsten and higher than the Debye temperature of 183 K found by

157

Figure 47 Comparison of experimental (10) (11) and (1212) elastic intensity profiles from a cold tungsten (100) surface for hydrogen adsorption in the fast state (undosed surface) and in the ~2 state

158

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(100)

g (10)

1 o

o

OJ 0deg T -150degC Undosed and Dosed with H2

shyCl shy+shy 1 0 shyCl

o gt +shy(J)

c Q)

C 0 H

g (1212)

1

o

o

o 140

159

Estrup13 for the (10) beam for intensities taken between 6000K and 8000K

0The Debye temperature for the (11) beam is calculated to be 410 K The

middot h 1 1 95va1ues 0f eD f ound h ere seem to be anoma1ous 1y h19 S1nce ca cu at10ns

indicate that the surface Debye temperature should be lower than the bulk

Debye temperature

The temperature dependence of the half order beam is not the same

as found for the integer order beams Figure 325 shows that the intensity

of this beam increases at different exponential rates over two temperature

regions Down to about -750C the intensity increase is exponential but with

a steeper temperature dependence than observed with the integer order beams

Below -75oC the intensity increases at approximately the same exponential

rate as the integer order beams This same result is found at primary

energies of both 42 eV and 115 eV The effect is reversible with temperature

Yonehara and Schmidt19 measured the temperature dependence of the half order

beams and fit their results to a straight line on a linear scale However

for the data they took immediately after flashing to 25000K an exponential

dependence as found here appears to be as good if not better fit

0Below -75 C the half order beam intensity increases at approximately

the same exponential rate as the integer order beams This suggests that in

this lower temperature region the intensity increase can be explained by the

0 0Debye-Wa1ler factor However between 100 C and -75 C it is not known why

the (1212) spots appear and then increase in intensity so strongly

The intensity dependence on temperature of the (1212) beam

below OoC can be compared to the temperature dependence of the fast state H+

ion intensity These data are given in Figures 312 and 325 Because the

----------------~~ ~~~~~

160

a+ ion yield from the fast state also increases with decreasing temperature

a possible correlation between the appearance of this ion signal and the

appearance of the half order beams is suggested It is tempting to hypothesize

that the fast state is adsorbed into a c(2x2) array and hence half order spots

are produced on cooling However this connection probably cannot be made

For one thing the estimated coverage of the fast state is several orders of

magnitude below a coverage reasonably expected to exert an influence on the

LEED pattern In addition while the fast state has a high total desorption

cross section with the ion signal decaying rapidly after turning oriltthe

electron gun no evidence of this type of behavior is found for the LEED spot

intensities if a corresponding experiment is made A depletion of the fast

state in the electron beam does not affect the half order LEED spot intensities

oFinally in the region below middot75 C the ion signal increases reversibly with

temperature at a steep rate while the LEED spot intensity increases reversshy

ib1y at a slow rate ie the intensity correlation is not good in this

range These arguments do not refute the possibility that the half order

spots are a hydrogen phenomena They strongly indicate however that a

correlation cannot be made between the hydrogen ions observed from the undosed

surface and the appearance of the half order spots aside from the obvious

result that they both occur over the same temperature range It would appear

more reasonable to suggest that the formation of a c(2x2) scattering symmetry

on the surface via reconstruction or some other mechanism provides a

binding site into which a species from the ambient can adsorb and subseshy

quent1y be desorbed The identity of that species is not known

-----------shy

161

45 Electron Scattering Results

Energy loss spectra for electrons scattered from the clean and

hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surface are given in Figures 326 and 327

The second derivative mode has been employed in order to suppress background

as discussed in Appendix B Data have been presented for energy losses

between a and 40 eV for a primary electron beam energy of 110 eV

Several general comments can be made A comparison of the clean

spectra taken at the two temperatures shows they are nearly identical The

only difference is a slight enhancement in the low temperature data of the

shoulder at w = 75 eV (barely evident in the figures) It might be noted

that adsorption of hydrogen produces as peak at 75 eV and the small change

in the low temperature spectrum near this energy may be an indication of a

small hydrogen coverage An attempt was made to observe effects of the fast

state on the clean spectrum After cooling the crystal the fast state was

allowed to populate by turning the gun off for adsorption times of 10 minutes

The spectrum taken after preparing the crystal in this way was identical to

those obtained immediately after cooling Hence fast state hydrogen does

not perturb the electronic structure unlike ~ state hydrogen This result

is not surprising because of the very low coverages calculated for the fast

state from the desorption measurement

Hydrogen adsorption into the ~ states perturbs the clean surface

o 0loss spectrum The same changes are observed at both 60 C and -150 C The

most dramatic changes that occur with increasing coverage are the growth of

a 75 eV loss the movement down in loss energy of the structure at 21 eV in

the clean spectrum and the annihilation of the peak at 25 eV In addition

the loss peak at 107 eV decreases in intensity somewhat

162

Definite changes in the loss spectra are seen (for example at

w = 75 eV) for work function changes of 003 eV This is a coverage of only

3 percent hydrogen At coverages corresponding to a work function change of

015 eV the 75 eV peak is well-developed and the 21 eV structure has moved

down ~ 1 eV While hydrogen is adsorbing at room temperature from 0 to 15

percent of a monolayer half order spots develop in the LEED pattern As

noted before half order spots also develop in the LEED pattern by cooling the

ocrystal to -150 C However electron loss measurements from the cold flashed

surface dont show any changes that correspond to hydrogen on the surface

Thus no correlation can be drawn using electron loss measurements between

the half order patterns obtained by hydrogen dosing and by cooling the crystal

Interpretation of the structure in the energy loss spectra taken

here is nontrivial Although the data incorporates information on the elecshy

tronic structure of the surface and near surface region ie represents

bulk and surface single particle transitions and collective oscillations

both theoretical and experimental complexities arise in attempting to extract

electronic structure from the data While the electron energy loss has been

measured with high resolution information on the momentum transfer ~ q

involved in the electron solid inelastic interaction is not retained since

1) the analyzer integrates over a wide range of ~ qs and 2) the backscattered

electron has undergone at least two collisions - an inelastic scattering

with an accompanying momentum transfer which is not enough to turn the

electron around and an elastic scattering which does Hence the analyzer is

expected to be sensitive to loss mechanisms which are well-defined in energy

but relatively independent of momentum transfer Transitions satisfying these

163

conditions are possible in tungsten Luscher has shown25 that at least one

relatively flat and narrow d-band in tungsten located near the Fermi level

acts as the final state for electron excitations involving core electrons

This d-band may be operative as a final state for transitions involving

valence and adsorbate electrons as well

25The structure at 210 eV and 255 eV has been identified as

resulting from surface and bulk plasmons Adsorption of hydrogen increases

the energy of the surface plasmon but does not affect the energy of the bulk

plasmon

The energy losses at 381 eV 346 eV and 324 eV remain constant

as a function of hydrogen coverage These losses correspond in both relative

strengths and separation in energy to tungsten core electron excitations from

he 5 an (doublet ) eve 1s f ound h at 36 Vt p d 4f 1 1nmiddot x-ray p otoem1SS10n 99 9 e

333 eV and 311 eV below the Fermi level A comparison of these photo-

emission values to the energy losses observed here would indicate the position

of the final state operative in the energy loss measurements is 13 eV above

the Fermi level

It would be convenient to use this value) 13 eV for the final

state energy in interpreting the rest of the sharply peaked structure arising

from electron transitions There are difficulties with such an approach

however The data being compared in calculating the final state energy

location have been obtained with two techniques that perturb the adsorbateshy

plus-solid system in distinctly different ways The observed energy losses

in electron scattering are strongly influenced by interband oscillators

electron screening and relaxation effects and these perturbations are not

164

constant as a function of loss energy Hence extension of the 13 eV value

in interpreting data at other loss energies may not be valid None the less

using the 13 eV final state the peaks in the clean ELS spectrum at 25 eV

and 40 eV would correspond to peaks in the photoemission spectra at 12 eV

(25 eV - 13 eV) and at 27 eV (40 eV - 13 eV) respectively There is

no obvious correspondence between these peaks and structure seen in clean

35 36surface photoemission spectra The structure changes on adsorption in

the ELS spectra for 0 eV S w ~ 4 eV may reflect the sharp photoemission loss

which appears at 25 eV as hydrogen coverage increases The strong 75 eV

energy loss which appears in the ELS spectra as hydrogen adsorbs onto the

crystal would correspond to structure in photoemission data near 62 eV

(75 eV - 13 eV) Recently photoemission peaks at 52 eV and between

10068 eV and 78 eV have been reported From these comparisons it can be

seen that quantitative interpretation of the fine structure in the energy

loss measurements cannot be made with this simple model

165

CHAPTER 5

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

An experimental apparatus for surface research has been designed

constructed and successfully placed in operation It incorporates the

necessary hardware and electronics for performing several complementary

surface probing techniques including Auger electron spectroscopy retarding

potential work function measurements low energy electron diffraction electron

energy loss spectroscopy and electron stimulated desorption of ions System

electronics allow the instrument to be easily switched between the techniques

The apparatus has been used to study the chemisorption of hydrogen on a

tungsten single crystal surface over the temperature range 600C to -150

0C

The instrument combines an electron gun with an energy spectrometer

a LEED display system and a crystal manipulator The electron gun is capable

of focusing a monoenergetic electron current of up to 21 ~A onto a

macroscopic sample The gun has been operated from 5 eV to 1800 eV The

high resolution high sensitivity spectrometer consists of a retarding field

analyzer in series with two electrostatic deflection analyzers The energy

resolution of the spectrometer is 21 without using the retarding field

analyzer This can be improved to less than 1 under some conditions by

applying a retarding field The spectrometer output can be detected using

a atemeter or using modulation techniques The instrument has been used to

analyze electron and ion signals from the sample and to determine the charge

to mass ratio of desorbed ions The experimental sample a tungsten crystal

which has been polished to within 01 0 of the (100) face is mounted on the

166

end of a crystal manipulator The manipulator is used to position the sample

as needed A two grid LEED display system has been used to study LEED

pattern symmetry The intensities of LEED spots have been monitored with a

spot photometer

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental conditions using Auger electron spectroscopy The Auger

spectrum obtained after flashing the crystal to 22000 K is free of carbon and

oxygen Auger structure The electron gun could be operated under normal

experimental conditions without contaminating the surface but a carbon Auger

peak appears if high gun currents and voltages are used This effect Crul

be taken into consideration when interpreting the data Some weak structure

in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface is seen between 475 eV and

525 eVa It is not possible to conclusively determine if this structure

results from Auger transitions in tungsten or from some other source

Retarding potential work function measurements have been made as

a reproducible measure of hydrogen coverage Adsorption of hydrogen onto

othe tungsten (100) crystal at 60 C yields a maximum work function change of

098 plusmn 004 eVa This is in good agreement with previously reported values

The work function change with exposure to hydrogen for the tungsten sample

at -lSOoc was found to be the same within experimental accuracy as found

at higher temperature The maximum work function change at -lSOoc is

092 plusmn 004 eVa Cooling the flashed crystal from 2200 C to -lSOoC resulted

in an increase in the work function of approximately 005 eVa An intrinsic

(clean surface) temperature dependence of this magnitude appears reasonable

from theoretical considerations

167

The time-of-flight technique employed for mass analysis was found

to work well Ion species H+ and 0+ as well as H + have been identified2

Relative intensities of the ion yields could only be estimated with this

technique as instrumented H+ ions are electron desorbed from the surface

after adsorption of hydrogen In addition H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface after a flash if the crystal was cooled below room temperature No

HZ+ ions were desorbed from the crystal However H2+ and H+ ions produced

by ionization of the background and also by ESD from surfaces in the experishy

mental chamber were detected under certain operating conditions This signal

could be separated from the ions originating at the crystal surface by biasing

the crystal several volts positive with respect to the spectrometer

The distribution in energy of H+ ions electron desorbed from a 60 0 C

tungsten (100) surface has been observed The distribution has a normal line

shape with a peak intensity at 30 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a half width

of Z6 eV No evidence of distinct ~l and ~Z adsorption states was found in

the energy distribution line shape the distribution is the same for coverages

corresponding to both the ~Z adsorption state and the ~l plus ~2 adsorption

states The intensity of the U+ ion signal is coverage dependent The deshy

pendence found here is in agreement with previously reported work The maxshy

imum in intensity of the ion yield occurs for a work function change of 018

eV The total desorption cross section for hydrogen ions from the ~2 state

is 5xlO-ZO cmZ bull

An H+ ion signal can be desorbed from the undosed (100) surface if

the crystal temperature is lowered below room temperature T~fs represents

a previously unreported hydrogen adsorption state Experiments in which

the pressure was carefully monitored indicate that this hydrogen results

168

from adsorption onto the crystal from the background However the state

labeled the fast state is not populated by the adsorption of H2 from the

gas handling system The adsorbing species that populates the fast state

is not known Hydrogen coverage in the fast state is estimated to be ~10-4

monolayer which is an extremely small coverage The fast state hydrogen

desorbs with a broad energy distribution which has a peak intensity at

25 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a tail extending up to gt9 eV The total

17 2desorption cross section for H+ from this state is high lxlO- cm This is

on the same order of magnitude as the cross section for desorption of the

~ hydrogen state However no evidence of CO or oxygen contaminants which

are associated with the ~ state was found The techniques used to chemshy

ically characterize the surface were sensitive to about 1 percent of a mono-

layer so these two contaminants could have been present at coverages less

than 1 percent

Hydrogen (H2) dosed onto the low temperature surface co-adsorbs

with the fast state in a separate e state This can be concluded from energy

distribution and desorption curve measurements The maximum ion yield obshy

tainable from the low temperature surface occurs for a work function change

of 011 eV This is 007 eV lower than the maximum in the ion yield from

the room temperature hydrogen dosed surface This difference may indicate

that the mechanism responsible for the decrease in ion yield as the ~l state

fills is operative at a lower hydrogen coverage at low temperatures An

alternative possibility is that hydrogen coverage at the low temperature can

not be measured by the same expression relating coverage to work function

change as used at the higher temperature

169

Low energy electron diffraction pattern changes observed as a

function of hydrogen coverage on the room temperature surface are in agreeshy

ment with those reported in the literature The surface translational symshy

metry is strongly coverage dependent The maximum in the c(2x2) pattern

associated with the ~2 state occurs at a work function change of 015 eV for

room temperature adsorption If the crystal is flashed to ~22000K and then

cooled below room temperature the (lxl) pattern characteristic of the clean

surface changes into a c(2x2) pattern Since H+ ions can be electron desorbed

from the flashed surface if the crystal is cooled to this same temperature

range and since the ~2 state hydrogen is known to produce a c(2x2) pattern

it has been suggested that the low temperature c(2x2) LEED pattern may result

from hydrogen on the surface However no evidence was found to support this

hypothesis The ions desorbed from the cold surface did not originate from

the f 2 state but from a distinctly different state labeled the fast state

It is questioned whether the low coverage in the fast state is sufficient to

produce half order LEED spots There is no indication from the ELS measureshy

ments that hydrogen has diffused to the surface from the bulk Electron

energy loss spectra show almost no change on cooling the crystal below room

temperature These spectra are sensitive to electronic structure changes

resulting from hydrogen adsorption of as little as 3 percent of a monolayer

The (10) and (11) LEED beam intensity profiles taken from the undosed surface

are not changed by cooling the crystal It would be of interest to compare

this experimental result to theoretical elastic intensity profile calculations

from both a normal and a recons tructed tungsten surface This would help

determine if reconstruction is a viable explanation for the cold surface

170

c(2x2) phenomenon

Low energy electron diffraction elastic intensity profiles for

several beams have been reported from the clean tungsten (100) surface and

from this surface dosed with hydrogen in the ~2 state These profiles have

been compared to published data where possible Careful control over expershy

imental parameters is essential in order to obtain agreement between the data

The clean surface intensity profiles have been compared to preliminary theoretshy

ical calculations While fair agreement Catl be obtained both experimental

and theoretical problems must be solved before a reliable calculation of

atomic geometry for the hydrogen over layer can be made A comparison of

experimental profiles for the low temperature undosed and hydrogen dosed

c(2x2) patterns suggests that the atomic geometries responsible for these

identical patterns arenot the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been presented as a

f~~ction of hydrogen coverage Changes in the electronic structure at the

surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption are observed Structure due to

the surface and hulk plasmons are identified and peaks due to tungsten

Sp and 4f core level transitions can be identified by comparison to published

photoemission data Interpretation of other structure in the spectra requires

more study

171

REFERENCES

1 C B Duke Jap J App1 Phys 13 (1974) to be published

2 For example see R R Ford Advan Catalysis 21 51 (1970) for review of CO adsorption on transition metals or J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chern Phys 54 4969 (1971) and T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et PrPri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155 for a review of hydrogen adsorption on tungsten (100)

3 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Vac Sci Techno1 ~ 63 (1971)

4 P A Redhead Vacuum~ 203 (1962)

5 G Ehrlich Advan Catalysis 14 221 (1963)

6 L A Petermann Progress in Surface Science vol 3 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1972) p 1

7 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chern Phys 21 5352 (1969)

8 T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et Propri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155

9 D L Adams and L H Germer Sur Sci 23 419 (1970)

10 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 40 295 (1973)

11 G Tibbetts PhD thesis University of Illinois 1967

12 D L Adams Sur Sci 42 12 (1974)

13 P J Estrup The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 191

14 C B Duke and C W Tucker Jr Sur Sci 11 231 (1969)

15 C B Duke Electron Emission Spectroscopy edited by W Dekeyser et a1 (D Reidel Publishing Co Dordrecht Holland 1973) p 1

16 C B Duke N O Lipari and G E Laramore J Vac Sci Techno1 11 180 (1974)

17 M G Laga11y T C Ngoc and M B Webb Phys Rev Lett 26 1557 (1971)

172

18 P J Estrup and J Anderson J Chern Phys 45 2254 (1966)

19 K Yonehara and L D Schmidt Sur Sci 12 238 (1971)

20 E W Plummer and A E Bell J Vac Sci Techno1 2 583 (1972) bull

21 C A Papageorgopoulos and J M Chen Sur Sc i 39 283 (1973)

22 R F Wallis B C Clark and R Herman The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 171

23 M R Leggett and R A Armstrong Sur Sci 24 404 (1971)

24 D Edwards Jr PhD thesis University of Illinois 1970

25 P E Luscher PhD thesis Northwestern University 1974 to be published

26 R Gomer Field Emission and Field Ionization (Harvard U Press Cambridge Ma ss 1961)

27 R D Young Phys Rev 113 110 (1959)

28 J W Gadzuk and E W Plummer Rev Mod Phys 45 487 (1973)

29 C B Duke and M E Alpounderieff J Chern Phys 46 923 (1967)

30 J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Bl 2110 (1970)

31 C N Berglund and W E Spicer Phys Rev 136 part A Al030 (1964)

32 F M Propst and T C Piper J Vac Sci Technol ~ 53 (1967)

33 G Herzberg Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure I Spectra of Diatomic Molecules (D Van Nostrand New York 1963) 2nd ed

34 E W Plummer and J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Lett 25 1493 (1970)

35 B J Waclawski and E W Plummer Phys Rev Lett 29 783 (1972)

36 B Feuerbacher and B Fitton Phys Rev Lett 29 786 (1972)

37 P A Redhead Can J Phys 42 886 (1964)

38 D Menzel and R Gomer J Chern Phys 41 3311 (1964)

39 D Lichtman and R McQuistan Progress in Nuclear Energy Analytical Chemistry edited by H A Elion and D C Stewart (Pergamon Press New York 1965) series 9 vol 4 p 93

173

40 U N Ageev and N I Ionov Progress in Surface Science vol 5 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1974) p 1

41 T E Madey Sur Sci 36 281 (1973)

42 A Benninghoven E Loebach and N Treitz J Vac Sci Techno1 2 600 (1972)

43 L W Swanson A E Bell C H Hinrichs L C Crouser and B E Evans Literature Review of Adsorption on Metal Surfaces vol 1 NASA CR-72402 (NASA Lewis Research Center Cleveland Ohio 1967) p 76

44 R V Culver and F C Tompkins Advan Catalysis l 67 (1959)

45 See reference 43 p 49

46 J A Becker Actes du 2ieme Congres International de 1a Cata1yse (Edition Technip Paris 1961) 1777

47 R A Armstrong Can J Phys 44 1753 (1966)

48 B J Hopkins and K R Pender Sur Sci ~ 316 (1966)

49 R A Collins and B H B1ott J App1 Phys 40 5390 (1969)

50 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chem Phys 54 4969 (1971)

51 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 42 485 (1974)

52 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 52 1150 (1970)

53 See reference 7 Fig 8

54 K Fujiwara J Phys Soc Japan 11 7 (1957)

55 G D Bond Disc Faraday Soc 41 200 (1966)

56 F M Propst unpublished

57 R L Park The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 281

58 T B Grime1y Adsorption-Desorption Phenomena edited by F Ricca (Academic Press New York 1972) p 215

59 L W Anders R S Hansen and L S Bartell J Chern Phys 595277(1973)

60 J R Schrieffer J Vac Sci Techno1 2 561 (1972)

174

61 D M Newns Phys Rev 178 1123 (1969)

62 J R Schrieffer and R Gomer Sur Sci 25 315 (1971)

63 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn Phys Rev Lett 30 610 (1973)

64 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn to be published

65 P J Jennings and E G McRae Sur Sci 23 363 (1970)

66 W H Weinberg J Vac Soc Technol lQ 89 (1973)

67 L A Harris J Appl Phys 39 1419 (1968)

68 C C Chang Sur Sci 25 53 (1971)

69 T Cooper PhD thesis University of Illinois Urbana Illinois 1970

70 E M Purcell Phys Rev 54 818 (1938)

71 R Herzog Zeits F Physik 89 449 (1934)

72 Coordinated Science Laboratory Progress Report for July 1970 through June 1971 University of Illinois Urbana Illinois

73 See for example Handbook and Catalog of Operational Amplifiers BurrshyBrown Research Corp 1969 p 44

74 R W Jnyner J Rickman and M W Roberts Sur Sci 39 445 (1973)

75 C Lea and C H B Mee Sur Sci 11 332 (1971)

76 W A Coghlan and R E Clausing A Catalog of Calculated Auger Transitions for the Elements ORNL-TM-3576 (Oak Ridge National Lab Oak Ridge Tenn 1971)

77 As read by optical pyrometer the edge of the target measured 22000 K and the center 2500oK

78 B B Dayton Trans 3rd AVS National Vacuum Symposium 1956 (Pergamon Press New York 1957) p 5

79 T E Madey Sur Sci 33 355 (1972)

80 S C Brown Basic Data of Plasma Physics (Technology Press of MIT Cambridge Mass and John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 115

81 H D Hagstrum Rev Mod Phys 23 185 (1951)

175

82 M Nishijima PhD thesis University of Illinois 1969

83 G D Watts A R Jones and B J Hopkins Sur Sci 45 705 (1974)

84 R A Armstrong Sur Sc i sect 478 (1967)

85 E H B1evis and C R Crowell Phys Rev 133 part A A580 (1964)

86 C R Crowell and R A Armstrong Phys Rev 114 1500 (1959)

87 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 55 4253 (1971)

88 R Frauenfelder J Vac Sci Technol sect 388 (1969)

89 G E Moore and F C Unterwald J Chem Phys 40 2639 (1964)

90 S Dushman Scientific Foundations of Vacuum Technigue (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 19

91 P S P Wei J Chem Phys 53 2939 (1970)

92 J C Tracy private communication

93 J J Lander and J Morrison J Appl Phys 34 3517 (1963)

94 M Fink and A C Yates Atomic Data (to be published)

95 G E Laramore and C B Duke Phys Rev ~ I 4783 (1970)

96 J F Wendelken PhD thesis University of Illinois 1975

97 An inner potential of 8 eV has been assumed in this calculation

98 A Guinier X-Ray Diffraction (W H Freeman and Co San Francisco 1963) p 192

99 K Seigbahn C Nordling A Fahlman R Nordberg K Hamrin J Helman G Johansson T Bergmark S E Karlsson K Lindgren and B Lindberg ESCA - Atomic Molecular and Solid State Structure Studied by Means of Electron Spectroscopy (Almqvist Wiksells Uppsala 1967)

100 W F Egelhoff and D L Perry Phys Rev Lett 34 93 (1975)

176

APPENDIX A

A tungsten tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple spot-welded to the

side of the crystal is used to measure target temperatures The thermocouple

was calibrated against a copper-constantan standard A low temperature

freezing slush of isopentane (2-methylbutane) was made in a dewar by adding

liquid nitrogen (Isopentane freezes at -15989degC) The solution was allowed

to slowly warm up to room temperature over three hours during which a semi-

static calibration was made The reference junction was kept in a slush of

distilled ice water The calibration is shown in Figure AI

Using an identical technique a tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26

rhenium thermocouple was also calibrated as shown in Figure A2 TIlis thermoshy

couple does not have an inflection point in the range 00 to -195degC and it

00 h t t1mes more sens1t1ve over t he temperature range to -lSOoC than the1S e1g

tungstentungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple A tungsten-S rhenium wire should

spot-weld to tungsten more readily than a pure tungsten wire Thus because

of its increased sensitivity and ease of attaching to the tungsten crystal a

tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple appears a better

temperature sensor for low temperature research on tungsten

In the apparatus used the wires associated with the target manipulashy

tor including the thermocouple leads wind around the manipulator shaft to

provide rotational motion In order to get the 76 mm (003 in) diameter

thermocouple wires to wind smoothly around the shaft it was found necessary to

spring load them by turning a short segment of the wires into a 16 mm diameter

spring Unfortunately the tungsten-5 rhenium wire available proved too

brittle to turn into a spring and thus could not be used

012 _ ___r____~_-r____~_-r____~_ ___r______r___r____r__r___

C- WI W-26 Re Thermocouple Calibration Reference Junction at OdegC W Lead +

~ 008-lJ

W-26 Re LeadshyiE w 004 ~ 0shy

8J

0 o E

t-shy-I -I

Q)

c -004 tshy

-008 I I I I I I I

-200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 shy

Temperature (OC) SP-1069

Figure Al Calibration curve for W-5 ReW-26 Re thermocouple

o

-gt -04E -lL ~ w -OS 2 0shy

8J -12

o E

W-5 Re I W-26 Re Thermocouple Co libration Reference Junct ion at OdegC W-5Re Lead + W-26 Re Leadshy

J shy --shy~ ~ t- 16 0----

-20 I I

-200 -ISO -160 -140 -120 -100 -SO -60 -40 -20 0

Temperature (OC)

SP-1l73

Figure A2 Calibration curve for WW-26 Re thermocouple

-J 00

179

APPENDIX B

When operating the spectrometer in the electron mode at an effective

pass energy E the output current of the electron multiplier N(E) is proporshy

tional to the electron current originating at the target with energy between E

and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance solid angle of the analyzer

An energy distribution of the electron signal from the target can be measured

by sweeping the effective pass energy of the instrument This distribution

consists of rapidly varying true secondary and characteristic loss structure

interpretable in terms of electron transitions and collective oscillations in

the target plus a smoothly varying background In order to separate the

structure ~rom the background the energy distribution is electronically

67differentiated using a technique proposed by Harrismiddot A small sinusoidal

oscillation is applied to the effective pass energy of the spectrometer so

that the energy of the electrons passing through the spectrometer oscillates

around the instantaneous dc pass energy E If the detected current N(E) is 3

expanded in a Taylors series around the energy E where the sinusoidal 3

oscillation is E-E = K sin wt the first four terms are 3

N(E) N(E ) + K dN (E l (1 - cos 2wt)3 dE

E=E E=E i3

(3 sin wt - sin 3wt) +

E=E 3

Rearranging

180

dN(E) ) + K3 term + S1n wt (B2)N(E) = N(E ) + + K dE(i E=E

i

K2 d2N(E) 4 )+ K term + cos 2wt + + ( 4 2dE E=E1

The coefficients of the sin wt and cos 2wt terms are found to be proportional

respectively to the first two derivatives of N(E) providing K is small enough

such that the higher order terms in K can be dropped Under this assumption

a signal proportional to the first or second derivative of N(E) is obtained

by synchronously detecting the appropriate harmonic of the output

If a peak structure in the output signal is represented by a

Gaussian G(E) centered at E and the background represented by a polynomialo

in E B(E) then N(E) and the first two derivatives of N(E) evaluated at E o

become

N(E) = B(E) + G(E) (B3) -~(E-EO)2

2 d N(E) = a + bE + cE + + 1 e 2 (B4)

(2TT)2

2N(E=E ) = a + bE + cE + d 1 (B5)o o 0 cr (2TT)2

dN(E) = b + 2cE + 0 (B6)o E=E

dE

o

-d 1 = 2c + (B7)1 2 0 (2TT)2 0

E=E o

- -

2

181

From Equation B6 the first derivative evaluated at E has no contribution o

from the structure G(E) Extremum points in dN(E)dE occur at (E ~ E )2 = 0 o

if the background terms of order 3 or greater are not considered Using this

result in Equation B6 gives

~dltplusmng) edN(E) = b + 2c (E to) + bull I (B8)dE

0- 0 (2n)2E=E + 0

0shy

The relation between the original signal N(E) and the synchronously

detected signals can be seen from Equations B4 through B8 There is some

background suppression in both modes If N(E) is slowly varying the higher

order background terms that remain are small The peak to peak height of

the first harmonic signal is

1dN dN = 4ccr + - 2cb 1 e-2~-2crG(E-E ~ 0) (B9)

dE dE 0 (2n)2 0

E=E -0E=E +u o o

The intensity of the second harmonic signal evaluated at E is approximately 0

proportional to1 G(E) Hence using the stated assumptions the detected 0 2 0

first and second harmonics of N(E) contain structure which is directly

proportional to G(E)

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as is

commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in looking at

electron scattering energy loss measurements

182

APPENDIX C

The process of desorption of ions from a surface by electron

bombardment is referred to as electron stimulated desorption The theory to

account for this phenomenon was independently proposed by Redhead37 and by

38Menzel and Gomer A brief explanation of their model follows

In Figure Cl schematic potential energy diagrams are given for the

metal plus ground state adsorbate CM + A) and metal plus ionic state (M- + A+)

as a function of separation distance x of the adsorbing atom or ion from the

metal surface These two curves are labeled VG(x) and V(x) for the ground

state and ionic state respectively The nature of these interactions has

been described37 8l and several interaction calculations for hydrogen on metal

59 63surfaces have been g~ven The zero in potential energy in Figure 41 is

defined as the energy of the ion A+ at rest at infinity from the surface of M

The nucleus of the chemisorbed adsorbate is located at the minimum in the

ground state potential energy curve The wave function ~G(x) of the adsorbate

in the ground state on the surface is shown centered at a position x which ~

corresponds to the minimum in energy of VG

VG determines ~G(x) Vertical

transitions from the ground state to the ionic state (labeled 1 in the

diagram) are induced by incident electron bombardment of the surface

Secondary electrons leaving the surface also can cause such transitions

Once excited the ion is subjected to a repulsive force and moves away from

the surface (indicated by 2) The ionized adsorbate can be neutralized as it

leaves the surface and hence desorb as a neutral (indicated by 3) or it can

be de-excited back to the ground state and not desorb (indicated by 4) Ions

183

V(x)

gt ~ Ion ~ ~ 2 )III V(xi)(I) c +E K M-+A+w 0 f (v)+=c (I) +shy0 Cl

14 3 I-ltP Neutral

M+A

Ede t

ltPG (x)

~

DistanceX SP-1201

Figuze Cl Schematic diagram of adsorbate-metal interactions showing the transitions involved in the theory of electron stimulated desorption

184

that originate at x x leave the surface with energy V(x) The energyL L

80distribution of the desorbed ions f(V(xraquo is determined by the reflectionL

2of the probability density distribution I~G(xi)1 through the ionic state

energy curve This can be given by the expression

P(x ) f(V(xraquo

L (Cl)L ~~Ix = x

L

where N is the number of species A adsorbed in the ground state per unit

area a is the cross section for excitation of the species A from the groundex

state to the ionic state (transition 1) ~G(x) is defined above and P(x ) isi

the probability that an ion starts from the position x = x and moves awayL

from the L gLvensurface without being neutralized P(x) can be by373881

P(x ) exp(- J~dx ~)i x v(x) (C2)

i

where R(x) is the rate that the ions produced at the surface by electron

impact are reneutralized v(x) is the velocity of the ion at a distance x

from the surface This depends explicitly on V(x) as shown by Equation C3

for an ion of mass M and charge q

2q (V(X i ) - V(Xraquo)21

v(x) ( M (C3)

Additional complexities for example multiple initial and ionic states or

electron induced state conversion can be added to this simple model

185

The mass transport occurring at the surface during an ESD measurement

can be described in a kinetic treatment which relates the observed ion signal

to physical parameters characteristic of the experimental conditions The

change with time of the surface coverage per area of an adsorbate dNdt is

given by the rate of arrival of the adsorbate onto the surface minus the rate

of desorption from the surface In the simplest formulation of these proshy

cesses only adsorption from the background and desorption due to electron

bombardment need be considered The electron stimulated desorption flux of

ions is assumed proportional to the electron current density j and to the e

surface coverage per unit area N The proportionality constant is

tthe total desorption cross section Q (NE ) Qt(NE ) is in general a pr~ pr~

function of both the coverage and the primary electron energy For the

simple model given above the total desorption cross section is the sum of

the ionic Q+ and neutral Qn desorption cross sections The adsorption

rate is equal to the striking rate times the sticking probability s(N)

which in general is a function of the coverage The time dependence of N can

now be written as

j Qt(NE )N dNdt = s(N)yP _ ~ pu (C 4)e

where P is the partial pressure of the adsorbing species and y is a constant

equal to the number of molecules that strike unit area of the surface per unit

time and pressure

The measured electron stimulated desorption yield of A ions i + isA

assumed proportional to the incident current i the coverage of A per unit e

area N and the detection efficiency of the instrument G The proportionality

186

constant is the ionic desorption cross section Q+(NE ) (Since the only pr~

adsorbate being considered in this work is hydrogen the subscript A will be

replaced by H) This relation for iH+ can be written

= i Q+(NE )NG (CS)e pr~

Equation C4 can be solved for N in closed form under certain

simplifying assumptions The dependence of the cross section on primary

energy does not affect the form of the solution (if the primary energy is

kept constant) Then Qt can be written Qt (E ) if the cross section canpri

be shown to be independent of coverage This is not the case in general so

its validity for each metal-adsorbate system has to be examined This is

done in the text for H2 adsorbed on W(100) so the assumption will be assumed

here Likewise the sticking probability will be assumed independent of N

Equation C4 can now be solved to yield

(C6)

N is the initial hydrogen coverage at t o and T is given by ~

(C7)

Combining Equations CS and C6 gives for the g+ ion yield

(C8)

187

where i is the initial ion yield at t = 0 and iH+ is given byH~ equil

+ esyPAG ~ (C9)

Q

Equation C8 shows that the H+ yield decreases with time to a

saturation value iH+ This decay of the ESD ion yield with time is equil

called a desorption curve A semilogarithmic plot of iH+ - i + versusHequil time should yield a straight line the slope of which is -17 From this

slope and the definition of 7 the total desorption cross section charactershy

izing the hydrogen binding state can be calculated

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

1S considerably more dbull40 a diffusionpressure ~nvo1ve Conceptually such

process can be considered in two steps 1) the diffusion of hydrogen from the

bulk to just inside the surface or to a near surface layer and 2) the

jumping from this configuration to surface sites Diffusion from the bulk to

the near surface layer could be described by Ficks law If N is the conshy

centration of hydrogen in the near surface layer and N the surface concentrashy

tion of hydrogen then the time dependence of N + N due to bulk diffusion

can be written as

d(N+Nl _ D dn (C 10)dt - dx

where D is the diffusion constant for hydrogen in tungsten and dndx is the

concentration gradient of hydrogen just inside the surface The coverage N

in surface sites will change as a result of hydrogen jumping from the near

188

surface layer to the surface and vice versa The rate of jumping to the

surface d( N )dt can be assumed proportional to the concentration Nt

and to some function f(N) which describes the availability of surface sites

The diffusion rate to the surface from the near surface layer would also be

exponentially dependent on an activation barrier energy E The reversebs

flux from the surface to the near surface layer can be written in an

equivalent form An expression for the change in surface concentration with

time due to diffusion to and from the near surface layer can be written as

-E kT -E kTb~~ = CbsNte s f(N) - CsbNe sb g(N) (ClI)

The first term on the right-hand side represents the rate of diffusion from

the near surface layer to the surface and the second term represents the

rate of diffusion from the surface back to the near surface layer cbs and

are constants Esb and g(N) correspond toE and f(N) respectivelycsb bs

A term representing depletion of the surface state due to incident electron

bombardment similar to the second term on the right of Equation C4 could

be added in Equation Cll This has been omitted since only the case je = 0

will be considered here In principle an expression for N can now be

obtained by solving Equations ClO and Cll A general solution is not easily

obtained However it is evident that the time dependence of N due to

diffusion could realistically be similar to that expected from background

adsorption For example for the isothermal case if Nt is assumed constant

and f(N) assumed equal to (1 - NN ) assumptions that are reasonable for max

small coverages it can be shown from Equation 44 that N increases

189

exponentially in time to an equilibrium value For N small this solution

would be approximately linear in time the same result obtained for the time

dependence of background adsorption However background pressure doesnt

enter into the above diffusion calculation If the fast state phenomena is

diffusion related N would be expected to be independent of background

pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence for

adsorption from the background

_ _

190

VITA

Stephen Parker Withrow was born in Washington DC on February 2

1945 He attended Northwestern Senior High School in Hyattsville Maryland

graduating in 1963 He enrolled at Cornell University in Ithaca New York in

September 1963 In June 1967 he received a Bachelor of Science in

Engineering Physics In September 1967 he enrolled in the Physics Department

at the University of Illinois in Urbana Illinois He received his Masters

of Science in Physics in February 1969 He served at a Teaching Assistant

in the Physics Department for four years and also as a Research Assistant in

the Coordinated Science Laboratory while doing his thesis research He is

the coauthor of the publication Environmentally Assisted Crack Growth in

Glass G M Sinclair and S P Withrow Naval Research Laboratory Report

6635

_-------------shy-----------_ bull

Page 4: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …

found No evidence was found from work function and electron scattering

experiments to support the hypothesis that the low temperature c(2x2)

pattern results from hydrogen on the surface In addition the fast hydrogen

state is not believed to be responsible for the c(2x2) pattern LEED

intensity profiles from the undosed cold surface c(2x2) pattern and from the

c(2x2) pattern associated with the ~2 hydrogen state are not identical an

indication that the atomic geometry responsible for the two patterns may not

be the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been obtained as a

function of hydrogen coverage for loss energies of 0 eV ~ w lt 40 eV Hydrogen

adsorption has a marked effect on the spectra Fine structure in the data

has been discussed and compared to photoemission data Cooling the clean

crystal below room temperature causes only a slight change in the energy loss

spectrum

iii

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I would like to sincerely thank my advisor Professor F M Propst

for guidance given throughout the course of this research and for his knowledge

of surface research which helped shape this work Dr C B Duke for many

helpful conversations and for assistance in the analysis of the data my wife

Lois for her patience and steadfast encouragement my parents and parents-inshy

law for their generous and needed support Paul Luscher and John Wendelken for

their creativity and cooperation in the design of the apparatus and for many

interesting scientific discussions Jim Burkstrand and Chris Foster for their

friendship and technical help on many occasions Bob Bales George Bouck Bob

Fults Bill Beaulin Lyle Bandy and Bill Lawrence for design assistance and

expert workmanship in the construction of the apparatus Nick Vassos and Bill

Thrasher for the imaginative and superior work in materials processing necesshy

sary in the construction of the instrument Gene Gardner and co-workers for

able assistance in electronics Bob MacFarlane and assistants for their high

quality draftmanship Jack Gladin and Jim Gray for an excellent job on the

photography needed for this research Bob Ebeling for his cooperation in the

print shop Chris Fleener for an excellent typing of the manuscript and the

rest of the staff of the Coordinated Science Laboratory whose efforts have

been gratefully appreciated during my tenure as a graduate student

bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter Page

1 MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

11 Introduction and Motivationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

12 Review of Literature bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

121 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4 122 Thermal Desorptionbull o 4 123 LEED and HEEDbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 7 124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and

Photoemissionbullbullbull 100 bullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbull

125 Electron Stimulated Desorptionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 12 126 Work Functionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 13o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

1 27 Chemical Probes bullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull 14I) O

128 Chemisorption Models bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 15 1 29 Theoretical Treatment bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 19 1 210 Literature Surnmaryo 20

13 Review of Experimental Techniques bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 21

2 EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull ~ bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

21 CGeneral Description bull 22

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shieldingbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 25

24 Energy Spectrometer 29

25 Spectrometer Electronics bullbull 45o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

26 LEED Display System 490 bullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull I)

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 51

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 57

29 Gas Handling System o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 62

210 Mass Spectrometer bullbullbullbull o 64

3 EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE AND RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

31 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

32 Experimental Procedure o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current

Measurements 6811 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull

323 Target Temperature Measurement bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 325 Ion Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 72o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

v

33 Ion Species Identificationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 74

34 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 77

35 u+ Ion Desorption Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 351 ut Ion Energy Distributionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 352 Desorption Curve Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 93 353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State a+ Ion

Signal 4) 96

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 98

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull lll

37 Electron Scattering Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 119

4 DISCUSSION OF RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

42 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 127

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 129 431 Room Temperature Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 130 432 Low Temperature Fast State Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 135 433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull142

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 145

45 Electron Scattering Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 161

5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull165

REFERENCES 171

APPENDIX A 0 176 poundI

APPENDIX B 9 c 179

APPENDIX C 0 182 0 bull

VITA 190lilt bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbull

1

CHAPTER 1

MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

11 Introduction and Motivation

The experimental investigation of chemisorption of gases onto metallic

surfaces has uncovered in the past decade a baffling complexity of adsorption

geometries and binding state kinetics and energetics A growing interest in

surface phenomena generated by the questions raised in these researches and

by the long anticipated use of the answers has led to the rapid development

of new surface probing techniques and to an increase in the availability of new

technologies compatible with surface research Aided by the new technologies

and techniques chemisorption research has been undertaken on many different

systems (system =solid substrate + gas adsorbate) under a wide range of

environmental conditions Surface theoreticians have proposed microscopic and

phenomenological models with which data have been analyzed and compared A

large experimental and theoretical literature in the field has resulted

The study of adsorption on metal surfaces has among its primary

objectives a detailed description of the physical geometry of the atoms in the

surface layers and a quantitative understanding of electronic and chemical

surface phenomena While considerable progress has been made in documenting

gas-surface phenomena it has been only in the past three years that any

credible claims to understanding specific surface overlayer geometries have

1been made At the same time many basic questions involving system kinetics

and energetics have not been adequately resolved 2

It has become apparent from the failure of the research effort to

satisfy the above objectives and from seemingly conflicting data that adequate

2

characterization is basic to all surface experimentation The need for such

characterization has been strongly emphasized by disagreement between quasishy

similar research performed at different locations Small impurity concentrashy

tions small changes in crystal orientation minor temperature differences etc

often have considerable effects on experimental measurements

A corollary to the necessity of being able to characterize the

surface is the importance of being able to control the surface characterization

In order to compare data it is necessary to reproduce all experimental paramshy

eters accurately The theory to which experimental data are compared is

constrained by complexity to be based on ideal clean substrates with a

definable gas-surface interaction It is desirable to be able to choose the

adsorbate-substrate system and experimental parameters that can also be used

with theoretical models Of course compromises are inevitable

One approach in surface research has been to incorporate several

experimental techniques into one apparatus At the present time this approach

is increasingly more common A combination of surface sensitive probes offers

many advantages It provides for more checks of the data against results

published in the literature It allows for better characterization of the

experimental parameters It allows surface phenomena to be probed in more than

one way in order to eliminate ambiguities andor to reinforce conclusions It

eliminates the uncertainties that arise from data taken at different locations

using the techniques separately hence it allows better correlations between

data taken using the different techniques

In this study several aspects of the chemisorption interaction of

hydrogen with the low index (100) plane of single crystal tungsten denoted

3

W(100) have been investigated The choice of the tungsten-hydrogen system is

motivated by several factors The literature raises questions on the unusual

state behavior observed when hydrogen adsorbs on W(100) questions which our

apparatus is especially well-suited to study In addition the interaction of

hydrogen with close packed planes of single crystal metals including W(100)

is of particular interest to theoreticians since hydrogen is the simplest

molecular gas as detailed in Sections 128 and 129 below recent theories

of chemisorption have been applied to the hydrogen-tungsten system Tungsten

was chosen as the substrate metal because of its relative ease of preparation

and cleaning and because the large body of literature on the hydrogen-tungsten

system indicates wide interest in this interaction

In particular this research is concentrated in three areas Tung~

sten when cleaned and subsequently cooled to below room temperature exhibits

an anomalous centered (2x2) denoted C(2x2) low energy electron diffraction

pattern The possibility that this is caused by hydrogen diffusing from the

bulk or adsorbing from the background has been investigated Secondly the

room temperature and low temperature hydrogen adsorption binding states have

been studied using electron stimulated desorption and electron spectroscopy

Finally low energy electron diffraction has been used in an investigation of

the atomic geometry of the clean tungsten surface and the geometry of one of

the hydrogen binding states

The remaining sections of this chapter summarize literature relating

to this research Chapter 2 details the construction and performance of the

experimental apparatus A presentation of the experimental data is made in

Chapter 3 A discussion of the results is made in Chapter 4 A summaryof

4

the research and conclusions from it are given in Chapter 5

12 Review of Literature

121 Introduction

Experimental investigation of the adsorption of hydrogen on tungsten

has been carried out using field emitter tips macroscopic polycrystalline

surfaces and all the low index orientation single crystal faces including

W(lOO) From the wide range of results it is clear that the substrate exerts

a strong influence on the adsorption properties The question has been raised

whether adsorption models postulated from polycrystalline substrates can be

3extended even qualitatively to single crystal systems Likewise there are

such sharp differences in the chemisorption behavior of hydrogen onto the

different single crystal tungsten surfaces that the specific physical process

governing adsorption on each face appears to be unique to that face This

review will therefore be concerned for the most part with literature dealing

with hydrogen adsorption on W(lOO) the gas-substrate system used in this

research

The following data review is presented in subsections each concenshy

trating on a specific experimental technique or class of experiments Subsecshy

tion 127 includes some gas mixing literature which was considered relevant

and Subsection 129 gives a bibliography of some related chemisorption

theoretical papers

122 Thermal Desorption

One technique widely employed in investigation of the kinetics of gas

456adsorption has been thermal or flash desorption By monitoring the system

5

pressure changes of a species while rapidly heating the crystal inferences

can be made on the existence of binding states adsorption energies and reaction

7 8 order Heating is accomplished by a focussed light beam electron bombardshy

7 9ment or ohmic losses bull

The strongest indication that hydrogen exhibits multiple state

adsorption behavior on W(lOO) comes from flash desorption data Tamm and

8Schmidt 7 and Madey and Yates found for room temperature adsorption that two

large peaks are observed in the plot of pressure of H2 versus temperature

These peaks are centered at 4500 K and approximately 550oK Only hydrogen

molecules are observed to be desorbed from the surface Using desorption rate

456theory the lower temperature (~l) state is found to obey first order

kinetics the peak temperature being independent of initial coverage The

higher temperature (~2) state obeys second order kinetics the peak temperature

moving down from approximately 5800 K to 5500 K as the initial coverage is

increased

In addition to the two main peaks several small peaks comprising a

total of less than 10 percent of the desorbed hydrogen are observed during a

flash when the crystal is cooled to nitrogen temperature before hydrogen

exposure These states are believed to result from adsorption onto edges and

other non-(lOO) crystal orientations 8

The dependence of the desorption energy Ed on coverage is weak

~l 8 ~2 8with Ed = 252 kcallmole and Ed = 323 kcalmole As would be predicted

from this result the ~2 state is largely populated before the ~l state begins

to fill The ratio of the populations in the states at full coverage n~1n~2

8 lOis 2111 Jelend and Menzel point out that the cross section for electron

6

desorption (see Subsection 125) from the ~1 state is considerably smaller

than that of the ~2 state a result not predicted from the experimental flash

desorption binding energies

11Tibbetts using a stepped temperature flash desorption technique

has shown that hydrogen is bound to the surface of po1ycrysta11ine tungsten

W(110) and W(lll) with a distribution of binding energies ranging from

162 kca1mo1e (07 eV) to 415 kca1mo1e (lS eV) Using this technique

desorption at a constant temperature from a distribution of states can be easily

distinguished from desorption from a state with a unique binding energy While

he did not extend his work to W(100) these results suggest that hydrogen does

not bind to the surface at a few energies but rather with a range of binding

energies Tibbetts also shows that the determination of the order of the

desorption process is difficult for adsorption into a range of binding energies

In experiments using a combination of hydrogen and deuterium as room

temperature adsorbates the elemental composition of the desorbed ~1 and ~2

states shows complete isotopic mixing between the states7S independent of the

adsorption sequence or ratios However for low temperature adsorption

complete state conversion is not observed for all the additional small peaks

Where mixing is observed atomic adsorption is suggested Where mixing is not

observed molecular adsorption is inferred

Some theoretical models indicate that multiple peak flash desorption

spectra may be due to binding energy changes caused by adsorbate-adsorbate

interactions12 or order-disorder transactions during f1ash3 13 rather than

actual distinct multiple binding states under the adsorption conditions

7

123 LEED and HEED

Low energy electron diffraction or LEED refers to the coherent

scattering of a monoenergetic focused electron beam from the surface of a

crystalline solid Electrons in the energy range 0 lt E lt 300 eV interact

strongly with the ion cores and valence electrons of the solid The inelastic

mean free path is on the order of 10 X As a consequence electrons which are

observed elastically have been backscattered within the first several surface

layers in the solid making LEED a surface sensitive probe 14 15 The periodic

translational symmetry of the surface leads to the momentum conservation laws

I

= (11)~I ~II + g

= (2mEh2)t sin reg (12)~II

where ~II is the momentum parallel to the surface of the emerging electron and

~ is the parallel momentum of the incident electron The vector g is a

reciprocal lattice vector of the solid surface and reg is the polar angle of the

incident beam As a result of the conservation laws the scattered electrons

emerge in a series of beams called a spot pattern which is a manifestation

of the surface symmetry The beams are labelled by their corresponding g

vectors Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores is

extracted from the plot of elastically scattered electron intensity versus

16 17incident energy called elastic intensity profiles or I-V curves

Changes in the LEED spot pattern resulting from hydrogen adsorption

18onto W(lOO) at room temperature have been reported by Estrup and Anderson and

19by Yonehara and Schmidt As hydrogen is adsorbed at room temperature the

8

(lxl) pattern characteristic of clean tungsten changes into a weak C(2x2)

pattern at a hydrogen coverage e of less than 005 monolayer (where e = 1

15 2monolayer at a coverage of 2xlO hydrogen atomsem which is 2 hydrogen atoms

for each surface tungsten atom) The (1212) spots become sharp and intense

with increased hydrogen adsorption reaching a maxima in intensity at approxishy

19 18mately 015 monolayer or e = 025 monolayer (Coverage in both cases was

determined by flash desorption) The (1212) spots split into four new spots

which move apart continuously and upon further hydrogen adsorption eventually

19form 13-order streaks at a coverage of ~ 035 monolayer These in turn

change at higher coverage into poorly developed 14-order features with the

(012) spots missing Finally near e = 10 all extra diffraction features

are gone and the LEED pattern returns to a (lxl) symmetry This series of LEED

pattern changes is reversible with coverage

For hydrogen adsorption at 1950 K the C(2x2) pattern develops

maximizes in intensity at e ~ 18 and splits into four beams similar to room

temperature adsorption However the higher coverage LEED structures third

19 0order streaks and fourth order spots are not observed At 78 K adsorption

of hydrogen produces half-order C(2x2) spots that maximize in intensity at

e ~ 027 Additional hydrogen adsorption beyond this causes the half-order

19spot intensity to decrease but with no splitting of the spots

If clean W(lOO) is allowed to cool below room temperature a sharp

19and intense C(2x2) pattern is observed even though total coverage due to the

background of H2 and CO is less than e = 001 as determined by flash desorption

measurements The intensity of these half-order beams can be altered by

additional hydrogen adsorption or by various hydrogen and oxygen heat treatmenm

9

l9Yonehara and Schmidt have postulated that the extra spots may result from

hydrogen endothermally soluble in tungsten diffusing to the surface Possible

alternative explanations include the reconstruction of the clean tungsten

surface or impurity over layer adsorption from the background It should be

20noted that Plummer and Bell saw no effects upon cooling their field emitter

tip to 78 0 K that they could attribute to hydrogen diffusion to the surface

Elastic intensity profiles for several beams have been measured by

18 21Estrup and Anderson and by Papageorgopoulos and Chen at room temperature

Estrup and Anderson reported profiles for (00) and (1212) tEED lJeams out

to 300 eV The intensity variation for the (OO) beam was found to be indepenshy

dent of hydrogen coverage a manifestation of the relatively weak scattering

cross section of a hydrogen ion core relative to that of tungsten The

additional beams observed on adsorption would be expected to be more sensitive

13to the adsorbed overlayer Estrup found the intensity of the (1212) beams

for H W(100) and D W(100) to decrease as a function of temperature between2 2

300o

K and 6000 K at a constant incident energy but neither obeyed the Debyeshy

22Waller relation Estrup interpreted this result to imply the adsorbed

species are directly involved in the diffraction process

19Yonehara examined the tEED spot intensities as a function of

temperature down to liquid nitrogen temperatures His results are examined

in the data discussion in Chapter 4

The hydrogen-WlOO) system has also been studied using high energy

electron diffraction or HEED23 This technique utilizes the strong forward

scattering of high energy electrons in probing the surface by having the

incident beam strike the solid at grazing incidence The resulting diffraction

10

patterns are sensitive to the translational symmetry of the surface As in

LEED a diffraction pattern with C(2x2) symmetry is observed during initial

hydrogen adsorption With further hydrogen exposure the beams broaden some

splitting is observed and eventually the half-order intensity decreases

completely The width of the observed half-order beams has been interpreted to

indicate hydrogen initially adsorbs into a large number of small square or

rectangular domains each consisting of 20 to 25 atoms with sides parallel to

the [100J directions

124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and Photoemission

The electronic structure of the surface layers of solids can be

characterized by electron emission spectroscopies Such techniques require a

surface sensitive perturbation on the gas-solid system leading to an electron

yield A spectrometer is used to energy analyze the emitted or scattered

24 25electrons In electron scatter~ng a monoenergetic beam of electrons is

directed onto a crystal The inelastically scattered signal containing

quantitative information about electronic excitations at the surface is

measured as a function of energy loss Field emission is a technique in which

application of a high positive electric field to the surface lowers the potenshy

26tia1 barrier for electrons to tunnel out of the system The total energy

distribution of electrons emitted as a result of the applied field contains

bull 27 28spectroscopic data on the adsorbed spec~es Structure induced by the

adsorbate in the elastic tunneling spectrum is thought to be a measure of the

d f i h f h d b 2930e1ectron~c ens~ty 0 states n t e v~c~n~ty 0 tea sor ate The

inelastic tunneling spectrum reveals discrete excitation energies in the

11

gas-surface system In photoemission or ftotoelectron spectroscopy an incident

monochromatic light beam incident on the solid induces emission of electrons by

interband transitions with or without an inelastic scattering after the initial

31 exc i tat~on

The vibrational spectrum of hydrogen adsorbed on the tungsten (100)

32surface has been observed by Propst and Piper using inelastic low energy

20electron scattering and by Plummer and Bell using field emission Propst

and Piper found two peaks in the energy loss distribution E - E pr~mary scattered

at 135 meV and 69 meV for all coverages used up to saturation These results

are interpreted as indicating hydrogen atoms are multiply bonded to tungsten

33atoms No losses near 550 meV the vibrational energy of molecular hydrogen

were observed Plummer and Bell measured the total energy distribution of

field emitted electrons from tungsten (100) as a function of coverage of

hydrogen and deuterium at several temperatures Discrete losses at 100 meV

and 50 meV for deuterium which correspond to the 135 meV and 69 meV vibrational

losses observed by Propst and Piper were evident for deuterium in the a state2

No discrete energy losses at 550 meV or 390 meV the molecular vibrational

levels of H2 and D2 respectively were measured Hence there was no observable

molecular adsorption at room temperature

Additional structure in the field emission total energy distribution

is observed as a function of hydrogen adsorption The clean surface spectrum

has two peaks 04 eV and 15 eV down from the Fermi level which have been

d ifi d h h d f d h h f 34 A h d ~ ent e as ~g ens~ty 0 states assoc~ate w~t t e sur ace s y rogen

(or deuterium) coverage increases between 0 and 5xl014 atomscm2

ie while

the ~2 state is filling the surface states disappear and the field emitted

12

energy distribution changes from that of clean tungsten to a spectrum indicative

of resonance tunneling through a level positioned 09 eV below the Fermi energy

There is a shoulder at -11 eV and an energy dependent background With

further adsorption up to saturation this energy distribution characteristic

of the ~2 state shifts to a broad level centered at 26 eV below the Fermi

level This is interpreted to indicate that the ~1 state does not adsorb on

top of the ~2 state

35The photoemission results of Wac1awski and P1ummer and Feuerbacher

36and Fitton are in agreement with those obtained using the field emission

technique As hydrogen adsorbs on the surface emission from the 04 eV

surface state decreases The level 09 eV down from the Fermi energy as well

as a level 5 eV down remain unchanged by adsorption At full coverage a strong

peak at -25 eV is observed

125 Electron Stimulated Desorption

Desorption of energetic ions and neutrals from a gas over layer can

be induced by electron bombardment This process termed electron stimulated

desorption or ESD37383940 is described below in the discussion of the data

in Chapter 4 In brief intensity and energy measurements of the ion yield can

be interpreted in terms of the parameters characterizing the binding energy

curve of the adsorbed state and adsorption states can be classified by cross

section for desorption_ ion energy distributions primary energy threshold for

desorption etc

ESD has been employed to study adsorption kinetics for the hydrogenshy

41 ~ tungsten (100) system Madey obtained a coverage dependence yield of H ions

13

observing an ion signal during the initial stages of hydrogen adsorption that

reached a maximum at a coverage of e = 017 and then decayed to zero yield

23 2after e = 075 the maximum cross section obtained was 18x10- cm at a

primary electron energy of 100 eV Tamm and Schmidt7 reported a maximum cross

section for H+ desorption of 10- 21 cm 2bull Benninghoven Loebach and Treitz42

10and Je1end and Menze1 obtained qualitatively similar (to Madey) coverage

dependencies on tungsten ribbons which were believed to be predominantly of

(100) crystallites the main difference between these results and Madeys is

the observation of a residual signal at high hydrogen coverage

The cross section results indicate that the a state even though it2

is more tightly bound than the a state provides more hydrogen ions upon1

electron impact The cross section for ion desorption from the a1 state is

d41 10-25est1mate to be 1ess t han cm2 bull

+No energy distributions of the desorbed H ions have been reported

The dependence of the desorption cross section on the primary electron energy

10has not been investigated Je1end and Menzel found their results independent

of temperature for temperatures above room temperature No ESD results for

otemperatures less than 300 K have been reported

126 Work Function

The work function is the minimum amount of energy required to remove

43 an electron from a meta1 An adsorbate may alter the potential barrier for

electrons at the surface and hence change the work function Such is the case

for hydrogen on W(100) Hydrogen adsorbs as an electronegative ion on W(100)

thereby increasing the work function

14

44Using a retarding potential current-voltage techn~que Madey and

8Yates reported a linear relation between work function change and hydrogen

coverage over the entire coverage range for adsorption occurring at a

temperature 0 f 2= 300 0 K Coverages were determined by flash desorption

Total work function change at one monolayer was found to be 090 eV which

corresponds to a constant dipole moment per adsorbed atom of 015 Debye

15 2(assuming a total coverage of 15xlO atomsem)

Estrup and Anderson18 using the retarding potential technique and

Plummer and Bel120 using a field emission Fowler-Nordheim plot45 found a

work function change versus coverage relationship which deviated only slightly

8from being linear in near agreement with the results of Madey and Yates

46 47Becker using field emission and Armstrong using a retarding potential

technique found a work function change for the H W(100) system of approximately2

48090 eV when e = 10 Hopkins and Pender obtained an anomalously low value

49of 054 eV while Collins and Blott obtained a high value of 109 eV for the

same coverage

127 Chemical Probes

Hydrogen adsorption has also been studied using a chemical probe

ie by coadsorbing some additional different gas with the hydrogen and

observing the effect this additional species had on results obtained using

techniques discussed in previous sections

50Yates and Madey found using flash desorption that CO coadsorption

onto a hydrogen monolayer displaces both the Sl and S2 binding states with

near unity probability in doing so initially replacing these states with a

15

less tightly bound hydrogen state After high CO exposure no hydrogen remains

on the surface if the coadsorption is done at room temperature At lower

temperatures only about 10 percent of the hydrogen is desorbed Jelend and

Menzel lO 5l found that the ionic and total desorption cross sections for

hydrogen the sticking probability and bond strength of hydrogen are all

affected by preadsorption of CO or oxygen Yates and Madey3 found that N2

slowly replaces preadsorbed hydrogen at temperatures greater than 300oC Below

2730

K the displacement of hydrogen by N2 does not occur

These results all show that small impurity concentrations of CO N

and 0 if intentionally introduced do affect the resulting hydrogen chemishy

sorption properties These experiments underscore the necessity of surface

chemical characterization

128 Chemisorption Models

7 18 19 52 Several models have been proposed to account for the

experimental results from hydrogen chemisorption on W(lOO) Each of these

models embodies some combination of the following three phenomenological

assumptions 1) The tungsten surface is ideal planar and free of contamishy

nants 2) There are available two types of adsorbates namely hydrogen atoms

53and molecules 3) There are three high symmetry logical bonding sites on

a BCC (100) face usually designated by the letters A B and C These

positions are A a bridge site with 2 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen

equidistant from two adjacent surface tungsten atoms B a four fold symmetric

site with 5 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen located on a surface normal that

passes through the center of a surface primitive unit cell and C the hydrogen

16

located directly above a surfac~ atom with one nearest neighbor There are

15 152x10 A sitescm2 and 1x10 B ore sites~m2 on middotW(100)

The proposed models attempt to explain or at least be consistent

with empirical results presented in Sections 121 through 127 A summary

of salient features of the reported research includes a) a linear work function

15change with coverage b) a saturation coverage of between 15 and 20x10 H

2atomscm c) a coverage dependent adsorption layer symmetry including a we11shy

ordered surface at low coverages d) the appearance at low temperatures of a

surface translational symmetry not equivalent to room temperature clean

tungsten e) adsorption into states which produces a two state thermal desorpshy

tion spectrum with relative coverages in the two states of nQ n = 21 f) a ~1 ~2

coverage dependence for the observed electronic structure including the

absence at high coverage of structure observed at low coverages and g) no

observed vibrational levels which correspond to free H2 molecule

Following is a short review of several proposed surface models

18Estrup and Anderson account for their LEED spot pattern results

using a model wherein the hydrogen molecules dissociate upon adsorption and

migrate initially to form islands of hydrogen atoms located at type A sites in

a e(2x2) structure Dissociation is assumed since the e(2x2) pattern maximizes

15 2at a coverage of 25x10 mo1ecu1escm whereas without dissociation it would

maX1m1ze at 5 1015 mo ecu1es cm2bull e site adsorptionx 1 Although type B or type

could also produce the initial e(2x2) LEED pattern these sites are rejected

15 2because of the following 1) There are only 1x10 B or e sitescm This is

not enough sites to accommodate a full monolayer coverage if all binding is

atomic and if it is into equivalent sites as suggested by the linear work

17

function change with coverage 2) While a complete 14-order LEED pattern is

possible with type B or type C sites it is not possible to produce a 14-order

54pattern with (012) spots missing using B or C sites As the adsorption

14 2proceeds past a surface density of 5xlO hydrogen atomscm the adatoms conshy

tinuously rearrange into long period superlattices with antiphase domains

that produce successively the 12-order spot splitting the 13-order streak

(only partly ordered domains) the 14-order pattern and finally the (lxl)

full coverage structure

This model has been criticized for not accounting for the two

observed binding states and for predicting a maximum in intensity of the half

order spots at e = 025 these beams maximize at less than that coverage In

addition the authors themselves questioned the idea of well-ordered super-

lattices

In order to explain the relative intensity of the two states at

saturation seen in flash desorption n~~ = 21 Tamm and Schmidt7

propose a 1 2

model wherein the initial hydrogen adsorption is atomic and at B sites in a

C(2x2) pattern At full coverage the remaining B sites are filled with

hydrogen molecules B sites are chosen over C sites using molecular orbital

55arguments A sites are rejected as there are too many to satisfy this model

This model satisfies the second order kinetics observed for the ~2 state and

the first order kinetics observed for the ~l state In addition it explains

14 2 7 their saturation coverage of gt 3xl0 moleculescm One weakness of this

model pointed out by Tamm and Schmidt is that it is not obvious the model can

account for the observed LEED and work function results Also no molecular

vibrations have been observed

18

19yonehara and Schmidt propose a three bonding state model that is

more consistent with the low temperature LEED results In their model an

additional state labeled ~3 is always present at the surface in A or B

2sites with a density of 5xl014 atomscm bull This state orders on the surface at

low temperatures to give the C(2x2) pattern observed At room and higher

temperatures it goes into solution (or perhaps disorders) becoming invisible

to LEED In the type A site model adsorption from the background fills in the

remaining A sites sequentially with the ~2 and ~l states This model is similar

18to that proposed by Estrup and Anderson except that the ~3 state although

invisible to LEED at room and higher temperatures occupies 14 of the type A

sites This model eliminates the stoichiometric objection to Estrup and

Andersons model The model depends on the possibility of type A sites being

occupied by states with considerably different properties If the ~3 state

occupies type B sites ~2 state adsorption fills in the remaining type B sites

and then ~l hydrogen adsorbs into random or possibly type C sites This

second model does not explain satisfactorily work function or LEED spot pattern

experimental data

56Propst found using a point defect type calculation that only a

B-site model of adsorption would produce the observed vibrational energies of

5769 meV and 135 meV Park using LEED intensity arguments found that only

adsorption into sites with 4-fold symmetry on the (100) surface (type B or type

C sites) would be consistent with broadening and splitting of the half-order

beams while the integral beams remain sharp

8Madey and Yates offer a critique of several of the proposed models

19

No adsorption geometry adequately accounts for all the observed data

It is possible that surface hydrogen mobility adsorbate-adsorbate interactions

tungsten surface reconstruction and other surface phenomenon must be better

understood before this system can be adequately characterized

129 Theoretical Treatment

Several theoretical treatments of hydrogen-tungsten chemisorption

phenomenon have been reported in the literature as discussed below

7 18 19 52 The most elementary geometric models already have been

mentioned in Section 128 Grimley58 considers the hydrogen on W(lOO) system

59in an Anderson-Hamiltonian formalism Anders and Hansen obtain the relative

bonding energies of hydrogen chemisorbed at the three high symmetry adsorption

sites of W(lOO) using an extended Ruckel molecular orbital theory Their

results indicated a preference for hydrogen adsorption at type C sites

60Schrieffer offers a review on the theory of chemisorption in which he

concludes the Hartree-Fock approximation to the Anderson model for hydrogenshy

61metal adsorption is invalid Newns using the same approximation also shows

62the one-electron HF theory to be invalid Schrieffer and Gomer study the

exchange interaction between the adatom and the solid which results from the

nonorthogonality of the adatom and solid wave functions Smith Ying

h 63 64 h h d 1 h bl band Ko n lnvestlgate t e y rogen-meta c emlsorptlon pro em y

requiring complete self-consistency between the three-dimensional electrostatic

potential used and charge density obtained They calculate electron scattering

resonance levels and ground state vibrational frequency Jennings and McRae

using a multiple scattering LEED theory (but neglecting inelastic collision

65

20

damping) show that there can be half-order beams of high intensity in the H -W2

k W b 66 1 b dsystem even t hough h ydrogen 1S a wea scatterer e1n erg app 1es a on-

energy bond-order model of chemisorption to the hydrogen-W(100) system and

predicts binding energies for the molecular state and atomic state of hydrogen

on W(100) to be 262 kca1mo1e and 322 kca1mo1e respectively

1210 Literature Summary

Some conclusions can be drawn concerning the state of understanding

of the hydrogen-tungsten system and in particular the H W(100) system2

Despite considerable research experimental uncertainties still exist

in the H W(100) interaction It is still not clear if hydrogen adsorbs as a2

molecule The preponderance of evidence from electron scattering vibrational

levels field emission and H -D gas mixing flash desorption measurements2 2

indkates most hydrogen probably adsorbs atomically Multiple state behavior

is exhibited It is not known however if this observed state behavior is a

result of distinct hydrogen-tungsten interactions it is believed that to a

large extent it is driven by coverage dependent adsorbate-adsorbate interacshy

tions There is no model that can successfully incorporate the measured work

function flash desorption and ESD parameters The adsorption sites are not 15 15 2

known Total coverage at one monolayer is between 15xlO and 2x10 atomsem

which is more than the number of surface tungsten atomscm2 in the (100) face

LEED results at different temperatures indicate a possible temperature depenshy

dence for the adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO) Particularly confusing is

the anomalous LEED result obtained at low temperatures for the clean surface

Only small adsorption temperature dependencies are found in sticking probability

21

work function changes and flash desorption results

13 Review of Experimental Techniques

As indicated in Section 11 this research has been undertaken in an

attempt to characterize more fully the hydrogen-W(lOO) interaction A multi-

technique spectrometer has been used Chapter 2 gives a discussion of the

instrument This instrument is capable of making work function Auger electron

spectroscopy electron scattering ESD (including a pulsed time-of-flight mode)

and LEED measurements These techniques except AES have been well-reviewed

43 44 67 68 24 25 3 37 3839 40 as referenced prevlously (work function AES ES ESD

151617LEED ) Their use in this research can be summarized as follows work

function changes are a measure of adsorption coverage Auger electron

spectroscopy has been used to characterize the contamination of the experimental

surface ES and ESD are sensitive probes of surface and adsorption parameters

Time-of-flight has been used to determine the ion species desorbed LEED has

been used here to indicate the orientation of the surface and to attempt to

take initial data useful in calculation of overlayer geometries A more

detailed discussion of these techniques as used in this research is given in

Section 32

A discussion of the instrument constructed and used for this research

is given in Chapter 2 Sections 31 and 32 deal wIth organization and

experimental procedures Experimental data are presented starting with Section

33 A discussion of the data and conclusions from the research are given in

Chapter 4

22

CHAPTER 2

EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS

21 General Description

The apparatus used in this research is designed to probe an experishy

mental macroscopic crystal with several surface sensitive techniques It

combines an electron gun which focuses a monoenergetic beam of electrons onto

the crystal a new high resolution electrostatic spectrometer capable of energy

analysis of electrons and ions a low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system

and a crystal manipulator The crystal manipulator allows positioning of the

experimental sample and provides sample cooling heating and electrical

biasing Also included in the apparatus are a mass spectrometer and a gas

handling system System electronics allow the spectrometer to perform work

function electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated desorption

Auger electron spectroscopy and low energy electron diffraction measurements

The spectrometer can be operated over a wide range of primary electron energies

and currents and analyzer pass energies It can be biased in both electron and

ion pass modes and in a pulsed time-of-flight mode for species identification

An external spot photometer is used for LEED intensity measurements The

instrument is housed in an ultrahigh vacuum chamber A schematic diagram of

the overall system is given in Figure 21 The construction and performance

characteristics of each of the components are discussed in the following

sections of Chapter 2

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shielding

The requirement that the experimental surface has to remain clean

23

Analyzer Support

Magnetic Shielding

Ion Gauge

Analyzer

Crystal Target

Window

Openings in Magnetic Shield to Gas Jet and Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer

LEED Screen Viewing Mi rror

To Ion Pumps _

Analyzer Wiring Feedthroughs

Liquid Nitrogen Dewar for Cooling Strap Heat Sink

Insulator

Crystal Manipulator

Cooling Strop

Titanium Sublimotion Pump

Figure 21 Schematic diagram of mu1titechnique apparatus

24

while making measurements necessitates housing the apparatus in an ultrahigh

vacuum chamber A commercial Varian vacuum chamber and pumping station have

been used Ultrahigh vacuum was achieved in several steps after the chamber

-2 was rough pumped down to 10 Torr using cryosorb pumps main system pumping

was accomplished using a 400 litersec ion pump and a titanium sublimator

oAfter a bakeout of 24 hours at temperatures up to 270 C to outgas the system

-10walls the system pressure read about lxlO Torr as measured with a Bayard-

Alpert ion gauge The pressure decreased somewhat during the first weeks of

spectrometer operation after bakeout The final system background pressure

-11 was less than 8xlO Torr or below the x-ray limit of the gauge When

-10operating in the Auger mode the background rose to lxlO Torr presumably

because of the large currents involved A mass spectrometer scan indicated

that the main components of the background were H2 CO CO2 and H 0 The ion2

gauge which can affect the composition of the background was turned off while

taking data except if noted otherwise

In an electrostatic deflection analyzer such as used here magnetic

fields can introduce spurious results In order to reduce the earths magnetic

field in the region of electron or ion trajectories three concentric cylinders

of Eagle AAA ultrahigh nickel steel alloy magnetic shielding are placed around

the spectrometer The shielding is mounted on a stainless steel and ceramic

support which rests in a groove in the inside wall of the vacuum chamber This

shielding is electrically isolated so it can be floated at any desired voltage

The ambient magnetic field in the target region is less than 5 milliGauss

The region inside the shielding and below the spectrometer (the

region shown in Figure 214) is referred to in this work as the experimental

25

chamber There are apertures cut in the magnetic shielding which allow the

crystal to be put in (and out of) the experimental chamber Apertures also

allow line-of-sight access to this region of the gas dosing jet mass spectromshy

eter and allow the crystal to be viewed

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics

The electron gun provides the incident focused electron beam used

in all the surface probing techniques Figures 22 and 23 show a schematic

drawing of the electron gun and a photograph of the gun assembled and disshy

dOf d f dOd b P 0 69assembled h a mo 1 1e verS10n 0 a gun eS1gne y er1aT e gun 1S The

comporients of the gun are a thermal cathode or source of electrons three

electrodes and four deflection plates The cathode is a Philips Metalonics

Type M barium calcium aluminate impregnated tungsten emitter The cathode was

0generally operated at 875 C with the heating accomplished indirectly with a

tungsten filament behind the heater The electrons emitted are focused into

a beam by two lenses the crossover formed by the lens action of the control

grid and first anode is focused onto the target by a second lens formed by the

first anode and second anode The incident primary beam thus formed can be

deflected along two axes in the target face by means of deflection plates

located at the entrance to the drift tube

The guns electronic circuitry is shown in Figure 24 Three 6 V

lead storage batteries in series power the cathode heater through an integrated

circuit voltage regulator The gun electrodes are biased using a resistor

chain voltage divider circuit This arrangement scales the guns lenses thus

keeping the beam focused as the primary beam energy is changed by varying the

26

Heat Shield

Cathode Heater

Cathode

Control Grid

First Anode

Second Anode

Coaxial Cathode Heater Feed through

~~f-------+-+-~ Paraxial Ray Aperture

---J7j7j--shy -~f-~ Accelerating ~~pt=-=a~~ or Decelerating

Lens Region

Deflection Plates

SP-1Oeuro7

Figure 22 Schematic diagram of electron gun

I)

-J

Figure 23 Photograph of electron gun assembled and disassembled

~ ~1 ~

h

I __-t--------+--

Defl + ---t---------

i---VV----110K I10K 93K

Supply

BHK 2000

I

Dec Mode

Ace 15K Mode

10K I 15K

l8V Leod

Gun X Deflection Plates (Y Defl Plates Rotate 90 not shown)

Storage Batteries

tv 00

Acc Mode Connections

To First Anode

To Second Anode X Defl shy

X

To Gun Deflection

Plates 10K 10K 57K 15K55K

1-_________----1+I Electron Gun

sp- 1125

Figure 24 Diagram of the electron guns biasing circuitry

29

gun power supply a Kepco BHK-2000 supply The gun can be operated in two

modes In the accelerating mode (ace mode) the second anode is biased more

positive than the first anode With this biasing the gun has been operated

from 30 V to 1825 V primary energy In the decelerating mode (dec mode) the

first anode is biased more positive than the second anode This allows for

higher field gradients at the cathode surface resulting in higher currents at

lower energies In the dec mode the gun can be operated from 10 V to 200 V

A spatial profile of the primary beam was taken using a two grid

retarding field analyzer mounted on the target manipulator at the position of

the target Electrode bias settings that optimized the beam line shape were

determined over the guns energy range These results are summarized in

Figure 25 The spatial full width at half maximum of the spot intensity is

less than 025 mm at 1825 V less than 075 mm at 100 V (dec mode) and about

25 mm at 10 V The energy width of the primary beam can be estimated by

retarding the primary beam between the drift tube and target At E = 100 eVpr1

the current to the target goes from 90 maximum to 10 maximum over a retarding

voltage of ~V $ 0360 meV This is an upper estimate on the energy spread in

the primary beam A lower limit would be the thermal spread of the cathode

~ 2kT or about 200 meV

24 Energy Spectrometer

A schematic diagram of the spectrometer used in this research to

energy analyze electrons and ions is given in Figure 26 The spectrometers

operation can be summarized as follows Electrons and ions originating at

the target with some energy distribution are accelerated or decelerated to the

Dec Mode --1r+shy

Probe Aperture Diameter

+10

E~

~ ~ 10Decelerating Lens Dec Mode aJLL- c E 0- E ~ ~ -051=-- Accelerating Lens Acc Mode Q)O - a WU)

o 200 600 1000 1400

E ~Ugt o Q)()cme=)

Q)

cO ~ e+- (+-Clo OQ)Q)loc

-lolo Wllaquo

u-

Electron Beam Energy Epri (eV) w o

Epri= 10eV Electron Beam Spatial Profiles Epri =1745 eV Epri =100eVf Epd=1000 eV Ace ModeAce Mode Aee Mode

-05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 Probe Aperture Position (mm)

SP-1084

Figure 25 Spatial characteristics of primary electron beam Top panel - Full width at half maximum of beam as a function of primary energy Bottom panel - Line shape of beam at several primary energies

-10 0

31

Cylindrical Electrostatic Analyzer

Spherical Elect rostat ic Analyzer

~____- __Gylindrical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

Coaxial Repulsion Cylinder

--__-___Spherical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

~-- Electron Gun

Deflection Plates

-Gun Wiring

Concentric ~--- Deflection

Spheres

~-- LEED Screen

Scattered Electrons SP-l066

and Desorbed Ions

Figure 26 Schematic diagram of energy spectrometer

32

pass energy of the spectrometer by three spherical sector grids prior to

entering the spherical analyzer section of the instrument (An annular slot

cut in the LEED screen which is located between the grids and the spherical

analyzer allows particles to pass into the analyzer) Energy selection is

accomplished by a combination of two electrostatic deflection analyzers The

first is a high resolution spherical deflection analyzer This is backed by

a cylindrical mirror-type electrostatic analyzer referred to in this work as

the cylindrical or tandem analyzer Particles that pass through the spectromshy

eter impinge on the first dynode of a high gain electron multiplier The

output signal of this multiplier is detected using the electronics discussed

in Section 25

The spectrometer is constructed mainly of 304 stainless steel which

has been hydrogen and vacuum fired to reduce residual magnetism to less than

5 milliGauss Most interior surfaces have been rhodium plated to eliminate

surface charging problems Final design dimensions used in the spectrometer

are listed in Table 21 Refer to Figure 27 for a diagram of the variables

used in this table

The emission angle at the ta~get of the central trajectory that

passes 1nto t he spectrometer 1S 350 bull The entrance aperture (slot) accepts

particles that originate within plusmn0045 radians of this central ray making a

total solid angle accepted of 032 steradians

The spherical electrostatic deflection analyzer section is a

70spherical velocity selector of the type first investigated by Purcell The

analyzer is designed to focus an object spot of electrons or ions originating

at the front surface plane of the target onto the first energy resolution

33

TABLE 21 FINAL DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR SPECTROMETER

SPHERICAL ANALYZER

l Inner sphere radius 342 cmr l

2 Outer sphere radius r 419 cm2

3 Radius of central ray a = 381 cm

04 Emission angle of central ray e = 35

05 Angular range of accepted rays 3244

0 - 3756

6 Angle subtended between entrance and exit planes of spherical analyzer section ~ = 51660

7 Acceptance solid angle of spectrometer 032 steradians

8 Diameter of first ERA D 025 cm

9 Distance of target from center of spherical analyzer P 665 cm

10 Distance of first ERA from center of spherical analyzer Q 1328 cm

CYLINDRICAL ANALYZER

11 Distance from first ERA to entrance diaphram S = 330 cm

12 Distance between entrance and exit diaphrams T 399 cm

13 Distance from exit diaphram to second ERA U = 330 cm

14 Inner cylinder radius Rl = 0099 cm

15 Distance from second ERA to electron multiplier V ~ 254 cm

16 Radius of entrance aperture R2 099 cm

17 Radius of repulsion electrode R3 = 330 cm

18 Radius of exit aperture R4 093 cm

19 Width of exit aperture G 037 cm

20 Diameter of second ERA E 044 cm

21 Width of entrance aperture F = 053 cm

34

Plane of First ERA

~

D

Spherical Analyzer

First ERA

I

I1 I~~ f F

S

]R4 II f ~

R3

11 [1

I II

U v~ cT t t

Plane of Plane of First ERA Second ERA

Cylindrical Analyzer

Figure 27 Schematic diagram of particle trajectories in spherical analyzer section Spatial configuration of tandem cylindrical analyzer section also shown

35

aperture or image plane The spatial configuration of the analyzer is such

as to give maximum reduced dispersibn according to the relations derived by

Purcell The magnification of the source at maximum reduced dispersion is 2

Diaphrams at the entrance and exit apertures of the spherical analyzer are

designed to minimize problems caused by the fringing fields as discussed by

71Herzog

Initial tests using only the spherical analyzer indicated electrons

that scattered from the interior surfaces could be passed through the first

energy resolving aperture over a range of analyzer pass energies To eliminate

this erroneOus signal a second low resolution cylindrical mirror-type

72electrostatic analyzer was designed and constructed by P Luscher

Electrons or ions that pass through the first energy resolving

aperture at the correct energy are deflected by the repulsion electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer and pass through the second energy resolving aperture

This signal impinges on the first dynode of the electron multiplier Trajectory

tracing calculations indicated that the cylindrical analyzer would eliminate

the scattered signal if this second analyzer had a full width energy resolution

~EE = 028 where E is the energy of the particle executing the pass pass

correct central trajectory through the spectrometer This is not a stringent

design requirement

The energy resolution of the spectrometer is defined as the ratio

~EEp where ~E is the width of the line shape passed as the spectrometer is

scanned in pass energy for a monochromatic source of particles with energy Ep

For the spectrometer configuration here the energy resolution is determined

by the resolution achieved in the high resolution spherical analyzer section

36

at least down to low pass energies Line shape broadening effects in the

spherical analyzer originate from three sources 1) the finite diameter D

of the first energy resolving aperture 2) the finite radius R of the source

disk and 3) the use of a finite range of emission angles of particles from

the crystal surface which can enter and be passed by the spectrometer This

third source of line broadening results from the spherical analyzer having

imperfect second order focusing at the first energy resolving aperture The

effect on the line shape of the finite range of emission angles goes as the

square of the acceptance half width which in this analyzer is small In

the calculation of energy resolution below the third source of line broadening

will not be considered

A numerical value for the energy resolution for the spectrometer

used in this research can be calctilated To do so it is necessary to derive

an expression for 6EEp in terms of the diameter D and radius R given above

In the calculation below these two sources of line broadening will be

considered independent and the effective line shape and energy resolution

from each will be calculated separately Following an analysis by Purcell an

energy resolution can be expressed in terms of the velocity resolution S bull ~

S is defined by ~

where v is the velocity of a particle which the analyzer passes along the pass

central trajectory when and v is the velocity of a particle withset at Epass ~

slightly different energy E bullbull (For convenience E and v will be ~ pass pass

shortened to Ep and vp in the following discussion Lower case subscripts are

37

used to distinguish this derivation from the defined energy resolution above)

A resolution can be calculated as follows

(22)

Using Equation 21 this becomes

(23)

(24)

If the line shape width ~E is written as

fiE = E - E = (E - E ) + (E - Emn) (25)max max p pm~n ~

then the energy resolution can be expressed as

(26)

D and R can be related to Q and Q bull as shown belowf-I max f-Im~n

Line shape broadening due to the finite diameter D of the first

energy resolving aperture (1st ERA) can be calculated from the velocity

70dispersion given by Purcell

(27)

9 00 ~ (28)

Refer to Figure 27 for a definition of the variables in these equations

38

Assume a current j(a) emanating from the center of the target

along xl with energy distribution

j (e) = 1 (29)

All of this current crosses the plane of the 1st ERA at a position d given by

d = Y2cOS a = 900 acos a (210)

A 1st ERA of diameter D will pass all the current for which Y2 Y2 leading

to the relation for the limiting values of 13

(211)

D bull cos a a lt D cos a (212)2 bull 900 - 2 bull 900

The energy resolution due to a finite 1st ERA is then calculated from Equation

26 to be

~E (~st ERA) = 2 [053D + 053DJ = 02l2D (213) P

For D = 025 cm (010 in) this evaluates to

8E (1st ERA) = 0021 (214)E P

The line shape of the current distribution resulting from the finite 1st ERA

is a unit function for the allowable e values (Equation 214) since all the

current j(S) is passed by the 1st ERA and j(S) is a unit function in S

The above line shape and resolution have been obtained effectively

by varying the energy of the signal current (via Equation 29) rather than

39

using a monochromatic current source and varying the pass energy as initially

used in defining the spectrometer resolution That the results given in

Equation 214 are the same as would be obtained from a more complicated

calculation using a monochromatic current source can be seen by considering a

monochromatic source v == (1 + l)vp and noting that it will be deflected tol

the edge of the 1st ERA by a pass energy Ep

Line shape broadening and an energy resolution due to a finite radius

to the source disk can be determined in a manner analogous to that used above

Consider a point source of particles at the 1st ERA that travel back through

the analyzer Such reverse trajectories would cross the target plane at a

position

(215)

where for these reverse trajectories using Equation 27

Yl = 491 a (216)

p being a variable representing the radius at which these trajectories cross

the plane of the target p is analogous to d in the earlier calculation

Using reciprocity particles emanating from a position on the target at radius

p with a velocity corresponding to S will cross the plane of the 1st ERA at

the axis For a source of radius R the line width is found by using the

arguments leading up to Equation 211 to be

R bull cos e S lt R cos e (217)491 ~ 491

For a spot size 2R == 1 rom (0039 in) the energy resolution due to a finite

source disk is

40

A (source) = 2[017R + 017R] (218)E p

~ (source) 013 for 2R = 1 mm (219)E p

At low primary energies for which the beam spot size is greater than 1 mm

the above broadening and resolution due to spot size are correspondingly larger

The line shape associated with a finite source disk is linearly

proportional to~ The functional dependence of source current on ~ which

essentially determines the line shape due to the finite source is not given

by Equation 29 Rather it can be obtained by assuming uniform emission over

the area of the source knowing that ~ and the radial position at the source

p are linearly related by Equation 216 and using the area relation

(220)

(221)

If the current from the source with velocity (1 + ~)v that passes the 1st ERA p

is designated JI(~) then

(222)

49lmiddotApJ I (~l) 0 2TT cos e ~ 1 (223)

From Equation 223 the line shape of the current due to finite source is seen

to be linearly related to ~

41

The overall resolution of the instrument can be approximated by the

sum of the two resolutions calculated above which is approximately 2

Experimentally the resolution of the spectrometer is measured as the full

width at half maximum (FWHM) of the elastic peak The bottom panel of Figure

28 shows the FWHM of the elastic peak as a function of the spectrometer pass

energy At 90 eV the experimental energy resolution is

bE FWEM 2 (224)Ep = ~ = 90 = 022

which is close to the theoretical calculations

The effective resolution of the spectrometer can be greatly increased

by retarding the beam using the three grids located between the target and

spherical analyzer This can be seen by repeating the calculation of Equation

224 using data from Figure 28 at a lower energy The measured effective

energy resolution of the spectrometer varies between 22 percent and 06

percent as the elastic peak is retarded by 10 percent to 90 percent of its

initial value Over this same range the intensity decreases almost 98 percent

Hence increased resolution is obtained at the expense of signal intensity

This is shown in the top panel of Figure 28 The solid curve in the top panel

is the transmission function of the spectrometer for a primary beam of 100 eV

The transmission function shows the fractional decrease in signal passed by

the spectrometer as a function of pass energy of the spectrometer The data

points were taken by retarding the 100 eV elastic peak between the grids until

it was passed by the spectrometer The transmission function is the ratio of

the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer at E to the peakpass

42

Figure 28 Top panel - Transmission function of spectrometer This function was obtained by retarding the 100 eV elastically scattered electron signal between the spectrometer grids and then measuring the ratio of the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer to the peak signal passed at Epass = E = 100 eV Bottom panel - Full width at half maX1mum of ~K~ elastically scattered electron signal passed by the spectrometer when the 100 eV signalis retarded using the grids to an energy E

pass

43

09

08

07

c006 U ()

E()05 c e 1-04

03

02

01

Epri =100eV

~ -Transmission of Spectrometer

Peak Intensity at Eposs Peak Intensity at Epass 100 eV

--Transmission for flEE Constant

() +shy

o gt-

20

10

Full Width at Half Maximum of Elastic Peak

100 eVEpri =

o~oo 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Spectrometer Pass Energy J Epass (eV) SP-1l22

0

44

signal passed at E = E i = 100 eV The dotted line in Figure 28 pass pr

indicates the transmission function for ~ = constant for a monochromatic

point source Deviations from the straight line are due 1) to the nonidea1

elastic peak (ie finite breadth) and spectrometer geometry 2) to field

penetration at the grids as a function of the retarding potential (which was

varied to obtain the graph) and 3) to the varying response of the electron

multiplier as a function of the voltage of the electrons incident on the

multiplier For the data presented here electrons were incident on the

multiplier with an energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer The

bottom panel of Figure 28 shows the experimental full width at half maximum

of the elastic peak as a function of pass energy (in this case pass energy =

(100 eV - retarding voltage))

The energy spectrometer has been operated successfully in both the

electron and ion pass modes over a pass energy range from 2 eV to 400 eV

The spectrometer is normally operated at a fixed pass energy and ideally

fixed energy resolution Energy sweeps are made by retardation (acceleration)

of electrons or ions between the first (screen grid) and third (tEED grid)

grids prior to entering the spherical analyzer section of the spectrometer

The third grid which was added primarily to eliminate charging problems

associated with the LEED screen (see Section 26) also improved the effective

resolution this improvement is due to decreased field penetration of the

applied retarding (accelerating) potential since the retarding (accelerating)

can be done over a 50 percent longer distance In addition the third grid is

made of smaller mesh which also reduces field penetration

45

The spectrometer is supported vertically from the electrical feedshy

through turret as shown in Figure 29 This assembly attaches at the top of

the main vacuum chamber (see Figure 21) and can be removed completely wired

independent of other parts of the instrument

The electron multiplier is an EMI model 96434B detector with 17

BeCu venetial blind dynode stages

25 Spectrometer Electronics

Figure 210 shows a schematic diagram of the electronic circuitry

used for taking electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated

desorption and Auger electron spectroscopy measurements Some details for

example capacitors used to eliminate noise and some switches used to change

from one mode to another are not shown Only the most common biasing

arrangement used in this work will be discussed

In the electron pass mode (including Auger measurements) the LEED

grid LEED screen Herzog diaphrams driftspace and center electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer are grounded Energy sweeps of the spectrometer are made

by varying the retardation or acceleration voltage applied between the three

73grids A variable frequency variable height floating sawtooth generator

plus a variable dc offset bias are summed at the inverting input of a Kepco

OPS-2000 operational power supply the output of which biases the three grids

through a resistor chain When the output signal from the multiplier is being

detected using a phase sensitive detector a 3 kHz sinusoidal signal is also

fed into the summing junction VT the target bias with respect to the screen

grid is zero in the electron pass mode The spherical analyzer deflecting

46

Figure 29 Photograph showing support of spectrometer from electrical feedthrough turret

W(100) Crystal

lOOK

Vr=O-6V

Dec Mode

Ace Mode (E Il

VOFFS

VOFFS=O-6V

Ratemeter ~

INlOO

=

Drift Space

epUISion Electrode

i -----In

(Ion Mode Only)

Jshy-l

Hamner N-780A Ortec 410 Linear Amp

Pulse Count Mode

Synchronous Detection Mode

PAR PAR Type A HR-8 Preamp

47K To Recorder Y

SP-1126

Figure 210 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer electronics for operation in the electron pass and ion pass modes

48

electrodes and the repulsion electrode of the cylindrical analyzer are scaled

using a resistor chain powered by a second OPS-2000 operational amplifier power

supply The voltage scaling for these electrodes was determined from particle

trajectory calculations The voltage applied to the repulsion electrode using

this resistor chain can be varied using a potentiometer this adjustment can

in effect vary the resolution of the cylindrical analyzer The OPS-2000

supply also biases the outer electrodes of the analyzer deflection plates by

means of a separate resistor chain The inner electrodes of these deflection

plates are fixed at the potential of the analyzers Herzog diaphrams The

ripple voltage on the output of both operational power supplies is less than

20 meV at 100 eV

Electrons impinge on the first dynode of the multiplier with an

energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer plus a voltage equal to

(R (36MO + R raquoV where R is shown in Figure 210 and V is the voltagem m M m M

across the multiplier In the synchronous detection mode V was variedM

between 1100 V and 1700 V In the pulse counting mode the voltage was normally

set at 2800 V The output of the multiplier after being passed by an

isolation capacitor is either pulse counted with a ratemeter or is detected

using a PAR HR-8 phase sensitive detector The reference signal for the HR-8

is either 3 kHz when taking dN(E)dE distributions (see Section 324 and

2Appendix B) or Auger data or 6 kHz when taking d N(E)dE distributions

When the spectrometer is operated in the ion pass mode the polarity

of the biasing on the analyzer deflecting electrodes is switched In addition

the positive pole of the electron mUltiplier supply is grounded This biasing

arrangement causes the ions to impinge on the multiplier at an energy

49

E pass + VM

which was usually 3040 kV In the ion pass mode the spectromshy

eter is generally operated at E = 40 eV This requires an acceleration of pass

the ions between the screen and LEED grids since the initial ion energies are

between 0 eV and 10 eV In addition to accelerating between the grids the

ions were normally accelerated between the target and screen grid using VT

in order to facilitate interpretation of the data as discussed in Section

325

The electronic circuitry for operating the analyzer in the time-ofshy

flight mode is identical to that just described for the ~on pass mode except

a pulsed voltage is applied to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a

schematic of this arrangement Unlike continuous operation in this mode ions

can enter the analyzer only during the on pulse In the lower part of

Figure 211 the energy of an ion is shown as a function of its position in the

spectrometer with the pulse on and off

In the work function mode the target is fixed at ground potential

through a picoammeter Retardation of the incident current is accomplished by

driving the drift tube positive in voltage

26 LEED Display System

The low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system consists of a

phosphor-coated screen located at the entrance to the spherical analyzer and

othree grids The screen a 1096 stainless steel sector (of which approxishy

omatelya 98 sector is visible) was coated with a P-l phosphor The first

two grids are constructed of 50 mesh rhodium-coated stainless steel The

LEED screen and these two grids are operated as a standard two grid LEED

50

II

Vr V

Ion Trajectory

ACC

Linear Amp Preamp

To Oscilloscope Trace

VRG~+ To O~oopeP I If Trace and Time u se t Base Trigger Genera or -

(l)~ os

CIgt () o cC u (l) E t gt - C N a (l) (l) (u~CIgt (l) 0 ~ shy - c 0 c 0 0 ti (l) ac o c

()

f- (j) a (j)lt f-lt u ~----~~------~~ ~I

0 1--A I ----5----------------

ElON I

VACC

I (l) ()

5 Q

gt CIgt t c

~---J8w c o H

SP-I027

EPAS S + V L-____________________---- M

Figure 211 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer for operation in the time-of-f1ight mode

51

system with the retarding grid biased to pass only electrons elastically

scattered from the target and with the LEED screen accelerating voltage

normally set at 5000 V Slots cut through the screen allow electrons and

ions to pass into the spectrometer Initial operation of the instrument

indicated that charging of the LEED screen caused a significant perturbation

on electron trajectories below 100 eV The third grid a 100 mesh stainless

s tee 1 spherical sector is loca ted 0050 em in front of the LEED screen to

alleviate this problem

An aluminum-coated glass plate mirror located below the spectrometer

reflects the LEED screen through a 6Lch indo in the chamber wall (see

Figure 21) LEED spot intensities are measured through this window using a

Gamma Scientific Model 2000 telephotometer

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly

The crystal manipulator assembly is shown schematically in Figure

212 and a photograph is given in Figure 213 The assembly is designed to

provide thermal and electrical control of the target while allowing the

target face to be rotatable between the gas dosing port the LEED screenshy

energy spectrometer position and the quadrupole mass spectrometer This

rotation is indicated in Figure 214 The manipulator assembly is composed

of a commercial Physical Electronics specimen manipulator a long shaft which

supports the rotary electrical connections a liquid nitrogen dewaI and

aluminum foil strap to provide target cooling and a target mounting assembly

The long shaft of the manipulator assembly is constructed of

different materials as follows A1 0 for electrical isolation (Figure 2122 3

52

Figure 212 Schematic diagram of the target manipulation and thermal control system showing (1) kovar-glass-kovar dewar insulation (2) Miniconflat flanges (3) Physical Electronics Industries specimen manipulator Model 10-501M mounted on 8 inch od Conflat flange (4) six 5 kV - 150 A electrical feedthroughs (5) clamp assembly (6) A1 03 rod (7) molybdenum spring2(8) stainless steel electr1cal connectors (9) electrical connecshytion (1 shown) (10) A1203 spacers (11) Pyrex plates (12) molybshydenum (13) 001 wall stainless tube (14) Pyrex tubes (15) tantalum rods (16) copper rod (17) vacuum chamber wall (18) liquid riitrogen dewar (19) 001 wall stainless tube (20) copper radiation shield (21) strap-to-dewar clamp (22) crystal support (23) 12 pole heater (24) strap-to-copper rod clamp (25) aluminum foil strap (26) pancake heater supp~rt~ (27) thermocouple (28) crystal (29) pancake heater (30) tanta~ lum section (31) molybdenum section (32) molybdenum-to-copper rod clamp assembly

53

Jl ~

Figure 213 Photograph of crystal manipulator The retarding field analyzer used to characterize the primary electron beam is shown mounted on the manipulator in place of the tungsten crystal mounting assembly

55

Magnetic Shielding

Tungsten Crystal

Energy Spectrometer and LEED Gas Dosing Optics Aperture

To Gas Bottle

Line -of-Sight Quadrupole Mass Crystal Holder Spectrometer and Manipulator

SP-1072

Figure 214 Schematic of the experimental chamber of the apparatus (see Section 22 for a discussion of the experimental chamber) Rotation of the crystal is indicated by the dotted line

56

no 6) molybdenum rod (no 12) 304 stainless steel tubing for thermal

isolation (no 13) and copper rod (no 16) Six electrical leads separated

by glass discs (no 11) wind around the shaft ~his configuration allows for

rotary motion of the shaft while still providing electrical control at the

targetJ The electrical leads then enter glass tubing parallel to the shaft

and end up at the target mounting assembly For clarity only one of these

leads is shown in Figure 212

An aluminum foil strap (no 25) made of 150 pieces of 254 cm x ~254

em x 00025 cm foil connects the liquid nitorgen reservoir to the copper rod

end of the manipulator shaft This provides conduction cooling to the target

A copper radiation shield (no 20) is constructed around the strap This

cooling system is sufficient to cool the target from flash temperatures to

approximately -1500

C in 5 minutes

The tungsten single crystal target is supported 095 cm above a

tantalum and molybdenum right angle mount (nos 30 31) on one 0038 cm

diameter tungsten wire The wire was spot-welded to the back face of the

tungsten disc prior to its final electropolishing The target is heated by

electron bombardment of its back face from a tungsten pancake heater (no 29)

The target can also be heated by conduction through its support wire using a

25 watt 12 pole 25L6 RCA heater which is mounted inside the tantalum part

of the right angle mount as shown dotted in Figure 212 (no 23) Using this

heater the target temperature can be varied between -20oC and -150

0 C Tungsten

and tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple leads 0076 cm in diameter are spot-

welded to the side of the target The thermocouple wires are each supported

by being fed along the axis of a tungsten wire helix (not shown in Figure

57

212) The helices are made of 025 cm diameter wire and are spot-welded to

supports near the center of the molybdenum part of the right angle mount

Calibration of the thermocouple was made out of the vacuum chamber using a

copper-constantan reference thermocouple The calibration procedure is

described in Appendix A and the calibration is given in Figure A1

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures

The experimental sample is a single crystal tungsten disc cut from

a (100) oriented tungsten rod using a diamond impregnated stainless wire in a

string saw The tungsten rod supplied by Metals Research Ltd was taken

from the purest 75 cm of a triply zone refined 25 cm length

Both the front and back surfaces of the disc were polished using in

succession 15 micron 3 micron and 1 micron alumina After being mechanishy

cally polished the crystal was e1ectropo1ished using a 1 NaOH solution The

final dimensions of the target disc are 0033 cm (013 in) thick and approxishy

mate1y 080 cm in diameter

After the final e1ectropo1ish the orientation of both the front and

back surfaces was checked using an x-ray diffractometer and was determined to

be within 0100 of the (100) face A back reflection Laue picture of the final

surface showed sharp well-defined beams indicating a high degree of crystalshy

line order

The target was o 74cleaned initially by heating to at least 2200 K in

a -61x10 Torr oxygen atmosphere for 9 hr to remove carbon The choice of

temperature and time were somewhat arbitrary as there is considerable debate

in the literature as to the proper method for cleaning tungsten for surface

58

research 74 A standard method7 1823 has been to heat the target to some

temperature above 11000 K (commonly above 20000 K) in an oxygen environment for

times varying up to 200 hr or more This process is generally followed by a

high temperature degassing in ultrahigh vacuum However there is evidence

othat if the temperature is held above 2000 K bulk carbon will not diffuse to

75 74the surface The possibility of thermal etching must also be considered

For the tungsten used in this research the amount of contamination

on the surface was determined using Auger spectroscopy Figure 215 is an

Auger spectrum taken from a dirty surface showing the Auger peaks resolved in

our system Carbon oxygen and tungsten peaks are seen clearly Also shown

76in Figure 215 are theoretical Auger transition energies for C 0 and W

with the relative theoretical strengths of the transitions indicated by the

normalized height of the lines In Figure 216 are shown Auger spectra taken

after different crystal treatments or under different experimental conditions

Curve a shows the spectrum taken after saturating the surface with CO Note

the carbon and oxygen peaks There is no measurable carbon peak after a

flash as seen in curve b Structure does remain between 475 eV and 525 eV

It is doubtful that this structure is a result of oxygen contamination since

there are normally three oxygen Auger peaks with the 490 eV oxygen peak

stronger than the 475 eV oxygen peak in this spectrum no 490 eV peak is

observed In order to reduce any oxygen contamination the target was heat

0 treated to 2200 K in a hydrogen atmosphere of 5x10- 7 Torr for 4 minutes 74

The structure above 475 eV is seen to remain unchanged as seen in curve c

This is a further indication that this structure is not oxygen Curve d shows

that sitting in a 400 eV 4 ~ primary beam close to typical operating

59

Carbon Oxygen

o 100

dN(E) dE

200 300 400 500 600 Electron Energy (eV) SP-U44

Figure 215 Auger electron spectrums obtained at different instrument sensitivities from dirty tungsten crystal Also shown in upper part of figure are theoretical Auger transitions for tungsten carbon and oxygen calculated by Coghlan and C1ausing76 Heights of the lines represent relative theoshyretical strengths of the transitions

60

(a) CO Monolayer

~5Ab) Heate~toCleon x25

d ~5dN(E) dE (e) Heat Treated

x25 in H2

_~5 ~ (d) 400V4fLA

x25 Primary Beam for

25~

d x5

(e) 1700V 211-A Primary Beam for 10 Min

200 300 400 500 Electron Energy (eV) SP-1l45

Figure 216 Comparison of Auger electron spectrums taken over the energy range 200 eV to 550 eV under different experimental condition

61

conditions for 25 minutes causes only a slight change in the slope of the

curve at the energy at which the carbon peak occurs (Note that curve d was

taken with a primary beam of 1700 eV after the crystal had been sitting in

the lower energy beam for 25 minutes) The absence of the carbon peak in curve

d means that the crystal surface is not contaminated from the gun while taking

measurements After bombarding the target for 10 minutes with a primary beam

of 1700 eV and 21 ~ typical Auger spectroscopy beam conditions a carbon

peak is observed as shown in curve e Using the peak to peak height of the

272 ~V carbon peak obtained near CO saturation as an indication of carbon

monolayer coverage the electron gun in the Auger mode is seen to deposit

approximately 013 monolayer of carbon in 10 minutes

From the above results it is concluded that the tungsten surface

could be flashed clean and that no carbon or oxygen contamination is deposited

during most experimental measurements Some carbon is deposited when operating

in the Auger mode Two unexpected small peaks are observed between 475 eV

and 525 eV Identification of the source of this weak structure could not be

made with certainty although two possible causes are worth noting The

unexpected structure could be tungsten Auger transitions Theoretically

several relatively strong tungsten peaks have been predicted at 477 eV and

486 eV and also between 510 eV and 520 eV However no observations of

tungsten transitions in this energy range have been reported in the experimenshy

tal literature A second possible source of this structure mighL be chromium

There is considerable chromium in the spectrometers stainless steel parts and

chromium Auger peaks occur at 489 eV and 529 eV However if it is assumed

that Auger spectroscopy is sensitive to one percent of a monolayer it would

62

13 2require surface coverages of 10 chromium atomscm or more to yield these

peaks It is extremely unlikely that either 1) a concentration of chromium

this large could diffuse to the tungsten surface from the stainless parts or

2) enough chromium could be sputtered (at the ambient pressure) into the backshy

ground from the stainless parts and subsequently adsorb onto the surface A

spark vaporization mass spectroscopy analysis of a tungsten sample cut from

the same boule as the tungsten used in this research revealed no chromium

thus eliminating the possibility of a bulk chromium concentration in the

crystal Hence although the weak structure corresponds to some degree to

chromium Auger lines it is believed that the crystal is not contaminated with

this element In an Auger spectrum taken between 500 eV and 900 eV (not shown)

some additional very weak structure was seen but none of it could be

attributed to any specific element

o 77In this research the crystal was always flashed to gt 2200 K for 30

seconds prior to experimentation Any reference to a clean tungsten surface

means that this procedure has been followed

The crystal surface exhibited what appeared to be furrows which

increased in density during the course of the research Because the coolest

part of the crystal during a flash that region next to the tungsten wire

support remained visibly polished and flat it is believed that the uneven

appearance was temperature related

29 Gas Handling System

The gas handling system used to obtain adsorption overlayers is

shown in Figure 217 Research grade hydrogen (impurity level less than 2

To Quadrupole Moss Spectrometer

Alternate Gas Source Control Valve

Thermocouple Gouge

Plenum

~-----Viewing Port

Jet Position Adjustment

Ion Gouge

Cryosorb Pump

0 t)

S-1l28

Figure 217 Schematic drawing of gas handling system

64

ppm) is admitted from a glass flash into a pyrex manifold and stainless steel

reservoir Reservoir pressure was kept near 50 microns as read using a

thermocouple gauge From the reservoir hydrogen is admitted into the vacuum

system through a 126 cm diameter tube by opening valve A Figure 217 or is

admitted as a gas jet by opening valve B The jet is formed as hydrogen

effuses through a small orifice at the end of a 063 cm dia tube78J~9 Leaking

hydrogen through the 126 em diameter tube increases the background and is used

when hydrogen is to be adsorbed from the background The jet can be used

with the target rotated in front of the gas dosing port for rapid over layer

adsorption with a low hydrogen background pressure The gas jet is designed

so that only that fraction of the effusing gas which will strike the target is

allowed to pass through an aperture in a skimmer The rest of the gas jet is

reflected back from the skimmer and out of the experimental chamber When the

target is rotated up to face the spectrometer the gas jet if left on passes

out of the experimental chamber through holes in the opposite side of the

magnetic shielding

The gas manifold and reservoir can be pumped down to less than 1

micron using a liquid nitrogen cryosorb pump

210 Mass Spectrometer

A quadrupole mass spectrometer Varian Residual Gas Analyzer Model

974-0003 is mounted on a vacuum chamber port opposite the gas jet port In

this research it was used for vacuum chamber leak testing and determination of

the components of the background pressure

65

CHAPrER 3

EXPERIMENTAL PFGCEDURE AND RESULTS

31 Introduction

The experimental data taken on the hydrogen-W(lOO) system are

presented in this chapter The apparatus used in obtaining the data has been

discussed previously in Chapter 2 A further explanation of experimental

procedures used in measuring parameters follows in Section 32 The experishy

mental results are presented in the remaining sections of this chapter A

general discussion of the data is given in Chapter 4 and a summary of the

research is given in Chapter 5

32 Experimental Procedure

321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements

Contact potential measurements in this case the difference between

the work functions of the target and of the cathode in the electron gun are

43 44measured using a retarding potential techn1que The primary or incident

electron beam current is retarded between the electron gun drift tube and the

target The measured current to the target goes to zero at a retarding voltage

VR

given by

V = (rn + V - rn ) + E (31)R Tcath sc TW pr1

where Cfgtcath is the cathode work function CfgtW is the W(lOO) work function Vsc

is the potential due to space charge immediately in front of the cathode and

E is the applied potential between the cathode and the drift tube Changespr1

66

in the work function of the target ~ are calculated by measuring changes

in VR

LlVR

From Equation 3la change in V is found to equalR

(32)

with the assumptions of constant rn h V and E The assumptions usedTcat sc pr1

are reasonable since the cathode in thermal equilibrium and since it

is exposed to very small changes in the ambient during the measurements The

applied potential E i can be maintained constant pr

A typical retarding potential curve is given in Figure 31 The

electron current to the target the ordinate in this figure is given by

(33)

where I i is the current incident on the target from the electron gun and pr

I (E N) the secondary current represents the electron current leavingsec pri

the target surface This secondary current is a function of both primary

47electron energy and hydrogen coverage Because of the dependence on coverage

the intensity and line shape of the retarding potential curves change somewhat

upon adsorption

In determining LlVR

or equivalently the target work function change

a retarding potential curve taken from the clean tungsten surface and a curve

taken after hydrogen adsorption are normalized at a position on the curve where

the target current begins to falloff sharply (position A in Figure 31) The

work function change is then measured as the voltage difference between the

two curves at half the normalized height

Changes in the work function of 001 eV can be resolved The

10

(J)

c I

I

AE lt( l-~ c Q)

-

05 U ~ I I ~ Q) 0) shy0 I-

omiddot ~ middot 10 20 30

Cathode Potential-Target Potential (volts)

SP-1142 Figure 31 Retarding potential curve showing the current to the target as

a function of the difference in applied potential between the electron gun cathode and the target The curve is shifted in energy with changes in hydrogen coverage due to changes in the target work function 6~ 6~ is measured as the difference between two retarding curves at the height A2

68

measurement was sensitive to target rotation position because of the retarding

field in the target region However with the target positioning stop used

the retarding potential curve could be repeated with an accuracy better than

002 eV after rotating the target Since the work function change is the

difference between two such curves the error in the measurement is ~004 eV

Changes in hydrogen coverage are monitored by changes in the work

function of the tungst~n tlurface No experimental attempts have been made

to calibrate the measureci ork fUllction change to an absolute change in the

coverage of atomssurface area Such a calibration requires an accurate measure

of system pumping speed or dosing flux However as discussed in Section 34

such a calibration can be made using results from the literature

322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current Measurements

The total electron beam current incident on the target Ipri is

measured by biasing the target at a potential of +45 volts with respect to the

surrounding experimental chamber Tests indicated that the current measured

in this manner is within 3 percent of the total current leaving the electron

gun which is also I The current leaving the gun is measured by summingprJ

electron currents to the target grids LEED screen magnetic shielding

analyzer Herzog diaphrams and front shield plate This current sum measureshy

ment of I was more difficult to make experimentally than biasing the targetprJ

at +45 volts

The primary electron energy E refers to the energy of theprJ

incident electrons referenced to the vacuum level Themiddotpritnarymiddot energy is

measured between the cathode and drift tube of the electron gun A contact

potential correction between the guns cathode and the target of between

69

-17 eV and -22 eV has been applied to the measured primary energy given in

the data This correction is found by using the measured cut off potential VR

and Equation 31 The spread in the correction is a result of th~ change in

space charge and hence change in V which occurs when the potential gradientsc

at the cathode is altered by changing the voltage on the control grid The

control grid voltage determines the potential fields in the region of the

cathode surface and hence affects the emitted current and space charge

323 Target Temperature Measurement

Prior to taking any data the target was cleaned by rapid electron

bombardment heating (flashing) at gt 22000 K for 30 seconds Figure 32 shows

the temperature of the target versus time from end of flash with and without

liquid nitrogen in the dewar Residual heat in the crystal supports due

to previous flashes does affect the temperature versus time curves somewhat

The higher temperature data were normally taken starting 3 to 4 minutes after

flashing at a target temperature of 600 C + lSoC Data taken under these

conditions are sometimes referred to as room terr~erature or higher temperature

data Low temperature data were taken starting 4 to S minutes after flaShing

when the target temperature was less than -l45 0 C

324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements

The electron scattering data consists of the electron signal emanating

from the target in the acceptance solid angle of the spectrometer following

impingement of the primary electron beam on the target An energy distribution

of these electrons is taken by fixing the pass energy of the spectrometer at

E and sweeping a retarding or accelerating voltage between the screen gridpass

and LEED grid as described previously in Section 25 The output current of

70 300~----~----~----~--------------------

200

-u 1000

-~ J

e ltlgt 0 E ~ -ltlgt ~ 0 ~

Liquid Nitrogen in Dewar

-100

-2000~----~----~----~----~----~----~61 2 345

Time from Flash (min) SP-ll40

Figure 32 Temperature of the tungsten crystal versus time elapsed since a crystal flash The upper curve represents the temperature versus time relation when there is no crystal cooling The lower curve shows this relation when there is liquid nitrogen in the cooling dewar

71

the electron multiplier N(E) is pulse counted or as discussed below Cld in

Appendix B synchronously detected

N(E) is proportional to the electron current originating at the

target with energy between E and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance

solid angle of the analyzer This distribution consists of rapidly varying

true secondary and characteristic loss structure interpretable in terms of

transitions and collective oscillations in the target plus a smoothly varying

background In order to separate the structure from the background the energy

distribution is electronically differentiated using a technique proposed by

67Harrls As shown in Appendix B a signal proportional to the first or to

the second derivative of N(E) is obtained by synchronously detecting the

appropriate harmonic of the output of the electron multiplier The relation

between the electron signal N(E) and the synchronously detected signal can

be seen from Equations B4 through B9 In these equations it is assumed a

peaked structure G(E) being inv~stigatedcan be represented by a Gaussian

centered at E with standard deviation o The detected first harmonic of o

N(E) has structure which has a peak-to-peak height proportional to G(E plusmn a)o

The detected second harmonic of N(E) has structure at E proportional to o

G(E ) a2 In addition there is t contribution to the detected signal from o

the background Since the background which can be represented by a polynomial

in energy is slowly varying the higher order terms which remairr in the difshy

feren tiated signals are small

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as

is commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in taking electron

scattering characteristic energy loss measurements

72

325 Ion Measurements

g+ ions desorbed from the crystal following electron impact could

be detected by the spectrometer when operated in the ion pass mode It was

found convenient to operate the instrument at a pass energy of 40 eV in this

mode operation at a lower pass energy while increasing the resolution

decreased the already weak signal intensity Since the ions have between 0 eV

and 10 eV energy when desorbed acceleration between the target and spectromshy

eter was necessary An accelerating voltage V (the output of an OPS-2000 acc

power supply) was applied between the screen grid and the entrance to the

spectrometer In addition a second accelerating voltage V was appliedT

between the target and the screen grid This latter voltage was needed in

order to energetically separate the ion signal which originated at the target

from a background signal produced by 1) ions electron desorbed from the screen

grid andor other surfaces in the experimental chamber and 2) ionization of

the background The ions that passed into the spectrometer were accelerated

into the first dynode of the electron multiplier The output pulses of the

multiplier were amplified and then counted with a ratemeter

Prior to taking ion data the target was flashed and allowed to

cool to the experimental temperature It was then exposed to hydrogen with

the hydrogen coverage being monitored using work function measurements Ion

energy distributions were taken by fixing E and V and sweeping the pass T

accelerating voltage V Desorption curve measurements which are a measureshyacc

ment of the decrease of the ion signal in the electron beam were taken by

fixing V V and E and monitoring the ion signal as a function of acc T pass

time

73

The kinetic energy of the detected ions is equal to the spectrometer

pass energy E minus the acceleration of the ions between the target and pass

spectrometer V + VT

plus a contact potential correction term due to the acc

difference in work functions of the clean target and surfaces of the spectromshy

eter The pass and acceleration energies are chosen for each experiment The

contact potential difference between the tungsten target and the rhodium

coated stainless steel surfaces of the spectrometer is less than 015 eV

This was determined using a retarding potential measurement between the

target and screen grid Dosing the target with hydrogen did not change the

work function of the grid Hence it is assumed that 015 eV can be used for

the correction at all target hydrogen coverages Since this correction is

on the order of the error in the measurement it has not been made in the

data

The analyzer is operated in a time-of-f1ight mode by applying a

pulsed voltage to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a schematic of this

arrangement Incident ions can enter the analyzer only during the pulse By

measuring the path length d = ab (see Figure 211) from the retarding grid

to the electron multiplier knowing the pass energy E of the spectromshypass

eter and experimentally measuring the time for the entering species to

traverse the distance d the mass of singly-charged ions passing through the

analyzer can be calculated using the following formulation of the distance

equals velocity times time equation

m _ dxrt J 2 (34)La J2E(X~

74

The flight time is measured by making a trace on an oscilloscope of both the

pulse applied to the retarding grid that allows ions to pass into the specshy

trometer and also the output pulses of the linear amplifier The flight time

t is the time difference between these two signals minus the transmission

time of the pulse from the first dynode of the electron multiplier to the

oscilloscope This transmission time is estimated to be several hundred

nanoseconds

The data taken in this research is presented in the remaining

sections of this chapter

33 Ion Species Identification

The ion species desorbed from the tungsten crystal by electron imshy

pact are identified using a time-of-flight technique as described above For

these measurements the spectrometer was set to pass 40 eV ions A total

acceleration voltage V + V of 370 eV was applied between the crystalT acc

and the entrance to the spectrometer Hence the energy of the ions origishy

nating at the crystal surface and passed by the spectrometer was 3 eV (3 eV

corresponds to the maximum in intensity of the ion energy dist~ibution given

in Section 35) Figure 33 shows an oscilloscope trace obtained when opershy

ating in the time-of-flight mode The trace was taken by applying a 22 ~sec

4pulse to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl0 pulsessec) This is the

large pulse at the left in the figure Several output pulses from the linear

amplifier can be seen approximately 4~sec after the retarding grid pulse

These are pulses that have been produced by the electron multiplier following

ion impingement onto the first dynode Taking into consideration the transshy

mission time the experimental flight time is 37~sec Using Equation 34

75

ill22fLsec Window Amplifier Output Pulses

o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Time (fLsec)

Time of Flight (H+) =J2~m ES 40 eV d=029 m

~ 33 fLsec

Figure 33 Oscilloscope trace showing the pulses observed when operating the spectrometer in the time-of-flight mode The 22 ~sec trace at the left is the analyzer on pulse applied to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl04 pulsessec) During this pulse ions pass into the spectrometer Several output pulses from the linear amplifier resulting from ions striking the electron multiplier can be seen delayed by their flight time in the spectrometer and the pulse transmission time from the multiplier to the oscilloscope The output pulses have been enhanced for reproduction purposes

76

with the analyzer pass energy of 40 eV a path length of 029 m and a time of

37 ~sec the mass of the desorbed ions is calculated to be 14 amu The unshy

certainty in this calculation is estimated to be~05 amu Sources of error

include the estimate of transmission time and the uncertainty in the time difshy

ference read from the oscilloscope trace In adqition over part of the path

length (the region between the retarding and LEED grids and in the cylindrical

analyzer) the ions have less than 40 eV energy Hence from this calculation

alone it is not possible to identify the ions as H+ However in experiments

in which the length of the retarding grid pulse was shortened to~ 1 ~ sec

flight times that differed by gt1 ~sec could be distinguished on the oscilloshy

scope The calculated flight time for ions of mass one is 3 3 ~ sec and for

ions of mass two is 46 ~sec or 13 ~sec longer Thus H+ could be resolved

from Hiions The ions detected in the time-of-flight experiment of Figure 33

+have been identified as H For certain spectrometer biasing conditions

+pulses appear on the oscilloscope 1 5 ~ sec later than the H pulses The ions

causing these pulses have been identified as having mass two

When oxygen is adsorbed on the surface the signal pulses on the osshy

cilloscope occur approximately 135 ~sec after the retarding grid pulse This

is in good agreement with the expected flight time for 0+ ions

+In addition to the H ions observed after adsorbing hydrogen from the

jet H+ ions were unexpectedly desorbed by electron impact from the undosed

tungsten surface upon cooling the crystal to below OoC Possible sources for

the hydrogen desorbed under these conditions are discussed in Chapter 4

If E is set at 40 eV set at 0 eV and V varied above pass VT acc

40 eV no ions originating at the crystal surface can be passed by the spectromshy

77

eter However with these biasing conditions both H+ and H + ions are obshy2

served This ion signal has to originate at the walls of the experimental

+ +chamber from a ESD process andor from the ambient Both the H and H2 sigshy

nals increased when H2 was admitted into the background from the gas handling

system an indication that at least part of the signal origtnates from ionizashy

tion in the background It is not easy to determine the intensity of the

+ +H or H2 desorbed from the chamber walls However it is possible to show that

ionization of ambient H2 could be a serious noise problem The cross section

+ -17 2for electron impact ionization of H2 to H2 is 48xlO cm and of H2

22xlO-17 cm2 for 400 eV electrons 80 An electron current of lxlO-6 A at 400

eV would produce about llxlO3 H2+ ions per cm3-Torr-sec and 5xl012 H + ions

3 per cm -Torr-sec Thus it is reasonable to assume that at the background presshy

sures here a sizable ion Signal is produced although most of it undoubtedly

is not detected In the ESD eXperiments performed here it was desired to

detect only ions produced at the surface of the crystal It has been possible

to bias the spectrometer such that this is the case Almost none of the extra

signal has the correct energy to pass through the spectrometer when V isT

held several volts positive and when V is kept less than E - V bull acc pass T

34 Work Function Results

Work function changes resulting from hydrogen adsorption have been

monitored as a measure of hydrogen coverage Figure 34 shows the tungsten

surface work function change as a function of exposure to hydrogen The crysshy

tal was at 600 C for this experiment To obtain this data the crystal was roshy

tated into the gas jet dosed for a measured time and then rotated back to a

position in front of the spectrometer where a retarding potential curve was

78

Figure 34 Change in work function 6~ of a room temperature tungsten (100) surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption 6~ is plotted versus exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen For comparison the results reported by Madey820 are also shown Exposures for the data taken here have been determined by normalizing the measured adsorption time to Madeys absolute exposure at a work function change ~ of 041 eV

------o 0 Withrow

10

08

gt06 OJ--amplt]04

02

0~013

Madey and Yates

Max bcp=~~

Data Normalized at bcp =041

0

10M 101610~ Exposure (Moleculescm2) SP-1121

80

S o Max ltltgt=09S-~ 6 A Max ltltgt =092 --eshy

lt34 o Adsorption at 60degC A Adsorption at -150degC

2

20 40 60 SO 100 120 140 160 ISO 200 220 Exposure (arbitrary units)

SP-1214

Figure 35 Comparison of work function changes at 600 C and -lSOoC resulting from hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten (100)

OlO~i--~----~--~----~--~----~--~--~~--~~

- W(lOO)gt (J) 008

- shy

-u 006 o o

00 ~ 004 --Sshy

I 002-I shy--S- 0

-200 -100 o 100 200 Temperature (OC) SP-U56

Figure 36 Change in the work function of the undosed tungsten (100) surface versus crystal temperature for the temperature range -150oC to 220oC The ordinate in the graph represents the work function at temperature T measured with respect to the work function at 220degC The data was obtained in three_separate experimental runs indicated by different symbols as discussed in the text

82

taken This procedure was followed repeatedly without closing the jet in order

to assure a constant hydrogen flux (molecm2-sec) from the jet onto the

-8crystal face An incident primary electron current oflt2xlO A at a primary

energy of 100 eV was used The saturation coverage work function change

8tCP ) is 098 + 004 eV For comparison results obtained by Madey and Yates

max

for the work function change resulting from adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO)

are given in Figure 34 Absolute exposures for the data taken here have been

obtained by normalizing the dose time to Madey and Yates exposure at a work

function change of 041 eV Using this normalization good agreement beshy

tween their results and the data obtained here is found

The work function change of the tungsten surface as a function of hyshy

drogen exposure was also measured when the crystal was at -150degC The data are

given in Figure 35 The procedure used in obtaining the 600 c data was fallowed

in taking these data The maximum work function change at this lowtemperature

is 092 + 004 eV

The dependence of the work function on crystal temperature is shown

in Figure 36 The work function is seen to decrease 005 eV as the temperashy

ture is raised from -lSOoC to 220degC The data in this figure were obtained in a

series of retarding potential curve measurements taken at different crystal

temperatures The temperature was varied by radiation heating the ~rystal on

its back face using the pancake heater It was found impossible to take decent

retarding potential curves when the crystal was heated more than about ISOoC

above its initial temperature As the current through the pancake heater was

increased electron emission from this heater also increased This emission

current interfered with the retarding potential measurement when it became a

83

fraction of the incident current The three different symbols in Figure 36

represent data taken when the initial temperature prior to heating was -150oC

work function change has been reported Assuming this result and using the

-1350 C and 50oC The change in work function with temperature was reversible

In this research no attempts have been made to measure absolute covshy

erages Coverages are defined in terms of ~ the measured work function

change As discussed in Section 126 a linear relation between coverage and

8

room temperature data taken here cover~ge and work function can be described

by the expression

e = 102 ~ (35)

where ~ is measured in eVe e represents coverage in fraction of a mon6laye~

15 2 8 A monolayer is assumed to be 2xlO H atomscm Estimates of coverage in this

work will be made by measuring work function changes and using Equation 35

However it should be noted that the data will be presented in terms of the

measured quantity~ and therefore are not dependent on any assumptions

made relating coverage and work function

35 H+ Ion DesoEPtion Measurements

The electron stimulated desorption of H+ ions from the W(lOO) surface

has been studi~d under different experimental conditions Detection of the

ion signal has been discussed in Section 325 The results follow below

351 H+ Ion Energy Distribution

Ions desorbed from a surface by electron impact have a characteristic

distribution in energy This distribution is dependent on the adsorption states

from which the ions originate In the simple models used to describe this

phenomena changes in the observed energy distribution except some intensity

84

changes result from changes in the adsorption states Hence this measurement

can be used to characterize the states from which ions are desorbed A theore~

ieal discussion of the ion energy distribution is given in Appendix C

Figure 37 shows the energy distribution of H+ ions electron desorbed

-6from W(IOO) using a primary beam current of IxlO A at an energy of 400 eV

This current was sufficiently low such that the energy distribution was obtained

without desorbing the hydrogen coverage to any extent The choice of 400 eV for

the primary energy was to some extent arbitrary although it was found that

below 400 eV the ion signal was weaker and the measurements required more time

to take To obtain the data the crystal was flashed and then allowed to cool

several minutes to 60oC It was then dosed with hydrogen from the jet until a

work function change of 018 eV corresponding to a substantial coverage in the

~2 state was measured The distribution was obtained by scanning V while acc

holding V at 4 volts The distribution has an intensity maximum at 3 + 05 eVT

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV No correction to the energy scale

has been made for the target-spectrometer contact potential difference since

this amounts to only 015 eV which is smaller than the accuracy in the meashy

s~remertt A small part of the detected ion signal which did not originate at

the crystal surface has been subtracted out The amount of this contribution

was determined by monitoring the ion signal from the flashed undosed surface

This extra signal amounted to no more than 10 percent of the total signal and

was entirely on the low side of the energy distribution

+For comparison the energy distributions of H ions produced by elecshy

tron impact of gas phase hydrogen81 and hydrogen-covered polycrystalline tungshy

82sten are included in Figure 37 All three curves have been normalized to

the same peak intensity The three curves have characteristically different

85

Figure 37 Energy distribution of H+ ions from a tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen Hydrogen coverage for this measurement corresponds to a work function change of 018 eV (approximately 019 monolaYS2) F~r comparison the energy distribution reported by Nishijima of H ions des orbed from hydrogen covered polyshycrystalline tungsten is given ASIo shown is an ion energy distribution obtained by Hagstrum from gas phase hydrogen The three distributions have been normalized at their peak intensities

-Ugt-

Q)

gtshyc o

H

+ r

86

H+ Ion Energy Distribution

- Withrow H2 W(lOO) -- Nishijima H2 I W (polycrystol) _- HagstrumH2 gas

1 J

ii ~ I I iiI ~ I

iii middot VI 1

I I bull

o 2 468

H+ Ion Energy (eV)

87

distributions in energy

Energy distributiol1s of H+ ions taken at different hydrogen coverages

are shown in Figure 38 Experimental conditions for these measurements were

the same as used to obtain the previous figure There is no change in peak

position or line shape as a function of coverage except for heavy dosings

where the distribution appears to be slightly broader The maximum intensity

is a function of coverage as discussed below

Figure 39 shows a series of ion energy distributions taken after

adsorption from the jet with the target temperature approximately -150o

C For

these data the target was flashed and allowed to cool 5 minutes before

adsorption All other experimental conditions were identical to the correshy

sponding 600

C data The distributions peak at 3 eV (except at high coverage

where the peak appears to be slightly higher) and have full widths at half

maxima of 26 eV identical to the results found for 600 C adsorption The

high energy tail of these low temperature distributions appears to be somewhat

wider than the corresponding higher temperature data however

After flashing the target to 22000 K and allowing it to cool five

ominutes to a temperature of lt-145 C hydrogen ions can be detected without

dosing the surface from the jet An energy distribution for this signal is

shown in Figure 310 A time-of-flight measurement confirmed that the observed

signal is indeed H+ ions The energy distribution peaks at 25 05 eVvith a

full width at half maximum of 58 eV The peak intensity of the ion signal

obtained without dosing depends on the previous history of the sample and on

the experimental parameters as discussed in Section 35~ This intensity

change is indicated by arrows in Figure 310 For this measurement the

88

H+ from H2 W (100) T=600C

Zero Levels

fI)

cshy s gt

~

c-0 ~

0 ~ --0

CIgt

gt-shyc 0

1-1

+J

o 2 4 6

6cent= OSSeV

6cent=06geV

6cent=045eV

6cent=0lSeV

Acent=OlOeV

Acent=003eV

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1l96

Figure 38 Comparison of energy distributions of g+ ions desorbed from a 600 c tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

89

-ffl middotcshy

l

gtshy 0 shy

0 0-0 ltlgt

gt= C 0

H

+I

H+ from H2 W(100) T =-150degC

Zero Levels

Dcp=067 eV

Dcp= 043eV

---_Dcp=Olle~

___

Dcp=017eV

D_cp=004eV

o 246 H+lon Energy (eV)

SP-1197

Figure 39 Comparison of energy distributions of H+ ions desorbed from a low temperature (-lSOOC) tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

90

--(J) H+ from Undosed W(lOO)

T=l50degC

H+ from H2 Dosed W

ot 60degC

-0

-Q)

~l ~ + I O~~~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~ o 2 4 6

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1202

Figure 310 Energy distribution obtained from a flashed but undo sed tungsten (100) surface which has been cooled to -150oC For comparison the energy distribution of a+ ions from the tungsten (100) surface after dosing with hydrogen is shown by the dashed line The two distributions are normalized at their maximum intensities The intensity of the ion signal from the undosed surface changes as a function of sample history as discussed in the text This is indicated by the arrow

I

91

primary energy was 400 eVe A relatively low incident electron current

of lxlO-7 A was used so that the coverage in the surface state being probed

would not be strongly depleted during the measurement This state has a high

desorption cross section as calculated in Chapter 4 and hence depletion is

a possibility It should be noted that the same energy distribution is obshy

tained from the low temperature state using a beam current of 2xlO-6 A The

latter high current measurement reflects the distribution in energy of H+ ions

desorbed from the fast state when its coverage is in equilibriumll as disshy

cussed in Section 352

The intensity of the ion signal desorbed from the surface at both

60 0 C and -1500 C is strongly coverage dependent In Figure 311 is plotted the

intensity of the 3 eV H+ ion signal as a function of work function change upon

adsorption of hydrogen The signals from the 60 0 C and -lSOoC surfaces have

maximum intensities at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV respecshy

tively This difference indicates that adsorption at the low temperature

differs somewhat from that at 600C At higher hydrogen coverages theion

signals decrease to less than 15 of their peak intensities indicating that

the cross section for ion desorption decreases as the ll state fills The

41 reason for this decrease is not well understood although Madey has sug~_

gested that it results from a coverage dependent rate of reneutralization of

the ions produced by the incident beam At near monolayer coverages the 3 eV

ion signal increased somewhat

The data in Figur~ 311 are normalized at the peak intensity The

absolute maximum yields at the two temperatures are the same within 25

Also shown normalized at the peak intensity are Madeys intensity versus

41 coverage data for hydrogen adsorbed on W(lOO) at room temperature The

--

en + ~ H from H2 W (100) J ~ ~ Withrow 60degC ~ 0 Withrow -150degC shye __ -- Madey 22degCA

c

C li)

gtshy 0

c N

o H + I o x ~

cf c

o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Il cp (eV)

Figure 311 Intensity of the 3 eV g+ ion signal from the tungsten (1ampH)-1195 surface as a function of the change in work function resulting from hydrogen adsorption Data for adsorption at 600 C and -l50oC are plotted For comparison the results obtained by Madey4 from a room temperature tungsten (100) surface are included

93

maximum in his ion signal occurs for the same coverage as the maximum in the

room temperature data taken here His results are more sharply peaked howshy

ever This difference may be due to the different conditions under which the

two sets of data were obtained Madeys results represent ions desorbed in a

narrow cone normal to the surface whereas the spectrometer used here collected

only those ions desorbed from the surface at 350 + 2 120 Madey also used a

lower primary energy

352 Desorption Curve Measurements

The H+ ion signal is observed to decrease with time if a primary

electron beam current of sufficient intensity per surface area is used A

theoretical description of this measurement referred to as a desorption

curve is given in Appendix C It can be shown that the expected ion signal

decreases to an equilibrium value The rate of decay of the desorption curve

and the equilibrium value are used to calculate parameters characteristic of

the adsorption state being probed

Figure 312 shows the decay of the 3 eV H+ ion signal from tungsten

(100) initially covered with hydrogen to a work function change of 010 eV

oThe temperature of the crystal for this measurement was 60 C An incident

-6 -3 2current of 5xlO A (a current density of 25xlO Aem) at a primary energy

of 400 eV was used The decrease in ion yield is seen to be quite slow The

equilibrium value shown in this figure iH+ was estimated from the equil

analysis of the data in Chapter 4

+As noted above H ions could be desorbed from a cold but undosed

tungsten (100) surface The desorption curve for this undosed state is shown

in Figure 313 For this data the crystal was flashed and allowed to cool

5 minutes to -150o

C Then the incident electron current was turned on (see

94

I I I t I I I I I H+ from H2 W(l00) Epri =400 eV-(f) Ipri =5 X 10-6 A

a ~rp =010 eV82000r- shy

-(f)

c (l) I- shy iHquil-c

-~1000 shyo

H + I

t I I I I I o 100 200 300 400

Time (sec) SP-1203

Figure 312 Change in the a+ ion current during electron obombardment of a 60 C tungampten (100) surface

Hydrogen was initially adsorbed to a coverage of 010 monolayer

95

200 -()

a ~160 gt

if) -c ~120 c

H c ~ 80

+r 40

H+ Ions fromW(lOO) Epri=400eV

Ipri=lA

Temp =- 1500 C

IH~qUil ------------shy

Figure 313 Change in the a+ ion current during electron bombardment of a flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface cooled to -150oC

140

96

Section 354 for a discussion of how the current was controlled) and the

ion signal decay monitored The signal is seen to undergo a rapid decay It

reaches its equilibrium value in several minutes in sharp contrast with the

desorption curve obtained after hydrogen dosing at room temperature An inshy

-6 -4 2cident current of lxlO A (a current density of 5lxlO Alcm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV was used to take the desorption curve from the undosed cold

surface This current density is only 20 percent of the value used for the

room temperature data of Figure 312 It was found convenient to use this

smaller value since the decay of the ion signal was so rapid Additional

desorption measurements on this fast decaying or fast state are given in

the following two sections

A desorption curve obtained after dosing the cold tungsten (100)

surface with hydrogen is shown in Figure 314 The data were taken using a

-6 -3 2primary current of 3xlO A (a current density of 15xlO Acm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV The surface was dosed to a work function change of 007 eV

Initially there is a rapid decay of the ion signal which is similar to the

desorption curve obtained from the fast state Following this initial decaYt

the signal continues to fall for a time but at a much slower rate of decay

This desorption pattern different than either of the desorption curves given

in Figures 312 or 313 can be described in ter~ of simultaneous desorption

from two adsorption states This is discussed further in Chapter 4

+353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State H Ion Signal

The ion yield from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface

has been studied as a function of temperature These data were obtained by

continuously monitoring both the tungsten temperature and the 3 eV H+ ion

97

-() a u

t gt

800()

c (J) +shy

~600 c o

+ H

400 r

200

o

Figure 314

r-

i-

r-shy

I I I I I I I I I

H+ from H2 W(lOO Epri =400eV

I I I

o 100

Iprl =3xlO-6 A

ilq= O07eV T=-150degC

I 1 I I

T

I

-

-

-

200 300 400 Time (sec)

Change in the H+ ion current during electron bombardment oof a -150 C tungsten (100) surface Hydrogen was

initially adsorbed to a coverage of 007 monolayer

98

signal following a crystal flash The current for this measurement was

-6 -4 2IxlO A (a current density of 5lx10 Aem) The primary energy was 400

eV As can be determined from the previous section this current density was

such that the electron beam caused Significant perturbations on the hydrogen

state during the measurement None the less several conclusions can be inshy

ferred from the intensity versus temperature data presented in Figure 315

The ion signal from the fast hydrogen state is strongly temperature dependent

+ 0The H intensity is seen to increase sharply below approximately -50 C The

results are reversible with temperature the ion signal decreases if the crysshy

tal is heated and the signal returns to its original intensity when the crysshy

tal cools back down

Several mechanisms could be responsible for the appearance of a

H+ ion signal below room temperature For example a temperature dependent

bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen could produce a desorbable hydrogen

state Likewise adsorption from the background rtight pro(luce desorbable H+

only below room temperature In order to better understand the fast state

some additional measurements were made as described in the following section

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State

Additional experiments were performed to further elucidate the nature

of the low temperature fast state Experiments were made to determine the

source of hydrogen which populates this state The effect of co-adsorption

of hydrogen from the jet with this state was probed In addition the possishy

bility that the appearance of the state was related to surface contamination

was investigated Possible correlations between the fast state hydrogen and

the low temperature LEED phenomena described in Section 123 were probed

99

50----~----~----r---_~--_r----_--_

20

-(J)-c

gt l shye ~10 c l shye gt

00 -c Q)-~ 5 c o

H

+ I

2

-150 -100 -50 0 100 150 Temperature (OC)

Figure 315 Intensity of the 3 eV a+ ion signal from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface as a function of tungsten temperature

-200

100

In these measurements it was desired to study the appearance of

+the fast state H ion signal without the complicating effects of simultaneous

significant depletion of this hydrogen state with the primary electron beam

This possibility exists since the cross section for electron sesorption of

the fast state is high as shown in Chapter 4 It was found that a measure

of the change of coverage in the fast state could be obtained in experiments

in which the electron beam was turned off for short times During the time

the gun was off referred to as adsorption times the fast state populated

The increase in the coverage in this state during the adsorption time could be

monitored by taking a desorption curve right after the adsorption time The

change in coverage is assumed proportional to the difference iH+ - iH+ initial equi1

where iH+ is the ion intensity immediately after turning the gun back on initial

and ~+ has been discussed above The difference iH+ - iH+ will equil initial equi1

be referred to as ~iH+(adsorption time) The rate of increase in coverage of

the fast state is assumed proportional to ~~+(adsorption time)adsorption

time

To turn the gun off the control grid was biased 6 volts negative

with respect to the cathode This method of controlling the gun current

kept the cathode temperature constant during the adsorption time while at

the same time no current could reach the crystal The primary beam could be

turned off (or subsequently back on) in fractions of a second No effects on

the observed measurements could be attributed to this biasing procedure

The change in the population of the fast state has been monitored as

a function of the tungsten crystal temperature Figure 316 shows the results

of a series of measurements each done at a different crystal temperature in

101

() --c s gtshy

0 -0

0 100-~ 0shy+Q)

J 50

0 shy

+S a J

-150 -100 -50 a 50 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1215

Figure 316 The quantity igt - i~ measured initial eqpil

from desorption curves from Ehe fast state as a function of crystal temperature

102

which the above procedure has been used with adsorption times of 150 seconds

From the desorption curves taken following the adsorption times the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) has been calculated This quantity is plotted versusH

the crystal temperature in Figure 316 The quantity 6iH+(adsorption time)

ie the fast state signal is small and less than 5 of the maximum signal

owhen the temperature of the tungsten crystal is higher than OOC Below 0 C

the change in population in the fast state during the adsorption time inshy

creases as the temperature decreases This temperature dependence is in

agreement with the the results of Figure 315 which was taken continuously

with a high primary current as the crystal was cooled after a flash Thus the

procedure used to obtain Figure 316 appears reasonable

The rate of population of the fast state can be an indication of the

source of hydrogen as discussed in Chapter 4 The rate of population of this

state has been investigated as a function of adsorption time using the proceshy

dure given above Figure 317 shows a plot of the quantity 6i +(adsorptionH

time) versus adsorption time From the figure it is concluded that the rate

of popUlation is constant in time at least for coverages of the fast state

obtained in 26 minutes

The effect of co-adsorption of hydrogen from the jet on the fast

state has been probed The purpose of these measurements has been to detershy

mine if hydrogen (H2) from the gas dosing system is the source of the fast

state In a series of measurements the cold crystal surface was dosed with

hydrogen and then an ESD ion signal monitored until it reached equilibrium

Following this the fast state was allowed to populate during an adsorption

time of 150 seconds Finally a desorption curve from the co-adsorbed fast

lO3

Growth of H+ Ion Yield with Electron Gun Off T=-150degC--(f) c

s gt 0-0 0-

J 0shy

+0gt r

0 +shy

+pound r

200

100

SP-122J

Figure 317 The quantity igt bull i~ff measured from initial flequil

desorption curves from the fast state as a function of adsorption time Adsorption time is defined in the text

104

state and dosed hydrogen states was taken In Figure 318 the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) calculated from these desorption curves is plotted versusH

work function change due to adsorption from the jet For low doaes of hydroshy

gen (6cplt 010 eV) there is almost no change in the quantity t~+(adsorption

time) ie the rapid decay of the ion signal characteristic of the fast

state is observed However preadsorption of hydrogen from the jet clearly

affects the ion signal from the fast state for 6cplt010 eV The signal is

decreased forhy5irogen coverages in the 13 state in qualitative agreement1

with the data presented in Figure 311

For ~lt 010 eV the change in coverage in the fast state during

adsorption times of 150 seconds is seen to be independent of the amount of

hydrogen in the dosed or 13 2 state This result was used in a series of

experiments in which the rate of population of the fast state was measured

2at different hydrogen background pressures The flux (molecules per cm per

second) of H2 onto the surface from the background is directly proportional

to the partial pressure of hydrogen If H2 is the source of the fast state

changing the background pressure would be expected to have an effect on the

measured change in coverage in the fast state as long as the total adsorption

is lower than about 010 monolayer (which corresponds to a work function

change of 010 eV) For the data in Figure 318 the background pressure of

-11hydrogen was less than 7xlO Torr (the Bayard-Alpert gauge pressure) In

a series of experiments this hydrogen pressure was raised by letting gas in

from the the gas handling system for times ranging from one to two minutes

While the pressure was raised the electron gun was turned off so that simulshy

taneous adsorption into the fast state and the 13 2 state could take place The

105

() --C J

gt 10shy

0 10shy-0 10shy

S

0shy

+lt11 c

2-+~ c

200

100

0

8

DCP(eV) SP-1222

Figure 318 The quantity iHt 1nitial

desorption curves from

- iHplusmn measured from equil

the low temperature hydrogen dosed surface as a function of work function change ~~ ~~ results from hydrogen coverage

o 1 2 3 4 5 6

106

total hydrogen coverage in the Sz state was kept below 10 percent of a monoshy

layer Desorption curves were then taken and the quantity 8iH+(adsorption

time) calculated An interesting result was obtained It was found that the

coverage in the fast state was unrelated to the background pressure of HZ and

hence unrelated to the total impingement of HZ Even though experiments were

made in which the background pressure was varied over two orders of magnitude

the change in coverage in the fast state during equal adsorption times was

always the same Hence it is concluded that the fast state is not populated

by hydrogen added to the background from the gas handling system

It was found however that the fast state signal intensity could be

correlated to a pressure reading under certain experimental conditions

Normally during flashing the crystal manipulator was rotated so that the

tungsten crystal faced away from the entrance to the spectrometer (a rotation

oof 180 from the crystal position shown in Figure Z14) This normal flashing

posi tion is referred to as the down position The crystal could also be

flashed while it was in the IIUp position or facing the s~ectrometer It was

observed that when the crystal was flashed in the up position an increase in

the ion signal from the fast state could be obtained over that measured when

the crystal was flashed in the down position This unexpected result sugshy

gested that the fast state might be correlated to a thermal instrumental

effect Radiation heating from the crystal raised the temperature of the

surrounding experimental chamber surfaces If the crystal is close to the

surfaces during a flash as for example when flashed in the up position the

heating is greater One consequence of greater heating would be an enhanced

thermal desorption from the surfaces and a higher pressure in the experimental

107

chamber Hence the incident flux of gas thermally desorbed from the chamber

surfaces would be increased Unfortunately the best test of this hypothesis

a measurement of the temperature of the surfaces in the experimental chamber

could not be made However an interesting pressure related result could be

obtained when the x-ray current in the Bayard-Alpert gauge (which is equivalent

to approximately 7xlO-11 Torr pressure) was nulled out so that ambient pressure

-12increases at the gauge of as little as 05xlO Torr could be easily detected

It was observed that during a crystal flash when the crystal was in the up

position the gauge pressure showed a maximum pressure burst of approximately

3x10-l0 Torr This was higher than the pressure burst when the crystal was

flashed in the down position a strong indication that some surfaces in the

experimental chamber became hotter during an up flash When the crystal was

flashed in the down position the pressure fell quickly after the flash was

terminated to the nulled or equilibrium level However after a flash in the

up position the pressure fell to a quasi-equilibrium level which was higher

-12than the true equilibrium pressure by as much as 2xlO Torr The quasi-

equilibrium pressure was dependent on the number of prev~ous flashes in the

up position and on how long after flashing the pressure was read Once the

crystal had been flashed in the up position the pressure remained elevated

for several hours slowly decreasing to the equilibrium level It should be

noted that these pressure increases are read outside the experimental chamber

The actual pressure increase in the experimental chamber and hence the inshy

creased gas flux at the crystal surface can only be estimated to be proshy

portional to the gauge pressure

The magnitude of the pressure increases following a flash in the

108

up position was linearly related to both the change in coverage of the fast

state during the adsorption time and to the desorption curve equilibrium level

This can be seen from the data presented in Figure 319 The lower panel shows

the results of a series of measurements in which desorption curves were taken

after letting the fast state populate for adsorption times of 150 seconds

The ordinate in the lower panel is 6ia+ (adsorption1 time) The abscissa in the

figure is the increase in pressure over the equilibrium pressure as a result of

flashes in the up position The change in ion yield is seen to be directly

proportional to the observed pressure increase The top panel shows the equishy

librium ion signal observed for the desorption curves plotted versus the same

pressure increase as the lower panel A direct proportionality between the

equilibrium ion signal and the pressure increase is seen These two linear

results would be expected if the fast state populated as a result of adsorption

from the background This is discussed further in Chapter 4 On the other

hand no dependence of the fast state ion signal on background pressure would

be expected if the source of the hydrogen were bulk to surface diffusion Thus

while there may be hydrogen on the surface which is not desorbed by incident

electrons it can be concluded from this measurement that the fast state is

populated by adsorption from the ambient

A possible explanation for the fast state is suggested by the work

51of Jelend and Menzel They found that co-adsorption of oxygen or CO with

hydrogen leads to the ~ hydrogen state which has similar characteristics as

the fast state observed here The possibility that impurities are on the surshy

face in the temperature range in which the fast state is observed has been inshy

vestigated using Auger electron spectroscopy andel~tTon stimulated desorption in

lO9

Figure 319 Lower panel - The quantity iH+ - ig+ measured from initial eaui1

desorption curves from the fast state as S tunction of gauge pressure change The fast state populated during adsorption times of 150 seconds The pressure change results from flashing the tungsten crystal while it is in the up position Upper panel - Equilibrium ion current iH+ measured from the

-equildesorpt~on curves taken for the data in the lower panel

110

-(J)-C J gt 0 -0 0

100-s

+1)cr

J

C-+ J

0

--(J)

c J 200 gt 0 -0 0-

s +1)

cr J

- 100 I 2

012

Gauge Pressure Change (X10-12 Torr)

111

the time of flight mode In order to test for these elements the flashed

tungsten surface was cooled with the gun turned off allowing the fast state

to populate Total adsorption times of up to 15 minutes were used times in

which a strong fast state signal could be obtained However no carbon or

oxygen Auger peaks were observed and no desorbed oxygen or carbon ions that

could be attributed to the fast state were monitored with ESD Hence any

oxygen or CO present on the surface would have had a coverage below the deshy

tection sensitivity of the techniques used or less than approximately 1 pershy

cent of a monolayer It can be noted here that coverage calculations given in

Chapter 4 indicate the fast state hydrogen coverage is well below 1

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data

The low energy electron diffraction (LEE D) system used here has

been described previously in Section 26 LEED data has been optained using

hydrogen coverage crystal temperature and primary electron energy as

variable parameters as described below

The symmetry of the LEED spot pattern has been noted as a function

of hydrogen coverage at room temperature Results from these observations are

in good agreement with previously reported research (see Section 123) Half

order diffraction spots become visible with initial hydrogen coverage The

intensity of the half order spots maximize at a coverage corresponding to

~~ = 015 eV at a primary energy of 115 eVe Additional adsorption causes

the half order spots to split into four poorly defined spots This pattern

upon further adsorption becomes blurred At full coverage a (lxl) pattern

is observed Figure 320 shows a photograph of the LEED pattern observed

from a clean room temperature tungsten surface and also the c(2x2) LEED patshy

112

W(100)

Clean

T=60degC Epri = 1387eV

(1 xl) Clean (100) Surface

W (100)

Do 4gt =015eV

T =-150degC

Epri =115eV

C (2x2) Hydrogen Overoyer

SP-1200

Figure 320 Photo~raDh of LEED screen showing a clean (lxl) pattern and a c(2x2) pattern Models of possible surface atom configurations for the LEED patterns are also shown

113

tern that occurs with a hydrogen over1ayer in the ~2 state

When the crystal is cooled to below room temperatures half order

spots are visible without any dosing of the crystal from the gas system

Graphs of LEED spot intensity versus primary electron energy called

elastic intensity profiles are shown in Figures 321 322 and 323 for the

(10) (11) and (1212) diffraction beams A normally incident primary

electron beam was used in these measurements Data were taken at two tempera-

o 0tures 60 C and -150 C for both the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorbed on

the surface to a coverage corresponding to a ~~ of 015 eV This coverage corshy

responds to the maximum in intensity for the 115 eV half order beams All obshy

servable equivalent beams show the same line shape and peak positions There

are some intensity differences between equivalent beams probably due to an

uneven phosphor coating of the LEED screen particularly near its edge bull

Small misalignments might also affect the intensities The effect of hydrogen

adsorption on the intensity profiles is seen to be small except above 100 eV

in the (11) beam profile and below 50 eV in the (1212) beam profile Some

small shifts (~ 2 eV) in the energy positions of the peaks are observed as a

function of coverage but not as a function of temperature

The intensities of the (1212) (10) and (11) spots have been

measured as a function of crystal temperature for the clean (flashed) surface

These results are presented in Figures 324 and 325 using a semilogarithmic

scale The data were obtained by continuously monitoring both the tungsten

temperature and the intensity of the beams following a crystal flash Primary

energies of 115 eV for the (1212) beam 1105 eV and 67 eV for the (10)

beam and 113 eV for the (11) beam and currents of 10xlO-6 A were used The

114

- (j) +shyC l

gt 1loshy0 0 loshy+shy0

loshy0

- 0gt

+shy(j)

c Q) +shyC

H

o

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j = 0deg g=(10)

T =60degC Clean

T =-150degC fjcent = 015 eV

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l109

Figure 321 Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degc and -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsoroed in the S2 state

llS

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

U)-C J

1

-~ l0shy

a loshy

0 0l0shya-~-U) 0c OJ

C -H

o

o

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-lloa

8i =0deg g = (1 1)

T = 60degC Clean

T =60degC IJcp = 015 eV

T = -150degC IJcp = 015 eV

Figure 322 Elastic intensity profiles for the (11) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsorbed in the 62 state

116

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j =00

g = (12 12 )

o 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l107

Figure 323 Elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A vJork function change Acp of 015 eV corresponds to hydrocn adsorbed in the 13

2 state

117

100~--~--~----~--~-------~--------

--VI

c s gtshyt shyc -t shycl

010 -

gtshy-VI c Q)

c -I-f

tr c Q)

a

WOOO) 81 =0deg

9 = (ItO) 0-

-0- Epri = 1105 eV --0-- -0shy -0

9 = (ItI)

0 Epri= 113 eV =0shy o 0 0

9 = (ItO) Epri= 67 eV

0

Figure 324 Temperature dependence of (10) and (11) LEED beams from a flashed tungsten (100) surface Primary energies used are indicated on the graph

118

W (100) 9 =(12 t 12)

8j=0deg50

CJ)-

~ 5 o Q)

Q

2

-100 o 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1l55 Figure 325 Temperature dependence of the (1212) LEED

beam from flashed tungsten (100) surface A primary electron energy of 115 eV was used

200

119

intensities of the (10) and (11) beams are seen to increase exponentially

(linearly on the semilogarithmic scale) as the temperature is lowered The

intensity of the (1212) order beam also increases as the temperature is

lowered Down to approximately -750 C the rate of increase with temperature is

ogreater than that for the integral order beams Below -75 C the intensity

changes at about the same rate as the integral order beams The results are

reversible with temperature

In Sections 353 and 354 a hydrogen ion signal has been reported

from the flashed surface LEED measurements have been made to ascertain if

this ion yield from the fast state could be correlated to the intensity of the

LEED spots After flashing the crystal the photometer signal from the

(1212) beam was measured as the crystal cooled to -lS0 0 C Then the incishy

dent electron current was turned off for 300 seconds in order to allow the

fast state to populate When the electron current was turned back on the

photometer signal immediately returned to the same intensity as obtained prior

to turning off the incident current There was no decay in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the desorption curve phenomena seen with

the ion signal The intensity of the photometer signal from the (10) and

(11) beams as well as from the background was monitored ilsing this same

procedure In no case was there any structure observed in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the rapid decay in the fast state ion

yield

37 Electron Scattering Data

The electron signal backscattered from the crystal has been observed

as a function of hydrogen coverage and crystal temperature using synchronous

120

detection of the second harmonic of the energy distribution N(E) as disshy

cussed in Appendix B and in Section 324

Figure 326 shows the characteristic loss structure for electrons

scattered from a clean room temperature tungsten (100) surface and also from

this surface after dosing with hydrogen The abscissa in this figure represhy

sents electron loss energy w where 0 eV s w s 40 eV A primary~nergy of

-6110 eV and a primary current of lxlO A were used to take these data Since

25for tungsten true secondary structure extends out to 60 eV there is no

overlap of secondary and characteristic loss structure down to losses of 50

eV when operating at 110 eV primary energy The data of Figure 326 were taken

in the second derivative mode in order to suppress the background The data

were taken at a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV with a 1 volt peak to peak

oscillation on the retarding potential

Coverage dependent changes in the spectra are seen The peak at

w = 25 eV in the clean spectrum decays as the hydrogen coverage in increased

At the same time the narrow peak at 4 eV becomes broader and a peak grows at

a loss energy of 75 eV The structure at 210 eV in the clean spectrum moves

down in loss energy as hydrogen adsorbs Below w ~ 30 eV very little change

in the spectra as a function of hydrogen coverage is observed

Figure 327 shows characteristic loss structure for electrons

oscattered from a tungsten surface cooled to -150 C The data were taken using

the same electron gun and spectrometer operating conditions as used for the

data of Figure 326 The low temperature clean spectrum is nearly identical

to that obtained at the higher temperature The only change is a slight enshy

hancement of the shoulder at about 45 eV Changes in the clean spectrum with

121

Figure 326 oCharacteristic electron energy loss spectra from a 60 C

tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverages A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modulation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

---

N w -0 shyw-Z

N -0

I

122

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl=110 eV Iprl c5xlO-6 A

T= 60degC Modulation =1 V Peak to Peak

6ltl 080eV

060eV

O 35eV

023eV

014eV

003eV

Clean

o

SP-1219

123

Figure 327 Characteristic electron energy loss spectra from a -lSOoC tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverage A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modushylation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

124

N lJJ 0

~ lJJ Z N 0 I

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl =110 eV Iprl =5x10-6 A T=-150degC Modulation 1 V Peak to Peak

bcent OS6eV

O5geV

O35eV

O25eV

O16eV

O05eV

Cleon

SP-1220

-~--------~- -- -----------

125

hydrogen adsorption are identical to those seen for adsorption at the higher

temperature

Loss spectra were also taken for 0 eV ~ w ~ 10 eV from the flashed

but undosed cold surface after turning off the electron gun for 10 minutes

These measurements were made to see if the fast state hydrogen would affect

the loss measurements No changes in the electron loss spectrum from those

taken immediately after cooling the flashed crystal were found

A discussion of the data presented in this chapter follows in

Chapter 4

126

CHAPTER 4

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

Hydrogen chemisorption on single crystal tungsten (100) has been

probed in this research using complementary surface sensitive techniques

Auger measurements have been given in Section 28 Work function ESD LEED

and electron scattering results have been given in Chapter 3 A discussion

of this data is presented here

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental condition using Auger electron spectroscopy The procedures

used have been previously described with the spectrometer electronics Section

25 The Auger data have been given and discussed in Section 28 A brief

summary of these results follows

Tungsten carbon and oxygen Auger transitions have been observed

using this technique It can be seen from Figure 216 that after flashing the

cryLl to 2200oK no structures attributable to carbon or oxygen Auger elecshy

trons remain in the Auger spectrum The Auger measurement is estimated to

be sensitive to approximately 1 percent coverage Operation of the electron

gun in the high current high voltage Auger mode results in a slow deposition

of carbon from the background Since the Auger mode is used to chemically

characterize the surface the net effect of this beam related contamination

is an overestimation of the carbon impurity concentration at the surface

Some weak structure in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface

occurs between 475 eV and 525 eV No definite conclusions regarding the

127

origin of these peaks can be made The possibility that the structure results

from transitions in tungsten andor other elements is discussed in Chapter 2

83It is worth noting that Watts Jones and Hopkins recently published an

Auger spectrum from a flashed W(lOO) surface in which weak structure can be

seen at approximately the same energies as the unidentified structure observed

here This similarity lends support to the hypothesis that the peaks are

tungsten Auger transitions However it does not rule out other possibilities

The similarity of the data indicates at least that if the structure in

question results from some contaminate the problem is not unique to the

apparatus here It should be emphasized that work function ESD and LEED

data taken here are in good agreement with the literature any possible

contamination has not had a noticeable effect on the measurements

42 Work Function Results

Retarding potential work function measurements have been taken as

a measure of hydrogen coverage Plots of work function changes versus

exposure to hydrogen are presented in Figures 34 and 35 Adsorption of

hydrogen at 600 C yields a maximum work function change of 098 plusmn 004 eV

This is within 10 percent of 090 eV the most consistent monolayer coverage

work function chan~e reported in the literature for the H2 on W(lOO)

8 18 46 47 84system As argued by Armstrong agreement with the values from

the literature is an indication of good (100) orientation This is because

the work function of a faceted surface is a weighted average over the work

44functions of the facets Since hydrogen adsorption increases the work

function of the (100) face far more than the expected facet orientations a

128

faceted (100) surface would have a lower full coverage work function change

than a true (100) surface

Hydrogen adsorption onto W(lOO) at low temperatures increases the

work function by 092 plusmn 004 eV at full coverage This is slightly lower

than the room temperature maximum increase although within experimental

error the two measurements are the same

The increase in work function with hydrogen coverage can be intershy

preted using a simple model in which each adsorbed hydrogen atom acts as a

negative dipole at the surface The work function change on adsorption

43 6~ can be shown to equal the total added dipole moment at the surface

divided by the permittivity Using this and assuming a hydrogen coverage of

15 22xlO atomsem for a 6~ of 098 eV the average dipole moment permax

adsorbed hydrogen atom is calculated to be -013 Debye This result can be

compared to a theoretical account of the dipole moment of a hydrogen ion

63adsorbed onto metal surfaces given by Smith Ying and Kohn Their

calculation indicates that in order to observe a negative dipole moment the

hydrogen ion must be closer than 061 Kto the top plane of substrate ion

cores This would be an upper estimate of the proximity of the hydrogen atoms

to the tungsten substrate The minimum theoretical dipole moment per

63 -2 adsorbed hydrogen ion obtained by Smith et al is -lxlO au (1 au

equals 24 Debye) This value is lower than the observed value of -013

Debye by a factor of 5

o 0Cooling a clean tungsten (100) crystal from 200 C to -150 C

results in a work function increase of approximately 005 eV as shown in

Figure 36 This is an average change with temperature d~dT of 14xlO -4

129

oeV K The temperature dependence of work function for tungsten in this

temperature range has not previously been reported However temperature

dependent changes in work function of this magnitude have been reported for

85 86 85 86Cu Ag Na and K and have been described theoret~ca11y in terms of

both a thermal expansion of the crystal lattice and a temperature dependence

of the crystal electronic structure The work function change observed

here is quantitatively in agreement with experimental data for other elements

and with a theoretical model that describes the temperature dependence solely

in terms of intrinsic properties of a clean metal surface While perturbashy

tions on the crystal surface such as gas adsorption from the background or

bulk to surface diffusion can reasonably be expected to affect the work

function it is not necessary to invoke these causes to explain the changes

seen on cooling the crystal

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results

Under electron bombardment H+ ions can be desorbed from the

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface and from the low temperature undosed

surface The theory that describes this ESD process was first proposed by

37 38Redhead and by Menzel and Gomer A discussion of their model including a

derivation of the energy distribution of ions from the surface is given in

Appendix C In addition a discussion of the ESD phenomena in terms of

surface kinetics is also given in this appendix

ESD has been used to study the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system at

ocrystal temperatures from slightly above room temperature to -150 C Energy

distributions of It ions desorption curves and ion yield versus temperaturemiddot

and coverage data have been obtained

130

431 Room Temperature Results

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from room temperature

W(lOO) is given by the solid curve in Figure 37 The distribution has a

Gaussian line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 plusmn 05 eV

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV The line shape of the energy

distribution remains virtually unchanged as a function of hydrogen coverage

at least to near saturation coverage as shown by the curves in Figure 38

Near full coverage the distribution appears to broaden somewhat This latter

change requires further study which has not been done here

From Equation Cl of Appendix C the energy distribution of the

desorbed ions is given by the expression

(41)

where x is the coordinate normal to the surface Ions that start at x X ]

desorb with energy V N is the surface density of hydrogen atoms adsorbed in

the ground state ~ is the cross section for electron induced excitation ex

of hydrogen from the ground state to the ionic state I~G(xi)12 is the

probability density of hydrogen at Xi P(x ) is the probability that an ioni

starts from the position x and escapes from the surface as an ion and J

dV(X)dxlxi is the slope of the ion-metal interaction evaluated at Xi The

line shape of the energy distribution depends on the metal-neutral intershy

action VG(x) via ~G and depends on the ion-metal interaction V(x) via P(x)

and the slope dV(x)dx

--------------------------~-~~----------------

131

One manifestation of multistate adsorption in which VG(x) and V(x)

are dependent on the binding state is a change in the experimentally

observed energy distribution Multistate adsorption has been observed with

ESD for some systems for example as a function of oxygen coverage on

W(lOO)25 A similar result might be expected for hydrogen adsorption on

W(lOO) since two states ~l and ~2 are seen in thermal desorption spectra

However from the ion energy distribution line shapes for hydrogen on W(lOO)

no evidence of multistate adsorption as a function of coverage is seen The

line shapes of the energy distribution curves are the same at hydrogen

coverages corresponding to both thermal desorption states Hence coverage

dependent interactions which have been proposed to account for the thermal

desorption results and other phenomena reported for this system are not

observed using this technique

Another conclusion to be drawn from the energy distributions is

that the ions originate at an energy position which remains constant with

respect to the Fermi level of the tungsten independent of hydrogen coverage

A shift of nearly a volt in the work function is observed as hydrogen

adsorbs However the ion energy distribution which would be sensitive to

changes of this magnitude if it shifted with the work function remains

fixed in energy

The decay of the room temperature 3 eV a+ ion yield is shown in

Figure 312 A theoretical account of the desorption curve measurement has

been given in Appendix C From that discussion it is seen that a semi logshy

arithmic plot of i ~ - i ~ versus time yields a straight line The totalH Hequil desorption cross section of the adsorption state being probed can be

132

1determined from the slope of the straight line - T where T is given by

T e = (42)

je is the current density used to obtain the desorption curve and e is the

unit of electric charg~

The discussion of the desorption process leading to Equation 42

is based on the assumptions that the total desorption cross section and the

hydrogen sticking probability are independent of hydrogen coverage N The

validity of these assumptions for the hydrogen on tungsten (100) systems

should be examined An indication that the ionic cross section is indepenshy

dent of N for low coverages can be gotten from data presented in Figure 311

The H+ ion yield versus work function change is nearly linear for A~ lt 01 eV

8If coverage is linearly related to work function change as shown by Madey

then the ion yield is directly proportional to N in this low coverage region

A direct proportionality between ion yield and coverage satisfies

Equation C5 only if the ionic desorption cross section Qtis not a

function of coverage In a series of experiments it has been observed that

the equilibrium ion yield which is proportional to the ratio Q+Qt as

given by Equation C8 is independent of N for low coverages Since Q+ and

an expression proportional to Q+Qt are both independent of N it is assumed

tthat Q is a180 independent of N

The dependence of the sticking probability on coverage has been

reported in the literature for the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system Tamm and

87Schmidt found s(N) to be independent of N for coverages of less than 15

133

41 percent Madey found s(N) to be proportional to (l-NN ) Hence the

max

assumption that the sticking probability is independent of N appears valid

to within ~ 10 percent for low coverages For coverages less than 10 the

analysis in Appendix C of the desorption curve measurements can be applied to

the data

A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ for the desorption curve ~quil

shown in Figure 312 is given in Figure 41 The equilibrium level has been

chosen approximately 5 lower than the ion intensity obtained after monishy

toring the decay curve 30 minutes (the final recorded data) since it appeared

from the data the signal was still slowly decreasing In addition with

this correction the data give a better fit to the predicted straight line

t -20 2From the slope of the line -lIT and Equation 41 a Q (400 eV) of 5xlO cm

is calculated Without making the 5 correction in iH+ the best visual equil

straight line fit to the data gives a Qt(400 eV) approximately three times

larger Because the initial hydrogen coverage for this data was 010 monoshy

layerp this cross section represents the total desorption cross section

from the ~2 hydrogen adsorption state ie represents ~ (400 eV) For 2

coverages corresponding to the ~l state the assumptions leading up to

tEquation 42 are not valid and no attempt has been made to calculate 93 bull t 1

The value obtained for 93 (400 eV) is somewhat larger than the cross section 2

38results reported by Menzel and Gomer for hydrogen desorption from a field

emitter tip and is a factor of 10 lower than reported by Jelend and

Menzel10 for desorption from a tungsten ribbon The latter researchers

corrected for readsorption effects which would partly explain their higher

value The value of ~2(400 eV) found here is over three orders of

134

500----~----~--~------------~----

400

- 300 ()

a 0- CT Q)

+ I I 200

+ I

100~__~_____~____~____~__~____~__~ o 200 400 600 800 1000

Time (sec)

SP-1198

Figure 41 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iHt asequil

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 312

----------- -------shy

51

135

magnitude smaller than the total cross section found by Jelend and Menzel

for hydrogen coadsorption with either carbon monoxide or oxygen This is a

verification that these contaminants are not present to any great extent

432 Low Temperature Fast State Results

oIf the tungsten crystal was flashed to 2200 K and subsequently

allowed to cool below room temperature H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface The state from which this hydrogen is desorbed has been labeled

the fast state Experiments have been made to characterize the energetics

and kinetics of this undosed state and also to address the important question

of the origin of the hydrogen which is desorbed These data are discussed

below

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from the fast state

shown in Figure 310 is considerably broader than the distribution obtained

after room temperature hydrogen dosing into the ~ states The peak intensity

is somewhat lower in energy 05 eV than the peak obtained from the ~

states The distribution has a tail extending up several electron volts on

the high energy side It should be noted that the same energy distribution

line shape could be obtained from the state at any position on its desorpshy

tion curve that is the broad distribution is not an anomalous result

reflecting a depletion of the hydrogen fast state during the measurement

A low primary current of lxlO- 7 A was used to take the distribution in

Figure 310 so that electron desorption effects were minimal From a

comparison of energy distributions as given in Figure 310 it is possible

to conclude that the fast state is a separate state from the ~ states

136

This conclusion is supported by cross section calculations below

The intensity of the ion yield from the fast state is temperature

dependent As shown in Figures 315 and 316 the ion yield increases as

the temperature is lowered This phenomena is reversible Using the

assumption that the ion yield is proportional to coverage it is concluded

that the fast state coverage is a function of temperature

The desorption curve obtained from the undosed tungsten (100)

surface has been measured and is given in Figure 313 The decay time is

seen to be extremely rapid compared to the analogous measurement taken after

hydrogen dosing at room temperature A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ ~quil

measured from the data in Figure 313 is given in Figure 42 The total

tdesorption cross section for the fast state Qf(400 eV) calculated from the

slope of the straight line in Figure 42 is -17lxlO 2 cm This is nearly

three orders of magnitude higher than ~2(400 eV)

Since Q~(400 eV) is on the same order of magnitude as the cross

section obtained for hydrogen desorption from carbon monoxide or oxygen

51contaminated surfaces the possibility that the fast state results from

surface contamination has been examined No direct evidence was obtained to

support such a hypothesis No carbon or oxygen peaks were observed in Auger

electron spectra from the cold surface It is estimated that these spectra

were sensitive to 1 percent of a monolayer coverage No carbon or oxygen

ions that could be attributed to the fast state phenomena were observed in

time of flight measurements It might be noted that Jelend and Menzel

observed the high cross section state labeled ~ at room temperature after

simultaneously adsorbing hydrogen plus CO or oxygen Almost no fast state

137

100

-fJ)

Q U

50 J CT

+0gt I I

+ I

10~~~--~~~~~~--~~~--~~~~

o 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Time (sec)

sp- J~4l

Figure 42 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iH+ as equi1

a function of time The data are illeasured from the desorption curve given in Figure 313

138

o lOhydrogen was detected here above 0 c Jelend and Menzel did not observe

any H+ ion yield from a cleaned surface if cooled to _13 0 C Since the gt

signal is weak at that temperature it is possible their apparatus did not

detect it It is also possible that they did not populate their surface

with hydrogen by cooling In any case its not possible to make any

simple correlations between the fast state and the contamination related x

state However as discussed below the equivalence of the two states

cannot be ruled out

It is of interest to determine the origin of the hydrogen which

populates the fast state There are several possibilities This state

could populate as a result of adsorption from the background Alternatively

88 89 hydrogen since it is endothermically soluble in tungsten m~ght

diffuse from interstitial sites to surface sites as the temperature of the

crystal is lowered A discussion of these phenomena has been given in

19Appendix C The latter suggestion has been offered as a possible

explanation of the c(2x2) LEED pattern observed on cooling In addition a

combination of these two processes could be occurring

Experiments have been performed in which the coverage in the fast

state has been monitored as a function of both adsorption time and system

background pressure If the source is external the dependence of N on

adsorption time and ambient pressure can be determined by solving Equation

C4 For the case of no incident electron beam (je = 0) and if the sticking

probability is assumed constant with coverage (probably a good assumption

since the change in coverage due to adsorption from the background would be

extremely small at the experimental ambient pressures) then the change in

139

coverage in the fast state would be expected to be linearly related to the

time during which adsorption occurs ie linearly proportional to the

variable adsorption time Furthermore for a fixed adsorption time the

coverage would be expected to be linearly proportional to the partial pressure

of the populating species

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

40 pressure is considerably more invo1ved Several points can be made

however from the discussion in Appendix C The time dependence of N due

to diffusion could be similar to that expected from background adsorption

ie linear with adsorption time However background pressure doesnt

enter into the diffusion process If the fast state phenomena is only

diffusion related the coverage N would be expected to be independent of

background pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence

for adsorption from the background

The rate of populating the fast state has been measured by turning

off the electron gun for various time intervals (setting j = 0) referred to e

as adsorption times and observing the build up of the ion signal while the

gun is off The increase in the fast state is then assumed proportional to

the increase in the ion yield i ~ - i ~ when the electron gun is Hinitia1 Hequi1

turned back on The dependence of the population rate on adsorption time is

shown in Figure 317 N is found to be linearly related to adsorption time

As discussed above this time behavior can reasonably be expected to be

observed for either an external or an internal source

The rate of population of the fast state has also been observed as

140

a function of hydrogen pressure admitted to the background from the gas

handling system As discussed in Section 354 the rate of population did

not depend on the impingement rate from the hydrogen background Hence it

is concluded that hydrogen from the gas handling system does not populate

the fast state This does not rule out external adsorption however Other

sources of hydrogen in the ambient such as rrt H H2 in an excited state or

hydrogen from a simple compound such as H 0 could be the source2

Although the population of the fast state was not affected by the

background pressure of hydrogen (H ) from the gas handling system there is2

evidence that this state does result from adsorption from an external source

This conclusion is based on experiments in which the Bayard Alpert gauge

sensitivity was increased by nulling out the x-ray limiting current Changes

-12in the background pressure on the order of 2xlO Torr were observed experishy

mentally if the crystal was flashed while it was facing the spectrometer

One explanation of this observation is that a flash in the up position warms

experimental chamber surfaces most likely the grids and electron gun drift

tube The resulting pressure increase occurs because of an increased rate of

thermal desorption from these surfaces The linear dependence of the

equilibrium current i ~ with pressure change as found experimentallyHequil

and shown in the top panel of Figure 319 is expected if external adsorption

populates the fast state This can be seen from Equation C9 Likewise the

rate of change of coverage in the fast state is seen to be proportional to

the pressure change in the lower panel of Figure 319 This is also expected

for external adsorption If bulk to surface diffusion were the source of the

hydrogen no dependence on pressure would be expected Hence Figure 319

141

indicates that hydrogen becomes desorbable because of adsorption from the

background It is not possible to say what species is adsorbing

An interesting calculation that can be made from the current nulling

experiments is an estimate of the coverage in the adsorption state responsible

for the fast state hydrogen ions Since the relation

(43)

can be obtained easily from Equation C9 and since ~i + is on the same Hequil

order as iH+ the background partial pressure that populates the undosed equil

-12state is on the same order of magnitude as ~P or about lxlO Torr The

coverage N at equilibrium can now be obtained by setting Equation C4 equal

-12to O At a pressure of 10 Torr the impingement rate of hydrogen molecules

9 2 90 for example is 15xlO moleculescm -sec and the impingement rate of other

species would be of this same magnitude Assuming a sticking probability of

-17 21 a total desorption cross section of 10 cm as calculated and a current

-4 2density of 5lxlO Acm the surface coverage in the fast state would be

~ 10-11

atomscm2 or 10-4 monolayer This calculation depends on the

assumption that the pressure change at the crystal face in the experimental

chamber is the same as measured at the gauge Experiments performed in which

the crystal was rotated to the down position after flashing in the up position

indicated that the flux of the populating species at the surface was about

twice as great when the crystal faced the spectrometer than when it faced

down Since the pressure at the bottom of the experimental chamber should

142

be about the same as the gauge pressure the calculated coverage could be

low by 50 percent It should be noted however that this is still 50 times

too low to amount to 1 percent of a monolayer

From the above discussion it can be concluded that the fast

state is related to both the temperature of the crystal and to the

background pressure of some unidentified species It is not possible to

determine if this state is a separate state from the K hydrogen state

previously reported even though it appears under different circumstances

In fact since the coverage in the state is so low Auger spectroscopy

would not be sensitive to any contamination of this same magnitude The

possibility of undetected contamination accompanying the fast state cannot

be ruled out It is possible that the adsorbing species does not contain

hydrogen as such but rather is a species which promotes a small amount

of surface hydrogen (from the background or diffusion) to the fast state

It can also be concluded that since coverages less than 1 percent of a

monolayer would not be expected to strongly alter the LEED spot symmetry

the half order spots seen on cooling do not arise from the fast state

433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results

ESD measurements have been made on the low temperature tungsten

crystal after dosing with hydrogen from the jet Energy distributions at

different coverages of hydrogen are given in Figure 39 The distributions

143

are seen to have a peak at 3 ~ 05 eV in agreement with the peak positions

in the data obtained from the ~ states at 60oC However the energy distri shy

butions are somewhat broader than the higher temperature data The fast

state yields a broad energy distribution and it is possible that the results

of Figure 39 represent simultaneous desorption from both the fast state and

the ~ states This hypothesis can be tested by analyzing a desorption curve

from the low temperature dosed surface If two states with different cross

sections are being desorbed then a semilogarithmic plot of the desorption

curve should be the sum of two straight lines The quantity i ~ - i ~ H HSquil

measured from the data of Figure 315 is plotted in Figure 43 The curve

can be separated into two straight line segments from which total desorption

17 19 2 cross sections of 16xlO- cm2 and 12xlO- cm are calculated These

cross sections correspond within plusmn 60 percent to the calculated values of

t tQf(400 eV) and QS2(400 eV) Hence it is concluded that at low temperatures

the fast state and S-like states co-adsorb

It should be noted however that the interaction of hydrogen from

the jet with the tungsten surface at low temperatures is not exactly the

o same as at 60 C This can be seen from the plot of 3 eV ion yield versus

work function change given in Figure 311 At both 600 C and at -lSOoC the

results are qualitatively similar the ion yield increases steeply with

initial hydrogen adsorption reaches a maximum and then decreases to less

than lS percent of the maximum value with additional hydrogen adsorption

Hence it is assumed that a similar phenomena is occurring at both temperashy

tures However the work function change at maximum intensity for the low

temperature measurement was found to be repeatedly lower by 007 eV than the

144

SP-H24

Figure 43 Semilogarithmic plot of the quantity ia+ - ia+ as equ~l

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 314

145

peak ~ntens~ty for measurements taken at 600 C If the expression relating

coverage to work function change Equation 35 is valid at both 600

C and

at -1500 C then the 007 eV shift would represent a dosed coverage difference

of 7 of a monolayer The ion yield at the low temperature would maximize at

a dosed coverage of 11 which is 40 lower than the coverage for the maximum

ion yield at the higher temperature If the decrease in ion yield for higher

hydrogen coverages arises from interactions between adsorbed atoms these calshy

culations suggest that the interactions observe a different coverage dependence

at the two temperatures Alternate explanations are possible for the measured

difference Equation 35 may not be valid at both temperatures It is possible

that the work function change per adsorbed atom is smaller at the lower tempshy

erature and the dosed coverages are the same at the ion yield maximas It is

also possible that hydrogen not visible in ESD or electron loss spectroscopy

measurements~ but capable of interacting with dosed hydrogen~ diffuses to the

surface at the low temperature This latter alternative~ while a possible exshy

planation for the LEED phenomena would raise many questions as to why such

hydrogen is not detectable with other techniques

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements

Low energy electron diffraction measurements made on the clean and

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface have been presented in Section 36 The

symmetry of the LEED patterns has been noted as a function of hydrogen coverage

and crystal temperature Elastic intensity profiles for three LEED beams are

given in Figures 321 through 323 LEED beam intensities as a function of

temperature have been monitored These are given in Figures 324 and 325

General agreement between symmetry patterns seen here and those

published in the literature18 19 is good The (lxl) LEED pattern

146

characteristic of clean tungsten at room temperature changes into a c(2x2)

pattern with initial hydrogen adsorption With further adsorption the LEED

pattern splits into four spots becomes blurred and finally at full coverage

returns to a (lx1) pattern When the crystal is cooled to temperatures below

room temperatures half order spots become visible without any dosing of the

crystal from the gas system

The intensity of the room temperature half order spots maximizes at

a coverage corresponding to ~~ = 015 eV or 015 monolayer using Equation

35 This is close to the 016 monolayer coverage at which Yonehara and

19 18Schmidt found these beams to maximize Estrup and Anderson on the

other hand observed sharp and intense half order LEED spots at a coverage

of 029 monolayer The coverages reported here were calculated from work

function changes using the linear relation between work function change and

coverage obtained by Madey by a flash desorption technique In both other

18experiments 19 coverage was measured directly using flash desorption The

c(2x2) pattern is associated with the ~2 adsorption state The structures

proposed to account for this state as given in Section 128 predict that

the maximum of the half order spots should occur at 025 monolayer coverage

15(one monolayer being 2x10 atomscm2) Estrup and Andersons measurement is

closest to this coverage While it is not known why there is such a large

discrepancy between the results it should be noted that determination of

coverage using flash desorption techniques is difficult with large uncershy

tainties in pressure gauge calibration and system volume The results given

here in terms of ~~ should be considerably more accurate

_ _____---__---shy

147

Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) (11) and (1212) LEED

beams are given in Figures 321 through 323 respectively The profiles

o 0 were taken at 60 C and -150 C from both a clean tungsten surface and a

surface dosed with hydrogen to 015 monolayer (This coverage corresponded

to the observed maximum in the half order pattern) As seen in these three

figures corresponding clean room temperature and low temperature profiles are

nearly identical Adsorption of hydrogen to a coverage of 015 does cause

some changes in the clean profiles with the same changes being observed at

both temperatures Hydrogen adsorption considerably enhances the 42 eV peak

observed in the (1212) profile and shifts it in energy approximately + 1 eVe

Adsorption also leads to a change from a single peak to a double peaked

structure of decreased intensity in the (11) profile above 100 eVe Adsorption

causes very little change in the (10) profile line shape above 60 eV

although the 65 eV 835 eV and 110 eV peaks are lowered in energy approxishy

mately 15 eV 05 eV and 15 eV respectively Between 30 eV and 60 eV

there are some adsorption effects on the profiles

These elastic intensity profiles can be compared to corresponding

data previously reported in the literature In Figure 44 a comparison is

made between clean surface (10) and (11) profiles taken here and reported

9lby Wei The agreement is good except in the energy range below 50 eVe

This poor agreement below 50 eV is also true for the (00) beam which is not

compared here The low energy discrepancies may be caused by the ambient

magnetic field present in Weis target region In fact it is surprising

that the data agrees as well as it does considering the different experimenshy

tal conditions under which the two sets of data were obtained Figure 45

148

Figure 44 Comparison of (11) and (10) elastic intensity profiles from the clean tungsten (100) surface Data includes profiles taken here at 60degC and -150degC and results reported by Wei94 bull

149

() --c 1

gt 0-Q 0-gt-()

c OJ-c

H

o 50 100 150 200

xl

xl

X2

Elastic Intensity Profiles W (100) Clean 8i = 0deg

g = (11)

g = (10)

Withrow (-150degC)

Withrow (60degC)

Wei (250-300degC)

Pr imary Energy (eV) SP-1l92

150

Figure 45 Comparison of (1212) elastic intensity profiles from tungsten (100) surface after hydrogen adsorption into the ~2 state Data includes profiles obtained here and results reported by Estrup and Anderson18 and Papageorgopoulos and Chen2l

0

151

- ()-

--()

c Q)-c H

Elastic Intensity Profiles H2 on W(lOO) 8j =0deg 9 = (1212)

Withrow

Estrup and Anderson

Papageorgopoulos and Chen

o 50 100 150 Primary Energy (eV) SP-1l93

200

152

shows a comparison of elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam taken

after hydrogen adsorption From the general appearance of the data Estrup

18and Andersons profi1e appears shifted up in energy about 5 eV with respect

to the profile taken here This suggests the possibility of a discrepancy

in the energy measurement The line shapes are similar howeve~ although

Estrup and Anderson found one well-defined peak around 75 eV whereas in this

work a peak at 67 eV and an additional shoulder between 85 eV and 90 eV is

21seen Papageorgopou1os and Chen did not observe the large peak below 50 eV

nor the double peaked structure above 100 eV reported by both other researchers

These discrepancies cou1deasi1y be due to a residual magnetic field in the

work of Papageorgopou1os and Chen It can be concluded from these comparishy

sons that control over experimental conditions is crucial for the reproduction

of data

Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores

16 17 can be extracted from a sufficient set of elastic intensity proh1es

Although the data base is small here a preliminary analysis of the clean

tungsten data has been conducted by Duke using a microscopic quantum-field

16theory formalism of low energy electron diffraction In this formalism a

model for the electron-solid interaction is used in an attempt to match

theoretical line shape predictions to experimentally observed elastic LEED

intensity profiles An important feature of this microscopic approach is the

strong interactions between the incident electron and valence electrons in

the solid The inelastic mean free path A is about 3-8 X for most ee

materials for electron energies of 30 ~ E S 200 As a consequence electrons

which are observed elastically have been backscattered within the first

--------------

153

several surface layers of the solid and hence LEED elastic profiles are

surface sensitive Elastic backscattering of the electrons is described by

short range electron-ion core interactions Information on the configurashy

tion of the surface ion cores is extracted from the elastic energy profiles

by varying parameters in the theory and obtaining the best fit to the data

Theoretical analysis of elastic energy profiles from tungsten at energies

above 100 eV is computationally difficult because of the large number of

phase shifts needed to describe the electron-ion core scattering Hence the

exp arimental profiles were taken only for energies E 1gt 125 eV pr~

Comparisons of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity

profiles for the (00) (10) and (11) beams are given in Figure 46 The

theoretical fit to the experimental data was made by taking an inelastic

mean free path Aee equal to 8 K and an inner potential Vl which represents

t he rea1 part 0 f h 1 1 i on16 equa1 to 8 eV Thetee ectron-e ectron 1nteract

agreement in peak position is good for the (10) beam in the range

25 eV lt E lt 125 eV and for the (11) beam in the range 60 eV lt E lt 100 eV ~ ~ ~ ~

The theoretical and experimental line shapes of the (10) beam show remarkable

agreement but the line shapes of the (11) beam do not fit as well For the

(00) beam the theoretical profile is not similar to the experimental plot

except for the peak at 117 eV Most of this discrepancy for the (00) beam

probably arises from the differences in theoretical and experimental incishy

dence and aximuthal angles used to obtain the profiles The theoretical

profile was calculated assuming a primary electron beam normally incident

experimentally this is not possible with the spectrometer ~sed here since

the (00) beam would not be visible on the LEED screen under these conditions

~~ ~~-----------

---------------------~------------------

154

o

III C

~ C

H 1 o

1

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

-Experiment Withrow and Luscher

g =(00)

o-o-oTheory Duke T = 10 K ej =cpj =0 V=8eVI Aee 811

o 140 SP-1l91

Figure 46 Comparison of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity profiles for clean tungsten (100) surface Theoretical results have been calculated by Duke

155

Data has been obtained for the temperature dependence of clean

elastic intensity profiles No differences in the clean surface (10) and

(11) profiles taken at 600 C and -1500 C are seen even though the LEED pattern

symmetry changes from a (lxl) pattern to a c(2x2) pattern Apparently these

two elastic intensity profiles are not sensitive to the scattering geometry

changes that are manifested in the LEED pattern change

19 92 It has been speculated that the extra half order spots may

result from hydrogen on the surface As shown above the (10) and (11)

profiles dont change even though the half order spots appear on cooling

This may not be surprising if the extra spots seen on cooling the undosed

crystal are related to hydrogen on the surface The cross section for hydrogen

92 93backscattering 1S very weak compared to scattering from tungsten While

a priori it is not necessarily true that the addition of a weak scatterer will

have little effect on intensity profiles this does seem to be the case for

hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten Adsorption of hydrogen has no effect on

18the (00) profile from tungsten (100) and it was found here that~daorption

of hydrogen has very little effect on the (10) beam profile out to 015

monolayer coverage as can be concluded from Figure 321 On the other hand

it is true that adsorption of hydrogen did alter the (11) beam A second

explanation for the extra spots seen on cooling the crystal is that they

result from a tungsten surface reconstruction No theoretical calculations

have been performed which would indicate how reconstruction would affect the

intensity profiles The sensitivity of the profiles to an hypothesized

surface atom reconstruction could be determined from calculations similar to

those leading to the theoretical profiles given in Figure 46 Such a

156

theoretical calculation would be of interest as it would help evaluate how

much credence should be given to a reconstruction hypothesis

More than one atomic geometry may be associated with a given surface

translational symmetry ie associated with the same LEED spot pattern

Different geometries however would be manifested via differences in the

1intensity profiles associated with the same spot pattern After hydrogen

o 0adsorption to 015 monolayer at 60 C and -150 C both the LEED pattern symmetr~

c(2x2) and the elastic intensity profiles are the same Thus this data would indicate hydrogen adsorbs into the same surface atomic geometry at the two

temperatures A comparison of elastic intensity profiles from the undosed and

hydrogen dosed cold surface is given in Figure 47 The LEED pattern for both

conditions has a c(2x2) symmetry The profiles are not the same particularly

the (11) profile above 100 eV and the (1212) profile below 50 eV Hence

the atomic geometry responsible for the two sets of profiles may be different

even though the observed pattern symmetry c(2x2) is the same

The intensity dependence on temperature of the LEED beams has been

observed The intensity of integral order beams monitored from the clean

surface increases with decreasing temperature as shown in Figure 324 The

22 95 exponential temperature dependence obtained is pred1cted from a kinematic

treatment of electron scattering in which thermal vibrations are included via

an effective Debye-Waller factor Experimental Debye temperatures aD can

be calculated from the slopes of the straight lines in Figure 324 22 96

For the (10) beam taken with a primary energy of 1105 eV aD is

calculated to be 280oK 97 This is on the order of the Debye temperature for

~ 0bulk tungsten and higher than the Debye temperature of 183 K found by

157

Figure 47 Comparison of experimental (10) (11) and (1212) elastic intensity profiles from a cold tungsten (100) surface for hydrogen adsorption in the fast state (undosed surface) and in the ~2 state

158

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(100)

g (10)

1 o

o

OJ 0deg T -150degC Undosed and Dosed with H2

shyCl shy+shy 1 0 shyCl

o gt +shy(J)

c Q)

C 0 H

g (1212)

1

o

o

o 140

159

Estrup13 for the (10) beam for intensities taken between 6000K and 8000K

0The Debye temperature for the (11) beam is calculated to be 410 K The

middot h 1 1 95va1ues 0f eD f ound h ere seem to be anoma1ous 1y h19 S1nce ca cu at10ns

indicate that the surface Debye temperature should be lower than the bulk

Debye temperature

The temperature dependence of the half order beam is not the same

as found for the integer order beams Figure 325 shows that the intensity

of this beam increases at different exponential rates over two temperature

regions Down to about -750C the intensity increase is exponential but with

a steeper temperature dependence than observed with the integer order beams

Below -75oC the intensity increases at approximately the same exponential

rate as the integer order beams This same result is found at primary

energies of both 42 eV and 115 eV The effect is reversible with temperature

Yonehara and Schmidt19 measured the temperature dependence of the half order

beams and fit their results to a straight line on a linear scale However

for the data they took immediately after flashing to 25000K an exponential

dependence as found here appears to be as good if not better fit

0Below -75 C the half order beam intensity increases at approximately

the same exponential rate as the integer order beams This suggests that in

this lower temperature region the intensity increase can be explained by the

0 0Debye-Wa1ler factor However between 100 C and -75 C it is not known why

the (1212) spots appear and then increase in intensity so strongly

The intensity dependence on temperature of the (1212) beam

below OoC can be compared to the temperature dependence of the fast state H+

ion intensity These data are given in Figures 312 and 325 Because the

----------------~~ ~~~~~

160

a+ ion yield from the fast state also increases with decreasing temperature

a possible correlation between the appearance of this ion signal and the

appearance of the half order beams is suggested It is tempting to hypothesize

that the fast state is adsorbed into a c(2x2) array and hence half order spots

are produced on cooling However this connection probably cannot be made

For one thing the estimated coverage of the fast state is several orders of

magnitude below a coverage reasonably expected to exert an influence on the

LEED pattern In addition while the fast state has a high total desorption

cross section with the ion signal decaying rapidly after turning oriltthe

electron gun no evidence of this type of behavior is found for the LEED spot

intensities if a corresponding experiment is made A depletion of the fast

state in the electron beam does not affect the half order LEED spot intensities

oFinally in the region below middot75 C the ion signal increases reversibly with

temperature at a steep rate while the LEED spot intensity increases reversshy

ib1y at a slow rate ie the intensity correlation is not good in this

range These arguments do not refute the possibility that the half order

spots are a hydrogen phenomena They strongly indicate however that a

correlation cannot be made between the hydrogen ions observed from the undosed

surface and the appearance of the half order spots aside from the obvious

result that they both occur over the same temperature range It would appear

more reasonable to suggest that the formation of a c(2x2) scattering symmetry

on the surface via reconstruction or some other mechanism provides a

binding site into which a species from the ambient can adsorb and subseshy

quent1y be desorbed The identity of that species is not known

-----------shy

161

45 Electron Scattering Results

Energy loss spectra for electrons scattered from the clean and

hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surface are given in Figures 326 and 327

The second derivative mode has been employed in order to suppress background

as discussed in Appendix B Data have been presented for energy losses

between a and 40 eV for a primary electron beam energy of 110 eV

Several general comments can be made A comparison of the clean

spectra taken at the two temperatures shows they are nearly identical The

only difference is a slight enhancement in the low temperature data of the

shoulder at w = 75 eV (barely evident in the figures) It might be noted

that adsorption of hydrogen produces as peak at 75 eV and the small change

in the low temperature spectrum near this energy may be an indication of a

small hydrogen coverage An attempt was made to observe effects of the fast

state on the clean spectrum After cooling the crystal the fast state was

allowed to populate by turning the gun off for adsorption times of 10 minutes

The spectrum taken after preparing the crystal in this way was identical to

those obtained immediately after cooling Hence fast state hydrogen does

not perturb the electronic structure unlike ~ state hydrogen This result

is not surprising because of the very low coverages calculated for the fast

state from the desorption measurement

Hydrogen adsorption into the ~ states perturbs the clean surface

o 0loss spectrum The same changes are observed at both 60 C and -150 C The

most dramatic changes that occur with increasing coverage are the growth of

a 75 eV loss the movement down in loss energy of the structure at 21 eV in

the clean spectrum and the annihilation of the peak at 25 eV In addition

the loss peak at 107 eV decreases in intensity somewhat

162

Definite changes in the loss spectra are seen (for example at

w = 75 eV) for work function changes of 003 eV This is a coverage of only

3 percent hydrogen At coverages corresponding to a work function change of

015 eV the 75 eV peak is well-developed and the 21 eV structure has moved

down ~ 1 eV While hydrogen is adsorbing at room temperature from 0 to 15

percent of a monolayer half order spots develop in the LEED pattern As

noted before half order spots also develop in the LEED pattern by cooling the

ocrystal to -150 C However electron loss measurements from the cold flashed

surface dont show any changes that correspond to hydrogen on the surface

Thus no correlation can be drawn using electron loss measurements between

the half order patterns obtained by hydrogen dosing and by cooling the crystal

Interpretation of the structure in the energy loss spectra taken

here is nontrivial Although the data incorporates information on the elecshy

tronic structure of the surface and near surface region ie represents

bulk and surface single particle transitions and collective oscillations

both theoretical and experimental complexities arise in attempting to extract

electronic structure from the data While the electron energy loss has been

measured with high resolution information on the momentum transfer ~ q

involved in the electron solid inelastic interaction is not retained since

1) the analyzer integrates over a wide range of ~ qs and 2) the backscattered

electron has undergone at least two collisions - an inelastic scattering

with an accompanying momentum transfer which is not enough to turn the

electron around and an elastic scattering which does Hence the analyzer is

expected to be sensitive to loss mechanisms which are well-defined in energy

but relatively independent of momentum transfer Transitions satisfying these

163

conditions are possible in tungsten Luscher has shown25 that at least one

relatively flat and narrow d-band in tungsten located near the Fermi level

acts as the final state for electron excitations involving core electrons

This d-band may be operative as a final state for transitions involving

valence and adsorbate electrons as well

25The structure at 210 eV and 255 eV has been identified as

resulting from surface and bulk plasmons Adsorption of hydrogen increases

the energy of the surface plasmon but does not affect the energy of the bulk

plasmon

The energy losses at 381 eV 346 eV and 324 eV remain constant

as a function of hydrogen coverage These losses correspond in both relative

strengths and separation in energy to tungsten core electron excitations from

he 5 an (doublet ) eve 1s f ound h at 36 Vt p d 4f 1 1nmiddot x-ray p otoem1SS10n 99 9 e

333 eV and 311 eV below the Fermi level A comparison of these photo-

emission values to the energy losses observed here would indicate the position

of the final state operative in the energy loss measurements is 13 eV above

the Fermi level

It would be convenient to use this value) 13 eV for the final

state energy in interpreting the rest of the sharply peaked structure arising

from electron transitions There are difficulties with such an approach

however The data being compared in calculating the final state energy

location have been obtained with two techniques that perturb the adsorbateshy

plus-solid system in distinctly different ways The observed energy losses

in electron scattering are strongly influenced by interband oscillators

electron screening and relaxation effects and these perturbations are not

164

constant as a function of loss energy Hence extension of the 13 eV value

in interpreting data at other loss energies may not be valid None the less

using the 13 eV final state the peaks in the clean ELS spectrum at 25 eV

and 40 eV would correspond to peaks in the photoemission spectra at 12 eV

(25 eV - 13 eV) and at 27 eV (40 eV - 13 eV) respectively There is

no obvious correspondence between these peaks and structure seen in clean

35 36surface photoemission spectra The structure changes on adsorption in

the ELS spectra for 0 eV S w ~ 4 eV may reflect the sharp photoemission loss

which appears at 25 eV as hydrogen coverage increases The strong 75 eV

energy loss which appears in the ELS spectra as hydrogen adsorbs onto the

crystal would correspond to structure in photoemission data near 62 eV

(75 eV - 13 eV) Recently photoemission peaks at 52 eV and between

10068 eV and 78 eV have been reported From these comparisons it can be

seen that quantitative interpretation of the fine structure in the energy

loss measurements cannot be made with this simple model

165

CHAPTER 5

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

An experimental apparatus for surface research has been designed

constructed and successfully placed in operation It incorporates the

necessary hardware and electronics for performing several complementary

surface probing techniques including Auger electron spectroscopy retarding

potential work function measurements low energy electron diffraction electron

energy loss spectroscopy and electron stimulated desorption of ions System

electronics allow the instrument to be easily switched between the techniques

The apparatus has been used to study the chemisorption of hydrogen on a

tungsten single crystal surface over the temperature range 600C to -150

0C

The instrument combines an electron gun with an energy spectrometer

a LEED display system and a crystal manipulator The electron gun is capable

of focusing a monoenergetic electron current of up to 21 ~A onto a

macroscopic sample The gun has been operated from 5 eV to 1800 eV The

high resolution high sensitivity spectrometer consists of a retarding field

analyzer in series with two electrostatic deflection analyzers The energy

resolution of the spectrometer is 21 without using the retarding field

analyzer This can be improved to less than 1 under some conditions by

applying a retarding field The spectrometer output can be detected using

a atemeter or using modulation techniques The instrument has been used to

analyze electron and ion signals from the sample and to determine the charge

to mass ratio of desorbed ions The experimental sample a tungsten crystal

which has been polished to within 01 0 of the (100) face is mounted on the

166

end of a crystal manipulator The manipulator is used to position the sample

as needed A two grid LEED display system has been used to study LEED

pattern symmetry The intensities of LEED spots have been monitored with a

spot photometer

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental conditions using Auger electron spectroscopy The Auger

spectrum obtained after flashing the crystal to 22000 K is free of carbon and

oxygen Auger structure The electron gun could be operated under normal

experimental conditions without contaminating the surface but a carbon Auger

peak appears if high gun currents and voltages are used This effect Crul

be taken into consideration when interpreting the data Some weak structure

in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface is seen between 475 eV and

525 eVa It is not possible to conclusively determine if this structure

results from Auger transitions in tungsten or from some other source

Retarding potential work function measurements have been made as

a reproducible measure of hydrogen coverage Adsorption of hydrogen onto

othe tungsten (100) crystal at 60 C yields a maximum work function change of

098 plusmn 004 eVa This is in good agreement with previously reported values

The work function change with exposure to hydrogen for the tungsten sample

at -lSOoc was found to be the same within experimental accuracy as found

at higher temperature The maximum work function change at -lSOoc is

092 plusmn 004 eVa Cooling the flashed crystal from 2200 C to -lSOoC resulted

in an increase in the work function of approximately 005 eVa An intrinsic

(clean surface) temperature dependence of this magnitude appears reasonable

from theoretical considerations

167

The time-of-flight technique employed for mass analysis was found

to work well Ion species H+ and 0+ as well as H + have been identified2

Relative intensities of the ion yields could only be estimated with this

technique as instrumented H+ ions are electron desorbed from the surface

after adsorption of hydrogen In addition H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface after a flash if the crystal was cooled below room temperature No

HZ+ ions were desorbed from the crystal However H2+ and H+ ions produced

by ionization of the background and also by ESD from surfaces in the experishy

mental chamber were detected under certain operating conditions This signal

could be separated from the ions originating at the crystal surface by biasing

the crystal several volts positive with respect to the spectrometer

The distribution in energy of H+ ions electron desorbed from a 60 0 C

tungsten (100) surface has been observed The distribution has a normal line

shape with a peak intensity at 30 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a half width

of Z6 eV No evidence of distinct ~l and ~Z adsorption states was found in

the energy distribution line shape the distribution is the same for coverages

corresponding to both the ~Z adsorption state and the ~l plus ~2 adsorption

states The intensity of the U+ ion signal is coverage dependent The deshy

pendence found here is in agreement with previously reported work The maxshy

imum in intensity of the ion yield occurs for a work function change of 018

eV The total desorption cross section for hydrogen ions from the ~2 state

is 5xlO-ZO cmZ bull

An H+ ion signal can be desorbed from the undosed (100) surface if

the crystal temperature is lowered below room temperature T~fs represents

a previously unreported hydrogen adsorption state Experiments in which

the pressure was carefully monitored indicate that this hydrogen results

168

from adsorption onto the crystal from the background However the state

labeled the fast state is not populated by the adsorption of H2 from the

gas handling system The adsorbing species that populates the fast state

is not known Hydrogen coverage in the fast state is estimated to be ~10-4

monolayer which is an extremely small coverage The fast state hydrogen

desorbs with a broad energy distribution which has a peak intensity at

25 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a tail extending up to gt9 eV The total

17 2desorption cross section for H+ from this state is high lxlO- cm This is

on the same order of magnitude as the cross section for desorption of the

~ hydrogen state However no evidence of CO or oxygen contaminants which

are associated with the ~ state was found The techniques used to chemshy

ically characterize the surface were sensitive to about 1 percent of a mono-

layer so these two contaminants could have been present at coverages less

than 1 percent

Hydrogen (H2) dosed onto the low temperature surface co-adsorbs

with the fast state in a separate e state This can be concluded from energy

distribution and desorption curve measurements The maximum ion yield obshy

tainable from the low temperature surface occurs for a work function change

of 011 eV This is 007 eV lower than the maximum in the ion yield from

the room temperature hydrogen dosed surface This difference may indicate

that the mechanism responsible for the decrease in ion yield as the ~l state

fills is operative at a lower hydrogen coverage at low temperatures An

alternative possibility is that hydrogen coverage at the low temperature can

not be measured by the same expression relating coverage to work function

change as used at the higher temperature

169

Low energy electron diffraction pattern changes observed as a

function of hydrogen coverage on the room temperature surface are in agreeshy

ment with those reported in the literature The surface translational symshy

metry is strongly coverage dependent The maximum in the c(2x2) pattern

associated with the ~2 state occurs at a work function change of 015 eV for

room temperature adsorption If the crystal is flashed to ~22000K and then

cooled below room temperature the (lxl) pattern characteristic of the clean

surface changes into a c(2x2) pattern Since H+ ions can be electron desorbed

from the flashed surface if the crystal is cooled to this same temperature

range and since the ~2 state hydrogen is known to produce a c(2x2) pattern

it has been suggested that the low temperature c(2x2) LEED pattern may result

from hydrogen on the surface However no evidence was found to support this

hypothesis The ions desorbed from the cold surface did not originate from

the f 2 state but from a distinctly different state labeled the fast state

It is questioned whether the low coverage in the fast state is sufficient to

produce half order LEED spots There is no indication from the ELS measureshy

ments that hydrogen has diffused to the surface from the bulk Electron

energy loss spectra show almost no change on cooling the crystal below room

temperature These spectra are sensitive to electronic structure changes

resulting from hydrogen adsorption of as little as 3 percent of a monolayer

The (10) and (11) LEED beam intensity profiles taken from the undosed surface

are not changed by cooling the crystal It would be of interest to compare

this experimental result to theoretical elastic intensity profile calculations

from both a normal and a recons tructed tungsten surface This would help

determine if reconstruction is a viable explanation for the cold surface

170

c(2x2) phenomenon

Low energy electron diffraction elastic intensity profiles for

several beams have been reported from the clean tungsten (100) surface and

from this surface dosed with hydrogen in the ~2 state These profiles have

been compared to published data where possible Careful control over expershy

imental parameters is essential in order to obtain agreement between the data

The clean surface intensity profiles have been compared to preliminary theoretshy

ical calculations While fair agreement Catl be obtained both experimental

and theoretical problems must be solved before a reliable calculation of

atomic geometry for the hydrogen over layer can be made A comparison of

experimental profiles for the low temperature undosed and hydrogen dosed

c(2x2) patterns suggests that the atomic geometries responsible for these

identical patterns arenot the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been presented as a

f~~ction of hydrogen coverage Changes in the electronic structure at the

surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption are observed Structure due to

the surface and hulk plasmons are identified and peaks due to tungsten

Sp and 4f core level transitions can be identified by comparison to published

photoemission data Interpretation of other structure in the spectra requires

more study

171

REFERENCES

1 C B Duke Jap J App1 Phys 13 (1974) to be published

2 For example see R R Ford Advan Catalysis 21 51 (1970) for review of CO adsorption on transition metals or J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chern Phys 54 4969 (1971) and T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et PrPri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155 for a review of hydrogen adsorption on tungsten (100)

3 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Vac Sci Techno1 ~ 63 (1971)

4 P A Redhead Vacuum~ 203 (1962)

5 G Ehrlich Advan Catalysis 14 221 (1963)

6 L A Petermann Progress in Surface Science vol 3 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1972) p 1

7 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chern Phys 21 5352 (1969)

8 T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et Propri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155

9 D L Adams and L H Germer Sur Sci 23 419 (1970)

10 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 40 295 (1973)

11 G Tibbetts PhD thesis University of Illinois 1967

12 D L Adams Sur Sci 42 12 (1974)

13 P J Estrup The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 191

14 C B Duke and C W Tucker Jr Sur Sci 11 231 (1969)

15 C B Duke Electron Emission Spectroscopy edited by W Dekeyser et a1 (D Reidel Publishing Co Dordrecht Holland 1973) p 1

16 C B Duke N O Lipari and G E Laramore J Vac Sci Techno1 11 180 (1974)

17 M G Laga11y T C Ngoc and M B Webb Phys Rev Lett 26 1557 (1971)

172

18 P J Estrup and J Anderson J Chern Phys 45 2254 (1966)

19 K Yonehara and L D Schmidt Sur Sci 12 238 (1971)

20 E W Plummer and A E Bell J Vac Sci Techno1 2 583 (1972) bull

21 C A Papageorgopoulos and J M Chen Sur Sc i 39 283 (1973)

22 R F Wallis B C Clark and R Herman The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 171

23 M R Leggett and R A Armstrong Sur Sci 24 404 (1971)

24 D Edwards Jr PhD thesis University of Illinois 1970

25 P E Luscher PhD thesis Northwestern University 1974 to be published

26 R Gomer Field Emission and Field Ionization (Harvard U Press Cambridge Ma ss 1961)

27 R D Young Phys Rev 113 110 (1959)

28 J W Gadzuk and E W Plummer Rev Mod Phys 45 487 (1973)

29 C B Duke and M E Alpounderieff J Chern Phys 46 923 (1967)

30 J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Bl 2110 (1970)

31 C N Berglund and W E Spicer Phys Rev 136 part A Al030 (1964)

32 F M Propst and T C Piper J Vac Sci Technol ~ 53 (1967)

33 G Herzberg Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure I Spectra of Diatomic Molecules (D Van Nostrand New York 1963) 2nd ed

34 E W Plummer and J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Lett 25 1493 (1970)

35 B J Waclawski and E W Plummer Phys Rev Lett 29 783 (1972)

36 B Feuerbacher and B Fitton Phys Rev Lett 29 786 (1972)

37 P A Redhead Can J Phys 42 886 (1964)

38 D Menzel and R Gomer J Chern Phys 41 3311 (1964)

39 D Lichtman and R McQuistan Progress in Nuclear Energy Analytical Chemistry edited by H A Elion and D C Stewart (Pergamon Press New York 1965) series 9 vol 4 p 93

173

40 U N Ageev and N I Ionov Progress in Surface Science vol 5 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1974) p 1

41 T E Madey Sur Sci 36 281 (1973)

42 A Benninghoven E Loebach and N Treitz J Vac Sci Techno1 2 600 (1972)

43 L W Swanson A E Bell C H Hinrichs L C Crouser and B E Evans Literature Review of Adsorption on Metal Surfaces vol 1 NASA CR-72402 (NASA Lewis Research Center Cleveland Ohio 1967) p 76

44 R V Culver and F C Tompkins Advan Catalysis l 67 (1959)

45 See reference 43 p 49

46 J A Becker Actes du 2ieme Congres International de 1a Cata1yse (Edition Technip Paris 1961) 1777

47 R A Armstrong Can J Phys 44 1753 (1966)

48 B J Hopkins and K R Pender Sur Sci ~ 316 (1966)

49 R A Collins and B H B1ott J App1 Phys 40 5390 (1969)

50 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chem Phys 54 4969 (1971)

51 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 42 485 (1974)

52 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 52 1150 (1970)

53 See reference 7 Fig 8

54 K Fujiwara J Phys Soc Japan 11 7 (1957)

55 G D Bond Disc Faraday Soc 41 200 (1966)

56 F M Propst unpublished

57 R L Park The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 281

58 T B Grime1y Adsorption-Desorption Phenomena edited by F Ricca (Academic Press New York 1972) p 215

59 L W Anders R S Hansen and L S Bartell J Chern Phys 595277(1973)

60 J R Schrieffer J Vac Sci Techno1 2 561 (1972)

174

61 D M Newns Phys Rev 178 1123 (1969)

62 J R Schrieffer and R Gomer Sur Sci 25 315 (1971)

63 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn Phys Rev Lett 30 610 (1973)

64 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn to be published

65 P J Jennings and E G McRae Sur Sci 23 363 (1970)

66 W H Weinberg J Vac Soc Technol lQ 89 (1973)

67 L A Harris J Appl Phys 39 1419 (1968)

68 C C Chang Sur Sci 25 53 (1971)

69 T Cooper PhD thesis University of Illinois Urbana Illinois 1970

70 E M Purcell Phys Rev 54 818 (1938)

71 R Herzog Zeits F Physik 89 449 (1934)

72 Coordinated Science Laboratory Progress Report for July 1970 through June 1971 University of Illinois Urbana Illinois

73 See for example Handbook and Catalog of Operational Amplifiers BurrshyBrown Research Corp 1969 p 44

74 R W Jnyner J Rickman and M W Roberts Sur Sci 39 445 (1973)

75 C Lea and C H B Mee Sur Sci 11 332 (1971)

76 W A Coghlan and R E Clausing A Catalog of Calculated Auger Transitions for the Elements ORNL-TM-3576 (Oak Ridge National Lab Oak Ridge Tenn 1971)

77 As read by optical pyrometer the edge of the target measured 22000 K and the center 2500oK

78 B B Dayton Trans 3rd AVS National Vacuum Symposium 1956 (Pergamon Press New York 1957) p 5

79 T E Madey Sur Sci 33 355 (1972)

80 S C Brown Basic Data of Plasma Physics (Technology Press of MIT Cambridge Mass and John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 115

81 H D Hagstrum Rev Mod Phys 23 185 (1951)

175

82 M Nishijima PhD thesis University of Illinois 1969

83 G D Watts A R Jones and B J Hopkins Sur Sci 45 705 (1974)

84 R A Armstrong Sur Sc i sect 478 (1967)

85 E H B1evis and C R Crowell Phys Rev 133 part A A580 (1964)

86 C R Crowell and R A Armstrong Phys Rev 114 1500 (1959)

87 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 55 4253 (1971)

88 R Frauenfelder J Vac Sci Technol sect 388 (1969)

89 G E Moore and F C Unterwald J Chem Phys 40 2639 (1964)

90 S Dushman Scientific Foundations of Vacuum Technigue (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 19

91 P S P Wei J Chem Phys 53 2939 (1970)

92 J C Tracy private communication

93 J J Lander and J Morrison J Appl Phys 34 3517 (1963)

94 M Fink and A C Yates Atomic Data (to be published)

95 G E Laramore and C B Duke Phys Rev ~ I 4783 (1970)

96 J F Wendelken PhD thesis University of Illinois 1975

97 An inner potential of 8 eV has been assumed in this calculation

98 A Guinier X-Ray Diffraction (W H Freeman and Co San Francisco 1963) p 192

99 K Seigbahn C Nordling A Fahlman R Nordberg K Hamrin J Helman G Johansson T Bergmark S E Karlsson K Lindgren and B Lindberg ESCA - Atomic Molecular and Solid State Structure Studied by Means of Electron Spectroscopy (Almqvist Wiksells Uppsala 1967)

100 W F Egelhoff and D L Perry Phys Rev Lett 34 93 (1975)

176

APPENDIX A

A tungsten tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple spot-welded to the

side of the crystal is used to measure target temperatures The thermocouple

was calibrated against a copper-constantan standard A low temperature

freezing slush of isopentane (2-methylbutane) was made in a dewar by adding

liquid nitrogen (Isopentane freezes at -15989degC) The solution was allowed

to slowly warm up to room temperature over three hours during which a semi-

static calibration was made The reference junction was kept in a slush of

distilled ice water The calibration is shown in Figure AI

Using an identical technique a tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26

rhenium thermocouple was also calibrated as shown in Figure A2 TIlis thermoshy

couple does not have an inflection point in the range 00 to -195degC and it

00 h t t1mes more sens1t1ve over t he temperature range to -lSOoC than the1S e1g

tungstentungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple A tungsten-S rhenium wire should

spot-weld to tungsten more readily than a pure tungsten wire Thus because

of its increased sensitivity and ease of attaching to the tungsten crystal a

tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple appears a better

temperature sensor for low temperature research on tungsten

In the apparatus used the wires associated with the target manipulashy

tor including the thermocouple leads wind around the manipulator shaft to

provide rotational motion In order to get the 76 mm (003 in) diameter

thermocouple wires to wind smoothly around the shaft it was found necessary to

spring load them by turning a short segment of the wires into a 16 mm diameter

spring Unfortunately the tungsten-5 rhenium wire available proved too

brittle to turn into a spring and thus could not be used

012 _ ___r____~_-r____~_-r____~_ ___r______r___r____r__r___

C- WI W-26 Re Thermocouple Calibration Reference Junction at OdegC W Lead +

~ 008-lJ

W-26 Re LeadshyiE w 004 ~ 0shy

8J

0 o E

t-shy-I -I

Q)

c -004 tshy

-008 I I I I I I I

-200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 shy

Temperature (OC) SP-1069

Figure Al Calibration curve for W-5 ReW-26 Re thermocouple

o

-gt -04E -lL ~ w -OS 2 0shy

8J -12

o E

W-5 Re I W-26 Re Thermocouple Co libration Reference Junct ion at OdegC W-5Re Lead + W-26 Re Leadshy

J shy --shy~ ~ t- 16 0----

-20 I I

-200 -ISO -160 -140 -120 -100 -SO -60 -40 -20 0

Temperature (OC)

SP-1l73

Figure A2 Calibration curve for WW-26 Re thermocouple

-J 00

179

APPENDIX B

When operating the spectrometer in the electron mode at an effective

pass energy E the output current of the electron multiplier N(E) is proporshy

tional to the electron current originating at the target with energy between E

and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance solid angle of the analyzer

An energy distribution of the electron signal from the target can be measured

by sweeping the effective pass energy of the instrument This distribution

consists of rapidly varying true secondary and characteristic loss structure

interpretable in terms of electron transitions and collective oscillations in

the target plus a smoothly varying background In order to separate the

structure ~rom the background the energy distribution is electronically

67differentiated using a technique proposed by Harrismiddot A small sinusoidal

oscillation is applied to the effective pass energy of the spectrometer so

that the energy of the electrons passing through the spectrometer oscillates

around the instantaneous dc pass energy E If the detected current N(E) is 3

expanded in a Taylors series around the energy E where the sinusoidal 3

oscillation is E-E = K sin wt the first four terms are 3

N(E) N(E ) + K dN (E l (1 - cos 2wt)3 dE

E=E E=E i3

(3 sin wt - sin 3wt) +

E=E 3

Rearranging

180

dN(E) ) + K3 term + S1n wt (B2)N(E) = N(E ) + + K dE(i E=E

i

K2 d2N(E) 4 )+ K term + cos 2wt + + ( 4 2dE E=E1

The coefficients of the sin wt and cos 2wt terms are found to be proportional

respectively to the first two derivatives of N(E) providing K is small enough

such that the higher order terms in K can be dropped Under this assumption

a signal proportional to the first or second derivative of N(E) is obtained

by synchronously detecting the appropriate harmonic of the output

If a peak structure in the output signal is represented by a

Gaussian G(E) centered at E and the background represented by a polynomialo

in E B(E) then N(E) and the first two derivatives of N(E) evaluated at E o

become

N(E) = B(E) + G(E) (B3) -~(E-EO)2

2 d N(E) = a + bE + cE + + 1 e 2 (B4)

(2TT)2

2N(E=E ) = a + bE + cE + d 1 (B5)o o 0 cr (2TT)2

dN(E) = b + 2cE + 0 (B6)o E=E

dE

o

-d 1 = 2c + (B7)1 2 0 (2TT)2 0

E=E o

- -

2

181

From Equation B6 the first derivative evaluated at E has no contribution o

from the structure G(E) Extremum points in dN(E)dE occur at (E ~ E )2 = 0 o

if the background terms of order 3 or greater are not considered Using this

result in Equation B6 gives

~dltplusmng) edN(E) = b + 2c (E to) + bull I (B8)dE

0- 0 (2n)2E=E + 0

0shy

The relation between the original signal N(E) and the synchronously

detected signals can be seen from Equations B4 through B8 There is some

background suppression in both modes If N(E) is slowly varying the higher

order background terms that remain are small The peak to peak height of

the first harmonic signal is

1dN dN = 4ccr + - 2cb 1 e-2~-2crG(E-E ~ 0) (B9)

dE dE 0 (2n)2 0

E=E -0E=E +u o o

The intensity of the second harmonic signal evaluated at E is approximately 0

proportional to1 G(E) Hence using the stated assumptions the detected 0 2 0

first and second harmonics of N(E) contain structure which is directly

proportional to G(E)

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as is

commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in looking at

electron scattering energy loss measurements

182

APPENDIX C

The process of desorption of ions from a surface by electron

bombardment is referred to as electron stimulated desorption The theory to

account for this phenomenon was independently proposed by Redhead37 and by

38Menzel and Gomer A brief explanation of their model follows

In Figure Cl schematic potential energy diagrams are given for the

metal plus ground state adsorbate CM + A) and metal plus ionic state (M- + A+)

as a function of separation distance x of the adsorbing atom or ion from the

metal surface These two curves are labeled VG(x) and V(x) for the ground

state and ionic state respectively The nature of these interactions has

been described37 8l and several interaction calculations for hydrogen on metal

59 63surfaces have been g~ven The zero in potential energy in Figure 41 is

defined as the energy of the ion A+ at rest at infinity from the surface of M

The nucleus of the chemisorbed adsorbate is located at the minimum in the

ground state potential energy curve The wave function ~G(x) of the adsorbate

in the ground state on the surface is shown centered at a position x which ~

corresponds to the minimum in energy of VG

VG determines ~G(x) Vertical

transitions from the ground state to the ionic state (labeled 1 in the

diagram) are induced by incident electron bombardment of the surface

Secondary electrons leaving the surface also can cause such transitions

Once excited the ion is subjected to a repulsive force and moves away from

the surface (indicated by 2) The ionized adsorbate can be neutralized as it

leaves the surface and hence desorb as a neutral (indicated by 3) or it can

be de-excited back to the ground state and not desorb (indicated by 4) Ions

183

V(x)

gt ~ Ion ~ ~ 2 )III V(xi)(I) c +E K M-+A+w 0 f (v)+=c (I) +shy0 Cl

14 3 I-ltP Neutral

M+A

Ede t

ltPG (x)

~

DistanceX SP-1201

Figuze Cl Schematic diagram of adsorbate-metal interactions showing the transitions involved in the theory of electron stimulated desorption

184

that originate at x x leave the surface with energy V(x) The energyL L

80distribution of the desorbed ions f(V(xraquo is determined by the reflectionL

2of the probability density distribution I~G(xi)1 through the ionic state

energy curve This can be given by the expression

P(x ) f(V(xraquo

L (Cl)L ~~Ix = x

L

where N is the number of species A adsorbed in the ground state per unit

area a is the cross section for excitation of the species A from the groundex

state to the ionic state (transition 1) ~G(x) is defined above and P(x ) isi

the probability that an ion starts from the position x = x and moves awayL

from the L gLvensurface without being neutralized P(x) can be by373881

P(x ) exp(- J~dx ~)i x v(x) (C2)

i

where R(x) is the rate that the ions produced at the surface by electron

impact are reneutralized v(x) is the velocity of the ion at a distance x

from the surface This depends explicitly on V(x) as shown by Equation C3

for an ion of mass M and charge q

2q (V(X i ) - V(Xraquo)21

v(x) ( M (C3)

Additional complexities for example multiple initial and ionic states or

electron induced state conversion can be added to this simple model

185

The mass transport occurring at the surface during an ESD measurement

can be described in a kinetic treatment which relates the observed ion signal

to physical parameters characteristic of the experimental conditions The

change with time of the surface coverage per area of an adsorbate dNdt is

given by the rate of arrival of the adsorbate onto the surface minus the rate

of desorption from the surface In the simplest formulation of these proshy

cesses only adsorption from the background and desorption due to electron

bombardment need be considered The electron stimulated desorption flux of

ions is assumed proportional to the electron current density j and to the e

surface coverage per unit area N The proportionality constant is

tthe total desorption cross section Q (NE ) Qt(NE ) is in general a pr~ pr~

function of both the coverage and the primary electron energy For the

simple model given above the total desorption cross section is the sum of

the ionic Q+ and neutral Qn desorption cross sections The adsorption

rate is equal to the striking rate times the sticking probability s(N)

which in general is a function of the coverage The time dependence of N can

now be written as

j Qt(NE )N dNdt = s(N)yP _ ~ pu (C 4)e

where P is the partial pressure of the adsorbing species and y is a constant

equal to the number of molecules that strike unit area of the surface per unit

time and pressure

The measured electron stimulated desorption yield of A ions i + isA

assumed proportional to the incident current i the coverage of A per unit e

area N and the detection efficiency of the instrument G The proportionality

186

constant is the ionic desorption cross section Q+(NE ) (Since the only pr~

adsorbate being considered in this work is hydrogen the subscript A will be

replaced by H) This relation for iH+ can be written

= i Q+(NE )NG (CS)e pr~

Equation C4 can be solved for N in closed form under certain

simplifying assumptions The dependence of the cross section on primary

energy does not affect the form of the solution (if the primary energy is

kept constant) Then Qt can be written Qt (E ) if the cross section canpri

be shown to be independent of coverage This is not the case in general so

its validity for each metal-adsorbate system has to be examined This is

done in the text for H2 adsorbed on W(100) so the assumption will be assumed

here Likewise the sticking probability will be assumed independent of N

Equation C4 can now be solved to yield

(C6)

N is the initial hydrogen coverage at t o and T is given by ~

(C7)

Combining Equations CS and C6 gives for the g+ ion yield

(C8)

187

where i is the initial ion yield at t = 0 and iH+ is given byH~ equil

+ esyPAG ~ (C9)

Q

Equation C8 shows that the H+ yield decreases with time to a

saturation value iH+ This decay of the ESD ion yield with time is equil

called a desorption curve A semilogarithmic plot of iH+ - i + versusHequil time should yield a straight line the slope of which is -17 From this

slope and the definition of 7 the total desorption cross section charactershy

izing the hydrogen binding state can be calculated

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

1S considerably more dbull40 a diffusionpressure ~nvo1ve Conceptually such

process can be considered in two steps 1) the diffusion of hydrogen from the

bulk to just inside the surface or to a near surface layer and 2) the

jumping from this configuration to surface sites Diffusion from the bulk to

the near surface layer could be described by Ficks law If N is the conshy

centration of hydrogen in the near surface layer and N the surface concentrashy

tion of hydrogen then the time dependence of N + N due to bulk diffusion

can be written as

d(N+Nl _ D dn (C 10)dt - dx

where D is the diffusion constant for hydrogen in tungsten and dndx is the

concentration gradient of hydrogen just inside the surface The coverage N

in surface sites will change as a result of hydrogen jumping from the near

188

surface layer to the surface and vice versa The rate of jumping to the

surface d( N )dt can be assumed proportional to the concentration Nt

and to some function f(N) which describes the availability of surface sites

The diffusion rate to the surface from the near surface layer would also be

exponentially dependent on an activation barrier energy E The reversebs

flux from the surface to the near surface layer can be written in an

equivalent form An expression for the change in surface concentration with

time due to diffusion to and from the near surface layer can be written as

-E kT -E kTb~~ = CbsNte s f(N) - CsbNe sb g(N) (ClI)

The first term on the right-hand side represents the rate of diffusion from

the near surface layer to the surface and the second term represents the

rate of diffusion from the surface back to the near surface layer cbs and

are constants Esb and g(N) correspond toE and f(N) respectivelycsb bs

A term representing depletion of the surface state due to incident electron

bombardment similar to the second term on the right of Equation C4 could

be added in Equation Cll This has been omitted since only the case je = 0

will be considered here In principle an expression for N can now be

obtained by solving Equations ClO and Cll A general solution is not easily

obtained However it is evident that the time dependence of N due to

diffusion could realistically be similar to that expected from background

adsorption For example for the isothermal case if Nt is assumed constant

and f(N) assumed equal to (1 - NN ) assumptions that are reasonable for max

small coverages it can be shown from Equation 44 that N increases

189

exponentially in time to an equilibrium value For N small this solution

would be approximately linear in time the same result obtained for the time

dependence of background adsorption However background pressure doesnt

enter into the above diffusion calculation If the fast state phenomena is

diffusion related N would be expected to be independent of background

pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence for

adsorption from the background

_ _

190

VITA

Stephen Parker Withrow was born in Washington DC on February 2

1945 He attended Northwestern Senior High School in Hyattsville Maryland

graduating in 1963 He enrolled at Cornell University in Ithaca New York in

September 1963 In June 1967 he received a Bachelor of Science in

Engineering Physics In September 1967 he enrolled in the Physics Department

at the University of Illinois in Urbana Illinois He received his Masters

of Science in Physics in February 1969 He served at a Teaching Assistant

in the Physics Department for four years and also as a Research Assistant in

the Coordinated Science Laboratory while doing his thesis research He is

the coauthor of the publication Environmentally Assisted Crack Growth in

Glass G M Sinclair and S P Withrow Naval Research Laboratory Report

6635

_-------------shy-----------_ bull

Page 5: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …

iii

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

I would like to sincerely thank my advisor Professor F M Propst

for guidance given throughout the course of this research and for his knowledge

of surface research which helped shape this work Dr C B Duke for many

helpful conversations and for assistance in the analysis of the data my wife

Lois for her patience and steadfast encouragement my parents and parents-inshy

law for their generous and needed support Paul Luscher and John Wendelken for

their creativity and cooperation in the design of the apparatus and for many

interesting scientific discussions Jim Burkstrand and Chris Foster for their

friendship and technical help on many occasions Bob Bales George Bouck Bob

Fults Bill Beaulin Lyle Bandy and Bill Lawrence for design assistance and

expert workmanship in the construction of the apparatus Nick Vassos and Bill

Thrasher for the imaginative and superior work in materials processing necesshy

sary in the construction of the instrument Gene Gardner and co-workers for

able assistance in electronics Bob MacFarlane and assistants for their high

quality draftmanship Jack Gladin and Jim Gray for an excellent job on the

photography needed for this research Bob Ebeling for his cooperation in the

print shop Chris Fleener for an excellent typing of the manuscript and the

rest of the staff of the Coordinated Science Laboratory whose efforts have

been gratefully appreciated during my tenure as a graduate student

bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter Page

1 MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

11 Introduction and Motivationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

12 Review of Literature bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

121 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4 122 Thermal Desorptionbull o 4 123 LEED and HEEDbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 7 124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and

Photoemissionbullbullbull 100 bullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbull

125 Electron Stimulated Desorptionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 12 126 Work Functionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 13o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

1 27 Chemical Probes bullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull 14I) O

128 Chemisorption Models bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 15 1 29 Theoretical Treatment bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 19 1 210 Literature Surnmaryo 20

13 Review of Experimental Techniques bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 21

2 EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull ~ bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

21 CGeneral Description bull 22

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shieldingbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 25

24 Energy Spectrometer 29

25 Spectrometer Electronics bullbull 45o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

26 LEED Display System 490 bullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull I)

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 51

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 57

29 Gas Handling System o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 62

210 Mass Spectrometer bullbullbullbull o 64

3 EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE AND RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

31 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

32 Experimental Procedure o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current

Measurements 6811 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull

323 Target Temperature Measurement bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 325 Ion Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 72o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

v

33 Ion Species Identificationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 74

34 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 77

35 u+ Ion Desorption Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 351 ut Ion Energy Distributionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 352 Desorption Curve Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 93 353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State a+ Ion

Signal 4) 96

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 98

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull lll

37 Electron Scattering Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 119

4 DISCUSSION OF RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

42 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 127

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 129 431 Room Temperature Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 130 432 Low Temperature Fast State Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 135 433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull142

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 145

45 Electron Scattering Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 161

5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull165

REFERENCES 171

APPENDIX A 0 176 poundI

APPENDIX B 9 c 179

APPENDIX C 0 182 0 bull

VITA 190lilt bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbull

1

CHAPTER 1

MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

11 Introduction and Motivation

The experimental investigation of chemisorption of gases onto metallic

surfaces has uncovered in the past decade a baffling complexity of adsorption

geometries and binding state kinetics and energetics A growing interest in

surface phenomena generated by the questions raised in these researches and

by the long anticipated use of the answers has led to the rapid development

of new surface probing techniques and to an increase in the availability of new

technologies compatible with surface research Aided by the new technologies

and techniques chemisorption research has been undertaken on many different

systems (system =solid substrate + gas adsorbate) under a wide range of

environmental conditions Surface theoreticians have proposed microscopic and

phenomenological models with which data have been analyzed and compared A

large experimental and theoretical literature in the field has resulted

The study of adsorption on metal surfaces has among its primary

objectives a detailed description of the physical geometry of the atoms in the

surface layers and a quantitative understanding of electronic and chemical

surface phenomena While considerable progress has been made in documenting

gas-surface phenomena it has been only in the past three years that any

credible claims to understanding specific surface overlayer geometries have

1been made At the same time many basic questions involving system kinetics

and energetics have not been adequately resolved 2

It has become apparent from the failure of the research effort to

satisfy the above objectives and from seemingly conflicting data that adequate

2

characterization is basic to all surface experimentation The need for such

characterization has been strongly emphasized by disagreement between quasishy

similar research performed at different locations Small impurity concentrashy

tions small changes in crystal orientation minor temperature differences etc

often have considerable effects on experimental measurements

A corollary to the necessity of being able to characterize the

surface is the importance of being able to control the surface characterization

In order to compare data it is necessary to reproduce all experimental paramshy

eters accurately The theory to which experimental data are compared is

constrained by complexity to be based on ideal clean substrates with a

definable gas-surface interaction It is desirable to be able to choose the

adsorbate-substrate system and experimental parameters that can also be used

with theoretical models Of course compromises are inevitable

One approach in surface research has been to incorporate several

experimental techniques into one apparatus At the present time this approach

is increasingly more common A combination of surface sensitive probes offers

many advantages It provides for more checks of the data against results

published in the literature It allows for better characterization of the

experimental parameters It allows surface phenomena to be probed in more than

one way in order to eliminate ambiguities andor to reinforce conclusions It

eliminates the uncertainties that arise from data taken at different locations

using the techniques separately hence it allows better correlations between

data taken using the different techniques

In this study several aspects of the chemisorption interaction of

hydrogen with the low index (100) plane of single crystal tungsten denoted

3

W(100) have been investigated The choice of the tungsten-hydrogen system is

motivated by several factors The literature raises questions on the unusual

state behavior observed when hydrogen adsorbs on W(100) questions which our

apparatus is especially well-suited to study In addition the interaction of

hydrogen with close packed planes of single crystal metals including W(100)

is of particular interest to theoreticians since hydrogen is the simplest

molecular gas as detailed in Sections 128 and 129 below recent theories

of chemisorption have been applied to the hydrogen-tungsten system Tungsten

was chosen as the substrate metal because of its relative ease of preparation

and cleaning and because the large body of literature on the hydrogen-tungsten

system indicates wide interest in this interaction

In particular this research is concentrated in three areas Tung~

sten when cleaned and subsequently cooled to below room temperature exhibits

an anomalous centered (2x2) denoted C(2x2) low energy electron diffraction

pattern The possibility that this is caused by hydrogen diffusing from the

bulk or adsorbing from the background has been investigated Secondly the

room temperature and low temperature hydrogen adsorption binding states have

been studied using electron stimulated desorption and electron spectroscopy

Finally low energy electron diffraction has been used in an investigation of

the atomic geometry of the clean tungsten surface and the geometry of one of

the hydrogen binding states

The remaining sections of this chapter summarize literature relating

to this research Chapter 2 details the construction and performance of the

experimental apparatus A presentation of the experimental data is made in

Chapter 3 A discussion of the results is made in Chapter 4 A summaryof

4

the research and conclusions from it are given in Chapter 5

12 Review of Literature

121 Introduction

Experimental investigation of the adsorption of hydrogen on tungsten

has been carried out using field emitter tips macroscopic polycrystalline

surfaces and all the low index orientation single crystal faces including

W(lOO) From the wide range of results it is clear that the substrate exerts

a strong influence on the adsorption properties The question has been raised

whether adsorption models postulated from polycrystalline substrates can be

3extended even qualitatively to single crystal systems Likewise there are

such sharp differences in the chemisorption behavior of hydrogen onto the

different single crystal tungsten surfaces that the specific physical process

governing adsorption on each face appears to be unique to that face This

review will therefore be concerned for the most part with literature dealing

with hydrogen adsorption on W(lOO) the gas-substrate system used in this

research

The following data review is presented in subsections each concenshy

trating on a specific experimental technique or class of experiments Subsecshy

tion 127 includes some gas mixing literature which was considered relevant

and Subsection 129 gives a bibliography of some related chemisorption

theoretical papers

122 Thermal Desorption

One technique widely employed in investigation of the kinetics of gas

456adsorption has been thermal or flash desorption By monitoring the system

5

pressure changes of a species while rapidly heating the crystal inferences

can be made on the existence of binding states adsorption energies and reaction

7 8 order Heating is accomplished by a focussed light beam electron bombardshy

7 9ment or ohmic losses bull

The strongest indication that hydrogen exhibits multiple state

adsorption behavior on W(lOO) comes from flash desorption data Tamm and

8Schmidt 7 and Madey and Yates found for room temperature adsorption that two

large peaks are observed in the plot of pressure of H2 versus temperature

These peaks are centered at 4500 K and approximately 550oK Only hydrogen

molecules are observed to be desorbed from the surface Using desorption rate

456theory the lower temperature (~l) state is found to obey first order

kinetics the peak temperature being independent of initial coverage The

higher temperature (~2) state obeys second order kinetics the peak temperature

moving down from approximately 5800 K to 5500 K as the initial coverage is

increased

In addition to the two main peaks several small peaks comprising a

total of less than 10 percent of the desorbed hydrogen are observed during a

flash when the crystal is cooled to nitrogen temperature before hydrogen

exposure These states are believed to result from adsorption onto edges and

other non-(lOO) crystal orientations 8

The dependence of the desorption energy Ed on coverage is weak

~l 8 ~2 8with Ed = 252 kcallmole and Ed = 323 kcalmole As would be predicted

from this result the ~2 state is largely populated before the ~l state begins

to fill The ratio of the populations in the states at full coverage n~1n~2

8 lOis 2111 Jelend and Menzel point out that the cross section for electron

6

desorption (see Subsection 125) from the ~1 state is considerably smaller

than that of the ~2 state a result not predicted from the experimental flash

desorption binding energies

11Tibbetts using a stepped temperature flash desorption technique

has shown that hydrogen is bound to the surface of po1ycrysta11ine tungsten

W(110) and W(lll) with a distribution of binding energies ranging from

162 kca1mo1e (07 eV) to 415 kca1mo1e (lS eV) Using this technique

desorption at a constant temperature from a distribution of states can be easily

distinguished from desorption from a state with a unique binding energy While

he did not extend his work to W(100) these results suggest that hydrogen does

not bind to the surface at a few energies but rather with a range of binding

energies Tibbetts also shows that the determination of the order of the

desorption process is difficult for adsorption into a range of binding energies

In experiments using a combination of hydrogen and deuterium as room

temperature adsorbates the elemental composition of the desorbed ~1 and ~2

states shows complete isotopic mixing between the states7S independent of the

adsorption sequence or ratios However for low temperature adsorption

complete state conversion is not observed for all the additional small peaks

Where mixing is observed atomic adsorption is suggested Where mixing is not

observed molecular adsorption is inferred

Some theoretical models indicate that multiple peak flash desorption

spectra may be due to binding energy changes caused by adsorbate-adsorbate

interactions12 or order-disorder transactions during f1ash3 13 rather than

actual distinct multiple binding states under the adsorption conditions

7

123 LEED and HEED

Low energy electron diffraction or LEED refers to the coherent

scattering of a monoenergetic focused electron beam from the surface of a

crystalline solid Electrons in the energy range 0 lt E lt 300 eV interact

strongly with the ion cores and valence electrons of the solid The inelastic

mean free path is on the order of 10 X As a consequence electrons which are

observed elastically have been backscattered within the first several surface

layers in the solid making LEED a surface sensitive probe 14 15 The periodic

translational symmetry of the surface leads to the momentum conservation laws

I

= (11)~I ~II + g

= (2mEh2)t sin reg (12)~II

where ~II is the momentum parallel to the surface of the emerging electron and

~ is the parallel momentum of the incident electron The vector g is a

reciprocal lattice vector of the solid surface and reg is the polar angle of the

incident beam As a result of the conservation laws the scattered electrons

emerge in a series of beams called a spot pattern which is a manifestation

of the surface symmetry The beams are labelled by their corresponding g

vectors Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores is

extracted from the plot of elastically scattered electron intensity versus

16 17incident energy called elastic intensity profiles or I-V curves

Changes in the LEED spot pattern resulting from hydrogen adsorption

18onto W(lOO) at room temperature have been reported by Estrup and Anderson and

19by Yonehara and Schmidt As hydrogen is adsorbed at room temperature the

8

(lxl) pattern characteristic of clean tungsten changes into a weak C(2x2)

pattern at a hydrogen coverage e of less than 005 monolayer (where e = 1

15 2monolayer at a coverage of 2xlO hydrogen atomsem which is 2 hydrogen atoms

for each surface tungsten atom) The (1212) spots become sharp and intense

with increased hydrogen adsorption reaching a maxima in intensity at approxishy

19 18mately 015 monolayer or e = 025 monolayer (Coverage in both cases was

determined by flash desorption) The (1212) spots split into four new spots

which move apart continuously and upon further hydrogen adsorption eventually

19form 13-order streaks at a coverage of ~ 035 monolayer These in turn

change at higher coverage into poorly developed 14-order features with the

(012) spots missing Finally near e = 10 all extra diffraction features

are gone and the LEED pattern returns to a (lxl) symmetry This series of LEED

pattern changes is reversible with coverage

For hydrogen adsorption at 1950 K the C(2x2) pattern develops

maximizes in intensity at e ~ 18 and splits into four beams similar to room

temperature adsorption However the higher coverage LEED structures third

19 0order streaks and fourth order spots are not observed At 78 K adsorption

of hydrogen produces half-order C(2x2) spots that maximize in intensity at

e ~ 027 Additional hydrogen adsorption beyond this causes the half-order

19spot intensity to decrease but with no splitting of the spots

If clean W(lOO) is allowed to cool below room temperature a sharp

19and intense C(2x2) pattern is observed even though total coverage due to the

background of H2 and CO is less than e = 001 as determined by flash desorption

measurements The intensity of these half-order beams can be altered by

additional hydrogen adsorption or by various hydrogen and oxygen heat treatmenm

9

l9Yonehara and Schmidt have postulated that the extra spots may result from

hydrogen endothermally soluble in tungsten diffusing to the surface Possible

alternative explanations include the reconstruction of the clean tungsten

surface or impurity over layer adsorption from the background It should be

20noted that Plummer and Bell saw no effects upon cooling their field emitter

tip to 78 0 K that they could attribute to hydrogen diffusion to the surface

Elastic intensity profiles for several beams have been measured by

18 21Estrup and Anderson and by Papageorgopoulos and Chen at room temperature

Estrup and Anderson reported profiles for (00) and (1212) tEED lJeams out

to 300 eV The intensity variation for the (OO) beam was found to be indepenshy

dent of hydrogen coverage a manifestation of the relatively weak scattering

cross section of a hydrogen ion core relative to that of tungsten The

additional beams observed on adsorption would be expected to be more sensitive

13to the adsorbed overlayer Estrup found the intensity of the (1212) beams

for H W(100) and D W(100) to decrease as a function of temperature between2 2

300o

K and 6000 K at a constant incident energy but neither obeyed the Debyeshy

22Waller relation Estrup interpreted this result to imply the adsorbed

species are directly involved in the diffraction process

19Yonehara examined the tEED spot intensities as a function of

temperature down to liquid nitrogen temperatures His results are examined

in the data discussion in Chapter 4

The hydrogen-WlOO) system has also been studied using high energy

electron diffraction or HEED23 This technique utilizes the strong forward

scattering of high energy electrons in probing the surface by having the

incident beam strike the solid at grazing incidence The resulting diffraction

10

patterns are sensitive to the translational symmetry of the surface As in

LEED a diffraction pattern with C(2x2) symmetry is observed during initial

hydrogen adsorption With further hydrogen exposure the beams broaden some

splitting is observed and eventually the half-order intensity decreases

completely The width of the observed half-order beams has been interpreted to

indicate hydrogen initially adsorbs into a large number of small square or

rectangular domains each consisting of 20 to 25 atoms with sides parallel to

the [100J directions

124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and Photoemission

The electronic structure of the surface layers of solids can be

characterized by electron emission spectroscopies Such techniques require a

surface sensitive perturbation on the gas-solid system leading to an electron

yield A spectrometer is used to energy analyze the emitted or scattered

24 25electrons In electron scatter~ng a monoenergetic beam of electrons is

directed onto a crystal The inelastically scattered signal containing

quantitative information about electronic excitations at the surface is

measured as a function of energy loss Field emission is a technique in which

application of a high positive electric field to the surface lowers the potenshy

26tia1 barrier for electrons to tunnel out of the system The total energy

distribution of electrons emitted as a result of the applied field contains

bull 27 28spectroscopic data on the adsorbed spec~es Structure induced by the

adsorbate in the elastic tunneling spectrum is thought to be a measure of the

d f i h f h d b 2930e1ectron~c ens~ty 0 states n t e v~c~n~ty 0 tea sor ate The

inelastic tunneling spectrum reveals discrete excitation energies in the

11

gas-surface system In photoemission or ftotoelectron spectroscopy an incident

monochromatic light beam incident on the solid induces emission of electrons by

interband transitions with or without an inelastic scattering after the initial

31 exc i tat~on

The vibrational spectrum of hydrogen adsorbed on the tungsten (100)

32surface has been observed by Propst and Piper using inelastic low energy

20electron scattering and by Plummer and Bell using field emission Propst

and Piper found two peaks in the energy loss distribution E - E pr~mary scattered

at 135 meV and 69 meV for all coverages used up to saturation These results

are interpreted as indicating hydrogen atoms are multiply bonded to tungsten

33atoms No losses near 550 meV the vibrational energy of molecular hydrogen

were observed Plummer and Bell measured the total energy distribution of

field emitted electrons from tungsten (100) as a function of coverage of

hydrogen and deuterium at several temperatures Discrete losses at 100 meV

and 50 meV for deuterium which correspond to the 135 meV and 69 meV vibrational

losses observed by Propst and Piper were evident for deuterium in the a state2

No discrete energy losses at 550 meV or 390 meV the molecular vibrational

levels of H2 and D2 respectively were measured Hence there was no observable

molecular adsorption at room temperature

Additional structure in the field emission total energy distribution

is observed as a function of hydrogen adsorption The clean surface spectrum

has two peaks 04 eV and 15 eV down from the Fermi level which have been

d ifi d h h d f d h h f 34 A h d ~ ent e as ~g ens~ty 0 states assoc~ate w~t t e sur ace s y rogen

(or deuterium) coverage increases between 0 and 5xl014 atomscm2

ie while

the ~2 state is filling the surface states disappear and the field emitted

12

energy distribution changes from that of clean tungsten to a spectrum indicative

of resonance tunneling through a level positioned 09 eV below the Fermi energy

There is a shoulder at -11 eV and an energy dependent background With

further adsorption up to saturation this energy distribution characteristic

of the ~2 state shifts to a broad level centered at 26 eV below the Fermi

level This is interpreted to indicate that the ~1 state does not adsorb on

top of the ~2 state

35The photoemission results of Wac1awski and P1ummer and Feuerbacher

36and Fitton are in agreement with those obtained using the field emission

technique As hydrogen adsorbs on the surface emission from the 04 eV

surface state decreases The level 09 eV down from the Fermi energy as well

as a level 5 eV down remain unchanged by adsorption At full coverage a strong

peak at -25 eV is observed

125 Electron Stimulated Desorption

Desorption of energetic ions and neutrals from a gas over layer can

be induced by electron bombardment This process termed electron stimulated

desorption or ESD37383940 is described below in the discussion of the data

in Chapter 4 In brief intensity and energy measurements of the ion yield can

be interpreted in terms of the parameters characterizing the binding energy

curve of the adsorbed state and adsorption states can be classified by cross

section for desorption_ ion energy distributions primary energy threshold for

desorption etc

ESD has been employed to study adsorption kinetics for the hydrogenshy

41 ~ tungsten (100) system Madey obtained a coverage dependence yield of H ions

13

observing an ion signal during the initial stages of hydrogen adsorption that

reached a maximum at a coverage of e = 017 and then decayed to zero yield

23 2after e = 075 the maximum cross section obtained was 18x10- cm at a

primary electron energy of 100 eV Tamm and Schmidt7 reported a maximum cross

section for H+ desorption of 10- 21 cm 2bull Benninghoven Loebach and Treitz42

10and Je1end and Menze1 obtained qualitatively similar (to Madey) coverage

dependencies on tungsten ribbons which were believed to be predominantly of

(100) crystallites the main difference between these results and Madeys is

the observation of a residual signal at high hydrogen coverage

The cross section results indicate that the a state even though it2

is more tightly bound than the a state provides more hydrogen ions upon1

electron impact The cross section for ion desorption from the a1 state is

d41 10-25est1mate to be 1ess t han cm2 bull

+No energy distributions of the desorbed H ions have been reported

The dependence of the desorption cross section on the primary electron energy

10has not been investigated Je1end and Menzel found their results independent

of temperature for temperatures above room temperature No ESD results for

otemperatures less than 300 K have been reported

126 Work Function

The work function is the minimum amount of energy required to remove

43 an electron from a meta1 An adsorbate may alter the potential barrier for

electrons at the surface and hence change the work function Such is the case

for hydrogen on W(100) Hydrogen adsorbs as an electronegative ion on W(100)

thereby increasing the work function

14

44Using a retarding potential current-voltage techn~que Madey and

8Yates reported a linear relation between work function change and hydrogen

coverage over the entire coverage range for adsorption occurring at a

temperature 0 f 2= 300 0 K Coverages were determined by flash desorption

Total work function change at one monolayer was found to be 090 eV which

corresponds to a constant dipole moment per adsorbed atom of 015 Debye

15 2(assuming a total coverage of 15xlO atomsem)

Estrup and Anderson18 using the retarding potential technique and

Plummer and Bel120 using a field emission Fowler-Nordheim plot45 found a

work function change versus coverage relationship which deviated only slightly

8from being linear in near agreement with the results of Madey and Yates

46 47Becker using field emission and Armstrong using a retarding potential

technique found a work function change for the H W(100) system of approximately2

48090 eV when e = 10 Hopkins and Pender obtained an anomalously low value

49of 054 eV while Collins and Blott obtained a high value of 109 eV for the

same coverage

127 Chemical Probes

Hydrogen adsorption has also been studied using a chemical probe

ie by coadsorbing some additional different gas with the hydrogen and

observing the effect this additional species had on results obtained using

techniques discussed in previous sections

50Yates and Madey found using flash desorption that CO coadsorption

onto a hydrogen monolayer displaces both the Sl and S2 binding states with

near unity probability in doing so initially replacing these states with a

15

less tightly bound hydrogen state After high CO exposure no hydrogen remains

on the surface if the coadsorption is done at room temperature At lower

temperatures only about 10 percent of the hydrogen is desorbed Jelend and

Menzel lO 5l found that the ionic and total desorption cross sections for

hydrogen the sticking probability and bond strength of hydrogen are all

affected by preadsorption of CO or oxygen Yates and Madey3 found that N2

slowly replaces preadsorbed hydrogen at temperatures greater than 300oC Below

2730

K the displacement of hydrogen by N2 does not occur

These results all show that small impurity concentrations of CO N

and 0 if intentionally introduced do affect the resulting hydrogen chemishy

sorption properties These experiments underscore the necessity of surface

chemical characterization

128 Chemisorption Models

7 18 19 52 Several models have been proposed to account for the

experimental results from hydrogen chemisorption on W(lOO) Each of these

models embodies some combination of the following three phenomenological

assumptions 1) The tungsten surface is ideal planar and free of contamishy

nants 2) There are available two types of adsorbates namely hydrogen atoms

53and molecules 3) There are three high symmetry logical bonding sites on

a BCC (100) face usually designated by the letters A B and C These

positions are A a bridge site with 2 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen

equidistant from two adjacent surface tungsten atoms B a four fold symmetric

site with 5 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen located on a surface normal that

passes through the center of a surface primitive unit cell and C the hydrogen

16

located directly above a surfac~ atom with one nearest neighbor There are

15 152x10 A sitescm2 and 1x10 B ore sites~m2 on middotW(100)

The proposed models attempt to explain or at least be consistent

with empirical results presented in Sections 121 through 127 A summary

of salient features of the reported research includes a) a linear work function

15change with coverage b) a saturation coverage of between 15 and 20x10 H

2atomscm c) a coverage dependent adsorption layer symmetry including a we11shy

ordered surface at low coverages d) the appearance at low temperatures of a

surface translational symmetry not equivalent to room temperature clean

tungsten e) adsorption into states which produces a two state thermal desorpshy

tion spectrum with relative coverages in the two states of nQ n = 21 f) a ~1 ~2

coverage dependence for the observed electronic structure including the

absence at high coverage of structure observed at low coverages and g) no

observed vibrational levels which correspond to free H2 molecule

Following is a short review of several proposed surface models

18Estrup and Anderson account for their LEED spot pattern results

using a model wherein the hydrogen molecules dissociate upon adsorption and

migrate initially to form islands of hydrogen atoms located at type A sites in

a e(2x2) structure Dissociation is assumed since the e(2x2) pattern maximizes

15 2at a coverage of 25x10 mo1ecu1escm whereas without dissociation it would

maX1m1ze at 5 1015 mo ecu1es cm2bull e site adsorptionx 1 Although type B or type

could also produce the initial e(2x2) LEED pattern these sites are rejected

15 2because of the following 1) There are only 1x10 B or e sitescm This is

not enough sites to accommodate a full monolayer coverage if all binding is

atomic and if it is into equivalent sites as suggested by the linear work

17

function change with coverage 2) While a complete 14-order LEED pattern is

possible with type B or type C sites it is not possible to produce a 14-order

54pattern with (012) spots missing using B or C sites As the adsorption

14 2proceeds past a surface density of 5xlO hydrogen atomscm the adatoms conshy

tinuously rearrange into long period superlattices with antiphase domains

that produce successively the 12-order spot splitting the 13-order streak

(only partly ordered domains) the 14-order pattern and finally the (lxl)

full coverage structure

This model has been criticized for not accounting for the two

observed binding states and for predicting a maximum in intensity of the half

order spots at e = 025 these beams maximize at less than that coverage In

addition the authors themselves questioned the idea of well-ordered super-

lattices

In order to explain the relative intensity of the two states at

saturation seen in flash desorption n~~ = 21 Tamm and Schmidt7

propose a 1 2

model wherein the initial hydrogen adsorption is atomic and at B sites in a

C(2x2) pattern At full coverage the remaining B sites are filled with

hydrogen molecules B sites are chosen over C sites using molecular orbital

55arguments A sites are rejected as there are too many to satisfy this model

This model satisfies the second order kinetics observed for the ~2 state and

the first order kinetics observed for the ~l state In addition it explains

14 2 7 their saturation coverage of gt 3xl0 moleculescm One weakness of this

model pointed out by Tamm and Schmidt is that it is not obvious the model can

account for the observed LEED and work function results Also no molecular

vibrations have been observed

18

19yonehara and Schmidt propose a three bonding state model that is

more consistent with the low temperature LEED results In their model an

additional state labeled ~3 is always present at the surface in A or B

2sites with a density of 5xl014 atomscm bull This state orders on the surface at

low temperatures to give the C(2x2) pattern observed At room and higher

temperatures it goes into solution (or perhaps disorders) becoming invisible

to LEED In the type A site model adsorption from the background fills in the

remaining A sites sequentially with the ~2 and ~l states This model is similar

18to that proposed by Estrup and Anderson except that the ~3 state although

invisible to LEED at room and higher temperatures occupies 14 of the type A

sites This model eliminates the stoichiometric objection to Estrup and

Andersons model The model depends on the possibility of type A sites being

occupied by states with considerably different properties If the ~3 state

occupies type B sites ~2 state adsorption fills in the remaining type B sites

and then ~l hydrogen adsorbs into random or possibly type C sites This

second model does not explain satisfactorily work function or LEED spot pattern

experimental data

56Propst found using a point defect type calculation that only a

B-site model of adsorption would produce the observed vibrational energies of

5769 meV and 135 meV Park using LEED intensity arguments found that only

adsorption into sites with 4-fold symmetry on the (100) surface (type B or type

C sites) would be consistent with broadening and splitting of the half-order

beams while the integral beams remain sharp

8Madey and Yates offer a critique of several of the proposed models

19

No adsorption geometry adequately accounts for all the observed data

It is possible that surface hydrogen mobility adsorbate-adsorbate interactions

tungsten surface reconstruction and other surface phenomenon must be better

understood before this system can be adequately characterized

129 Theoretical Treatment

Several theoretical treatments of hydrogen-tungsten chemisorption

phenomenon have been reported in the literature as discussed below

7 18 19 52 The most elementary geometric models already have been

mentioned in Section 128 Grimley58 considers the hydrogen on W(lOO) system

59in an Anderson-Hamiltonian formalism Anders and Hansen obtain the relative

bonding energies of hydrogen chemisorbed at the three high symmetry adsorption

sites of W(lOO) using an extended Ruckel molecular orbital theory Their

results indicated a preference for hydrogen adsorption at type C sites

60Schrieffer offers a review on the theory of chemisorption in which he

concludes the Hartree-Fock approximation to the Anderson model for hydrogenshy

61metal adsorption is invalid Newns using the same approximation also shows

62the one-electron HF theory to be invalid Schrieffer and Gomer study the

exchange interaction between the adatom and the solid which results from the

nonorthogonality of the adatom and solid wave functions Smith Ying

h 63 64 h h d 1 h bl band Ko n lnvestlgate t e y rogen-meta c emlsorptlon pro em y

requiring complete self-consistency between the three-dimensional electrostatic

potential used and charge density obtained They calculate electron scattering

resonance levels and ground state vibrational frequency Jennings and McRae

using a multiple scattering LEED theory (but neglecting inelastic collision

65

20

damping) show that there can be half-order beams of high intensity in the H -W2

k W b 66 1 b dsystem even t hough h ydrogen 1S a wea scatterer e1n erg app 1es a on-

energy bond-order model of chemisorption to the hydrogen-W(100) system and

predicts binding energies for the molecular state and atomic state of hydrogen

on W(100) to be 262 kca1mo1e and 322 kca1mo1e respectively

1210 Literature Summary

Some conclusions can be drawn concerning the state of understanding

of the hydrogen-tungsten system and in particular the H W(100) system2

Despite considerable research experimental uncertainties still exist

in the H W(100) interaction It is still not clear if hydrogen adsorbs as a2

molecule The preponderance of evidence from electron scattering vibrational

levels field emission and H -D gas mixing flash desorption measurements2 2

indkates most hydrogen probably adsorbs atomically Multiple state behavior

is exhibited It is not known however if this observed state behavior is a

result of distinct hydrogen-tungsten interactions it is believed that to a

large extent it is driven by coverage dependent adsorbate-adsorbate interacshy

tions There is no model that can successfully incorporate the measured work

function flash desorption and ESD parameters The adsorption sites are not 15 15 2

known Total coverage at one monolayer is between 15xlO and 2x10 atomsem

which is more than the number of surface tungsten atomscm2 in the (100) face

LEED results at different temperatures indicate a possible temperature depenshy

dence for the adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO) Particularly confusing is

the anomalous LEED result obtained at low temperatures for the clean surface

Only small adsorption temperature dependencies are found in sticking probability

21

work function changes and flash desorption results

13 Review of Experimental Techniques

As indicated in Section 11 this research has been undertaken in an

attempt to characterize more fully the hydrogen-W(lOO) interaction A multi-

technique spectrometer has been used Chapter 2 gives a discussion of the

instrument This instrument is capable of making work function Auger electron

spectroscopy electron scattering ESD (including a pulsed time-of-flight mode)

and LEED measurements These techniques except AES have been well-reviewed

43 44 67 68 24 25 3 37 3839 40 as referenced prevlously (work function AES ES ESD

151617LEED ) Their use in this research can be summarized as follows work

function changes are a measure of adsorption coverage Auger electron

spectroscopy has been used to characterize the contamination of the experimental

surface ES and ESD are sensitive probes of surface and adsorption parameters

Time-of-flight has been used to determine the ion species desorbed LEED has

been used here to indicate the orientation of the surface and to attempt to

take initial data useful in calculation of overlayer geometries A more

detailed discussion of these techniques as used in this research is given in

Section 32

A discussion of the instrument constructed and used for this research

is given in Chapter 2 Sections 31 and 32 deal wIth organization and

experimental procedures Experimental data are presented starting with Section

33 A discussion of the data and conclusions from the research are given in

Chapter 4

22

CHAPTER 2

EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS

21 General Description

The apparatus used in this research is designed to probe an experishy

mental macroscopic crystal with several surface sensitive techniques It

combines an electron gun which focuses a monoenergetic beam of electrons onto

the crystal a new high resolution electrostatic spectrometer capable of energy

analysis of electrons and ions a low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system

and a crystal manipulator The crystal manipulator allows positioning of the

experimental sample and provides sample cooling heating and electrical

biasing Also included in the apparatus are a mass spectrometer and a gas

handling system System electronics allow the spectrometer to perform work

function electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated desorption

Auger electron spectroscopy and low energy electron diffraction measurements

The spectrometer can be operated over a wide range of primary electron energies

and currents and analyzer pass energies It can be biased in both electron and

ion pass modes and in a pulsed time-of-flight mode for species identification

An external spot photometer is used for LEED intensity measurements The

instrument is housed in an ultrahigh vacuum chamber A schematic diagram of

the overall system is given in Figure 21 The construction and performance

characteristics of each of the components are discussed in the following

sections of Chapter 2

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shielding

The requirement that the experimental surface has to remain clean

23

Analyzer Support

Magnetic Shielding

Ion Gauge

Analyzer

Crystal Target

Window

Openings in Magnetic Shield to Gas Jet and Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer

LEED Screen Viewing Mi rror

To Ion Pumps _

Analyzer Wiring Feedthroughs

Liquid Nitrogen Dewar for Cooling Strap Heat Sink

Insulator

Crystal Manipulator

Cooling Strop

Titanium Sublimotion Pump

Figure 21 Schematic diagram of mu1titechnique apparatus

24

while making measurements necessitates housing the apparatus in an ultrahigh

vacuum chamber A commercial Varian vacuum chamber and pumping station have

been used Ultrahigh vacuum was achieved in several steps after the chamber

-2 was rough pumped down to 10 Torr using cryosorb pumps main system pumping

was accomplished using a 400 litersec ion pump and a titanium sublimator

oAfter a bakeout of 24 hours at temperatures up to 270 C to outgas the system

-10walls the system pressure read about lxlO Torr as measured with a Bayard-

Alpert ion gauge The pressure decreased somewhat during the first weeks of

spectrometer operation after bakeout The final system background pressure

-11 was less than 8xlO Torr or below the x-ray limit of the gauge When

-10operating in the Auger mode the background rose to lxlO Torr presumably

because of the large currents involved A mass spectrometer scan indicated

that the main components of the background were H2 CO CO2 and H 0 The ion2

gauge which can affect the composition of the background was turned off while

taking data except if noted otherwise

In an electrostatic deflection analyzer such as used here magnetic

fields can introduce spurious results In order to reduce the earths magnetic

field in the region of electron or ion trajectories three concentric cylinders

of Eagle AAA ultrahigh nickel steel alloy magnetic shielding are placed around

the spectrometer The shielding is mounted on a stainless steel and ceramic

support which rests in a groove in the inside wall of the vacuum chamber This

shielding is electrically isolated so it can be floated at any desired voltage

The ambient magnetic field in the target region is less than 5 milliGauss

The region inside the shielding and below the spectrometer (the

region shown in Figure 214) is referred to in this work as the experimental

25

chamber There are apertures cut in the magnetic shielding which allow the

crystal to be put in (and out of) the experimental chamber Apertures also

allow line-of-sight access to this region of the gas dosing jet mass spectromshy

eter and allow the crystal to be viewed

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics

The electron gun provides the incident focused electron beam used

in all the surface probing techniques Figures 22 and 23 show a schematic

drawing of the electron gun and a photograph of the gun assembled and disshy

dOf d f dOd b P 0 69assembled h a mo 1 1e verS10n 0 a gun eS1gne y er1aT e gun 1S The

comporients of the gun are a thermal cathode or source of electrons three

electrodes and four deflection plates The cathode is a Philips Metalonics

Type M barium calcium aluminate impregnated tungsten emitter The cathode was

0generally operated at 875 C with the heating accomplished indirectly with a

tungsten filament behind the heater The electrons emitted are focused into

a beam by two lenses the crossover formed by the lens action of the control

grid and first anode is focused onto the target by a second lens formed by the

first anode and second anode The incident primary beam thus formed can be

deflected along two axes in the target face by means of deflection plates

located at the entrance to the drift tube

The guns electronic circuitry is shown in Figure 24 Three 6 V

lead storage batteries in series power the cathode heater through an integrated

circuit voltage regulator The gun electrodes are biased using a resistor

chain voltage divider circuit This arrangement scales the guns lenses thus

keeping the beam focused as the primary beam energy is changed by varying the

26

Heat Shield

Cathode Heater

Cathode

Control Grid

First Anode

Second Anode

Coaxial Cathode Heater Feed through

~~f-------+-+-~ Paraxial Ray Aperture

---J7j7j--shy -~f-~ Accelerating ~~pt=-=a~~ or Decelerating

Lens Region

Deflection Plates

SP-1Oeuro7

Figure 22 Schematic diagram of electron gun

I)

-J

Figure 23 Photograph of electron gun assembled and disassembled

~ ~1 ~

h

I __-t--------+--

Defl + ---t---------

i---VV----110K I10K 93K

Supply

BHK 2000

I

Dec Mode

Ace 15K Mode

10K I 15K

l8V Leod

Gun X Deflection Plates (Y Defl Plates Rotate 90 not shown)

Storage Batteries

tv 00

Acc Mode Connections

To First Anode

To Second Anode X Defl shy

X

To Gun Deflection

Plates 10K 10K 57K 15K55K

1-_________----1+I Electron Gun

sp- 1125

Figure 24 Diagram of the electron guns biasing circuitry

29

gun power supply a Kepco BHK-2000 supply The gun can be operated in two

modes In the accelerating mode (ace mode) the second anode is biased more

positive than the first anode With this biasing the gun has been operated

from 30 V to 1825 V primary energy In the decelerating mode (dec mode) the

first anode is biased more positive than the second anode This allows for

higher field gradients at the cathode surface resulting in higher currents at

lower energies In the dec mode the gun can be operated from 10 V to 200 V

A spatial profile of the primary beam was taken using a two grid

retarding field analyzer mounted on the target manipulator at the position of

the target Electrode bias settings that optimized the beam line shape were

determined over the guns energy range These results are summarized in

Figure 25 The spatial full width at half maximum of the spot intensity is

less than 025 mm at 1825 V less than 075 mm at 100 V (dec mode) and about

25 mm at 10 V The energy width of the primary beam can be estimated by

retarding the primary beam between the drift tube and target At E = 100 eVpr1

the current to the target goes from 90 maximum to 10 maximum over a retarding

voltage of ~V $ 0360 meV This is an upper estimate on the energy spread in

the primary beam A lower limit would be the thermal spread of the cathode

~ 2kT or about 200 meV

24 Energy Spectrometer

A schematic diagram of the spectrometer used in this research to

energy analyze electrons and ions is given in Figure 26 The spectrometers

operation can be summarized as follows Electrons and ions originating at

the target with some energy distribution are accelerated or decelerated to the

Dec Mode --1r+shy

Probe Aperture Diameter

+10

E~

~ ~ 10Decelerating Lens Dec Mode aJLL- c E 0- E ~ ~ -051=-- Accelerating Lens Acc Mode Q)O - a WU)

o 200 600 1000 1400

E ~Ugt o Q)()cme=)

Q)

cO ~ e+- (+-Clo OQ)Q)loc

-lolo Wllaquo

u-

Electron Beam Energy Epri (eV) w o

Epri= 10eV Electron Beam Spatial Profiles Epri =1745 eV Epri =100eVf Epd=1000 eV Ace ModeAce Mode Aee Mode

-05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 Probe Aperture Position (mm)

SP-1084

Figure 25 Spatial characteristics of primary electron beam Top panel - Full width at half maximum of beam as a function of primary energy Bottom panel - Line shape of beam at several primary energies

-10 0

31

Cylindrical Electrostatic Analyzer

Spherical Elect rostat ic Analyzer

~____- __Gylindrical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

Coaxial Repulsion Cylinder

--__-___Spherical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

~-- Electron Gun

Deflection Plates

-Gun Wiring

Concentric ~--- Deflection

Spheres

~-- LEED Screen

Scattered Electrons SP-l066

and Desorbed Ions

Figure 26 Schematic diagram of energy spectrometer

32

pass energy of the spectrometer by three spherical sector grids prior to

entering the spherical analyzer section of the instrument (An annular slot

cut in the LEED screen which is located between the grids and the spherical

analyzer allows particles to pass into the analyzer) Energy selection is

accomplished by a combination of two electrostatic deflection analyzers The

first is a high resolution spherical deflection analyzer This is backed by

a cylindrical mirror-type electrostatic analyzer referred to in this work as

the cylindrical or tandem analyzer Particles that pass through the spectromshy

eter impinge on the first dynode of a high gain electron multiplier The

output signal of this multiplier is detected using the electronics discussed

in Section 25

The spectrometer is constructed mainly of 304 stainless steel which

has been hydrogen and vacuum fired to reduce residual magnetism to less than

5 milliGauss Most interior surfaces have been rhodium plated to eliminate

surface charging problems Final design dimensions used in the spectrometer

are listed in Table 21 Refer to Figure 27 for a diagram of the variables

used in this table

The emission angle at the ta~get of the central trajectory that

passes 1nto t he spectrometer 1S 350 bull The entrance aperture (slot) accepts

particles that originate within plusmn0045 radians of this central ray making a

total solid angle accepted of 032 steradians

The spherical electrostatic deflection analyzer section is a

70spherical velocity selector of the type first investigated by Purcell The

analyzer is designed to focus an object spot of electrons or ions originating

at the front surface plane of the target onto the first energy resolution

33

TABLE 21 FINAL DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR SPECTROMETER

SPHERICAL ANALYZER

l Inner sphere radius 342 cmr l

2 Outer sphere radius r 419 cm2

3 Radius of central ray a = 381 cm

04 Emission angle of central ray e = 35

05 Angular range of accepted rays 3244

0 - 3756

6 Angle subtended between entrance and exit planes of spherical analyzer section ~ = 51660

7 Acceptance solid angle of spectrometer 032 steradians

8 Diameter of first ERA D 025 cm

9 Distance of target from center of spherical analyzer P 665 cm

10 Distance of first ERA from center of spherical analyzer Q 1328 cm

CYLINDRICAL ANALYZER

11 Distance from first ERA to entrance diaphram S = 330 cm

12 Distance between entrance and exit diaphrams T 399 cm

13 Distance from exit diaphram to second ERA U = 330 cm

14 Inner cylinder radius Rl = 0099 cm

15 Distance from second ERA to electron multiplier V ~ 254 cm

16 Radius of entrance aperture R2 099 cm

17 Radius of repulsion electrode R3 = 330 cm

18 Radius of exit aperture R4 093 cm

19 Width of exit aperture G 037 cm

20 Diameter of second ERA E 044 cm

21 Width of entrance aperture F = 053 cm

34

Plane of First ERA

~

D

Spherical Analyzer

First ERA

I

I1 I~~ f F

S

]R4 II f ~

R3

11 [1

I II

U v~ cT t t

Plane of Plane of First ERA Second ERA

Cylindrical Analyzer

Figure 27 Schematic diagram of particle trajectories in spherical analyzer section Spatial configuration of tandem cylindrical analyzer section also shown

35

aperture or image plane The spatial configuration of the analyzer is such

as to give maximum reduced dispersibn according to the relations derived by

Purcell The magnification of the source at maximum reduced dispersion is 2

Diaphrams at the entrance and exit apertures of the spherical analyzer are

designed to minimize problems caused by the fringing fields as discussed by

71Herzog

Initial tests using only the spherical analyzer indicated electrons

that scattered from the interior surfaces could be passed through the first

energy resolving aperture over a range of analyzer pass energies To eliminate

this erroneOus signal a second low resolution cylindrical mirror-type

72electrostatic analyzer was designed and constructed by P Luscher

Electrons or ions that pass through the first energy resolving

aperture at the correct energy are deflected by the repulsion electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer and pass through the second energy resolving aperture

This signal impinges on the first dynode of the electron multiplier Trajectory

tracing calculations indicated that the cylindrical analyzer would eliminate

the scattered signal if this second analyzer had a full width energy resolution

~EE = 028 where E is the energy of the particle executing the pass pass

correct central trajectory through the spectrometer This is not a stringent

design requirement

The energy resolution of the spectrometer is defined as the ratio

~EEp where ~E is the width of the line shape passed as the spectrometer is

scanned in pass energy for a monochromatic source of particles with energy Ep

For the spectrometer configuration here the energy resolution is determined

by the resolution achieved in the high resolution spherical analyzer section

36

at least down to low pass energies Line shape broadening effects in the

spherical analyzer originate from three sources 1) the finite diameter D

of the first energy resolving aperture 2) the finite radius R of the source

disk and 3) the use of a finite range of emission angles of particles from

the crystal surface which can enter and be passed by the spectrometer This

third source of line broadening results from the spherical analyzer having

imperfect second order focusing at the first energy resolving aperture The

effect on the line shape of the finite range of emission angles goes as the

square of the acceptance half width which in this analyzer is small In

the calculation of energy resolution below the third source of line broadening

will not be considered

A numerical value for the energy resolution for the spectrometer

used in this research can be calctilated To do so it is necessary to derive

an expression for 6EEp in terms of the diameter D and radius R given above

In the calculation below these two sources of line broadening will be

considered independent and the effective line shape and energy resolution

from each will be calculated separately Following an analysis by Purcell an

energy resolution can be expressed in terms of the velocity resolution S bull ~

S is defined by ~

where v is the velocity of a particle which the analyzer passes along the pass

central trajectory when and v is the velocity of a particle withset at Epass ~

slightly different energy E bullbull (For convenience E and v will be ~ pass pass

shortened to Ep and vp in the following discussion Lower case subscripts are

37

used to distinguish this derivation from the defined energy resolution above)

A resolution can be calculated as follows

(22)

Using Equation 21 this becomes

(23)

(24)

If the line shape width ~E is written as

fiE = E - E = (E - E ) + (E - Emn) (25)max max p pm~n ~

then the energy resolution can be expressed as

(26)

D and R can be related to Q and Q bull as shown belowf-I max f-Im~n

Line shape broadening due to the finite diameter D of the first

energy resolving aperture (1st ERA) can be calculated from the velocity

70dispersion given by Purcell

(27)

9 00 ~ (28)

Refer to Figure 27 for a definition of the variables in these equations

38

Assume a current j(a) emanating from the center of the target

along xl with energy distribution

j (e) = 1 (29)

All of this current crosses the plane of the 1st ERA at a position d given by

d = Y2cOS a = 900 acos a (210)

A 1st ERA of diameter D will pass all the current for which Y2 Y2 leading

to the relation for the limiting values of 13

(211)

D bull cos a a lt D cos a (212)2 bull 900 - 2 bull 900

The energy resolution due to a finite 1st ERA is then calculated from Equation

26 to be

~E (~st ERA) = 2 [053D + 053DJ = 02l2D (213) P

For D = 025 cm (010 in) this evaluates to

8E (1st ERA) = 0021 (214)E P

The line shape of the current distribution resulting from the finite 1st ERA

is a unit function for the allowable e values (Equation 214) since all the

current j(S) is passed by the 1st ERA and j(S) is a unit function in S

The above line shape and resolution have been obtained effectively

by varying the energy of the signal current (via Equation 29) rather than

39

using a monochromatic current source and varying the pass energy as initially

used in defining the spectrometer resolution That the results given in

Equation 214 are the same as would be obtained from a more complicated

calculation using a monochromatic current source can be seen by considering a

monochromatic source v == (1 + l)vp and noting that it will be deflected tol

the edge of the 1st ERA by a pass energy Ep

Line shape broadening and an energy resolution due to a finite radius

to the source disk can be determined in a manner analogous to that used above

Consider a point source of particles at the 1st ERA that travel back through

the analyzer Such reverse trajectories would cross the target plane at a

position

(215)

where for these reverse trajectories using Equation 27

Yl = 491 a (216)

p being a variable representing the radius at which these trajectories cross

the plane of the target p is analogous to d in the earlier calculation

Using reciprocity particles emanating from a position on the target at radius

p with a velocity corresponding to S will cross the plane of the 1st ERA at

the axis For a source of radius R the line width is found by using the

arguments leading up to Equation 211 to be

R bull cos e S lt R cos e (217)491 ~ 491

For a spot size 2R == 1 rom (0039 in) the energy resolution due to a finite

source disk is

40

A (source) = 2[017R + 017R] (218)E p

~ (source) 013 for 2R = 1 mm (219)E p

At low primary energies for which the beam spot size is greater than 1 mm

the above broadening and resolution due to spot size are correspondingly larger

The line shape associated with a finite source disk is linearly

proportional to~ The functional dependence of source current on ~ which

essentially determines the line shape due to the finite source is not given

by Equation 29 Rather it can be obtained by assuming uniform emission over

the area of the source knowing that ~ and the radial position at the source

p are linearly related by Equation 216 and using the area relation

(220)

(221)

If the current from the source with velocity (1 + ~)v that passes the 1st ERA p

is designated JI(~) then

(222)

49lmiddotApJ I (~l) 0 2TT cos e ~ 1 (223)

From Equation 223 the line shape of the current due to finite source is seen

to be linearly related to ~

41

The overall resolution of the instrument can be approximated by the

sum of the two resolutions calculated above which is approximately 2

Experimentally the resolution of the spectrometer is measured as the full

width at half maximum (FWHM) of the elastic peak The bottom panel of Figure

28 shows the FWHM of the elastic peak as a function of the spectrometer pass

energy At 90 eV the experimental energy resolution is

bE FWEM 2 (224)Ep = ~ = 90 = 022

which is close to the theoretical calculations

The effective resolution of the spectrometer can be greatly increased

by retarding the beam using the three grids located between the target and

spherical analyzer This can be seen by repeating the calculation of Equation

224 using data from Figure 28 at a lower energy The measured effective

energy resolution of the spectrometer varies between 22 percent and 06

percent as the elastic peak is retarded by 10 percent to 90 percent of its

initial value Over this same range the intensity decreases almost 98 percent

Hence increased resolution is obtained at the expense of signal intensity

This is shown in the top panel of Figure 28 The solid curve in the top panel

is the transmission function of the spectrometer for a primary beam of 100 eV

The transmission function shows the fractional decrease in signal passed by

the spectrometer as a function of pass energy of the spectrometer The data

points were taken by retarding the 100 eV elastic peak between the grids until

it was passed by the spectrometer The transmission function is the ratio of

the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer at E to the peakpass

42

Figure 28 Top panel - Transmission function of spectrometer This function was obtained by retarding the 100 eV elastically scattered electron signal between the spectrometer grids and then measuring the ratio of the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer to the peak signal passed at Epass = E = 100 eV Bottom panel - Full width at half maX1mum of ~K~ elastically scattered electron signal passed by the spectrometer when the 100 eV signalis retarded using the grids to an energy E

pass

43

09

08

07

c006 U ()

E()05 c e 1-04

03

02

01

Epri =100eV

~ -Transmission of Spectrometer

Peak Intensity at Eposs Peak Intensity at Epass 100 eV

--Transmission for flEE Constant

() +shy

o gt-

20

10

Full Width at Half Maximum of Elastic Peak

100 eVEpri =

o~oo 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Spectrometer Pass Energy J Epass (eV) SP-1l22

0

44

signal passed at E = E i = 100 eV The dotted line in Figure 28 pass pr

indicates the transmission function for ~ = constant for a monochromatic

point source Deviations from the straight line are due 1) to the nonidea1

elastic peak (ie finite breadth) and spectrometer geometry 2) to field

penetration at the grids as a function of the retarding potential (which was

varied to obtain the graph) and 3) to the varying response of the electron

multiplier as a function of the voltage of the electrons incident on the

multiplier For the data presented here electrons were incident on the

multiplier with an energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer The

bottom panel of Figure 28 shows the experimental full width at half maximum

of the elastic peak as a function of pass energy (in this case pass energy =

(100 eV - retarding voltage))

The energy spectrometer has been operated successfully in both the

electron and ion pass modes over a pass energy range from 2 eV to 400 eV

The spectrometer is normally operated at a fixed pass energy and ideally

fixed energy resolution Energy sweeps are made by retardation (acceleration)

of electrons or ions between the first (screen grid) and third (tEED grid)

grids prior to entering the spherical analyzer section of the spectrometer

The third grid which was added primarily to eliminate charging problems

associated with the LEED screen (see Section 26) also improved the effective

resolution this improvement is due to decreased field penetration of the

applied retarding (accelerating) potential since the retarding (accelerating)

can be done over a 50 percent longer distance In addition the third grid is

made of smaller mesh which also reduces field penetration

45

The spectrometer is supported vertically from the electrical feedshy

through turret as shown in Figure 29 This assembly attaches at the top of

the main vacuum chamber (see Figure 21) and can be removed completely wired

independent of other parts of the instrument

The electron multiplier is an EMI model 96434B detector with 17

BeCu venetial blind dynode stages

25 Spectrometer Electronics

Figure 210 shows a schematic diagram of the electronic circuitry

used for taking electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated

desorption and Auger electron spectroscopy measurements Some details for

example capacitors used to eliminate noise and some switches used to change

from one mode to another are not shown Only the most common biasing

arrangement used in this work will be discussed

In the electron pass mode (including Auger measurements) the LEED

grid LEED screen Herzog diaphrams driftspace and center electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer are grounded Energy sweeps of the spectrometer are made

by varying the retardation or acceleration voltage applied between the three

73grids A variable frequency variable height floating sawtooth generator

plus a variable dc offset bias are summed at the inverting input of a Kepco

OPS-2000 operational power supply the output of which biases the three grids

through a resistor chain When the output signal from the multiplier is being

detected using a phase sensitive detector a 3 kHz sinusoidal signal is also

fed into the summing junction VT the target bias with respect to the screen

grid is zero in the electron pass mode The spherical analyzer deflecting

46

Figure 29 Photograph showing support of spectrometer from electrical feedthrough turret

W(100) Crystal

lOOK

Vr=O-6V

Dec Mode

Ace Mode (E Il

VOFFS

VOFFS=O-6V

Ratemeter ~

INlOO

=

Drift Space

epUISion Electrode

i -----In

(Ion Mode Only)

Jshy-l

Hamner N-780A Ortec 410 Linear Amp

Pulse Count Mode

Synchronous Detection Mode

PAR PAR Type A HR-8 Preamp

47K To Recorder Y

SP-1126

Figure 210 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer electronics for operation in the electron pass and ion pass modes

48

electrodes and the repulsion electrode of the cylindrical analyzer are scaled

using a resistor chain powered by a second OPS-2000 operational amplifier power

supply The voltage scaling for these electrodes was determined from particle

trajectory calculations The voltage applied to the repulsion electrode using

this resistor chain can be varied using a potentiometer this adjustment can

in effect vary the resolution of the cylindrical analyzer The OPS-2000

supply also biases the outer electrodes of the analyzer deflection plates by

means of a separate resistor chain The inner electrodes of these deflection

plates are fixed at the potential of the analyzers Herzog diaphrams The

ripple voltage on the output of both operational power supplies is less than

20 meV at 100 eV

Electrons impinge on the first dynode of the multiplier with an

energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer plus a voltage equal to

(R (36MO + R raquoV where R is shown in Figure 210 and V is the voltagem m M m M

across the multiplier In the synchronous detection mode V was variedM

between 1100 V and 1700 V In the pulse counting mode the voltage was normally

set at 2800 V The output of the multiplier after being passed by an

isolation capacitor is either pulse counted with a ratemeter or is detected

using a PAR HR-8 phase sensitive detector The reference signal for the HR-8

is either 3 kHz when taking dN(E)dE distributions (see Section 324 and

2Appendix B) or Auger data or 6 kHz when taking d N(E)dE distributions

When the spectrometer is operated in the ion pass mode the polarity

of the biasing on the analyzer deflecting electrodes is switched In addition

the positive pole of the electron mUltiplier supply is grounded This biasing

arrangement causes the ions to impinge on the multiplier at an energy

49

E pass + VM

which was usually 3040 kV In the ion pass mode the spectromshy

eter is generally operated at E = 40 eV This requires an acceleration of pass

the ions between the screen and LEED grids since the initial ion energies are

between 0 eV and 10 eV In addition to accelerating between the grids the

ions were normally accelerated between the target and screen grid using VT

in order to facilitate interpretation of the data as discussed in Section

325

The electronic circuitry for operating the analyzer in the time-ofshy

flight mode is identical to that just described for the ~on pass mode except

a pulsed voltage is applied to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a

schematic of this arrangement Unlike continuous operation in this mode ions

can enter the analyzer only during the on pulse In the lower part of

Figure 211 the energy of an ion is shown as a function of its position in the

spectrometer with the pulse on and off

In the work function mode the target is fixed at ground potential

through a picoammeter Retardation of the incident current is accomplished by

driving the drift tube positive in voltage

26 LEED Display System

The low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system consists of a

phosphor-coated screen located at the entrance to the spherical analyzer and

othree grids The screen a 1096 stainless steel sector (of which approxishy

omatelya 98 sector is visible) was coated with a P-l phosphor The first

two grids are constructed of 50 mesh rhodium-coated stainless steel The

LEED screen and these two grids are operated as a standard two grid LEED

50

II

Vr V

Ion Trajectory

ACC

Linear Amp Preamp

To Oscilloscope Trace

VRG~+ To O~oopeP I If Trace and Time u se t Base Trigger Genera or -

(l)~ os

CIgt () o cC u (l) E t gt - C N a (l) (l) (u~CIgt (l) 0 ~ shy - c 0 c 0 0 ti (l) ac o c

()

f- (j) a (j)lt f-lt u ~----~~------~~ ~I

0 1--A I ----5----------------

ElON I

VACC

I (l) ()

5 Q

gt CIgt t c

~---J8w c o H

SP-I027

EPAS S + V L-____________________---- M

Figure 211 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer for operation in the time-of-f1ight mode

51

system with the retarding grid biased to pass only electrons elastically

scattered from the target and with the LEED screen accelerating voltage

normally set at 5000 V Slots cut through the screen allow electrons and

ions to pass into the spectrometer Initial operation of the instrument

indicated that charging of the LEED screen caused a significant perturbation

on electron trajectories below 100 eV The third grid a 100 mesh stainless

s tee 1 spherical sector is loca ted 0050 em in front of the LEED screen to

alleviate this problem

An aluminum-coated glass plate mirror located below the spectrometer

reflects the LEED screen through a 6Lch indo in the chamber wall (see

Figure 21) LEED spot intensities are measured through this window using a

Gamma Scientific Model 2000 telephotometer

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly

The crystal manipulator assembly is shown schematically in Figure

212 and a photograph is given in Figure 213 The assembly is designed to

provide thermal and electrical control of the target while allowing the

target face to be rotatable between the gas dosing port the LEED screenshy

energy spectrometer position and the quadrupole mass spectrometer This

rotation is indicated in Figure 214 The manipulator assembly is composed

of a commercial Physical Electronics specimen manipulator a long shaft which

supports the rotary electrical connections a liquid nitrogen dewaI and

aluminum foil strap to provide target cooling and a target mounting assembly

The long shaft of the manipulator assembly is constructed of

different materials as follows A1 0 for electrical isolation (Figure 2122 3

52

Figure 212 Schematic diagram of the target manipulation and thermal control system showing (1) kovar-glass-kovar dewar insulation (2) Miniconflat flanges (3) Physical Electronics Industries specimen manipulator Model 10-501M mounted on 8 inch od Conflat flange (4) six 5 kV - 150 A electrical feedthroughs (5) clamp assembly (6) A1 03 rod (7) molybdenum spring2(8) stainless steel electr1cal connectors (9) electrical connecshytion (1 shown) (10) A1203 spacers (11) Pyrex plates (12) molybshydenum (13) 001 wall stainless tube (14) Pyrex tubes (15) tantalum rods (16) copper rod (17) vacuum chamber wall (18) liquid riitrogen dewar (19) 001 wall stainless tube (20) copper radiation shield (21) strap-to-dewar clamp (22) crystal support (23) 12 pole heater (24) strap-to-copper rod clamp (25) aluminum foil strap (26) pancake heater supp~rt~ (27) thermocouple (28) crystal (29) pancake heater (30) tanta~ lum section (31) molybdenum section (32) molybdenum-to-copper rod clamp assembly

53

Jl ~

Figure 213 Photograph of crystal manipulator The retarding field analyzer used to characterize the primary electron beam is shown mounted on the manipulator in place of the tungsten crystal mounting assembly

55

Magnetic Shielding

Tungsten Crystal

Energy Spectrometer and LEED Gas Dosing Optics Aperture

To Gas Bottle

Line -of-Sight Quadrupole Mass Crystal Holder Spectrometer and Manipulator

SP-1072

Figure 214 Schematic of the experimental chamber of the apparatus (see Section 22 for a discussion of the experimental chamber) Rotation of the crystal is indicated by the dotted line

56

no 6) molybdenum rod (no 12) 304 stainless steel tubing for thermal

isolation (no 13) and copper rod (no 16) Six electrical leads separated

by glass discs (no 11) wind around the shaft ~his configuration allows for

rotary motion of the shaft while still providing electrical control at the

targetJ The electrical leads then enter glass tubing parallel to the shaft

and end up at the target mounting assembly For clarity only one of these

leads is shown in Figure 212

An aluminum foil strap (no 25) made of 150 pieces of 254 cm x ~254

em x 00025 cm foil connects the liquid nitorgen reservoir to the copper rod

end of the manipulator shaft This provides conduction cooling to the target

A copper radiation shield (no 20) is constructed around the strap This

cooling system is sufficient to cool the target from flash temperatures to

approximately -1500

C in 5 minutes

The tungsten single crystal target is supported 095 cm above a

tantalum and molybdenum right angle mount (nos 30 31) on one 0038 cm

diameter tungsten wire The wire was spot-welded to the back face of the

tungsten disc prior to its final electropolishing The target is heated by

electron bombardment of its back face from a tungsten pancake heater (no 29)

The target can also be heated by conduction through its support wire using a

25 watt 12 pole 25L6 RCA heater which is mounted inside the tantalum part

of the right angle mount as shown dotted in Figure 212 (no 23) Using this

heater the target temperature can be varied between -20oC and -150

0 C Tungsten

and tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple leads 0076 cm in diameter are spot-

welded to the side of the target The thermocouple wires are each supported

by being fed along the axis of a tungsten wire helix (not shown in Figure

57

212) The helices are made of 025 cm diameter wire and are spot-welded to

supports near the center of the molybdenum part of the right angle mount

Calibration of the thermocouple was made out of the vacuum chamber using a

copper-constantan reference thermocouple The calibration procedure is

described in Appendix A and the calibration is given in Figure A1

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures

The experimental sample is a single crystal tungsten disc cut from

a (100) oriented tungsten rod using a diamond impregnated stainless wire in a

string saw The tungsten rod supplied by Metals Research Ltd was taken

from the purest 75 cm of a triply zone refined 25 cm length

Both the front and back surfaces of the disc were polished using in

succession 15 micron 3 micron and 1 micron alumina After being mechanishy

cally polished the crystal was e1ectropo1ished using a 1 NaOH solution The

final dimensions of the target disc are 0033 cm (013 in) thick and approxishy

mate1y 080 cm in diameter

After the final e1ectropo1ish the orientation of both the front and

back surfaces was checked using an x-ray diffractometer and was determined to

be within 0100 of the (100) face A back reflection Laue picture of the final

surface showed sharp well-defined beams indicating a high degree of crystalshy

line order

The target was o 74cleaned initially by heating to at least 2200 K in

a -61x10 Torr oxygen atmosphere for 9 hr to remove carbon The choice of

temperature and time were somewhat arbitrary as there is considerable debate

in the literature as to the proper method for cleaning tungsten for surface

58

research 74 A standard method7 1823 has been to heat the target to some

temperature above 11000 K (commonly above 20000 K) in an oxygen environment for

times varying up to 200 hr or more This process is generally followed by a

high temperature degassing in ultrahigh vacuum However there is evidence

othat if the temperature is held above 2000 K bulk carbon will not diffuse to

75 74the surface The possibility of thermal etching must also be considered

For the tungsten used in this research the amount of contamination

on the surface was determined using Auger spectroscopy Figure 215 is an

Auger spectrum taken from a dirty surface showing the Auger peaks resolved in

our system Carbon oxygen and tungsten peaks are seen clearly Also shown

76in Figure 215 are theoretical Auger transition energies for C 0 and W

with the relative theoretical strengths of the transitions indicated by the

normalized height of the lines In Figure 216 are shown Auger spectra taken

after different crystal treatments or under different experimental conditions

Curve a shows the spectrum taken after saturating the surface with CO Note

the carbon and oxygen peaks There is no measurable carbon peak after a

flash as seen in curve b Structure does remain between 475 eV and 525 eV

It is doubtful that this structure is a result of oxygen contamination since

there are normally three oxygen Auger peaks with the 490 eV oxygen peak

stronger than the 475 eV oxygen peak in this spectrum no 490 eV peak is

observed In order to reduce any oxygen contamination the target was heat

0 treated to 2200 K in a hydrogen atmosphere of 5x10- 7 Torr for 4 minutes 74

The structure above 475 eV is seen to remain unchanged as seen in curve c

This is a further indication that this structure is not oxygen Curve d shows

that sitting in a 400 eV 4 ~ primary beam close to typical operating

59

Carbon Oxygen

o 100

dN(E) dE

200 300 400 500 600 Electron Energy (eV) SP-U44

Figure 215 Auger electron spectrums obtained at different instrument sensitivities from dirty tungsten crystal Also shown in upper part of figure are theoretical Auger transitions for tungsten carbon and oxygen calculated by Coghlan and C1ausing76 Heights of the lines represent relative theoshyretical strengths of the transitions

60

(a) CO Monolayer

~5Ab) Heate~toCleon x25

d ~5dN(E) dE (e) Heat Treated

x25 in H2

_~5 ~ (d) 400V4fLA

x25 Primary Beam for

25~

d x5

(e) 1700V 211-A Primary Beam for 10 Min

200 300 400 500 Electron Energy (eV) SP-1l45

Figure 216 Comparison of Auger electron spectrums taken over the energy range 200 eV to 550 eV under different experimental condition

61

conditions for 25 minutes causes only a slight change in the slope of the

curve at the energy at which the carbon peak occurs (Note that curve d was

taken with a primary beam of 1700 eV after the crystal had been sitting in

the lower energy beam for 25 minutes) The absence of the carbon peak in curve

d means that the crystal surface is not contaminated from the gun while taking

measurements After bombarding the target for 10 minutes with a primary beam

of 1700 eV and 21 ~ typical Auger spectroscopy beam conditions a carbon

peak is observed as shown in curve e Using the peak to peak height of the

272 ~V carbon peak obtained near CO saturation as an indication of carbon

monolayer coverage the electron gun in the Auger mode is seen to deposit

approximately 013 monolayer of carbon in 10 minutes

From the above results it is concluded that the tungsten surface

could be flashed clean and that no carbon or oxygen contamination is deposited

during most experimental measurements Some carbon is deposited when operating

in the Auger mode Two unexpected small peaks are observed between 475 eV

and 525 eV Identification of the source of this weak structure could not be

made with certainty although two possible causes are worth noting The

unexpected structure could be tungsten Auger transitions Theoretically

several relatively strong tungsten peaks have been predicted at 477 eV and

486 eV and also between 510 eV and 520 eV However no observations of

tungsten transitions in this energy range have been reported in the experimenshy

tal literature A second possible source of this structure mighL be chromium

There is considerable chromium in the spectrometers stainless steel parts and

chromium Auger peaks occur at 489 eV and 529 eV However if it is assumed

that Auger spectroscopy is sensitive to one percent of a monolayer it would

62

13 2require surface coverages of 10 chromium atomscm or more to yield these

peaks It is extremely unlikely that either 1) a concentration of chromium

this large could diffuse to the tungsten surface from the stainless parts or

2) enough chromium could be sputtered (at the ambient pressure) into the backshy

ground from the stainless parts and subsequently adsorb onto the surface A

spark vaporization mass spectroscopy analysis of a tungsten sample cut from

the same boule as the tungsten used in this research revealed no chromium

thus eliminating the possibility of a bulk chromium concentration in the

crystal Hence although the weak structure corresponds to some degree to

chromium Auger lines it is believed that the crystal is not contaminated with

this element In an Auger spectrum taken between 500 eV and 900 eV (not shown)

some additional very weak structure was seen but none of it could be

attributed to any specific element

o 77In this research the crystal was always flashed to gt 2200 K for 30

seconds prior to experimentation Any reference to a clean tungsten surface

means that this procedure has been followed

The crystal surface exhibited what appeared to be furrows which

increased in density during the course of the research Because the coolest

part of the crystal during a flash that region next to the tungsten wire

support remained visibly polished and flat it is believed that the uneven

appearance was temperature related

29 Gas Handling System

The gas handling system used to obtain adsorption overlayers is

shown in Figure 217 Research grade hydrogen (impurity level less than 2

To Quadrupole Moss Spectrometer

Alternate Gas Source Control Valve

Thermocouple Gouge

Plenum

~-----Viewing Port

Jet Position Adjustment

Ion Gouge

Cryosorb Pump

0 t)

S-1l28

Figure 217 Schematic drawing of gas handling system

64

ppm) is admitted from a glass flash into a pyrex manifold and stainless steel

reservoir Reservoir pressure was kept near 50 microns as read using a

thermocouple gauge From the reservoir hydrogen is admitted into the vacuum

system through a 126 cm diameter tube by opening valve A Figure 217 or is

admitted as a gas jet by opening valve B The jet is formed as hydrogen

effuses through a small orifice at the end of a 063 cm dia tube78J~9 Leaking

hydrogen through the 126 em diameter tube increases the background and is used

when hydrogen is to be adsorbed from the background The jet can be used

with the target rotated in front of the gas dosing port for rapid over layer

adsorption with a low hydrogen background pressure The gas jet is designed

so that only that fraction of the effusing gas which will strike the target is

allowed to pass through an aperture in a skimmer The rest of the gas jet is

reflected back from the skimmer and out of the experimental chamber When the

target is rotated up to face the spectrometer the gas jet if left on passes

out of the experimental chamber through holes in the opposite side of the

magnetic shielding

The gas manifold and reservoir can be pumped down to less than 1

micron using a liquid nitrogen cryosorb pump

210 Mass Spectrometer

A quadrupole mass spectrometer Varian Residual Gas Analyzer Model

974-0003 is mounted on a vacuum chamber port opposite the gas jet port In

this research it was used for vacuum chamber leak testing and determination of

the components of the background pressure

65

CHAPrER 3

EXPERIMENTAL PFGCEDURE AND RESULTS

31 Introduction

The experimental data taken on the hydrogen-W(lOO) system are

presented in this chapter The apparatus used in obtaining the data has been

discussed previously in Chapter 2 A further explanation of experimental

procedures used in measuring parameters follows in Section 32 The experishy

mental results are presented in the remaining sections of this chapter A

general discussion of the data is given in Chapter 4 and a summary of the

research is given in Chapter 5

32 Experimental Procedure

321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements

Contact potential measurements in this case the difference between

the work functions of the target and of the cathode in the electron gun are

43 44measured using a retarding potential techn1que The primary or incident

electron beam current is retarded between the electron gun drift tube and the

target The measured current to the target goes to zero at a retarding voltage

VR

given by

V = (rn + V - rn ) + E (31)R Tcath sc TW pr1

where Cfgtcath is the cathode work function CfgtW is the W(lOO) work function Vsc

is the potential due to space charge immediately in front of the cathode and

E is the applied potential between the cathode and the drift tube Changespr1

66

in the work function of the target ~ are calculated by measuring changes

in VR

LlVR

From Equation 3la change in V is found to equalR

(32)

with the assumptions of constant rn h V and E The assumptions usedTcat sc pr1

are reasonable since the cathode in thermal equilibrium and since it

is exposed to very small changes in the ambient during the measurements The

applied potential E i can be maintained constant pr

A typical retarding potential curve is given in Figure 31 The

electron current to the target the ordinate in this figure is given by

(33)

where I i is the current incident on the target from the electron gun and pr

I (E N) the secondary current represents the electron current leavingsec pri

the target surface This secondary current is a function of both primary

47electron energy and hydrogen coverage Because of the dependence on coverage

the intensity and line shape of the retarding potential curves change somewhat

upon adsorption

In determining LlVR

or equivalently the target work function change

a retarding potential curve taken from the clean tungsten surface and a curve

taken after hydrogen adsorption are normalized at a position on the curve where

the target current begins to falloff sharply (position A in Figure 31) The

work function change is then measured as the voltage difference between the

two curves at half the normalized height

Changes in the work function of 001 eV can be resolved The

10

(J)

c I

I

AE lt( l-~ c Q)

-

05 U ~ I I ~ Q) 0) shy0 I-

omiddot ~ middot 10 20 30

Cathode Potential-Target Potential (volts)

SP-1142 Figure 31 Retarding potential curve showing the current to the target as

a function of the difference in applied potential between the electron gun cathode and the target The curve is shifted in energy with changes in hydrogen coverage due to changes in the target work function 6~ 6~ is measured as the difference between two retarding curves at the height A2

68

measurement was sensitive to target rotation position because of the retarding

field in the target region However with the target positioning stop used

the retarding potential curve could be repeated with an accuracy better than

002 eV after rotating the target Since the work function change is the

difference between two such curves the error in the measurement is ~004 eV

Changes in hydrogen coverage are monitored by changes in the work

function of the tungst~n tlurface No experimental attempts have been made

to calibrate the measureci ork fUllction change to an absolute change in the

coverage of atomssurface area Such a calibration requires an accurate measure

of system pumping speed or dosing flux However as discussed in Section 34

such a calibration can be made using results from the literature

322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current Measurements

The total electron beam current incident on the target Ipri is

measured by biasing the target at a potential of +45 volts with respect to the

surrounding experimental chamber Tests indicated that the current measured

in this manner is within 3 percent of the total current leaving the electron

gun which is also I The current leaving the gun is measured by summingprJ

electron currents to the target grids LEED screen magnetic shielding

analyzer Herzog diaphrams and front shield plate This current sum measureshy

ment of I was more difficult to make experimentally than biasing the targetprJ

at +45 volts

The primary electron energy E refers to the energy of theprJ

incident electrons referenced to the vacuum level Themiddotpritnarymiddot energy is

measured between the cathode and drift tube of the electron gun A contact

potential correction between the guns cathode and the target of between

69

-17 eV and -22 eV has been applied to the measured primary energy given in

the data This correction is found by using the measured cut off potential VR

and Equation 31 The spread in the correction is a result of th~ change in

space charge and hence change in V which occurs when the potential gradientsc

at the cathode is altered by changing the voltage on the control grid The

control grid voltage determines the potential fields in the region of the

cathode surface and hence affects the emitted current and space charge

323 Target Temperature Measurement

Prior to taking any data the target was cleaned by rapid electron

bombardment heating (flashing) at gt 22000 K for 30 seconds Figure 32 shows

the temperature of the target versus time from end of flash with and without

liquid nitrogen in the dewar Residual heat in the crystal supports due

to previous flashes does affect the temperature versus time curves somewhat

The higher temperature data were normally taken starting 3 to 4 minutes after

flashing at a target temperature of 600 C + lSoC Data taken under these

conditions are sometimes referred to as room terr~erature or higher temperature

data Low temperature data were taken starting 4 to S minutes after flaShing

when the target temperature was less than -l45 0 C

324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements

The electron scattering data consists of the electron signal emanating

from the target in the acceptance solid angle of the spectrometer following

impingement of the primary electron beam on the target An energy distribution

of these electrons is taken by fixing the pass energy of the spectrometer at

E and sweeping a retarding or accelerating voltage between the screen gridpass

and LEED grid as described previously in Section 25 The output current of

70 300~----~----~----~--------------------

200

-u 1000

-~ J

e ltlgt 0 E ~ -ltlgt ~ 0 ~

Liquid Nitrogen in Dewar

-100

-2000~----~----~----~----~----~----~61 2 345

Time from Flash (min) SP-ll40

Figure 32 Temperature of the tungsten crystal versus time elapsed since a crystal flash The upper curve represents the temperature versus time relation when there is no crystal cooling The lower curve shows this relation when there is liquid nitrogen in the cooling dewar

71

the electron multiplier N(E) is pulse counted or as discussed below Cld in

Appendix B synchronously detected

N(E) is proportional to the electron current originating at the

target with energy between E and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance

solid angle of the analyzer This distribution consists of rapidly varying

true secondary and characteristic loss structure interpretable in terms of

transitions and collective oscillations in the target plus a smoothly varying

background In order to separate the structure from the background the energy

distribution is electronically differentiated using a technique proposed by

67Harrls As shown in Appendix B a signal proportional to the first or to

the second derivative of N(E) is obtained by synchronously detecting the

appropriate harmonic of the output of the electron multiplier The relation

between the electron signal N(E) and the synchronously detected signal can

be seen from Equations B4 through B9 In these equations it is assumed a

peaked structure G(E) being inv~stigatedcan be represented by a Gaussian

centered at E with standard deviation o The detected first harmonic of o

N(E) has structure which has a peak-to-peak height proportional to G(E plusmn a)o

The detected second harmonic of N(E) has structure at E proportional to o

G(E ) a2 In addition there is t contribution to the detected signal from o

the background Since the background which can be represented by a polynomial

in energy is slowly varying the higher order terms which remairr in the difshy

feren tiated signals are small

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as

is commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in taking electron

scattering characteristic energy loss measurements

72

325 Ion Measurements

g+ ions desorbed from the crystal following electron impact could

be detected by the spectrometer when operated in the ion pass mode It was

found convenient to operate the instrument at a pass energy of 40 eV in this

mode operation at a lower pass energy while increasing the resolution

decreased the already weak signal intensity Since the ions have between 0 eV

and 10 eV energy when desorbed acceleration between the target and spectromshy

eter was necessary An accelerating voltage V (the output of an OPS-2000 acc

power supply) was applied between the screen grid and the entrance to the

spectrometer In addition a second accelerating voltage V was appliedT

between the target and the screen grid This latter voltage was needed in

order to energetically separate the ion signal which originated at the target

from a background signal produced by 1) ions electron desorbed from the screen

grid andor other surfaces in the experimental chamber and 2) ionization of

the background The ions that passed into the spectrometer were accelerated

into the first dynode of the electron multiplier The output pulses of the

multiplier were amplified and then counted with a ratemeter

Prior to taking ion data the target was flashed and allowed to

cool to the experimental temperature It was then exposed to hydrogen with

the hydrogen coverage being monitored using work function measurements Ion

energy distributions were taken by fixing E and V and sweeping the pass T

accelerating voltage V Desorption curve measurements which are a measureshyacc

ment of the decrease of the ion signal in the electron beam were taken by

fixing V V and E and monitoring the ion signal as a function of acc T pass

time

73

The kinetic energy of the detected ions is equal to the spectrometer

pass energy E minus the acceleration of the ions between the target and pass

spectrometer V + VT

plus a contact potential correction term due to the acc

difference in work functions of the clean target and surfaces of the spectromshy

eter The pass and acceleration energies are chosen for each experiment The

contact potential difference between the tungsten target and the rhodium

coated stainless steel surfaces of the spectrometer is less than 015 eV

This was determined using a retarding potential measurement between the

target and screen grid Dosing the target with hydrogen did not change the

work function of the grid Hence it is assumed that 015 eV can be used for

the correction at all target hydrogen coverages Since this correction is

on the order of the error in the measurement it has not been made in the

data

The analyzer is operated in a time-of-f1ight mode by applying a

pulsed voltage to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a schematic of this

arrangement Incident ions can enter the analyzer only during the pulse By

measuring the path length d = ab (see Figure 211) from the retarding grid

to the electron multiplier knowing the pass energy E of the spectromshypass

eter and experimentally measuring the time for the entering species to

traverse the distance d the mass of singly-charged ions passing through the

analyzer can be calculated using the following formulation of the distance

equals velocity times time equation

m _ dxrt J 2 (34)La J2E(X~

74

The flight time is measured by making a trace on an oscilloscope of both the

pulse applied to the retarding grid that allows ions to pass into the specshy

trometer and also the output pulses of the linear amplifier The flight time

t is the time difference between these two signals minus the transmission

time of the pulse from the first dynode of the electron multiplier to the

oscilloscope This transmission time is estimated to be several hundred

nanoseconds

The data taken in this research is presented in the remaining

sections of this chapter

33 Ion Species Identification

The ion species desorbed from the tungsten crystal by electron imshy

pact are identified using a time-of-flight technique as described above For

these measurements the spectrometer was set to pass 40 eV ions A total

acceleration voltage V + V of 370 eV was applied between the crystalT acc

and the entrance to the spectrometer Hence the energy of the ions origishy

nating at the crystal surface and passed by the spectrometer was 3 eV (3 eV

corresponds to the maximum in intensity of the ion energy dist~ibution given

in Section 35) Figure 33 shows an oscilloscope trace obtained when opershy

ating in the time-of-flight mode The trace was taken by applying a 22 ~sec

4pulse to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl0 pulsessec) This is the

large pulse at the left in the figure Several output pulses from the linear

amplifier can be seen approximately 4~sec after the retarding grid pulse

These are pulses that have been produced by the electron multiplier following

ion impingement onto the first dynode Taking into consideration the transshy

mission time the experimental flight time is 37~sec Using Equation 34

75

ill22fLsec Window Amplifier Output Pulses

o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Time (fLsec)

Time of Flight (H+) =J2~m ES 40 eV d=029 m

~ 33 fLsec

Figure 33 Oscilloscope trace showing the pulses observed when operating the spectrometer in the time-of-flight mode The 22 ~sec trace at the left is the analyzer on pulse applied to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl04 pulsessec) During this pulse ions pass into the spectrometer Several output pulses from the linear amplifier resulting from ions striking the electron multiplier can be seen delayed by their flight time in the spectrometer and the pulse transmission time from the multiplier to the oscilloscope The output pulses have been enhanced for reproduction purposes

76

with the analyzer pass energy of 40 eV a path length of 029 m and a time of

37 ~sec the mass of the desorbed ions is calculated to be 14 amu The unshy

certainty in this calculation is estimated to be~05 amu Sources of error

include the estimate of transmission time and the uncertainty in the time difshy

ference read from the oscilloscope trace In adqition over part of the path

length (the region between the retarding and LEED grids and in the cylindrical

analyzer) the ions have less than 40 eV energy Hence from this calculation

alone it is not possible to identify the ions as H+ However in experiments

in which the length of the retarding grid pulse was shortened to~ 1 ~ sec

flight times that differed by gt1 ~sec could be distinguished on the oscilloshy

scope The calculated flight time for ions of mass one is 3 3 ~ sec and for

ions of mass two is 46 ~sec or 13 ~sec longer Thus H+ could be resolved

from Hiions The ions detected in the time-of-flight experiment of Figure 33

+have been identified as H For certain spectrometer biasing conditions

+pulses appear on the oscilloscope 1 5 ~ sec later than the H pulses The ions

causing these pulses have been identified as having mass two

When oxygen is adsorbed on the surface the signal pulses on the osshy

cilloscope occur approximately 135 ~sec after the retarding grid pulse This

is in good agreement with the expected flight time for 0+ ions

+In addition to the H ions observed after adsorbing hydrogen from the

jet H+ ions were unexpectedly desorbed by electron impact from the undosed

tungsten surface upon cooling the crystal to below OoC Possible sources for

the hydrogen desorbed under these conditions are discussed in Chapter 4

If E is set at 40 eV set at 0 eV and V varied above pass VT acc

40 eV no ions originating at the crystal surface can be passed by the spectromshy

77

eter However with these biasing conditions both H+ and H + ions are obshy2

served This ion signal has to originate at the walls of the experimental

+ +chamber from a ESD process andor from the ambient Both the H and H2 sigshy

nals increased when H2 was admitted into the background from the gas handling

system an indication that at least part of the signal origtnates from ionizashy

tion in the background It is not easy to determine the intensity of the

+ +H or H2 desorbed from the chamber walls However it is possible to show that

ionization of ambient H2 could be a serious noise problem The cross section

+ -17 2for electron impact ionization of H2 to H2 is 48xlO cm and of H2

22xlO-17 cm2 for 400 eV electrons 80 An electron current of lxlO-6 A at 400

eV would produce about llxlO3 H2+ ions per cm3-Torr-sec and 5xl012 H + ions

3 per cm -Torr-sec Thus it is reasonable to assume that at the background presshy

sures here a sizable ion Signal is produced although most of it undoubtedly

is not detected In the ESD eXperiments performed here it was desired to

detect only ions produced at the surface of the crystal It has been possible

to bias the spectrometer such that this is the case Almost none of the extra

signal has the correct energy to pass through the spectrometer when V isT

held several volts positive and when V is kept less than E - V bull acc pass T

34 Work Function Results

Work function changes resulting from hydrogen adsorption have been

monitored as a measure of hydrogen coverage Figure 34 shows the tungsten

surface work function change as a function of exposure to hydrogen The crysshy

tal was at 600 C for this experiment To obtain this data the crystal was roshy

tated into the gas jet dosed for a measured time and then rotated back to a

position in front of the spectrometer where a retarding potential curve was

78

Figure 34 Change in work function 6~ of a room temperature tungsten (100) surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption 6~ is plotted versus exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen For comparison the results reported by Madey820 are also shown Exposures for the data taken here have been determined by normalizing the measured adsorption time to Madeys absolute exposure at a work function change ~ of 041 eV

------o 0 Withrow

10

08

gt06 OJ--amplt]04

02

0~013

Madey and Yates

Max bcp=~~

Data Normalized at bcp =041

0

10M 101610~ Exposure (Moleculescm2) SP-1121

80

S o Max ltltgt=09S-~ 6 A Max ltltgt =092 --eshy

lt34 o Adsorption at 60degC A Adsorption at -150degC

2

20 40 60 SO 100 120 140 160 ISO 200 220 Exposure (arbitrary units)

SP-1214

Figure 35 Comparison of work function changes at 600 C and -lSOoC resulting from hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten (100)

OlO~i--~----~--~----~--~----~--~--~~--~~

- W(lOO)gt (J) 008

- shy

-u 006 o o

00 ~ 004 --Sshy

I 002-I shy--S- 0

-200 -100 o 100 200 Temperature (OC) SP-U56

Figure 36 Change in the work function of the undosed tungsten (100) surface versus crystal temperature for the temperature range -150oC to 220oC The ordinate in the graph represents the work function at temperature T measured with respect to the work function at 220degC The data was obtained in three_separate experimental runs indicated by different symbols as discussed in the text

82

taken This procedure was followed repeatedly without closing the jet in order

to assure a constant hydrogen flux (molecm2-sec) from the jet onto the

-8crystal face An incident primary electron current oflt2xlO A at a primary

energy of 100 eV was used The saturation coverage work function change

8tCP ) is 098 + 004 eV For comparison results obtained by Madey and Yates

max

for the work function change resulting from adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO)

are given in Figure 34 Absolute exposures for the data taken here have been

obtained by normalizing the dose time to Madey and Yates exposure at a work

function change of 041 eV Using this normalization good agreement beshy

tween their results and the data obtained here is found

The work function change of the tungsten surface as a function of hyshy

drogen exposure was also measured when the crystal was at -150degC The data are

given in Figure 35 The procedure used in obtaining the 600 c data was fallowed

in taking these data The maximum work function change at this lowtemperature

is 092 + 004 eV

The dependence of the work function on crystal temperature is shown

in Figure 36 The work function is seen to decrease 005 eV as the temperashy

ture is raised from -lSOoC to 220degC The data in this figure were obtained in a

series of retarding potential curve measurements taken at different crystal

temperatures The temperature was varied by radiation heating the ~rystal on

its back face using the pancake heater It was found impossible to take decent

retarding potential curves when the crystal was heated more than about ISOoC

above its initial temperature As the current through the pancake heater was

increased electron emission from this heater also increased This emission

current interfered with the retarding potential measurement when it became a

83

fraction of the incident current The three different symbols in Figure 36

represent data taken when the initial temperature prior to heating was -150oC

work function change has been reported Assuming this result and using the

-1350 C and 50oC The change in work function with temperature was reversible

In this research no attempts have been made to measure absolute covshy

erages Coverages are defined in terms of ~ the measured work function

change As discussed in Section 126 a linear relation between coverage and

8

room temperature data taken here cover~ge and work function can be described

by the expression

e = 102 ~ (35)

where ~ is measured in eVe e represents coverage in fraction of a mon6laye~

15 2 8 A monolayer is assumed to be 2xlO H atomscm Estimates of coverage in this

work will be made by measuring work function changes and using Equation 35

However it should be noted that the data will be presented in terms of the

measured quantity~ and therefore are not dependent on any assumptions

made relating coverage and work function

35 H+ Ion DesoEPtion Measurements

The electron stimulated desorption of H+ ions from the W(lOO) surface

has been studi~d under different experimental conditions Detection of the

ion signal has been discussed in Section 325 The results follow below

351 H+ Ion Energy Distribution

Ions desorbed from a surface by electron impact have a characteristic

distribution in energy This distribution is dependent on the adsorption states

from which the ions originate In the simple models used to describe this

phenomena changes in the observed energy distribution except some intensity

84

changes result from changes in the adsorption states Hence this measurement

can be used to characterize the states from which ions are desorbed A theore~

ieal discussion of the ion energy distribution is given in Appendix C

Figure 37 shows the energy distribution of H+ ions electron desorbed

-6from W(IOO) using a primary beam current of IxlO A at an energy of 400 eV

This current was sufficiently low such that the energy distribution was obtained

without desorbing the hydrogen coverage to any extent The choice of 400 eV for

the primary energy was to some extent arbitrary although it was found that

below 400 eV the ion signal was weaker and the measurements required more time

to take To obtain the data the crystal was flashed and then allowed to cool

several minutes to 60oC It was then dosed with hydrogen from the jet until a

work function change of 018 eV corresponding to a substantial coverage in the

~2 state was measured The distribution was obtained by scanning V while acc

holding V at 4 volts The distribution has an intensity maximum at 3 + 05 eVT

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV No correction to the energy scale

has been made for the target-spectrometer contact potential difference since

this amounts to only 015 eV which is smaller than the accuracy in the meashy

s~remertt A small part of the detected ion signal which did not originate at

the crystal surface has been subtracted out The amount of this contribution

was determined by monitoring the ion signal from the flashed undosed surface

This extra signal amounted to no more than 10 percent of the total signal and

was entirely on the low side of the energy distribution

+For comparison the energy distributions of H ions produced by elecshy

tron impact of gas phase hydrogen81 and hydrogen-covered polycrystalline tungshy

82sten are included in Figure 37 All three curves have been normalized to

the same peak intensity The three curves have characteristically different

85

Figure 37 Energy distribution of H+ ions from a tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen Hydrogen coverage for this measurement corresponds to a work function change of 018 eV (approximately 019 monolaYS2) F~r comparison the energy distribution reported by Nishijima of H ions des orbed from hydrogen covered polyshycrystalline tungsten is given ASIo shown is an ion energy distribution obtained by Hagstrum from gas phase hydrogen The three distributions have been normalized at their peak intensities

-Ugt-

Q)

gtshyc o

H

+ r

86

H+ Ion Energy Distribution

- Withrow H2 W(lOO) -- Nishijima H2 I W (polycrystol) _- HagstrumH2 gas

1 J

ii ~ I I iiI ~ I

iii middot VI 1

I I bull

o 2 468

H+ Ion Energy (eV)

87

distributions in energy

Energy distributiol1s of H+ ions taken at different hydrogen coverages

are shown in Figure 38 Experimental conditions for these measurements were

the same as used to obtain the previous figure There is no change in peak

position or line shape as a function of coverage except for heavy dosings

where the distribution appears to be slightly broader The maximum intensity

is a function of coverage as discussed below

Figure 39 shows a series of ion energy distributions taken after

adsorption from the jet with the target temperature approximately -150o

C For

these data the target was flashed and allowed to cool 5 minutes before

adsorption All other experimental conditions were identical to the correshy

sponding 600

C data The distributions peak at 3 eV (except at high coverage

where the peak appears to be slightly higher) and have full widths at half

maxima of 26 eV identical to the results found for 600 C adsorption The

high energy tail of these low temperature distributions appears to be somewhat

wider than the corresponding higher temperature data however

After flashing the target to 22000 K and allowing it to cool five

ominutes to a temperature of lt-145 C hydrogen ions can be detected without

dosing the surface from the jet An energy distribution for this signal is

shown in Figure 310 A time-of-flight measurement confirmed that the observed

signal is indeed H+ ions The energy distribution peaks at 25 05 eVvith a

full width at half maximum of 58 eV The peak intensity of the ion signal

obtained without dosing depends on the previous history of the sample and on

the experimental parameters as discussed in Section 35~ This intensity

change is indicated by arrows in Figure 310 For this measurement the

88

H+ from H2 W (100) T=600C

Zero Levels

fI)

cshy s gt

~

c-0 ~

0 ~ --0

CIgt

gt-shyc 0

1-1

+J

o 2 4 6

6cent= OSSeV

6cent=06geV

6cent=045eV

6cent=0lSeV

Acent=OlOeV

Acent=003eV

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1l96

Figure 38 Comparison of energy distributions of g+ ions desorbed from a 600 c tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

89

-ffl middotcshy

l

gtshy 0 shy

0 0-0 ltlgt

gt= C 0

H

+I

H+ from H2 W(100) T =-150degC

Zero Levels

Dcp=067 eV

Dcp= 043eV

---_Dcp=Olle~

___

Dcp=017eV

D_cp=004eV

o 246 H+lon Energy (eV)

SP-1197

Figure 39 Comparison of energy distributions of H+ ions desorbed from a low temperature (-lSOOC) tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

90

--(J) H+ from Undosed W(lOO)

T=l50degC

H+ from H2 Dosed W

ot 60degC

-0

-Q)

~l ~ + I O~~~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~ o 2 4 6

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1202

Figure 310 Energy distribution obtained from a flashed but undo sed tungsten (100) surface which has been cooled to -150oC For comparison the energy distribution of a+ ions from the tungsten (100) surface after dosing with hydrogen is shown by the dashed line The two distributions are normalized at their maximum intensities The intensity of the ion signal from the undosed surface changes as a function of sample history as discussed in the text This is indicated by the arrow

I

91

primary energy was 400 eVe A relatively low incident electron current

of lxlO-7 A was used so that the coverage in the surface state being probed

would not be strongly depleted during the measurement This state has a high

desorption cross section as calculated in Chapter 4 and hence depletion is

a possibility It should be noted that the same energy distribution is obshy

tained from the low temperature state using a beam current of 2xlO-6 A The

latter high current measurement reflects the distribution in energy of H+ ions

desorbed from the fast state when its coverage is in equilibriumll as disshy

cussed in Section 352

The intensity of the ion signal desorbed from the surface at both

60 0 C and -1500 C is strongly coverage dependent In Figure 311 is plotted the

intensity of the 3 eV H+ ion signal as a function of work function change upon

adsorption of hydrogen The signals from the 60 0 C and -lSOoC surfaces have

maximum intensities at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV respecshy

tively This difference indicates that adsorption at the low temperature

differs somewhat from that at 600C At higher hydrogen coverages theion

signals decrease to less than 15 of their peak intensities indicating that

the cross section for ion desorption decreases as the ll state fills The

41 reason for this decrease is not well understood although Madey has sug~_

gested that it results from a coverage dependent rate of reneutralization of

the ions produced by the incident beam At near monolayer coverages the 3 eV

ion signal increased somewhat

The data in Figur~ 311 are normalized at the peak intensity The

absolute maximum yields at the two temperatures are the same within 25

Also shown normalized at the peak intensity are Madeys intensity versus

41 coverage data for hydrogen adsorbed on W(lOO) at room temperature The

--

en + ~ H from H2 W (100) J ~ ~ Withrow 60degC ~ 0 Withrow -150degC shye __ -- Madey 22degCA

c

C li)

gtshy 0

c N

o H + I o x ~

cf c

o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Il cp (eV)

Figure 311 Intensity of the 3 eV g+ ion signal from the tungsten (1ampH)-1195 surface as a function of the change in work function resulting from hydrogen adsorption Data for adsorption at 600 C and -l50oC are plotted For comparison the results obtained by Madey4 from a room temperature tungsten (100) surface are included

93

maximum in his ion signal occurs for the same coverage as the maximum in the

room temperature data taken here His results are more sharply peaked howshy

ever This difference may be due to the different conditions under which the

two sets of data were obtained Madeys results represent ions desorbed in a

narrow cone normal to the surface whereas the spectrometer used here collected

only those ions desorbed from the surface at 350 + 2 120 Madey also used a

lower primary energy

352 Desorption Curve Measurements

The H+ ion signal is observed to decrease with time if a primary

electron beam current of sufficient intensity per surface area is used A

theoretical description of this measurement referred to as a desorption

curve is given in Appendix C It can be shown that the expected ion signal

decreases to an equilibrium value The rate of decay of the desorption curve

and the equilibrium value are used to calculate parameters characteristic of

the adsorption state being probed

Figure 312 shows the decay of the 3 eV H+ ion signal from tungsten

(100) initially covered with hydrogen to a work function change of 010 eV

oThe temperature of the crystal for this measurement was 60 C An incident

-6 -3 2current of 5xlO A (a current density of 25xlO Aem) at a primary energy

of 400 eV was used The decrease in ion yield is seen to be quite slow The

equilibrium value shown in this figure iH+ was estimated from the equil

analysis of the data in Chapter 4

+As noted above H ions could be desorbed from a cold but undosed

tungsten (100) surface The desorption curve for this undosed state is shown

in Figure 313 For this data the crystal was flashed and allowed to cool

5 minutes to -150o

C Then the incident electron current was turned on (see

94

I I I t I I I I I H+ from H2 W(l00) Epri =400 eV-(f) Ipri =5 X 10-6 A

a ~rp =010 eV82000r- shy

-(f)

c (l) I- shy iHquil-c

-~1000 shyo

H + I

t I I I I I o 100 200 300 400

Time (sec) SP-1203

Figure 312 Change in the a+ ion current during electron obombardment of a 60 C tungampten (100) surface

Hydrogen was initially adsorbed to a coverage of 010 monolayer

95

200 -()

a ~160 gt

if) -c ~120 c

H c ~ 80

+r 40

H+ Ions fromW(lOO) Epri=400eV

Ipri=lA

Temp =- 1500 C

IH~qUil ------------shy

Figure 313 Change in the a+ ion current during electron bombardment of a flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface cooled to -150oC

140

96

Section 354 for a discussion of how the current was controlled) and the

ion signal decay monitored The signal is seen to undergo a rapid decay It

reaches its equilibrium value in several minutes in sharp contrast with the

desorption curve obtained after hydrogen dosing at room temperature An inshy

-6 -4 2cident current of lxlO A (a current density of 5lxlO Alcm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV was used to take the desorption curve from the undosed cold

surface This current density is only 20 percent of the value used for the

room temperature data of Figure 312 It was found convenient to use this

smaller value since the decay of the ion signal was so rapid Additional

desorption measurements on this fast decaying or fast state are given in

the following two sections

A desorption curve obtained after dosing the cold tungsten (100)

surface with hydrogen is shown in Figure 314 The data were taken using a

-6 -3 2primary current of 3xlO A (a current density of 15xlO Acm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV The surface was dosed to a work function change of 007 eV

Initially there is a rapid decay of the ion signal which is similar to the

desorption curve obtained from the fast state Following this initial decaYt

the signal continues to fall for a time but at a much slower rate of decay

This desorption pattern different than either of the desorption curves given

in Figures 312 or 313 can be described in ter~ of simultaneous desorption

from two adsorption states This is discussed further in Chapter 4

+353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State H Ion Signal

The ion yield from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface

has been studied as a function of temperature These data were obtained by

continuously monitoring both the tungsten temperature and the 3 eV H+ ion

97

-() a u

t gt

800()

c (J) +shy

~600 c o

+ H

400 r

200

o

Figure 314

r-

i-

r-shy

I I I I I I I I I

H+ from H2 W(lOO Epri =400eV

I I I

o 100

Iprl =3xlO-6 A

ilq= O07eV T=-150degC

I 1 I I

T

I

-

-

-

200 300 400 Time (sec)

Change in the H+ ion current during electron bombardment oof a -150 C tungsten (100) surface Hydrogen was

initially adsorbed to a coverage of 007 monolayer

98

signal following a crystal flash The current for this measurement was

-6 -4 2IxlO A (a current density of 5lx10 Aem) The primary energy was 400

eV As can be determined from the previous section this current density was

such that the electron beam caused Significant perturbations on the hydrogen

state during the measurement None the less several conclusions can be inshy

ferred from the intensity versus temperature data presented in Figure 315

The ion signal from the fast hydrogen state is strongly temperature dependent

+ 0The H intensity is seen to increase sharply below approximately -50 C The

results are reversible with temperature the ion signal decreases if the crysshy

tal is heated and the signal returns to its original intensity when the crysshy

tal cools back down

Several mechanisms could be responsible for the appearance of a

H+ ion signal below room temperature For example a temperature dependent

bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen could produce a desorbable hydrogen

state Likewise adsorption from the background rtight pro(luce desorbable H+

only below room temperature In order to better understand the fast state

some additional measurements were made as described in the following section

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State

Additional experiments were performed to further elucidate the nature

of the low temperature fast state Experiments were made to determine the

source of hydrogen which populates this state The effect of co-adsorption

of hydrogen from the jet with this state was probed In addition the possishy

bility that the appearance of the state was related to surface contamination

was investigated Possible correlations between the fast state hydrogen and

the low temperature LEED phenomena described in Section 123 were probed

99

50----~----~----r---_~--_r----_--_

20

-(J)-c

gt l shye ~10 c l shye gt

00 -c Q)-~ 5 c o

H

+ I

2

-150 -100 -50 0 100 150 Temperature (OC)

Figure 315 Intensity of the 3 eV a+ ion signal from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface as a function of tungsten temperature

-200

100

In these measurements it was desired to study the appearance of

+the fast state H ion signal without the complicating effects of simultaneous

significant depletion of this hydrogen state with the primary electron beam

This possibility exists since the cross section for electron sesorption of

the fast state is high as shown in Chapter 4 It was found that a measure

of the change of coverage in the fast state could be obtained in experiments

in which the electron beam was turned off for short times During the time

the gun was off referred to as adsorption times the fast state populated

The increase in the coverage in this state during the adsorption time could be

monitored by taking a desorption curve right after the adsorption time The

change in coverage is assumed proportional to the difference iH+ - iH+ initial equi1

where iH+ is the ion intensity immediately after turning the gun back on initial

and ~+ has been discussed above The difference iH+ - iH+ will equil initial equi1

be referred to as ~iH+(adsorption time) The rate of increase in coverage of

the fast state is assumed proportional to ~~+(adsorption time)adsorption

time

To turn the gun off the control grid was biased 6 volts negative

with respect to the cathode This method of controlling the gun current

kept the cathode temperature constant during the adsorption time while at

the same time no current could reach the crystal The primary beam could be

turned off (or subsequently back on) in fractions of a second No effects on

the observed measurements could be attributed to this biasing procedure

The change in the population of the fast state has been monitored as

a function of the tungsten crystal temperature Figure 316 shows the results

of a series of measurements each done at a different crystal temperature in

101

() --c s gtshy

0 -0

0 100-~ 0shy+Q)

J 50

0 shy

+S a J

-150 -100 -50 a 50 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1215

Figure 316 The quantity igt - i~ measured initial eqpil

from desorption curves from Ehe fast state as a function of crystal temperature

102

which the above procedure has been used with adsorption times of 150 seconds

From the desorption curves taken following the adsorption times the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) has been calculated This quantity is plotted versusH

the crystal temperature in Figure 316 The quantity 6iH+(adsorption time)

ie the fast state signal is small and less than 5 of the maximum signal

owhen the temperature of the tungsten crystal is higher than OOC Below 0 C

the change in population in the fast state during the adsorption time inshy

creases as the temperature decreases This temperature dependence is in

agreement with the the results of Figure 315 which was taken continuously

with a high primary current as the crystal was cooled after a flash Thus the

procedure used to obtain Figure 316 appears reasonable

The rate of population of the fast state can be an indication of the

source of hydrogen as discussed in Chapter 4 The rate of population of this

state has been investigated as a function of adsorption time using the proceshy

dure given above Figure 317 shows a plot of the quantity 6i +(adsorptionH

time) versus adsorption time From the figure it is concluded that the rate

of popUlation is constant in time at least for coverages of the fast state

obtained in 26 minutes

The effect of co-adsorption of hydrogen from the jet on the fast

state has been probed The purpose of these measurements has been to detershy

mine if hydrogen (H2) from the gas dosing system is the source of the fast

state In a series of measurements the cold crystal surface was dosed with

hydrogen and then an ESD ion signal monitored until it reached equilibrium

Following this the fast state was allowed to populate during an adsorption

time of 150 seconds Finally a desorption curve from the co-adsorbed fast

lO3

Growth of H+ Ion Yield with Electron Gun Off T=-150degC--(f) c

s gt 0-0 0-

J 0shy

+0gt r

0 +shy

+pound r

200

100

SP-122J

Figure 317 The quantity igt bull i~ff measured from initial flequil

desorption curves from the fast state as a function of adsorption time Adsorption time is defined in the text

104

state and dosed hydrogen states was taken In Figure 318 the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) calculated from these desorption curves is plotted versusH

work function change due to adsorption from the jet For low doaes of hydroshy

gen (6cplt 010 eV) there is almost no change in the quantity t~+(adsorption

time) ie the rapid decay of the ion signal characteristic of the fast

state is observed However preadsorption of hydrogen from the jet clearly

affects the ion signal from the fast state for 6cplt010 eV The signal is

decreased forhy5irogen coverages in the 13 state in qualitative agreement1

with the data presented in Figure 311

For ~lt 010 eV the change in coverage in the fast state during

adsorption times of 150 seconds is seen to be independent of the amount of

hydrogen in the dosed or 13 2 state This result was used in a series of

experiments in which the rate of population of the fast state was measured

2at different hydrogen background pressures The flux (molecules per cm per

second) of H2 onto the surface from the background is directly proportional

to the partial pressure of hydrogen If H2 is the source of the fast state

changing the background pressure would be expected to have an effect on the

measured change in coverage in the fast state as long as the total adsorption

is lower than about 010 monolayer (which corresponds to a work function

change of 010 eV) For the data in Figure 318 the background pressure of

-11hydrogen was less than 7xlO Torr (the Bayard-Alpert gauge pressure) In

a series of experiments this hydrogen pressure was raised by letting gas in

from the the gas handling system for times ranging from one to two minutes

While the pressure was raised the electron gun was turned off so that simulshy

taneous adsorption into the fast state and the 13 2 state could take place The

105

() --C J

gt 10shy

0 10shy-0 10shy

S

0shy

+lt11 c

2-+~ c

200

100

0

8

DCP(eV) SP-1222

Figure 318 The quantity iHt 1nitial

desorption curves from

- iHplusmn measured from equil

the low temperature hydrogen dosed surface as a function of work function change ~~ ~~ results from hydrogen coverage

o 1 2 3 4 5 6

106

total hydrogen coverage in the Sz state was kept below 10 percent of a monoshy

layer Desorption curves were then taken and the quantity 8iH+(adsorption

time) calculated An interesting result was obtained It was found that the

coverage in the fast state was unrelated to the background pressure of HZ and

hence unrelated to the total impingement of HZ Even though experiments were

made in which the background pressure was varied over two orders of magnitude

the change in coverage in the fast state during equal adsorption times was

always the same Hence it is concluded that the fast state is not populated

by hydrogen added to the background from the gas handling system

It was found however that the fast state signal intensity could be

correlated to a pressure reading under certain experimental conditions

Normally during flashing the crystal manipulator was rotated so that the

tungsten crystal faced away from the entrance to the spectrometer (a rotation

oof 180 from the crystal position shown in Figure Z14) This normal flashing

posi tion is referred to as the down position The crystal could also be

flashed while it was in the IIUp position or facing the s~ectrometer It was

observed that when the crystal was flashed in the up position an increase in

the ion signal from the fast state could be obtained over that measured when

the crystal was flashed in the down position This unexpected result sugshy

gested that the fast state might be correlated to a thermal instrumental

effect Radiation heating from the crystal raised the temperature of the

surrounding experimental chamber surfaces If the crystal is close to the

surfaces during a flash as for example when flashed in the up position the

heating is greater One consequence of greater heating would be an enhanced

thermal desorption from the surfaces and a higher pressure in the experimental

107

chamber Hence the incident flux of gas thermally desorbed from the chamber

surfaces would be increased Unfortunately the best test of this hypothesis

a measurement of the temperature of the surfaces in the experimental chamber

could not be made However an interesting pressure related result could be

obtained when the x-ray current in the Bayard-Alpert gauge (which is equivalent

to approximately 7xlO-11 Torr pressure) was nulled out so that ambient pressure

-12increases at the gauge of as little as 05xlO Torr could be easily detected

It was observed that during a crystal flash when the crystal was in the up

position the gauge pressure showed a maximum pressure burst of approximately

3x10-l0 Torr This was higher than the pressure burst when the crystal was

flashed in the down position a strong indication that some surfaces in the

experimental chamber became hotter during an up flash When the crystal was

flashed in the down position the pressure fell quickly after the flash was

terminated to the nulled or equilibrium level However after a flash in the

up position the pressure fell to a quasi-equilibrium level which was higher

-12than the true equilibrium pressure by as much as 2xlO Torr The quasi-

equilibrium pressure was dependent on the number of prev~ous flashes in the

up position and on how long after flashing the pressure was read Once the

crystal had been flashed in the up position the pressure remained elevated

for several hours slowly decreasing to the equilibrium level It should be

noted that these pressure increases are read outside the experimental chamber

The actual pressure increase in the experimental chamber and hence the inshy

creased gas flux at the crystal surface can only be estimated to be proshy

portional to the gauge pressure

The magnitude of the pressure increases following a flash in the

108

up position was linearly related to both the change in coverage of the fast

state during the adsorption time and to the desorption curve equilibrium level

This can be seen from the data presented in Figure 319 The lower panel shows

the results of a series of measurements in which desorption curves were taken

after letting the fast state populate for adsorption times of 150 seconds

The ordinate in the lower panel is 6ia+ (adsorption1 time) The abscissa in the

figure is the increase in pressure over the equilibrium pressure as a result of

flashes in the up position The change in ion yield is seen to be directly

proportional to the observed pressure increase The top panel shows the equishy

librium ion signal observed for the desorption curves plotted versus the same

pressure increase as the lower panel A direct proportionality between the

equilibrium ion signal and the pressure increase is seen These two linear

results would be expected if the fast state populated as a result of adsorption

from the background This is discussed further in Chapter 4 On the other

hand no dependence of the fast state ion signal on background pressure would

be expected if the source of the hydrogen were bulk to surface diffusion Thus

while there may be hydrogen on the surface which is not desorbed by incident

electrons it can be concluded from this measurement that the fast state is

populated by adsorption from the ambient

A possible explanation for the fast state is suggested by the work

51of Jelend and Menzel They found that co-adsorption of oxygen or CO with

hydrogen leads to the ~ hydrogen state which has similar characteristics as

the fast state observed here The possibility that impurities are on the surshy

face in the temperature range in which the fast state is observed has been inshy

vestigated using Auger electron spectroscopy andel~tTon stimulated desorption in

lO9

Figure 319 Lower panel - The quantity iH+ - ig+ measured from initial eaui1

desorption curves from the fast state as S tunction of gauge pressure change The fast state populated during adsorption times of 150 seconds The pressure change results from flashing the tungsten crystal while it is in the up position Upper panel - Equilibrium ion current iH+ measured from the

-equildesorpt~on curves taken for the data in the lower panel

110

-(J)-C J gt 0 -0 0

100-s

+1)cr

J

C-+ J

0

--(J)

c J 200 gt 0 -0 0-

s +1)

cr J

- 100 I 2

012

Gauge Pressure Change (X10-12 Torr)

111

the time of flight mode In order to test for these elements the flashed

tungsten surface was cooled with the gun turned off allowing the fast state

to populate Total adsorption times of up to 15 minutes were used times in

which a strong fast state signal could be obtained However no carbon or

oxygen Auger peaks were observed and no desorbed oxygen or carbon ions that

could be attributed to the fast state were monitored with ESD Hence any

oxygen or CO present on the surface would have had a coverage below the deshy

tection sensitivity of the techniques used or less than approximately 1 pershy

cent of a monolayer It can be noted here that coverage calculations given in

Chapter 4 indicate the fast state hydrogen coverage is well below 1

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data

The low energy electron diffraction (LEE D) system used here has

been described previously in Section 26 LEED data has been optained using

hydrogen coverage crystal temperature and primary electron energy as

variable parameters as described below

The symmetry of the LEED spot pattern has been noted as a function

of hydrogen coverage at room temperature Results from these observations are

in good agreement with previously reported research (see Section 123) Half

order diffraction spots become visible with initial hydrogen coverage The

intensity of the half order spots maximize at a coverage corresponding to

~~ = 015 eV at a primary energy of 115 eVe Additional adsorption causes

the half order spots to split into four poorly defined spots This pattern

upon further adsorption becomes blurred At full coverage a (lxl) pattern

is observed Figure 320 shows a photograph of the LEED pattern observed

from a clean room temperature tungsten surface and also the c(2x2) LEED patshy

112

W(100)

Clean

T=60degC Epri = 1387eV

(1 xl) Clean (100) Surface

W (100)

Do 4gt =015eV

T =-150degC

Epri =115eV

C (2x2) Hydrogen Overoyer

SP-1200

Figure 320 Photo~raDh of LEED screen showing a clean (lxl) pattern and a c(2x2) pattern Models of possible surface atom configurations for the LEED patterns are also shown

113

tern that occurs with a hydrogen over1ayer in the ~2 state

When the crystal is cooled to below room temperatures half order

spots are visible without any dosing of the crystal from the gas system

Graphs of LEED spot intensity versus primary electron energy called

elastic intensity profiles are shown in Figures 321 322 and 323 for the

(10) (11) and (1212) diffraction beams A normally incident primary

electron beam was used in these measurements Data were taken at two tempera-

o 0tures 60 C and -150 C for both the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorbed on

the surface to a coverage corresponding to a ~~ of 015 eV This coverage corshy

responds to the maximum in intensity for the 115 eV half order beams All obshy

servable equivalent beams show the same line shape and peak positions There

are some intensity differences between equivalent beams probably due to an

uneven phosphor coating of the LEED screen particularly near its edge bull

Small misalignments might also affect the intensities The effect of hydrogen

adsorption on the intensity profiles is seen to be small except above 100 eV

in the (11) beam profile and below 50 eV in the (1212) beam profile Some

small shifts (~ 2 eV) in the energy positions of the peaks are observed as a

function of coverage but not as a function of temperature

The intensities of the (1212) (10) and (11) spots have been

measured as a function of crystal temperature for the clean (flashed) surface

These results are presented in Figures 324 and 325 using a semilogarithmic

scale The data were obtained by continuously monitoring both the tungsten

temperature and the intensity of the beams following a crystal flash Primary

energies of 115 eV for the (1212) beam 1105 eV and 67 eV for the (10)

beam and 113 eV for the (11) beam and currents of 10xlO-6 A were used The

114

- (j) +shyC l

gt 1loshy0 0 loshy+shy0

loshy0

- 0gt

+shy(j)

c Q) +shyC

H

o

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j = 0deg g=(10)

T =60degC Clean

T =-150degC fjcent = 015 eV

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l109

Figure 321 Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degc and -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsoroed in the S2 state

llS

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

U)-C J

1

-~ l0shy

a loshy

0 0l0shya-~-U) 0c OJ

C -H

o

o

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-lloa

8i =0deg g = (1 1)

T = 60degC Clean

T =60degC IJcp = 015 eV

T = -150degC IJcp = 015 eV

Figure 322 Elastic intensity profiles for the (11) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsorbed in the 62 state

116

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j =00

g = (12 12 )

o 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l107

Figure 323 Elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A vJork function change Acp of 015 eV corresponds to hydrocn adsorbed in the 13

2 state

117

100~--~--~----~--~-------~--------

--VI

c s gtshyt shyc -t shycl

010 -

gtshy-VI c Q)

c -I-f

tr c Q)

a

WOOO) 81 =0deg

9 = (ItO) 0-

-0- Epri = 1105 eV --0-- -0shy -0

9 = (ItI)

0 Epri= 113 eV =0shy o 0 0

9 = (ItO) Epri= 67 eV

0

Figure 324 Temperature dependence of (10) and (11) LEED beams from a flashed tungsten (100) surface Primary energies used are indicated on the graph

118

W (100) 9 =(12 t 12)

8j=0deg50

CJ)-

~ 5 o Q)

Q

2

-100 o 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1l55 Figure 325 Temperature dependence of the (1212) LEED

beam from flashed tungsten (100) surface A primary electron energy of 115 eV was used

200

119

intensities of the (10) and (11) beams are seen to increase exponentially

(linearly on the semilogarithmic scale) as the temperature is lowered The

intensity of the (1212) order beam also increases as the temperature is

lowered Down to approximately -750 C the rate of increase with temperature is

ogreater than that for the integral order beams Below -75 C the intensity

changes at about the same rate as the integral order beams The results are

reversible with temperature

In Sections 353 and 354 a hydrogen ion signal has been reported

from the flashed surface LEED measurements have been made to ascertain if

this ion yield from the fast state could be correlated to the intensity of the

LEED spots After flashing the crystal the photometer signal from the

(1212) beam was measured as the crystal cooled to -lS0 0 C Then the incishy

dent electron current was turned off for 300 seconds in order to allow the

fast state to populate When the electron current was turned back on the

photometer signal immediately returned to the same intensity as obtained prior

to turning off the incident current There was no decay in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the desorption curve phenomena seen with

the ion signal The intensity of the photometer signal from the (10) and

(11) beams as well as from the background was monitored ilsing this same

procedure In no case was there any structure observed in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the rapid decay in the fast state ion

yield

37 Electron Scattering Data

The electron signal backscattered from the crystal has been observed

as a function of hydrogen coverage and crystal temperature using synchronous

120

detection of the second harmonic of the energy distribution N(E) as disshy

cussed in Appendix B and in Section 324

Figure 326 shows the characteristic loss structure for electrons

scattered from a clean room temperature tungsten (100) surface and also from

this surface after dosing with hydrogen The abscissa in this figure represhy

sents electron loss energy w where 0 eV s w s 40 eV A primary~nergy of

-6110 eV and a primary current of lxlO A were used to take these data Since

25for tungsten true secondary structure extends out to 60 eV there is no

overlap of secondary and characteristic loss structure down to losses of 50

eV when operating at 110 eV primary energy The data of Figure 326 were taken

in the second derivative mode in order to suppress the background The data

were taken at a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV with a 1 volt peak to peak

oscillation on the retarding potential

Coverage dependent changes in the spectra are seen The peak at

w = 25 eV in the clean spectrum decays as the hydrogen coverage in increased

At the same time the narrow peak at 4 eV becomes broader and a peak grows at

a loss energy of 75 eV The structure at 210 eV in the clean spectrum moves

down in loss energy as hydrogen adsorbs Below w ~ 30 eV very little change

in the spectra as a function of hydrogen coverage is observed

Figure 327 shows characteristic loss structure for electrons

oscattered from a tungsten surface cooled to -150 C The data were taken using

the same electron gun and spectrometer operating conditions as used for the

data of Figure 326 The low temperature clean spectrum is nearly identical

to that obtained at the higher temperature The only change is a slight enshy

hancement of the shoulder at about 45 eV Changes in the clean spectrum with

121

Figure 326 oCharacteristic electron energy loss spectra from a 60 C

tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverages A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modulation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

---

N w -0 shyw-Z

N -0

I

122

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl=110 eV Iprl c5xlO-6 A

T= 60degC Modulation =1 V Peak to Peak

6ltl 080eV

060eV

O 35eV

023eV

014eV

003eV

Clean

o

SP-1219

123

Figure 327 Characteristic electron energy loss spectra from a -lSOoC tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverage A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modushylation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

124

N lJJ 0

~ lJJ Z N 0 I

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl =110 eV Iprl =5x10-6 A T=-150degC Modulation 1 V Peak to Peak

bcent OS6eV

O5geV

O35eV

O25eV

O16eV

O05eV

Cleon

SP-1220

-~--------~- -- -----------

125

hydrogen adsorption are identical to those seen for adsorption at the higher

temperature

Loss spectra were also taken for 0 eV ~ w ~ 10 eV from the flashed

but undosed cold surface after turning off the electron gun for 10 minutes

These measurements were made to see if the fast state hydrogen would affect

the loss measurements No changes in the electron loss spectrum from those

taken immediately after cooling the flashed crystal were found

A discussion of the data presented in this chapter follows in

Chapter 4

126

CHAPTER 4

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

Hydrogen chemisorption on single crystal tungsten (100) has been

probed in this research using complementary surface sensitive techniques

Auger measurements have been given in Section 28 Work function ESD LEED

and electron scattering results have been given in Chapter 3 A discussion

of this data is presented here

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental condition using Auger electron spectroscopy The procedures

used have been previously described with the spectrometer electronics Section

25 The Auger data have been given and discussed in Section 28 A brief

summary of these results follows

Tungsten carbon and oxygen Auger transitions have been observed

using this technique It can be seen from Figure 216 that after flashing the

cryLl to 2200oK no structures attributable to carbon or oxygen Auger elecshy

trons remain in the Auger spectrum The Auger measurement is estimated to

be sensitive to approximately 1 percent coverage Operation of the electron

gun in the high current high voltage Auger mode results in a slow deposition

of carbon from the background Since the Auger mode is used to chemically

characterize the surface the net effect of this beam related contamination

is an overestimation of the carbon impurity concentration at the surface

Some weak structure in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface

occurs between 475 eV and 525 eV No definite conclusions regarding the

127

origin of these peaks can be made The possibility that the structure results

from transitions in tungsten andor other elements is discussed in Chapter 2

83It is worth noting that Watts Jones and Hopkins recently published an

Auger spectrum from a flashed W(lOO) surface in which weak structure can be

seen at approximately the same energies as the unidentified structure observed

here This similarity lends support to the hypothesis that the peaks are

tungsten Auger transitions However it does not rule out other possibilities

The similarity of the data indicates at least that if the structure in

question results from some contaminate the problem is not unique to the

apparatus here It should be emphasized that work function ESD and LEED

data taken here are in good agreement with the literature any possible

contamination has not had a noticeable effect on the measurements

42 Work Function Results

Retarding potential work function measurements have been taken as

a measure of hydrogen coverage Plots of work function changes versus

exposure to hydrogen are presented in Figures 34 and 35 Adsorption of

hydrogen at 600 C yields a maximum work function change of 098 plusmn 004 eV

This is within 10 percent of 090 eV the most consistent monolayer coverage

work function chan~e reported in the literature for the H2 on W(lOO)

8 18 46 47 84system As argued by Armstrong agreement with the values from

the literature is an indication of good (100) orientation This is because

the work function of a faceted surface is a weighted average over the work

44functions of the facets Since hydrogen adsorption increases the work

function of the (100) face far more than the expected facet orientations a

128

faceted (100) surface would have a lower full coverage work function change

than a true (100) surface

Hydrogen adsorption onto W(lOO) at low temperatures increases the

work function by 092 plusmn 004 eV at full coverage This is slightly lower

than the room temperature maximum increase although within experimental

error the two measurements are the same

The increase in work function with hydrogen coverage can be intershy

preted using a simple model in which each adsorbed hydrogen atom acts as a

negative dipole at the surface The work function change on adsorption

43 6~ can be shown to equal the total added dipole moment at the surface

divided by the permittivity Using this and assuming a hydrogen coverage of

15 22xlO atomsem for a 6~ of 098 eV the average dipole moment permax

adsorbed hydrogen atom is calculated to be -013 Debye This result can be

compared to a theoretical account of the dipole moment of a hydrogen ion

63adsorbed onto metal surfaces given by Smith Ying and Kohn Their

calculation indicates that in order to observe a negative dipole moment the

hydrogen ion must be closer than 061 Kto the top plane of substrate ion

cores This would be an upper estimate of the proximity of the hydrogen atoms

to the tungsten substrate The minimum theoretical dipole moment per

63 -2 adsorbed hydrogen ion obtained by Smith et al is -lxlO au (1 au

equals 24 Debye) This value is lower than the observed value of -013

Debye by a factor of 5

o 0Cooling a clean tungsten (100) crystal from 200 C to -150 C

results in a work function increase of approximately 005 eV as shown in

Figure 36 This is an average change with temperature d~dT of 14xlO -4

129

oeV K The temperature dependence of work function for tungsten in this

temperature range has not previously been reported However temperature

dependent changes in work function of this magnitude have been reported for

85 86 85 86Cu Ag Na and K and have been described theoret~ca11y in terms of

both a thermal expansion of the crystal lattice and a temperature dependence

of the crystal electronic structure The work function change observed

here is quantitatively in agreement with experimental data for other elements

and with a theoretical model that describes the temperature dependence solely

in terms of intrinsic properties of a clean metal surface While perturbashy

tions on the crystal surface such as gas adsorption from the background or

bulk to surface diffusion can reasonably be expected to affect the work

function it is not necessary to invoke these causes to explain the changes

seen on cooling the crystal

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results

Under electron bombardment H+ ions can be desorbed from the

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface and from the low temperature undosed

surface The theory that describes this ESD process was first proposed by

37 38Redhead and by Menzel and Gomer A discussion of their model including a

derivation of the energy distribution of ions from the surface is given in

Appendix C In addition a discussion of the ESD phenomena in terms of

surface kinetics is also given in this appendix

ESD has been used to study the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system at

ocrystal temperatures from slightly above room temperature to -150 C Energy

distributions of It ions desorption curves and ion yield versus temperaturemiddot

and coverage data have been obtained

130

431 Room Temperature Results

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from room temperature

W(lOO) is given by the solid curve in Figure 37 The distribution has a

Gaussian line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 plusmn 05 eV

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV The line shape of the energy

distribution remains virtually unchanged as a function of hydrogen coverage

at least to near saturation coverage as shown by the curves in Figure 38

Near full coverage the distribution appears to broaden somewhat This latter

change requires further study which has not been done here

From Equation Cl of Appendix C the energy distribution of the

desorbed ions is given by the expression

(41)

where x is the coordinate normal to the surface Ions that start at x X ]

desorb with energy V N is the surface density of hydrogen atoms adsorbed in

the ground state ~ is the cross section for electron induced excitation ex

of hydrogen from the ground state to the ionic state I~G(xi)12 is the

probability density of hydrogen at Xi P(x ) is the probability that an ioni

starts from the position x and escapes from the surface as an ion and J

dV(X)dxlxi is the slope of the ion-metal interaction evaluated at Xi The

line shape of the energy distribution depends on the metal-neutral intershy

action VG(x) via ~G and depends on the ion-metal interaction V(x) via P(x)

and the slope dV(x)dx

--------------------------~-~~----------------

131

One manifestation of multistate adsorption in which VG(x) and V(x)

are dependent on the binding state is a change in the experimentally

observed energy distribution Multistate adsorption has been observed with

ESD for some systems for example as a function of oxygen coverage on

W(lOO)25 A similar result might be expected for hydrogen adsorption on

W(lOO) since two states ~l and ~2 are seen in thermal desorption spectra

However from the ion energy distribution line shapes for hydrogen on W(lOO)

no evidence of multistate adsorption as a function of coverage is seen The

line shapes of the energy distribution curves are the same at hydrogen

coverages corresponding to both thermal desorption states Hence coverage

dependent interactions which have been proposed to account for the thermal

desorption results and other phenomena reported for this system are not

observed using this technique

Another conclusion to be drawn from the energy distributions is

that the ions originate at an energy position which remains constant with

respect to the Fermi level of the tungsten independent of hydrogen coverage

A shift of nearly a volt in the work function is observed as hydrogen

adsorbs However the ion energy distribution which would be sensitive to

changes of this magnitude if it shifted with the work function remains

fixed in energy

The decay of the room temperature 3 eV a+ ion yield is shown in

Figure 312 A theoretical account of the desorption curve measurement has

been given in Appendix C From that discussion it is seen that a semi logshy

arithmic plot of i ~ - i ~ versus time yields a straight line The totalH Hequil desorption cross section of the adsorption state being probed can be

132

1determined from the slope of the straight line - T where T is given by

T e = (42)

je is the current density used to obtain the desorption curve and e is the

unit of electric charg~

The discussion of the desorption process leading to Equation 42

is based on the assumptions that the total desorption cross section and the

hydrogen sticking probability are independent of hydrogen coverage N The

validity of these assumptions for the hydrogen on tungsten (100) systems

should be examined An indication that the ionic cross section is indepenshy

dent of N for low coverages can be gotten from data presented in Figure 311

The H+ ion yield versus work function change is nearly linear for A~ lt 01 eV

8If coverage is linearly related to work function change as shown by Madey

then the ion yield is directly proportional to N in this low coverage region

A direct proportionality between ion yield and coverage satisfies

Equation C5 only if the ionic desorption cross section Qtis not a

function of coverage In a series of experiments it has been observed that

the equilibrium ion yield which is proportional to the ratio Q+Qt as

given by Equation C8 is independent of N for low coverages Since Q+ and

an expression proportional to Q+Qt are both independent of N it is assumed

tthat Q is a180 independent of N

The dependence of the sticking probability on coverage has been

reported in the literature for the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system Tamm and

87Schmidt found s(N) to be independent of N for coverages of less than 15

133

41 percent Madey found s(N) to be proportional to (l-NN ) Hence the

max

assumption that the sticking probability is independent of N appears valid

to within ~ 10 percent for low coverages For coverages less than 10 the

analysis in Appendix C of the desorption curve measurements can be applied to

the data

A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ for the desorption curve ~quil

shown in Figure 312 is given in Figure 41 The equilibrium level has been

chosen approximately 5 lower than the ion intensity obtained after monishy

toring the decay curve 30 minutes (the final recorded data) since it appeared

from the data the signal was still slowly decreasing In addition with

this correction the data give a better fit to the predicted straight line

t -20 2From the slope of the line -lIT and Equation 41 a Q (400 eV) of 5xlO cm

is calculated Without making the 5 correction in iH+ the best visual equil

straight line fit to the data gives a Qt(400 eV) approximately three times

larger Because the initial hydrogen coverage for this data was 010 monoshy

layerp this cross section represents the total desorption cross section

from the ~2 hydrogen adsorption state ie represents ~ (400 eV) For 2

coverages corresponding to the ~l state the assumptions leading up to

tEquation 42 are not valid and no attempt has been made to calculate 93 bull t 1

The value obtained for 93 (400 eV) is somewhat larger than the cross section 2

38results reported by Menzel and Gomer for hydrogen desorption from a field

emitter tip and is a factor of 10 lower than reported by Jelend and

Menzel10 for desorption from a tungsten ribbon The latter researchers

corrected for readsorption effects which would partly explain their higher

value The value of ~2(400 eV) found here is over three orders of

134

500----~----~--~------------~----

400

- 300 ()

a 0- CT Q)

+ I I 200

+ I

100~__~_____~____~____~__~____~__~ o 200 400 600 800 1000

Time (sec)

SP-1198

Figure 41 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iHt asequil

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 312

----------- -------shy

51

135

magnitude smaller than the total cross section found by Jelend and Menzel

for hydrogen coadsorption with either carbon monoxide or oxygen This is a

verification that these contaminants are not present to any great extent

432 Low Temperature Fast State Results

oIf the tungsten crystal was flashed to 2200 K and subsequently

allowed to cool below room temperature H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface The state from which this hydrogen is desorbed has been labeled

the fast state Experiments have been made to characterize the energetics

and kinetics of this undosed state and also to address the important question

of the origin of the hydrogen which is desorbed These data are discussed

below

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from the fast state

shown in Figure 310 is considerably broader than the distribution obtained

after room temperature hydrogen dosing into the ~ states The peak intensity

is somewhat lower in energy 05 eV than the peak obtained from the ~

states The distribution has a tail extending up several electron volts on

the high energy side It should be noted that the same energy distribution

line shape could be obtained from the state at any position on its desorpshy

tion curve that is the broad distribution is not an anomalous result

reflecting a depletion of the hydrogen fast state during the measurement

A low primary current of lxlO- 7 A was used to take the distribution in

Figure 310 so that electron desorption effects were minimal From a

comparison of energy distributions as given in Figure 310 it is possible

to conclude that the fast state is a separate state from the ~ states

136

This conclusion is supported by cross section calculations below

The intensity of the ion yield from the fast state is temperature

dependent As shown in Figures 315 and 316 the ion yield increases as

the temperature is lowered This phenomena is reversible Using the

assumption that the ion yield is proportional to coverage it is concluded

that the fast state coverage is a function of temperature

The desorption curve obtained from the undosed tungsten (100)

surface has been measured and is given in Figure 313 The decay time is

seen to be extremely rapid compared to the analogous measurement taken after

hydrogen dosing at room temperature A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ ~quil

measured from the data in Figure 313 is given in Figure 42 The total

tdesorption cross section for the fast state Qf(400 eV) calculated from the

slope of the straight line in Figure 42 is -17lxlO 2 cm This is nearly

three orders of magnitude higher than ~2(400 eV)

Since Q~(400 eV) is on the same order of magnitude as the cross

section obtained for hydrogen desorption from carbon monoxide or oxygen

51contaminated surfaces the possibility that the fast state results from

surface contamination has been examined No direct evidence was obtained to

support such a hypothesis No carbon or oxygen peaks were observed in Auger

electron spectra from the cold surface It is estimated that these spectra

were sensitive to 1 percent of a monolayer coverage No carbon or oxygen

ions that could be attributed to the fast state phenomena were observed in

time of flight measurements It might be noted that Jelend and Menzel

observed the high cross section state labeled ~ at room temperature after

simultaneously adsorbing hydrogen plus CO or oxygen Almost no fast state

137

100

-fJ)

Q U

50 J CT

+0gt I I

+ I

10~~~--~~~~~~--~~~--~~~~

o 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Time (sec)

sp- J~4l

Figure 42 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iH+ as equi1

a function of time The data are illeasured from the desorption curve given in Figure 313

138

o lOhydrogen was detected here above 0 c Jelend and Menzel did not observe

any H+ ion yield from a cleaned surface if cooled to _13 0 C Since the gt

signal is weak at that temperature it is possible their apparatus did not

detect it It is also possible that they did not populate their surface

with hydrogen by cooling In any case its not possible to make any

simple correlations between the fast state and the contamination related x

state However as discussed below the equivalence of the two states

cannot be ruled out

It is of interest to determine the origin of the hydrogen which

populates the fast state There are several possibilities This state

could populate as a result of adsorption from the background Alternatively

88 89 hydrogen since it is endothermically soluble in tungsten m~ght

diffuse from interstitial sites to surface sites as the temperature of the

crystal is lowered A discussion of these phenomena has been given in

19Appendix C The latter suggestion has been offered as a possible

explanation of the c(2x2) LEED pattern observed on cooling In addition a

combination of these two processes could be occurring

Experiments have been performed in which the coverage in the fast

state has been monitored as a function of both adsorption time and system

background pressure If the source is external the dependence of N on

adsorption time and ambient pressure can be determined by solving Equation

C4 For the case of no incident electron beam (je = 0) and if the sticking

probability is assumed constant with coverage (probably a good assumption

since the change in coverage due to adsorption from the background would be

extremely small at the experimental ambient pressures) then the change in

139

coverage in the fast state would be expected to be linearly related to the

time during which adsorption occurs ie linearly proportional to the

variable adsorption time Furthermore for a fixed adsorption time the

coverage would be expected to be linearly proportional to the partial pressure

of the populating species

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

40 pressure is considerably more invo1ved Several points can be made

however from the discussion in Appendix C The time dependence of N due

to diffusion could be similar to that expected from background adsorption

ie linear with adsorption time However background pressure doesnt

enter into the diffusion process If the fast state phenomena is only

diffusion related the coverage N would be expected to be independent of

background pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence

for adsorption from the background

The rate of populating the fast state has been measured by turning

off the electron gun for various time intervals (setting j = 0) referred to e

as adsorption times and observing the build up of the ion signal while the

gun is off The increase in the fast state is then assumed proportional to

the increase in the ion yield i ~ - i ~ when the electron gun is Hinitia1 Hequi1

turned back on The dependence of the population rate on adsorption time is

shown in Figure 317 N is found to be linearly related to adsorption time

As discussed above this time behavior can reasonably be expected to be

observed for either an external or an internal source

The rate of population of the fast state has also been observed as

140

a function of hydrogen pressure admitted to the background from the gas

handling system As discussed in Section 354 the rate of population did

not depend on the impingement rate from the hydrogen background Hence it

is concluded that hydrogen from the gas handling system does not populate

the fast state This does not rule out external adsorption however Other

sources of hydrogen in the ambient such as rrt H H2 in an excited state or

hydrogen from a simple compound such as H 0 could be the source2

Although the population of the fast state was not affected by the

background pressure of hydrogen (H ) from the gas handling system there is2

evidence that this state does result from adsorption from an external source

This conclusion is based on experiments in which the Bayard Alpert gauge

sensitivity was increased by nulling out the x-ray limiting current Changes

-12in the background pressure on the order of 2xlO Torr were observed experishy

mentally if the crystal was flashed while it was facing the spectrometer

One explanation of this observation is that a flash in the up position warms

experimental chamber surfaces most likely the grids and electron gun drift

tube The resulting pressure increase occurs because of an increased rate of

thermal desorption from these surfaces The linear dependence of the

equilibrium current i ~ with pressure change as found experimentallyHequil

and shown in the top panel of Figure 319 is expected if external adsorption

populates the fast state This can be seen from Equation C9 Likewise the

rate of change of coverage in the fast state is seen to be proportional to

the pressure change in the lower panel of Figure 319 This is also expected

for external adsorption If bulk to surface diffusion were the source of the

hydrogen no dependence on pressure would be expected Hence Figure 319

141

indicates that hydrogen becomes desorbable because of adsorption from the

background It is not possible to say what species is adsorbing

An interesting calculation that can be made from the current nulling

experiments is an estimate of the coverage in the adsorption state responsible

for the fast state hydrogen ions Since the relation

(43)

can be obtained easily from Equation C9 and since ~i + is on the same Hequil

order as iH+ the background partial pressure that populates the undosed equil

-12state is on the same order of magnitude as ~P or about lxlO Torr The

coverage N at equilibrium can now be obtained by setting Equation C4 equal

-12to O At a pressure of 10 Torr the impingement rate of hydrogen molecules

9 2 90 for example is 15xlO moleculescm -sec and the impingement rate of other

species would be of this same magnitude Assuming a sticking probability of

-17 21 a total desorption cross section of 10 cm as calculated and a current

-4 2density of 5lxlO Acm the surface coverage in the fast state would be

~ 10-11

atomscm2 or 10-4 monolayer This calculation depends on the

assumption that the pressure change at the crystal face in the experimental

chamber is the same as measured at the gauge Experiments performed in which

the crystal was rotated to the down position after flashing in the up position

indicated that the flux of the populating species at the surface was about

twice as great when the crystal faced the spectrometer than when it faced

down Since the pressure at the bottom of the experimental chamber should

142

be about the same as the gauge pressure the calculated coverage could be

low by 50 percent It should be noted however that this is still 50 times

too low to amount to 1 percent of a monolayer

From the above discussion it can be concluded that the fast

state is related to both the temperature of the crystal and to the

background pressure of some unidentified species It is not possible to

determine if this state is a separate state from the K hydrogen state

previously reported even though it appears under different circumstances

In fact since the coverage in the state is so low Auger spectroscopy

would not be sensitive to any contamination of this same magnitude The

possibility of undetected contamination accompanying the fast state cannot

be ruled out It is possible that the adsorbing species does not contain

hydrogen as such but rather is a species which promotes a small amount

of surface hydrogen (from the background or diffusion) to the fast state

It can also be concluded that since coverages less than 1 percent of a

monolayer would not be expected to strongly alter the LEED spot symmetry

the half order spots seen on cooling do not arise from the fast state

433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results

ESD measurements have been made on the low temperature tungsten

crystal after dosing with hydrogen from the jet Energy distributions at

different coverages of hydrogen are given in Figure 39 The distributions

143

are seen to have a peak at 3 ~ 05 eV in agreement with the peak positions

in the data obtained from the ~ states at 60oC However the energy distri shy

butions are somewhat broader than the higher temperature data The fast

state yields a broad energy distribution and it is possible that the results

of Figure 39 represent simultaneous desorption from both the fast state and

the ~ states This hypothesis can be tested by analyzing a desorption curve

from the low temperature dosed surface If two states with different cross

sections are being desorbed then a semilogarithmic plot of the desorption

curve should be the sum of two straight lines The quantity i ~ - i ~ H HSquil

measured from the data of Figure 315 is plotted in Figure 43 The curve

can be separated into two straight line segments from which total desorption

17 19 2 cross sections of 16xlO- cm2 and 12xlO- cm are calculated These

cross sections correspond within plusmn 60 percent to the calculated values of

t tQf(400 eV) and QS2(400 eV) Hence it is concluded that at low temperatures

the fast state and S-like states co-adsorb

It should be noted however that the interaction of hydrogen from

the jet with the tungsten surface at low temperatures is not exactly the

o same as at 60 C This can be seen from the plot of 3 eV ion yield versus

work function change given in Figure 311 At both 600 C and at -lSOoC the

results are qualitatively similar the ion yield increases steeply with

initial hydrogen adsorption reaches a maximum and then decreases to less

than lS percent of the maximum value with additional hydrogen adsorption

Hence it is assumed that a similar phenomena is occurring at both temperashy

tures However the work function change at maximum intensity for the low

temperature measurement was found to be repeatedly lower by 007 eV than the

144

SP-H24

Figure 43 Semilogarithmic plot of the quantity ia+ - ia+ as equ~l

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 314

145

peak ~ntens~ty for measurements taken at 600 C If the expression relating

coverage to work function change Equation 35 is valid at both 600

C and

at -1500 C then the 007 eV shift would represent a dosed coverage difference

of 7 of a monolayer The ion yield at the low temperature would maximize at

a dosed coverage of 11 which is 40 lower than the coverage for the maximum

ion yield at the higher temperature If the decrease in ion yield for higher

hydrogen coverages arises from interactions between adsorbed atoms these calshy

culations suggest that the interactions observe a different coverage dependence

at the two temperatures Alternate explanations are possible for the measured

difference Equation 35 may not be valid at both temperatures It is possible

that the work function change per adsorbed atom is smaller at the lower tempshy

erature and the dosed coverages are the same at the ion yield maximas It is

also possible that hydrogen not visible in ESD or electron loss spectroscopy

measurements~ but capable of interacting with dosed hydrogen~ diffuses to the

surface at the low temperature This latter alternative~ while a possible exshy

planation for the LEED phenomena would raise many questions as to why such

hydrogen is not detectable with other techniques

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements

Low energy electron diffraction measurements made on the clean and

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface have been presented in Section 36 The

symmetry of the LEED patterns has been noted as a function of hydrogen coverage

and crystal temperature Elastic intensity profiles for three LEED beams are

given in Figures 321 through 323 LEED beam intensities as a function of

temperature have been monitored These are given in Figures 324 and 325

General agreement between symmetry patterns seen here and those

published in the literature18 19 is good The (lxl) LEED pattern

146

characteristic of clean tungsten at room temperature changes into a c(2x2)

pattern with initial hydrogen adsorption With further adsorption the LEED

pattern splits into four spots becomes blurred and finally at full coverage

returns to a (lx1) pattern When the crystal is cooled to temperatures below

room temperatures half order spots become visible without any dosing of the

crystal from the gas system

The intensity of the room temperature half order spots maximizes at

a coverage corresponding to ~~ = 015 eV or 015 monolayer using Equation

35 This is close to the 016 monolayer coverage at which Yonehara and

19 18Schmidt found these beams to maximize Estrup and Anderson on the

other hand observed sharp and intense half order LEED spots at a coverage

of 029 monolayer The coverages reported here were calculated from work

function changes using the linear relation between work function change and

coverage obtained by Madey by a flash desorption technique In both other

18experiments 19 coverage was measured directly using flash desorption The

c(2x2) pattern is associated with the ~2 adsorption state The structures

proposed to account for this state as given in Section 128 predict that

the maximum of the half order spots should occur at 025 monolayer coverage

15(one monolayer being 2x10 atomscm2) Estrup and Andersons measurement is

closest to this coverage While it is not known why there is such a large

discrepancy between the results it should be noted that determination of

coverage using flash desorption techniques is difficult with large uncershy

tainties in pressure gauge calibration and system volume The results given

here in terms of ~~ should be considerably more accurate

_ _____---__---shy

147

Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) (11) and (1212) LEED

beams are given in Figures 321 through 323 respectively The profiles

o 0 were taken at 60 C and -150 C from both a clean tungsten surface and a

surface dosed with hydrogen to 015 monolayer (This coverage corresponded

to the observed maximum in the half order pattern) As seen in these three

figures corresponding clean room temperature and low temperature profiles are

nearly identical Adsorption of hydrogen to a coverage of 015 does cause

some changes in the clean profiles with the same changes being observed at

both temperatures Hydrogen adsorption considerably enhances the 42 eV peak

observed in the (1212) profile and shifts it in energy approximately + 1 eVe

Adsorption also leads to a change from a single peak to a double peaked

structure of decreased intensity in the (11) profile above 100 eVe Adsorption

causes very little change in the (10) profile line shape above 60 eV

although the 65 eV 835 eV and 110 eV peaks are lowered in energy approxishy

mately 15 eV 05 eV and 15 eV respectively Between 30 eV and 60 eV

there are some adsorption effects on the profiles

These elastic intensity profiles can be compared to corresponding

data previously reported in the literature In Figure 44 a comparison is

made between clean surface (10) and (11) profiles taken here and reported

9lby Wei The agreement is good except in the energy range below 50 eVe

This poor agreement below 50 eV is also true for the (00) beam which is not

compared here The low energy discrepancies may be caused by the ambient

magnetic field present in Weis target region In fact it is surprising

that the data agrees as well as it does considering the different experimenshy

tal conditions under which the two sets of data were obtained Figure 45

148

Figure 44 Comparison of (11) and (10) elastic intensity profiles from the clean tungsten (100) surface Data includes profiles taken here at 60degC and -150degC and results reported by Wei94 bull

149

() --c 1

gt 0-Q 0-gt-()

c OJ-c

H

o 50 100 150 200

xl

xl

X2

Elastic Intensity Profiles W (100) Clean 8i = 0deg

g = (11)

g = (10)

Withrow (-150degC)

Withrow (60degC)

Wei (250-300degC)

Pr imary Energy (eV) SP-1l92

150

Figure 45 Comparison of (1212) elastic intensity profiles from tungsten (100) surface after hydrogen adsorption into the ~2 state Data includes profiles obtained here and results reported by Estrup and Anderson18 and Papageorgopoulos and Chen2l

0

151

- ()-

--()

c Q)-c H

Elastic Intensity Profiles H2 on W(lOO) 8j =0deg 9 = (1212)

Withrow

Estrup and Anderson

Papageorgopoulos and Chen

o 50 100 150 Primary Energy (eV) SP-1l93

200

152

shows a comparison of elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam taken

after hydrogen adsorption From the general appearance of the data Estrup

18and Andersons profi1e appears shifted up in energy about 5 eV with respect

to the profile taken here This suggests the possibility of a discrepancy

in the energy measurement The line shapes are similar howeve~ although

Estrup and Anderson found one well-defined peak around 75 eV whereas in this

work a peak at 67 eV and an additional shoulder between 85 eV and 90 eV is

21seen Papageorgopou1os and Chen did not observe the large peak below 50 eV

nor the double peaked structure above 100 eV reported by both other researchers

These discrepancies cou1deasi1y be due to a residual magnetic field in the

work of Papageorgopou1os and Chen It can be concluded from these comparishy

sons that control over experimental conditions is crucial for the reproduction

of data

Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores

16 17 can be extracted from a sufficient set of elastic intensity proh1es

Although the data base is small here a preliminary analysis of the clean

tungsten data has been conducted by Duke using a microscopic quantum-field

16theory formalism of low energy electron diffraction In this formalism a

model for the electron-solid interaction is used in an attempt to match

theoretical line shape predictions to experimentally observed elastic LEED

intensity profiles An important feature of this microscopic approach is the

strong interactions between the incident electron and valence electrons in

the solid The inelastic mean free path A is about 3-8 X for most ee

materials for electron energies of 30 ~ E S 200 As a consequence electrons

which are observed elastically have been backscattered within the first

--------------

153

several surface layers of the solid and hence LEED elastic profiles are

surface sensitive Elastic backscattering of the electrons is described by

short range electron-ion core interactions Information on the configurashy

tion of the surface ion cores is extracted from the elastic energy profiles

by varying parameters in the theory and obtaining the best fit to the data

Theoretical analysis of elastic energy profiles from tungsten at energies

above 100 eV is computationally difficult because of the large number of

phase shifts needed to describe the electron-ion core scattering Hence the

exp arimental profiles were taken only for energies E 1gt 125 eV pr~

Comparisons of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity

profiles for the (00) (10) and (11) beams are given in Figure 46 The

theoretical fit to the experimental data was made by taking an inelastic

mean free path Aee equal to 8 K and an inner potential Vl which represents

t he rea1 part 0 f h 1 1 i on16 equa1 to 8 eV Thetee ectron-e ectron 1nteract

agreement in peak position is good for the (10) beam in the range

25 eV lt E lt 125 eV and for the (11) beam in the range 60 eV lt E lt 100 eV ~ ~ ~ ~

The theoretical and experimental line shapes of the (10) beam show remarkable

agreement but the line shapes of the (11) beam do not fit as well For the

(00) beam the theoretical profile is not similar to the experimental plot

except for the peak at 117 eV Most of this discrepancy for the (00) beam

probably arises from the differences in theoretical and experimental incishy

dence and aximuthal angles used to obtain the profiles The theoretical

profile was calculated assuming a primary electron beam normally incident

experimentally this is not possible with the spectrometer ~sed here since

the (00) beam would not be visible on the LEED screen under these conditions

~~ ~~-----------

---------------------~------------------

154

o

III C

~ C

H 1 o

1

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

-Experiment Withrow and Luscher

g =(00)

o-o-oTheory Duke T = 10 K ej =cpj =0 V=8eVI Aee 811

o 140 SP-1l91

Figure 46 Comparison of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity profiles for clean tungsten (100) surface Theoretical results have been calculated by Duke

155

Data has been obtained for the temperature dependence of clean

elastic intensity profiles No differences in the clean surface (10) and

(11) profiles taken at 600 C and -1500 C are seen even though the LEED pattern

symmetry changes from a (lxl) pattern to a c(2x2) pattern Apparently these

two elastic intensity profiles are not sensitive to the scattering geometry

changes that are manifested in the LEED pattern change

19 92 It has been speculated that the extra half order spots may

result from hydrogen on the surface As shown above the (10) and (11)

profiles dont change even though the half order spots appear on cooling

This may not be surprising if the extra spots seen on cooling the undosed

crystal are related to hydrogen on the surface The cross section for hydrogen

92 93backscattering 1S very weak compared to scattering from tungsten While

a priori it is not necessarily true that the addition of a weak scatterer will

have little effect on intensity profiles this does seem to be the case for

hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten Adsorption of hydrogen has no effect on

18the (00) profile from tungsten (100) and it was found here that~daorption

of hydrogen has very little effect on the (10) beam profile out to 015

monolayer coverage as can be concluded from Figure 321 On the other hand

it is true that adsorption of hydrogen did alter the (11) beam A second

explanation for the extra spots seen on cooling the crystal is that they

result from a tungsten surface reconstruction No theoretical calculations

have been performed which would indicate how reconstruction would affect the

intensity profiles The sensitivity of the profiles to an hypothesized

surface atom reconstruction could be determined from calculations similar to

those leading to the theoretical profiles given in Figure 46 Such a

156

theoretical calculation would be of interest as it would help evaluate how

much credence should be given to a reconstruction hypothesis

More than one atomic geometry may be associated with a given surface

translational symmetry ie associated with the same LEED spot pattern

Different geometries however would be manifested via differences in the

1intensity profiles associated with the same spot pattern After hydrogen

o 0adsorption to 015 monolayer at 60 C and -150 C both the LEED pattern symmetr~

c(2x2) and the elastic intensity profiles are the same Thus this data would indicate hydrogen adsorbs into the same surface atomic geometry at the two

temperatures A comparison of elastic intensity profiles from the undosed and

hydrogen dosed cold surface is given in Figure 47 The LEED pattern for both

conditions has a c(2x2) symmetry The profiles are not the same particularly

the (11) profile above 100 eV and the (1212) profile below 50 eV Hence

the atomic geometry responsible for the two sets of profiles may be different

even though the observed pattern symmetry c(2x2) is the same

The intensity dependence on temperature of the LEED beams has been

observed The intensity of integral order beams monitored from the clean

surface increases with decreasing temperature as shown in Figure 324 The

22 95 exponential temperature dependence obtained is pred1cted from a kinematic

treatment of electron scattering in which thermal vibrations are included via

an effective Debye-Waller factor Experimental Debye temperatures aD can

be calculated from the slopes of the straight lines in Figure 324 22 96

For the (10) beam taken with a primary energy of 1105 eV aD is

calculated to be 280oK 97 This is on the order of the Debye temperature for

~ 0bulk tungsten and higher than the Debye temperature of 183 K found by

157

Figure 47 Comparison of experimental (10) (11) and (1212) elastic intensity profiles from a cold tungsten (100) surface for hydrogen adsorption in the fast state (undosed surface) and in the ~2 state

158

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(100)

g (10)

1 o

o

OJ 0deg T -150degC Undosed and Dosed with H2

shyCl shy+shy 1 0 shyCl

o gt +shy(J)

c Q)

C 0 H

g (1212)

1

o

o

o 140

159

Estrup13 for the (10) beam for intensities taken between 6000K and 8000K

0The Debye temperature for the (11) beam is calculated to be 410 K The

middot h 1 1 95va1ues 0f eD f ound h ere seem to be anoma1ous 1y h19 S1nce ca cu at10ns

indicate that the surface Debye temperature should be lower than the bulk

Debye temperature

The temperature dependence of the half order beam is not the same

as found for the integer order beams Figure 325 shows that the intensity

of this beam increases at different exponential rates over two temperature

regions Down to about -750C the intensity increase is exponential but with

a steeper temperature dependence than observed with the integer order beams

Below -75oC the intensity increases at approximately the same exponential

rate as the integer order beams This same result is found at primary

energies of both 42 eV and 115 eV The effect is reversible with temperature

Yonehara and Schmidt19 measured the temperature dependence of the half order

beams and fit their results to a straight line on a linear scale However

for the data they took immediately after flashing to 25000K an exponential

dependence as found here appears to be as good if not better fit

0Below -75 C the half order beam intensity increases at approximately

the same exponential rate as the integer order beams This suggests that in

this lower temperature region the intensity increase can be explained by the

0 0Debye-Wa1ler factor However between 100 C and -75 C it is not known why

the (1212) spots appear and then increase in intensity so strongly

The intensity dependence on temperature of the (1212) beam

below OoC can be compared to the temperature dependence of the fast state H+

ion intensity These data are given in Figures 312 and 325 Because the

----------------~~ ~~~~~

160

a+ ion yield from the fast state also increases with decreasing temperature

a possible correlation between the appearance of this ion signal and the

appearance of the half order beams is suggested It is tempting to hypothesize

that the fast state is adsorbed into a c(2x2) array and hence half order spots

are produced on cooling However this connection probably cannot be made

For one thing the estimated coverage of the fast state is several orders of

magnitude below a coverage reasonably expected to exert an influence on the

LEED pattern In addition while the fast state has a high total desorption

cross section with the ion signal decaying rapidly after turning oriltthe

electron gun no evidence of this type of behavior is found for the LEED spot

intensities if a corresponding experiment is made A depletion of the fast

state in the electron beam does not affect the half order LEED spot intensities

oFinally in the region below middot75 C the ion signal increases reversibly with

temperature at a steep rate while the LEED spot intensity increases reversshy

ib1y at a slow rate ie the intensity correlation is not good in this

range These arguments do not refute the possibility that the half order

spots are a hydrogen phenomena They strongly indicate however that a

correlation cannot be made between the hydrogen ions observed from the undosed

surface and the appearance of the half order spots aside from the obvious

result that they both occur over the same temperature range It would appear

more reasonable to suggest that the formation of a c(2x2) scattering symmetry

on the surface via reconstruction or some other mechanism provides a

binding site into which a species from the ambient can adsorb and subseshy

quent1y be desorbed The identity of that species is not known

-----------shy

161

45 Electron Scattering Results

Energy loss spectra for electrons scattered from the clean and

hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surface are given in Figures 326 and 327

The second derivative mode has been employed in order to suppress background

as discussed in Appendix B Data have been presented for energy losses

between a and 40 eV for a primary electron beam energy of 110 eV

Several general comments can be made A comparison of the clean

spectra taken at the two temperatures shows they are nearly identical The

only difference is a slight enhancement in the low temperature data of the

shoulder at w = 75 eV (barely evident in the figures) It might be noted

that adsorption of hydrogen produces as peak at 75 eV and the small change

in the low temperature spectrum near this energy may be an indication of a

small hydrogen coverage An attempt was made to observe effects of the fast

state on the clean spectrum After cooling the crystal the fast state was

allowed to populate by turning the gun off for adsorption times of 10 minutes

The spectrum taken after preparing the crystal in this way was identical to

those obtained immediately after cooling Hence fast state hydrogen does

not perturb the electronic structure unlike ~ state hydrogen This result

is not surprising because of the very low coverages calculated for the fast

state from the desorption measurement

Hydrogen adsorption into the ~ states perturbs the clean surface

o 0loss spectrum The same changes are observed at both 60 C and -150 C The

most dramatic changes that occur with increasing coverage are the growth of

a 75 eV loss the movement down in loss energy of the structure at 21 eV in

the clean spectrum and the annihilation of the peak at 25 eV In addition

the loss peak at 107 eV decreases in intensity somewhat

162

Definite changes in the loss spectra are seen (for example at

w = 75 eV) for work function changes of 003 eV This is a coverage of only

3 percent hydrogen At coverages corresponding to a work function change of

015 eV the 75 eV peak is well-developed and the 21 eV structure has moved

down ~ 1 eV While hydrogen is adsorbing at room temperature from 0 to 15

percent of a monolayer half order spots develop in the LEED pattern As

noted before half order spots also develop in the LEED pattern by cooling the

ocrystal to -150 C However electron loss measurements from the cold flashed

surface dont show any changes that correspond to hydrogen on the surface

Thus no correlation can be drawn using electron loss measurements between

the half order patterns obtained by hydrogen dosing and by cooling the crystal

Interpretation of the structure in the energy loss spectra taken

here is nontrivial Although the data incorporates information on the elecshy

tronic structure of the surface and near surface region ie represents

bulk and surface single particle transitions and collective oscillations

both theoretical and experimental complexities arise in attempting to extract

electronic structure from the data While the electron energy loss has been

measured with high resolution information on the momentum transfer ~ q

involved in the electron solid inelastic interaction is not retained since

1) the analyzer integrates over a wide range of ~ qs and 2) the backscattered

electron has undergone at least two collisions - an inelastic scattering

with an accompanying momentum transfer which is not enough to turn the

electron around and an elastic scattering which does Hence the analyzer is

expected to be sensitive to loss mechanisms which are well-defined in energy

but relatively independent of momentum transfer Transitions satisfying these

163

conditions are possible in tungsten Luscher has shown25 that at least one

relatively flat and narrow d-band in tungsten located near the Fermi level

acts as the final state for electron excitations involving core electrons

This d-band may be operative as a final state for transitions involving

valence and adsorbate electrons as well

25The structure at 210 eV and 255 eV has been identified as

resulting from surface and bulk plasmons Adsorption of hydrogen increases

the energy of the surface plasmon but does not affect the energy of the bulk

plasmon

The energy losses at 381 eV 346 eV and 324 eV remain constant

as a function of hydrogen coverage These losses correspond in both relative

strengths and separation in energy to tungsten core electron excitations from

he 5 an (doublet ) eve 1s f ound h at 36 Vt p d 4f 1 1nmiddot x-ray p otoem1SS10n 99 9 e

333 eV and 311 eV below the Fermi level A comparison of these photo-

emission values to the energy losses observed here would indicate the position

of the final state operative in the energy loss measurements is 13 eV above

the Fermi level

It would be convenient to use this value) 13 eV for the final

state energy in interpreting the rest of the sharply peaked structure arising

from electron transitions There are difficulties with such an approach

however The data being compared in calculating the final state energy

location have been obtained with two techniques that perturb the adsorbateshy

plus-solid system in distinctly different ways The observed energy losses

in electron scattering are strongly influenced by interband oscillators

electron screening and relaxation effects and these perturbations are not

164

constant as a function of loss energy Hence extension of the 13 eV value

in interpreting data at other loss energies may not be valid None the less

using the 13 eV final state the peaks in the clean ELS spectrum at 25 eV

and 40 eV would correspond to peaks in the photoemission spectra at 12 eV

(25 eV - 13 eV) and at 27 eV (40 eV - 13 eV) respectively There is

no obvious correspondence between these peaks and structure seen in clean

35 36surface photoemission spectra The structure changes on adsorption in

the ELS spectra for 0 eV S w ~ 4 eV may reflect the sharp photoemission loss

which appears at 25 eV as hydrogen coverage increases The strong 75 eV

energy loss which appears in the ELS spectra as hydrogen adsorbs onto the

crystal would correspond to structure in photoemission data near 62 eV

(75 eV - 13 eV) Recently photoemission peaks at 52 eV and between

10068 eV and 78 eV have been reported From these comparisons it can be

seen that quantitative interpretation of the fine structure in the energy

loss measurements cannot be made with this simple model

165

CHAPTER 5

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

An experimental apparatus for surface research has been designed

constructed and successfully placed in operation It incorporates the

necessary hardware and electronics for performing several complementary

surface probing techniques including Auger electron spectroscopy retarding

potential work function measurements low energy electron diffraction electron

energy loss spectroscopy and electron stimulated desorption of ions System

electronics allow the instrument to be easily switched between the techniques

The apparatus has been used to study the chemisorption of hydrogen on a

tungsten single crystal surface over the temperature range 600C to -150

0C

The instrument combines an electron gun with an energy spectrometer

a LEED display system and a crystal manipulator The electron gun is capable

of focusing a monoenergetic electron current of up to 21 ~A onto a

macroscopic sample The gun has been operated from 5 eV to 1800 eV The

high resolution high sensitivity spectrometer consists of a retarding field

analyzer in series with two electrostatic deflection analyzers The energy

resolution of the spectrometer is 21 without using the retarding field

analyzer This can be improved to less than 1 under some conditions by

applying a retarding field The spectrometer output can be detected using

a atemeter or using modulation techniques The instrument has been used to

analyze electron and ion signals from the sample and to determine the charge

to mass ratio of desorbed ions The experimental sample a tungsten crystal

which has been polished to within 01 0 of the (100) face is mounted on the

166

end of a crystal manipulator The manipulator is used to position the sample

as needed A two grid LEED display system has been used to study LEED

pattern symmetry The intensities of LEED spots have been monitored with a

spot photometer

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental conditions using Auger electron spectroscopy The Auger

spectrum obtained after flashing the crystal to 22000 K is free of carbon and

oxygen Auger structure The electron gun could be operated under normal

experimental conditions without contaminating the surface but a carbon Auger

peak appears if high gun currents and voltages are used This effect Crul

be taken into consideration when interpreting the data Some weak structure

in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface is seen between 475 eV and

525 eVa It is not possible to conclusively determine if this structure

results from Auger transitions in tungsten or from some other source

Retarding potential work function measurements have been made as

a reproducible measure of hydrogen coverage Adsorption of hydrogen onto

othe tungsten (100) crystal at 60 C yields a maximum work function change of

098 plusmn 004 eVa This is in good agreement with previously reported values

The work function change with exposure to hydrogen for the tungsten sample

at -lSOoc was found to be the same within experimental accuracy as found

at higher temperature The maximum work function change at -lSOoc is

092 plusmn 004 eVa Cooling the flashed crystal from 2200 C to -lSOoC resulted

in an increase in the work function of approximately 005 eVa An intrinsic

(clean surface) temperature dependence of this magnitude appears reasonable

from theoretical considerations

167

The time-of-flight technique employed for mass analysis was found

to work well Ion species H+ and 0+ as well as H + have been identified2

Relative intensities of the ion yields could only be estimated with this

technique as instrumented H+ ions are electron desorbed from the surface

after adsorption of hydrogen In addition H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface after a flash if the crystal was cooled below room temperature No

HZ+ ions were desorbed from the crystal However H2+ and H+ ions produced

by ionization of the background and also by ESD from surfaces in the experishy

mental chamber were detected under certain operating conditions This signal

could be separated from the ions originating at the crystal surface by biasing

the crystal several volts positive with respect to the spectrometer

The distribution in energy of H+ ions electron desorbed from a 60 0 C

tungsten (100) surface has been observed The distribution has a normal line

shape with a peak intensity at 30 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a half width

of Z6 eV No evidence of distinct ~l and ~Z adsorption states was found in

the energy distribution line shape the distribution is the same for coverages

corresponding to both the ~Z adsorption state and the ~l plus ~2 adsorption

states The intensity of the U+ ion signal is coverage dependent The deshy

pendence found here is in agreement with previously reported work The maxshy

imum in intensity of the ion yield occurs for a work function change of 018

eV The total desorption cross section for hydrogen ions from the ~2 state

is 5xlO-ZO cmZ bull

An H+ ion signal can be desorbed from the undosed (100) surface if

the crystal temperature is lowered below room temperature T~fs represents

a previously unreported hydrogen adsorption state Experiments in which

the pressure was carefully monitored indicate that this hydrogen results

168

from adsorption onto the crystal from the background However the state

labeled the fast state is not populated by the adsorption of H2 from the

gas handling system The adsorbing species that populates the fast state

is not known Hydrogen coverage in the fast state is estimated to be ~10-4

monolayer which is an extremely small coverage The fast state hydrogen

desorbs with a broad energy distribution which has a peak intensity at

25 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a tail extending up to gt9 eV The total

17 2desorption cross section for H+ from this state is high lxlO- cm This is

on the same order of magnitude as the cross section for desorption of the

~ hydrogen state However no evidence of CO or oxygen contaminants which

are associated with the ~ state was found The techniques used to chemshy

ically characterize the surface were sensitive to about 1 percent of a mono-

layer so these two contaminants could have been present at coverages less

than 1 percent

Hydrogen (H2) dosed onto the low temperature surface co-adsorbs

with the fast state in a separate e state This can be concluded from energy

distribution and desorption curve measurements The maximum ion yield obshy

tainable from the low temperature surface occurs for a work function change

of 011 eV This is 007 eV lower than the maximum in the ion yield from

the room temperature hydrogen dosed surface This difference may indicate

that the mechanism responsible for the decrease in ion yield as the ~l state

fills is operative at a lower hydrogen coverage at low temperatures An

alternative possibility is that hydrogen coverage at the low temperature can

not be measured by the same expression relating coverage to work function

change as used at the higher temperature

169

Low energy electron diffraction pattern changes observed as a

function of hydrogen coverage on the room temperature surface are in agreeshy

ment with those reported in the literature The surface translational symshy

metry is strongly coverage dependent The maximum in the c(2x2) pattern

associated with the ~2 state occurs at a work function change of 015 eV for

room temperature adsorption If the crystal is flashed to ~22000K and then

cooled below room temperature the (lxl) pattern characteristic of the clean

surface changes into a c(2x2) pattern Since H+ ions can be electron desorbed

from the flashed surface if the crystal is cooled to this same temperature

range and since the ~2 state hydrogen is known to produce a c(2x2) pattern

it has been suggested that the low temperature c(2x2) LEED pattern may result

from hydrogen on the surface However no evidence was found to support this

hypothesis The ions desorbed from the cold surface did not originate from

the f 2 state but from a distinctly different state labeled the fast state

It is questioned whether the low coverage in the fast state is sufficient to

produce half order LEED spots There is no indication from the ELS measureshy

ments that hydrogen has diffused to the surface from the bulk Electron

energy loss spectra show almost no change on cooling the crystal below room

temperature These spectra are sensitive to electronic structure changes

resulting from hydrogen adsorption of as little as 3 percent of a monolayer

The (10) and (11) LEED beam intensity profiles taken from the undosed surface

are not changed by cooling the crystal It would be of interest to compare

this experimental result to theoretical elastic intensity profile calculations

from both a normal and a recons tructed tungsten surface This would help

determine if reconstruction is a viable explanation for the cold surface

170

c(2x2) phenomenon

Low energy electron diffraction elastic intensity profiles for

several beams have been reported from the clean tungsten (100) surface and

from this surface dosed with hydrogen in the ~2 state These profiles have

been compared to published data where possible Careful control over expershy

imental parameters is essential in order to obtain agreement between the data

The clean surface intensity profiles have been compared to preliminary theoretshy

ical calculations While fair agreement Catl be obtained both experimental

and theoretical problems must be solved before a reliable calculation of

atomic geometry for the hydrogen over layer can be made A comparison of

experimental profiles for the low temperature undosed and hydrogen dosed

c(2x2) patterns suggests that the atomic geometries responsible for these

identical patterns arenot the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been presented as a

f~~ction of hydrogen coverage Changes in the electronic structure at the

surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption are observed Structure due to

the surface and hulk plasmons are identified and peaks due to tungsten

Sp and 4f core level transitions can be identified by comparison to published

photoemission data Interpretation of other structure in the spectra requires

more study

171

REFERENCES

1 C B Duke Jap J App1 Phys 13 (1974) to be published

2 For example see R R Ford Advan Catalysis 21 51 (1970) for review of CO adsorption on transition metals or J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chern Phys 54 4969 (1971) and T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et PrPri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155 for a review of hydrogen adsorption on tungsten (100)

3 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Vac Sci Techno1 ~ 63 (1971)

4 P A Redhead Vacuum~ 203 (1962)

5 G Ehrlich Advan Catalysis 14 221 (1963)

6 L A Petermann Progress in Surface Science vol 3 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1972) p 1

7 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chern Phys 21 5352 (1969)

8 T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et Propri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155

9 D L Adams and L H Germer Sur Sci 23 419 (1970)

10 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 40 295 (1973)

11 G Tibbetts PhD thesis University of Illinois 1967

12 D L Adams Sur Sci 42 12 (1974)

13 P J Estrup The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 191

14 C B Duke and C W Tucker Jr Sur Sci 11 231 (1969)

15 C B Duke Electron Emission Spectroscopy edited by W Dekeyser et a1 (D Reidel Publishing Co Dordrecht Holland 1973) p 1

16 C B Duke N O Lipari and G E Laramore J Vac Sci Techno1 11 180 (1974)

17 M G Laga11y T C Ngoc and M B Webb Phys Rev Lett 26 1557 (1971)

172

18 P J Estrup and J Anderson J Chern Phys 45 2254 (1966)

19 K Yonehara and L D Schmidt Sur Sci 12 238 (1971)

20 E W Plummer and A E Bell J Vac Sci Techno1 2 583 (1972) bull

21 C A Papageorgopoulos and J M Chen Sur Sc i 39 283 (1973)

22 R F Wallis B C Clark and R Herman The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 171

23 M R Leggett and R A Armstrong Sur Sci 24 404 (1971)

24 D Edwards Jr PhD thesis University of Illinois 1970

25 P E Luscher PhD thesis Northwestern University 1974 to be published

26 R Gomer Field Emission and Field Ionization (Harvard U Press Cambridge Ma ss 1961)

27 R D Young Phys Rev 113 110 (1959)

28 J W Gadzuk and E W Plummer Rev Mod Phys 45 487 (1973)

29 C B Duke and M E Alpounderieff J Chern Phys 46 923 (1967)

30 J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Bl 2110 (1970)

31 C N Berglund and W E Spicer Phys Rev 136 part A Al030 (1964)

32 F M Propst and T C Piper J Vac Sci Technol ~ 53 (1967)

33 G Herzberg Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure I Spectra of Diatomic Molecules (D Van Nostrand New York 1963) 2nd ed

34 E W Plummer and J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Lett 25 1493 (1970)

35 B J Waclawski and E W Plummer Phys Rev Lett 29 783 (1972)

36 B Feuerbacher and B Fitton Phys Rev Lett 29 786 (1972)

37 P A Redhead Can J Phys 42 886 (1964)

38 D Menzel and R Gomer J Chern Phys 41 3311 (1964)

39 D Lichtman and R McQuistan Progress in Nuclear Energy Analytical Chemistry edited by H A Elion and D C Stewart (Pergamon Press New York 1965) series 9 vol 4 p 93

173

40 U N Ageev and N I Ionov Progress in Surface Science vol 5 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1974) p 1

41 T E Madey Sur Sci 36 281 (1973)

42 A Benninghoven E Loebach and N Treitz J Vac Sci Techno1 2 600 (1972)

43 L W Swanson A E Bell C H Hinrichs L C Crouser and B E Evans Literature Review of Adsorption on Metal Surfaces vol 1 NASA CR-72402 (NASA Lewis Research Center Cleveland Ohio 1967) p 76

44 R V Culver and F C Tompkins Advan Catalysis l 67 (1959)

45 See reference 43 p 49

46 J A Becker Actes du 2ieme Congres International de 1a Cata1yse (Edition Technip Paris 1961) 1777

47 R A Armstrong Can J Phys 44 1753 (1966)

48 B J Hopkins and K R Pender Sur Sci ~ 316 (1966)

49 R A Collins and B H B1ott J App1 Phys 40 5390 (1969)

50 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chem Phys 54 4969 (1971)

51 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 42 485 (1974)

52 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 52 1150 (1970)

53 See reference 7 Fig 8

54 K Fujiwara J Phys Soc Japan 11 7 (1957)

55 G D Bond Disc Faraday Soc 41 200 (1966)

56 F M Propst unpublished

57 R L Park The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 281

58 T B Grime1y Adsorption-Desorption Phenomena edited by F Ricca (Academic Press New York 1972) p 215

59 L W Anders R S Hansen and L S Bartell J Chern Phys 595277(1973)

60 J R Schrieffer J Vac Sci Techno1 2 561 (1972)

174

61 D M Newns Phys Rev 178 1123 (1969)

62 J R Schrieffer and R Gomer Sur Sci 25 315 (1971)

63 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn Phys Rev Lett 30 610 (1973)

64 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn to be published

65 P J Jennings and E G McRae Sur Sci 23 363 (1970)

66 W H Weinberg J Vac Soc Technol lQ 89 (1973)

67 L A Harris J Appl Phys 39 1419 (1968)

68 C C Chang Sur Sci 25 53 (1971)

69 T Cooper PhD thesis University of Illinois Urbana Illinois 1970

70 E M Purcell Phys Rev 54 818 (1938)

71 R Herzog Zeits F Physik 89 449 (1934)

72 Coordinated Science Laboratory Progress Report for July 1970 through June 1971 University of Illinois Urbana Illinois

73 See for example Handbook and Catalog of Operational Amplifiers BurrshyBrown Research Corp 1969 p 44

74 R W Jnyner J Rickman and M W Roberts Sur Sci 39 445 (1973)

75 C Lea and C H B Mee Sur Sci 11 332 (1971)

76 W A Coghlan and R E Clausing A Catalog of Calculated Auger Transitions for the Elements ORNL-TM-3576 (Oak Ridge National Lab Oak Ridge Tenn 1971)

77 As read by optical pyrometer the edge of the target measured 22000 K and the center 2500oK

78 B B Dayton Trans 3rd AVS National Vacuum Symposium 1956 (Pergamon Press New York 1957) p 5

79 T E Madey Sur Sci 33 355 (1972)

80 S C Brown Basic Data of Plasma Physics (Technology Press of MIT Cambridge Mass and John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 115

81 H D Hagstrum Rev Mod Phys 23 185 (1951)

175

82 M Nishijima PhD thesis University of Illinois 1969

83 G D Watts A R Jones and B J Hopkins Sur Sci 45 705 (1974)

84 R A Armstrong Sur Sc i sect 478 (1967)

85 E H B1evis and C R Crowell Phys Rev 133 part A A580 (1964)

86 C R Crowell and R A Armstrong Phys Rev 114 1500 (1959)

87 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 55 4253 (1971)

88 R Frauenfelder J Vac Sci Technol sect 388 (1969)

89 G E Moore and F C Unterwald J Chem Phys 40 2639 (1964)

90 S Dushman Scientific Foundations of Vacuum Technigue (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 19

91 P S P Wei J Chem Phys 53 2939 (1970)

92 J C Tracy private communication

93 J J Lander and J Morrison J Appl Phys 34 3517 (1963)

94 M Fink and A C Yates Atomic Data (to be published)

95 G E Laramore and C B Duke Phys Rev ~ I 4783 (1970)

96 J F Wendelken PhD thesis University of Illinois 1975

97 An inner potential of 8 eV has been assumed in this calculation

98 A Guinier X-Ray Diffraction (W H Freeman and Co San Francisco 1963) p 192

99 K Seigbahn C Nordling A Fahlman R Nordberg K Hamrin J Helman G Johansson T Bergmark S E Karlsson K Lindgren and B Lindberg ESCA - Atomic Molecular and Solid State Structure Studied by Means of Electron Spectroscopy (Almqvist Wiksells Uppsala 1967)

100 W F Egelhoff and D L Perry Phys Rev Lett 34 93 (1975)

176

APPENDIX A

A tungsten tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple spot-welded to the

side of the crystal is used to measure target temperatures The thermocouple

was calibrated against a copper-constantan standard A low temperature

freezing slush of isopentane (2-methylbutane) was made in a dewar by adding

liquid nitrogen (Isopentane freezes at -15989degC) The solution was allowed

to slowly warm up to room temperature over three hours during which a semi-

static calibration was made The reference junction was kept in a slush of

distilled ice water The calibration is shown in Figure AI

Using an identical technique a tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26

rhenium thermocouple was also calibrated as shown in Figure A2 TIlis thermoshy

couple does not have an inflection point in the range 00 to -195degC and it

00 h t t1mes more sens1t1ve over t he temperature range to -lSOoC than the1S e1g

tungstentungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple A tungsten-S rhenium wire should

spot-weld to tungsten more readily than a pure tungsten wire Thus because

of its increased sensitivity and ease of attaching to the tungsten crystal a

tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple appears a better

temperature sensor for low temperature research on tungsten

In the apparatus used the wires associated with the target manipulashy

tor including the thermocouple leads wind around the manipulator shaft to

provide rotational motion In order to get the 76 mm (003 in) diameter

thermocouple wires to wind smoothly around the shaft it was found necessary to

spring load them by turning a short segment of the wires into a 16 mm diameter

spring Unfortunately the tungsten-5 rhenium wire available proved too

brittle to turn into a spring and thus could not be used

012 _ ___r____~_-r____~_-r____~_ ___r______r___r____r__r___

C- WI W-26 Re Thermocouple Calibration Reference Junction at OdegC W Lead +

~ 008-lJ

W-26 Re LeadshyiE w 004 ~ 0shy

8J

0 o E

t-shy-I -I

Q)

c -004 tshy

-008 I I I I I I I

-200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 shy

Temperature (OC) SP-1069

Figure Al Calibration curve for W-5 ReW-26 Re thermocouple

o

-gt -04E -lL ~ w -OS 2 0shy

8J -12

o E

W-5 Re I W-26 Re Thermocouple Co libration Reference Junct ion at OdegC W-5Re Lead + W-26 Re Leadshy

J shy --shy~ ~ t- 16 0----

-20 I I

-200 -ISO -160 -140 -120 -100 -SO -60 -40 -20 0

Temperature (OC)

SP-1l73

Figure A2 Calibration curve for WW-26 Re thermocouple

-J 00

179

APPENDIX B

When operating the spectrometer in the electron mode at an effective

pass energy E the output current of the electron multiplier N(E) is proporshy

tional to the electron current originating at the target with energy between E

and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance solid angle of the analyzer

An energy distribution of the electron signal from the target can be measured

by sweeping the effective pass energy of the instrument This distribution

consists of rapidly varying true secondary and characteristic loss structure

interpretable in terms of electron transitions and collective oscillations in

the target plus a smoothly varying background In order to separate the

structure ~rom the background the energy distribution is electronically

67differentiated using a technique proposed by Harrismiddot A small sinusoidal

oscillation is applied to the effective pass energy of the spectrometer so

that the energy of the electrons passing through the spectrometer oscillates

around the instantaneous dc pass energy E If the detected current N(E) is 3

expanded in a Taylors series around the energy E where the sinusoidal 3

oscillation is E-E = K sin wt the first four terms are 3

N(E) N(E ) + K dN (E l (1 - cos 2wt)3 dE

E=E E=E i3

(3 sin wt - sin 3wt) +

E=E 3

Rearranging

180

dN(E) ) + K3 term + S1n wt (B2)N(E) = N(E ) + + K dE(i E=E

i

K2 d2N(E) 4 )+ K term + cos 2wt + + ( 4 2dE E=E1

The coefficients of the sin wt and cos 2wt terms are found to be proportional

respectively to the first two derivatives of N(E) providing K is small enough

such that the higher order terms in K can be dropped Under this assumption

a signal proportional to the first or second derivative of N(E) is obtained

by synchronously detecting the appropriate harmonic of the output

If a peak structure in the output signal is represented by a

Gaussian G(E) centered at E and the background represented by a polynomialo

in E B(E) then N(E) and the first two derivatives of N(E) evaluated at E o

become

N(E) = B(E) + G(E) (B3) -~(E-EO)2

2 d N(E) = a + bE + cE + + 1 e 2 (B4)

(2TT)2

2N(E=E ) = a + bE + cE + d 1 (B5)o o 0 cr (2TT)2

dN(E) = b + 2cE + 0 (B6)o E=E

dE

o

-d 1 = 2c + (B7)1 2 0 (2TT)2 0

E=E o

- -

2

181

From Equation B6 the first derivative evaluated at E has no contribution o

from the structure G(E) Extremum points in dN(E)dE occur at (E ~ E )2 = 0 o

if the background terms of order 3 or greater are not considered Using this

result in Equation B6 gives

~dltplusmng) edN(E) = b + 2c (E to) + bull I (B8)dE

0- 0 (2n)2E=E + 0

0shy

The relation between the original signal N(E) and the synchronously

detected signals can be seen from Equations B4 through B8 There is some

background suppression in both modes If N(E) is slowly varying the higher

order background terms that remain are small The peak to peak height of

the first harmonic signal is

1dN dN = 4ccr + - 2cb 1 e-2~-2crG(E-E ~ 0) (B9)

dE dE 0 (2n)2 0

E=E -0E=E +u o o

The intensity of the second harmonic signal evaluated at E is approximately 0

proportional to1 G(E) Hence using the stated assumptions the detected 0 2 0

first and second harmonics of N(E) contain structure which is directly

proportional to G(E)

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as is

commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in looking at

electron scattering energy loss measurements

182

APPENDIX C

The process of desorption of ions from a surface by electron

bombardment is referred to as electron stimulated desorption The theory to

account for this phenomenon was independently proposed by Redhead37 and by

38Menzel and Gomer A brief explanation of their model follows

In Figure Cl schematic potential energy diagrams are given for the

metal plus ground state adsorbate CM + A) and metal plus ionic state (M- + A+)

as a function of separation distance x of the adsorbing atom or ion from the

metal surface These two curves are labeled VG(x) and V(x) for the ground

state and ionic state respectively The nature of these interactions has

been described37 8l and several interaction calculations for hydrogen on metal

59 63surfaces have been g~ven The zero in potential energy in Figure 41 is

defined as the energy of the ion A+ at rest at infinity from the surface of M

The nucleus of the chemisorbed adsorbate is located at the minimum in the

ground state potential energy curve The wave function ~G(x) of the adsorbate

in the ground state on the surface is shown centered at a position x which ~

corresponds to the minimum in energy of VG

VG determines ~G(x) Vertical

transitions from the ground state to the ionic state (labeled 1 in the

diagram) are induced by incident electron bombardment of the surface

Secondary electrons leaving the surface also can cause such transitions

Once excited the ion is subjected to a repulsive force and moves away from

the surface (indicated by 2) The ionized adsorbate can be neutralized as it

leaves the surface and hence desorb as a neutral (indicated by 3) or it can

be de-excited back to the ground state and not desorb (indicated by 4) Ions

183

V(x)

gt ~ Ion ~ ~ 2 )III V(xi)(I) c +E K M-+A+w 0 f (v)+=c (I) +shy0 Cl

14 3 I-ltP Neutral

M+A

Ede t

ltPG (x)

~

DistanceX SP-1201

Figuze Cl Schematic diagram of adsorbate-metal interactions showing the transitions involved in the theory of electron stimulated desorption

184

that originate at x x leave the surface with energy V(x) The energyL L

80distribution of the desorbed ions f(V(xraquo is determined by the reflectionL

2of the probability density distribution I~G(xi)1 through the ionic state

energy curve This can be given by the expression

P(x ) f(V(xraquo

L (Cl)L ~~Ix = x

L

where N is the number of species A adsorbed in the ground state per unit

area a is the cross section for excitation of the species A from the groundex

state to the ionic state (transition 1) ~G(x) is defined above and P(x ) isi

the probability that an ion starts from the position x = x and moves awayL

from the L gLvensurface without being neutralized P(x) can be by373881

P(x ) exp(- J~dx ~)i x v(x) (C2)

i

where R(x) is the rate that the ions produced at the surface by electron

impact are reneutralized v(x) is the velocity of the ion at a distance x

from the surface This depends explicitly on V(x) as shown by Equation C3

for an ion of mass M and charge q

2q (V(X i ) - V(Xraquo)21

v(x) ( M (C3)

Additional complexities for example multiple initial and ionic states or

electron induced state conversion can be added to this simple model

185

The mass transport occurring at the surface during an ESD measurement

can be described in a kinetic treatment which relates the observed ion signal

to physical parameters characteristic of the experimental conditions The

change with time of the surface coverage per area of an adsorbate dNdt is

given by the rate of arrival of the adsorbate onto the surface minus the rate

of desorption from the surface In the simplest formulation of these proshy

cesses only adsorption from the background and desorption due to electron

bombardment need be considered The electron stimulated desorption flux of

ions is assumed proportional to the electron current density j and to the e

surface coverage per unit area N The proportionality constant is

tthe total desorption cross section Q (NE ) Qt(NE ) is in general a pr~ pr~

function of both the coverage and the primary electron energy For the

simple model given above the total desorption cross section is the sum of

the ionic Q+ and neutral Qn desorption cross sections The adsorption

rate is equal to the striking rate times the sticking probability s(N)

which in general is a function of the coverage The time dependence of N can

now be written as

j Qt(NE )N dNdt = s(N)yP _ ~ pu (C 4)e

where P is the partial pressure of the adsorbing species and y is a constant

equal to the number of molecules that strike unit area of the surface per unit

time and pressure

The measured electron stimulated desorption yield of A ions i + isA

assumed proportional to the incident current i the coverage of A per unit e

area N and the detection efficiency of the instrument G The proportionality

186

constant is the ionic desorption cross section Q+(NE ) (Since the only pr~

adsorbate being considered in this work is hydrogen the subscript A will be

replaced by H) This relation for iH+ can be written

= i Q+(NE )NG (CS)e pr~

Equation C4 can be solved for N in closed form under certain

simplifying assumptions The dependence of the cross section on primary

energy does not affect the form of the solution (if the primary energy is

kept constant) Then Qt can be written Qt (E ) if the cross section canpri

be shown to be independent of coverage This is not the case in general so

its validity for each metal-adsorbate system has to be examined This is

done in the text for H2 adsorbed on W(100) so the assumption will be assumed

here Likewise the sticking probability will be assumed independent of N

Equation C4 can now be solved to yield

(C6)

N is the initial hydrogen coverage at t o and T is given by ~

(C7)

Combining Equations CS and C6 gives for the g+ ion yield

(C8)

187

where i is the initial ion yield at t = 0 and iH+ is given byH~ equil

+ esyPAG ~ (C9)

Q

Equation C8 shows that the H+ yield decreases with time to a

saturation value iH+ This decay of the ESD ion yield with time is equil

called a desorption curve A semilogarithmic plot of iH+ - i + versusHequil time should yield a straight line the slope of which is -17 From this

slope and the definition of 7 the total desorption cross section charactershy

izing the hydrogen binding state can be calculated

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

1S considerably more dbull40 a diffusionpressure ~nvo1ve Conceptually such

process can be considered in two steps 1) the diffusion of hydrogen from the

bulk to just inside the surface or to a near surface layer and 2) the

jumping from this configuration to surface sites Diffusion from the bulk to

the near surface layer could be described by Ficks law If N is the conshy

centration of hydrogen in the near surface layer and N the surface concentrashy

tion of hydrogen then the time dependence of N + N due to bulk diffusion

can be written as

d(N+Nl _ D dn (C 10)dt - dx

where D is the diffusion constant for hydrogen in tungsten and dndx is the

concentration gradient of hydrogen just inside the surface The coverage N

in surface sites will change as a result of hydrogen jumping from the near

188

surface layer to the surface and vice versa The rate of jumping to the

surface d( N )dt can be assumed proportional to the concentration Nt

and to some function f(N) which describes the availability of surface sites

The diffusion rate to the surface from the near surface layer would also be

exponentially dependent on an activation barrier energy E The reversebs

flux from the surface to the near surface layer can be written in an

equivalent form An expression for the change in surface concentration with

time due to diffusion to and from the near surface layer can be written as

-E kT -E kTb~~ = CbsNte s f(N) - CsbNe sb g(N) (ClI)

The first term on the right-hand side represents the rate of diffusion from

the near surface layer to the surface and the second term represents the

rate of diffusion from the surface back to the near surface layer cbs and

are constants Esb and g(N) correspond toE and f(N) respectivelycsb bs

A term representing depletion of the surface state due to incident electron

bombardment similar to the second term on the right of Equation C4 could

be added in Equation Cll This has been omitted since only the case je = 0

will be considered here In principle an expression for N can now be

obtained by solving Equations ClO and Cll A general solution is not easily

obtained However it is evident that the time dependence of N due to

diffusion could realistically be similar to that expected from background

adsorption For example for the isothermal case if Nt is assumed constant

and f(N) assumed equal to (1 - NN ) assumptions that are reasonable for max

small coverages it can be shown from Equation 44 that N increases

189

exponentially in time to an equilibrium value For N small this solution

would be approximately linear in time the same result obtained for the time

dependence of background adsorption However background pressure doesnt

enter into the above diffusion calculation If the fast state phenomena is

diffusion related N would be expected to be independent of background

pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence for

adsorption from the background

_ _

190

VITA

Stephen Parker Withrow was born in Washington DC on February 2

1945 He attended Northwestern Senior High School in Hyattsville Maryland

graduating in 1963 He enrolled at Cornell University in Ithaca New York in

September 1963 In June 1967 he received a Bachelor of Science in

Engineering Physics In September 1967 he enrolled in the Physics Department

at the University of Illinois in Urbana Illinois He received his Masters

of Science in Physics in February 1969 He served at a Teaching Assistant

in the Physics Department for four years and also as a Research Assistant in

the Coordinated Science Laboratory while doing his thesis research He is

the coauthor of the publication Environmentally Assisted Crack Growth in

Glass G M Sinclair and S P Withrow Naval Research Laboratory Report

6635

_-------------shy-----------_ bull

Page 6: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …

bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Chapter Page

1 MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

11 Introduction and Motivationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 1

12 Review of Literature bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

121 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 4 122 Thermal Desorptionbull o 4 123 LEED and HEEDbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 7 124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and

Photoemissionbullbullbull 100 bullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbull

125 Electron Stimulated Desorptionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 12 126 Work Functionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 13o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

1 27 Chemical Probes bullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull 14I) O

128 Chemisorption Models bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 15 1 29 Theoretical Treatment bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 19 1 210 Literature Surnmaryo 20

13 Review of Experimental Techniques bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 21

2 EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull ~ bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

21 CGeneral Description bull 22

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shieldingbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 22

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 25

24 Energy Spectrometer 29

25 Spectrometer Electronics bullbull 45o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

26 LEED Display System 490 bullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 0 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull I)

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 51

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 57

29 Gas Handling System o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 62

210 Mass Spectrometer bullbullbullbull o 64

3 EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE AND RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

31 Introductionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65

32 Experimental Procedure o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull o bullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 65 322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current

Measurements 6811 bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbullbullbull

323 Target Temperature Measurement bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 69 325 Ion Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 72o bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull

v

33 Ion Species Identificationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 74

34 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 77

35 u+ Ion Desorption Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 351 ut Ion Energy Distributionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 352 Desorption Curve Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 93 353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State a+ Ion

Signal 4) 96

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 98

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull lll

37 Electron Scattering Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 119

4 DISCUSSION OF RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

42 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 127

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 129 431 Room Temperature Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 130 432 Low Temperature Fast State Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 135 433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull142

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 145

45 Electron Scattering Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 161

5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull165

REFERENCES 171

APPENDIX A 0 176 poundI

APPENDIX B 9 c 179

APPENDIX C 0 182 0 bull

VITA 190lilt bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbull

1

CHAPTER 1

MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

11 Introduction and Motivation

The experimental investigation of chemisorption of gases onto metallic

surfaces has uncovered in the past decade a baffling complexity of adsorption

geometries and binding state kinetics and energetics A growing interest in

surface phenomena generated by the questions raised in these researches and

by the long anticipated use of the answers has led to the rapid development

of new surface probing techniques and to an increase in the availability of new

technologies compatible with surface research Aided by the new technologies

and techniques chemisorption research has been undertaken on many different

systems (system =solid substrate + gas adsorbate) under a wide range of

environmental conditions Surface theoreticians have proposed microscopic and

phenomenological models with which data have been analyzed and compared A

large experimental and theoretical literature in the field has resulted

The study of adsorption on metal surfaces has among its primary

objectives a detailed description of the physical geometry of the atoms in the

surface layers and a quantitative understanding of electronic and chemical

surface phenomena While considerable progress has been made in documenting

gas-surface phenomena it has been only in the past three years that any

credible claims to understanding specific surface overlayer geometries have

1been made At the same time many basic questions involving system kinetics

and energetics have not been adequately resolved 2

It has become apparent from the failure of the research effort to

satisfy the above objectives and from seemingly conflicting data that adequate

2

characterization is basic to all surface experimentation The need for such

characterization has been strongly emphasized by disagreement between quasishy

similar research performed at different locations Small impurity concentrashy

tions small changes in crystal orientation minor temperature differences etc

often have considerable effects on experimental measurements

A corollary to the necessity of being able to characterize the

surface is the importance of being able to control the surface characterization

In order to compare data it is necessary to reproduce all experimental paramshy

eters accurately The theory to which experimental data are compared is

constrained by complexity to be based on ideal clean substrates with a

definable gas-surface interaction It is desirable to be able to choose the

adsorbate-substrate system and experimental parameters that can also be used

with theoretical models Of course compromises are inevitable

One approach in surface research has been to incorporate several

experimental techniques into one apparatus At the present time this approach

is increasingly more common A combination of surface sensitive probes offers

many advantages It provides for more checks of the data against results

published in the literature It allows for better characterization of the

experimental parameters It allows surface phenomena to be probed in more than

one way in order to eliminate ambiguities andor to reinforce conclusions It

eliminates the uncertainties that arise from data taken at different locations

using the techniques separately hence it allows better correlations between

data taken using the different techniques

In this study several aspects of the chemisorption interaction of

hydrogen with the low index (100) plane of single crystal tungsten denoted

3

W(100) have been investigated The choice of the tungsten-hydrogen system is

motivated by several factors The literature raises questions on the unusual

state behavior observed when hydrogen adsorbs on W(100) questions which our

apparatus is especially well-suited to study In addition the interaction of

hydrogen with close packed planes of single crystal metals including W(100)

is of particular interest to theoreticians since hydrogen is the simplest

molecular gas as detailed in Sections 128 and 129 below recent theories

of chemisorption have been applied to the hydrogen-tungsten system Tungsten

was chosen as the substrate metal because of its relative ease of preparation

and cleaning and because the large body of literature on the hydrogen-tungsten

system indicates wide interest in this interaction

In particular this research is concentrated in three areas Tung~

sten when cleaned and subsequently cooled to below room temperature exhibits

an anomalous centered (2x2) denoted C(2x2) low energy electron diffraction

pattern The possibility that this is caused by hydrogen diffusing from the

bulk or adsorbing from the background has been investigated Secondly the

room temperature and low temperature hydrogen adsorption binding states have

been studied using electron stimulated desorption and electron spectroscopy

Finally low energy electron diffraction has been used in an investigation of

the atomic geometry of the clean tungsten surface and the geometry of one of

the hydrogen binding states

The remaining sections of this chapter summarize literature relating

to this research Chapter 2 details the construction and performance of the

experimental apparatus A presentation of the experimental data is made in

Chapter 3 A discussion of the results is made in Chapter 4 A summaryof

4

the research and conclusions from it are given in Chapter 5

12 Review of Literature

121 Introduction

Experimental investigation of the adsorption of hydrogen on tungsten

has been carried out using field emitter tips macroscopic polycrystalline

surfaces and all the low index orientation single crystal faces including

W(lOO) From the wide range of results it is clear that the substrate exerts

a strong influence on the adsorption properties The question has been raised

whether adsorption models postulated from polycrystalline substrates can be

3extended even qualitatively to single crystal systems Likewise there are

such sharp differences in the chemisorption behavior of hydrogen onto the

different single crystal tungsten surfaces that the specific physical process

governing adsorption on each face appears to be unique to that face This

review will therefore be concerned for the most part with literature dealing

with hydrogen adsorption on W(lOO) the gas-substrate system used in this

research

The following data review is presented in subsections each concenshy

trating on a specific experimental technique or class of experiments Subsecshy

tion 127 includes some gas mixing literature which was considered relevant

and Subsection 129 gives a bibliography of some related chemisorption

theoretical papers

122 Thermal Desorption

One technique widely employed in investigation of the kinetics of gas

456adsorption has been thermal or flash desorption By monitoring the system

5

pressure changes of a species while rapidly heating the crystal inferences

can be made on the existence of binding states adsorption energies and reaction

7 8 order Heating is accomplished by a focussed light beam electron bombardshy

7 9ment or ohmic losses bull

The strongest indication that hydrogen exhibits multiple state

adsorption behavior on W(lOO) comes from flash desorption data Tamm and

8Schmidt 7 and Madey and Yates found for room temperature adsorption that two

large peaks are observed in the plot of pressure of H2 versus temperature

These peaks are centered at 4500 K and approximately 550oK Only hydrogen

molecules are observed to be desorbed from the surface Using desorption rate

456theory the lower temperature (~l) state is found to obey first order

kinetics the peak temperature being independent of initial coverage The

higher temperature (~2) state obeys second order kinetics the peak temperature

moving down from approximately 5800 K to 5500 K as the initial coverage is

increased

In addition to the two main peaks several small peaks comprising a

total of less than 10 percent of the desorbed hydrogen are observed during a

flash when the crystal is cooled to nitrogen temperature before hydrogen

exposure These states are believed to result from adsorption onto edges and

other non-(lOO) crystal orientations 8

The dependence of the desorption energy Ed on coverage is weak

~l 8 ~2 8with Ed = 252 kcallmole and Ed = 323 kcalmole As would be predicted

from this result the ~2 state is largely populated before the ~l state begins

to fill The ratio of the populations in the states at full coverage n~1n~2

8 lOis 2111 Jelend and Menzel point out that the cross section for electron

6

desorption (see Subsection 125) from the ~1 state is considerably smaller

than that of the ~2 state a result not predicted from the experimental flash

desorption binding energies

11Tibbetts using a stepped temperature flash desorption technique

has shown that hydrogen is bound to the surface of po1ycrysta11ine tungsten

W(110) and W(lll) with a distribution of binding energies ranging from

162 kca1mo1e (07 eV) to 415 kca1mo1e (lS eV) Using this technique

desorption at a constant temperature from a distribution of states can be easily

distinguished from desorption from a state with a unique binding energy While

he did not extend his work to W(100) these results suggest that hydrogen does

not bind to the surface at a few energies but rather with a range of binding

energies Tibbetts also shows that the determination of the order of the

desorption process is difficult for adsorption into a range of binding energies

In experiments using a combination of hydrogen and deuterium as room

temperature adsorbates the elemental composition of the desorbed ~1 and ~2

states shows complete isotopic mixing between the states7S independent of the

adsorption sequence or ratios However for low temperature adsorption

complete state conversion is not observed for all the additional small peaks

Where mixing is observed atomic adsorption is suggested Where mixing is not

observed molecular adsorption is inferred

Some theoretical models indicate that multiple peak flash desorption

spectra may be due to binding energy changes caused by adsorbate-adsorbate

interactions12 or order-disorder transactions during f1ash3 13 rather than

actual distinct multiple binding states under the adsorption conditions

7

123 LEED and HEED

Low energy electron diffraction or LEED refers to the coherent

scattering of a monoenergetic focused electron beam from the surface of a

crystalline solid Electrons in the energy range 0 lt E lt 300 eV interact

strongly with the ion cores and valence electrons of the solid The inelastic

mean free path is on the order of 10 X As a consequence electrons which are

observed elastically have been backscattered within the first several surface

layers in the solid making LEED a surface sensitive probe 14 15 The periodic

translational symmetry of the surface leads to the momentum conservation laws

I

= (11)~I ~II + g

= (2mEh2)t sin reg (12)~II

where ~II is the momentum parallel to the surface of the emerging electron and

~ is the parallel momentum of the incident electron The vector g is a

reciprocal lattice vector of the solid surface and reg is the polar angle of the

incident beam As a result of the conservation laws the scattered electrons

emerge in a series of beams called a spot pattern which is a manifestation

of the surface symmetry The beams are labelled by their corresponding g

vectors Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores is

extracted from the plot of elastically scattered electron intensity versus

16 17incident energy called elastic intensity profiles or I-V curves

Changes in the LEED spot pattern resulting from hydrogen adsorption

18onto W(lOO) at room temperature have been reported by Estrup and Anderson and

19by Yonehara and Schmidt As hydrogen is adsorbed at room temperature the

8

(lxl) pattern characteristic of clean tungsten changes into a weak C(2x2)

pattern at a hydrogen coverage e of less than 005 monolayer (where e = 1

15 2monolayer at a coverage of 2xlO hydrogen atomsem which is 2 hydrogen atoms

for each surface tungsten atom) The (1212) spots become sharp and intense

with increased hydrogen adsorption reaching a maxima in intensity at approxishy

19 18mately 015 monolayer or e = 025 monolayer (Coverage in both cases was

determined by flash desorption) The (1212) spots split into four new spots

which move apart continuously and upon further hydrogen adsorption eventually

19form 13-order streaks at a coverage of ~ 035 monolayer These in turn

change at higher coverage into poorly developed 14-order features with the

(012) spots missing Finally near e = 10 all extra diffraction features

are gone and the LEED pattern returns to a (lxl) symmetry This series of LEED

pattern changes is reversible with coverage

For hydrogen adsorption at 1950 K the C(2x2) pattern develops

maximizes in intensity at e ~ 18 and splits into four beams similar to room

temperature adsorption However the higher coverage LEED structures third

19 0order streaks and fourth order spots are not observed At 78 K adsorption

of hydrogen produces half-order C(2x2) spots that maximize in intensity at

e ~ 027 Additional hydrogen adsorption beyond this causes the half-order

19spot intensity to decrease but with no splitting of the spots

If clean W(lOO) is allowed to cool below room temperature a sharp

19and intense C(2x2) pattern is observed even though total coverage due to the

background of H2 and CO is less than e = 001 as determined by flash desorption

measurements The intensity of these half-order beams can be altered by

additional hydrogen adsorption or by various hydrogen and oxygen heat treatmenm

9

l9Yonehara and Schmidt have postulated that the extra spots may result from

hydrogen endothermally soluble in tungsten diffusing to the surface Possible

alternative explanations include the reconstruction of the clean tungsten

surface or impurity over layer adsorption from the background It should be

20noted that Plummer and Bell saw no effects upon cooling their field emitter

tip to 78 0 K that they could attribute to hydrogen diffusion to the surface

Elastic intensity profiles for several beams have been measured by

18 21Estrup and Anderson and by Papageorgopoulos and Chen at room temperature

Estrup and Anderson reported profiles for (00) and (1212) tEED lJeams out

to 300 eV The intensity variation for the (OO) beam was found to be indepenshy

dent of hydrogen coverage a manifestation of the relatively weak scattering

cross section of a hydrogen ion core relative to that of tungsten The

additional beams observed on adsorption would be expected to be more sensitive

13to the adsorbed overlayer Estrup found the intensity of the (1212) beams

for H W(100) and D W(100) to decrease as a function of temperature between2 2

300o

K and 6000 K at a constant incident energy but neither obeyed the Debyeshy

22Waller relation Estrup interpreted this result to imply the adsorbed

species are directly involved in the diffraction process

19Yonehara examined the tEED spot intensities as a function of

temperature down to liquid nitrogen temperatures His results are examined

in the data discussion in Chapter 4

The hydrogen-WlOO) system has also been studied using high energy

electron diffraction or HEED23 This technique utilizes the strong forward

scattering of high energy electrons in probing the surface by having the

incident beam strike the solid at grazing incidence The resulting diffraction

10

patterns are sensitive to the translational symmetry of the surface As in

LEED a diffraction pattern with C(2x2) symmetry is observed during initial

hydrogen adsorption With further hydrogen exposure the beams broaden some

splitting is observed and eventually the half-order intensity decreases

completely The width of the observed half-order beams has been interpreted to

indicate hydrogen initially adsorbs into a large number of small square or

rectangular domains each consisting of 20 to 25 atoms with sides parallel to

the [100J directions

124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and Photoemission

The electronic structure of the surface layers of solids can be

characterized by electron emission spectroscopies Such techniques require a

surface sensitive perturbation on the gas-solid system leading to an electron

yield A spectrometer is used to energy analyze the emitted or scattered

24 25electrons In electron scatter~ng a monoenergetic beam of electrons is

directed onto a crystal The inelastically scattered signal containing

quantitative information about electronic excitations at the surface is

measured as a function of energy loss Field emission is a technique in which

application of a high positive electric field to the surface lowers the potenshy

26tia1 barrier for electrons to tunnel out of the system The total energy

distribution of electrons emitted as a result of the applied field contains

bull 27 28spectroscopic data on the adsorbed spec~es Structure induced by the

adsorbate in the elastic tunneling spectrum is thought to be a measure of the

d f i h f h d b 2930e1ectron~c ens~ty 0 states n t e v~c~n~ty 0 tea sor ate The

inelastic tunneling spectrum reveals discrete excitation energies in the

11

gas-surface system In photoemission or ftotoelectron spectroscopy an incident

monochromatic light beam incident on the solid induces emission of electrons by

interband transitions with or without an inelastic scattering after the initial

31 exc i tat~on

The vibrational spectrum of hydrogen adsorbed on the tungsten (100)

32surface has been observed by Propst and Piper using inelastic low energy

20electron scattering and by Plummer and Bell using field emission Propst

and Piper found two peaks in the energy loss distribution E - E pr~mary scattered

at 135 meV and 69 meV for all coverages used up to saturation These results

are interpreted as indicating hydrogen atoms are multiply bonded to tungsten

33atoms No losses near 550 meV the vibrational energy of molecular hydrogen

were observed Plummer and Bell measured the total energy distribution of

field emitted electrons from tungsten (100) as a function of coverage of

hydrogen and deuterium at several temperatures Discrete losses at 100 meV

and 50 meV for deuterium which correspond to the 135 meV and 69 meV vibrational

losses observed by Propst and Piper were evident for deuterium in the a state2

No discrete energy losses at 550 meV or 390 meV the molecular vibrational

levels of H2 and D2 respectively were measured Hence there was no observable

molecular adsorption at room temperature

Additional structure in the field emission total energy distribution

is observed as a function of hydrogen adsorption The clean surface spectrum

has two peaks 04 eV and 15 eV down from the Fermi level which have been

d ifi d h h d f d h h f 34 A h d ~ ent e as ~g ens~ty 0 states assoc~ate w~t t e sur ace s y rogen

(or deuterium) coverage increases between 0 and 5xl014 atomscm2

ie while

the ~2 state is filling the surface states disappear and the field emitted

12

energy distribution changes from that of clean tungsten to a spectrum indicative

of resonance tunneling through a level positioned 09 eV below the Fermi energy

There is a shoulder at -11 eV and an energy dependent background With

further adsorption up to saturation this energy distribution characteristic

of the ~2 state shifts to a broad level centered at 26 eV below the Fermi

level This is interpreted to indicate that the ~1 state does not adsorb on

top of the ~2 state

35The photoemission results of Wac1awski and P1ummer and Feuerbacher

36and Fitton are in agreement with those obtained using the field emission

technique As hydrogen adsorbs on the surface emission from the 04 eV

surface state decreases The level 09 eV down from the Fermi energy as well

as a level 5 eV down remain unchanged by adsorption At full coverage a strong

peak at -25 eV is observed

125 Electron Stimulated Desorption

Desorption of energetic ions and neutrals from a gas over layer can

be induced by electron bombardment This process termed electron stimulated

desorption or ESD37383940 is described below in the discussion of the data

in Chapter 4 In brief intensity and energy measurements of the ion yield can

be interpreted in terms of the parameters characterizing the binding energy

curve of the adsorbed state and adsorption states can be classified by cross

section for desorption_ ion energy distributions primary energy threshold for

desorption etc

ESD has been employed to study adsorption kinetics for the hydrogenshy

41 ~ tungsten (100) system Madey obtained a coverage dependence yield of H ions

13

observing an ion signal during the initial stages of hydrogen adsorption that

reached a maximum at a coverage of e = 017 and then decayed to zero yield

23 2after e = 075 the maximum cross section obtained was 18x10- cm at a

primary electron energy of 100 eV Tamm and Schmidt7 reported a maximum cross

section for H+ desorption of 10- 21 cm 2bull Benninghoven Loebach and Treitz42

10and Je1end and Menze1 obtained qualitatively similar (to Madey) coverage

dependencies on tungsten ribbons which were believed to be predominantly of

(100) crystallites the main difference between these results and Madeys is

the observation of a residual signal at high hydrogen coverage

The cross section results indicate that the a state even though it2

is more tightly bound than the a state provides more hydrogen ions upon1

electron impact The cross section for ion desorption from the a1 state is

d41 10-25est1mate to be 1ess t han cm2 bull

+No energy distributions of the desorbed H ions have been reported

The dependence of the desorption cross section on the primary electron energy

10has not been investigated Je1end and Menzel found their results independent

of temperature for temperatures above room temperature No ESD results for

otemperatures less than 300 K have been reported

126 Work Function

The work function is the minimum amount of energy required to remove

43 an electron from a meta1 An adsorbate may alter the potential barrier for

electrons at the surface and hence change the work function Such is the case

for hydrogen on W(100) Hydrogen adsorbs as an electronegative ion on W(100)

thereby increasing the work function

14

44Using a retarding potential current-voltage techn~que Madey and

8Yates reported a linear relation between work function change and hydrogen

coverage over the entire coverage range for adsorption occurring at a

temperature 0 f 2= 300 0 K Coverages were determined by flash desorption

Total work function change at one monolayer was found to be 090 eV which

corresponds to a constant dipole moment per adsorbed atom of 015 Debye

15 2(assuming a total coverage of 15xlO atomsem)

Estrup and Anderson18 using the retarding potential technique and

Plummer and Bel120 using a field emission Fowler-Nordheim plot45 found a

work function change versus coverage relationship which deviated only slightly

8from being linear in near agreement with the results of Madey and Yates

46 47Becker using field emission and Armstrong using a retarding potential

technique found a work function change for the H W(100) system of approximately2

48090 eV when e = 10 Hopkins and Pender obtained an anomalously low value

49of 054 eV while Collins and Blott obtained a high value of 109 eV for the

same coverage

127 Chemical Probes

Hydrogen adsorption has also been studied using a chemical probe

ie by coadsorbing some additional different gas with the hydrogen and

observing the effect this additional species had on results obtained using

techniques discussed in previous sections

50Yates and Madey found using flash desorption that CO coadsorption

onto a hydrogen monolayer displaces both the Sl and S2 binding states with

near unity probability in doing so initially replacing these states with a

15

less tightly bound hydrogen state After high CO exposure no hydrogen remains

on the surface if the coadsorption is done at room temperature At lower

temperatures only about 10 percent of the hydrogen is desorbed Jelend and

Menzel lO 5l found that the ionic and total desorption cross sections for

hydrogen the sticking probability and bond strength of hydrogen are all

affected by preadsorption of CO or oxygen Yates and Madey3 found that N2

slowly replaces preadsorbed hydrogen at temperatures greater than 300oC Below

2730

K the displacement of hydrogen by N2 does not occur

These results all show that small impurity concentrations of CO N

and 0 if intentionally introduced do affect the resulting hydrogen chemishy

sorption properties These experiments underscore the necessity of surface

chemical characterization

128 Chemisorption Models

7 18 19 52 Several models have been proposed to account for the

experimental results from hydrogen chemisorption on W(lOO) Each of these

models embodies some combination of the following three phenomenological

assumptions 1) The tungsten surface is ideal planar and free of contamishy

nants 2) There are available two types of adsorbates namely hydrogen atoms

53and molecules 3) There are three high symmetry logical bonding sites on

a BCC (100) face usually designated by the letters A B and C These

positions are A a bridge site with 2 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen

equidistant from two adjacent surface tungsten atoms B a four fold symmetric

site with 5 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen located on a surface normal that

passes through the center of a surface primitive unit cell and C the hydrogen

16

located directly above a surfac~ atom with one nearest neighbor There are

15 152x10 A sitescm2 and 1x10 B ore sites~m2 on middotW(100)

The proposed models attempt to explain or at least be consistent

with empirical results presented in Sections 121 through 127 A summary

of salient features of the reported research includes a) a linear work function

15change with coverage b) a saturation coverage of between 15 and 20x10 H

2atomscm c) a coverage dependent adsorption layer symmetry including a we11shy

ordered surface at low coverages d) the appearance at low temperatures of a

surface translational symmetry not equivalent to room temperature clean

tungsten e) adsorption into states which produces a two state thermal desorpshy

tion spectrum with relative coverages in the two states of nQ n = 21 f) a ~1 ~2

coverage dependence for the observed electronic structure including the

absence at high coverage of structure observed at low coverages and g) no

observed vibrational levels which correspond to free H2 molecule

Following is a short review of several proposed surface models

18Estrup and Anderson account for their LEED spot pattern results

using a model wherein the hydrogen molecules dissociate upon adsorption and

migrate initially to form islands of hydrogen atoms located at type A sites in

a e(2x2) structure Dissociation is assumed since the e(2x2) pattern maximizes

15 2at a coverage of 25x10 mo1ecu1escm whereas without dissociation it would

maX1m1ze at 5 1015 mo ecu1es cm2bull e site adsorptionx 1 Although type B or type

could also produce the initial e(2x2) LEED pattern these sites are rejected

15 2because of the following 1) There are only 1x10 B or e sitescm This is

not enough sites to accommodate a full monolayer coverage if all binding is

atomic and if it is into equivalent sites as suggested by the linear work

17

function change with coverage 2) While a complete 14-order LEED pattern is

possible with type B or type C sites it is not possible to produce a 14-order

54pattern with (012) spots missing using B or C sites As the adsorption

14 2proceeds past a surface density of 5xlO hydrogen atomscm the adatoms conshy

tinuously rearrange into long period superlattices with antiphase domains

that produce successively the 12-order spot splitting the 13-order streak

(only partly ordered domains) the 14-order pattern and finally the (lxl)

full coverage structure

This model has been criticized for not accounting for the two

observed binding states and for predicting a maximum in intensity of the half

order spots at e = 025 these beams maximize at less than that coverage In

addition the authors themselves questioned the idea of well-ordered super-

lattices

In order to explain the relative intensity of the two states at

saturation seen in flash desorption n~~ = 21 Tamm and Schmidt7

propose a 1 2

model wherein the initial hydrogen adsorption is atomic and at B sites in a

C(2x2) pattern At full coverage the remaining B sites are filled with

hydrogen molecules B sites are chosen over C sites using molecular orbital

55arguments A sites are rejected as there are too many to satisfy this model

This model satisfies the second order kinetics observed for the ~2 state and

the first order kinetics observed for the ~l state In addition it explains

14 2 7 their saturation coverage of gt 3xl0 moleculescm One weakness of this

model pointed out by Tamm and Schmidt is that it is not obvious the model can

account for the observed LEED and work function results Also no molecular

vibrations have been observed

18

19yonehara and Schmidt propose a three bonding state model that is

more consistent with the low temperature LEED results In their model an

additional state labeled ~3 is always present at the surface in A or B

2sites with a density of 5xl014 atomscm bull This state orders on the surface at

low temperatures to give the C(2x2) pattern observed At room and higher

temperatures it goes into solution (or perhaps disorders) becoming invisible

to LEED In the type A site model adsorption from the background fills in the

remaining A sites sequentially with the ~2 and ~l states This model is similar

18to that proposed by Estrup and Anderson except that the ~3 state although

invisible to LEED at room and higher temperatures occupies 14 of the type A

sites This model eliminates the stoichiometric objection to Estrup and

Andersons model The model depends on the possibility of type A sites being

occupied by states with considerably different properties If the ~3 state

occupies type B sites ~2 state adsorption fills in the remaining type B sites

and then ~l hydrogen adsorbs into random or possibly type C sites This

second model does not explain satisfactorily work function or LEED spot pattern

experimental data

56Propst found using a point defect type calculation that only a

B-site model of adsorption would produce the observed vibrational energies of

5769 meV and 135 meV Park using LEED intensity arguments found that only

adsorption into sites with 4-fold symmetry on the (100) surface (type B or type

C sites) would be consistent with broadening and splitting of the half-order

beams while the integral beams remain sharp

8Madey and Yates offer a critique of several of the proposed models

19

No adsorption geometry adequately accounts for all the observed data

It is possible that surface hydrogen mobility adsorbate-adsorbate interactions

tungsten surface reconstruction and other surface phenomenon must be better

understood before this system can be adequately characterized

129 Theoretical Treatment

Several theoretical treatments of hydrogen-tungsten chemisorption

phenomenon have been reported in the literature as discussed below

7 18 19 52 The most elementary geometric models already have been

mentioned in Section 128 Grimley58 considers the hydrogen on W(lOO) system

59in an Anderson-Hamiltonian formalism Anders and Hansen obtain the relative

bonding energies of hydrogen chemisorbed at the three high symmetry adsorption

sites of W(lOO) using an extended Ruckel molecular orbital theory Their

results indicated a preference for hydrogen adsorption at type C sites

60Schrieffer offers a review on the theory of chemisorption in which he

concludes the Hartree-Fock approximation to the Anderson model for hydrogenshy

61metal adsorption is invalid Newns using the same approximation also shows

62the one-electron HF theory to be invalid Schrieffer and Gomer study the

exchange interaction between the adatom and the solid which results from the

nonorthogonality of the adatom and solid wave functions Smith Ying

h 63 64 h h d 1 h bl band Ko n lnvestlgate t e y rogen-meta c emlsorptlon pro em y

requiring complete self-consistency between the three-dimensional electrostatic

potential used and charge density obtained They calculate electron scattering

resonance levels and ground state vibrational frequency Jennings and McRae

using a multiple scattering LEED theory (but neglecting inelastic collision

65

20

damping) show that there can be half-order beams of high intensity in the H -W2

k W b 66 1 b dsystem even t hough h ydrogen 1S a wea scatterer e1n erg app 1es a on-

energy bond-order model of chemisorption to the hydrogen-W(100) system and

predicts binding energies for the molecular state and atomic state of hydrogen

on W(100) to be 262 kca1mo1e and 322 kca1mo1e respectively

1210 Literature Summary

Some conclusions can be drawn concerning the state of understanding

of the hydrogen-tungsten system and in particular the H W(100) system2

Despite considerable research experimental uncertainties still exist

in the H W(100) interaction It is still not clear if hydrogen adsorbs as a2

molecule The preponderance of evidence from electron scattering vibrational

levels field emission and H -D gas mixing flash desorption measurements2 2

indkates most hydrogen probably adsorbs atomically Multiple state behavior

is exhibited It is not known however if this observed state behavior is a

result of distinct hydrogen-tungsten interactions it is believed that to a

large extent it is driven by coverage dependent adsorbate-adsorbate interacshy

tions There is no model that can successfully incorporate the measured work

function flash desorption and ESD parameters The adsorption sites are not 15 15 2

known Total coverage at one monolayer is between 15xlO and 2x10 atomsem

which is more than the number of surface tungsten atomscm2 in the (100) face

LEED results at different temperatures indicate a possible temperature depenshy

dence for the adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO) Particularly confusing is

the anomalous LEED result obtained at low temperatures for the clean surface

Only small adsorption temperature dependencies are found in sticking probability

21

work function changes and flash desorption results

13 Review of Experimental Techniques

As indicated in Section 11 this research has been undertaken in an

attempt to characterize more fully the hydrogen-W(lOO) interaction A multi-

technique spectrometer has been used Chapter 2 gives a discussion of the

instrument This instrument is capable of making work function Auger electron

spectroscopy electron scattering ESD (including a pulsed time-of-flight mode)

and LEED measurements These techniques except AES have been well-reviewed

43 44 67 68 24 25 3 37 3839 40 as referenced prevlously (work function AES ES ESD

151617LEED ) Their use in this research can be summarized as follows work

function changes are a measure of adsorption coverage Auger electron

spectroscopy has been used to characterize the contamination of the experimental

surface ES and ESD are sensitive probes of surface and adsorption parameters

Time-of-flight has been used to determine the ion species desorbed LEED has

been used here to indicate the orientation of the surface and to attempt to

take initial data useful in calculation of overlayer geometries A more

detailed discussion of these techniques as used in this research is given in

Section 32

A discussion of the instrument constructed and used for this research

is given in Chapter 2 Sections 31 and 32 deal wIth organization and

experimental procedures Experimental data are presented starting with Section

33 A discussion of the data and conclusions from the research are given in

Chapter 4

22

CHAPTER 2

EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS

21 General Description

The apparatus used in this research is designed to probe an experishy

mental macroscopic crystal with several surface sensitive techniques It

combines an electron gun which focuses a monoenergetic beam of electrons onto

the crystal a new high resolution electrostatic spectrometer capable of energy

analysis of electrons and ions a low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system

and a crystal manipulator The crystal manipulator allows positioning of the

experimental sample and provides sample cooling heating and electrical

biasing Also included in the apparatus are a mass spectrometer and a gas

handling system System electronics allow the spectrometer to perform work

function electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated desorption

Auger electron spectroscopy and low energy electron diffraction measurements

The spectrometer can be operated over a wide range of primary electron energies

and currents and analyzer pass energies It can be biased in both electron and

ion pass modes and in a pulsed time-of-flight mode for species identification

An external spot photometer is used for LEED intensity measurements The

instrument is housed in an ultrahigh vacuum chamber A schematic diagram of

the overall system is given in Figure 21 The construction and performance

characteristics of each of the components are discussed in the following

sections of Chapter 2

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shielding

The requirement that the experimental surface has to remain clean

23

Analyzer Support

Magnetic Shielding

Ion Gauge

Analyzer

Crystal Target

Window

Openings in Magnetic Shield to Gas Jet and Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer

LEED Screen Viewing Mi rror

To Ion Pumps _

Analyzer Wiring Feedthroughs

Liquid Nitrogen Dewar for Cooling Strap Heat Sink

Insulator

Crystal Manipulator

Cooling Strop

Titanium Sublimotion Pump

Figure 21 Schematic diagram of mu1titechnique apparatus

24

while making measurements necessitates housing the apparatus in an ultrahigh

vacuum chamber A commercial Varian vacuum chamber and pumping station have

been used Ultrahigh vacuum was achieved in several steps after the chamber

-2 was rough pumped down to 10 Torr using cryosorb pumps main system pumping

was accomplished using a 400 litersec ion pump and a titanium sublimator

oAfter a bakeout of 24 hours at temperatures up to 270 C to outgas the system

-10walls the system pressure read about lxlO Torr as measured with a Bayard-

Alpert ion gauge The pressure decreased somewhat during the first weeks of

spectrometer operation after bakeout The final system background pressure

-11 was less than 8xlO Torr or below the x-ray limit of the gauge When

-10operating in the Auger mode the background rose to lxlO Torr presumably

because of the large currents involved A mass spectrometer scan indicated

that the main components of the background were H2 CO CO2 and H 0 The ion2

gauge which can affect the composition of the background was turned off while

taking data except if noted otherwise

In an electrostatic deflection analyzer such as used here magnetic

fields can introduce spurious results In order to reduce the earths magnetic

field in the region of electron or ion trajectories three concentric cylinders

of Eagle AAA ultrahigh nickel steel alloy magnetic shielding are placed around

the spectrometer The shielding is mounted on a stainless steel and ceramic

support which rests in a groove in the inside wall of the vacuum chamber This

shielding is electrically isolated so it can be floated at any desired voltage

The ambient magnetic field in the target region is less than 5 milliGauss

The region inside the shielding and below the spectrometer (the

region shown in Figure 214) is referred to in this work as the experimental

25

chamber There are apertures cut in the magnetic shielding which allow the

crystal to be put in (and out of) the experimental chamber Apertures also

allow line-of-sight access to this region of the gas dosing jet mass spectromshy

eter and allow the crystal to be viewed

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics

The electron gun provides the incident focused electron beam used

in all the surface probing techniques Figures 22 and 23 show a schematic

drawing of the electron gun and a photograph of the gun assembled and disshy

dOf d f dOd b P 0 69assembled h a mo 1 1e verS10n 0 a gun eS1gne y er1aT e gun 1S The

comporients of the gun are a thermal cathode or source of electrons three

electrodes and four deflection plates The cathode is a Philips Metalonics

Type M barium calcium aluminate impregnated tungsten emitter The cathode was

0generally operated at 875 C with the heating accomplished indirectly with a

tungsten filament behind the heater The electrons emitted are focused into

a beam by two lenses the crossover formed by the lens action of the control

grid and first anode is focused onto the target by a second lens formed by the

first anode and second anode The incident primary beam thus formed can be

deflected along two axes in the target face by means of deflection plates

located at the entrance to the drift tube

The guns electronic circuitry is shown in Figure 24 Three 6 V

lead storage batteries in series power the cathode heater through an integrated

circuit voltage regulator The gun electrodes are biased using a resistor

chain voltage divider circuit This arrangement scales the guns lenses thus

keeping the beam focused as the primary beam energy is changed by varying the

26

Heat Shield

Cathode Heater

Cathode

Control Grid

First Anode

Second Anode

Coaxial Cathode Heater Feed through

~~f-------+-+-~ Paraxial Ray Aperture

---J7j7j--shy -~f-~ Accelerating ~~pt=-=a~~ or Decelerating

Lens Region

Deflection Plates

SP-1Oeuro7

Figure 22 Schematic diagram of electron gun

I)

-J

Figure 23 Photograph of electron gun assembled and disassembled

~ ~1 ~

h

I __-t--------+--

Defl + ---t---------

i---VV----110K I10K 93K

Supply

BHK 2000

I

Dec Mode

Ace 15K Mode

10K I 15K

l8V Leod

Gun X Deflection Plates (Y Defl Plates Rotate 90 not shown)

Storage Batteries

tv 00

Acc Mode Connections

To First Anode

To Second Anode X Defl shy

X

To Gun Deflection

Plates 10K 10K 57K 15K55K

1-_________----1+I Electron Gun

sp- 1125

Figure 24 Diagram of the electron guns biasing circuitry

29

gun power supply a Kepco BHK-2000 supply The gun can be operated in two

modes In the accelerating mode (ace mode) the second anode is biased more

positive than the first anode With this biasing the gun has been operated

from 30 V to 1825 V primary energy In the decelerating mode (dec mode) the

first anode is biased more positive than the second anode This allows for

higher field gradients at the cathode surface resulting in higher currents at

lower energies In the dec mode the gun can be operated from 10 V to 200 V

A spatial profile of the primary beam was taken using a two grid

retarding field analyzer mounted on the target manipulator at the position of

the target Electrode bias settings that optimized the beam line shape were

determined over the guns energy range These results are summarized in

Figure 25 The spatial full width at half maximum of the spot intensity is

less than 025 mm at 1825 V less than 075 mm at 100 V (dec mode) and about

25 mm at 10 V The energy width of the primary beam can be estimated by

retarding the primary beam between the drift tube and target At E = 100 eVpr1

the current to the target goes from 90 maximum to 10 maximum over a retarding

voltage of ~V $ 0360 meV This is an upper estimate on the energy spread in

the primary beam A lower limit would be the thermal spread of the cathode

~ 2kT or about 200 meV

24 Energy Spectrometer

A schematic diagram of the spectrometer used in this research to

energy analyze electrons and ions is given in Figure 26 The spectrometers

operation can be summarized as follows Electrons and ions originating at

the target with some energy distribution are accelerated or decelerated to the

Dec Mode --1r+shy

Probe Aperture Diameter

+10

E~

~ ~ 10Decelerating Lens Dec Mode aJLL- c E 0- E ~ ~ -051=-- Accelerating Lens Acc Mode Q)O - a WU)

o 200 600 1000 1400

E ~Ugt o Q)()cme=)

Q)

cO ~ e+- (+-Clo OQ)Q)loc

-lolo Wllaquo

u-

Electron Beam Energy Epri (eV) w o

Epri= 10eV Electron Beam Spatial Profiles Epri =1745 eV Epri =100eVf Epd=1000 eV Ace ModeAce Mode Aee Mode

-05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 Probe Aperture Position (mm)

SP-1084

Figure 25 Spatial characteristics of primary electron beam Top panel - Full width at half maximum of beam as a function of primary energy Bottom panel - Line shape of beam at several primary energies

-10 0

31

Cylindrical Electrostatic Analyzer

Spherical Elect rostat ic Analyzer

~____- __Gylindrical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

Coaxial Repulsion Cylinder

--__-___Spherical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

~-- Electron Gun

Deflection Plates

-Gun Wiring

Concentric ~--- Deflection

Spheres

~-- LEED Screen

Scattered Electrons SP-l066

and Desorbed Ions

Figure 26 Schematic diagram of energy spectrometer

32

pass energy of the spectrometer by three spherical sector grids prior to

entering the spherical analyzer section of the instrument (An annular slot

cut in the LEED screen which is located between the grids and the spherical

analyzer allows particles to pass into the analyzer) Energy selection is

accomplished by a combination of two electrostatic deflection analyzers The

first is a high resolution spherical deflection analyzer This is backed by

a cylindrical mirror-type electrostatic analyzer referred to in this work as

the cylindrical or tandem analyzer Particles that pass through the spectromshy

eter impinge on the first dynode of a high gain electron multiplier The

output signal of this multiplier is detected using the electronics discussed

in Section 25

The spectrometer is constructed mainly of 304 stainless steel which

has been hydrogen and vacuum fired to reduce residual magnetism to less than

5 milliGauss Most interior surfaces have been rhodium plated to eliminate

surface charging problems Final design dimensions used in the spectrometer

are listed in Table 21 Refer to Figure 27 for a diagram of the variables

used in this table

The emission angle at the ta~get of the central trajectory that

passes 1nto t he spectrometer 1S 350 bull The entrance aperture (slot) accepts

particles that originate within plusmn0045 radians of this central ray making a

total solid angle accepted of 032 steradians

The spherical electrostatic deflection analyzer section is a

70spherical velocity selector of the type first investigated by Purcell The

analyzer is designed to focus an object spot of electrons or ions originating

at the front surface plane of the target onto the first energy resolution

33

TABLE 21 FINAL DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR SPECTROMETER

SPHERICAL ANALYZER

l Inner sphere radius 342 cmr l

2 Outer sphere radius r 419 cm2

3 Radius of central ray a = 381 cm

04 Emission angle of central ray e = 35

05 Angular range of accepted rays 3244

0 - 3756

6 Angle subtended between entrance and exit planes of spherical analyzer section ~ = 51660

7 Acceptance solid angle of spectrometer 032 steradians

8 Diameter of first ERA D 025 cm

9 Distance of target from center of spherical analyzer P 665 cm

10 Distance of first ERA from center of spherical analyzer Q 1328 cm

CYLINDRICAL ANALYZER

11 Distance from first ERA to entrance diaphram S = 330 cm

12 Distance between entrance and exit diaphrams T 399 cm

13 Distance from exit diaphram to second ERA U = 330 cm

14 Inner cylinder radius Rl = 0099 cm

15 Distance from second ERA to electron multiplier V ~ 254 cm

16 Radius of entrance aperture R2 099 cm

17 Radius of repulsion electrode R3 = 330 cm

18 Radius of exit aperture R4 093 cm

19 Width of exit aperture G 037 cm

20 Diameter of second ERA E 044 cm

21 Width of entrance aperture F = 053 cm

34

Plane of First ERA

~

D

Spherical Analyzer

First ERA

I

I1 I~~ f F

S

]R4 II f ~

R3

11 [1

I II

U v~ cT t t

Plane of Plane of First ERA Second ERA

Cylindrical Analyzer

Figure 27 Schematic diagram of particle trajectories in spherical analyzer section Spatial configuration of tandem cylindrical analyzer section also shown

35

aperture or image plane The spatial configuration of the analyzer is such

as to give maximum reduced dispersibn according to the relations derived by

Purcell The magnification of the source at maximum reduced dispersion is 2

Diaphrams at the entrance and exit apertures of the spherical analyzer are

designed to minimize problems caused by the fringing fields as discussed by

71Herzog

Initial tests using only the spherical analyzer indicated electrons

that scattered from the interior surfaces could be passed through the first

energy resolving aperture over a range of analyzer pass energies To eliminate

this erroneOus signal a second low resolution cylindrical mirror-type

72electrostatic analyzer was designed and constructed by P Luscher

Electrons or ions that pass through the first energy resolving

aperture at the correct energy are deflected by the repulsion electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer and pass through the second energy resolving aperture

This signal impinges on the first dynode of the electron multiplier Trajectory

tracing calculations indicated that the cylindrical analyzer would eliminate

the scattered signal if this second analyzer had a full width energy resolution

~EE = 028 where E is the energy of the particle executing the pass pass

correct central trajectory through the spectrometer This is not a stringent

design requirement

The energy resolution of the spectrometer is defined as the ratio

~EEp where ~E is the width of the line shape passed as the spectrometer is

scanned in pass energy for a monochromatic source of particles with energy Ep

For the spectrometer configuration here the energy resolution is determined

by the resolution achieved in the high resolution spherical analyzer section

36

at least down to low pass energies Line shape broadening effects in the

spherical analyzer originate from three sources 1) the finite diameter D

of the first energy resolving aperture 2) the finite radius R of the source

disk and 3) the use of a finite range of emission angles of particles from

the crystal surface which can enter and be passed by the spectrometer This

third source of line broadening results from the spherical analyzer having

imperfect second order focusing at the first energy resolving aperture The

effect on the line shape of the finite range of emission angles goes as the

square of the acceptance half width which in this analyzer is small In

the calculation of energy resolution below the third source of line broadening

will not be considered

A numerical value for the energy resolution for the spectrometer

used in this research can be calctilated To do so it is necessary to derive

an expression for 6EEp in terms of the diameter D and radius R given above

In the calculation below these two sources of line broadening will be

considered independent and the effective line shape and energy resolution

from each will be calculated separately Following an analysis by Purcell an

energy resolution can be expressed in terms of the velocity resolution S bull ~

S is defined by ~

where v is the velocity of a particle which the analyzer passes along the pass

central trajectory when and v is the velocity of a particle withset at Epass ~

slightly different energy E bullbull (For convenience E and v will be ~ pass pass

shortened to Ep and vp in the following discussion Lower case subscripts are

37

used to distinguish this derivation from the defined energy resolution above)

A resolution can be calculated as follows

(22)

Using Equation 21 this becomes

(23)

(24)

If the line shape width ~E is written as

fiE = E - E = (E - E ) + (E - Emn) (25)max max p pm~n ~

then the energy resolution can be expressed as

(26)

D and R can be related to Q and Q bull as shown belowf-I max f-Im~n

Line shape broadening due to the finite diameter D of the first

energy resolving aperture (1st ERA) can be calculated from the velocity

70dispersion given by Purcell

(27)

9 00 ~ (28)

Refer to Figure 27 for a definition of the variables in these equations

38

Assume a current j(a) emanating from the center of the target

along xl with energy distribution

j (e) = 1 (29)

All of this current crosses the plane of the 1st ERA at a position d given by

d = Y2cOS a = 900 acos a (210)

A 1st ERA of diameter D will pass all the current for which Y2 Y2 leading

to the relation for the limiting values of 13

(211)

D bull cos a a lt D cos a (212)2 bull 900 - 2 bull 900

The energy resolution due to a finite 1st ERA is then calculated from Equation

26 to be

~E (~st ERA) = 2 [053D + 053DJ = 02l2D (213) P

For D = 025 cm (010 in) this evaluates to

8E (1st ERA) = 0021 (214)E P

The line shape of the current distribution resulting from the finite 1st ERA

is a unit function for the allowable e values (Equation 214) since all the

current j(S) is passed by the 1st ERA and j(S) is a unit function in S

The above line shape and resolution have been obtained effectively

by varying the energy of the signal current (via Equation 29) rather than

39

using a monochromatic current source and varying the pass energy as initially

used in defining the spectrometer resolution That the results given in

Equation 214 are the same as would be obtained from a more complicated

calculation using a monochromatic current source can be seen by considering a

monochromatic source v == (1 + l)vp and noting that it will be deflected tol

the edge of the 1st ERA by a pass energy Ep

Line shape broadening and an energy resolution due to a finite radius

to the source disk can be determined in a manner analogous to that used above

Consider a point source of particles at the 1st ERA that travel back through

the analyzer Such reverse trajectories would cross the target plane at a

position

(215)

where for these reverse trajectories using Equation 27

Yl = 491 a (216)

p being a variable representing the radius at which these trajectories cross

the plane of the target p is analogous to d in the earlier calculation

Using reciprocity particles emanating from a position on the target at radius

p with a velocity corresponding to S will cross the plane of the 1st ERA at

the axis For a source of radius R the line width is found by using the

arguments leading up to Equation 211 to be

R bull cos e S lt R cos e (217)491 ~ 491

For a spot size 2R == 1 rom (0039 in) the energy resolution due to a finite

source disk is

40

A (source) = 2[017R + 017R] (218)E p

~ (source) 013 for 2R = 1 mm (219)E p

At low primary energies for which the beam spot size is greater than 1 mm

the above broadening and resolution due to spot size are correspondingly larger

The line shape associated with a finite source disk is linearly

proportional to~ The functional dependence of source current on ~ which

essentially determines the line shape due to the finite source is not given

by Equation 29 Rather it can be obtained by assuming uniform emission over

the area of the source knowing that ~ and the radial position at the source

p are linearly related by Equation 216 and using the area relation

(220)

(221)

If the current from the source with velocity (1 + ~)v that passes the 1st ERA p

is designated JI(~) then

(222)

49lmiddotApJ I (~l) 0 2TT cos e ~ 1 (223)

From Equation 223 the line shape of the current due to finite source is seen

to be linearly related to ~

41

The overall resolution of the instrument can be approximated by the

sum of the two resolutions calculated above which is approximately 2

Experimentally the resolution of the spectrometer is measured as the full

width at half maximum (FWHM) of the elastic peak The bottom panel of Figure

28 shows the FWHM of the elastic peak as a function of the spectrometer pass

energy At 90 eV the experimental energy resolution is

bE FWEM 2 (224)Ep = ~ = 90 = 022

which is close to the theoretical calculations

The effective resolution of the spectrometer can be greatly increased

by retarding the beam using the three grids located between the target and

spherical analyzer This can be seen by repeating the calculation of Equation

224 using data from Figure 28 at a lower energy The measured effective

energy resolution of the spectrometer varies between 22 percent and 06

percent as the elastic peak is retarded by 10 percent to 90 percent of its

initial value Over this same range the intensity decreases almost 98 percent

Hence increased resolution is obtained at the expense of signal intensity

This is shown in the top panel of Figure 28 The solid curve in the top panel

is the transmission function of the spectrometer for a primary beam of 100 eV

The transmission function shows the fractional decrease in signal passed by

the spectrometer as a function of pass energy of the spectrometer The data

points were taken by retarding the 100 eV elastic peak between the grids until

it was passed by the spectrometer The transmission function is the ratio of

the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer at E to the peakpass

42

Figure 28 Top panel - Transmission function of spectrometer This function was obtained by retarding the 100 eV elastically scattered electron signal between the spectrometer grids and then measuring the ratio of the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer to the peak signal passed at Epass = E = 100 eV Bottom panel - Full width at half maX1mum of ~K~ elastically scattered electron signal passed by the spectrometer when the 100 eV signalis retarded using the grids to an energy E

pass

43

09

08

07

c006 U ()

E()05 c e 1-04

03

02

01

Epri =100eV

~ -Transmission of Spectrometer

Peak Intensity at Eposs Peak Intensity at Epass 100 eV

--Transmission for flEE Constant

() +shy

o gt-

20

10

Full Width at Half Maximum of Elastic Peak

100 eVEpri =

o~oo 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Spectrometer Pass Energy J Epass (eV) SP-1l22

0

44

signal passed at E = E i = 100 eV The dotted line in Figure 28 pass pr

indicates the transmission function for ~ = constant for a monochromatic

point source Deviations from the straight line are due 1) to the nonidea1

elastic peak (ie finite breadth) and spectrometer geometry 2) to field

penetration at the grids as a function of the retarding potential (which was

varied to obtain the graph) and 3) to the varying response of the electron

multiplier as a function of the voltage of the electrons incident on the

multiplier For the data presented here electrons were incident on the

multiplier with an energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer The

bottom panel of Figure 28 shows the experimental full width at half maximum

of the elastic peak as a function of pass energy (in this case pass energy =

(100 eV - retarding voltage))

The energy spectrometer has been operated successfully in both the

electron and ion pass modes over a pass energy range from 2 eV to 400 eV

The spectrometer is normally operated at a fixed pass energy and ideally

fixed energy resolution Energy sweeps are made by retardation (acceleration)

of electrons or ions between the first (screen grid) and third (tEED grid)

grids prior to entering the spherical analyzer section of the spectrometer

The third grid which was added primarily to eliminate charging problems

associated with the LEED screen (see Section 26) also improved the effective

resolution this improvement is due to decreased field penetration of the

applied retarding (accelerating) potential since the retarding (accelerating)

can be done over a 50 percent longer distance In addition the third grid is

made of smaller mesh which also reduces field penetration

45

The spectrometer is supported vertically from the electrical feedshy

through turret as shown in Figure 29 This assembly attaches at the top of

the main vacuum chamber (see Figure 21) and can be removed completely wired

independent of other parts of the instrument

The electron multiplier is an EMI model 96434B detector with 17

BeCu venetial blind dynode stages

25 Spectrometer Electronics

Figure 210 shows a schematic diagram of the electronic circuitry

used for taking electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated

desorption and Auger electron spectroscopy measurements Some details for

example capacitors used to eliminate noise and some switches used to change

from one mode to another are not shown Only the most common biasing

arrangement used in this work will be discussed

In the electron pass mode (including Auger measurements) the LEED

grid LEED screen Herzog diaphrams driftspace and center electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer are grounded Energy sweeps of the spectrometer are made

by varying the retardation or acceleration voltage applied between the three

73grids A variable frequency variable height floating sawtooth generator

plus a variable dc offset bias are summed at the inverting input of a Kepco

OPS-2000 operational power supply the output of which biases the three grids

through a resistor chain When the output signal from the multiplier is being

detected using a phase sensitive detector a 3 kHz sinusoidal signal is also

fed into the summing junction VT the target bias with respect to the screen

grid is zero in the electron pass mode The spherical analyzer deflecting

46

Figure 29 Photograph showing support of spectrometer from electrical feedthrough turret

W(100) Crystal

lOOK

Vr=O-6V

Dec Mode

Ace Mode (E Il

VOFFS

VOFFS=O-6V

Ratemeter ~

INlOO

=

Drift Space

epUISion Electrode

i -----In

(Ion Mode Only)

Jshy-l

Hamner N-780A Ortec 410 Linear Amp

Pulse Count Mode

Synchronous Detection Mode

PAR PAR Type A HR-8 Preamp

47K To Recorder Y

SP-1126

Figure 210 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer electronics for operation in the electron pass and ion pass modes

48

electrodes and the repulsion electrode of the cylindrical analyzer are scaled

using a resistor chain powered by a second OPS-2000 operational amplifier power

supply The voltage scaling for these electrodes was determined from particle

trajectory calculations The voltage applied to the repulsion electrode using

this resistor chain can be varied using a potentiometer this adjustment can

in effect vary the resolution of the cylindrical analyzer The OPS-2000

supply also biases the outer electrodes of the analyzer deflection plates by

means of a separate resistor chain The inner electrodes of these deflection

plates are fixed at the potential of the analyzers Herzog diaphrams The

ripple voltage on the output of both operational power supplies is less than

20 meV at 100 eV

Electrons impinge on the first dynode of the multiplier with an

energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer plus a voltage equal to

(R (36MO + R raquoV where R is shown in Figure 210 and V is the voltagem m M m M

across the multiplier In the synchronous detection mode V was variedM

between 1100 V and 1700 V In the pulse counting mode the voltage was normally

set at 2800 V The output of the multiplier after being passed by an

isolation capacitor is either pulse counted with a ratemeter or is detected

using a PAR HR-8 phase sensitive detector The reference signal for the HR-8

is either 3 kHz when taking dN(E)dE distributions (see Section 324 and

2Appendix B) or Auger data or 6 kHz when taking d N(E)dE distributions

When the spectrometer is operated in the ion pass mode the polarity

of the biasing on the analyzer deflecting electrodes is switched In addition

the positive pole of the electron mUltiplier supply is grounded This biasing

arrangement causes the ions to impinge on the multiplier at an energy

49

E pass + VM

which was usually 3040 kV In the ion pass mode the spectromshy

eter is generally operated at E = 40 eV This requires an acceleration of pass

the ions between the screen and LEED grids since the initial ion energies are

between 0 eV and 10 eV In addition to accelerating between the grids the

ions were normally accelerated between the target and screen grid using VT

in order to facilitate interpretation of the data as discussed in Section

325

The electronic circuitry for operating the analyzer in the time-ofshy

flight mode is identical to that just described for the ~on pass mode except

a pulsed voltage is applied to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a

schematic of this arrangement Unlike continuous operation in this mode ions

can enter the analyzer only during the on pulse In the lower part of

Figure 211 the energy of an ion is shown as a function of its position in the

spectrometer with the pulse on and off

In the work function mode the target is fixed at ground potential

through a picoammeter Retardation of the incident current is accomplished by

driving the drift tube positive in voltage

26 LEED Display System

The low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system consists of a

phosphor-coated screen located at the entrance to the spherical analyzer and

othree grids The screen a 1096 stainless steel sector (of which approxishy

omatelya 98 sector is visible) was coated with a P-l phosphor The first

two grids are constructed of 50 mesh rhodium-coated stainless steel The

LEED screen and these two grids are operated as a standard two grid LEED

50

II

Vr V

Ion Trajectory

ACC

Linear Amp Preamp

To Oscilloscope Trace

VRG~+ To O~oopeP I If Trace and Time u se t Base Trigger Genera or -

(l)~ os

CIgt () o cC u (l) E t gt - C N a (l) (l) (u~CIgt (l) 0 ~ shy - c 0 c 0 0 ti (l) ac o c

()

f- (j) a (j)lt f-lt u ~----~~------~~ ~I

0 1--A I ----5----------------

ElON I

VACC

I (l) ()

5 Q

gt CIgt t c

~---J8w c o H

SP-I027

EPAS S + V L-____________________---- M

Figure 211 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer for operation in the time-of-f1ight mode

51

system with the retarding grid biased to pass only electrons elastically

scattered from the target and with the LEED screen accelerating voltage

normally set at 5000 V Slots cut through the screen allow electrons and

ions to pass into the spectrometer Initial operation of the instrument

indicated that charging of the LEED screen caused a significant perturbation

on electron trajectories below 100 eV The third grid a 100 mesh stainless

s tee 1 spherical sector is loca ted 0050 em in front of the LEED screen to

alleviate this problem

An aluminum-coated glass plate mirror located below the spectrometer

reflects the LEED screen through a 6Lch indo in the chamber wall (see

Figure 21) LEED spot intensities are measured through this window using a

Gamma Scientific Model 2000 telephotometer

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly

The crystal manipulator assembly is shown schematically in Figure

212 and a photograph is given in Figure 213 The assembly is designed to

provide thermal and electrical control of the target while allowing the

target face to be rotatable between the gas dosing port the LEED screenshy

energy spectrometer position and the quadrupole mass spectrometer This

rotation is indicated in Figure 214 The manipulator assembly is composed

of a commercial Physical Electronics specimen manipulator a long shaft which

supports the rotary electrical connections a liquid nitrogen dewaI and

aluminum foil strap to provide target cooling and a target mounting assembly

The long shaft of the manipulator assembly is constructed of

different materials as follows A1 0 for electrical isolation (Figure 2122 3

52

Figure 212 Schematic diagram of the target manipulation and thermal control system showing (1) kovar-glass-kovar dewar insulation (2) Miniconflat flanges (3) Physical Electronics Industries specimen manipulator Model 10-501M mounted on 8 inch od Conflat flange (4) six 5 kV - 150 A electrical feedthroughs (5) clamp assembly (6) A1 03 rod (7) molybdenum spring2(8) stainless steel electr1cal connectors (9) electrical connecshytion (1 shown) (10) A1203 spacers (11) Pyrex plates (12) molybshydenum (13) 001 wall stainless tube (14) Pyrex tubes (15) tantalum rods (16) copper rod (17) vacuum chamber wall (18) liquid riitrogen dewar (19) 001 wall stainless tube (20) copper radiation shield (21) strap-to-dewar clamp (22) crystal support (23) 12 pole heater (24) strap-to-copper rod clamp (25) aluminum foil strap (26) pancake heater supp~rt~ (27) thermocouple (28) crystal (29) pancake heater (30) tanta~ lum section (31) molybdenum section (32) molybdenum-to-copper rod clamp assembly

53

Jl ~

Figure 213 Photograph of crystal manipulator The retarding field analyzer used to characterize the primary electron beam is shown mounted on the manipulator in place of the tungsten crystal mounting assembly

55

Magnetic Shielding

Tungsten Crystal

Energy Spectrometer and LEED Gas Dosing Optics Aperture

To Gas Bottle

Line -of-Sight Quadrupole Mass Crystal Holder Spectrometer and Manipulator

SP-1072

Figure 214 Schematic of the experimental chamber of the apparatus (see Section 22 for a discussion of the experimental chamber) Rotation of the crystal is indicated by the dotted line

56

no 6) molybdenum rod (no 12) 304 stainless steel tubing for thermal

isolation (no 13) and copper rod (no 16) Six electrical leads separated

by glass discs (no 11) wind around the shaft ~his configuration allows for

rotary motion of the shaft while still providing electrical control at the

targetJ The electrical leads then enter glass tubing parallel to the shaft

and end up at the target mounting assembly For clarity only one of these

leads is shown in Figure 212

An aluminum foil strap (no 25) made of 150 pieces of 254 cm x ~254

em x 00025 cm foil connects the liquid nitorgen reservoir to the copper rod

end of the manipulator shaft This provides conduction cooling to the target

A copper radiation shield (no 20) is constructed around the strap This

cooling system is sufficient to cool the target from flash temperatures to

approximately -1500

C in 5 minutes

The tungsten single crystal target is supported 095 cm above a

tantalum and molybdenum right angle mount (nos 30 31) on one 0038 cm

diameter tungsten wire The wire was spot-welded to the back face of the

tungsten disc prior to its final electropolishing The target is heated by

electron bombardment of its back face from a tungsten pancake heater (no 29)

The target can also be heated by conduction through its support wire using a

25 watt 12 pole 25L6 RCA heater which is mounted inside the tantalum part

of the right angle mount as shown dotted in Figure 212 (no 23) Using this

heater the target temperature can be varied between -20oC and -150

0 C Tungsten

and tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple leads 0076 cm in diameter are spot-

welded to the side of the target The thermocouple wires are each supported

by being fed along the axis of a tungsten wire helix (not shown in Figure

57

212) The helices are made of 025 cm diameter wire and are spot-welded to

supports near the center of the molybdenum part of the right angle mount

Calibration of the thermocouple was made out of the vacuum chamber using a

copper-constantan reference thermocouple The calibration procedure is

described in Appendix A and the calibration is given in Figure A1

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures

The experimental sample is a single crystal tungsten disc cut from

a (100) oriented tungsten rod using a diamond impregnated stainless wire in a

string saw The tungsten rod supplied by Metals Research Ltd was taken

from the purest 75 cm of a triply zone refined 25 cm length

Both the front and back surfaces of the disc were polished using in

succession 15 micron 3 micron and 1 micron alumina After being mechanishy

cally polished the crystal was e1ectropo1ished using a 1 NaOH solution The

final dimensions of the target disc are 0033 cm (013 in) thick and approxishy

mate1y 080 cm in diameter

After the final e1ectropo1ish the orientation of both the front and

back surfaces was checked using an x-ray diffractometer and was determined to

be within 0100 of the (100) face A back reflection Laue picture of the final

surface showed sharp well-defined beams indicating a high degree of crystalshy

line order

The target was o 74cleaned initially by heating to at least 2200 K in

a -61x10 Torr oxygen atmosphere for 9 hr to remove carbon The choice of

temperature and time were somewhat arbitrary as there is considerable debate

in the literature as to the proper method for cleaning tungsten for surface

58

research 74 A standard method7 1823 has been to heat the target to some

temperature above 11000 K (commonly above 20000 K) in an oxygen environment for

times varying up to 200 hr or more This process is generally followed by a

high temperature degassing in ultrahigh vacuum However there is evidence

othat if the temperature is held above 2000 K bulk carbon will not diffuse to

75 74the surface The possibility of thermal etching must also be considered

For the tungsten used in this research the amount of contamination

on the surface was determined using Auger spectroscopy Figure 215 is an

Auger spectrum taken from a dirty surface showing the Auger peaks resolved in

our system Carbon oxygen and tungsten peaks are seen clearly Also shown

76in Figure 215 are theoretical Auger transition energies for C 0 and W

with the relative theoretical strengths of the transitions indicated by the

normalized height of the lines In Figure 216 are shown Auger spectra taken

after different crystal treatments or under different experimental conditions

Curve a shows the spectrum taken after saturating the surface with CO Note

the carbon and oxygen peaks There is no measurable carbon peak after a

flash as seen in curve b Structure does remain between 475 eV and 525 eV

It is doubtful that this structure is a result of oxygen contamination since

there are normally three oxygen Auger peaks with the 490 eV oxygen peak

stronger than the 475 eV oxygen peak in this spectrum no 490 eV peak is

observed In order to reduce any oxygen contamination the target was heat

0 treated to 2200 K in a hydrogen atmosphere of 5x10- 7 Torr for 4 minutes 74

The structure above 475 eV is seen to remain unchanged as seen in curve c

This is a further indication that this structure is not oxygen Curve d shows

that sitting in a 400 eV 4 ~ primary beam close to typical operating

59

Carbon Oxygen

o 100

dN(E) dE

200 300 400 500 600 Electron Energy (eV) SP-U44

Figure 215 Auger electron spectrums obtained at different instrument sensitivities from dirty tungsten crystal Also shown in upper part of figure are theoretical Auger transitions for tungsten carbon and oxygen calculated by Coghlan and C1ausing76 Heights of the lines represent relative theoshyretical strengths of the transitions

60

(a) CO Monolayer

~5Ab) Heate~toCleon x25

d ~5dN(E) dE (e) Heat Treated

x25 in H2

_~5 ~ (d) 400V4fLA

x25 Primary Beam for

25~

d x5

(e) 1700V 211-A Primary Beam for 10 Min

200 300 400 500 Electron Energy (eV) SP-1l45

Figure 216 Comparison of Auger electron spectrums taken over the energy range 200 eV to 550 eV under different experimental condition

61

conditions for 25 minutes causes only a slight change in the slope of the

curve at the energy at which the carbon peak occurs (Note that curve d was

taken with a primary beam of 1700 eV after the crystal had been sitting in

the lower energy beam for 25 minutes) The absence of the carbon peak in curve

d means that the crystal surface is not contaminated from the gun while taking

measurements After bombarding the target for 10 minutes with a primary beam

of 1700 eV and 21 ~ typical Auger spectroscopy beam conditions a carbon

peak is observed as shown in curve e Using the peak to peak height of the

272 ~V carbon peak obtained near CO saturation as an indication of carbon

monolayer coverage the electron gun in the Auger mode is seen to deposit

approximately 013 monolayer of carbon in 10 minutes

From the above results it is concluded that the tungsten surface

could be flashed clean and that no carbon or oxygen contamination is deposited

during most experimental measurements Some carbon is deposited when operating

in the Auger mode Two unexpected small peaks are observed between 475 eV

and 525 eV Identification of the source of this weak structure could not be

made with certainty although two possible causes are worth noting The

unexpected structure could be tungsten Auger transitions Theoretically

several relatively strong tungsten peaks have been predicted at 477 eV and

486 eV and also between 510 eV and 520 eV However no observations of

tungsten transitions in this energy range have been reported in the experimenshy

tal literature A second possible source of this structure mighL be chromium

There is considerable chromium in the spectrometers stainless steel parts and

chromium Auger peaks occur at 489 eV and 529 eV However if it is assumed

that Auger spectroscopy is sensitive to one percent of a monolayer it would

62

13 2require surface coverages of 10 chromium atomscm or more to yield these

peaks It is extremely unlikely that either 1) a concentration of chromium

this large could diffuse to the tungsten surface from the stainless parts or

2) enough chromium could be sputtered (at the ambient pressure) into the backshy

ground from the stainless parts and subsequently adsorb onto the surface A

spark vaporization mass spectroscopy analysis of a tungsten sample cut from

the same boule as the tungsten used in this research revealed no chromium

thus eliminating the possibility of a bulk chromium concentration in the

crystal Hence although the weak structure corresponds to some degree to

chromium Auger lines it is believed that the crystal is not contaminated with

this element In an Auger spectrum taken between 500 eV and 900 eV (not shown)

some additional very weak structure was seen but none of it could be

attributed to any specific element

o 77In this research the crystal was always flashed to gt 2200 K for 30

seconds prior to experimentation Any reference to a clean tungsten surface

means that this procedure has been followed

The crystal surface exhibited what appeared to be furrows which

increased in density during the course of the research Because the coolest

part of the crystal during a flash that region next to the tungsten wire

support remained visibly polished and flat it is believed that the uneven

appearance was temperature related

29 Gas Handling System

The gas handling system used to obtain adsorption overlayers is

shown in Figure 217 Research grade hydrogen (impurity level less than 2

To Quadrupole Moss Spectrometer

Alternate Gas Source Control Valve

Thermocouple Gouge

Plenum

~-----Viewing Port

Jet Position Adjustment

Ion Gouge

Cryosorb Pump

0 t)

S-1l28

Figure 217 Schematic drawing of gas handling system

64

ppm) is admitted from a glass flash into a pyrex manifold and stainless steel

reservoir Reservoir pressure was kept near 50 microns as read using a

thermocouple gauge From the reservoir hydrogen is admitted into the vacuum

system through a 126 cm diameter tube by opening valve A Figure 217 or is

admitted as a gas jet by opening valve B The jet is formed as hydrogen

effuses through a small orifice at the end of a 063 cm dia tube78J~9 Leaking

hydrogen through the 126 em diameter tube increases the background and is used

when hydrogen is to be adsorbed from the background The jet can be used

with the target rotated in front of the gas dosing port for rapid over layer

adsorption with a low hydrogen background pressure The gas jet is designed

so that only that fraction of the effusing gas which will strike the target is

allowed to pass through an aperture in a skimmer The rest of the gas jet is

reflected back from the skimmer and out of the experimental chamber When the

target is rotated up to face the spectrometer the gas jet if left on passes

out of the experimental chamber through holes in the opposite side of the

magnetic shielding

The gas manifold and reservoir can be pumped down to less than 1

micron using a liquid nitrogen cryosorb pump

210 Mass Spectrometer

A quadrupole mass spectrometer Varian Residual Gas Analyzer Model

974-0003 is mounted on a vacuum chamber port opposite the gas jet port In

this research it was used for vacuum chamber leak testing and determination of

the components of the background pressure

65

CHAPrER 3

EXPERIMENTAL PFGCEDURE AND RESULTS

31 Introduction

The experimental data taken on the hydrogen-W(lOO) system are

presented in this chapter The apparatus used in obtaining the data has been

discussed previously in Chapter 2 A further explanation of experimental

procedures used in measuring parameters follows in Section 32 The experishy

mental results are presented in the remaining sections of this chapter A

general discussion of the data is given in Chapter 4 and a summary of the

research is given in Chapter 5

32 Experimental Procedure

321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements

Contact potential measurements in this case the difference between

the work functions of the target and of the cathode in the electron gun are

43 44measured using a retarding potential techn1que The primary or incident

electron beam current is retarded between the electron gun drift tube and the

target The measured current to the target goes to zero at a retarding voltage

VR

given by

V = (rn + V - rn ) + E (31)R Tcath sc TW pr1

where Cfgtcath is the cathode work function CfgtW is the W(lOO) work function Vsc

is the potential due to space charge immediately in front of the cathode and

E is the applied potential between the cathode and the drift tube Changespr1

66

in the work function of the target ~ are calculated by measuring changes

in VR

LlVR

From Equation 3la change in V is found to equalR

(32)

with the assumptions of constant rn h V and E The assumptions usedTcat sc pr1

are reasonable since the cathode in thermal equilibrium and since it

is exposed to very small changes in the ambient during the measurements The

applied potential E i can be maintained constant pr

A typical retarding potential curve is given in Figure 31 The

electron current to the target the ordinate in this figure is given by

(33)

where I i is the current incident on the target from the electron gun and pr

I (E N) the secondary current represents the electron current leavingsec pri

the target surface This secondary current is a function of both primary

47electron energy and hydrogen coverage Because of the dependence on coverage

the intensity and line shape of the retarding potential curves change somewhat

upon adsorption

In determining LlVR

or equivalently the target work function change

a retarding potential curve taken from the clean tungsten surface and a curve

taken after hydrogen adsorption are normalized at a position on the curve where

the target current begins to falloff sharply (position A in Figure 31) The

work function change is then measured as the voltage difference between the

two curves at half the normalized height

Changes in the work function of 001 eV can be resolved The

10

(J)

c I

I

AE lt( l-~ c Q)

-

05 U ~ I I ~ Q) 0) shy0 I-

omiddot ~ middot 10 20 30

Cathode Potential-Target Potential (volts)

SP-1142 Figure 31 Retarding potential curve showing the current to the target as

a function of the difference in applied potential between the electron gun cathode and the target The curve is shifted in energy with changes in hydrogen coverage due to changes in the target work function 6~ 6~ is measured as the difference between two retarding curves at the height A2

68

measurement was sensitive to target rotation position because of the retarding

field in the target region However with the target positioning stop used

the retarding potential curve could be repeated with an accuracy better than

002 eV after rotating the target Since the work function change is the

difference between two such curves the error in the measurement is ~004 eV

Changes in hydrogen coverage are monitored by changes in the work

function of the tungst~n tlurface No experimental attempts have been made

to calibrate the measureci ork fUllction change to an absolute change in the

coverage of atomssurface area Such a calibration requires an accurate measure

of system pumping speed or dosing flux However as discussed in Section 34

such a calibration can be made using results from the literature

322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current Measurements

The total electron beam current incident on the target Ipri is

measured by biasing the target at a potential of +45 volts with respect to the

surrounding experimental chamber Tests indicated that the current measured

in this manner is within 3 percent of the total current leaving the electron

gun which is also I The current leaving the gun is measured by summingprJ

electron currents to the target grids LEED screen magnetic shielding

analyzer Herzog diaphrams and front shield plate This current sum measureshy

ment of I was more difficult to make experimentally than biasing the targetprJ

at +45 volts

The primary electron energy E refers to the energy of theprJ

incident electrons referenced to the vacuum level Themiddotpritnarymiddot energy is

measured between the cathode and drift tube of the electron gun A contact

potential correction between the guns cathode and the target of between

69

-17 eV and -22 eV has been applied to the measured primary energy given in

the data This correction is found by using the measured cut off potential VR

and Equation 31 The spread in the correction is a result of th~ change in

space charge and hence change in V which occurs when the potential gradientsc

at the cathode is altered by changing the voltage on the control grid The

control grid voltage determines the potential fields in the region of the

cathode surface and hence affects the emitted current and space charge

323 Target Temperature Measurement

Prior to taking any data the target was cleaned by rapid electron

bombardment heating (flashing) at gt 22000 K for 30 seconds Figure 32 shows

the temperature of the target versus time from end of flash with and without

liquid nitrogen in the dewar Residual heat in the crystal supports due

to previous flashes does affect the temperature versus time curves somewhat

The higher temperature data were normally taken starting 3 to 4 minutes after

flashing at a target temperature of 600 C + lSoC Data taken under these

conditions are sometimes referred to as room terr~erature or higher temperature

data Low temperature data were taken starting 4 to S minutes after flaShing

when the target temperature was less than -l45 0 C

324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements

The electron scattering data consists of the electron signal emanating

from the target in the acceptance solid angle of the spectrometer following

impingement of the primary electron beam on the target An energy distribution

of these electrons is taken by fixing the pass energy of the spectrometer at

E and sweeping a retarding or accelerating voltage between the screen gridpass

and LEED grid as described previously in Section 25 The output current of

70 300~----~----~----~--------------------

200

-u 1000

-~ J

e ltlgt 0 E ~ -ltlgt ~ 0 ~

Liquid Nitrogen in Dewar

-100

-2000~----~----~----~----~----~----~61 2 345

Time from Flash (min) SP-ll40

Figure 32 Temperature of the tungsten crystal versus time elapsed since a crystal flash The upper curve represents the temperature versus time relation when there is no crystal cooling The lower curve shows this relation when there is liquid nitrogen in the cooling dewar

71

the electron multiplier N(E) is pulse counted or as discussed below Cld in

Appendix B synchronously detected

N(E) is proportional to the electron current originating at the

target with energy between E and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance

solid angle of the analyzer This distribution consists of rapidly varying

true secondary and characteristic loss structure interpretable in terms of

transitions and collective oscillations in the target plus a smoothly varying

background In order to separate the structure from the background the energy

distribution is electronically differentiated using a technique proposed by

67Harrls As shown in Appendix B a signal proportional to the first or to

the second derivative of N(E) is obtained by synchronously detecting the

appropriate harmonic of the output of the electron multiplier The relation

between the electron signal N(E) and the synchronously detected signal can

be seen from Equations B4 through B9 In these equations it is assumed a

peaked structure G(E) being inv~stigatedcan be represented by a Gaussian

centered at E with standard deviation o The detected first harmonic of o

N(E) has structure which has a peak-to-peak height proportional to G(E plusmn a)o

The detected second harmonic of N(E) has structure at E proportional to o

G(E ) a2 In addition there is t contribution to the detected signal from o

the background Since the background which can be represented by a polynomial

in energy is slowly varying the higher order terms which remairr in the difshy

feren tiated signals are small

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as

is commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in taking electron

scattering characteristic energy loss measurements

72

325 Ion Measurements

g+ ions desorbed from the crystal following electron impact could

be detected by the spectrometer when operated in the ion pass mode It was

found convenient to operate the instrument at a pass energy of 40 eV in this

mode operation at a lower pass energy while increasing the resolution

decreased the already weak signal intensity Since the ions have between 0 eV

and 10 eV energy when desorbed acceleration between the target and spectromshy

eter was necessary An accelerating voltage V (the output of an OPS-2000 acc

power supply) was applied between the screen grid and the entrance to the

spectrometer In addition a second accelerating voltage V was appliedT

between the target and the screen grid This latter voltage was needed in

order to energetically separate the ion signal which originated at the target

from a background signal produced by 1) ions electron desorbed from the screen

grid andor other surfaces in the experimental chamber and 2) ionization of

the background The ions that passed into the spectrometer were accelerated

into the first dynode of the electron multiplier The output pulses of the

multiplier were amplified and then counted with a ratemeter

Prior to taking ion data the target was flashed and allowed to

cool to the experimental temperature It was then exposed to hydrogen with

the hydrogen coverage being monitored using work function measurements Ion

energy distributions were taken by fixing E and V and sweeping the pass T

accelerating voltage V Desorption curve measurements which are a measureshyacc

ment of the decrease of the ion signal in the electron beam were taken by

fixing V V and E and monitoring the ion signal as a function of acc T pass

time

73

The kinetic energy of the detected ions is equal to the spectrometer

pass energy E minus the acceleration of the ions between the target and pass

spectrometer V + VT

plus a contact potential correction term due to the acc

difference in work functions of the clean target and surfaces of the spectromshy

eter The pass and acceleration energies are chosen for each experiment The

contact potential difference between the tungsten target and the rhodium

coated stainless steel surfaces of the spectrometer is less than 015 eV

This was determined using a retarding potential measurement between the

target and screen grid Dosing the target with hydrogen did not change the

work function of the grid Hence it is assumed that 015 eV can be used for

the correction at all target hydrogen coverages Since this correction is

on the order of the error in the measurement it has not been made in the

data

The analyzer is operated in a time-of-f1ight mode by applying a

pulsed voltage to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a schematic of this

arrangement Incident ions can enter the analyzer only during the pulse By

measuring the path length d = ab (see Figure 211) from the retarding grid

to the electron multiplier knowing the pass energy E of the spectromshypass

eter and experimentally measuring the time for the entering species to

traverse the distance d the mass of singly-charged ions passing through the

analyzer can be calculated using the following formulation of the distance

equals velocity times time equation

m _ dxrt J 2 (34)La J2E(X~

74

The flight time is measured by making a trace on an oscilloscope of both the

pulse applied to the retarding grid that allows ions to pass into the specshy

trometer and also the output pulses of the linear amplifier The flight time

t is the time difference between these two signals minus the transmission

time of the pulse from the first dynode of the electron multiplier to the

oscilloscope This transmission time is estimated to be several hundred

nanoseconds

The data taken in this research is presented in the remaining

sections of this chapter

33 Ion Species Identification

The ion species desorbed from the tungsten crystal by electron imshy

pact are identified using a time-of-flight technique as described above For

these measurements the spectrometer was set to pass 40 eV ions A total

acceleration voltage V + V of 370 eV was applied between the crystalT acc

and the entrance to the spectrometer Hence the energy of the ions origishy

nating at the crystal surface and passed by the spectrometer was 3 eV (3 eV

corresponds to the maximum in intensity of the ion energy dist~ibution given

in Section 35) Figure 33 shows an oscilloscope trace obtained when opershy

ating in the time-of-flight mode The trace was taken by applying a 22 ~sec

4pulse to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl0 pulsessec) This is the

large pulse at the left in the figure Several output pulses from the linear

amplifier can be seen approximately 4~sec after the retarding grid pulse

These are pulses that have been produced by the electron multiplier following

ion impingement onto the first dynode Taking into consideration the transshy

mission time the experimental flight time is 37~sec Using Equation 34

75

ill22fLsec Window Amplifier Output Pulses

o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Time (fLsec)

Time of Flight (H+) =J2~m ES 40 eV d=029 m

~ 33 fLsec

Figure 33 Oscilloscope trace showing the pulses observed when operating the spectrometer in the time-of-flight mode The 22 ~sec trace at the left is the analyzer on pulse applied to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl04 pulsessec) During this pulse ions pass into the spectrometer Several output pulses from the linear amplifier resulting from ions striking the electron multiplier can be seen delayed by their flight time in the spectrometer and the pulse transmission time from the multiplier to the oscilloscope The output pulses have been enhanced for reproduction purposes

76

with the analyzer pass energy of 40 eV a path length of 029 m and a time of

37 ~sec the mass of the desorbed ions is calculated to be 14 amu The unshy

certainty in this calculation is estimated to be~05 amu Sources of error

include the estimate of transmission time and the uncertainty in the time difshy

ference read from the oscilloscope trace In adqition over part of the path

length (the region between the retarding and LEED grids and in the cylindrical

analyzer) the ions have less than 40 eV energy Hence from this calculation

alone it is not possible to identify the ions as H+ However in experiments

in which the length of the retarding grid pulse was shortened to~ 1 ~ sec

flight times that differed by gt1 ~sec could be distinguished on the oscilloshy

scope The calculated flight time for ions of mass one is 3 3 ~ sec and for

ions of mass two is 46 ~sec or 13 ~sec longer Thus H+ could be resolved

from Hiions The ions detected in the time-of-flight experiment of Figure 33

+have been identified as H For certain spectrometer biasing conditions

+pulses appear on the oscilloscope 1 5 ~ sec later than the H pulses The ions

causing these pulses have been identified as having mass two

When oxygen is adsorbed on the surface the signal pulses on the osshy

cilloscope occur approximately 135 ~sec after the retarding grid pulse This

is in good agreement with the expected flight time for 0+ ions

+In addition to the H ions observed after adsorbing hydrogen from the

jet H+ ions were unexpectedly desorbed by electron impact from the undosed

tungsten surface upon cooling the crystal to below OoC Possible sources for

the hydrogen desorbed under these conditions are discussed in Chapter 4

If E is set at 40 eV set at 0 eV and V varied above pass VT acc

40 eV no ions originating at the crystal surface can be passed by the spectromshy

77

eter However with these biasing conditions both H+ and H + ions are obshy2

served This ion signal has to originate at the walls of the experimental

+ +chamber from a ESD process andor from the ambient Both the H and H2 sigshy

nals increased when H2 was admitted into the background from the gas handling

system an indication that at least part of the signal origtnates from ionizashy

tion in the background It is not easy to determine the intensity of the

+ +H or H2 desorbed from the chamber walls However it is possible to show that

ionization of ambient H2 could be a serious noise problem The cross section

+ -17 2for electron impact ionization of H2 to H2 is 48xlO cm and of H2

22xlO-17 cm2 for 400 eV electrons 80 An electron current of lxlO-6 A at 400

eV would produce about llxlO3 H2+ ions per cm3-Torr-sec and 5xl012 H + ions

3 per cm -Torr-sec Thus it is reasonable to assume that at the background presshy

sures here a sizable ion Signal is produced although most of it undoubtedly

is not detected In the ESD eXperiments performed here it was desired to

detect only ions produced at the surface of the crystal It has been possible

to bias the spectrometer such that this is the case Almost none of the extra

signal has the correct energy to pass through the spectrometer when V isT

held several volts positive and when V is kept less than E - V bull acc pass T

34 Work Function Results

Work function changes resulting from hydrogen adsorption have been

monitored as a measure of hydrogen coverage Figure 34 shows the tungsten

surface work function change as a function of exposure to hydrogen The crysshy

tal was at 600 C for this experiment To obtain this data the crystal was roshy

tated into the gas jet dosed for a measured time and then rotated back to a

position in front of the spectrometer where a retarding potential curve was

78

Figure 34 Change in work function 6~ of a room temperature tungsten (100) surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption 6~ is plotted versus exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen For comparison the results reported by Madey820 are also shown Exposures for the data taken here have been determined by normalizing the measured adsorption time to Madeys absolute exposure at a work function change ~ of 041 eV

------o 0 Withrow

10

08

gt06 OJ--amplt]04

02

0~013

Madey and Yates

Max bcp=~~

Data Normalized at bcp =041

0

10M 101610~ Exposure (Moleculescm2) SP-1121

80

S o Max ltltgt=09S-~ 6 A Max ltltgt =092 --eshy

lt34 o Adsorption at 60degC A Adsorption at -150degC

2

20 40 60 SO 100 120 140 160 ISO 200 220 Exposure (arbitrary units)

SP-1214

Figure 35 Comparison of work function changes at 600 C and -lSOoC resulting from hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten (100)

OlO~i--~----~--~----~--~----~--~--~~--~~

- W(lOO)gt (J) 008

- shy

-u 006 o o

00 ~ 004 --Sshy

I 002-I shy--S- 0

-200 -100 o 100 200 Temperature (OC) SP-U56

Figure 36 Change in the work function of the undosed tungsten (100) surface versus crystal temperature for the temperature range -150oC to 220oC The ordinate in the graph represents the work function at temperature T measured with respect to the work function at 220degC The data was obtained in three_separate experimental runs indicated by different symbols as discussed in the text

82

taken This procedure was followed repeatedly without closing the jet in order

to assure a constant hydrogen flux (molecm2-sec) from the jet onto the

-8crystal face An incident primary electron current oflt2xlO A at a primary

energy of 100 eV was used The saturation coverage work function change

8tCP ) is 098 + 004 eV For comparison results obtained by Madey and Yates

max

for the work function change resulting from adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO)

are given in Figure 34 Absolute exposures for the data taken here have been

obtained by normalizing the dose time to Madey and Yates exposure at a work

function change of 041 eV Using this normalization good agreement beshy

tween their results and the data obtained here is found

The work function change of the tungsten surface as a function of hyshy

drogen exposure was also measured when the crystal was at -150degC The data are

given in Figure 35 The procedure used in obtaining the 600 c data was fallowed

in taking these data The maximum work function change at this lowtemperature

is 092 + 004 eV

The dependence of the work function on crystal temperature is shown

in Figure 36 The work function is seen to decrease 005 eV as the temperashy

ture is raised from -lSOoC to 220degC The data in this figure were obtained in a

series of retarding potential curve measurements taken at different crystal

temperatures The temperature was varied by radiation heating the ~rystal on

its back face using the pancake heater It was found impossible to take decent

retarding potential curves when the crystal was heated more than about ISOoC

above its initial temperature As the current through the pancake heater was

increased electron emission from this heater also increased This emission

current interfered with the retarding potential measurement when it became a

83

fraction of the incident current The three different symbols in Figure 36

represent data taken when the initial temperature prior to heating was -150oC

work function change has been reported Assuming this result and using the

-1350 C and 50oC The change in work function with temperature was reversible

In this research no attempts have been made to measure absolute covshy

erages Coverages are defined in terms of ~ the measured work function

change As discussed in Section 126 a linear relation between coverage and

8

room temperature data taken here cover~ge and work function can be described

by the expression

e = 102 ~ (35)

where ~ is measured in eVe e represents coverage in fraction of a mon6laye~

15 2 8 A monolayer is assumed to be 2xlO H atomscm Estimates of coverage in this

work will be made by measuring work function changes and using Equation 35

However it should be noted that the data will be presented in terms of the

measured quantity~ and therefore are not dependent on any assumptions

made relating coverage and work function

35 H+ Ion DesoEPtion Measurements

The electron stimulated desorption of H+ ions from the W(lOO) surface

has been studi~d under different experimental conditions Detection of the

ion signal has been discussed in Section 325 The results follow below

351 H+ Ion Energy Distribution

Ions desorbed from a surface by electron impact have a characteristic

distribution in energy This distribution is dependent on the adsorption states

from which the ions originate In the simple models used to describe this

phenomena changes in the observed energy distribution except some intensity

84

changes result from changes in the adsorption states Hence this measurement

can be used to characterize the states from which ions are desorbed A theore~

ieal discussion of the ion energy distribution is given in Appendix C

Figure 37 shows the energy distribution of H+ ions electron desorbed

-6from W(IOO) using a primary beam current of IxlO A at an energy of 400 eV

This current was sufficiently low such that the energy distribution was obtained

without desorbing the hydrogen coverage to any extent The choice of 400 eV for

the primary energy was to some extent arbitrary although it was found that

below 400 eV the ion signal was weaker and the measurements required more time

to take To obtain the data the crystal was flashed and then allowed to cool

several minutes to 60oC It was then dosed with hydrogen from the jet until a

work function change of 018 eV corresponding to a substantial coverage in the

~2 state was measured The distribution was obtained by scanning V while acc

holding V at 4 volts The distribution has an intensity maximum at 3 + 05 eVT

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV No correction to the energy scale

has been made for the target-spectrometer contact potential difference since

this amounts to only 015 eV which is smaller than the accuracy in the meashy

s~remertt A small part of the detected ion signal which did not originate at

the crystal surface has been subtracted out The amount of this contribution

was determined by monitoring the ion signal from the flashed undosed surface

This extra signal amounted to no more than 10 percent of the total signal and

was entirely on the low side of the energy distribution

+For comparison the energy distributions of H ions produced by elecshy

tron impact of gas phase hydrogen81 and hydrogen-covered polycrystalline tungshy

82sten are included in Figure 37 All three curves have been normalized to

the same peak intensity The three curves have characteristically different

85

Figure 37 Energy distribution of H+ ions from a tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen Hydrogen coverage for this measurement corresponds to a work function change of 018 eV (approximately 019 monolaYS2) F~r comparison the energy distribution reported by Nishijima of H ions des orbed from hydrogen covered polyshycrystalline tungsten is given ASIo shown is an ion energy distribution obtained by Hagstrum from gas phase hydrogen The three distributions have been normalized at their peak intensities

-Ugt-

Q)

gtshyc o

H

+ r

86

H+ Ion Energy Distribution

- Withrow H2 W(lOO) -- Nishijima H2 I W (polycrystol) _- HagstrumH2 gas

1 J

ii ~ I I iiI ~ I

iii middot VI 1

I I bull

o 2 468

H+ Ion Energy (eV)

87

distributions in energy

Energy distributiol1s of H+ ions taken at different hydrogen coverages

are shown in Figure 38 Experimental conditions for these measurements were

the same as used to obtain the previous figure There is no change in peak

position or line shape as a function of coverage except for heavy dosings

where the distribution appears to be slightly broader The maximum intensity

is a function of coverage as discussed below

Figure 39 shows a series of ion energy distributions taken after

adsorption from the jet with the target temperature approximately -150o

C For

these data the target was flashed and allowed to cool 5 minutes before

adsorption All other experimental conditions were identical to the correshy

sponding 600

C data The distributions peak at 3 eV (except at high coverage

where the peak appears to be slightly higher) and have full widths at half

maxima of 26 eV identical to the results found for 600 C adsorption The

high energy tail of these low temperature distributions appears to be somewhat

wider than the corresponding higher temperature data however

After flashing the target to 22000 K and allowing it to cool five

ominutes to a temperature of lt-145 C hydrogen ions can be detected without

dosing the surface from the jet An energy distribution for this signal is

shown in Figure 310 A time-of-flight measurement confirmed that the observed

signal is indeed H+ ions The energy distribution peaks at 25 05 eVvith a

full width at half maximum of 58 eV The peak intensity of the ion signal

obtained without dosing depends on the previous history of the sample and on

the experimental parameters as discussed in Section 35~ This intensity

change is indicated by arrows in Figure 310 For this measurement the

88

H+ from H2 W (100) T=600C

Zero Levels

fI)

cshy s gt

~

c-0 ~

0 ~ --0

CIgt

gt-shyc 0

1-1

+J

o 2 4 6

6cent= OSSeV

6cent=06geV

6cent=045eV

6cent=0lSeV

Acent=OlOeV

Acent=003eV

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1l96

Figure 38 Comparison of energy distributions of g+ ions desorbed from a 600 c tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

89

-ffl middotcshy

l

gtshy 0 shy

0 0-0 ltlgt

gt= C 0

H

+I

H+ from H2 W(100) T =-150degC

Zero Levels

Dcp=067 eV

Dcp= 043eV

---_Dcp=Olle~

___

Dcp=017eV

D_cp=004eV

o 246 H+lon Energy (eV)

SP-1197

Figure 39 Comparison of energy distributions of H+ ions desorbed from a low temperature (-lSOOC) tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

90

--(J) H+ from Undosed W(lOO)

T=l50degC

H+ from H2 Dosed W

ot 60degC

-0

-Q)

~l ~ + I O~~~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~ o 2 4 6

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1202

Figure 310 Energy distribution obtained from a flashed but undo sed tungsten (100) surface which has been cooled to -150oC For comparison the energy distribution of a+ ions from the tungsten (100) surface after dosing with hydrogen is shown by the dashed line The two distributions are normalized at their maximum intensities The intensity of the ion signal from the undosed surface changes as a function of sample history as discussed in the text This is indicated by the arrow

I

91

primary energy was 400 eVe A relatively low incident electron current

of lxlO-7 A was used so that the coverage in the surface state being probed

would not be strongly depleted during the measurement This state has a high

desorption cross section as calculated in Chapter 4 and hence depletion is

a possibility It should be noted that the same energy distribution is obshy

tained from the low temperature state using a beam current of 2xlO-6 A The

latter high current measurement reflects the distribution in energy of H+ ions

desorbed from the fast state when its coverage is in equilibriumll as disshy

cussed in Section 352

The intensity of the ion signal desorbed from the surface at both

60 0 C and -1500 C is strongly coverage dependent In Figure 311 is plotted the

intensity of the 3 eV H+ ion signal as a function of work function change upon

adsorption of hydrogen The signals from the 60 0 C and -lSOoC surfaces have

maximum intensities at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV respecshy

tively This difference indicates that adsorption at the low temperature

differs somewhat from that at 600C At higher hydrogen coverages theion

signals decrease to less than 15 of their peak intensities indicating that

the cross section for ion desorption decreases as the ll state fills The

41 reason for this decrease is not well understood although Madey has sug~_

gested that it results from a coverage dependent rate of reneutralization of

the ions produced by the incident beam At near monolayer coverages the 3 eV

ion signal increased somewhat

The data in Figur~ 311 are normalized at the peak intensity The

absolute maximum yields at the two temperatures are the same within 25

Also shown normalized at the peak intensity are Madeys intensity versus

41 coverage data for hydrogen adsorbed on W(lOO) at room temperature The

--

en + ~ H from H2 W (100) J ~ ~ Withrow 60degC ~ 0 Withrow -150degC shye __ -- Madey 22degCA

c

C li)

gtshy 0

c N

o H + I o x ~

cf c

o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Il cp (eV)

Figure 311 Intensity of the 3 eV g+ ion signal from the tungsten (1ampH)-1195 surface as a function of the change in work function resulting from hydrogen adsorption Data for adsorption at 600 C and -l50oC are plotted For comparison the results obtained by Madey4 from a room temperature tungsten (100) surface are included

93

maximum in his ion signal occurs for the same coverage as the maximum in the

room temperature data taken here His results are more sharply peaked howshy

ever This difference may be due to the different conditions under which the

two sets of data were obtained Madeys results represent ions desorbed in a

narrow cone normal to the surface whereas the spectrometer used here collected

only those ions desorbed from the surface at 350 + 2 120 Madey also used a

lower primary energy

352 Desorption Curve Measurements

The H+ ion signal is observed to decrease with time if a primary

electron beam current of sufficient intensity per surface area is used A

theoretical description of this measurement referred to as a desorption

curve is given in Appendix C It can be shown that the expected ion signal

decreases to an equilibrium value The rate of decay of the desorption curve

and the equilibrium value are used to calculate parameters characteristic of

the adsorption state being probed

Figure 312 shows the decay of the 3 eV H+ ion signal from tungsten

(100) initially covered with hydrogen to a work function change of 010 eV

oThe temperature of the crystal for this measurement was 60 C An incident

-6 -3 2current of 5xlO A (a current density of 25xlO Aem) at a primary energy

of 400 eV was used The decrease in ion yield is seen to be quite slow The

equilibrium value shown in this figure iH+ was estimated from the equil

analysis of the data in Chapter 4

+As noted above H ions could be desorbed from a cold but undosed

tungsten (100) surface The desorption curve for this undosed state is shown

in Figure 313 For this data the crystal was flashed and allowed to cool

5 minutes to -150o

C Then the incident electron current was turned on (see

94

I I I t I I I I I H+ from H2 W(l00) Epri =400 eV-(f) Ipri =5 X 10-6 A

a ~rp =010 eV82000r- shy

-(f)

c (l) I- shy iHquil-c

-~1000 shyo

H + I

t I I I I I o 100 200 300 400

Time (sec) SP-1203

Figure 312 Change in the a+ ion current during electron obombardment of a 60 C tungampten (100) surface

Hydrogen was initially adsorbed to a coverage of 010 monolayer

95

200 -()

a ~160 gt

if) -c ~120 c

H c ~ 80

+r 40

H+ Ions fromW(lOO) Epri=400eV

Ipri=lA

Temp =- 1500 C

IH~qUil ------------shy

Figure 313 Change in the a+ ion current during electron bombardment of a flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface cooled to -150oC

140

96

Section 354 for a discussion of how the current was controlled) and the

ion signal decay monitored The signal is seen to undergo a rapid decay It

reaches its equilibrium value in several minutes in sharp contrast with the

desorption curve obtained after hydrogen dosing at room temperature An inshy

-6 -4 2cident current of lxlO A (a current density of 5lxlO Alcm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV was used to take the desorption curve from the undosed cold

surface This current density is only 20 percent of the value used for the

room temperature data of Figure 312 It was found convenient to use this

smaller value since the decay of the ion signal was so rapid Additional

desorption measurements on this fast decaying or fast state are given in

the following two sections

A desorption curve obtained after dosing the cold tungsten (100)

surface with hydrogen is shown in Figure 314 The data were taken using a

-6 -3 2primary current of 3xlO A (a current density of 15xlO Acm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV The surface was dosed to a work function change of 007 eV

Initially there is a rapid decay of the ion signal which is similar to the

desorption curve obtained from the fast state Following this initial decaYt

the signal continues to fall for a time but at a much slower rate of decay

This desorption pattern different than either of the desorption curves given

in Figures 312 or 313 can be described in ter~ of simultaneous desorption

from two adsorption states This is discussed further in Chapter 4

+353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State H Ion Signal

The ion yield from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface

has been studied as a function of temperature These data were obtained by

continuously monitoring both the tungsten temperature and the 3 eV H+ ion

97

-() a u

t gt

800()

c (J) +shy

~600 c o

+ H

400 r

200

o

Figure 314

r-

i-

r-shy

I I I I I I I I I

H+ from H2 W(lOO Epri =400eV

I I I

o 100

Iprl =3xlO-6 A

ilq= O07eV T=-150degC

I 1 I I

T

I

-

-

-

200 300 400 Time (sec)

Change in the H+ ion current during electron bombardment oof a -150 C tungsten (100) surface Hydrogen was

initially adsorbed to a coverage of 007 monolayer

98

signal following a crystal flash The current for this measurement was

-6 -4 2IxlO A (a current density of 5lx10 Aem) The primary energy was 400

eV As can be determined from the previous section this current density was

such that the electron beam caused Significant perturbations on the hydrogen

state during the measurement None the less several conclusions can be inshy

ferred from the intensity versus temperature data presented in Figure 315

The ion signal from the fast hydrogen state is strongly temperature dependent

+ 0The H intensity is seen to increase sharply below approximately -50 C The

results are reversible with temperature the ion signal decreases if the crysshy

tal is heated and the signal returns to its original intensity when the crysshy

tal cools back down

Several mechanisms could be responsible for the appearance of a

H+ ion signal below room temperature For example a temperature dependent

bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen could produce a desorbable hydrogen

state Likewise adsorption from the background rtight pro(luce desorbable H+

only below room temperature In order to better understand the fast state

some additional measurements were made as described in the following section

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State

Additional experiments were performed to further elucidate the nature

of the low temperature fast state Experiments were made to determine the

source of hydrogen which populates this state The effect of co-adsorption

of hydrogen from the jet with this state was probed In addition the possishy

bility that the appearance of the state was related to surface contamination

was investigated Possible correlations between the fast state hydrogen and

the low temperature LEED phenomena described in Section 123 were probed

99

50----~----~----r---_~--_r----_--_

20

-(J)-c

gt l shye ~10 c l shye gt

00 -c Q)-~ 5 c o

H

+ I

2

-150 -100 -50 0 100 150 Temperature (OC)

Figure 315 Intensity of the 3 eV a+ ion signal from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface as a function of tungsten temperature

-200

100

In these measurements it was desired to study the appearance of

+the fast state H ion signal without the complicating effects of simultaneous

significant depletion of this hydrogen state with the primary electron beam

This possibility exists since the cross section for electron sesorption of

the fast state is high as shown in Chapter 4 It was found that a measure

of the change of coverage in the fast state could be obtained in experiments

in which the electron beam was turned off for short times During the time

the gun was off referred to as adsorption times the fast state populated

The increase in the coverage in this state during the adsorption time could be

monitored by taking a desorption curve right after the adsorption time The

change in coverage is assumed proportional to the difference iH+ - iH+ initial equi1

where iH+ is the ion intensity immediately after turning the gun back on initial

and ~+ has been discussed above The difference iH+ - iH+ will equil initial equi1

be referred to as ~iH+(adsorption time) The rate of increase in coverage of

the fast state is assumed proportional to ~~+(adsorption time)adsorption

time

To turn the gun off the control grid was biased 6 volts negative

with respect to the cathode This method of controlling the gun current

kept the cathode temperature constant during the adsorption time while at

the same time no current could reach the crystal The primary beam could be

turned off (or subsequently back on) in fractions of a second No effects on

the observed measurements could be attributed to this biasing procedure

The change in the population of the fast state has been monitored as

a function of the tungsten crystal temperature Figure 316 shows the results

of a series of measurements each done at a different crystal temperature in

101

() --c s gtshy

0 -0

0 100-~ 0shy+Q)

J 50

0 shy

+S a J

-150 -100 -50 a 50 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1215

Figure 316 The quantity igt - i~ measured initial eqpil

from desorption curves from Ehe fast state as a function of crystal temperature

102

which the above procedure has been used with adsorption times of 150 seconds

From the desorption curves taken following the adsorption times the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) has been calculated This quantity is plotted versusH

the crystal temperature in Figure 316 The quantity 6iH+(adsorption time)

ie the fast state signal is small and less than 5 of the maximum signal

owhen the temperature of the tungsten crystal is higher than OOC Below 0 C

the change in population in the fast state during the adsorption time inshy

creases as the temperature decreases This temperature dependence is in

agreement with the the results of Figure 315 which was taken continuously

with a high primary current as the crystal was cooled after a flash Thus the

procedure used to obtain Figure 316 appears reasonable

The rate of population of the fast state can be an indication of the

source of hydrogen as discussed in Chapter 4 The rate of population of this

state has been investigated as a function of adsorption time using the proceshy

dure given above Figure 317 shows a plot of the quantity 6i +(adsorptionH

time) versus adsorption time From the figure it is concluded that the rate

of popUlation is constant in time at least for coverages of the fast state

obtained in 26 minutes

The effect of co-adsorption of hydrogen from the jet on the fast

state has been probed The purpose of these measurements has been to detershy

mine if hydrogen (H2) from the gas dosing system is the source of the fast

state In a series of measurements the cold crystal surface was dosed with

hydrogen and then an ESD ion signal monitored until it reached equilibrium

Following this the fast state was allowed to populate during an adsorption

time of 150 seconds Finally a desorption curve from the co-adsorbed fast

lO3

Growth of H+ Ion Yield with Electron Gun Off T=-150degC--(f) c

s gt 0-0 0-

J 0shy

+0gt r

0 +shy

+pound r

200

100

SP-122J

Figure 317 The quantity igt bull i~ff measured from initial flequil

desorption curves from the fast state as a function of adsorption time Adsorption time is defined in the text

104

state and dosed hydrogen states was taken In Figure 318 the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) calculated from these desorption curves is plotted versusH

work function change due to adsorption from the jet For low doaes of hydroshy

gen (6cplt 010 eV) there is almost no change in the quantity t~+(adsorption

time) ie the rapid decay of the ion signal characteristic of the fast

state is observed However preadsorption of hydrogen from the jet clearly

affects the ion signal from the fast state for 6cplt010 eV The signal is

decreased forhy5irogen coverages in the 13 state in qualitative agreement1

with the data presented in Figure 311

For ~lt 010 eV the change in coverage in the fast state during

adsorption times of 150 seconds is seen to be independent of the amount of

hydrogen in the dosed or 13 2 state This result was used in a series of

experiments in which the rate of population of the fast state was measured

2at different hydrogen background pressures The flux (molecules per cm per

second) of H2 onto the surface from the background is directly proportional

to the partial pressure of hydrogen If H2 is the source of the fast state

changing the background pressure would be expected to have an effect on the

measured change in coverage in the fast state as long as the total adsorption

is lower than about 010 monolayer (which corresponds to a work function

change of 010 eV) For the data in Figure 318 the background pressure of

-11hydrogen was less than 7xlO Torr (the Bayard-Alpert gauge pressure) In

a series of experiments this hydrogen pressure was raised by letting gas in

from the the gas handling system for times ranging from one to two minutes

While the pressure was raised the electron gun was turned off so that simulshy

taneous adsorption into the fast state and the 13 2 state could take place The

105

() --C J

gt 10shy

0 10shy-0 10shy

S

0shy

+lt11 c

2-+~ c

200

100

0

8

DCP(eV) SP-1222

Figure 318 The quantity iHt 1nitial

desorption curves from

- iHplusmn measured from equil

the low temperature hydrogen dosed surface as a function of work function change ~~ ~~ results from hydrogen coverage

o 1 2 3 4 5 6

106

total hydrogen coverage in the Sz state was kept below 10 percent of a monoshy

layer Desorption curves were then taken and the quantity 8iH+(adsorption

time) calculated An interesting result was obtained It was found that the

coverage in the fast state was unrelated to the background pressure of HZ and

hence unrelated to the total impingement of HZ Even though experiments were

made in which the background pressure was varied over two orders of magnitude

the change in coverage in the fast state during equal adsorption times was

always the same Hence it is concluded that the fast state is not populated

by hydrogen added to the background from the gas handling system

It was found however that the fast state signal intensity could be

correlated to a pressure reading under certain experimental conditions

Normally during flashing the crystal manipulator was rotated so that the

tungsten crystal faced away from the entrance to the spectrometer (a rotation

oof 180 from the crystal position shown in Figure Z14) This normal flashing

posi tion is referred to as the down position The crystal could also be

flashed while it was in the IIUp position or facing the s~ectrometer It was

observed that when the crystal was flashed in the up position an increase in

the ion signal from the fast state could be obtained over that measured when

the crystal was flashed in the down position This unexpected result sugshy

gested that the fast state might be correlated to a thermal instrumental

effect Radiation heating from the crystal raised the temperature of the

surrounding experimental chamber surfaces If the crystal is close to the

surfaces during a flash as for example when flashed in the up position the

heating is greater One consequence of greater heating would be an enhanced

thermal desorption from the surfaces and a higher pressure in the experimental

107

chamber Hence the incident flux of gas thermally desorbed from the chamber

surfaces would be increased Unfortunately the best test of this hypothesis

a measurement of the temperature of the surfaces in the experimental chamber

could not be made However an interesting pressure related result could be

obtained when the x-ray current in the Bayard-Alpert gauge (which is equivalent

to approximately 7xlO-11 Torr pressure) was nulled out so that ambient pressure

-12increases at the gauge of as little as 05xlO Torr could be easily detected

It was observed that during a crystal flash when the crystal was in the up

position the gauge pressure showed a maximum pressure burst of approximately

3x10-l0 Torr This was higher than the pressure burst when the crystal was

flashed in the down position a strong indication that some surfaces in the

experimental chamber became hotter during an up flash When the crystal was

flashed in the down position the pressure fell quickly after the flash was

terminated to the nulled or equilibrium level However after a flash in the

up position the pressure fell to a quasi-equilibrium level which was higher

-12than the true equilibrium pressure by as much as 2xlO Torr The quasi-

equilibrium pressure was dependent on the number of prev~ous flashes in the

up position and on how long after flashing the pressure was read Once the

crystal had been flashed in the up position the pressure remained elevated

for several hours slowly decreasing to the equilibrium level It should be

noted that these pressure increases are read outside the experimental chamber

The actual pressure increase in the experimental chamber and hence the inshy

creased gas flux at the crystal surface can only be estimated to be proshy

portional to the gauge pressure

The magnitude of the pressure increases following a flash in the

108

up position was linearly related to both the change in coverage of the fast

state during the adsorption time and to the desorption curve equilibrium level

This can be seen from the data presented in Figure 319 The lower panel shows

the results of a series of measurements in which desorption curves were taken

after letting the fast state populate for adsorption times of 150 seconds

The ordinate in the lower panel is 6ia+ (adsorption1 time) The abscissa in the

figure is the increase in pressure over the equilibrium pressure as a result of

flashes in the up position The change in ion yield is seen to be directly

proportional to the observed pressure increase The top panel shows the equishy

librium ion signal observed for the desorption curves plotted versus the same

pressure increase as the lower panel A direct proportionality between the

equilibrium ion signal and the pressure increase is seen These two linear

results would be expected if the fast state populated as a result of adsorption

from the background This is discussed further in Chapter 4 On the other

hand no dependence of the fast state ion signal on background pressure would

be expected if the source of the hydrogen were bulk to surface diffusion Thus

while there may be hydrogen on the surface which is not desorbed by incident

electrons it can be concluded from this measurement that the fast state is

populated by adsorption from the ambient

A possible explanation for the fast state is suggested by the work

51of Jelend and Menzel They found that co-adsorption of oxygen or CO with

hydrogen leads to the ~ hydrogen state which has similar characteristics as

the fast state observed here The possibility that impurities are on the surshy

face in the temperature range in which the fast state is observed has been inshy

vestigated using Auger electron spectroscopy andel~tTon stimulated desorption in

lO9

Figure 319 Lower panel - The quantity iH+ - ig+ measured from initial eaui1

desorption curves from the fast state as S tunction of gauge pressure change The fast state populated during adsorption times of 150 seconds The pressure change results from flashing the tungsten crystal while it is in the up position Upper panel - Equilibrium ion current iH+ measured from the

-equildesorpt~on curves taken for the data in the lower panel

110

-(J)-C J gt 0 -0 0

100-s

+1)cr

J

C-+ J

0

--(J)

c J 200 gt 0 -0 0-

s +1)

cr J

- 100 I 2

012

Gauge Pressure Change (X10-12 Torr)

111

the time of flight mode In order to test for these elements the flashed

tungsten surface was cooled with the gun turned off allowing the fast state

to populate Total adsorption times of up to 15 minutes were used times in

which a strong fast state signal could be obtained However no carbon or

oxygen Auger peaks were observed and no desorbed oxygen or carbon ions that

could be attributed to the fast state were monitored with ESD Hence any

oxygen or CO present on the surface would have had a coverage below the deshy

tection sensitivity of the techniques used or less than approximately 1 pershy

cent of a monolayer It can be noted here that coverage calculations given in

Chapter 4 indicate the fast state hydrogen coverage is well below 1

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data

The low energy electron diffraction (LEE D) system used here has

been described previously in Section 26 LEED data has been optained using

hydrogen coverage crystal temperature and primary electron energy as

variable parameters as described below

The symmetry of the LEED spot pattern has been noted as a function

of hydrogen coverage at room temperature Results from these observations are

in good agreement with previously reported research (see Section 123) Half

order diffraction spots become visible with initial hydrogen coverage The

intensity of the half order spots maximize at a coverage corresponding to

~~ = 015 eV at a primary energy of 115 eVe Additional adsorption causes

the half order spots to split into four poorly defined spots This pattern

upon further adsorption becomes blurred At full coverage a (lxl) pattern

is observed Figure 320 shows a photograph of the LEED pattern observed

from a clean room temperature tungsten surface and also the c(2x2) LEED patshy

112

W(100)

Clean

T=60degC Epri = 1387eV

(1 xl) Clean (100) Surface

W (100)

Do 4gt =015eV

T =-150degC

Epri =115eV

C (2x2) Hydrogen Overoyer

SP-1200

Figure 320 Photo~raDh of LEED screen showing a clean (lxl) pattern and a c(2x2) pattern Models of possible surface atom configurations for the LEED patterns are also shown

113

tern that occurs with a hydrogen over1ayer in the ~2 state

When the crystal is cooled to below room temperatures half order

spots are visible without any dosing of the crystal from the gas system

Graphs of LEED spot intensity versus primary electron energy called

elastic intensity profiles are shown in Figures 321 322 and 323 for the

(10) (11) and (1212) diffraction beams A normally incident primary

electron beam was used in these measurements Data were taken at two tempera-

o 0tures 60 C and -150 C for both the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorbed on

the surface to a coverage corresponding to a ~~ of 015 eV This coverage corshy

responds to the maximum in intensity for the 115 eV half order beams All obshy

servable equivalent beams show the same line shape and peak positions There

are some intensity differences between equivalent beams probably due to an

uneven phosphor coating of the LEED screen particularly near its edge bull

Small misalignments might also affect the intensities The effect of hydrogen

adsorption on the intensity profiles is seen to be small except above 100 eV

in the (11) beam profile and below 50 eV in the (1212) beam profile Some

small shifts (~ 2 eV) in the energy positions of the peaks are observed as a

function of coverage but not as a function of temperature

The intensities of the (1212) (10) and (11) spots have been

measured as a function of crystal temperature for the clean (flashed) surface

These results are presented in Figures 324 and 325 using a semilogarithmic

scale The data were obtained by continuously monitoring both the tungsten

temperature and the intensity of the beams following a crystal flash Primary

energies of 115 eV for the (1212) beam 1105 eV and 67 eV for the (10)

beam and 113 eV for the (11) beam and currents of 10xlO-6 A were used The

114

- (j) +shyC l

gt 1loshy0 0 loshy+shy0

loshy0

- 0gt

+shy(j)

c Q) +shyC

H

o

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j = 0deg g=(10)

T =60degC Clean

T =-150degC fjcent = 015 eV

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l109

Figure 321 Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degc and -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsoroed in the S2 state

llS

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

U)-C J

1

-~ l0shy

a loshy

0 0l0shya-~-U) 0c OJ

C -H

o

o

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-lloa

8i =0deg g = (1 1)

T = 60degC Clean

T =60degC IJcp = 015 eV

T = -150degC IJcp = 015 eV

Figure 322 Elastic intensity profiles for the (11) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsorbed in the 62 state

116

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j =00

g = (12 12 )

o 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l107

Figure 323 Elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A vJork function change Acp of 015 eV corresponds to hydrocn adsorbed in the 13

2 state

117

100~--~--~----~--~-------~--------

--VI

c s gtshyt shyc -t shycl

010 -

gtshy-VI c Q)

c -I-f

tr c Q)

a

WOOO) 81 =0deg

9 = (ItO) 0-

-0- Epri = 1105 eV --0-- -0shy -0

9 = (ItI)

0 Epri= 113 eV =0shy o 0 0

9 = (ItO) Epri= 67 eV

0

Figure 324 Temperature dependence of (10) and (11) LEED beams from a flashed tungsten (100) surface Primary energies used are indicated on the graph

118

W (100) 9 =(12 t 12)

8j=0deg50

CJ)-

~ 5 o Q)

Q

2

-100 o 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1l55 Figure 325 Temperature dependence of the (1212) LEED

beam from flashed tungsten (100) surface A primary electron energy of 115 eV was used

200

119

intensities of the (10) and (11) beams are seen to increase exponentially

(linearly on the semilogarithmic scale) as the temperature is lowered The

intensity of the (1212) order beam also increases as the temperature is

lowered Down to approximately -750 C the rate of increase with temperature is

ogreater than that for the integral order beams Below -75 C the intensity

changes at about the same rate as the integral order beams The results are

reversible with temperature

In Sections 353 and 354 a hydrogen ion signal has been reported

from the flashed surface LEED measurements have been made to ascertain if

this ion yield from the fast state could be correlated to the intensity of the

LEED spots After flashing the crystal the photometer signal from the

(1212) beam was measured as the crystal cooled to -lS0 0 C Then the incishy

dent electron current was turned off for 300 seconds in order to allow the

fast state to populate When the electron current was turned back on the

photometer signal immediately returned to the same intensity as obtained prior

to turning off the incident current There was no decay in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the desorption curve phenomena seen with

the ion signal The intensity of the photometer signal from the (10) and

(11) beams as well as from the background was monitored ilsing this same

procedure In no case was there any structure observed in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the rapid decay in the fast state ion

yield

37 Electron Scattering Data

The electron signal backscattered from the crystal has been observed

as a function of hydrogen coverage and crystal temperature using synchronous

120

detection of the second harmonic of the energy distribution N(E) as disshy

cussed in Appendix B and in Section 324

Figure 326 shows the characteristic loss structure for electrons

scattered from a clean room temperature tungsten (100) surface and also from

this surface after dosing with hydrogen The abscissa in this figure represhy

sents electron loss energy w where 0 eV s w s 40 eV A primary~nergy of

-6110 eV and a primary current of lxlO A were used to take these data Since

25for tungsten true secondary structure extends out to 60 eV there is no

overlap of secondary and characteristic loss structure down to losses of 50

eV when operating at 110 eV primary energy The data of Figure 326 were taken

in the second derivative mode in order to suppress the background The data

were taken at a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV with a 1 volt peak to peak

oscillation on the retarding potential

Coverage dependent changes in the spectra are seen The peak at

w = 25 eV in the clean spectrum decays as the hydrogen coverage in increased

At the same time the narrow peak at 4 eV becomes broader and a peak grows at

a loss energy of 75 eV The structure at 210 eV in the clean spectrum moves

down in loss energy as hydrogen adsorbs Below w ~ 30 eV very little change

in the spectra as a function of hydrogen coverage is observed

Figure 327 shows characteristic loss structure for electrons

oscattered from a tungsten surface cooled to -150 C The data were taken using

the same electron gun and spectrometer operating conditions as used for the

data of Figure 326 The low temperature clean spectrum is nearly identical

to that obtained at the higher temperature The only change is a slight enshy

hancement of the shoulder at about 45 eV Changes in the clean spectrum with

121

Figure 326 oCharacteristic electron energy loss spectra from a 60 C

tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverages A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modulation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

---

N w -0 shyw-Z

N -0

I

122

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl=110 eV Iprl c5xlO-6 A

T= 60degC Modulation =1 V Peak to Peak

6ltl 080eV

060eV

O 35eV

023eV

014eV

003eV

Clean

o

SP-1219

123

Figure 327 Characteristic electron energy loss spectra from a -lSOoC tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverage A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modushylation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

124

N lJJ 0

~ lJJ Z N 0 I

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl =110 eV Iprl =5x10-6 A T=-150degC Modulation 1 V Peak to Peak

bcent OS6eV

O5geV

O35eV

O25eV

O16eV

O05eV

Cleon

SP-1220

-~--------~- -- -----------

125

hydrogen adsorption are identical to those seen for adsorption at the higher

temperature

Loss spectra were also taken for 0 eV ~ w ~ 10 eV from the flashed

but undosed cold surface after turning off the electron gun for 10 minutes

These measurements were made to see if the fast state hydrogen would affect

the loss measurements No changes in the electron loss spectrum from those

taken immediately after cooling the flashed crystal were found

A discussion of the data presented in this chapter follows in

Chapter 4

126

CHAPTER 4

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

Hydrogen chemisorption on single crystal tungsten (100) has been

probed in this research using complementary surface sensitive techniques

Auger measurements have been given in Section 28 Work function ESD LEED

and electron scattering results have been given in Chapter 3 A discussion

of this data is presented here

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental condition using Auger electron spectroscopy The procedures

used have been previously described with the spectrometer electronics Section

25 The Auger data have been given and discussed in Section 28 A brief

summary of these results follows

Tungsten carbon and oxygen Auger transitions have been observed

using this technique It can be seen from Figure 216 that after flashing the

cryLl to 2200oK no structures attributable to carbon or oxygen Auger elecshy

trons remain in the Auger spectrum The Auger measurement is estimated to

be sensitive to approximately 1 percent coverage Operation of the electron

gun in the high current high voltage Auger mode results in a slow deposition

of carbon from the background Since the Auger mode is used to chemically

characterize the surface the net effect of this beam related contamination

is an overestimation of the carbon impurity concentration at the surface

Some weak structure in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface

occurs between 475 eV and 525 eV No definite conclusions regarding the

127

origin of these peaks can be made The possibility that the structure results

from transitions in tungsten andor other elements is discussed in Chapter 2

83It is worth noting that Watts Jones and Hopkins recently published an

Auger spectrum from a flashed W(lOO) surface in which weak structure can be

seen at approximately the same energies as the unidentified structure observed

here This similarity lends support to the hypothesis that the peaks are

tungsten Auger transitions However it does not rule out other possibilities

The similarity of the data indicates at least that if the structure in

question results from some contaminate the problem is not unique to the

apparatus here It should be emphasized that work function ESD and LEED

data taken here are in good agreement with the literature any possible

contamination has not had a noticeable effect on the measurements

42 Work Function Results

Retarding potential work function measurements have been taken as

a measure of hydrogen coverage Plots of work function changes versus

exposure to hydrogen are presented in Figures 34 and 35 Adsorption of

hydrogen at 600 C yields a maximum work function change of 098 plusmn 004 eV

This is within 10 percent of 090 eV the most consistent monolayer coverage

work function chan~e reported in the literature for the H2 on W(lOO)

8 18 46 47 84system As argued by Armstrong agreement with the values from

the literature is an indication of good (100) orientation This is because

the work function of a faceted surface is a weighted average over the work

44functions of the facets Since hydrogen adsorption increases the work

function of the (100) face far more than the expected facet orientations a

128

faceted (100) surface would have a lower full coverage work function change

than a true (100) surface

Hydrogen adsorption onto W(lOO) at low temperatures increases the

work function by 092 plusmn 004 eV at full coverage This is slightly lower

than the room temperature maximum increase although within experimental

error the two measurements are the same

The increase in work function with hydrogen coverage can be intershy

preted using a simple model in which each adsorbed hydrogen atom acts as a

negative dipole at the surface The work function change on adsorption

43 6~ can be shown to equal the total added dipole moment at the surface

divided by the permittivity Using this and assuming a hydrogen coverage of

15 22xlO atomsem for a 6~ of 098 eV the average dipole moment permax

adsorbed hydrogen atom is calculated to be -013 Debye This result can be

compared to a theoretical account of the dipole moment of a hydrogen ion

63adsorbed onto metal surfaces given by Smith Ying and Kohn Their

calculation indicates that in order to observe a negative dipole moment the

hydrogen ion must be closer than 061 Kto the top plane of substrate ion

cores This would be an upper estimate of the proximity of the hydrogen atoms

to the tungsten substrate The minimum theoretical dipole moment per

63 -2 adsorbed hydrogen ion obtained by Smith et al is -lxlO au (1 au

equals 24 Debye) This value is lower than the observed value of -013

Debye by a factor of 5

o 0Cooling a clean tungsten (100) crystal from 200 C to -150 C

results in a work function increase of approximately 005 eV as shown in

Figure 36 This is an average change with temperature d~dT of 14xlO -4

129

oeV K The temperature dependence of work function for tungsten in this

temperature range has not previously been reported However temperature

dependent changes in work function of this magnitude have been reported for

85 86 85 86Cu Ag Na and K and have been described theoret~ca11y in terms of

both a thermal expansion of the crystal lattice and a temperature dependence

of the crystal electronic structure The work function change observed

here is quantitatively in agreement with experimental data for other elements

and with a theoretical model that describes the temperature dependence solely

in terms of intrinsic properties of a clean metal surface While perturbashy

tions on the crystal surface such as gas adsorption from the background or

bulk to surface diffusion can reasonably be expected to affect the work

function it is not necessary to invoke these causes to explain the changes

seen on cooling the crystal

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results

Under electron bombardment H+ ions can be desorbed from the

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface and from the low temperature undosed

surface The theory that describes this ESD process was first proposed by

37 38Redhead and by Menzel and Gomer A discussion of their model including a

derivation of the energy distribution of ions from the surface is given in

Appendix C In addition a discussion of the ESD phenomena in terms of

surface kinetics is also given in this appendix

ESD has been used to study the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system at

ocrystal temperatures from slightly above room temperature to -150 C Energy

distributions of It ions desorption curves and ion yield versus temperaturemiddot

and coverage data have been obtained

130

431 Room Temperature Results

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from room temperature

W(lOO) is given by the solid curve in Figure 37 The distribution has a

Gaussian line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 plusmn 05 eV

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV The line shape of the energy

distribution remains virtually unchanged as a function of hydrogen coverage

at least to near saturation coverage as shown by the curves in Figure 38

Near full coverage the distribution appears to broaden somewhat This latter

change requires further study which has not been done here

From Equation Cl of Appendix C the energy distribution of the

desorbed ions is given by the expression

(41)

where x is the coordinate normal to the surface Ions that start at x X ]

desorb with energy V N is the surface density of hydrogen atoms adsorbed in

the ground state ~ is the cross section for electron induced excitation ex

of hydrogen from the ground state to the ionic state I~G(xi)12 is the

probability density of hydrogen at Xi P(x ) is the probability that an ioni

starts from the position x and escapes from the surface as an ion and J

dV(X)dxlxi is the slope of the ion-metal interaction evaluated at Xi The

line shape of the energy distribution depends on the metal-neutral intershy

action VG(x) via ~G and depends on the ion-metal interaction V(x) via P(x)

and the slope dV(x)dx

--------------------------~-~~----------------

131

One manifestation of multistate adsorption in which VG(x) and V(x)

are dependent on the binding state is a change in the experimentally

observed energy distribution Multistate adsorption has been observed with

ESD for some systems for example as a function of oxygen coverage on

W(lOO)25 A similar result might be expected for hydrogen adsorption on

W(lOO) since two states ~l and ~2 are seen in thermal desorption spectra

However from the ion energy distribution line shapes for hydrogen on W(lOO)

no evidence of multistate adsorption as a function of coverage is seen The

line shapes of the energy distribution curves are the same at hydrogen

coverages corresponding to both thermal desorption states Hence coverage

dependent interactions which have been proposed to account for the thermal

desorption results and other phenomena reported for this system are not

observed using this technique

Another conclusion to be drawn from the energy distributions is

that the ions originate at an energy position which remains constant with

respect to the Fermi level of the tungsten independent of hydrogen coverage

A shift of nearly a volt in the work function is observed as hydrogen

adsorbs However the ion energy distribution which would be sensitive to

changes of this magnitude if it shifted with the work function remains

fixed in energy

The decay of the room temperature 3 eV a+ ion yield is shown in

Figure 312 A theoretical account of the desorption curve measurement has

been given in Appendix C From that discussion it is seen that a semi logshy

arithmic plot of i ~ - i ~ versus time yields a straight line The totalH Hequil desorption cross section of the adsorption state being probed can be

132

1determined from the slope of the straight line - T where T is given by

T e = (42)

je is the current density used to obtain the desorption curve and e is the

unit of electric charg~

The discussion of the desorption process leading to Equation 42

is based on the assumptions that the total desorption cross section and the

hydrogen sticking probability are independent of hydrogen coverage N The

validity of these assumptions for the hydrogen on tungsten (100) systems

should be examined An indication that the ionic cross section is indepenshy

dent of N for low coverages can be gotten from data presented in Figure 311

The H+ ion yield versus work function change is nearly linear for A~ lt 01 eV

8If coverage is linearly related to work function change as shown by Madey

then the ion yield is directly proportional to N in this low coverage region

A direct proportionality between ion yield and coverage satisfies

Equation C5 only if the ionic desorption cross section Qtis not a

function of coverage In a series of experiments it has been observed that

the equilibrium ion yield which is proportional to the ratio Q+Qt as

given by Equation C8 is independent of N for low coverages Since Q+ and

an expression proportional to Q+Qt are both independent of N it is assumed

tthat Q is a180 independent of N

The dependence of the sticking probability on coverage has been

reported in the literature for the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system Tamm and

87Schmidt found s(N) to be independent of N for coverages of less than 15

133

41 percent Madey found s(N) to be proportional to (l-NN ) Hence the

max

assumption that the sticking probability is independent of N appears valid

to within ~ 10 percent for low coverages For coverages less than 10 the

analysis in Appendix C of the desorption curve measurements can be applied to

the data

A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ for the desorption curve ~quil

shown in Figure 312 is given in Figure 41 The equilibrium level has been

chosen approximately 5 lower than the ion intensity obtained after monishy

toring the decay curve 30 minutes (the final recorded data) since it appeared

from the data the signal was still slowly decreasing In addition with

this correction the data give a better fit to the predicted straight line

t -20 2From the slope of the line -lIT and Equation 41 a Q (400 eV) of 5xlO cm

is calculated Without making the 5 correction in iH+ the best visual equil

straight line fit to the data gives a Qt(400 eV) approximately three times

larger Because the initial hydrogen coverage for this data was 010 monoshy

layerp this cross section represents the total desorption cross section

from the ~2 hydrogen adsorption state ie represents ~ (400 eV) For 2

coverages corresponding to the ~l state the assumptions leading up to

tEquation 42 are not valid and no attempt has been made to calculate 93 bull t 1

The value obtained for 93 (400 eV) is somewhat larger than the cross section 2

38results reported by Menzel and Gomer for hydrogen desorption from a field

emitter tip and is a factor of 10 lower than reported by Jelend and

Menzel10 for desorption from a tungsten ribbon The latter researchers

corrected for readsorption effects which would partly explain their higher

value The value of ~2(400 eV) found here is over three orders of

134

500----~----~--~------------~----

400

- 300 ()

a 0- CT Q)

+ I I 200

+ I

100~__~_____~____~____~__~____~__~ o 200 400 600 800 1000

Time (sec)

SP-1198

Figure 41 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iHt asequil

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 312

----------- -------shy

51

135

magnitude smaller than the total cross section found by Jelend and Menzel

for hydrogen coadsorption with either carbon monoxide or oxygen This is a

verification that these contaminants are not present to any great extent

432 Low Temperature Fast State Results

oIf the tungsten crystal was flashed to 2200 K and subsequently

allowed to cool below room temperature H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface The state from which this hydrogen is desorbed has been labeled

the fast state Experiments have been made to characterize the energetics

and kinetics of this undosed state and also to address the important question

of the origin of the hydrogen which is desorbed These data are discussed

below

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from the fast state

shown in Figure 310 is considerably broader than the distribution obtained

after room temperature hydrogen dosing into the ~ states The peak intensity

is somewhat lower in energy 05 eV than the peak obtained from the ~

states The distribution has a tail extending up several electron volts on

the high energy side It should be noted that the same energy distribution

line shape could be obtained from the state at any position on its desorpshy

tion curve that is the broad distribution is not an anomalous result

reflecting a depletion of the hydrogen fast state during the measurement

A low primary current of lxlO- 7 A was used to take the distribution in

Figure 310 so that electron desorption effects were minimal From a

comparison of energy distributions as given in Figure 310 it is possible

to conclude that the fast state is a separate state from the ~ states

136

This conclusion is supported by cross section calculations below

The intensity of the ion yield from the fast state is temperature

dependent As shown in Figures 315 and 316 the ion yield increases as

the temperature is lowered This phenomena is reversible Using the

assumption that the ion yield is proportional to coverage it is concluded

that the fast state coverage is a function of temperature

The desorption curve obtained from the undosed tungsten (100)

surface has been measured and is given in Figure 313 The decay time is

seen to be extremely rapid compared to the analogous measurement taken after

hydrogen dosing at room temperature A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ ~quil

measured from the data in Figure 313 is given in Figure 42 The total

tdesorption cross section for the fast state Qf(400 eV) calculated from the

slope of the straight line in Figure 42 is -17lxlO 2 cm This is nearly

three orders of magnitude higher than ~2(400 eV)

Since Q~(400 eV) is on the same order of magnitude as the cross

section obtained for hydrogen desorption from carbon monoxide or oxygen

51contaminated surfaces the possibility that the fast state results from

surface contamination has been examined No direct evidence was obtained to

support such a hypothesis No carbon or oxygen peaks were observed in Auger

electron spectra from the cold surface It is estimated that these spectra

were sensitive to 1 percent of a monolayer coverage No carbon or oxygen

ions that could be attributed to the fast state phenomena were observed in

time of flight measurements It might be noted that Jelend and Menzel

observed the high cross section state labeled ~ at room temperature after

simultaneously adsorbing hydrogen plus CO or oxygen Almost no fast state

137

100

-fJ)

Q U

50 J CT

+0gt I I

+ I

10~~~--~~~~~~--~~~--~~~~

o 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Time (sec)

sp- J~4l

Figure 42 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iH+ as equi1

a function of time The data are illeasured from the desorption curve given in Figure 313

138

o lOhydrogen was detected here above 0 c Jelend and Menzel did not observe

any H+ ion yield from a cleaned surface if cooled to _13 0 C Since the gt

signal is weak at that temperature it is possible their apparatus did not

detect it It is also possible that they did not populate their surface

with hydrogen by cooling In any case its not possible to make any

simple correlations between the fast state and the contamination related x

state However as discussed below the equivalence of the two states

cannot be ruled out

It is of interest to determine the origin of the hydrogen which

populates the fast state There are several possibilities This state

could populate as a result of adsorption from the background Alternatively

88 89 hydrogen since it is endothermically soluble in tungsten m~ght

diffuse from interstitial sites to surface sites as the temperature of the

crystal is lowered A discussion of these phenomena has been given in

19Appendix C The latter suggestion has been offered as a possible

explanation of the c(2x2) LEED pattern observed on cooling In addition a

combination of these two processes could be occurring

Experiments have been performed in which the coverage in the fast

state has been monitored as a function of both adsorption time and system

background pressure If the source is external the dependence of N on

adsorption time and ambient pressure can be determined by solving Equation

C4 For the case of no incident electron beam (je = 0) and if the sticking

probability is assumed constant with coverage (probably a good assumption

since the change in coverage due to adsorption from the background would be

extremely small at the experimental ambient pressures) then the change in

139

coverage in the fast state would be expected to be linearly related to the

time during which adsorption occurs ie linearly proportional to the

variable adsorption time Furthermore for a fixed adsorption time the

coverage would be expected to be linearly proportional to the partial pressure

of the populating species

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

40 pressure is considerably more invo1ved Several points can be made

however from the discussion in Appendix C The time dependence of N due

to diffusion could be similar to that expected from background adsorption

ie linear with adsorption time However background pressure doesnt

enter into the diffusion process If the fast state phenomena is only

diffusion related the coverage N would be expected to be independent of

background pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence

for adsorption from the background

The rate of populating the fast state has been measured by turning

off the electron gun for various time intervals (setting j = 0) referred to e

as adsorption times and observing the build up of the ion signal while the

gun is off The increase in the fast state is then assumed proportional to

the increase in the ion yield i ~ - i ~ when the electron gun is Hinitia1 Hequi1

turned back on The dependence of the population rate on adsorption time is

shown in Figure 317 N is found to be linearly related to adsorption time

As discussed above this time behavior can reasonably be expected to be

observed for either an external or an internal source

The rate of population of the fast state has also been observed as

140

a function of hydrogen pressure admitted to the background from the gas

handling system As discussed in Section 354 the rate of population did

not depend on the impingement rate from the hydrogen background Hence it

is concluded that hydrogen from the gas handling system does not populate

the fast state This does not rule out external adsorption however Other

sources of hydrogen in the ambient such as rrt H H2 in an excited state or

hydrogen from a simple compound such as H 0 could be the source2

Although the population of the fast state was not affected by the

background pressure of hydrogen (H ) from the gas handling system there is2

evidence that this state does result from adsorption from an external source

This conclusion is based on experiments in which the Bayard Alpert gauge

sensitivity was increased by nulling out the x-ray limiting current Changes

-12in the background pressure on the order of 2xlO Torr were observed experishy

mentally if the crystal was flashed while it was facing the spectrometer

One explanation of this observation is that a flash in the up position warms

experimental chamber surfaces most likely the grids and electron gun drift

tube The resulting pressure increase occurs because of an increased rate of

thermal desorption from these surfaces The linear dependence of the

equilibrium current i ~ with pressure change as found experimentallyHequil

and shown in the top panel of Figure 319 is expected if external adsorption

populates the fast state This can be seen from Equation C9 Likewise the

rate of change of coverage in the fast state is seen to be proportional to

the pressure change in the lower panel of Figure 319 This is also expected

for external adsorption If bulk to surface diffusion were the source of the

hydrogen no dependence on pressure would be expected Hence Figure 319

141

indicates that hydrogen becomes desorbable because of adsorption from the

background It is not possible to say what species is adsorbing

An interesting calculation that can be made from the current nulling

experiments is an estimate of the coverage in the adsorption state responsible

for the fast state hydrogen ions Since the relation

(43)

can be obtained easily from Equation C9 and since ~i + is on the same Hequil

order as iH+ the background partial pressure that populates the undosed equil

-12state is on the same order of magnitude as ~P or about lxlO Torr The

coverage N at equilibrium can now be obtained by setting Equation C4 equal

-12to O At a pressure of 10 Torr the impingement rate of hydrogen molecules

9 2 90 for example is 15xlO moleculescm -sec and the impingement rate of other

species would be of this same magnitude Assuming a sticking probability of

-17 21 a total desorption cross section of 10 cm as calculated and a current

-4 2density of 5lxlO Acm the surface coverage in the fast state would be

~ 10-11

atomscm2 or 10-4 monolayer This calculation depends on the

assumption that the pressure change at the crystal face in the experimental

chamber is the same as measured at the gauge Experiments performed in which

the crystal was rotated to the down position after flashing in the up position

indicated that the flux of the populating species at the surface was about

twice as great when the crystal faced the spectrometer than when it faced

down Since the pressure at the bottom of the experimental chamber should

142

be about the same as the gauge pressure the calculated coverage could be

low by 50 percent It should be noted however that this is still 50 times

too low to amount to 1 percent of a monolayer

From the above discussion it can be concluded that the fast

state is related to both the temperature of the crystal and to the

background pressure of some unidentified species It is not possible to

determine if this state is a separate state from the K hydrogen state

previously reported even though it appears under different circumstances

In fact since the coverage in the state is so low Auger spectroscopy

would not be sensitive to any contamination of this same magnitude The

possibility of undetected contamination accompanying the fast state cannot

be ruled out It is possible that the adsorbing species does not contain

hydrogen as such but rather is a species which promotes a small amount

of surface hydrogen (from the background or diffusion) to the fast state

It can also be concluded that since coverages less than 1 percent of a

monolayer would not be expected to strongly alter the LEED spot symmetry

the half order spots seen on cooling do not arise from the fast state

433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results

ESD measurements have been made on the low temperature tungsten

crystal after dosing with hydrogen from the jet Energy distributions at

different coverages of hydrogen are given in Figure 39 The distributions

143

are seen to have a peak at 3 ~ 05 eV in agreement with the peak positions

in the data obtained from the ~ states at 60oC However the energy distri shy

butions are somewhat broader than the higher temperature data The fast

state yields a broad energy distribution and it is possible that the results

of Figure 39 represent simultaneous desorption from both the fast state and

the ~ states This hypothesis can be tested by analyzing a desorption curve

from the low temperature dosed surface If two states with different cross

sections are being desorbed then a semilogarithmic plot of the desorption

curve should be the sum of two straight lines The quantity i ~ - i ~ H HSquil

measured from the data of Figure 315 is plotted in Figure 43 The curve

can be separated into two straight line segments from which total desorption

17 19 2 cross sections of 16xlO- cm2 and 12xlO- cm are calculated These

cross sections correspond within plusmn 60 percent to the calculated values of

t tQf(400 eV) and QS2(400 eV) Hence it is concluded that at low temperatures

the fast state and S-like states co-adsorb

It should be noted however that the interaction of hydrogen from

the jet with the tungsten surface at low temperatures is not exactly the

o same as at 60 C This can be seen from the plot of 3 eV ion yield versus

work function change given in Figure 311 At both 600 C and at -lSOoC the

results are qualitatively similar the ion yield increases steeply with

initial hydrogen adsorption reaches a maximum and then decreases to less

than lS percent of the maximum value with additional hydrogen adsorption

Hence it is assumed that a similar phenomena is occurring at both temperashy

tures However the work function change at maximum intensity for the low

temperature measurement was found to be repeatedly lower by 007 eV than the

144

SP-H24

Figure 43 Semilogarithmic plot of the quantity ia+ - ia+ as equ~l

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 314

145

peak ~ntens~ty for measurements taken at 600 C If the expression relating

coverage to work function change Equation 35 is valid at both 600

C and

at -1500 C then the 007 eV shift would represent a dosed coverage difference

of 7 of a monolayer The ion yield at the low temperature would maximize at

a dosed coverage of 11 which is 40 lower than the coverage for the maximum

ion yield at the higher temperature If the decrease in ion yield for higher

hydrogen coverages arises from interactions between adsorbed atoms these calshy

culations suggest that the interactions observe a different coverage dependence

at the two temperatures Alternate explanations are possible for the measured

difference Equation 35 may not be valid at both temperatures It is possible

that the work function change per adsorbed atom is smaller at the lower tempshy

erature and the dosed coverages are the same at the ion yield maximas It is

also possible that hydrogen not visible in ESD or electron loss spectroscopy

measurements~ but capable of interacting with dosed hydrogen~ diffuses to the

surface at the low temperature This latter alternative~ while a possible exshy

planation for the LEED phenomena would raise many questions as to why such

hydrogen is not detectable with other techniques

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements

Low energy electron diffraction measurements made on the clean and

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface have been presented in Section 36 The

symmetry of the LEED patterns has been noted as a function of hydrogen coverage

and crystal temperature Elastic intensity profiles for three LEED beams are

given in Figures 321 through 323 LEED beam intensities as a function of

temperature have been monitored These are given in Figures 324 and 325

General agreement between symmetry patterns seen here and those

published in the literature18 19 is good The (lxl) LEED pattern

146

characteristic of clean tungsten at room temperature changes into a c(2x2)

pattern with initial hydrogen adsorption With further adsorption the LEED

pattern splits into four spots becomes blurred and finally at full coverage

returns to a (lx1) pattern When the crystal is cooled to temperatures below

room temperatures half order spots become visible without any dosing of the

crystal from the gas system

The intensity of the room temperature half order spots maximizes at

a coverage corresponding to ~~ = 015 eV or 015 monolayer using Equation

35 This is close to the 016 monolayer coverage at which Yonehara and

19 18Schmidt found these beams to maximize Estrup and Anderson on the

other hand observed sharp and intense half order LEED spots at a coverage

of 029 monolayer The coverages reported here were calculated from work

function changes using the linear relation between work function change and

coverage obtained by Madey by a flash desorption technique In both other

18experiments 19 coverage was measured directly using flash desorption The

c(2x2) pattern is associated with the ~2 adsorption state The structures

proposed to account for this state as given in Section 128 predict that

the maximum of the half order spots should occur at 025 monolayer coverage

15(one monolayer being 2x10 atomscm2) Estrup and Andersons measurement is

closest to this coverage While it is not known why there is such a large

discrepancy between the results it should be noted that determination of

coverage using flash desorption techniques is difficult with large uncershy

tainties in pressure gauge calibration and system volume The results given

here in terms of ~~ should be considerably more accurate

_ _____---__---shy

147

Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) (11) and (1212) LEED

beams are given in Figures 321 through 323 respectively The profiles

o 0 were taken at 60 C and -150 C from both a clean tungsten surface and a

surface dosed with hydrogen to 015 monolayer (This coverage corresponded

to the observed maximum in the half order pattern) As seen in these three

figures corresponding clean room temperature and low temperature profiles are

nearly identical Adsorption of hydrogen to a coverage of 015 does cause

some changes in the clean profiles with the same changes being observed at

both temperatures Hydrogen adsorption considerably enhances the 42 eV peak

observed in the (1212) profile and shifts it in energy approximately + 1 eVe

Adsorption also leads to a change from a single peak to a double peaked

structure of decreased intensity in the (11) profile above 100 eVe Adsorption

causes very little change in the (10) profile line shape above 60 eV

although the 65 eV 835 eV and 110 eV peaks are lowered in energy approxishy

mately 15 eV 05 eV and 15 eV respectively Between 30 eV and 60 eV

there are some adsorption effects on the profiles

These elastic intensity profiles can be compared to corresponding

data previously reported in the literature In Figure 44 a comparison is

made between clean surface (10) and (11) profiles taken here and reported

9lby Wei The agreement is good except in the energy range below 50 eVe

This poor agreement below 50 eV is also true for the (00) beam which is not

compared here The low energy discrepancies may be caused by the ambient

magnetic field present in Weis target region In fact it is surprising

that the data agrees as well as it does considering the different experimenshy

tal conditions under which the two sets of data were obtained Figure 45

148

Figure 44 Comparison of (11) and (10) elastic intensity profiles from the clean tungsten (100) surface Data includes profiles taken here at 60degC and -150degC and results reported by Wei94 bull

149

() --c 1

gt 0-Q 0-gt-()

c OJ-c

H

o 50 100 150 200

xl

xl

X2

Elastic Intensity Profiles W (100) Clean 8i = 0deg

g = (11)

g = (10)

Withrow (-150degC)

Withrow (60degC)

Wei (250-300degC)

Pr imary Energy (eV) SP-1l92

150

Figure 45 Comparison of (1212) elastic intensity profiles from tungsten (100) surface after hydrogen adsorption into the ~2 state Data includes profiles obtained here and results reported by Estrup and Anderson18 and Papageorgopoulos and Chen2l

0

151

- ()-

--()

c Q)-c H

Elastic Intensity Profiles H2 on W(lOO) 8j =0deg 9 = (1212)

Withrow

Estrup and Anderson

Papageorgopoulos and Chen

o 50 100 150 Primary Energy (eV) SP-1l93

200

152

shows a comparison of elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam taken

after hydrogen adsorption From the general appearance of the data Estrup

18and Andersons profi1e appears shifted up in energy about 5 eV with respect

to the profile taken here This suggests the possibility of a discrepancy

in the energy measurement The line shapes are similar howeve~ although

Estrup and Anderson found one well-defined peak around 75 eV whereas in this

work a peak at 67 eV and an additional shoulder between 85 eV and 90 eV is

21seen Papageorgopou1os and Chen did not observe the large peak below 50 eV

nor the double peaked structure above 100 eV reported by both other researchers

These discrepancies cou1deasi1y be due to a residual magnetic field in the

work of Papageorgopou1os and Chen It can be concluded from these comparishy

sons that control over experimental conditions is crucial for the reproduction

of data

Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores

16 17 can be extracted from a sufficient set of elastic intensity proh1es

Although the data base is small here a preliminary analysis of the clean

tungsten data has been conducted by Duke using a microscopic quantum-field

16theory formalism of low energy electron diffraction In this formalism a

model for the electron-solid interaction is used in an attempt to match

theoretical line shape predictions to experimentally observed elastic LEED

intensity profiles An important feature of this microscopic approach is the

strong interactions between the incident electron and valence electrons in

the solid The inelastic mean free path A is about 3-8 X for most ee

materials for electron energies of 30 ~ E S 200 As a consequence electrons

which are observed elastically have been backscattered within the first

--------------

153

several surface layers of the solid and hence LEED elastic profiles are

surface sensitive Elastic backscattering of the electrons is described by

short range electron-ion core interactions Information on the configurashy

tion of the surface ion cores is extracted from the elastic energy profiles

by varying parameters in the theory and obtaining the best fit to the data

Theoretical analysis of elastic energy profiles from tungsten at energies

above 100 eV is computationally difficult because of the large number of

phase shifts needed to describe the electron-ion core scattering Hence the

exp arimental profiles were taken only for energies E 1gt 125 eV pr~

Comparisons of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity

profiles for the (00) (10) and (11) beams are given in Figure 46 The

theoretical fit to the experimental data was made by taking an inelastic

mean free path Aee equal to 8 K and an inner potential Vl which represents

t he rea1 part 0 f h 1 1 i on16 equa1 to 8 eV Thetee ectron-e ectron 1nteract

agreement in peak position is good for the (10) beam in the range

25 eV lt E lt 125 eV and for the (11) beam in the range 60 eV lt E lt 100 eV ~ ~ ~ ~

The theoretical and experimental line shapes of the (10) beam show remarkable

agreement but the line shapes of the (11) beam do not fit as well For the

(00) beam the theoretical profile is not similar to the experimental plot

except for the peak at 117 eV Most of this discrepancy for the (00) beam

probably arises from the differences in theoretical and experimental incishy

dence and aximuthal angles used to obtain the profiles The theoretical

profile was calculated assuming a primary electron beam normally incident

experimentally this is not possible with the spectrometer ~sed here since

the (00) beam would not be visible on the LEED screen under these conditions

~~ ~~-----------

---------------------~------------------

154

o

III C

~ C

H 1 o

1

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

-Experiment Withrow and Luscher

g =(00)

o-o-oTheory Duke T = 10 K ej =cpj =0 V=8eVI Aee 811

o 140 SP-1l91

Figure 46 Comparison of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity profiles for clean tungsten (100) surface Theoretical results have been calculated by Duke

155

Data has been obtained for the temperature dependence of clean

elastic intensity profiles No differences in the clean surface (10) and

(11) profiles taken at 600 C and -1500 C are seen even though the LEED pattern

symmetry changes from a (lxl) pattern to a c(2x2) pattern Apparently these

two elastic intensity profiles are not sensitive to the scattering geometry

changes that are manifested in the LEED pattern change

19 92 It has been speculated that the extra half order spots may

result from hydrogen on the surface As shown above the (10) and (11)

profiles dont change even though the half order spots appear on cooling

This may not be surprising if the extra spots seen on cooling the undosed

crystal are related to hydrogen on the surface The cross section for hydrogen

92 93backscattering 1S very weak compared to scattering from tungsten While

a priori it is not necessarily true that the addition of a weak scatterer will

have little effect on intensity profiles this does seem to be the case for

hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten Adsorption of hydrogen has no effect on

18the (00) profile from tungsten (100) and it was found here that~daorption

of hydrogen has very little effect on the (10) beam profile out to 015

monolayer coverage as can be concluded from Figure 321 On the other hand

it is true that adsorption of hydrogen did alter the (11) beam A second

explanation for the extra spots seen on cooling the crystal is that they

result from a tungsten surface reconstruction No theoretical calculations

have been performed which would indicate how reconstruction would affect the

intensity profiles The sensitivity of the profiles to an hypothesized

surface atom reconstruction could be determined from calculations similar to

those leading to the theoretical profiles given in Figure 46 Such a

156

theoretical calculation would be of interest as it would help evaluate how

much credence should be given to a reconstruction hypothesis

More than one atomic geometry may be associated with a given surface

translational symmetry ie associated with the same LEED spot pattern

Different geometries however would be manifested via differences in the

1intensity profiles associated with the same spot pattern After hydrogen

o 0adsorption to 015 monolayer at 60 C and -150 C both the LEED pattern symmetr~

c(2x2) and the elastic intensity profiles are the same Thus this data would indicate hydrogen adsorbs into the same surface atomic geometry at the two

temperatures A comparison of elastic intensity profiles from the undosed and

hydrogen dosed cold surface is given in Figure 47 The LEED pattern for both

conditions has a c(2x2) symmetry The profiles are not the same particularly

the (11) profile above 100 eV and the (1212) profile below 50 eV Hence

the atomic geometry responsible for the two sets of profiles may be different

even though the observed pattern symmetry c(2x2) is the same

The intensity dependence on temperature of the LEED beams has been

observed The intensity of integral order beams monitored from the clean

surface increases with decreasing temperature as shown in Figure 324 The

22 95 exponential temperature dependence obtained is pred1cted from a kinematic

treatment of electron scattering in which thermal vibrations are included via

an effective Debye-Waller factor Experimental Debye temperatures aD can

be calculated from the slopes of the straight lines in Figure 324 22 96

For the (10) beam taken with a primary energy of 1105 eV aD is

calculated to be 280oK 97 This is on the order of the Debye temperature for

~ 0bulk tungsten and higher than the Debye temperature of 183 K found by

157

Figure 47 Comparison of experimental (10) (11) and (1212) elastic intensity profiles from a cold tungsten (100) surface for hydrogen adsorption in the fast state (undosed surface) and in the ~2 state

158

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(100)

g (10)

1 o

o

OJ 0deg T -150degC Undosed and Dosed with H2

shyCl shy+shy 1 0 shyCl

o gt +shy(J)

c Q)

C 0 H

g (1212)

1

o

o

o 140

159

Estrup13 for the (10) beam for intensities taken between 6000K and 8000K

0The Debye temperature for the (11) beam is calculated to be 410 K The

middot h 1 1 95va1ues 0f eD f ound h ere seem to be anoma1ous 1y h19 S1nce ca cu at10ns

indicate that the surface Debye temperature should be lower than the bulk

Debye temperature

The temperature dependence of the half order beam is not the same

as found for the integer order beams Figure 325 shows that the intensity

of this beam increases at different exponential rates over two temperature

regions Down to about -750C the intensity increase is exponential but with

a steeper temperature dependence than observed with the integer order beams

Below -75oC the intensity increases at approximately the same exponential

rate as the integer order beams This same result is found at primary

energies of both 42 eV and 115 eV The effect is reversible with temperature

Yonehara and Schmidt19 measured the temperature dependence of the half order

beams and fit their results to a straight line on a linear scale However

for the data they took immediately after flashing to 25000K an exponential

dependence as found here appears to be as good if not better fit

0Below -75 C the half order beam intensity increases at approximately

the same exponential rate as the integer order beams This suggests that in

this lower temperature region the intensity increase can be explained by the

0 0Debye-Wa1ler factor However between 100 C and -75 C it is not known why

the (1212) spots appear and then increase in intensity so strongly

The intensity dependence on temperature of the (1212) beam

below OoC can be compared to the temperature dependence of the fast state H+

ion intensity These data are given in Figures 312 and 325 Because the

----------------~~ ~~~~~

160

a+ ion yield from the fast state also increases with decreasing temperature

a possible correlation between the appearance of this ion signal and the

appearance of the half order beams is suggested It is tempting to hypothesize

that the fast state is adsorbed into a c(2x2) array and hence half order spots

are produced on cooling However this connection probably cannot be made

For one thing the estimated coverage of the fast state is several orders of

magnitude below a coverage reasonably expected to exert an influence on the

LEED pattern In addition while the fast state has a high total desorption

cross section with the ion signal decaying rapidly after turning oriltthe

electron gun no evidence of this type of behavior is found for the LEED spot

intensities if a corresponding experiment is made A depletion of the fast

state in the electron beam does not affect the half order LEED spot intensities

oFinally in the region below middot75 C the ion signal increases reversibly with

temperature at a steep rate while the LEED spot intensity increases reversshy

ib1y at a slow rate ie the intensity correlation is not good in this

range These arguments do not refute the possibility that the half order

spots are a hydrogen phenomena They strongly indicate however that a

correlation cannot be made between the hydrogen ions observed from the undosed

surface and the appearance of the half order spots aside from the obvious

result that they both occur over the same temperature range It would appear

more reasonable to suggest that the formation of a c(2x2) scattering symmetry

on the surface via reconstruction or some other mechanism provides a

binding site into which a species from the ambient can adsorb and subseshy

quent1y be desorbed The identity of that species is not known

-----------shy

161

45 Electron Scattering Results

Energy loss spectra for electrons scattered from the clean and

hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surface are given in Figures 326 and 327

The second derivative mode has been employed in order to suppress background

as discussed in Appendix B Data have been presented for energy losses

between a and 40 eV for a primary electron beam energy of 110 eV

Several general comments can be made A comparison of the clean

spectra taken at the two temperatures shows they are nearly identical The

only difference is a slight enhancement in the low temperature data of the

shoulder at w = 75 eV (barely evident in the figures) It might be noted

that adsorption of hydrogen produces as peak at 75 eV and the small change

in the low temperature spectrum near this energy may be an indication of a

small hydrogen coverage An attempt was made to observe effects of the fast

state on the clean spectrum After cooling the crystal the fast state was

allowed to populate by turning the gun off for adsorption times of 10 minutes

The spectrum taken after preparing the crystal in this way was identical to

those obtained immediately after cooling Hence fast state hydrogen does

not perturb the electronic structure unlike ~ state hydrogen This result

is not surprising because of the very low coverages calculated for the fast

state from the desorption measurement

Hydrogen adsorption into the ~ states perturbs the clean surface

o 0loss spectrum The same changes are observed at both 60 C and -150 C The

most dramatic changes that occur with increasing coverage are the growth of

a 75 eV loss the movement down in loss energy of the structure at 21 eV in

the clean spectrum and the annihilation of the peak at 25 eV In addition

the loss peak at 107 eV decreases in intensity somewhat

162

Definite changes in the loss spectra are seen (for example at

w = 75 eV) for work function changes of 003 eV This is a coverage of only

3 percent hydrogen At coverages corresponding to a work function change of

015 eV the 75 eV peak is well-developed and the 21 eV structure has moved

down ~ 1 eV While hydrogen is adsorbing at room temperature from 0 to 15

percent of a monolayer half order spots develop in the LEED pattern As

noted before half order spots also develop in the LEED pattern by cooling the

ocrystal to -150 C However electron loss measurements from the cold flashed

surface dont show any changes that correspond to hydrogen on the surface

Thus no correlation can be drawn using electron loss measurements between

the half order patterns obtained by hydrogen dosing and by cooling the crystal

Interpretation of the structure in the energy loss spectra taken

here is nontrivial Although the data incorporates information on the elecshy

tronic structure of the surface and near surface region ie represents

bulk and surface single particle transitions and collective oscillations

both theoretical and experimental complexities arise in attempting to extract

electronic structure from the data While the electron energy loss has been

measured with high resolution information on the momentum transfer ~ q

involved in the electron solid inelastic interaction is not retained since

1) the analyzer integrates over a wide range of ~ qs and 2) the backscattered

electron has undergone at least two collisions - an inelastic scattering

with an accompanying momentum transfer which is not enough to turn the

electron around and an elastic scattering which does Hence the analyzer is

expected to be sensitive to loss mechanisms which are well-defined in energy

but relatively independent of momentum transfer Transitions satisfying these

163

conditions are possible in tungsten Luscher has shown25 that at least one

relatively flat and narrow d-band in tungsten located near the Fermi level

acts as the final state for electron excitations involving core electrons

This d-band may be operative as a final state for transitions involving

valence and adsorbate electrons as well

25The structure at 210 eV and 255 eV has been identified as

resulting from surface and bulk plasmons Adsorption of hydrogen increases

the energy of the surface plasmon but does not affect the energy of the bulk

plasmon

The energy losses at 381 eV 346 eV and 324 eV remain constant

as a function of hydrogen coverage These losses correspond in both relative

strengths and separation in energy to tungsten core electron excitations from

he 5 an (doublet ) eve 1s f ound h at 36 Vt p d 4f 1 1nmiddot x-ray p otoem1SS10n 99 9 e

333 eV and 311 eV below the Fermi level A comparison of these photo-

emission values to the energy losses observed here would indicate the position

of the final state operative in the energy loss measurements is 13 eV above

the Fermi level

It would be convenient to use this value) 13 eV for the final

state energy in interpreting the rest of the sharply peaked structure arising

from electron transitions There are difficulties with such an approach

however The data being compared in calculating the final state energy

location have been obtained with two techniques that perturb the adsorbateshy

plus-solid system in distinctly different ways The observed energy losses

in electron scattering are strongly influenced by interband oscillators

electron screening and relaxation effects and these perturbations are not

164

constant as a function of loss energy Hence extension of the 13 eV value

in interpreting data at other loss energies may not be valid None the less

using the 13 eV final state the peaks in the clean ELS spectrum at 25 eV

and 40 eV would correspond to peaks in the photoemission spectra at 12 eV

(25 eV - 13 eV) and at 27 eV (40 eV - 13 eV) respectively There is

no obvious correspondence between these peaks and structure seen in clean

35 36surface photoemission spectra The structure changes on adsorption in

the ELS spectra for 0 eV S w ~ 4 eV may reflect the sharp photoemission loss

which appears at 25 eV as hydrogen coverage increases The strong 75 eV

energy loss which appears in the ELS spectra as hydrogen adsorbs onto the

crystal would correspond to structure in photoemission data near 62 eV

(75 eV - 13 eV) Recently photoemission peaks at 52 eV and between

10068 eV and 78 eV have been reported From these comparisons it can be

seen that quantitative interpretation of the fine structure in the energy

loss measurements cannot be made with this simple model

165

CHAPTER 5

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

An experimental apparatus for surface research has been designed

constructed and successfully placed in operation It incorporates the

necessary hardware and electronics for performing several complementary

surface probing techniques including Auger electron spectroscopy retarding

potential work function measurements low energy electron diffraction electron

energy loss spectroscopy and electron stimulated desorption of ions System

electronics allow the instrument to be easily switched between the techniques

The apparatus has been used to study the chemisorption of hydrogen on a

tungsten single crystal surface over the temperature range 600C to -150

0C

The instrument combines an electron gun with an energy spectrometer

a LEED display system and a crystal manipulator The electron gun is capable

of focusing a monoenergetic electron current of up to 21 ~A onto a

macroscopic sample The gun has been operated from 5 eV to 1800 eV The

high resolution high sensitivity spectrometer consists of a retarding field

analyzer in series with two electrostatic deflection analyzers The energy

resolution of the spectrometer is 21 without using the retarding field

analyzer This can be improved to less than 1 under some conditions by

applying a retarding field The spectrometer output can be detected using

a atemeter or using modulation techniques The instrument has been used to

analyze electron and ion signals from the sample and to determine the charge

to mass ratio of desorbed ions The experimental sample a tungsten crystal

which has been polished to within 01 0 of the (100) face is mounted on the

166

end of a crystal manipulator The manipulator is used to position the sample

as needed A two grid LEED display system has been used to study LEED

pattern symmetry The intensities of LEED spots have been monitored with a

spot photometer

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental conditions using Auger electron spectroscopy The Auger

spectrum obtained after flashing the crystal to 22000 K is free of carbon and

oxygen Auger structure The electron gun could be operated under normal

experimental conditions without contaminating the surface but a carbon Auger

peak appears if high gun currents and voltages are used This effect Crul

be taken into consideration when interpreting the data Some weak structure

in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface is seen between 475 eV and

525 eVa It is not possible to conclusively determine if this structure

results from Auger transitions in tungsten or from some other source

Retarding potential work function measurements have been made as

a reproducible measure of hydrogen coverage Adsorption of hydrogen onto

othe tungsten (100) crystal at 60 C yields a maximum work function change of

098 plusmn 004 eVa This is in good agreement with previously reported values

The work function change with exposure to hydrogen for the tungsten sample

at -lSOoc was found to be the same within experimental accuracy as found

at higher temperature The maximum work function change at -lSOoc is

092 plusmn 004 eVa Cooling the flashed crystal from 2200 C to -lSOoC resulted

in an increase in the work function of approximately 005 eVa An intrinsic

(clean surface) temperature dependence of this magnitude appears reasonable

from theoretical considerations

167

The time-of-flight technique employed for mass analysis was found

to work well Ion species H+ and 0+ as well as H + have been identified2

Relative intensities of the ion yields could only be estimated with this

technique as instrumented H+ ions are electron desorbed from the surface

after adsorption of hydrogen In addition H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface after a flash if the crystal was cooled below room temperature No

HZ+ ions were desorbed from the crystal However H2+ and H+ ions produced

by ionization of the background and also by ESD from surfaces in the experishy

mental chamber were detected under certain operating conditions This signal

could be separated from the ions originating at the crystal surface by biasing

the crystal several volts positive with respect to the spectrometer

The distribution in energy of H+ ions electron desorbed from a 60 0 C

tungsten (100) surface has been observed The distribution has a normal line

shape with a peak intensity at 30 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a half width

of Z6 eV No evidence of distinct ~l and ~Z adsorption states was found in

the energy distribution line shape the distribution is the same for coverages

corresponding to both the ~Z adsorption state and the ~l plus ~2 adsorption

states The intensity of the U+ ion signal is coverage dependent The deshy

pendence found here is in agreement with previously reported work The maxshy

imum in intensity of the ion yield occurs for a work function change of 018

eV The total desorption cross section for hydrogen ions from the ~2 state

is 5xlO-ZO cmZ bull

An H+ ion signal can be desorbed from the undosed (100) surface if

the crystal temperature is lowered below room temperature T~fs represents

a previously unreported hydrogen adsorption state Experiments in which

the pressure was carefully monitored indicate that this hydrogen results

168

from adsorption onto the crystal from the background However the state

labeled the fast state is not populated by the adsorption of H2 from the

gas handling system The adsorbing species that populates the fast state

is not known Hydrogen coverage in the fast state is estimated to be ~10-4

monolayer which is an extremely small coverage The fast state hydrogen

desorbs with a broad energy distribution which has a peak intensity at

25 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a tail extending up to gt9 eV The total

17 2desorption cross section for H+ from this state is high lxlO- cm This is

on the same order of magnitude as the cross section for desorption of the

~ hydrogen state However no evidence of CO or oxygen contaminants which

are associated with the ~ state was found The techniques used to chemshy

ically characterize the surface were sensitive to about 1 percent of a mono-

layer so these two contaminants could have been present at coverages less

than 1 percent

Hydrogen (H2) dosed onto the low temperature surface co-adsorbs

with the fast state in a separate e state This can be concluded from energy

distribution and desorption curve measurements The maximum ion yield obshy

tainable from the low temperature surface occurs for a work function change

of 011 eV This is 007 eV lower than the maximum in the ion yield from

the room temperature hydrogen dosed surface This difference may indicate

that the mechanism responsible for the decrease in ion yield as the ~l state

fills is operative at a lower hydrogen coverage at low temperatures An

alternative possibility is that hydrogen coverage at the low temperature can

not be measured by the same expression relating coverage to work function

change as used at the higher temperature

169

Low energy electron diffraction pattern changes observed as a

function of hydrogen coverage on the room temperature surface are in agreeshy

ment with those reported in the literature The surface translational symshy

metry is strongly coverage dependent The maximum in the c(2x2) pattern

associated with the ~2 state occurs at a work function change of 015 eV for

room temperature adsorption If the crystal is flashed to ~22000K and then

cooled below room temperature the (lxl) pattern characteristic of the clean

surface changes into a c(2x2) pattern Since H+ ions can be electron desorbed

from the flashed surface if the crystal is cooled to this same temperature

range and since the ~2 state hydrogen is known to produce a c(2x2) pattern

it has been suggested that the low temperature c(2x2) LEED pattern may result

from hydrogen on the surface However no evidence was found to support this

hypothesis The ions desorbed from the cold surface did not originate from

the f 2 state but from a distinctly different state labeled the fast state

It is questioned whether the low coverage in the fast state is sufficient to

produce half order LEED spots There is no indication from the ELS measureshy

ments that hydrogen has diffused to the surface from the bulk Electron

energy loss spectra show almost no change on cooling the crystal below room

temperature These spectra are sensitive to electronic structure changes

resulting from hydrogen adsorption of as little as 3 percent of a monolayer

The (10) and (11) LEED beam intensity profiles taken from the undosed surface

are not changed by cooling the crystal It would be of interest to compare

this experimental result to theoretical elastic intensity profile calculations

from both a normal and a recons tructed tungsten surface This would help

determine if reconstruction is a viable explanation for the cold surface

170

c(2x2) phenomenon

Low energy electron diffraction elastic intensity profiles for

several beams have been reported from the clean tungsten (100) surface and

from this surface dosed with hydrogen in the ~2 state These profiles have

been compared to published data where possible Careful control over expershy

imental parameters is essential in order to obtain agreement between the data

The clean surface intensity profiles have been compared to preliminary theoretshy

ical calculations While fair agreement Catl be obtained both experimental

and theoretical problems must be solved before a reliable calculation of

atomic geometry for the hydrogen over layer can be made A comparison of

experimental profiles for the low temperature undosed and hydrogen dosed

c(2x2) patterns suggests that the atomic geometries responsible for these

identical patterns arenot the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been presented as a

f~~ction of hydrogen coverage Changes in the electronic structure at the

surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption are observed Structure due to

the surface and hulk plasmons are identified and peaks due to tungsten

Sp and 4f core level transitions can be identified by comparison to published

photoemission data Interpretation of other structure in the spectra requires

more study

171

REFERENCES

1 C B Duke Jap J App1 Phys 13 (1974) to be published

2 For example see R R Ford Advan Catalysis 21 51 (1970) for review of CO adsorption on transition metals or J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chern Phys 54 4969 (1971) and T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et PrPri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155 for a review of hydrogen adsorption on tungsten (100)

3 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Vac Sci Techno1 ~ 63 (1971)

4 P A Redhead Vacuum~ 203 (1962)

5 G Ehrlich Advan Catalysis 14 221 (1963)

6 L A Petermann Progress in Surface Science vol 3 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1972) p 1

7 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chern Phys 21 5352 (1969)

8 T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et Propri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155

9 D L Adams and L H Germer Sur Sci 23 419 (1970)

10 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 40 295 (1973)

11 G Tibbetts PhD thesis University of Illinois 1967

12 D L Adams Sur Sci 42 12 (1974)

13 P J Estrup The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 191

14 C B Duke and C W Tucker Jr Sur Sci 11 231 (1969)

15 C B Duke Electron Emission Spectroscopy edited by W Dekeyser et a1 (D Reidel Publishing Co Dordrecht Holland 1973) p 1

16 C B Duke N O Lipari and G E Laramore J Vac Sci Techno1 11 180 (1974)

17 M G Laga11y T C Ngoc and M B Webb Phys Rev Lett 26 1557 (1971)

172

18 P J Estrup and J Anderson J Chern Phys 45 2254 (1966)

19 K Yonehara and L D Schmidt Sur Sci 12 238 (1971)

20 E W Plummer and A E Bell J Vac Sci Techno1 2 583 (1972) bull

21 C A Papageorgopoulos and J M Chen Sur Sc i 39 283 (1973)

22 R F Wallis B C Clark and R Herman The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 171

23 M R Leggett and R A Armstrong Sur Sci 24 404 (1971)

24 D Edwards Jr PhD thesis University of Illinois 1970

25 P E Luscher PhD thesis Northwestern University 1974 to be published

26 R Gomer Field Emission and Field Ionization (Harvard U Press Cambridge Ma ss 1961)

27 R D Young Phys Rev 113 110 (1959)

28 J W Gadzuk and E W Plummer Rev Mod Phys 45 487 (1973)

29 C B Duke and M E Alpounderieff J Chern Phys 46 923 (1967)

30 J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Bl 2110 (1970)

31 C N Berglund and W E Spicer Phys Rev 136 part A Al030 (1964)

32 F M Propst and T C Piper J Vac Sci Technol ~ 53 (1967)

33 G Herzberg Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure I Spectra of Diatomic Molecules (D Van Nostrand New York 1963) 2nd ed

34 E W Plummer and J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Lett 25 1493 (1970)

35 B J Waclawski and E W Plummer Phys Rev Lett 29 783 (1972)

36 B Feuerbacher and B Fitton Phys Rev Lett 29 786 (1972)

37 P A Redhead Can J Phys 42 886 (1964)

38 D Menzel and R Gomer J Chern Phys 41 3311 (1964)

39 D Lichtman and R McQuistan Progress in Nuclear Energy Analytical Chemistry edited by H A Elion and D C Stewart (Pergamon Press New York 1965) series 9 vol 4 p 93

173

40 U N Ageev and N I Ionov Progress in Surface Science vol 5 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1974) p 1

41 T E Madey Sur Sci 36 281 (1973)

42 A Benninghoven E Loebach and N Treitz J Vac Sci Techno1 2 600 (1972)

43 L W Swanson A E Bell C H Hinrichs L C Crouser and B E Evans Literature Review of Adsorption on Metal Surfaces vol 1 NASA CR-72402 (NASA Lewis Research Center Cleveland Ohio 1967) p 76

44 R V Culver and F C Tompkins Advan Catalysis l 67 (1959)

45 See reference 43 p 49

46 J A Becker Actes du 2ieme Congres International de 1a Cata1yse (Edition Technip Paris 1961) 1777

47 R A Armstrong Can J Phys 44 1753 (1966)

48 B J Hopkins and K R Pender Sur Sci ~ 316 (1966)

49 R A Collins and B H B1ott J App1 Phys 40 5390 (1969)

50 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chem Phys 54 4969 (1971)

51 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 42 485 (1974)

52 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 52 1150 (1970)

53 See reference 7 Fig 8

54 K Fujiwara J Phys Soc Japan 11 7 (1957)

55 G D Bond Disc Faraday Soc 41 200 (1966)

56 F M Propst unpublished

57 R L Park The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 281

58 T B Grime1y Adsorption-Desorption Phenomena edited by F Ricca (Academic Press New York 1972) p 215

59 L W Anders R S Hansen and L S Bartell J Chern Phys 595277(1973)

60 J R Schrieffer J Vac Sci Techno1 2 561 (1972)

174

61 D M Newns Phys Rev 178 1123 (1969)

62 J R Schrieffer and R Gomer Sur Sci 25 315 (1971)

63 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn Phys Rev Lett 30 610 (1973)

64 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn to be published

65 P J Jennings and E G McRae Sur Sci 23 363 (1970)

66 W H Weinberg J Vac Soc Technol lQ 89 (1973)

67 L A Harris J Appl Phys 39 1419 (1968)

68 C C Chang Sur Sci 25 53 (1971)

69 T Cooper PhD thesis University of Illinois Urbana Illinois 1970

70 E M Purcell Phys Rev 54 818 (1938)

71 R Herzog Zeits F Physik 89 449 (1934)

72 Coordinated Science Laboratory Progress Report for July 1970 through June 1971 University of Illinois Urbana Illinois

73 See for example Handbook and Catalog of Operational Amplifiers BurrshyBrown Research Corp 1969 p 44

74 R W Jnyner J Rickman and M W Roberts Sur Sci 39 445 (1973)

75 C Lea and C H B Mee Sur Sci 11 332 (1971)

76 W A Coghlan and R E Clausing A Catalog of Calculated Auger Transitions for the Elements ORNL-TM-3576 (Oak Ridge National Lab Oak Ridge Tenn 1971)

77 As read by optical pyrometer the edge of the target measured 22000 K and the center 2500oK

78 B B Dayton Trans 3rd AVS National Vacuum Symposium 1956 (Pergamon Press New York 1957) p 5

79 T E Madey Sur Sci 33 355 (1972)

80 S C Brown Basic Data of Plasma Physics (Technology Press of MIT Cambridge Mass and John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 115

81 H D Hagstrum Rev Mod Phys 23 185 (1951)

175

82 M Nishijima PhD thesis University of Illinois 1969

83 G D Watts A R Jones and B J Hopkins Sur Sci 45 705 (1974)

84 R A Armstrong Sur Sc i sect 478 (1967)

85 E H B1evis and C R Crowell Phys Rev 133 part A A580 (1964)

86 C R Crowell and R A Armstrong Phys Rev 114 1500 (1959)

87 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 55 4253 (1971)

88 R Frauenfelder J Vac Sci Technol sect 388 (1969)

89 G E Moore and F C Unterwald J Chem Phys 40 2639 (1964)

90 S Dushman Scientific Foundations of Vacuum Technigue (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 19

91 P S P Wei J Chem Phys 53 2939 (1970)

92 J C Tracy private communication

93 J J Lander and J Morrison J Appl Phys 34 3517 (1963)

94 M Fink and A C Yates Atomic Data (to be published)

95 G E Laramore and C B Duke Phys Rev ~ I 4783 (1970)

96 J F Wendelken PhD thesis University of Illinois 1975

97 An inner potential of 8 eV has been assumed in this calculation

98 A Guinier X-Ray Diffraction (W H Freeman and Co San Francisco 1963) p 192

99 K Seigbahn C Nordling A Fahlman R Nordberg K Hamrin J Helman G Johansson T Bergmark S E Karlsson K Lindgren and B Lindberg ESCA - Atomic Molecular and Solid State Structure Studied by Means of Electron Spectroscopy (Almqvist Wiksells Uppsala 1967)

100 W F Egelhoff and D L Perry Phys Rev Lett 34 93 (1975)

176

APPENDIX A

A tungsten tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple spot-welded to the

side of the crystal is used to measure target temperatures The thermocouple

was calibrated against a copper-constantan standard A low temperature

freezing slush of isopentane (2-methylbutane) was made in a dewar by adding

liquid nitrogen (Isopentane freezes at -15989degC) The solution was allowed

to slowly warm up to room temperature over three hours during which a semi-

static calibration was made The reference junction was kept in a slush of

distilled ice water The calibration is shown in Figure AI

Using an identical technique a tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26

rhenium thermocouple was also calibrated as shown in Figure A2 TIlis thermoshy

couple does not have an inflection point in the range 00 to -195degC and it

00 h t t1mes more sens1t1ve over t he temperature range to -lSOoC than the1S e1g

tungstentungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple A tungsten-S rhenium wire should

spot-weld to tungsten more readily than a pure tungsten wire Thus because

of its increased sensitivity and ease of attaching to the tungsten crystal a

tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple appears a better

temperature sensor for low temperature research on tungsten

In the apparatus used the wires associated with the target manipulashy

tor including the thermocouple leads wind around the manipulator shaft to

provide rotational motion In order to get the 76 mm (003 in) diameter

thermocouple wires to wind smoothly around the shaft it was found necessary to

spring load them by turning a short segment of the wires into a 16 mm diameter

spring Unfortunately the tungsten-5 rhenium wire available proved too

brittle to turn into a spring and thus could not be used

012 _ ___r____~_-r____~_-r____~_ ___r______r___r____r__r___

C- WI W-26 Re Thermocouple Calibration Reference Junction at OdegC W Lead +

~ 008-lJ

W-26 Re LeadshyiE w 004 ~ 0shy

8J

0 o E

t-shy-I -I

Q)

c -004 tshy

-008 I I I I I I I

-200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 shy

Temperature (OC) SP-1069

Figure Al Calibration curve for W-5 ReW-26 Re thermocouple

o

-gt -04E -lL ~ w -OS 2 0shy

8J -12

o E

W-5 Re I W-26 Re Thermocouple Co libration Reference Junct ion at OdegC W-5Re Lead + W-26 Re Leadshy

J shy --shy~ ~ t- 16 0----

-20 I I

-200 -ISO -160 -140 -120 -100 -SO -60 -40 -20 0

Temperature (OC)

SP-1l73

Figure A2 Calibration curve for WW-26 Re thermocouple

-J 00

179

APPENDIX B

When operating the spectrometer in the electron mode at an effective

pass energy E the output current of the electron multiplier N(E) is proporshy

tional to the electron current originating at the target with energy between E

and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance solid angle of the analyzer

An energy distribution of the electron signal from the target can be measured

by sweeping the effective pass energy of the instrument This distribution

consists of rapidly varying true secondary and characteristic loss structure

interpretable in terms of electron transitions and collective oscillations in

the target plus a smoothly varying background In order to separate the

structure ~rom the background the energy distribution is electronically

67differentiated using a technique proposed by Harrismiddot A small sinusoidal

oscillation is applied to the effective pass energy of the spectrometer so

that the energy of the electrons passing through the spectrometer oscillates

around the instantaneous dc pass energy E If the detected current N(E) is 3

expanded in a Taylors series around the energy E where the sinusoidal 3

oscillation is E-E = K sin wt the first four terms are 3

N(E) N(E ) + K dN (E l (1 - cos 2wt)3 dE

E=E E=E i3

(3 sin wt - sin 3wt) +

E=E 3

Rearranging

180

dN(E) ) + K3 term + S1n wt (B2)N(E) = N(E ) + + K dE(i E=E

i

K2 d2N(E) 4 )+ K term + cos 2wt + + ( 4 2dE E=E1

The coefficients of the sin wt and cos 2wt terms are found to be proportional

respectively to the first two derivatives of N(E) providing K is small enough

such that the higher order terms in K can be dropped Under this assumption

a signal proportional to the first or second derivative of N(E) is obtained

by synchronously detecting the appropriate harmonic of the output

If a peak structure in the output signal is represented by a

Gaussian G(E) centered at E and the background represented by a polynomialo

in E B(E) then N(E) and the first two derivatives of N(E) evaluated at E o

become

N(E) = B(E) + G(E) (B3) -~(E-EO)2

2 d N(E) = a + bE + cE + + 1 e 2 (B4)

(2TT)2

2N(E=E ) = a + bE + cE + d 1 (B5)o o 0 cr (2TT)2

dN(E) = b + 2cE + 0 (B6)o E=E

dE

o

-d 1 = 2c + (B7)1 2 0 (2TT)2 0

E=E o

- -

2

181

From Equation B6 the first derivative evaluated at E has no contribution o

from the structure G(E) Extremum points in dN(E)dE occur at (E ~ E )2 = 0 o

if the background terms of order 3 or greater are not considered Using this

result in Equation B6 gives

~dltplusmng) edN(E) = b + 2c (E to) + bull I (B8)dE

0- 0 (2n)2E=E + 0

0shy

The relation between the original signal N(E) and the synchronously

detected signals can be seen from Equations B4 through B8 There is some

background suppression in both modes If N(E) is slowly varying the higher

order background terms that remain are small The peak to peak height of

the first harmonic signal is

1dN dN = 4ccr + - 2cb 1 e-2~-2crG(E-E ~ 0) (B9)

dE dE 0 (2n)2 0

E=E -0E=E +u o o

The intensity of the second harmonic signal evaluated at E is approximately 0

proportional to1 G(E) Hence using the stated assumptions the detected 0 2 0

first and second harmonics of N(E) contain structure which is directly

proportional to G(E)

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as is

commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in looking at

electron scattering energy loss measurements

182

APPENDIX C

The process of desorption of ions from a surface by electron

bombardment is referred to as electron stimulated desorption The theory to

account for this phenomenon was independently proposed by Redhead37 and by

38Menzel and Gomer A brief explanation of their model follows

In Figure Cl schematic potential energy diagrams are given for the

metal plus ground state adsorbate CM + A) and metal plus ionic state (M- + A+)

as a function of separation distance x of the adsorbing atom or ion from the

metal surface These two curves are labeled VG(x) and V(x) for the ground

state and ionic state respectively The nature of these interactions has

been described37 8l and several interaction calculations for hydrogen on metal

59 63surfaces have been g~ven The zero in potential energy in Figure 41 is

defined as the energy of the ion A+ at rest at infinity from the surface of M

The nucleus of the chemisorbed adsorbate is located at the minimum in the

ground state potential energy curve The wave function ~G(x) of the adsorbate

in the ground state on the surface is shown centered at a position x which ~

corresponds to the minimum in energy of VG

VG determines ~G(x) Vertical

transitions from the ground state to the ionic state (labeled 1 in the

diagram) are induced by incident electron bombardment of the surface

Secondary electrons leaving the surface also can cause such transitions

Once excited the ion is subjected to a repulsive force and moves away from

the surface (indicated by 2) The ionized adsorbate can be neutralized as it

leaves the surface and hence desorb as a neutral (indicated by 3) or it can

be de-excited back to the ground state and not desorb (indicated by 4) Ions

183

V(x)

gt ~ Ion ~ ~ 2 )III V(xi)(I) c +E K M-+A+w 0 f (v)+=c (I) +shy0 Cl

14 3 I-ltP Neutral

M+A

Ede t

ltPG (x)

~

DistanceX SP-1201

Figuze Cl Schematic diagram of adsorbate-metal interactions showing the transitions involved in the theory of electron stimulated desorption

184

that originate at x x leave the surface with energy V(x) The energyL L

80distribution of the desorbed ions f(V(xraquo is determined by the reflectionL

2of the probability density distribution I~G(xi)1 through the ionic state

energy curve This can be given by the expression

P(x ) f(V(xraquo

L (Cl)L ~~Ix = x

L

where N is the number of species A adsorbed in the ground state per unit

area a is the cross section for excitation of the species A from the groundex

state to the ionic state (transition 1) ~G(x) is defined above and P(x ) isi

the probability that an ion starts from the position x = x and moves awayL

from the L gLvensurface without being neutralized P(x) can be by373881

P(x ) exp(- J~dx ~)i x v(x) (C2)

i

where R(x) is the rate that the ions produced at the surface by electron

impact are reneutralized v(x) is the velocity of the ion at a distance x

from the surface This depends explicitly on V(x) as shown by Equation C3

for an ion of mass M and charge q

2q (V(X i ) - V(Xraquo)21

v(x) ( M (C3)

Additional complexities for example multiple initial and ionic states or

electron induced state conversion can be added to this simple model

185

The mass transport occurring at the surface during an ESD measurement

can be described in a kinetic treatment which relates the observed ion signal

to physical parameters characteristic of the experimental conditions The

change with time of the surface coverage per area of an adsorbate dNdt is

given by the rate of arrival of the adsorbate onto the surface minus the rate

of desorption from the surface In the simplest formulation of these proshy

cesses only adsorption from the background and desorption due to electron

bombardment need be considered The electron stimulated desorption flux of

ions is assumed proportional to the electron current density j and to the e

surface coverage per unit area N The proportionality constant is

tthe total desorption cross section Q (NE ) Qt(NE ) is in general a pr~ pr~

function of both the coverage and the primary electron energy For the

simple model given above the total desorption cross section is the sum of

the ionic Q+ and neutral Qn desorption cross sections The adsorption

rate is equal to the striking rate times the sticking probability s(N)

which in general is a function of the coverage The time dependence of N can

now be written as

j Qt(NE )N dNdt = s(N)yP _ ~ pu (C 4)e

where P is the partial pressure of the adsorbing species and y is a constant

equal to the number of molecules that strike unit area of the surface per unit

time and pressure

The measured electron stimulated desorption yield of A ions i + isA

assumed proportional to the incident current i the coverage of A per unit e

area N and the detection efficiency of the instrument G The proportionality

186

constant is the ionic desorption cross section Q+(NE ) (Since the only pr~

adsorbate being considered in this work is hydrogen the subscript A will be

replaced by H) This relation for iH+ can be written

= i Q+(NE )NG (CS)e pr~

Equation C4 can be solved for N in closed form under certain

simplifying assumptions The dependence of the cross section on primary

energy does not affect the form of the solution (if the primary energy is

kept constant) Then Qt can be written Qt (E ) if the cross section canpri

be shown to be independent of coverage This is not the case in general so

its validity for each metal-adsorbate system has to be examined This is

done in the text for H2 adsorbed on W(100) so the assumption will be assumed

here Likewise the sticking probability will be assumed independent of N

Equation C4 can now be solved to yield

(C6)

N is the initial hydrogen coverage at t o and T is given by ~

(C7)

Combining Equations CS and C6 gives for the g+ ion yield

(C8)

187

where i is the initial ion yield at t = 0 and iH+ is given byH~ equil

+ esyPAG ~ (C9)

Q

Equation C8 shows that the H+ yield decreases with time to a

saturation value iH+ This decay of the ESD ion yield with time is equil

called a desorption curve A semilogarithmic plot of iH+ - i + versusHequil time should yield a straight line the slope of which is -17 From this

slope and the definition of 7 the total desorption cross section charactershy

izing the hydrogen binding state can be calculated

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

1S considerably more dbull40 a diffusionpressure ~nvo1ve Conceptually such

process can be considered in two steps 1) the diffusion of hydrogen from the

bulk to just inside the surface or to a near surface layer and 2) the

jumping from this configuration to surface sites Diffusion from the bulk to

the near surface layer could be described by Ficks law If N is the conshy

centration of hydrogen in the near surface layer and N the surface concentrashy

tion of hydrogen then the time dependence of N + N due to bulk diffusion

can be written as

d(N+Nl _ D dn (C 10)dt - dx

where D is the diffusion constant for hydrogen in tungsten and dndx is the

concentration gradient of hydrogen just inside the surface The coverage N

in surface sites will change as a result of hydrogen jumping from the near

188

surface layer to the surface and vice versa The rate of jumping to the

surface d( N )dt can be assumed proportional to the concentration Nt

and to some function f(N) which describes the availability of surface sites

The diffusion rate to the surface from the near surface layer would also be

exponentially dependent on an activation barrier energy E The reversebs

flux from the surface to the near surface layer can be written in an

equivalent form An expression for the change in surface concentration with

time due to diffusion to and from the near surface layer can be written as

-E kT -E kTb~~ = CbsNte s f(N) - CsbNe sb g(N) (ClI)

The first term on the right-hand side represents the rate of diffusion from

the near surface layer to the surface and the second term represents the

rate of diffusion from the surface back to the near surface layer cbs and

are constants Esb and g(N) correspond toE and f(N) respectivelycsb bs

A term representing depletion of the surface state due to incident electron

bombardment similar to the second term on the right of Equation C4 could

be added in Equation Cll This has been omitted since only the case je = 0

will be considered here In principle an expression for N can now be

obtained by solving Equations ClO and Cll A general solution is not easily

obtained However it is evident that the time dependence of N due to

diffusion could realistically be similar to that expected from background

adsorption For example for the isothermal case if Nt is assumed constant

and f(N) assumed equal to (1 - NN ) assumptions that are reasonable for max

small coverages it can be shown from Equation 44 that N increases

189

exponentially in time to an equilibrium value For N small this solution

would be approximately linear in time the same result obtained for the time

dependence of background adsorption However background pressure doesnt

enter into the above diffusion calculation If the fast state phenomena is

diffusion related N would be expected to be independent of background

pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence for

adsorption from the background

_ _

190

VITA

Stephen Parker Withrow was born in Washington DC on February 2

1945 He attended Northwestern Senior High School in Hyattsville Maryland

graduating in 1963 He enrolled at Cornell University in Ithaca New York in

September 1963 In June 1967 he received a Bachelor of Science in

Engineering Physics In September 1967 he enrolled in the Physics Department

at the University of Illinois in Urbana Illinois He received his Masters

of Science in Physics in February 1969 He served at a Teaching Assistant

in the Physics Department for four years and also as a Research Assistant in

the Coordinated Science Laboratory while doing his thesis research He is

the coauthor of the publication Environmentally Assisted Crack Growth in

Glass G M Sinclair and S P Withrow Naval Research Laboratory Report

6635

_-------------shy-----------_ bull

Page 7: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …

v

33 Ion Species Identificationbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 74

34 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 77

35 u+ Ion Desorption Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 351 ut Ion Energy Distributionbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 83 352 Desorption Curve Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 93 353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State a+ Ion

Signal 4) 96

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 98

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull lll

37 Electron Scattering Data bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 119

4 DISCUSSION OF RESULTS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 126

42 Work Function Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 127

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 129 431 Room Temperature Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 130 432 Low Temperature Fast State Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 135 433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull142

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 145

45 Electron Scattering Results bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull 161

5 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull165

REFERENCES 171

APPENDIX A 0 176 poundI

APPENDIX B 9 c 179

APPENDIX C 0 182 0 bull

VITA 190lilt bullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbullbull bullbull

1

CHAPTER 1

MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

11 Introduction and Motivation

The experimental investigation of chemisorption of gases onto metallic

surfaces has uncovered in the past decade a baffling complexity of adsorption

geometries and binding state kinetics and energetics A growing interest in

surface phenomena generated by the questions raised in these researches and

by the long anticipated use of the answers has led to the rapid development

of new surface probing techniques and to an increase in the availability of new

technologies compatible with surface research Aided by the new technologies

and techniques chemisorption research has been undertaken on many different

systems (system =solid substrate + gas adsorbate) under a wide range of

environmental conditions Surface theoreticians have proposed microscopic and

phenomenological models with which data have been analyzed and compared A

large experimental and theoretical literature in the field has resulted

The study of adsorption on metal surfaces has among its primary

objectives a detailed description of the physical geometry of the atoms in the

surface layers and a quantitative understanding of electronic and chemical

surface phenomena While considerable progress has been made in documenting

gas-surface phenomena it has been only in the past three years that any

credible claims to understanding specific surface overlayer geometries have

1been made At the same time many basic questions involving system kinetics

and energetics have not been adequately resolved 2

It has become apparent from the failure of the research effort to

satisfy the above objectives and from seemingly conflicting data that adequate

2

characterization is basic to all surface experimentation The need for such

characterization has been strongly emphasized by disagreement between quasishy

similar research performed at different locations Small impurity concentrashy

tions small changes in crystal orientation minor temperature differences etc

often have considerable effects on experimental measurements

A corollary to the necessity of being able to characterize the

surface is the importance of being able to control the surface characterization

In order to compare data it is necessary to reproduce all experimental paramshy

eters accurately The theory to which experimental data are compared is

constrained by complexity to be based on ideal clean substrates with a

definable gas-surface interaction It is desirable to be able to choose the

adsorbate-substrate system and experimental parameters that can also be used

with theoretical models Of course compromises are inevitable

One approach in surface research has been to incorporate several

experimental techniques into one apparatus At the present time this approach

is increasingly more common A combination of surface sensitive probes offers

many advantages It provides for more checks of the data against results

published in the literature It allows for better characterization of the

experimental parameters It allows surface phenomena to be probed in more than

one way in order to eliminate ambiguities andor to reinforce conclusions It

eliminates the uncertainties that arise from data taken at different locations

using the techniques separately hence it allows better correlations between

data taken using the different techniques

In this study several aspects of the chemisorption interaction of

hydrogen with the low index (100) plane of single crystal tungsten denoted

3

W(100) have been investigated The choice of the tungsten-hydrogen system is

motivated by several factors The literature raises questions on the unusual

state behavior observed when hydrogen adsorbs on W(100) questions which our

apparatus is especially well-suited to study In addition the interaction of

hydrogen with close packed planes of single crystal metals including W(100)

is of particular interest to theoreticians since hydrogen is the simplest

molecular gas as detailed in Sections 128 and 129 below recent theories

of chemisorption have been applied to the hydrogen-tungsten system Tungsten

was chosen as the substrate metal because of its relative ease of preparation

and cleaning and because the large body of literature on the hydrogen-tungsten

system indicates wide interest in this interaction

In particular this research is concentrated in three areas Tung~

sten when cleaned and subsequently cooled to below room temperature exhibits

an anomalous centered (2x2) denoted C(2x2) low energy electron diffraction

pattern The possibility that this is caused by hydrogen diffusing from the

bulk or adsorbing from the background has been investigated Secondly the

room temperature and low temperature hydrogen adsorption binding states have

been studied using electron stimulated desorption and electron spectroscopy

Finally low energy electron diffraction has been used in an investigation of

the atomic geometry of the clean tungsten surface and the geometry of one of

the hydrogen binding states

The remaining sections of this chapter summarize literature relating

to this research Chapter 2 details the construction and performance of the

experimental apparatus A presentation of the experimental data is made in

Chapter 3 A discussion of the results is made in Chapter 4 A summaryof

4

the research and conclusions from it are given in Chapter 5

12 Review of Literature

121 Introduction

Experimental investigation of the adsorption of hydrogen on tungsten

has been carried out using field emitter tips macroscopic polycrystalline

surfaces and all the low index orientation single crystal faces including

W(lOO) From the wide range of results it is clear that the substrate exerts

a strong influence on the adsorption properties The question has been raised

whether adsorption models postulated from polycrystalline substrates can be

3extended even qualitatively to single crystal systems Likewise there are

such sharp differences in the chemisorption behavior of hydrogen onto the

different single crystal tungsten surfaces that the specific physical process

governing adsorption on each face appears to be unique to that face This

review will therefore be concerned for the most part with literature dealing

with hydrogen adsorption on W(lOO) the gas-substrate system used in this

research

The following data review is presented in subsections each concenshy

trating on a specific experimental technique or class of experiments Subsecshy

tion 127 includes some gas mixing literature which was considered relevant

and Subsection 129 gives a bibliography of some related chemisorption

theoretical papers

122 Thermal Desorption

One technique widely employed in investigation of the kinetics of gas

456adsorption has been thermal or flash desorption By monitoring the system

5

pressure changes of a species while rapidly heating the crystal inferences

can be made on the existence of binding states adsorption energies and reaction

7 8 order Heating is accomplished by a focussed light beam electron bombardshy

7 9ment or ohmic losses bull

The strongest indication that hydrogen exhibits multiple state

adsorption behavior on W(lOO) comes from flash desorption data Tamm and

8Schmidt 7 and Madey and Yates found for room temperature adsorption that two

large peaks are observed in the plot of pressure of H2 versus temperature

These peaks are centered at 4500 K and approximately 550oK Only hydrogen

molecules are observed to be desorbed from the surface Using desorption rate

456theory the lower temperature (~l) state is found to obey first order

kinetics the peak temperature being independent of initial coverage The

higher temperature (~2) state obeys second order kinetics the peak temperature

moving down from approximately 5800 K to 5500 K as the initial coverage is

increased

In addition to the two main peaks several small peaks comprising a

total of less than 10 percent of the desorbed hydrogen are observed during a

flash when the crystal is cooled to nitrogen temperature before hydrogen

exposure These states are believed to result from adsorption onto edges and

other non-(lOO) crystal orientations 8

The dependence of the desorption energy Ed on coverage is weak

~l 8 ~2 8with Ed = 252 kcallmole and Ed = 323 kcalmole As would be predicted

from this result the ~2 state is largely populated before the ~l state begins

to fill The ratio of the populations in the states at full coverage n~1n~2

8 lOis 2111 Jelend and Menzel point out that the cross section for electron

6

desorption (see Subsection 125) from the ~1 state is considerably smaller

than that of the ~2 state a result not predicted from the experimental flash

desorption binding energies

11Tibbetts using a stepped temperature flash desorption technique

has shown that hydrogen is bound to the surface of po1ycrysta11ine tungsten

W(110) and W(lll) with a distribution of binding energies ranging from

162 kca1mo1e (07 eV) to 415 kca1mo1e (lS eV) Using this technique

desorption at a constant temperature from a distribution of states can be easily

distinguished from desorption from a state with a unique binding energy While

he did not extend his work to W(100) these results suggest that hydrogen does

not bind to the surface at a few energies but rather with a range of binding

energies Tibbetts also shows that the determination of the order of the

desorption process is difficult for adsorption into a range of binding energies

In experiments using a combination of hydrogen and deuterium as room

temperature adsorbates the elemental composition of the desorbed ~1 and ~2

states shows complete isotopic mixing between the states7S independent of the

adsorption sequence or ratios However for low temperature adsorption

complete state conversion is not observed for all the additional small peaks

Where mixing is observed atomic adsorption is suggested Where mixing is not

observed molecular adsorption is inferred

Some theoretical models indicate that multiple peak flash desorption

spectra may be due to binding energy changes caused by adsorbate-adsorbate

interactions12 or order-disorder transactions during f1ash3 13 rather than

actual distinct multiple binding states under the adsorption conditions

7

123 LEED and HEED

Low energy electron diffraction or LEED refers to the coherent

scattering of a monoenergetic focused electron beam from the surface of a

crystalline solid Electrons in the energy range 0 lt E lt 300 eV interact

strongly with the ion cores and valence electrons of the solid The inelastic

mean free path is on the order of 10 X As a consequence electrons which are

observed elastically have been backscattered within the first several surface

layers in the solid making LEED a surface sensitive probe 14 15 The periodic

translational symmetry of the surface leads to the momentum conservation laws

I

= (11)~I ~II + g

= (2mEh2)t sin reg (12)~II

where ~II is the momentum parallel to the surface of the emerging electron and

~ is the parallel momentum of the incident electron The vector g is a

reciprocal lattice vector of the solid surface and reg is the polar angle of the

incident beam As a result of the conservation laws the scattered electrons

emerge in a series of beams called a spot pattern which is a manifestation

of the surface symmetry The beams are labelled by their corresponding g

vectors Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores is

extracted from the plot of elastically scattered electron intensity versus

16 17incident energy called elastic intensity profiles or I-V curves

Changes in the LEED spot pattern resulting from hydrogen adsorption

18onto W(lOO) at room temperature have been reported by Estrup and Anderson and

19by Yonehara and Schmidt As hydrogen is adsorbed at room temperature the

8

(lxl) pattern characteristic of clean tungsten changes into a weak C(2x2)

pattern at a hydrogen coverage e of less than 005 monolayer (where e = 1

15 2monolayer at a coverage of 2xlO hydrogen atomsem which is 2 hydrogen atoms

for each surface tungsten atom) The (1212) spots become sharp and intense

with increased hydrogen adsorption reaching a maxima in intensity at approxishy

19 18mately 015 monolayer or e = 025 monolayer (Coverage in both cases was

determined by flash desorption) The (1212) spots split into four new spots

which move apart continuously and upon further hydrogen adsorption eventually

19form 13-order streaks at a coverage of ~ 035 monolayer These in turn

change at higher coverage into poorly developed 14-order features with the

(012) spots missing Finally near e = 10 all extra diffraction features

are gone and the LEED pattern returns to a (lxl) symmetry This series of LEED

pattern changes is reversible with coverage

For hydrogen adsorption at 1950 K the C(2x2) pattern develops

maximizes in intensity at e ~ 18 and splits into four beams similar to room

temperature adsorption However the higher coverage LEED structures third

19 0order streaks and fourth order spots are not observed At 78 K adsorption

of hydrogen produces half-order C(2x2) spots that maximize in intensity at

e ~ 027 Additional hydrogen adsorption beyond this causes the half-order

19spot intensity to decrease but with no splitting of the spots

If clean W(lOO) is allowed to cool below room temperature a sharp

19and intense C(2x2) pattern is observed even though total coverage due to the

background of H2 and CO is less than e = 001 as determined by flash desorption

measurements The intensity of these half-order beams can be altered by

additional hydrogen adsorption or by various hydrogen and oxygen heat treatmenm

9

l9Yonehara and Schmidt have postulated that the extra spots may result from

hydrogen endothermally soluble in tungsten diffusing to the surface Possible

alternative explanations include the reconstruction of the clean tungsten

surface or impurity over layer adsorption from the background It should be

20noted that Plummer and Bell saw no effects upon cooling their field emitter

tip to 78 0 K that they could attribute to hydrogen diffusion to the surface

Elastic intensity profiles for several beams have been measured by

18 21Estrup and Anderson and by Papageorgopoulos and Chen at room temperature

Estrup and Anderson reported profiles for (00) and (1212) tEED lJeams out

to 300 eV The intensity variation for the (OO) beam was found to be indepenshy

dent of hydrogen coverage a manifestation of the relatively weak scattering

cross section of a hydrogen ion core relative to that of tungsten The

additional beams observed on adsorption would be expected to be more sensitive

13to the adsorbed overlayer Estrup found the intensity of the (1212) beams

for H W(100) and D W(100) to decrease as a function of temperature between2 2

300o

K and 6000 K at a constant incident energy but neither obeyed the Debyeshy

22Waller relation Estrup interpreted this result to imply the adsorbed

species are directly involved in the diffraction process

19Yonehara examined the tEED spot intensities as a function of

temperature down to liquid nitrogen temperatures His results are examined

in the data discussion in Chapter 4

The hydrogen-WlOO) system has also been studied using high energy

electron diffraction or HEED23 This technique utilizes the strong forward

scattering of high energy electrons in probing the surface by having the

incident beam strike the solid at grazing incidence The resulting diffraction

10

patterns are sensitive to the translational symmetry of the surface As in

LEED a diffraction pattern with C(2x2) symmetry is observed during initial

hydrogen adsorption With further hydrogen exposure the beams broaden some

splitting is observed and eventually the half-order intensity decreases

completely The width of the observed half-order beams has been interpreted to

indicate hydrogen initially adsorbs into a large number of small square or

rectangular domains each consisting of 20 to 25 atoms with sides parallel to

the [100J directions

124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and Photoemission

The electronic structure of the surface layers of solids can be

characterized by electron emission spectroscopies Such techniques require a

surface sensitive perturbation on the gas-solid system leading to an electron

yield A spectrometer is used to energy analyze the emitted or scattered

24 25electrons In electron scatter~ng a monoenergetic beam of electrons is

directed onto a crystal The inelastically scattered signal containing

quantitative information about electronic excitations at the surface is

measured as a function of energy loss Field emission is a technique in which

application of a high positive electric field to the surface lowers the potenshy

26tia1 barrier for electrons to tunnel out of the system The total energy

distribution of electrons emitted as a result of the applied field contains

bull 27 28spectroscopic data on the adsorbed spec~es Structure induced by the

adsorbate in the elastic tunneling spectrum is thought to be a measure of the

d f i h f h d b 2930e1ectron~c ens~ty 0 states n t e v~c~n~ty 0 tea sor ate The

inelastic tunneling spectrum reveals discrete excitation energies in the

11

gas-surface system In photoemission or ftotoelectron spectroscopy an incident

monochromatic light beam incident on the solid induces emission of electrons by

interband transitions with or without an inelastic scattering after the initial

31 exc i tat~on

The vibrational spectrum of hydrogen adsorbed on the tungsten (100)

32surface has been observed by Propst and Piper using inelastic low energy

20electron scattering and by Plummer and Bell using field emission Propst

and Piper found two peaks in the energy loss distribution E - E pr~mary scattered

at 135 meV and 69 meV for all coverages used up to saturation These results

are interpreted as indicating hydrogen atoms are multiply bonded to tungsten

33atoms No losses near 550 meV the vibrational energy of molecular hydrogen

were observed Plummer and Bell measured the total energy distribution of

field emitted electrons from tungsten (100) as a function of coverage of

hydrogen and deuterium at several temperatures Discrete losses at 100 meV

and 50 meV for deuterium which correspond to the 135 meV and 69 meV vibrational

losses observed by Propst and Piper were evident for deuterium in the a state2

No discrete energy losses at 550 meV or 390 meV the molecular vibrational

levels of H2 and D2 respectively were measured Hence there was no observable

molecular adsorption at room temperature

Additional structure in the field emission total energy distribution

is observed as a function of hydrogen adsorption The clean surface spectrum

has two peaks 04 eV and 15 eV down from the Fermi level which have been

d ifi d h h d f d h h f 34 A h d ~ ent e as ~g ens~ty 0 states assoc~ate w~t t e sur ace s y rogen

(or deuterium) coverage increases between 0 and 5xl014 atomscm2

ie while

the ~2 state is filling the surface states disappear and the field emitted

12

energy distribution changes from that of clean tungsten to a spectrum indicative

of resonance tunneling through a level positioned 09 eV below the Fermi energy

There is a shoulder at -11 eV and an energy dependent background With

further adsorption up to saturation this energy distribution characteristic

of the ~2 state shifts to a broad level centered at 26 eV below the Fermi

level This is interpreted to indicate that the ~1 state does not adsorb on

top of the ~2 state

35The photoemission results of Wac1awski and P1ummer and Feuerbacher

36and Fitton are in agreement with those obtained using the field emission

technique As hydrogen adsorbs on the surface emission from the 04 eV

surface state decreases The level 09 eV down from the Fermi energy as well

as a level 5 eV down remain unchanged by adsorption At full coverage a strong

peak at -25 eV is observed

125 Electron Stimulated Desorption

Desorption of energetic ions and neutrals from a gas over layer can

be induced by electron bombardment This process termed electron stimulated

desorption or ESD37383940 is described below in the discussion of the data

in Chapter 4 In brief intensity and energy measurements of the ion yield can

be interpreted in terms of the parameters characterizing the binding energy

curve of the adsorbed state and adsorption states can be classified by cross

section for desorption_ ion energy distributions primary energy threshold for

desorption etc

ESD has been employed to study adsorption kinetics for the hydrogenshy

41 ~ tungsten (100) system Madey obtained a coverage dependence yield of H ions

13

observing an ion signal during the initial stages of hydrogen adsorption that

reached a maximum at a coverage of e = 017 and then decayed to zero yield

23 2after e = 075 the maximum cross section obtained was 18x10- cm at a

primary electron energy of 100 eV Tamm and Schmidt7 reported a maximum cross

section for H+ desorption of 10- 21 cm 2bull Benninghoven Loebach and Treitz42

10and Je1end and Menze1 obtained qualitatively similar (to Madey) coverage

dependencies on tungsten ribbons which were believed to be predominantly of

(100) crystallites the main difference between these results and Madeys is

the observation of a residual signal at high hydrogen coverage

The cross section results indicate that the a state even though it2

is more tightly bound than the a state provides more hydrogen ions upon1

electron impact The cross section for ion desorption from the a1 state is

d41 10-25est1mate to be 1ess t han cm2 bull

+No energy distributions of the desorbed H ions have been reported

The dependence of the desorption cross section on the primary electron energy

10has not been investigated Je1end and Menzel found their results independent

of temperature for temperatures above room temperature No ESD results for

otemperatures less than 300 K have been reported

126 Work Function

The work function is the minimum amount of energy required to remove

43 an electron from a meta1 An adsorbate may alter the potential barrier for

electrons at the surface and hence change the work function Such is the case

for hydrogen on W(100) Hydrogen adsorbs as an electronegative ion on W(100)

thereby increasing the work function

14

44Using a retarding potential current-voltage techn~que Madey and

8Yates reported a linear relation between work function change and hydrogen

coverage over the entire coverage range for adsorption occurring at a

temperature 0 f 2= 300 0 K Coverages were determined by flash desorption

Total work function change at one monolayer was found to be 090 eV which

corresponds to a constant dipole moment per adsorbed atom of 015 Debye

15 2(assuming a total coverage of 15xlO atomsem)

Estrup and Anderson18 using the retarding potential technique and

Plummer and Bel120 using a field emission Fowler-Nordheim plot45 found a

work function change versus coverage relationship which deviated only slightly

8from being linear in near agreement with the results of Madey and Yates

46 47Becker using field emission and Armstrong using a retarding potential

technique found a work function change for the H W(100) system of approximately2

48090 eV when e = 10 Hopkins and Pender obtained an anomalously low value

49of 054 eV while Collins and Blott obtained a high value of 109 eV for the

same coverage

127 Chemical Probes

Hydrogen adsorption has also been studied using a chemical probe

ie by coadsorbing some additional different gas with the hydrogen and

observing the effect this additional species had on results obtained using

techniques discussed in previous sections

50Yates and Madey found using flash desorption that CO coadsorption

onto a hydrogen monolayer displaces both the Sl and S2 binding states with

near unity probability in doing so initially replacing these states with a

15

less tightly bound hydrogen state After high CO exposure no hydrogen remains

on the surface if the coadsorption is done at room temperature At lower

temperatures only about 10 percent of the hydrogen is desorbed Jelend and

Menzel lO 5l found that the ionic and total desorption cross sections for

hydrogen the sticking probability and bond strength of hydrogen are all

affected by preadsorption of CO or oxygen Yates and Madey3 found that N2

slowly replaces preadsorbed hydrogen at temperatures greater than 300oC Below

2730

K the displacement of hydrogen by N2 does not occur

These results all show that small impurity concentrations of CO N

and 0 if intentionally introduced do affect the resulting hydrogen chemishy

sorption properties These experiments underscore the necessity of surface

chemical characterization

128 Chemisorption Models

7 18 19 52 Several models have been proposed to account for the

experimental results from hydrogen chemisorption on W(lOO) Each of these

models embodies some combination of the following three phenomenological

assumptions 1) The tungsten surface is ideal planar and free of contamishy

nants 2) There are available two types of adsorbates namely hydrogen atoms

53and molecules 3) There are three high symmetry logical bonding sites on

a BCC (100) face usually designated by the letters A B and C These

positions are A a bridge site with 2 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen

equidistant from two adjacent surface tungsten atoms B a four fold symmetric

site with 5 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen located on a surface normal that

passes through the center of a surface primitive unit cell and C the hydrogen

16

located directly above a surfac~ atom with one nearest neighbor There are

15 152x10 A sitescm2 and 1x10 B ore sites~m2 on middotW(100)

The proposed models attempt to explain or at least be consistent

with empirical results presented in Sections 121 through 127 A summary

of salient features of the reported research includes a) a linear work function

15change with coverage b) a saturation coverage of between 15 and 20x10 H

2atomscm c) a coverage dependent adsorption layer symmetry including a we11shy

ordered surface at low coverages d) the appearance at low temperatures of a

surface translational symmetry not equivalent to room temperature clean

tungsten e) adsorption into states which produces a two state thermal desorpshy

tion spectrum with relative coverages in the two states of nQ n = 21 f) a ~1 ~2

coverage dependence for the observed electronic structure including the

absence at high coverage of structure observed at low coverages and g) no

observed vibrational levels which correspond to free H2 molecule

Following is a short review of several proposed surface models

18Estrup and Anderson account for their LEED spot pattern results

using a model wherein the hydrogen molecules dissociate upon adsorption and

migrate initially to form islands of hydrogen atoms located at type A sites in

a e(2x2) structure Dissociation is assumed since the e(2x2) pattern maximizes

15 2at a coverage of 25x10 mo1ecu1escm whereas without dissociation it would

maX1m1ze at 5 1015 mo ecu1es cm2bull e site adsorptionx 1 Although type B or type

could also produce the initial e(2x2) LEED pattern these sites are rejected

15 2because of the following 1) There are only 1x10 B or e sitescm This is

not enough sites to accommodate a full monolayer coverage if all binding is

atomic and if it is into equivalent sites as suggested by the linear work

17

function change with coverage 2) While a complete 14-order LEED pattern is

possible with type B or type C sites it is not possible to produce a 14-order

54pattern with (012) spots missing using B or C sites As the adsorption

14 2proceeds past a surface density of 5xlO hydrogen atomscm the adatoms conshy

tinuously rearrange into long period superlattices with antiphase domains

that produce successively the 12-order spot splitting the 13-order streak

(only partly ordered domains) the 14-order pattern and finally the (lxl)

full coverage structure

This model has been criticized for not accounting for the two

observed binding states and for predicting a maximum in intensity of the half

order spots at e = 025 these beams maximize at less than that coverage In

addition the authors themselves questioned the idea of well-ordered super-

lattices

In order to explain the relative intensity of the two states at

saturation seen in flash desorption n~~ = 21 Tamm and Schmidt7

propose a 1 2

model wherein the initial hydrogen adsorption is atomic and at B sites in a

C(2x2) pattern At full coverage the remaining B sites are filled with

hydrogen molecules B sites are chosen over C sites using molecular orbital

55arguments A sites are rejected as there are too many to satisfy this model

This model satisfies the second order kinetics observed for the ~2 state and

the first order kinetics observed for the ~l state In addition it explains

14 2 7 their saturation coverage of gt 3xl0 moleculescm One weakness of this

model pointed out by Tamm and Schmidt is that it is not obvious the model can

account for the observed LEED and work function results Also no molecular

vibrations have been observed

18

19yonehara and Schmidt propose a three bonding state model that is

more consistent with the low temperature LEED results In their model an

additional state labeled ~3 is always present at the surface in A or B

2sites with a density of 5xl014 atomscm bull This state orders on the surface at

low temperatures to give the C(2x2) pattern observed At room and higher

temperatures it goes into solution (or perhaps disorders) becoming invisible

to LEED In the type A site model adsorption from the background fills in the

remaining A sites sequentially with the ~2 and ~l states This model is similar

18to that proposed by Estrup and Anderson except that the ~3 state although

invisible to LEED at room and higher temperatures occupies 14 of the type A

sites This model eliminates the stoichiometric objection to Estrup and

Andersons model The model depends on the possibility of type A sites being

occupied by states with considerably different properties If the ~3 state

occupies type B sites ~2 state adsorption fills in the remaining type B sites

and then ~l hydrogen adsorbs into random or possibly type C sites This

second model does not explain satisfactorily work function or LEED spot pattern

experimental data

56Propst found using a point defect type calculation that only a

B-site model of adsorption would produce the observed vibrational energies of

5769 meV and 135 meV Park using LEED intensity arguments found that only

adsorption into sites with 4-fold symmetry on the (100) surface (type B or type

C sites) would be consistent with broadening and splitting of the half-order

beams while the integral beams remain sharp

8Madey and Yates offer a critique of several of the proposed models

19

No adsorption geometry adequately accounts for all the observed data

It is possible that surface hydrogen mobility adsorbate-adsorbate interactions

tungsten surface reconstruction and other surface phenomenon must be better

understood before this system can be adequately characterized

129 Theoretical Treatment

Several theoretical treatments of hydrogen-tungsten chemisorption

phenomenon have been reported in the literature as discussed below

7 18 19 52 The most elementary geometric models already have been

mentioned in Section 128 Grimley58 considers the hydrogen on W(lOO) system

59in an Anderson-Hamiltonian formalism Anders and Hansen obtain the relative

bonding energies of hydrogen chemisorbed at the three high symmetry adsorption

sites of W(lOO) using an extended Ruckel molecular orbital theory Their

results indicated a preference for hydrogen adsorption at type C sites

60Schrieffer offers a review on the theory of chemisorption in which he

concludes the Hartree-Fock approximation to the Anderson model for hydrogenshy

61metal adsorption is invalid Newns using the same approximation also shows

62the one-electron HF theory to be invalid Schrieffer and Gomer study the

exchange interaction between the adatom and the solid which results from the

nonorthogonality of the adatom and solid wave functions Smith Ying

h 63 64 h h d 1 h bl band Ko n lnvestlgate t e y rogen-meta c emlsorptlon pro em y

requiring complete self-consistency between the three-dimensional electrostatic

potential used and charge density obtained They calculate electron scattering

resonance levels and ground state vibrational frequency Jennings and McRae

using a multiple scattering LEED theory (but neglecting inelastic collision

65

20

damping) show that there can be half-order beams of high intensity in the H -W2

k W b 66 1 b dsystem even t hough h ydrogen 1S a wea scatterer e1n erg app 1es a on-

energy bond-order model of chemisorption to the hydrogen-W(100) system and

predicts binding energies for the molecular state and atomic state of hydrogen

on W(100) to be 262 kca1mo1e and 322 kca1mo1e respectively

1210 Literature Summary

Some conclusions can be drawn concerning the state of understanding

of the hydrogen-tungsten system and in particular the H W(100) system2

Despite considerable research experimental uncertainties still exist

in the H W(100) interaction It is still not clear if hydrogen adsorbs as a2

molecule The preponderance of evidence from electron scattering vibrational

levels field emission and H -D gas mixing flash desorption measurements2 2

indkates most hydrogen probably adsorbs atomically Multiple state behavior

is exhibited It is not known however if this observed state behavior is a

result of distinct hydrogen-tungsten interactions it is believed that to a

large extent it is driven by coverage dependent adsorbate-adsorbate interacshy

tions There is no model that can successfully incorporate the measured work

function flash desorption and ESD parameters The adsorption sites are not 15 15 2

known Total coverage at one monolayer is between 15xlO and 2x10 atomsem

which is more than the number of surface tungsten atomscm2 in the (100) face

LEED results at different temperatures indicate a possible temperature depenshy

dence for the adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO) Particularly confusing is

the anomalous LEED result obtained at low temperatures for the clean surface

Only small adsorption temperature dependencies are found in sticking probability

21

work function changes and flash desorption results

13 Review of Experimental Techniques

As indicated in Section 11 this research has been undertaken in an

attempt to characterize more fully the hydrogen-W(lOO) interaction A multi-

technique spectrometer has been used Chapter 2 gives a discussion of the

instrument This instrument is capable of making work function Auger electron

spectroscopy electron scattering ESD (including a pulsed time-of-flight mode)

and LEED measurements These techniques except AES have been well-reviewed

43 44 67 68 24 25 3 37 3839 40 as referenced prevlously (work function AES ES ESD

151617LEED ) Their use in this research can be summarized as follows work

function changes are a measure of adsorption coverage Auger electron

spectroscopy has been used to characterize the contamination of the experimental

surface ES and ESD are sensitive probes of surface and adsorption parameters

Time-of-flight has been used to determine the ion species desorbed LEED has

been used here to indicate the orientation of the surface and to attempt to

take initial data useful in calculation of overlayer geometries A more

detailed discussion of these techniques as used in this research is given in

Section 32

A discussion of the instrument constructed and used for this research

is given in Chapter 2 Sections 31 and 32 deal wIth organization and

experimental procedures Experimental data are presented starting with Section

33 A discussion of the data and conclusions from the research are given in

Chapter 4

22

CHAPTER 2

EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS

21 General Description

The apparatus used in this research is designed to probe an experishy

mental macroscopic crystal with several surface sensitive techniques It

combines an electron gun which focuses a monoenergetic beam of electrons onto

the crystal a new high resolution electrostatic spectrometer capable of energy

analysis of electrons and ions a low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system

and a crystal manipulator The crystal manipulator allows positioning of the

experimental sample and provides sample cooling heating and electrical

biasing Also included in the apparatus are a mass spectrometer and a gas

handling system System electronics allow the spectrometer to perform work

function electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated desorption

Auger electron spectroscopy and low energy electron diffraction measurements

The spectrometer can be operated over a wide range of primary electron energies

and currents and analyzer pass energies It can be biased in both electron and

ion pass modes and in a pulsed time-of-flight mode for species identification

An external spot photometer is used for LEED intensity measurements The

instrument is housed in an ultrahigh vacuum chamber A schematic diagram of

the overall system is given in Figure 21 The construction and performance

characteristics of each of the components are discussed in the following

sections of Chapter 2

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shielding

The requirement that the experimental surface has to remain clean

23

Analyzer Support

Magnetic Shielding

Ion Gauge

Analyzer

Crystal Target

Window

Openings in Magnetic Shield to Gas Jet and Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer

LEED Screen Viewing Mi rror

To Ion Pumps _

Analyzer Wiring Feedthroughs

Liquid Nitrogen Dewar for Cooling Strap Heat Sink

Insulator

Crystal Manipulator

Cooling Strop

Titanium Sublimotion Pump

Figure 21 Schematic diagram of mu1titechnique apparatus

24

while making measurements necessitates housing the apparatus in an ultrahigh

vacuum chamber A commercial Varian vacuum chamber and pumping station have

been used Ultrahigh vacuum was achieved in several steps after the chamber

-2 was rough pumped down to 10 Torr using cryosorb pumps main system pumping

was accomplished using a 400 litersec ion pump and a titanium sublimator

oAfter a bakeout of 24 hours at temperatures up to 270 C to outgas the system

-10walls the system pressure read about lxlO Torr as measured with a Bayard-

Alpert ion gauge The pressure decreased somewhat during the first weeks of

spectrometer operation after bakeout The final system background pressure

-11 was less than 8xlO Torr or below the x-ray limit of the gauge When

-10operating in the Auger mode the background rose to lxlO Torr presumably

because of the large currents involved A mass spectrometer scan indicated

that the main components of the background were H2 CO CO2 and H 0 The ion2

gauge which can affect the composition of the background was turned off while

taking data except if noted otherwise

In an electrostatic deflection analyzer such as used here magnetic

fields can introduce spurious results In order to reduce the earths magnetic

field in the region of electron or ion trajectories three concentric cylinders

of Eagle AAA ultrahigh nickel steel alloy magnetic shielding are placed around

the spectrometer The shielding is mounted on a stainless steel and ceramic

support which rests in a groove in the inside wall of the vacuum chamber This

shielding is electrically isolated so it can be floated at any desired voltage

The ambient magnetic field in the target region is less than 5 milliGauss

The region inside the shielding and below the spectrometer (the

region shown in Figure 214) is referred to in this work as the experimental

25

chamber There are apertures cut in the magnetic shielding which allow the

crystal to be put in (and out of) the experimental chamber Apertures also

allow line-of-sight access to this region of the gas dosing jet mass spectromshy

eter and allow the crystal to be viewed

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics

The electron gun provides the incident focused electron beam used

in all the surface probing techniques Figures 22 and 23 show a schematic

drawing of the electron gun and a photograph of the gun assembled and disshy

dOf d f dOd b P 0 69assembled h a mo 1 1e verS10n 0 a gun eS1gne y er1aT e gun 1S The

comporients of the gun are a thermal cathode or source of electrons three

electrodes and four deflection plates The cathode is a Philips Metalonics

Type M barium calcium aluminate impregnated tungsten emitter The cathode was

0generally operated at 875 C with the heating accomplished indirectly with a

tungsten filament behind the heater The electrons emitted are focused into

a beam by two lenses the crossover formed by the lens action of the control

grid and first anode is focused onto the target by a second lens formed by the

first anode and second anode The incident primary beam thus formed can be

deflected along two axes in the target face by means of deflection plates

located at the entrance to the drift tube

The guns electronic circuitry is shown in Figure 24 Three 6 V

lead storage batteries in series power the cathode heater through an integrated

circuit voltage regulator The gun electrodes are biased using a resistor

chain voltage divider circuit This arrangement scales the guns lenses thus

keeping the beam focused as the primary beam energy is changed by varying the

26

Heat Shield

Cathode Heater

Cathode

Control Grid

First Anode

Second Anode

Coaxial Cathode Heater Feed through

~~f-------+-+-~ Paraxial Ray Aperture

---J7j7j--shy -~f-~ Accelerating ~~pt=-=a~~ or Decelerating

Lens Region

Deflection Plates

SP-1Oeuro7

Figure 22 Schematic diagram of electron gun

I)

-J

Figure 23 Photograph of electron gun assembled and disassembled

~ ~1 ~

h

I __-t--------+--

Defl + ---t---------

i---VV----110K I10K 93K

Supply

BHK 2000

I

Dec Mode

Ace 15K Mode

10K I 15K

l8V Leod

Gun X Deflection Plates (Y Defl Plates Rotate 90 not shown)

Storage Batteries

tv 00

Acc Mode Connections

To First Anode

To Second Anode X Defl shy

X

To Gun Deflection

Plates 10K 10K 57K 15K55K

1-_________----1+I Electron Gun

sp- 1125

Figure 24 Diagram of the electron guns biasing circuitry

29

gun power supply a Kepco BHK-2000 supply The gun can be operated in two

modes In the accelerating mode (ace mode) the second anode is biased more

positive than the first anode With this biasing the gun has been operated

from 30 V to 1825 V primary energy In the decelerating mode (dec mode) the

first anode is biased more positive than the second anode This allows for

higher field gradients at the cathode surface resulting in higher currents at

lower energies In the dec mode the gun can be operated from 10 V to 200 V

A spatial profile of the primary beam was taken using a two grid

retarding field analyzer mounted on the target manipulator at the position of

the target Electrode bias settings that optimized the beam line shape were

determined over the guns energy range These results are summarized in

Figure 25 The spatial full width at half maximum of the spot intensity is

less than 025 mm at 1825 V less than 075 mm at 100 V (dec mode) and about

25 mm at 10 V The energy width of the primary beam can be estimated by

retarding the primary beam between the drift tube and target At E = 100 eVpr1

the current to the target goes from 90 maximum to 10 maximum over a retarding

voltage of ~V $ 0360 meV This is an upper estimate on the energy spread in

the primary beam A lower limit would be the thermal spread of the cathode

~ 2kT or about 200 meV

24 Energy Spectrometer

A schematic diagram of the spectrometer used in this research to

energy analyze electrons and ions is given in Figure 26 The spectrometers

operation can be summarized as follows Electrons and ions originating at

the target with some energy distribution are accelerated or decelerated to the

Dec Mode --1r+shy

Probe Aperture Diameter

+10

E~

~ ~ 10Decelerating Lens Dec Mode aJLL- c E 0- E ~ ~ -051=-- Accelerating Lens Acc Mode Q)O - a WU)

o 200 600 1000 1400

E ~Ugt o Q)()cme=)

Q)

cO ~ e+- (+-Clo OQ)Q)loc

-lolo Wllaquo

u-

Electron Beam Energy Epri (eV) w o

Epri= 10eV Electron Beam Spatial Profiles Epri =1745 eV Epri =100eVf Epd=1000 eV Ace ModeAce Mode Aee Mode

-05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 Probe Aperture Position (mm)

SP-1084

Figure 25 Spatial characteristics of primary electron beam Top panel - Full width at half maximum of beam as a function of primary energy Bottom panel - Line shape of beam at several primary energies

-10 0

31

Cylindrical Electrostatic Analyzer

Spherical Elect rostat ic Analyzer

~____- __Gylindrical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

Coaxial Repulsion Cylinder

--__-___Spherical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

~-- Electron Gun

Deflection Plates

-Gun Wiring

Concentric ~--- Deflection

Spheres

~-- LEED Screen

Scattered Electrons SP-l066

and Desorbed Ions

Figure 26 Schematic diagram of energy spectrometer

32

pass energy of the spectrometer by three spherical sector grids prior to

entering the spherical analyzer section of the instrument (An annular slot

cut in the LEED screen which is located between the grids and the spherical

analyzer allows particles to pass into the analyzer) Energy selection is

accomplished by a combination of two electrostatic deflection analyzers The

first is a high resolution spherical deflection analyzer This is backed by

a cylindrical mirror-type electrostatic analyzer referred to in this work as

the cylindrical or tandem analyzer Particles that pass through the spectromshy

eter impinge on the first dynode of a high gain electron multiplier The

output signal of this multiplier is detected using the electronics discussed

in Section 25

The spectrometer is constructed mainly of 304 stainless steel which

has been hydrogen and vacuum fired to reduce residual magnetism to less than

5 milliGauss Most interior surfaces have been rhodium plated to eliminate

surface charging problems Final design dimensions used in the spectrometer

are listed in Table 21 Refer to Figure 27 for a diagram of the variables

used in this table

The emission angle at the ta~get of the central trajectory that

passes 1nto t he spectrometer 1S 350 bull The entrance aperture (slot) accepts

particles that originate within plusmn0045 radians of this central ray making a

total solid angle accepted of 032 steradians

The spherical electrostatic deflection analyzer section is a

70spherical velocity selector of the type first investigated by Purcell The

analyzer is designed to focus an object spot of electrons or ions originating

at the front surface plane of the target onto the first energy resolution

33

TABLE 21 FINAL DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR SPECTROMETER

SPHERICAL ANALYZER

l Inner sphere radius 342 cmr l

2 Outer sphere radius r 419 cm2

3 Radius of central ray a = 381 cm

04 Emission angle of central ray e = 35

05 Angular range of accepted rays 3244

0 - 3756

6 Angle subtended between entrance and exit planes of spherical analyzer section ~ = 51660

7 Acceptance solid angle of spectrometer 032 steradians

8 Diameter of first ERA D 025 cm

9 Distance of target from center of spherical analyzer P 665 cm

10 Distance of first ERA from center of spherical analyzer Q 1328 cm

CYLINDRICAL ANALYZER

11 Distance from first ERA to entrance diaphram S = 330 cm

12 Distance between entrance and exit diaphrams T 399 cm

13 Distance from exit diaphram to second ERA U = 330 cm

14 Inner cylinder radius Rl = 0099 cm

15 Distance from second ERA to electron multiplier V ~ 254 cm

16 Radius of entrance aperture R2 099 cm

17 Radius of repulsion electrode R3 = 330 cm

18 Radius of exit aperture R4 093 cm

19 Width of exit aperture G 037 cm

20 Diameter of second ERA E 044 cm

21 Width of entrance aperture F = 053 cm

34

Plane of First ERA

~

D

Spherical Analyzer

First ERA

I

I1 I~~ f F

S

]R4 II f ~

R3

11 [1

I II

U v~ cT t t

Plane of Plane of First ERA Second ERA

Cylindrical Analyzer

Figure 27 Schematic diagram of particle trajectories in spherical analyzer section Spatial configuration of tandem cylindrical analyzer section also shown

35

aperture or image plane The spatial configuration of the analyzer is such

as to give maximum reduced dispersibn according to the relations derived by

Purcell The magnification of the source at maximum reduced dispersion is 2

Diaphrams at the entrance and exit apertures of the spherical analyzer are

designed to minimize problems caused by the fringing fields as discussed by

71Herzog

Initial tests using only the spherical analyzer indicated electrons

that scattered from the interior surfaces could be passed through the first

energy resolving aperture over a range of analyzer pass energies To eliminate

this erroneOus signal a second low resolution cylindrical mirror-type

72electrostatic analyzer was designed and constructed by P Luscher

Electrons or ions that pass through the first energy resolving

aperture at the correct energy are deflected by the repulsion electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer and pass through the second energy resolving aperture

This signal impinges on the first dynode of the electron multiplier Trajectory

tracing calculations indicated that the cylindrical analyzer would eliminate

the scattered signal if this second analyzer had a full width energy resolution

~EE = 028 where E is the energy of the particle executing the pass pass

correct central trajectory through the spectrometer This is not a stringent

design requirement

The energy resolution of the spectrometer is defined as the ratio

~EEp where ~E is the width of the line shape passed as the spectrometer is

scanned in pass energy for a monochromatic source of particles with energy Ep

For the spectrometer configuration here the energy resolution is determined

by the resolution achieved in the high resolution spherical analyzer section

36

at least down to low pass energies Line shape broadening effects in the

spherical analyzer originate from three sources 1) the finite diameter D

of the first energy resolving aperture 2) the finite radius R of the source

disk and 3) the use of a finite range of emission angles of particles from

the crystal surface which can enter and be passed by the spectrometer This

third source of line broadening results from the spherical analyzer having

imperfect second order focusing at the first energy resolving aperture The

effect on the line shape of the finite range of emission angles goes as the

square of the acceptance half width which in this analyzer is small In

the calculation of energy resolution below the third source of line broadening

will not be considered

A numerical value for the energy resolution for the spectrometer

used in this research can be calctilated To do so it is necessary to derive

an expression for 6EEp in terms of the diameter D and radius R given above

In the calculation below these two sources of line broadening will be

considered independent and the effective line shape and energy resolution

from each will be calculated separately Following an analysis by Purcell an

energy resolution can be expressed in terms of the velocity resolution S bull ~

S is defined by ~

where v is the velocity of a particle which the analyzer passes along the pass

central trajectory when and v is the velocity of a particle withset at Epass ~

slightly different energy E bullbull (For convenience E and v will be ~ pass pass

shortened to Ep and vp in the following discussion Lower case subscripts are

37

used to distinguish this derivation from the defined energy resolution above)

A resolution can be calculated as follows

(22)

Using Equation 21 this becomes

(23)

(24)

If the line shape width ~E is written as

fiE = E - E = (E - E ) + (E - Emn) (25)max max p pm~n ~

then the energy resolution can be expressed as

(26)

D and R can be related to Q and Q bull as shown belowf-I max f-Im~n

Line shape broadening due to the finite diameter D of the first

energy resolving aperture (1st ERA) can be calculated from the velocity

70dispersion given by Purcell

(27)

9 00 ~ (28)

Refer to Figure 27 for a definition of the variables in these equations

38

Assume a current j(a) emanating from the center of the target

along xl with energy distribution

j (e) = 1 (29)

All of this current crosses the plane of the 1st ERA at a position d given by

d = Y2cOS a = 900 acos a (210)

A 1st ERA of diameter D will pass all the current for which Y2 Y2 leading

to the relation for the limiting values of 13

(211)

D bull cos a a lt D cos a (212)2 bull 900 - 2 bull 900

The energy resolution due to a finite 1st ERA is then calculated from Equation

26 to be

~E (~st ERA) = 2 [053D + 053DJ = 02l2D (213) P

For D = 025 cm (010 in) this evaluates to

8E (1st ERA) = 0021 (214)E P

The line shape of the current distribution resulting from the finite 1st ERA

is a unit function for the allowable e values (Equation 214) since all the

current j(S) is passed by the 1st ERA and j(S) is a unit function in S

The above line shape and resolution have been obtained effectively

by varying the energy of the signal current (via Equation 29) rather than

39

using a monochromatic current source and varying the pass energy as initially

used in defining the spectrometer resolution That the results given in

Equation 214 are the same as would be obtained from a more complicated

calculation using a monochromatic current source can be seen by considering a

monochromatic source v == (1 + l)vp and noting that it will be deflected tol

the edge of the 1st ERA by a pass energy Ep

Line shape broadening and an energy resolution due to a finite radius

to the source disk can be determined in a manner analogous to that used above

Consider a point source of particles at the 1st ERA that travel back through

the analyzer Such reverse trajectories would cross the target plane at a

position

(215)

where for these reverse trajectories using Equation 27

Yl = 491 a (216)

p being a variable representing the radius at which these trajectories cross

the plane of the target p is analogous to d in the earlier calculation

Using reciprocity particles emanating from a position on the target at radius

p with a velocity corresponding to S will cross the plane of the 1st ERA at

the axis For a source of radius R the line width is found by using the

arguments leading up to Equation 211 to be

R bull cos e S lt R cos e (217)491 ~ 491

For a spot size 2R == 1 rom (0039 in) the energy resolution due to a finite

source disk is

40

A (source) = 2[017R + 017R] (218)E p

~ (source) 013 for 2R = 1 mm (219)E p

At low primary energies for which the beam spot size is greater than 1 mm

the above broadening and resolution due to spot size are correspondingly larger

The line shape associated with a finite source disk is linearly

proportional to~ The functional dependence of source current on ~ which

essentially determines the line shape due to the finite source is not given

by Equation 29 Rather it can be obtained by assuming uniform emission over

the area of the source knowing that ~ and the radial position at the source

p are linearly related by Equation 216 and using the area relation

(220)

(221)

If the current from the source with velocity (1 + ~)v that passes the 1st ERA p

is designated JI(~) then

(222)

49lmiddotApJ I (~l) 0 2TT cos e ~ 1 (223)

From Equation 223 the line shape of the current due to finite source is seen

to be linearly related to ~

41

The overall resolution of the instrument can be approximated by the

sum of the two resolutions calculated above which is approximately 2

Experimentally the resolution of the spectrometer is measured as the full

width at half maximum (FWHM) of the elastic peak The bottom panel of Figure

28 shows the FWHM of the elastic peak as a function of the spectrometer pass

energy At 90 eV the experimental energy resolution is

bE FWEM 2 (224)Ep = ~ = 90 = 022

which is close to the theoretical calculations

The effective resolution of the spectrometer can be greatly increased

by retarding the beam using the three grids located between the target and

spherical analyzer This can be seen by repeating the calculation of Equation

224 using data from Figure 28 at a lower energy The measured effective

energy resolution of the spectrometer varies between 22 percent and 06

percent as the elastic peak is retarded by 10 percent to 90 percent of its

initial value Over this same range the intensity decreases almost 98 percent

Hence increased resolution is obtained at the expense of signal intensity

This is shown in the top panel of Figure 28 The solid curve in the top panel

is the transmission function of the spectrometer for a primary beam of 100 eV

The transmission function shows the fractional decrease in signal passed by

the spectrometer as a function of pass energy of the spectrometer The data

points were taken by retarding the 100 eV elastic peak between the grids until

it was passed by the spectrometer The transmission function is the ratio of

the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer at E to the peakpass

42

Figure 28 Top panel - Transmission function of spectrometer This function was obtained by retarding the 100 eV elastically scattered electron signal between the spectrometer grids and then measuring the ratio of the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer to the peak signal passed at Epass = E = 100 eV Bottom panel - Full width at half maX1mum of ~K~ elastically scattered electron signal passed by the spectrometer when the 100 eV signalis retarded using the grids to an energy E

pass

43

09

08

07

c006 U ()

E()05 c e 1-04

03

02

01

Epri =100eV

~ -Transmission of Spectrometer

Peak Intensity at Eposs Peak Intensity at Epass 100 eV

--Transmission for flEE Constant

() +shy

o gt-

20

10

Full Width at Half Maximum of Elastic Peak

100 eVEpri =

o~oo 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Spectrometer Pass Energy J Epass (eV) SP-1l22

0

44

signal passed at E = E i = 100 eV The dotted line in Figure 28 pass pr

indicates the transmission function for ~ = constant for a monochromatic

point source Deviations from the straight line are due 1) to the nonidea1

elastic peak (ie finite breadth) and spectrometer geometry 2) to field

penetration at the grids as a function of the retarding potential (which was

varied to obtain the graph) and 3) to the varying response of the electron

multiplier as a function of the voltage of the electrons incident on the

multiplier For the data presented here electrons were incident on the

multiplier with an energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer The

bottom panel of Figure 28 shows the experimental full width at half maximum

of the elastic peak as a function of pass energy (in this case pass energy =

(100 eV - retarding voltage))

The energy spectrometer has been operated successfully in both the

electron and ion pass modes over a pass energy range from 2 eV to 400 eV

The spectrometer is normally operated at a fixed pass energy and ideally

fixed energy resolution Energy sweeps are made by retardation (acceleration)

of electrons or ions between the first (screen grid) and third (tEED grid)

grids prior to entering the spherical analyzer section of the spectrometer

The third grid which was added primarily to eliminate charging problems

associated with the LEED screen (see Section 26) also improved the effective

resolution this improvement is due to decreased field penetration of the

applied retarding (accelerating) potential since the retarding (accelerating)

can be done over a 50 percent longer distance In addition the third grid is

made of smaller mesh which also reduces field penetration

45

The spectrometer is supported vertically from the electrical feedshy

through turret as shown in Figure 29 This assembly attaches at the top of

the main vacuum chamber (see Figure 21) and can be removed completely wired

independent of other parts of the instrument

The electron multiplier is an EMI model 96434B detector with 17

BeCu venetial blind dynode stages

25 Spectrometer Electronics

Figure 210 shows a schematic diagram of the electronic circuitry

used for taking electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated

desorption and Auger electron spectroscopy measurements Some details for

example capacitors used to eliminate noise and some switches used to change

from one mode to another are not shown Only the most common biasing

arrangement used in this work will be discussed

In the electron pass mode (including Auger measurements) the LEED

grid LEED screen Herzog diaphrams driftspace and center electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer are grounded Energy sweeps of the spectrometer are made

by varying the retardation or acceleration voltage applied between the three

73grids A variable frequency variable height floating sawtooth generator

plus a variable dc offset bias are summed at the inverting input of a Kepco

OPS-2000 operational power supply the output of which biases the three grids

through a resistor chain When the output signal from the multiplier is being

detected using a phase sensitive detector a 3 kHz sinusoidal signal is also

fed into the summing junction VT the target bias with respect to the screen

grid is zero in the electron pass mode The spherical analyzer deflecting

46

Figure 29 Photograph showing support of spectrometer from electrical feedthrough turret

W(100) Crystal

lOOK

Vr=O-6V

Dec Mode

Ace Mode (E Il

VOFFS

VOFFS=O-6V

Ratemeter ~

INlOO

=

Drift Space

epUISion Electrode

i -----In

(Ion Mode Only)

Jshy-l

Hamner N-780A Ortec 410 Linear Amp

Pulse Count Mode

Synchronous Detection Mode

PAR PAR Type A HR-8 Preamp

47K To Recorder Y

SP-1126

Figure 210 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer electronics for operation in the electron pass and ion pass modes

48

electrodes and the repulsion electrode of the cylindrical analyzer are scaled

using a resistor chain powered by a second OPS-2000 operational amplifier power

supply The voltage scaling for these electrodes was determined from particle

trajectory calculations The voltage applied to the repulsion electrode using

this resistor chain can be varied using a potentiometer this adjustment can

in effect vary the resolution of the cylindrical analyzer The OPS-2000

supply also biases the outer electrodes of the analyzer deflection plates by

means of a separate resistor chain The inner electrodes of these deflection

plates are fixed at the potential of the analyzers Herzog diaphrams The

ripple voltage on the output of both operational power supplies is less than

20 meV at 100 eV

Electrons impinge on the first dynode of the multiplier with an

energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer plus a voltage equal to

(R (36MO + R raquoV where R is shown in Figure 210 and V is the voltagem m M m M

across the multiplier In the synchronous detection mode V was variedM

between 1100 V and 1700 V In the pulse counting mode the voltage was normally

set at 2800 V The output of the multiplier after being passed by an

isolation capacitor is either pulse counted with a ratemeter or is detected

using a PAR HR-8 phase sensitive detector The reference signal for the HR-8

is either 3 kHz when taking dN(E)dE distributions (see Section 324 and

2Appendix B) or Auger data or 6 kHz when taking d N(E)dE distributions

When the spectrometer is operated in the ion pass mode the polarity

of the biasing on the analyzer deflecting electrodes is switched In addition

the positive pole of the electron mUltiplier supply is grounded This biasing

arrangement causes the ions to impinge on the multiplier at an energy

49

E pass + VM

which was usually 3040 kV In the ion pass mode the spectromshy

eter is generally operated at E = 40 eV This requires an acceleration of pass

the ions between the screen and LEED grids since the initial ion energies are

between 0 eV and 10 eV In addition to accelerating between the grids the

ions were normally accelerated between the target and screen grid using VT

in order to facilitate interpretation of the data as discussed in Section

325

The electronic circuitry for operating the analyzer in the time-ofshy

flight mode is identical to that just described for the ~on pass mode except

a pulsed voltage is applied to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a

schematic of this arrangement Unlike continuous operation in this mode ions

can enter the analyzer only during the on pulse In the lower part of

Figure 211 the energy of an ion is shown as a function of its position in the

spectrometer with the pulse on and off

In the work function mode the target is fixed at ground potential

through a picoammeter Retardation of the incident current is accomplished by

driving the drift tube positive in voltage

26 LEED Display System

The low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system consists of a

phosphor-coated screen located at the entrance to the spherical analyzer and

othree grids The screen a 1096 stainless steel sector (of which approxishy

omatelya 98 sector is visible) was coated with a P-l phosphor The first

two grids are constructed of 50 mesh rhodium-coated stainless steel The

LEED screen and these two grids are operated as a standard two grid LEED

50

II

Vr V

Ion Trajectory

ACC

Linear Amp Preamp

To Oscilloscope Trace

VRG~+ To O~oopeP I If Trace and Time u se t Base Trigger Genera or -

(l)~ os

CIgt () o cC u (l) E t gt - C N a (l) (l) (u~CIgt (l) 0 ~ shy - c 0 c 0 0 ti (l) ac o c

()

f- (j) a (j)lt f-lt u ~----~~------~~ ~I

0 1--A I ----5----------------

ElON I

VACC

I (l) ()

5 Q

gt CIgt t c

~---J8w c o H

SP-I027

EPAS S + V L-____________________---- M

Figure 211 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer for operation in the time-of-f1ight mode

51

system with the retarding grid biased to pass only electrons elastically

scattered from the target and with the LEED screen accelerating voltage

normally set at 5000 V Slots cut through the screen allow electrons and

ions to pass into the spectrometer Initial operation of the instrument

indicated that charging of the LEED screen caused a significant perturbation

on electron trajectories below 100 eV The third grid a 100 mesh stainless

s tee 1 spherical sector is loca ted 0050 em in front of the LEED screen to

alleviate this problem

An aluminum-coated glass plate mirror located below the spectrometer

reflects the LEED screen through a 6Lch indo in the chamber wall (see

Figure 21) LEED spot intensities are measured through this window using a

Gamma Scientific Model 2000 telephotometer

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly

The crystal manipulator assembly is shown schematically in Figure

212 and a photograph is given in Figure 213 The assembly is designed to

provide thermal and electrical control of the target while allowing the

target face to be rotatable between the gas dosing port the LEED screenshy

energy spectrometer position and the quadrupole mass spectrometer This

rotation is indicated in Figure 214 The manipulator assembly is composed

of a commercial Physical Electronics specimen manipulator a long shaft which

supports the rotary electrical connections a liquid nitrogen dewaI and

aluminum foil strap to provide target cooling and a target mounting assembly

The long shaft of the manipulator assembly is constructed of

different materials as follows A1 0 for electrical isolation (Figure 2122 3

52

Figure 212 Schematic diagram of the target manipulation and thermal control system showing (1) kovar-glass-kovar dewar insulation (2) Miniconflat flanges (3) Physical Electronics Industries specimen manipulator Model 10-501M mounted on 8 inch od Conflat flange (4) six 5 kV - 150 A electrical feedthroughs (5) clamp assembly (6) A1 03 rod (7) molybdenum spring2(8) stainless steel electr1cal connectors (9) electrical connecshytion (1 shown) (10) A1203 spacers (11) Pyrex plates (12) molybshydenum (13) 001 wall stainless tube (14) Pyrex tubes (15) tantalum rods (16) copper rod (17) vacuum chamber wall (18) liquid riitrogen dewar (19) 001 wall stainless tube (20) copper radiation shield (21) strap-to-dewar clamp (22) crystal support (23) 12 pole heater (24) strap-to-copper rod clamp (25) aluminum foil strap (26) pancake heater supp~rt~ (27) thermocouple (28) crystal (29) pancake heater (30) tanta~ lum section (31) molybdenum section (32) molybdenum-to-copper rod clamp assembly

53

Jl ~

Figure 213 Photograph of crystal manipulator The retarding field analyzer used to characterize the primary electron beam is shown mounted on the manipulator in place of the tungsten crystal mounting assembly

55

Magnetic Shielding

Tungsten Crystal

Energy Spectrometer and LEED Gas Dosing Optics Aperture

To Gas Bottle

Line -of-Sight Quadrupole Mass Crystal Holder Spectrometer and Manipulator

SP-1072

Figure 214 Schematic of the experimental chamber of the apparatus (see Section 22 for a discussion of the experimental chamber) Rotation of the crystal is indicated by the dotted line

56

no 6) molybdenum rod (no 12) 304 stainless steel tubing for thermal

isolation (no 13) and copper rod (no 16) Six electrical leads separated

by glass discs (no 11) wind around the shaft ~his configuration allows for

rotary motion of the shaft while still providing electrical control at the

targetJ The electrical leads then enter glass tubing parallel to the shaft

and end up at the target mounting assembly For clarity only one of these

leads is shown in Figure 212

An aluminum foil strap (no 25) made of 150 pieces of 254 cm x ~254

em x 00025 cm foil connects the liquid nitorgen reservoir to the copper rod

end of the manipulator shaft This provides conduction cooling to the target

A copper radiation shield (no 20) is constructed around the strap This

cooling system is sufficient to cool the target from flash temperatures to

approximately -1500

C in 5 minutes

The tungsten single crystal target is supported 095 cm above a

tantalum and molybdenum right angle mount (nos 30 31) on one 0038 cm

diameter tungsten wire The wire was spot-welded to the back face of the

tungsten disc prior to its final electropolishing The target is heated by

electron bombardment of its back face from a tungsten pancake heater (no 29)

The target can also be heated by conduction through its support wire using a

25 watt 12 pole 25L6 RCA heater which is mounted inside the tantalum part

of the right angle mount as shown dotted in Figure 212 (no 23) Using this

heater the target temperature can be varied between -20oC and -150

0 C Tungsten

and tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple leads 0076 cm in diameter are spot-

welded to the side of the target The thermocouple wires are each supported

by being fed along the axis of a tungsten wire helix (not shown in Figure

57

212) The helices are made of 025 cm diameter wire and are spot-welded to

supports near the center of the molybdenum part of the right angle mount

Calibration of the thermocouple was made out of the vacuum chamber using a

copper-constantan reference thermocouple The calibration procedure is

described in Appendix A and the calibration is given in Figure A1

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures

The experimental sample is a single crystal tungsten disc cut from

a (100) oriented tungsten rod using a diamond impregnated stainless wire in a

string saw The tungsten rod supplied by Metals Research Ltd was taken

from the purest 75 cm of a triply zone refined 25 cm length

Both the front and back surfaces of the disc were polished using in

succession 15 micron 3 micron and 1 micron alumina After being mechanishy

cally polished the crystal was e1ectropo1ished using a 1 NaOH solution The

final dimensions of the target disc are 0033 cm (013 in) thick and approxishy

mate1y 080 cm in diameter

After the final e1ectropo1ish the orientation of both the front and

back surfaces was checked using an x-ray diffractometer and was determined to

be within 0100 of the (100) face A back reflection Laue picture of the final

surface showed sharp well-defined beams indicating a high degree of crystalshy

line order

The target was o 74cleaned initially by heating to at least 2200 K in

a -61x10 Torr oxygen atmosphere for 9 hr to remove carbon The choice of

temperature and time were somewhat arbitrary as there is considerable debate

in the literature as to the proper method for cleaning tungsten for surface

58

research 74 A standard method7 1823 has been to heat the target to some

temperature above 11000 K (commonly above 20000 K) in an oxygen environment for

times varying up to 200 hr or more This process is generally followed by a

high temperature degassing in ultrahigh vacuum However there is evidence

othat if the temperature is held above 2000 K bulk carbon will not diffuse to

75 74the surface The possibility of thermal etching must also be considered

For the tungsten used in this research the amount of contamination

on the surface was determined using Auger spectroscopy Figure 215 is an

Auger spectrum taken from a dirty surface showing the Auger peaks resolved in

our system Carbon oxygen and tungsten peaks are seen clearly Also shown

76in Figure 215 are theoretical Auger transition energies for C 0 and W

with the relative theoretical strengths of the transitions indicated by the

normalized height of the lines In Figure 216 are shown Auger spectra taken

after different crystal treatments or under different experimental conditions

Curve a shows the spectrum taken after saturating the surface with CO Note

the carbon and oxygen peaks There is no measurable carbon peak after a

flash as seen in curve b Structure does remain between 475 eV and 525 eV

It is doubtful that this structure is a result of oxygen contamination since

there are normally three oxygen Auger peaks with the 490 eV oxygen peak

stronger than the 475 eV oxygen peak in this spectrum no 490 eV peak is

observed In order to reduce any oxygen contamination the target was heat

0 treated to 2200 K in a hydrogen atmosphere of 5x10- 7 Torr for 4 minutes 74

The structure above 475 eV is seen to remain unchanged as seen in curve c

This is a further indication that this structure is not oxygen Curve d shows

that sitting in a 400 eV 4 ~ primary beam close to typical operating

59

Carbon Oxygen

o 100

dN(E) dE

200 300 400 500 600 Electron Energy (eV) SP-U44

Figure 215 Auger electron spectrums obtained at different instrument sensitivities from dirty tungsten crystal Also shown in upper part of figure are theoretical Auger transitions for tungsten carbon and oxygen calculated by Coghlan and C1ausing76 Heights of the lines represent relative theoshyretical strengths of the transitions

60

(a) CO Monolayer

~5Ab) Heate~toCleon x25

d ~5dN(E) dE (e) Heat Treated

x25 in H2

_~5 ~ (d) 400V4fLA

x25 Primary Beam for

25~

d x5

(e) 1700V 211-A Primary Beam for 10 Min

200 300 400 500 Electron Energy (eV) SP-1l45

Figure 216 Comparison of Auger electron spectrums taken over the energy range 200 eV to 550 eV under different experimental condition

61

conditions for 25 minutes causes only a slight change in the slope of the

curve at the energy at which the carbon peak occurs (Note that curve d was

taken with a primary beam of 1700 eV after the crystal had been sitting in

the lower energy beam for 25 minutes) The absence of the carbon peak in curve

d means that the crystal surface is not contaminated from the gun while taking

measurements After bombarding the target for 10 minutes with a primary beam

of 1700 eV and 21 ~ typical Auger spectroscopy beam conditions a carbon

peak is observed as shown in curve e Using the peak to peak height of the

272 ~V carbon peak obtained near CO saturation as an indication of carbon

monolayer coverage the electron gun in the Auger mode is seen to deposit

approximately 013 monolayer of carbon in 10 minutes

From the above results it is concluded that the tungsten surface

could be flashed clean and that no carbon or oxygen contamination is deposited

during most experimental measurements Some carbon is deposited when operating

in the Auger mode Two unexpected small peaks are observed between 475 eV

and 525 eV Identification of the source of this weak structure could not be

made with certainty although two possible causes are worth noting The

unexpected structure could be tungsten Auger transitions Theoretically

several relatively strong tungsten peaks have been predicted at 477 eV and

486 eV and also between 510 eV and 520 eV However no observations of

tungsten transitions in this energy range have been reported in the experimenshy

tal literature A second possible source of this structure mighL be chromium

There is considerable chromium in the spectrometers stainless steel parts and

chromium Auger peaks occur at 489 eV and 529 eV However if it is assumed

that Auger spectroscopy is sensitive to one percent of a monolayer it would

62

13 2require surface coverages of 10 chromium atomscm or more to yield these

peaks It is extremely unlikely that either 1) a concentration of chromium

this large could diffuse to the tungsten surface from the stainless parts or

2) enough chromium could be sputtered (at the ambient pressure) into the backshy

ground from the stainless parts and subsequently adsorb onto the surface A

spark vaporization mass spectroscopy analysis of a tungsten sample cut from

the same boule as the tungsten used in this research revealed no chromium

thus eliminating the possibility of a bulk chromium concentration in the

crystal Hence although the weak structure corresponds to some degree to

chromium Auger lines it is believed that the crystal is not contaminated with

this element In an Auger spectrum taken between 500 eV and 900 eV (not shown)

some additional very weak structure was seen but none of it could be

attributed to any specific element

o 77In this research the crystal was always flashed to gt 2200 K for 30

seconds prior to experimentation Any reference to a clean tungsten surface

means that this procedure has been followed

The crystal surface exhibited what appeared to be furrows which

increased in density during the course of the research Because the coolest

part of the crystal during a flash that region next to the tungsten wire

support remained visibly polished and flat it is believed that the uneven

appearance was temperature related

29 Gas Handling System

The gas handling system used to obtain adsorption overlayers is

shown in Figure 217 Research grade hydrogen (impurity level less than 2

To Quadrupole Moss Spectrometer

Alternate Gas Source Control Valve

Thermocouple Gouge

Plenum

~-----Viewing Port

Jet Position Adjustment

Ion Gouge

Cryosorb Pump

0 t)

S-1l28

Figure 217 Schematic drawing of gas handling system

64

ppm) is admitted from a glass flash into a pyrex manifold and stainless steel

reservoir Reservoir pressure was kept near 50 microns as read using a

thermocouple gauge From the reservoir hydrogen is admitted into the vacuum

system through a 126 cm diameter tube by opening valve A Figure 217 or is

admitted as a gas jet by opening valve B The jet is formed as hydrogen

effuses through a small orifice at the end of a 063 cm dia tube78J~9 Leaking

hydrogen through the 126 em diameter tube increases the background and is used

when hydrogen is to be adsorbed from the background The jet can be used

with the target rotated in front of the gas dosing port for rapid over layer

adsorption with a low hydrogen background pressure The gas jet is designed

so that only that fraction of the effusing gas which will strike the target is

allowed to pass through an aperture in a skimmer The rest of the gas jet is

reflected back from the skimmer and out of the experimental chamber When the

target is rotated up to face the spectrometer the gas jet if left on passes

out of the experimental chamber through holes in the opposite side of the

magnetic shielding

The gas manifold and reservoir can be pumped down to less than 1

micron using a liquid nitrogen cryosorb pump

210 Mass Spectrometer

A quadrupole mass spectrometer Varian Residual Gas Analyzer Model

974-0003 is mounted on a vacuum chamber port opposite the gas jet port In

this research it was used for vacuum chamber leak testing and determination of

the components of the background pressure

65

CHAPrER 3

EXPERIMENTAL PFGCEDURE AND RESULTS

31 Introduction

The experimental data taken on the hydrogen-W(lOO) system are

presented in this chapter The apparatus used in obtaining the data has been

discussed previously in Chapter 2 A further explanation of experimental

procedures used in measuring parameters follows in Section 32 The experishy

mental results are presented in the remaining sections of this chapter A

general discussion of the data is given in Chapter 4 and a summary of the

research is given in Chapter 5

32 Experimental Procedure

321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements

Contact potential measurements in this case the difference between

the work functions of the target and of the cathode in the electron gun are

43 44measured using a retarding potential techn1que The primary or incident

electron beam current is retarded between the electron gun drift tube and the

target The measured current to the target goes to zero at a retarding voltage

VR

given by

V = (rn + V - rn ) + E (31)R Tcath sc TW pr1

where Cfgtcath is the cathode work function CfgtW is the W(lOO) work function Vsc

is the potential due to space charge immediately in front of the cathode and

E is the applied potential between the cathode and the drift tube Changespr1

66

in the work function of the target ~ are calculated by measuring changes

in VR

LlVR

From Equation 3la change in V is found to equalR

(32)

with the assumptions of constant rn h V and E The assumptions usedTcat sc pr1

are reasonable since the cathode in thermal equilibrium and since it

is exposed to very small changes in the ambient during the measurements The

applied potential E i can be maintained constant pr

A typical retarding potential curve is given in Figure 31 The

electron current to the target the ordinate in this figure is given by

(33)

where I i is the current incident on the target from the electron gun and pr

I (E N) the secondary current represents the electron current leavingsec pri

the target surface This secondary current is a function of both primary

47electron energy and hydrogen coverage Because of the dependence on coverage

the intensity and line shape of the retarding potential curves change somewhat

upon adsorption

In determining LlVR

or equivalently the target work function change

a retarding potential curve taken from the clean tungsten surface and a curve

taken after hydrogen adsorption are normalized at a position on the curve where

the target current begins to falloff sharply (position A in Figure 31) The

work function change is then measured as the voltage difference between the

two curves at half the normalized height

Changes in the work function of 001 eV can be resolved The

10

(J)

c I

I

AE lt( l-~ c Q)

-

05 U ~ I I ~ Q) 0) shy0 I-

omiddot ~ middot 10 20 30

Cathode Potential-Target Potential (volts)

SP-1142 Figure 31 Retarding potential curve showing the current to the target as

a function of the difference in applied potential between the electron gun cathode and the target The curve is shifted in energy with changes in hydrogen coverage due to changes in the target work function 6~ 6~ is measured as the difference between two retarding curves at the height A2

68

measurement was sensitive to target rotation position because of the retarding

field in the target region However with the target positioning stop used

the retarding potential curve could be repeated with an accuracy better than

002 eV after rotating the target Since the work function change is the

difference between two such curves the error in the measurement is ~004 eV

Changes in hydrogen coverage are monitored by changes in the work

function of the tungst~n tlurface No experimental attempts have been made

to calibrate the measureci ork fUllction change to an absolute change in the

coverage of atomssurface area Such a calibration requires an accurate measure

of system pumping speed or dosing flux However as discussed in Section 34

such a calibration can be made using results from the literature

322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current Measurements

The total electron beam current incident on the target Ipri is

measured by biasing the target at a potential of +45 volts with respect to the

surrounding experimental chamber Tests indicated that the current measured

in this manner is within 3 percent of the total current leaving the electron

gun which is also I The current leaving the gun is measured by summingprJ

electron currents to the target grids LEED screen magnetic shielding

analyzer Herzog diaphrams and front shield plate This current sum measureshy

ment of I was more difficult to make experimentally than biasing the targetprJ

at +45 volts

The primary electron energy E refers to the energy of theprJ

incident electrons referenced to the vacuum level Themiddotpritnarymiddot energy is

measured between the cathode and drift tube of the electron gun A contact

potential correction between the guns cathode and the target of between

69

-17 eV and -22 eV has been applied to the measured primary energy given in

the data This correction is found by using the measured cut off potential VR

and Equation 31 The spread in the correction is a result of th~ change in

space charge and hence change in V which occurs when the potential gradientsc

at the cathode is altered by changing the voltage on the control grid The

control grid voltage determines the potential fields in the region of the

cathode surface and hence affects the emitted current and space charge

323 Target Temperature Measurement

Prior to taking any data the target was cleaned by rapid electron

bombardment heating (flashing) at gt 22000 K for 30 seconds Figure 32 shows

the temperature of the target versus time from end of flash with and without

liquid nitrogen in the dewar Residual heat in the crystal supports due

to previous flashes does affect the temperature versus time curves somewhat

The higher temperature data were normally taken starting 3 to 4 minutes after

flashing at a target temperature of 600 C + lSoC Data taken under these

conditions are sometimes referred to as room terr~erature or higher temperature

data Low temperature data were taken starting 4 to S minutes after flaShing

when the target temperature was less than -l45 0 C

324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements

The electron scattering data consists of the electron signal emanating

from the target in the acceptance solid angle of the spectrometer following

impingement of the primary electron beam on the target An energy distribution

of these electrons is taken by fixing the pass energy of the spectrometer at

E and sweeping a retarding or accelerating voltage between the screen gridpass

and LEED grid as described previously in Section 25 The output current of

70 300~----~----~----~--------------------

200

-u 1000

-~ J

e ltlgt 0 E ~ -ltlgt ~ 0 ~

Liquid Nitrogen in Dewar

-100

-2000~----~----~----~----~----~----~61 2 345

Time from Flash (min) SP-ll40

Figure 32 Temperature of the tungsten crystal versus time elapsed since a crystal flash The upper curve represents the temperature versus time relation when there is no crystal cooling The lower curve shows this relation when there is liquid nitrogen in the cooling dewar

71

the electron multiplier N(E) is pulse counted or as discussed below Cld in

Appendix B synchronously detected

N(E) is proportional to the electron current originating at the

target with energy between E and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance

solid angle of the analyzer This distribution consists of rapidly varying

true secondary and characteristic loss structure interpretable in terms of

transitions and collective oscillations in the target plus a smoothly varying

background In order to separate the structure from the background the energy

distribution is electronically differentiated using a technique proposed by

67Harrls As shown in Appendix B a signal proportional to the first or to

the second derivative of N(E) is obtained by synchronously detecting the

appropriate harmonic of the output of the electron multiplier The relation

between the electron signal N(E) and the synchronously detected signal can

be seen from Equations B4 through B9 In these equations it is assumed a

peaked structure G(E) being inv~stigatedcan be represented by a Gaussian

centered at E with standard deviation o The detected first harmonic of o

N(E) has structure which has a peak-to-peak height proportional to G(E plusmn a)o

The detected second harmonic of N(E) has structure at E proportional to o

G(E ) a2 In addition there is t contribution to the detected signal from o

the background Since the background which can be represented by a polynomial

in energy is slowly varying the higher order terms which remairr in the difshy

feren tiated signals are small

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as

is commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in taking electron

scattering characteristic energy loss measurements

72

325 Ion Measurements

g+ ions desorbed from the crystal following electron impact could

be detected by the spectrometer when operated in the ion pass mode It was

found convenient to operate the instrument at a pass energy of 40 eV in this

mode operation at a lower pass energy while increasing the resolution

decreased the already weak signal intensity Since the ions have between 0 eV

and 10 eV energy when desorbed acceleration between the target and spectromshy

eter was necessary An accelerating voltage V (the output of an OPS-2000 acc

power supply) was applied between the screen grid and the entrance to the

spectrometer In addition a second accelerating voltage V was appliedT

between the target and the screen grid This latter voltage was needed in

order to energetically separate the ion signal which originated at the target

from a background signal produced by 1) ions electron desorbed from the screen

grid andor other surfaces in the experimental chamber and 2) ionization of

the background The ions that passed into the spectrometer were accelerated

into the first dynode of the electron multiplier The output pulses of the

multiplier were amplified and then counted with a ratemeter

Prior to taking ion data the target was flashed and allowed to

cool to the experimental temperature It was then exposed to hydrogen with

the hydrogen coverage being monitored using work function measurements Ion

energy distributions were taken by fixing E and V and sweeping the pass T

accelerating voltage V Desorption curve measurements which are a measureshyacc

ment of the decrease of the ion signal in the electron beam were taken by

fixing V V and E and monitoring the ion signal as a function of acc T pass

time

73

The kinetic energy of the detected ions is equal to the spectrometer

pass energy E minus the acceleration of the ions between the target and pass

spectrometer V + VT

plus a contact potential correction term due to the acc

difference in work functions of the clean target and surfaces of the spectromshy

eter The pass and acceleration energies are chosen for each experiment The

contact potential difference between the tungsten target and the rhodium

coated stainless steel surfaces of the spectrometer is less than 015 eV

This was determined using a retarding potential measurement between the

target and screen grid Dosing the target with hydrogen did not change the

work function of the grid Hence it is assumed that 015 eV can be used for

the correction at all target hydrogen coverages Since this correction is

on the order of the error in the measurement it has not been made in the

data

The analyzer is operated in a time-of-f1ight mode by applying a

pulsed voltage to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a schematic of this

arrangement Incident ions can enter the analyzer only during the pulse By

measuring the path length d = ab (see Figure 211) from the retarding grid

to the electron multiplier knowing the pass energy E of the spectromshypass

eter and experimentally measuring the time for the entering species to

traverse the distance d the mass of singly-charged ions passing through the

analyzer can be calculated using the following formulation of the distance

equals velocity times time equation

m _ dxrt J 2 (34)La J2E(X~

74

The flight time is measured by making a trace on an oscilloscope of both the

pulse applied to the retarding grid that allows ions to pass into the specshy

trometer and also the output pulses of the linear amplifier The flight time

t is the time difference between these two signals minus the transmission

time of the pulse from the first dynode of the electron multiplier to the

oscilloscope This transmission time is estimated to be several hundred

nanoseconds

The data taken in this research is presented in the remaining

sections of this chapter

33 Ion Species Identification

The ion species desorbed from the tungsten crystal by electron imshy

pact are identified using a time-of-flight technique as described above For

these measurements the spectrometer was set to pass 40 eV ions A total

acceleration voltage V + V of 370 eV was applied between the crystalT acc

and the entrance to the spectrometer Hence the energy of the ions origishy

nating at the crystal surface and passed by the spectrometer was 3 eV (3 eV

corresponds to the maximum in intensity of the ion energy dist~ibution given

in Section 35) Figure 33 shows an oscilloscope trace obtained when opershy

ating in the time-of-flight mode The trace was taken by applying a 22 ~sec

4pulse to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl0 pulsessec) This is the

large pulse at the left in the figure Several output pulses from the linear

amplifier can be seen approximately 4~sec after the retarding grid pulse

These are pulses that have been produced by the electron multiplier following

ion impingement onto the first dynode Taking into consideration the transshy

mission time the experimental flight time is 37~sec Using Equation 34

75

ill22fLsec Window Amplifier Output Pulses

o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Time (fLsec)

Time of Flight (H+) =J2~m ES 40 eV d=029 m

~ 33 fLsec

Figure 33 Oscilloscope trace showing the pulses observed when operating the spectrometer in the time-of-flight mode The 22 ~sec trace at the left is the analyzer on pulse applied to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl04 pulsessec) During this pulse ions pass into the spectrometer Several output pulses from the linear amplifier resulting from ions striking the electron multiplier can be seen delayed by their flight time in the spectrometer and the pulse transmission time from the multiplier to the oscilloscope The output pulses have been enhanced for reproduction purposes

76

with the analyzer pass energy of 40 eV a path length of 029 m and a time of

37 ~sec the mass of the desorbed ions is calculated to be 14 amu The unshy

certainty in this calculation is estimated to be~05 amu Sources of error

include the estimate of transmission time and the uncertainty in the time difshy

ference read from the oscilloscope trace In adqition over part of the path

length (the region between the retarding and LEED grids and in the cylindrical

analyzer) the ions have less than 40 eV energy Hence from this calculation

alone it is not possible to identify the ions as H+ However in experiments

in which the length of the retarding grid pulse was shortened to~ 1 ~ sec

flight times that differed by gt1 ~sec could be distinguished on the oscilloshy

scope The calculated flight time for ions of mass one is 3 3 ~ sec and for

ions of mass two is 46 ~sec or 13 ~sec longer Thus H+ could be resolved

from Hiions The ions detected in the time-of-flight experiment of Figure 33

+have been identified as H For certain spectrometer biasing conditions

+pulses appear on the oscilloscope 1 5 ~ sec later than the H pulses The ions

causing these pulses have been identified as having mass two

When oxygen is adsorbed on the surface the signal pulses on the osshy

cilloscope occur approximately 135 ~sec after the retarding grid pulse This

is in good agreement with the expected flight time for 0+ ions

+In addition to the H ions observed after adsorbing hydrogen from the

jet H+ ions were unexpectedly desorbed by electron impact from the undosed

tungsten surface upon cooling the crystal to below OoC Possible sources for

the hydrogen desorbed under these conditions are discussed in Chapter 4

If E is set at 40 eV set at 0 eV and V varied above pass VT acc

40 eV no ions originating at the crystal surface can be passed by the spectromshy

77

eter However with these biasing conditions both H+ and H + ions are obshy2

served This ion signal has to originate at the walls of the experimental

+ +chamber from a ESD process andor from the ambient Both the H and H2 sigshy

nals increased when H2 was admitted into the background from the gas handling

system an indication that at least part of the signal origtnates from ionizashy

tion in the background It is not easy to determine the intensity of the

+ +H or H2 desorbed from the chamber walls However it is possible to show that

ionization of ambient H2 could be a serious noise problem The cross section

+ -17 2for electron impact ionization of H2 to H2 is 48xlO cm and of H2

22xlO-17 cm2 for 400 eV electrons 80 An electron current of lxlO-6 A at 400

eV would produce about llxlO3 H2+ ions per cm3-Torr-sec and 5xl012 H + ions

3 per cm -Torr-sec Thus it is reasonable to assume that at the background presshy

sures here a sizable ion Signal is produced although most of it undoubtedly

is not detected In the ESD eXperiments performed here it was desired to

detect only ions produced at the surface of the crystal It has been possible

to bias the spectrometer such that this is the case Almost none of the extra

signal has the correct energy to pass through the spectrometer when V isT

held several volts positive and when V is kept less than E - V bull acc pass T

34 Work Function Results

Work function changes resulting from hydrogen adsorption have been

monitored as a measure of hydrogen coverage Figure 34 shows the tungsten

surface work function change as a function of exposure to hydrogen The crysshy

tal was at 600 C for this experiment To obtain this data the crystal was roshy

tated into the gas jet dosed for a measured time and then rotated back to a

position in front of the spectrometer where a retarding potential curve was

78

Figure 34 Change in work function 6~ of a room temperature tungsten (100) surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption 6~ is plotted versus exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen For comparison the results reported by Madey820 are also shown Exposures for the data taken here have been determined by normalizing the measured adsorption time to Madeys absolute exposure at a work function change ~ of 041 eV

------o 0 Withrow

10

08

gt06 OJ--amplt]04

02

0~013

Madey and Yates

Max bcp=~~

Data Normalized at bcp =041

0

10M 101610~ Exposure (Moleculescm2) SP-1121

80

S o Max ltltgt=09S-~ 6 A Max ltltgt =092 --eshy

lt34 o Adsorption at 60degC A Adsorption at -150degC

2

20 40 60 SO 100 120 140 160 ISO 200 220 Exposure (arbitrary units)

SP-1214

Figure 35 Comparison of work function changes at 600 C and -lSOoC resulting from hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten (100)

OlO~i--~----~--~----~--~----~--~--~~--~~

- W(lOO)gt (J) 008

- shy

-u 006 o o

00 ~ 004 --Sshy

I 002-I shy--S- 0

-200 -100 o 100 200 Temperature (OC) SP-U56

Figure 36 Change in the work function of the undosed tungsten (100) surface versus crystal temperature for the temperature range -150oC to 220oC The ordinate in the graph represents the work function at temperature T measured with respect to the work function at 220degC The data was obtained in three_separate experimental runs indicated by different symbols as discussed in the text

82

taken This procedure was followed repeatedly without closing the jet in order

to assure a constant hydrogen flux (molecm2-sec) from the jet onto the

-8crystal face An incident primary electron current oflt2xlO A at a primary

energy of 100 eV was used The saturation coverage work function change

8tCP ) is 098 + 004 eV For comparison results obtained by Madey and Yates

max

for the work function change resulting from adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO)

are given in Figure 34 Absolute exposures for the data taken here have been

obtained by normalizing the dose time to Madey and Yates exposure at a work

function change of 041 eV Using this normalization good agreement beshy

tween their results and the data obtained here is found

The work function change of the tungsten surface as a function of hyshy

drogen exposure was also measured when the crystal was at -150degC The data are

given in Figure 35 The procedure used in obtaining the 600 c data was fallowed

in taking these data The maximum work function change at this lowtemperature

is 092 + 004 eV

The dependence of the work function on crystal temperature is shown

in Figure 36 The work function is seen to decrease 005 eV as the temperashy

ture is raised from -lSOoC to 220degC The data in this figure were obtained in a

series of retarding potential curve measurements taken at different crystal

temperatures The temperature was varied by radiation heating the ~rystal on

its back face using the pancake heater It was found impossible to take decent

retarding potential curves when the crystal was heated more than about ISOoC

above its initial temperature As the current through the pancake heater was

increased electron emission from this heater also increased This emission

current interfered with the retarding potential measurement when it became a

83

fraction of the incident current The three different symbols in Figure 36

represent data taken when the initial temperature prior to heating was -150oC

work function change has been reported Assuming this result and using the

-1350 C and 50oC The change in work function with temperature was reversible

In this research no attempts have been made to measure absolute covshy

erages Coverages are defined in terms of ~ the measured work function

change As discussed in Section 126 a linear relation between coverage and

8

room temperature data taken here cover~ge and work function can be described

by the expression

e = 102 ~ (35)

where ~ is measured in eVe e represents coverage in fraction of a mon6laye~

15 2 8 A monolayer is assumed to be 2xlO H atomscm Estimates of coverage in this

work will be made by measuring work function changes and using Equation 35

However it should be noted that the data will be presented in terms of the

measured quantity~ and therefore are not dependent on any assumptions

made relating coverage and work function

35 H+ Ion DesoEPtion Measurements

The electron stimulated desorption of H+ ions from the W(lOO) surface

has been studi~d under different experimental conditions Detection of the

ion signal has been discussed in Section 325 The results follow below

351 H+ Ion Energy Distribution

Ions desorbed from a surface by electron impact have a characteristic

distribution in energy This distribution is dependent on the adsorption states

from which the ions originate In the simple models used to describe this

phenomena changes in the observed energy distribution except some intensity

84

changes result from changes in the adsorption states Hence this measurement

can be used to characterize the states from which ions are desorbed A theore~

ieal discussion of the ion energy distribution is given in Appendix C

Figure 37 shows the energy distribution of H+ ions electron desorbed

-6from W(IOO) using a primary beam current of IxlO A at an energy of 400 eV

This current was sufficiently low such that the energy distribution was obtained

without desorbing the hydrogen coverage to any extent The choice of 400 eV for

the primary energy was to some extent arbitrary although it was found that

below 400 eV the ion signal was weaker and the measurements required more time

to take To obtain the data the crystal was flashed and then allowed to cool

several minutes to 60oC It was then dosed with hydrogen from the jet until a

work function change of 018 eV corresponding to a substantial coverage in the

~2 state was measured The distribution was obtained by scanning V while acc

holding V at 4 volts The distribution has an intensity maximum at 3 + 05 eVT

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV No correction to the energy scale

has been made for the target-spectrometer contact potential difference since

this amounts to only 015 eV which is smaller than the accuracy in the meashy

s~remertt A small part of the detected ion signal which did not originate at

the crystal surface has been subtracted out The amount of this contribution

was determined by monitoring the ion signal from the flashed undosed surface

This extra signal amounted to no more than 10 percent of the total signal and

was entirely on the low side of the energy distribution

+For comparison the energy distributions of H ions produced by elecshy

tron impact of gas phase hydrogen81 and hydrogen-covered polycrystalline tungshy

82sten are included in Figure 37 All three curves have been normalized to

the same peak intensity The three curves have characteristically different

85

Figure 37 Energy distribution of H+ ions from a tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen Hydrogen coverage for this measurement corresponds to a work function change of 018 eV (approximately 019 monolaYS2) F~r comparison the energy distribution reported by Nishijima of H ions des orbed from hydrogen covered polyshycrystalline tungsten is given ASIo shown is an ion energy distribution obtained by Hagstrum from gas phase hydrogen The three distributions have been normalized at their peak intensities

-Ugt-

Q)

gtshyc o

H

+ r

86

H+ Ion Energy Distribution

- Withrow H2 W(lOO) -- Nishijima H2 I W (polycrystol) _- HagstrumH2 gas

1 J

ii ~ I I iiI ~ I

iii middot VI 1

I I bull

o 2 468

H+ Ion Energy (eV)

87

distributions in energy

Energy distributiol1s of H+ ions taken at different hydrogen coverages

are shown in Figure 38 Experimental conditions for these measurements were

the same as used to obtain the previous figure There is no change in peak

position or line shape as a function of coverage except for heavy dosings

where the distribution appears to be slightly broader The maximum intensity

is a function of coverage as discussed below

Figure 39 shows a series of ion energy distributions taken after

adsorption from the jet with the target temperature approximately -150o

C For

these data the target was flashed and allowed to cool 5 minutes before

adsorption All other experimental conditions were identical to the correshy

sponding 600

C data The distributions peak at 3 eV (except at high coverage

where the peak appears to be slightly higher) and have full widths at half

maxima of 26 eV identical to the results found for 600 C adsorption The

high energy tail of these low temperature distributions appears to be somewhat

wider than the corresponding higher temperature data however

After flashing the target to 22000 K and allowing it to cool five

ominutes to a temperature of lt-145 C hydrogen ions can be detected without

dosing the surface from the jet An energy distribution for this signal is

shown in Figure 310 A time-of-flight measurement confirmed that the observed

signal is indeed H+ ions The energy distribution peaks at 25 05 eVvith a

full width at half maximum of 58 eV The peak intensity of the ion signal

obtained without dosing depends on the previous history of the sample and on

the experimental parameters as discussed in Section 35~ This intensity

change is indicated by arrows in Figure 310 For this measurement the

88

H+ from H2 W (100) T=600C

Zero Levels

fI)

cshy s gt

~

c-0 ~

0 ~ --0

CIgt

gt-shyc 0

1-1

+J

o 2 4 6

6cent= OSSeV

6cent=06geV

6cent=045eV

6cent=0lSeV

Acent=OlOeV

Acent=003eV

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1l96

Figure 38 Comparison of energy distributions of g+ ions desorbed from a 600 c tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

89

-ffl middotcshy

l

gtshy 0 shy

0 0-0 ltlgt

gt= C 0

H

+I

H+ from H2 W(100) T =-150degC

Zero Levels

Dcp=067 eV

Dcp= 043eV

---_Dcp=Olle~

___

Dcp=017eV

D_cp=004eV

o 246 H+lon Energy (eV)

SP-1197

Figure 39 Comparison of energy distributions of H+ ions desorbed from a low temperature (-lSOOC) tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

90

--(J) H+ from Undosed W(lOO)

T=l50degC

H+ from H2 Dosed W

ot 60degC

-0

-Q)

~l ~ + I O~~~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~ o 2 4 6

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1202

Figure 310 Energy distribution obtained from a flashed but undo sed tungsten (100) surface which has been cooled to -150oC For comparison the energy distribution of a+ ions from the tungsten (100) surface after dosing with hydrogen is shown by the dashed line The two distributions are normalized at their maximum intensities The intensity of the ion signal from the undosed surface changes as a function of sample history as discussed in the text This is indicated by the arrow

I

91

primary energy was 400 eVe A relatively low incident electron current

of lxlO-7 A was used so that the coverage in the surface state being probed

would not be strongly depleted during the measurement This state has a high

desorption cross section as calculated in Chapter 4 and hence depletion is

a possibility It should be noted that the same energy distribution is obshy

tained from the low temperature state using a beam current of 2xlO-6 A The

latter high current measurement reflects the distribution in energy of H+ ions

desorbed from the fast state when its coverage is in equilibriumll as disshy

cussed in Section 352

The intensity of the ion signal desorbed from the surface at both

60 0 C and -1500 C is strongly coverage dependent In Figure 311 is plotted the

intensity of the 3 eV H+ ion signal as a function of work function change upon

adsorption of hydrogen The signals from the 60 0 C and -lSOoC surfaces have

maximum intensities at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV respecshy

tively This difference indicates that adsorption at the low temperature

differs somewhat from that at 600C At higher hydrogen coverages theion

signals decrease to less than 15 of their peak intensities indicating that

the cross section for ion desorption decreases as the ll state fills The

41 reason for this decrease is not well understood although Madey has sug~_

gested that it results from a coverage dependent rate of reneutralization of

the ions produced by the incident beam At near monolayer coverages the 3 eV

ion signal increased somewhat

The data in Figur~ 311 are normalized at the peak intensity The

absolute maximum yields at the two temperatures are the same within 25

Also shown normalized at the peak intensity are Madeys intensity versus

41 coverage data for hydrogen adsorbed on W(lOO) at room temperature The

--

en + ~ H from H2 W (100) J ~ ~ Withrow 60degC ~ 0 Withrow -150degC shye __ -- Madey 22degCA

c

C li)

gtshy 0

c N

o H + I o x ~

cf c

o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Il cp (eV)

Figure 311 Intensity of the 3 eV g+ ion signal from the tungsten (1ampH)-1195 surface as a function of the change in work function resulting from hydrogen adsorption Data for adsorption at 600 C and -l50oC are plotted For comparison the results obtained by Madey4 from a room temperature tungsten (100) surface are included

93

maximum in his ion signal occurs for the same coverage as the maximum in the

room temperature data taken here His results are more sharply peaked howshy

ever This difference may be due to the different conditions under which the

two sets of data were obtained Madeys results represent ions desorbed in a

narrow cone normal to the surface whereas the spectrometer used here collected

only those ions desorbed from the surface at 350 + 2 120 Madey also used a

lower primary energy

352 Desorption Curve Measurements

The H+ ion signal is observed to decrease with time if a primary

electron beam current of sufficient intensity per surface area is used A

theoretical description of this measurement referred to as a desorption

curve is given in Appendix C It can be shown that the expected ion signal

decreases to an equilibrium value The rate of decay of the desorption curve

and the equilibrium value are used to calculate parameters characteristic of

the adsorption state being probed

Figure 312 shows the decay of the 3 eV H+ ion signal from tungsten

(100) initially covered with hydrogen to a work function change of 010 eV

oThe temperature of the crystal for this measurement was 60 C An incident

-6 -3 2current of 5xlO A (a current density of 25xlO Aem) at a primary energy

of 400 eV was used The decrease in ion yield is seen to be quite slow The

equilibrium value shown in this figure iH+ was estimated from the equil

analysis of the data in Chapter 4

+As noted above H ions could be desorbed from a cold but undosed

tungsten (100) surface The desorption curve for this undosed state is shown

in Figure 313 For this data the crystal was flashed and allowed to cool

5 minutes to -150o

C Then the incident electron current was turned on (see

94

I I I t I I I I I H+ from H2 W(l00) Epri =400 eV-(f) Ipri =5 X 10-6 A

a ~rp =010 eV82000r- shy

-(f)

c (l) I- shy iHquil-c

-~1000 shyo

H + I

t I I I I I o 100 200 300 400

Time (sec) SP-1203

Figure 312 Change in the a+ ion current during electron obombardment of a 60 C tungampten (100) surface

Hydrogen was initially adsorbed to a coverage of 010 monolayer

95

200 -()

a ~160 gt

if) -c ~120 c

H c ~ 80

+r 40

H+ Ions fromW(lOO) Epri=400eV

Ipri=lA

Temp =- 1500 C

IH~qUil ------------shy

Figure 313 Change in the a+ ion current during electron bombardment of a flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface cooled to -150oC

140

96

Section 354 for a discussion of how the current was controlled) and the

ion signal decay monitored The signal is seen to undergo a rapid decay It

reaches its equilibrium value in several minutes in sharp contrast with the

desorption curve obtained after hydrogen dosing at room temperature An inshy

-6 -4 2cident current of lxlO A (a current density of 5lxlO Alcm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV was used to take the desorption curve from the undosed cold

surface This current density is only 20 percent of the value used for the

room temperature data of Figure 312 It was found convenient to use this

smaller value since the decay of the ion signal was so rapid Additional

desorption measurements on this fast decaying or fast state are given in

the following two sections

A desorption curve obtained after dosing the cold tungsten (100)

surface with hydrogen is shown in Figure 314 The data were taken using a

-6 -3 2primary current of 3xlO A (a current density of 15xlO Acm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV The surface was dosed to a work function change of 007 eV

Initially there is a rapid decay of the ion signal which is similar to the

desorption curve obtained from the fast state Following this initial decaYt

the signal continues to fall for a time but at a much slower rate of decay

This desorption pattern different than either of the desorption curves given

in Figures 312 or 313 can be described in ter~ of simultaneous desorption

from two adsorption states This is discussed further in Chapter 4

+353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State H Ion Signal

The ion yield from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface

has been studied as a function of temperature These data were obtained by

continuously monitoring both the tungsten temperature and the 3 eV H+ ion

97

-() a u

t gt

800()

c (J) +shy

~600 c o

+ H

400 r

200

o

Figure 314

r-

i-

r-shy

I I I I I I I I I

H+ from H2 W(lOO Epri =400eV

I I I

o 100

Iprl =3xlO-6 A

ilq= O07eV T=-150degC

I 1 I I

T

I

-

-

-

200 300 400 Time (sec)

Change in the H+ ion current during electron bombardment oof a -150 C tungsten (100) surface Hydrogen was

initially adsorbed to a coverage of 007 monolayer

98

signal following a crystal flash The current for this measurement was

-6 -4 2IxlO A (a current density of 5lx10 Aem) The primary energy was 400

eV As can be determined from the previous section this current density was

such that the electron beam caused Significant perturbations on the hydrogen

state during the measurement None the less several conclusions can be inshy

ferred from the intensity versus temperature data presented in Figure 315

The ion signal from the fast hydrogen state is strongly temperature dependent

+ 0The H intensity is seen to increase sharply below approximately -50 C The

results are reversible with temperature the ion signal decreases if the crysshy

tal is heated and the signal returns to its original intensity when the crysshy

tal cools back down

Several mechanisms could be responsible for the appearance of a

H+ ion signal below room temperature For example a temperature dependent

bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen could produce a desorbable hydrogen

state Likewise adsorption from the background rtight pro(luce desorbable H+

only below room temperature In order to better understand the fast state

some additional measurements were made as described in the following section

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State

Additional experiments were performed to further elucidate the nature

of the low temperature fast state Experiments were made to determine the

source of hydrogen which populates this state The effect of co-adsorption

of hydrogen from the jet with this state was probed In addition the possishy

bility that the appearance of the state was related to surface contamination

was investigated Possible correlations between the fast state hydrogen and

the low temperature LEED phenomena described in Section 123 were probed

99

50----~----~----r---_~--_r----_--_

20

-(J)-c

gt l shye ~10 c l shye gt

00 -c Q)-~ 5 c o

H

+ I

2

-150 -100 -50 0 100 150 Temperature (OC)

Figure 315 Intensity of the 3 eV a+ ion signal from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface as a function of tungsten temperature

-200

100

In these measurements it was desired to study the appearance of

+the fast state H ion signal without the complicating effects of simultaneous

significant depletion of this hydrogen state with the primary electron beam

This possibility exists since the cross section for electron sesorption of

the fast state is high as shown in Chapter 4 It was found that a measure

of the change of coverage in the fast state could be obtained in experiments

in which the electron beam was turned off for short times During the time

the gun was off referred to as adsorption times the fast state populated

The increase in the coverage in this state during the adsorption time could be

monitored by taking a desorption curve right after the adsorption time The

change in coverage is assumed proportional to the difference iH+ - iH+ initial equi1

where iH+ is the ion intensity immediately after turning the gun back on initial

and ~+ has been discussed above The difference iH+ - iH+ will equil initial equi1

be referred to as ~iH+(adsorption time) The rate of increase in coverage of

the fast state is assumed proportional to ~~+(adsorption time)adsorption

time

To turn the gun off the control grid was biased 6 volts negative

with respect to the cathode This method of controlling the gun current

kept the cathode temperature constant during the adsorption time while at

the same time no current could reach the crystal The primary beam could be

turned off (or subsequently back on) in fractions of a second No effects on

the observed measurements could be attributed to this biasing procedure

The change in the population of the fast state has been monitored as

a function of the tungsten crystal temperature Figure 316 shows the results

of a series of measurements each done at a different crystal temperature in

101

() --c s gtshy

0 -0

0 100-~ 0shy+Q)

J 50

0 shy

+S a J

-150 -100 -50 a 50 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1215

Figure 316 The quantity igt - i~ measured initial eqpil

from desorption curves from Ehe fast state as a function of crystal temperature

102

which the above procedure has been used with adsorption times of 150 seconds

From the desorption curves taken following the adsorption times the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) has been calculated This quantity is plotted versusH

the crystal temperature in Figure 316 The quantity 6iH+(adsorption time)

ie the fast state signal is small and less than 5 of the maximum signal

owhen the temperature of the tungsten crystal is higher than OOC Below 0 C

the change in population in the fast state during the adsorption time inshy

creases as the temperature decreases This temperature dependence is in

agreement with the the results of Figure 315 which was taken continuously

with a high primary current as the crystal was cooled after a flash Thus the

procedure used to obtain Figure 316 appears reasonable

The rate of population of the fast state can be an indication of the

source of hydrogen as discussed in Chapter 4 The rate of population of this

state has been investigated as a function of adsorption time using the proceshy

dure given above Figure 317 shows a plot of the quantity 6i +(adsorptionH

time) versus adsorption time From the figure it is concluded that the rate

of popUlation is constant in time at least for coverages of the fast state

obtained in 26 minutes

The effect of co-adsorption of hydrogen from the jet on the fast

state has been probed The purpose of these measurements has been to detershy

mine if hydrogen (H2) from the gas dosing system is the source of the fast

state In a series of measurements the cold crystal surface was dosed with

hydrogen and then an ESD ion signal monitored until it reached equilibrium

Following this the fast state was allowed to populate during an adsorption

time of 150 seconds Finally a desorption curve from the co-adsorbed fast

lO3

Growth of H+ Ion Yield with Electron Gun Off T=-150degC--(f) c

s gt 0-0 0-

J 0shy

+0gt r

0 +shy

+pound r

200

100

SP-122J

Figure 317 The quantity igt bull i~ff measured from initial flequil

desorption curves from the fast state as a function of adsorption time Adsorption time is defined in the text

104

state and dosed hydrogen states was taken In Figure 318 the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) calculated from these desorption curves is plotted versusH

work function change due to adsorption from the jet For low doaes of hydroshy

gen (6cplt 010 eV) there is almost no change in the quantity t~+(adsorption

time) ie the rapid decay of the ion signal characteristic of the fast

state is observed However preadsorption of hydrogen from the jet clearly

affects the ion signal from the fast state for 6cplt010 eV The signal is

decreased forhy5irogen coverages in the 13 state in qualitative agreement1

with the data presented in Figure 311

For ~lt 010 eV the change in coverage in the fast state during

adsorption times of 150 seconds is seen to be independent of the amount of

hydrogen in the dosed or 13 2 state This result was used in a series of

experiments in which the rate of population of the fast state was measured

2at different hydrogen background pressures The flux (molecules per cm per

second) of H2 onto the surface from the background is directly proportional

to the partial pressure of hydrogen If H2 is the source of the fast state

changing the background pressure would be expected to have an effect on the

measured change in coverage in the fast state as long as the total adsorption

is lower than about 010 monolayer (which corresponds to a work function

change of 010 eV) For the data in Figure 318 the background pressure of

-11hydrogen was less than 7xlO Torr (the Bayard-Alpert gauge pressure) In

a series of experiments this hydrogen pressure was raised by letting gas in

from the the gas handling system for times ranging from one to two minutes

While the pressure was raised the electron gun was turned off so that simulshy

taneous adsorption into the fast state and the 13 2 state could take place The

105

() --C J

gt 10shy

0 10shy-0 10shy

S

0shy

+lt11 c

2-+~ c

200

100

0

8

DCP(eV) SP-1222

Figure 318 The quantity iHt 1nitial

desorption curves from

- iHplusmn measured from equil

the low temperature hydrogen dosed surface as a function of work function change ~~ ~~ results from hydrogen coverage

o 1 2 3 4 5 6

106

total hydrogen coverage in the Sz state was kept below 10 percent of a monoshy

layer Desorption curves were then taken and the quantity 8iH+(adsorption

time) calculated An interesting result was obtained It was found that the

coverage in the fast state was unrelated to the background pressure of HZ and

hence unrelated to the total impingement of HZ Even though experiments were

made in which the background pressure was varied over two orders of magnitude

the change in coverage in the fast state during equal adsorption times was

always the same Hence it is concluded that the fast state is not populated

by hydrogen added to the background from the gas handling system

It was found however that the fast state signal intensity could be

correlated to a pressure reading under certain experimental conditions

Normally during flashing the crystal manipulator was rotated so that the

tungsten crystal faced away from the entrance to the spectrometer (a rotation

oof 180 from the crystal position shown in Figure Z14) This normal flashing

posi tion is referred to as the down position The crystal could also be

flashed while it was in the IIUp position or facing the s~ectrometer It was

observed that when the crystal was flashed in the up position an increase in

the ion signal from the fast state could be obtained over that measured when

the crystal was flashed in the down position This unexpected result sugshy

gested that the fast state might be correlated to a thermal instrumental

effect Radiation heating from the crystal raised the temperature of the

surrounding experimental chamber surfaces If the crystal is close to the

surfaces during a flash as for example when flashed in the up position the

heating is greater One consequence of greater heating would be an enhanced

thermal desorption from the surfaces and a higher pressure in the experimental

107

chamber Hence the incident flux of gas thermally desorbed from the chamber

surfaces would be increased Unfortunately the best test of this hypothesis

a measurement of the temperature of the surfaces in the experimental chamber

could not be made However an interesting pressure related result could be

obtained when the x-ray current in the Bayard-Alpert gauge (which is equivalent

to approximately 7xlO-11 Torr pressure) was nulled out so that ambient pressure

-12increases at the gauge of as little as 05xlO Torr could be easily detected

It was observed that during a crystal flash when the crystal was in the up

position the gauge pressure showed a maximum pressure burst of approximately

3x10-l0 Torr This was higher than the pressure burst when the crystal was

flashed in the down position a strong indication that some surfaces in the

experimental chamber became hotter during an up flash When the crystal was

flashed in the down position the pressure fell quickly after the flash was

terminated to the nulled or equilibrium level However after a flash in the

up position the pressure fell to a quasi-equilibrium level which was higher

-12than the true equilibrium pressure by as much as 2xlO Torr The quasi-

equilibrium pressure was dependent on the number of prev~ous flashes in the

up position and on how long after flashing the pressure was read Once the

crystal had been flashed in the up position the pressure remained elevated

for several hours slowly decreasing to the equilibrium level It should be

noted that these pressure increases are read outside the experimental chamber

The actual pressure increase in the experimental chamber and hence the inshy

creased gas flux at the crystal surface can only be estimated to be proshy

portional to the gauge pressure

The magnitude of the pressure increases following a flash in the

108

up position was linearly related to both the change in coverage of the fast

state during the adsorption time and to the desorption curve equilibrium level

This can be seen from the data presented in Figure 319 The lower panel shows

the results of a series of measurements in which desorption curves were taken

after letting the fast state populate for adsorption times of 150 seconds

The ordinate in the lower panel is 6ia+ (adsorption1 time) The abscissa in the

figure is the increase in pressure over the equilibrium pressure as a result of

flashes in the up position The change in ion yield is seen to be directly

proportional to the observed pressure increase The top panel shows the equishy

librium ion signal observed for the desorption curves plotted versus the same

pressure increase as the lower panel A direct proportionality between the

equilibrium ion signal and the pressure increase is seen These two linear

results would be expected if the fast state populated as a result of adsorption

from the background This is discussed further in Chapter 4 On the other

hand no dependence of the fast state ion signal on background pressure would

be expected if the source of the hydrogen were bulk to surface diffusion Thus

while there may be hydrogen on the surface which is not desorbed by incident

electrons it can be concluded from this measurement that the fast state is

populated by adsorption from the ambient

A possible explanation for the fast state is suggested by the work

51of Jelend and Menzel They found that co-adsorption of oxygen or CO with

hydrogen leads to the ~ hydrogen state which has similar characteristics as

the fast state observed here The possibility that impurities are on the surshy

face in the temperature range in which the fast state is observed has been inshy

vestigated using Auger electron spectroscopy andel~tTon stimulated desorption in

lO9

Figure 319 Lower panel - The quantity iH+ - ig+ measured from initial eaui1

desorption curves from the fast state as S tunction of gauge pressure change The fast state populated during adsorption times of 150 seconds The pressure change results from flashing the tungsten crystal while it is in the up position Upper panel - Equilibrium ion current iH+ measured from the

-equildesorpt~on curves taken for the data in the lower panel

110

-(J)-C J gt 0 -0 0

100-s

+1)cr

J

C-+ J

0

--(J)

c J 200 gt 0 -0 0-

s +1)

cr J

- 100 I 2

012

Gauge Pressure Change (X10-12 Torr)

111

the time of flight mode In order to test for these elements the flashed

tungsten surface was cooled with the gun turned off allowing the fast state

to populate Total adsorption times of up to 15 minutes were used times in

which a strong fast state signal could be obtained However no carbon or

oxygen Auger peaks were observed and no desorbed oxygen or carbon ions that

could be attributed to the fast state were monitored with ESD Hence any

oxygen or CO present on the surface would have had a coverage below the deshy

tection sensitivity of the techniques used or less than approximately 1 pershy

cent of a monolayer It can be noted here that coverage calculations given in

Chapter 4 indicate the fast state hydrogen coverage is well below 1

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data

The low energy electron diffraction (LEE D) system used here has

been described previously in Section 26 LEED data has been optained using

hydrogen coverage crystal temperature and primary electron energy as

variable parameters as described below

The symmetry of the LEED spot pattern has been noted as a function

of hydrogen coverage at room temperature Results from these observations are

in good agreement with previously reported research (see Section 123) Half

order diffraction spots become visible with initial hydrogen coverage The

intensity of the half order spots maximize at a coverage corresponding to

~~ = 015 eV at a primary energy of 115 eVe Additional adsorption causes

the half order spots to split into four poorly defined spots This pattern

upon further adsorption becomes blurred At full coverage a (lxl) pattern

is observed Figure 320 shows a photograph of the LEED pattern observed

from a clean room temperature tungsten surface and also the c(2x2) LEED patshy

112

W(100)

Clean

T=60degC Epri = 1387eV

(1 xl) Clean (100) Surface

W (100)

Do 4gt =015eV

T =-150degC

Epri =115eV

C (2x2) Hydrogen Overoyer

SP-1200

Figure 320 Photo~raDh of LEED screen showing a clean (lxl) pattern and a c(2x2) pattern Models of possible surface atom configurations for the LEED patterns are also shown

113

tern that occurs with a hydrogen over1ayer in the ~2 state

When the crystal is cooled to below room temperatures half order

spots are visible without any dosing of the crystal from the gas system

Graphs of LEED spot intensity versus primary electron energy called

elastic intensity profiles are shown in Figures 321 322 and 323 for the

(10) (11) and (1212) diffraction beams A normally incident primary

electron beam was used in these measurements Data were taken at two tempera-

o 0tures 60 C and -150 C for both the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorbed on

the surface to a coverage corresponding to a ~~ of 015 eV This coverage corshy

responds to the maximum in intensity for the 115 eV half order beams All obshy

servable equivalent beams show the same line shape and peak positions There

are some intensity differences between equivalent beams probably due to an

uneven phosphor coating of the LEED screen particularly near its edge bull

Small misalignments might also affect the intensities The effect of hydrogen

adsorption on the intensity profiles is seen to be small except above 100 eV

in the (11) beam profile and below 50 eV in the (1212) beam profile Some

small shifts (~ 2 eV) in the energy positions of the peaks are observed as a

function of coverage but not as a function of temperature

The intensities of the (1212) (10) and (11) spots have been

measured as a function of crystal temperature for the clean (flashed) surface

These results are presented in Figures 324 and 325 using a semilogarithmic

scale The data were obtained by continuously monitoring both the tungsten

temperature and the intensity of the beams following a crystal flash Primary

energies of 115 eV for the (1212) beam 1105 eV and 67 eV for the (10)

beam and 113 eV for the (11) beam and currents of 10xlO-6 A were used The

114

- (j) +shyC l

gt 1loshy0 0 loshy+shy0

loshy0

- 0gt

+shy(j)

c Q) +shyC

H

o

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j = 0deg g=(10)

T =60degC Clean

T =-150degC fjcent = 015 eV

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l109

Figure 321 Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degc and -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsoroed in the S2 state

llS

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

U)-C J

1

-~ l0shy

a loshy

0 0l0shya-~-U) 0c OJ

C -H

o

o

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-lloa

8i =0deg g = (1 1)

T = 60degC Clean

T =60degC IJcp = 015 eV

T = -150degC IJcp = 015 eV

Figure 322 Elastic intensity profiles for the (11) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsorbed in the 62 state

116

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j =00

g = (12 12 )

o 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l107

Figure 323 Elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A vJork function change Acp of 015 eV corresponds to hydrocn adsorbed in the 13

2 state

117

100~--~--~----~--~-------~--------

--VI

c s gtshyt shyc -t shycl

010 -

gtshy-VI c Q)

c -I-f

tr c Q)

a

WOOO) 81 =0deg

9 = (ItO) 0-

-0- Epri = 1105 eV --0-- -0shy -0

9 = (ItI)

0 Epri= 113 eV =0shy o 0 0

9 = (ItO) Epri= 67 eV

0

Figure 324 Temperature dependence of (10) and (11) LEED beams from a flashed tungsten (100) surface Primary energies used are indicated on the graph

118

W (100) 9 =(12 t 12)

8j=0deg50

CJ)-

~ 5 o Q)

Q

2

-100 o 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1l55 Figure 325 Temperature dependence of the (1212) LEED

beam from flashed tungsten (100) surface A primary electron energy of 115 eV was used

200

119

intensities of the (10) and (11) beams are seen to increase exponentially

(linearly on the semilogarithmic scale) as the temperature is lowered The

intensity of the (1212) order beam also increases as the temperature is

lowered Down to approximately -750 C the rate of increase with temperature is

ogreater than that for the integral order beams Below -75 C the intensity

changes at about the same rate as the integral order beams The results are

reversible with temperature

In Sections 353 and 354 a hydrogen ion signal has been reported

from the flashed surface LEED measurements have been made to ascertain if

this ion yield from the fast state could be correlated to the intensity of the

LEED spots After flashing the crystal the photometer signal from the

(1212) beam was measured as the crystal cooled to -lS0 0 C Then the incishy

dent electron current was turned off for 300 seconds in order to allow the

fast state to populate When the electron current was turned back on the

photometer signal immediately returned to the same intensity as obtained prior

to turning off the incident current There was no decay in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the desorption curve phenomena seen with

the ion signal The intensity of the photometer signal from the (10) and

(11) beams as well as from the background was monitored ilsing this same

procedure In no case was there any structure observed in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the rapid decay in the fast state ion

yield

37 Electron Scattering Data

The electron signal backscattered from the crystal has been observed

as a function of hydrogen coverage and crystal temperature using synchronous

120

detection of the second harmonic of the energy distribution N(E) as disshy

cussed in Appendix B and in Section 324

Figure 326 shows the characteristic loss structure for electrons

scattered from a clean room temperature tungsten (100) surface and also from

this surface after dosing with hydrogen The abscissa in this figure represhy

sents electron loss energy w where 0 eV s w s 40 eV A primary~nergy of

-6110 eV and a primary current of lxlO A were used to take these data Since

25for tungsten true secondary structure extends out to 60 eV there is no

overlap of secondary and characteristic loss structure down to losses of 50

eV when operating at 110 eV primary energy The data of Figure 326 were taken

in the second derivative mode in order to suppress the background The data

were taken at a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV with a 1 volt peak to peak

oscillation on the retarding potential

Coverage dependent changes in the spectra are seen The peak at

w = 25 eV in the clean spectrum decays as the hydrogen coverage in increased

At the same time the narrow peak at 4 eV becomes broader and a peak grows at

a loss energy of 75 eV The structure at 210 eV in the clean spectrum moves

down in loss energy as hydrogen adsorbs Below w ~ 30 eV very little change

in the spectra as a function of hydrogen coverage is observed

Figure 327 shows characteristic loss structure for electrons

oscattered from a tungsten surface cooled to -150 C The data were taken using

the same electron gun and spectrometer operating conditions as used for the

data of Figure 326 The low temperature clean spectrum is nearly identical

to that obtained at the higher temperature The only change is a slight enshy

hancement of the shoulder at about 45 eV Changes in the clean spectrum with

121

Figure 326 oCharacteristic electron energy loss spectra from a 60 C

tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverages A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modulation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

---

N w -0 shyw-Z

N -0

I

122

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl=110 eV Iprl c5xlO-6 A

T= 60degC Modulation =1 V Peak to Peak

6ltl 080eV

060eV

O 35eV

023eV

014eV

003eV

Clean

o

SP-1219

123

Figure 327 Characteristic electron energy loss spectra from a -lSOoC tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverage A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modushylation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

124

N lJJ 0

~ lJJ Z N 0 I

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl =110 eV Iprl =5x10-6 A T=-150degC Modulation 1 V Peak to Peak

bcent OS6eV

O5geV

O35eV

O25eV

O16eV

O05eV

Cleon

SP-1220

-~--------~- -- -----------

125

hydrogen adsorption are identical to those seen for adsorption at the higher

temperature

Loss spectra were also taken for 0 eV ~ w ~ 10 eV from the flashed

but undosed cold surface after turning off the electron gun for 10 minutes

These measurements were made to see if the fast state hydrogen would affect

the loss measurements No changes in the electron loss spectrum from those

taken immediately after cooling the flashed crystal were found

A discussion of the data presented in this chapter follows in

Chapter 4

126

CHAPTER 4

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

Hydrogen chemisorption on single crystal tungsten (100) has been

probed in this research using complementary surface sensitive techniques

Auger measurements have been given in Section 28 Work function ESD LEED

and electron scattering results have been given in Chapter 3 A discussion

of this data is presented here

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental condition using Auger electron spectroscopy The procedures

used have been previously described with the spectrometer electronics Section

25 The Auger data have been given and discussed in Section 28 A brief

summary of these results follows

Tungsten carbon and oxygen Auger transitions have been observed

using this technique It can be seen from Figure 216 that after flashing the

cryLl to 2200oK no structures attributable to carbon or oxygen Auger elecshy

trons remain in the Auger spectrum The Auger measurement is estimated to

be sensitive to approximately 1 percent coverage Operation of the electron

gun in the high current high voltage Auger mode results in a slow deposition

of carbon from the background Since the Auger mode is used to chemically

characterize the surface the net effect of this beam related contamination

is an overestimation of the carbon impurity concentration at the surface

Some weak structure in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface

occurs between 475 eV and 525 eV No definite conclusions regarding the

127

origin of these peaks can be made The possibility that the structure results

from transitions in tungsten andor other elements is discussed in Chapter 2

83It is worth noting that Watts Jones and Hopkins recently published an

Auger spectrum from a flashed W(lOO) surface in which weak structure can be

seen at approximately the same energies as the unidentified structure observed

here This similarity lends support to the hypothesis that the peaks are

tungsten Auger transitions However it does not rule out other possibilities

The similarity of the data indicates at least that if the structure in

question results from some contaminate the problem is not unique to the

apparatus here It should be emphasized that work function ESD and LEED

data taken here are in good agreement with the literature any possible

contamination has not had a noticeable effect on the measurements

42 Work Function Results

Retarding potential work function measurements have been taken as

a measure of hydrogen coverage Plots of work function changes versus

exposure to hydrogen are presented in Figures 34 and 35 Adsorption of

hydrogen at 600 C yields a maximum work function change of 098 plusmn 004 eV

This is within 10 percent of 090 eV the most consistent monolayer coverage

work function chan~e reported in the literature for the H2 on W(lOO)

8 18 46 47 84system As argued by Armstrong agreement with the values from

the literature is an indication of good (100) orientation This is because

the work function of a faceted surface is a weighted average over the work

44functions of the facets Since hydrogen adsorption increases the work

function of the (100) face far more than the expected facet orientations a

128

faceted (100) surface would have a lower full coverage work function change

than a true (100) surface

Hydrogen adsorption onto W(lOO) at low temperatures increases the

work function by 092 plusmn 004 eV at full coverage This is slightly lower

than the room temperature maximum increase although within experimental

error the two measurements are the same

The increase in work function with hydrogen coverage can be intershy

preted using a simple model in which each adsorbed hydrogen atom acts as a

negative dipole at the surface The work function change on adsorption

43 6~ can be shown to equal the total added dipole moment at the surface

divided by the permittivity Using this and assuming a hydrogen coverage of

15 22xlO atomsem for a 6~ of 098 eV the average dipole moment permax

adsorbed hydrogen atom is calculated to be -013 Debye This result can be

compared to a theoretical account of the dipole moment of a hydrogen ion

63adsorbed onto metal surfaces given by Smith Ying and Kohn Their

calculation indicates that in order to observe a negative dipole moment the

hydrogen ion must be closer than 061 Kto the top plane of substrate ion

cores This would be an upper estimate of the proximity of the hydrogen atoms

to the tungsten substrate The minimum theoretical dipole moment per

63 -2 adsorbed hydrogen ion obtained by Smith et al is -lxlO au (1 au

equals 24 Debye) This value is lower than the observed value of -013

Debye by a factor of 5

o 0Cooling a clean tungsten (100) crystal from 200 C to -150 C

results in a work function increase of approximately 005 eV as shown in

Figure 36 This is an average change with temperature d~dT of 14xlO -4

129

oeV K The temperature dependence of work function for tungsten in this

temperature range has not previously been reported However temperature

dependent changes in work function of this magnitude have been reported for

85 86 85 86Cu Ag Na and K and have been described theoret~ca11y in terms of

both a thermal expansion of the crystal lattice and a temperature dependence

of the crystal electronic structure The work function change observed

here is quantitatively in agreement with experimental data for other elements

and with a theoretical model that describes the temperature dependence solely

in terms of intrinsic properties of a clean metal surface While perturbashy

tions on the crystal surface such as gas adsorption from the background or

bulk to surface diffusion can reasonably be expected to affect the work

function it is not necessary to invoke these causes to explain the changes

seen on cooling the crystal

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results

Under electron bombardment H+ ions can be desorbed from the

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface and from the low temperature undosed

surface The theory that describes this ESD process was first proposed by

37 38Redhead and by Menzel and Gomer A discussion of their model including a

derivation of the energy distribution of ions from the surface is given in

Appendix C In addition a discussion of the ESD phenomena in terms of

surface kinetics is also given in this appendix

ESD has been used to study the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system at

ocrystal temperatures from slightly above room temperature to -150 C Energy

distributions of It ions desorption curves and ion yield versus temperaturemiddot

and coverage data have been obtained

130

431 Room Temperature Results

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from room temperature

W(lOO) is given by the solid curve in Figure 37 The distribution has a

Gaussian line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 plusmn 05 eV

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV The line shape of the energy

distribution remains virtually unchanged as a function of hydrogen coverage

at least to near saturation coverage as shown by the curves in Figure 38

Near full coverage the distribution appears to broaden somewhat This latter

change requires further study which has not been done here

From Equation Cl of Appendix C the energy distribution of the

desorbed ions is given by the expression

(41)

where x is the coordinate normal to the surface Ions that start at x X ]

desorb with energy V N is the surface density of hydrogen atoms adsorbed in

the ground state ~ is the cross section for electron induced excitation ex

of hydrogen from the ground state to the ionic state I~G(xi)12 is the

probability density of hydrogen at Xi P(x ) is the probability that an ioni

starts from the position x and escapes from the surface as an ion and J

dV(X)dxlxi is the slope of the ion-metal interaction evaluated at Xi The

line shape of the energy distribution depends on the metal-neutral intershy

action VG(x) via ~G and depends on the ion-metal interaction V(x) via P(x)

and the slope dV(x)dx

--------------------------~-~~----------------

131

One manifestation of multistate adsorption in which VG(x) and V(x)

are dependent on the binding state is a change in the experimentally

observed energy distribution Multistate adsorption has been observed with

ESD for some systems for example as a function of oxygen coverage on

W(lOO)25 A similar result might be expected for hydrogen adsorption on

W(lOO) since two states ~l and ~2 are seen in thermal desorption spectra

However from the ion energy distribution line shapes for hydrogen on W(lOO)

no evidence of multistate adsorption as a function of coverage is seen The

line shapes of the energy distribution curves are the same at hydrogen

coverages corresponding to both thermal desorption states Hence coverage

dependent interactions which have been proposed to account for the thermal

desorption results and other phenomena reported for this system are not

observed using this technique

Another conclusion to be drawn from the energy distributions is

that the ions originate at an energy position which remains constant with

respect to the Fermi level of the tungsten independent of hydrogen coverage

A shift of nearly a volt in the work function is observed as hydrogen

adsorbs However the ion energy distribution which would be sensitive to

changes of this magnitude if it shifted with the work function remains

fixed in energy

The decay of the room temperature 3 eV a+ ion yield is shown in

Figure 312 A theoretical account of the desorption curve measurement has

been given in Appendix C From that discussion it is seen that a semi logshy

arithmic plot of i ~ - i ~ versus time yields a straight line The totalH Hequil desorption cross section of the adsorption state being probed can be

132

1determined from the slope of the straight line - T where T is given by

T e = (42)

je is the current density used to obtain the desorption curve and e is the

unit of electric charg~

The discussion of the desorption process leading to Equation 42

is based on the assumptions that the total desorption cross section and the

hydrogen sticking probability are independent of hydrogen coverage N The

validity of these assumptions for the hydrogen on tungsten (100) systems

should be examined An indication that the ionic cross section is indepenshy

dent of N for low coverages can be gotten from data presented in Figure 311

The H+ ion yield versus work function change is nearly linear for A~ lt 01 eV

8If coverage is linearly related to work function change as shown by Madey

then the ion yield is directly proportional to N in this low coverage region

A direct proportionality between ion yield and coverage satisfies

Equation C5 only if the ionic desorption cross section Qtis not a

function of coverage In a series of experiments it has been observed that

the equilibrium ion yield which is proportional to the ratio Q+Qt as

given by Equation C8 is independent of N for low coverages Since Q+ and

an expression proportional to Q+Qt are both independent of N it is assumed

tthat Q is a180 independent of N

The dependence of the sticking probability on coverage has been

reported in the literature for the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system Tamm and

87Schmidt found s(N) to be independent of N for coverages of less than 15

133

41 percent Madey found s(N) to be proportional to (l-NN ) Hence the

max

assumption that the sticking probability is independent of N appears valid

to within ~ 10 percent for low coverages For coverages less than 10 the

analysis in Appendix C of the desorption curve measurements can be applied to

the data

A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ for the desorption curve ~quil

shown in Figure 312 is given in Figure 41 The equilibrium level has been

chosen approximately 5 lower than the ion intensity obtained after monishy

toring the decay curve 30 minutes (the final recorded data) since it appeared

from the data the signal was still slowly decreasing In addition with

this correction the data give a better fit to the predicted straight line

t -20 2From the slope of the line -lIT and Equation 41 a Q (400 eV) of 5xlO cm

is calculated Without making the 5 correction in iH+ the best visual equil

straight line fit to the data gives a Qt(400 eV) approximately three times

larger Because the initial hydrogen coverage for this data was 010 monoshy

layerp this cross section represents the total desorption cross section

from the ~2 hydrogen adsorption state ie represents ~ (400 eV) For 2

coverages corresponding to the ~l state the assumptions leading up to

tEquation 42 are not valid and no attempt has been made to calculate 93 bull t 1

The value obtained for 93 (400 eV) is somewhat larger than the cross section 2

38results reported by Menzel and Gomer for hydrogen desorption from a field

emitter tip and is a factor of 10 lower than reported by Jelend and

Menzel10 for desorption from a tungsten ribbon The latter researchers

corrected for readsorption effects which would partly explain their higher

value The value of ~2(400 eV) found here is over three orders of

134

500----~----~--~------------~----

400

- 300 ()

a 0- CT Q)

+ I I 200

+ I

100~__~_____~____~____~__~____~__~ o 200 400 600 800 1000

Time (sec)

SP-1198

Figure 41 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iHt asequil

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 312

----------- -------shy

51

135

magnitude smaller than the total cross section found by Jelend and Menzel

for hydrogen coadsorption with either carbon monoxide or oxygen This is a

verification that these contaminants are not present to any great extent

432 Low Temperature Fast State Results

oIf the tungsten crystal was flashed to 2200 K and subsequently

allowed to cool below room temperature H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface The state from which this hydrogen is desorbed has been labeled

the fast state Experiments have been made to characterize the energetics

and kinetics of this undosed state and also to address the important question

of the origin of the hydrogen which is desorbed These data are discussed

below

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from the fast state

shown in Figure 310 is considerably broader than the distribution obtained

after room temperature hydrogen dosing into the ~ states The peak intensity

is somewhat lower in energy 05 eV than the peak obtained from the ~

states The distribution has a tail extending up several electron volts on

the high energy side It should be noted that the same energy distribution

line shape could be obtained from the state at any position on its desorpshy

tion curve that is the broad distribution is not an anomalous result

reflecting a depletion of the hydrogen fast state during the measurement

A low primary current of lxlO- 7 A was used to take the distribution in

Figure 310 so that electron desorption effects were minimal From a

comparison of energy distributions as given in Figure 310 it is possible

to conclude that the fast state is a separate state from the ~ states

136

This conclusion is supported by cross section calculations below

The intensity of the ion yield from the fast state is temperature

dependent As shown in Figures 315 and 316 the ion yield increases as

the temperature is lowered This phenomena is reversible Using the

assumption that the ion yield is proportional to coverage it is concluded

that the fast state coverage is a function of temperature

The desorption curve obtained from the undosed tungsten (100)

surface has been measured and is given in Figure 313 The decay time is

seen to be extremely rapid compared to the analogous measurement taken after

hydrogen dosing at room temperature A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ ~quil

measured from the data in Figure 313 is given in Figure 42 The total

tdesorption cross section for the fast state Qf(400 eV) calculated from the

slope of the straight line in Figure 42 is -17lxlO 2 cm This is nearly

three orders of magnitude higher than ~2(400 eV)

Since Q~(400 eV) is on the same order of magnitude as the cross

section obtained for hydrogen desorption from carbon monoxide or oxygen

51contaminated surfaces the possibility that the fast state results from

surface contamination has been examined No direct evidence was obtained to

support such a hypothesis No carbon or oxygen peaks were observed in Auger

electron spectra from the cold surface It is estimated that these spectra

were sensitive to 1 percent of a monolayer coverage No carbon or oxygen

ions that could be attributed to the fast state phenomena were observed in

time of flight measurements It might be noted that Jelend and Menzel

observed the high cross section state labeled ~ at room temperature after

simultaneously adsorbing hydrogen plus CO or oxygen Almost no fast state

137

100

-fJ)

Q U

50 J CT

+0gt I I

+ I

10~~~--~~~~~~--~~~--~~~~

o 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Time (sec)

sp- J~4l

Figure 42 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iH+ as equi1

a function of time The data are illeasured from the desorption curve given in Figure 313

138

o lOhydrogen was detected here above 0 c Jelend and Menzel did not observe

any H+ ion yield from a cleaned surface if cooled to _13 0 C Since the gt

signal is weak at that temperature it is possible their apparatus did not

detect it It is also possible that they did not populate their surface

with hydrogen by cooling In any case its not possible to make any

simple correlations between the fast state and the contamination related x

state However as discussed below the equivalence of the two states

cannot be ruled out

It is of interest to determine the origin of the hydrogen which

populates the fast state There are several possibilities This state

could populate as a result of adsorption from the background Alternatively

88 89 hydrogen since it is endothermically soluble in tungsten m~ght

diffuse from interstitial sites to surface sites as the temperature of the

crystal is lowered A discussion of these phenomena has been given in

19Appendix C The latter suggestion has been offered as a possible

explanation of the c(2x2) LEED pattern observed on cooling In addition a

combination of these two processes could be occurring

Experiments have been performed in which the coverage in the fast

state has been monitored as a function of both adsorption time and system

background pressure If the source is external the dependence of N on

adsorption time and ambient pressure can be determined by solving Equation

C4 For the case of no incident electron beam (je = 0) and if the sticking

probability is assumed constant with coverage (probably a good assumption

since the change in coverage due to adsorption from the background would be

extremely small at the experimental ambient pressures) then the change in

139

coverage in the fast state would be expected to be linearly related to the

time during which adsorption occurs ie linearly proportional to the

variable adsorption time Furthermore for a fixed adsorption time the

coverage would be expected to be linearly proportional to the partial pressure

of the populating species

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

40 pressure is considerably more invo1ved Several points can be made

however from the discussion in Appendix C The time dependence of N due

to diffusion could be similar to that expected from background adsorption

ie linear with adsorption time However background pressure doesnt

enter into the diffusion process If the fast state phenomena is only

diffusion related the coverage N would be expected to be independent of

background pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence

for adsorption from the background

The rate of populating the fast state has been measured by turning

off the electron gun for various time intervals (setting j = 0) referred to e

as adsorption times and observing the build up of the ion signal while the

gun is off The increase in the fast state is then assumed proportional to

the increase in the ion yield i ~ - i ~ when the electron gun is Hinitia1 Hequi1

turned back on The dependence of the population rate on adsorption time is

shown in Figure 317 N is found to be linearly related to adsorption time

As discussed above this time behavior can reasonably be expected to be

observed for either an external or an internal source

The rate of population of the fast state has also been observed as

140

a function of hydrogen pressure admitted to the background from the gas

handling system As discussed in Section 354 the rate of population did

not depend on the impingement rate from the hydrogen background Hence it

is concluded that hydrogen from the gas handling system does not populate

the fast state This does not rule out external adsorption however Other

sources of hydrogen in the ambient such as rrt H H2 in an excited state or

hydrogen from a simple compound such as H 0 could be the source2

Although the population of the fast state was not affected by the

background pressure of hydrogen (H ) from the gas handling system there is2

evidence that this state does result from adsorption from an external source

This conclusion is based on experiments in which the Bayard Alpert gauge

sensitivity was increased by nulling out the x-ray limiting current Changes

-12in the background pressure on the order of 2xlO Torr were observed experishy

mentally if the crystal was flashed while it was facing the spectrometer

One explanation of this observation is that a flash in the up position warms

experimental chamber surfaces most likely the grids and electron gun drift

tube The resulting pressure increase occurs because of an increased rate of

thermal desorption from these surfaces The linear dependence of the

equilibrium current i ~ with pressure change as found experimentallyHequil

and shown in the top panel of Figure 319 is expected if external adsorption

populates the fast state This can be seen from Equation C9 Likewise the

rate of change of coverage in the fast state is seen to be proportional to

the pressure change in the lower panel of Figure 319 This is also expected

for external adsorption If bulk to surface diffusion were the source of the

hydrogen no dependence on pressure would be expected Hence Figure 319

141

indicates that hydrogen becomes desorbable because of adsorption from the

background It is not possible to say what species is adsorbing

An interesting calculation that can be made from the current nulling

experiments is an estimate of the coverage in the adsorption state responsible

for the fast state hydrogen ions Since the relation

(43)

can be obtained easily from Equation C9 and since ~i + is on the same Hequil

order as iH+ the background partial pressure that populates the undosed equil

-12state is on the same order of magnitude as ~P or about lxlO Torr The

coverage N at equilibrium can now be obtained by setting Equation C4 equal

-12to O At a pressure of 10 Torr the impingement rate of hydrogen molecules

9 2 90 for example is 15xlO moleculescm -sec and the impingement rate of other

species would be of this same magnitude Assuming a sticking probability of

-17 21 a total desorption cross section of 10 cm as calculated and a current

-4 2density of 5lxlO Acm the surface coverage in the fast state would be

~ 10-11

atomscm2 or 10-4 monolayer This calculation depends on the

assumption that the pressure change at the crystal face in the experimental

chamber is the same as measured at the gauge Experiments performed in which

the crystal was rotated to the down position after flashing in the up position

indicated that the flux of the populating species at the surface was about

twice as great when the crystal faced the spectrometer than when it faced

down Since the pressure at the bottom of the experimental chamber should

142

be about the same as the gauge pressure the calculated coverage could be

low by 50 percent It should be noted however that this is still 50 times

too low to amount to 1 percent of a monolayer

From the above discussion it can be concluded that the fast

state is related to both the temperature of the crystal and to the

background pressure of some unidentified species It is not possible to

determine if this state is a separate state from the K hydrogen state

previously reported even though it appears under different circumstances

In fact since the coverage in the state is so low Auger spectroscopy

would not be sensitive to any contamination of this same magnitude The

possibility of undetected contamination accompanying the fast state cannot

be ruled out It is possible that the adsorbing species does not contain

hydrogen as such but rather is a species which promotes a small amount

of surface hydrogen (from the background or diffusion) to the fast state

It can also be concluded that since coverages less than 1 percent of a

monolayer would not be expected to strongly alter the LEED spot symmetry

the half order spots seen on cooling do not arise from the fast state

433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results

ESD measurements have been made on the low temperature tungsten

crystal after dosing with hydrogen from the jet Energy distributions at

different coverages of hydrogen are given in Figure 39 The distributions

143

are seen to have a peak at 3 ~ 05 eV in agreement with the peak positions

in the data obtained from the ~ states at 60oC However the energy distri shy

butions are somewhat broader than the higher temperature data The fast

state yields a broad energy distribution and it is possible that the results

of Figure 39 represent simultaneous desorption from both the fast state and

the ~ states This hypothesis can be tested by analyzing a desorption curve

from the low temperature dosed surface If two states with different cross

sections are being desorbed then a semilogarithmic plot of the desorption

curve should be the sum of two straight lines The quantity i ~ - i ~ H HSquil

measured from the data of Figure 315 is plotted in Figure 43 The curve

can be separated into two straight line segments from which total desorption

17 19 2 cross sections of 16xlO- cm2 and 12xlO- cm are calculated These

cross sections correspond within plusmn 60 percent to the calculated values of

t tQf(400 eV) and QS2(400 eV) Hence it is concluded that at low temperatures

the fast state and S-like states co-adsorb

It should be noted however that the interaction of hydrogen from

the jet with the tungsten surface at low temperatures is not exactly the

o same as at 60 C This can be seen from the plot of 3 eV ion yield versus

work function change given in Figure 311 At both 600 C and at -lSOoC the

results are qualitatively similar the ion yield increases steeply with

initial hydrogen adsorption reaches a maximum and then decreases to less

than lS percent of the maximum value with additional hydrogen adsorption

Hence it is assumed that a similar phenomena is occurring at both temperashy

tures However the work function change at maximum intensity for the low

temperature measurement was found to be repeatedly lower by 007 eV than the

144

SP-H24

Figure 43 Semilogarithmic plot of the quantity ia+ - ia+ as equ~l

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 314

145

peak ~ntens~ty for measurements taken at 600 C If the expression relating

coverage to work function change Equation 35 is valid at both 600

C and

at -1500 C then the 007 eV shift would represent a dosed coverage difference

of 7 of a monolayer The ion yield at the low temperature would maximize at

a dosed coverage of 11 which is 40 lower than the coverage for the maximum

ion yield at the higher temperature If the decrease in ion yield for higher

hydrogen coverages arises from interactions between adsorbed atoms these calshy

culations suggest that the interactions observe a different coverage dependence

at the two temperatures Alternate explanations are possible for the measured

difference Equation 35 may not be valid at both temperatures It is possible

that the work function change per adsorbed atom is smaller at the lower tempshy

erature and the dosed coverages are the same at the ion yield maximas It is

also possible that hydrogen not visible in ESD or electron loss spectroscopy

measurements~ but capable of interacting with dosed hydrogen~ diffuses to the

surface at the low temperature This latter alternative~ while a possible exshy

planation for the LEED phenomena would raise many questions as to why such

hydrogen is not detectable with other techniques

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements

Low energy electron diffraction measurements made on the clean and

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface have been presented in Section 36 The

symmetry of the LEED patterns has been noted as a function of hydrogen coverage

and crystal temperature Elastic intensity profiles for three LEED beams are

given in Figures 321 through 323 LEED beam intensities as a function of

temperature have been monitored These are given in Figures 324 and 325

General agreement between symmetry patterns seen here and those

published in the literature18 19 is good The (lxl) LEED pattern

146

characteristic of clean tungsten at room temperature changes into a c(2x2)

pattern with initial hydrogen adsorption With further adsorption the LEED

pattern splits into four spots becomes blurred and finally at full coverage

returns to a (lx1) pattern When the crystal is cooled to temperatures below

room temperatures half order spots become visible without any dosing of the

crystal from the gas system

The intensity of the room temperature half order spots maximizes at

a coverage corresponding to ~~ = 015 eV or 015 monolayer using Equation

35 This is close to the 016 monolayer coverage at which Yonehara and

19 18Schmidt found these beams to maximize Estrup and Anderson on the

other hand observed sharp and intense half order LEED spots at a coverage

of 029 monolayer The coverages reported here were calculated from work

function changes using the linear relation between work function change and

coverage obtained by Madey by a flash desorption technique In both other

18experiments 19 coverage was measured directly using flash desorption The

c(2x2) pattern is associated with the ~2 adsorption state The structures

proposed to account for this state as given in Section 128 predict that

the maximum of the half order spots should occur at 025 monolayer coverage

15(one monolayer being 2x10 atomscm2) Estrup and Andersons measurement is

closest to this coverage While it is not known why there is such a large

discrepancy between the results it should be noted that determination of

coverage using flash desorption techniques is difficult with large uncershy

tainties in pressure gauge calibration and system volume The results given

here in terms of ~~ should be considerably more accurate

_ _____---__---shy

147

Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) (11) and (1212) LEED

beams are given in Figures 321 through 323 respectively The profiles

o 0 were taken at 60 C and -150 C from both a clean tungsten surface and a

surface dosed with hydrogen to 015 monolayer (This coverage corresponded

to the observed maximum in the half order pattern) As seen in these three

figures corresponding clean room temperature and low temperature profiles are

nearly identical Adsorption of hydrogen to a coverage of 015 does cause

some changes in the clean profiles with the same changes being observed at

both temperatures Hydrogen adsorption considerably enhances the 42 eV peak

observed in the (1212) profile and shifts it in energy approximately + 1 eVe

Adsorption also leads to a change from a single peak to a double peaked

structure of decreased intensity in the (11) profile above 100 eVe Adsorption

causes very little change in the (10) profile line shape above 60 eV

although the 65 eV 835 eV and 110 eV peaks are lowered in energy approxishy

mately 15 eV 05 eV and 15 eV respectively Between 30 eV and 60 eV

there are some adsorption effects on the profiles

These elastic intensity profiles can be compared to corresponding

data previously reported in the literature In Figure 44 a comparison is

made between clean surface (10) and (11) profiles taken here and reported

9lby Wei The agreement is good except in the energy range below 50 eVe

This poor agreement below 50 eV is also true for the (00) beam which is not

compared here The low energy discrepancies may be caused by the ambient

magnetic field present in Weis target region In fact it is surprising

that the data agrees as well as it does considering the different experimenshy

tal conditions under which the two sets of data were obtained Figure 45

148

Figure 44 Comparison of (11) and (10) elastic intensity profiles from the clean tungsten (100) surface Data includes profiles taken here at 60degC and -150degC and results reported by Wei94 bull

149

() --c 1

gt 0-Q 0-gt-()

c OJ-c

H

o 50 100 150 200

xl

xl

X2

Elastic Intensity Profiles W (100) Clean 8i = 0deg

g = (11)

g = (10)

Withrow (-150degC)

Withrow (60degC)

Wei (250-300degC)

Pr imary Energy (eV) SP-1l92

150

Figure 45 Comparison of (1212) elastic intensity profiles from tungsten (100) surface after hydrogen adsorption into the ~2 state Data includes profiles obtained here and results reported by Estrup and Anderson18 and Papageorgopoulos and Chen2l

0

151

- ()-

--()

c Q)-c H

Elastic Intensity Profiles H2 on W(lOO) 8j =0deg 9 = (1212)

Withrow

Estrup and Anderson

Papageorgopoulos and Chen

o 50 100 150 Primary Energy (eV) SP-1l93

200

152

shows a comparison of elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam taken

after hydrogen adsorption From the general appearance of the data Estrup

18and Andersons profi1e appears shifted up in energy about 5 eV with respect

to the profile taken here This suggests the possibility of a discrepancy

in the energy measurement The line shapes are similar howeve~ although

Estrup and Anderson found one well-defined peak around 75 eV whereas in this

work a peak at 67 eV and an additional shoulder between 85 eV and 90 eV is

21seen Papageorgopou1os and Chen did not observe the large peak below 50 eV

nor the double peaked structure above 100 eV reported by both other researchers

These discrepancies cou1deasi1y be due to a residual magnetic field in the

work of Papageorgopou1os and Chen It can be concluded from these comparishy

sons that control over experimental conditions is crucial for the reproduction

of data

Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores

16 17 can be extracted from a sufficient set of elastic intensity proh1es

Although the data base is small here a preliminary analysis of the clean

tungsten data has been conducted by Duke using a microscopic quantum-field

16theory formalism of low energy electron diffraction In this formalism a

model for the electron-solid interaction is used in an attempt to match

theoretical line shape predictions to experimentally observed elastic LEED

intensity profiles An important feature of this microscopic approach is the

strong interactions between the incident electron and valence electrons in

the solid The inelastic mean free path A is about 3-8 X for most ee

materials for electron energies of 30 ~ E S 200 As a consequence electrons

which are observed elastically have been backscattered within the first

--------------

153

several surface layers of the solid and hence LEED elastic profiles are

surface sensitive Elastic backscattering of the electrons is described by

short range electron-ion core interactions Information on the configurashy

tion of the surface ion cores is extracted from the elastic energy profiles

by varying parameters in the theory and obtaining the best fit to the data

Theoretical analysis of elastic energy profiles from tungsten at energies

above 100 eV is computationally difficult because of the large number of

phase shifts needed to describe the electron-ion core scattering Hence the

exp arimental profiles were taken only for energies E 1gt 125 eV pr~

Comparisons of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity

profiles for the (00) (10) and (11) beams are given in Figure 46 The

theoretical fit to the experimental data was made by taking an inelastic

mean free path Aee equal to 8 K and an inner potential Vl which represents

t he rea1 part 0 f h 1 1 i on16 equa1 to 8 eV Thetee ectron-e ectron 1nteract

agreement in peak position is good for the (10) beam in the range

25 eV lt E lt 125 eV and for the (11) beam in the range 60 eV lt E lt 100 eV ~ ~ ~ ~

The theoretical and experimental line shapes of the (10) beam show remarkable

agreement but the line shapes of the (11) beam do not fit as well For the

(00) beam the theoretical profile is not similar to the experimental plot

except for the peak at 117 eV Most of this discrepancy for the (00) beam

probably arises from the differences in theoretical and experimental incishy

dence and aximuthal angles used to obtain the profiles The theoretical

profile was calculated assuming a primary electron beam normally incident

experimentally this is not possible with the spectrometer ~sed here since

the (00) beam would not be visible on the LEED screen under these conditions

~~ ~~-----------

---------------------~------------------

154

o

III C

~ C

H 1 o

1

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

-Experiment Withrow and Luscher

g =(00)

o-o-oTheory Duke T = 10 K ej =cpj =0 V=8eVI Aee 811

o 140 SP-1l91

Figure 46 Comparison of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity profiles for clean tungsten (100) surface Theoretical results have been calculated by Duke

155

Data has been obtained for the temperature dependence of clean

elastic intensity profiles No differences in the clean surface (10) and

(11) profiles taken at 600 C and -1500 C are seen even though the LEED pattern

symmetry changes from a (lxl) pattern to a c(2x2) pattern Apparently these

two elastic intensity profiles are not sensitive to the scattering geometry

changes that are manifested in the LEED pattern change

19 92 It has been speculated that the extra half order spots may

result from hydrogen on the surface As shown above the (10) and (11)

profiles dont change even though the half order spots appear on cooling

This may not be surprising if the extra spots seen on cooling the undosed

crystal are related to hydrogen on the surface The cross section for hydrogen

92 93backscattering 1S very weak compared to scattering from tungsten While

a priori it is not necessarily true that the addition of a weak scatterer will

have little effect on intensity profiles this does seem to be the case for

hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten Adsorption of hydrogen has no effect on

18the (00) profile from tungsten (100) and it was found here that~daorption

of hydrogen has very little effect on the (10) beam profile out to 015

monolayer coverage as can be concluded from Figure 321 On the other hand

it is true that adsorption of hydrogen did alter the (11) beam A second

explanation for the extra spots seen on cooling the crystal is that they

result from a tungsten surface reconstruction No theoretical calculations

have been performed which would indicate how reconstruction would affect the

intensity profiles The sensitivity of the profiles to an hypothesized

surface atom reconstruction could be determined from calculations similar to

those leading to the theoretical profiles given in Figure 46 Such a

156

theoretical calculation would be of interest as it would help evaluate how

much credence should be given to a reconstruction hypothesis

More than one atomic geometry may be associated with a given surface

translational symmetry ie associated with the same LEED spot pattern

Different geometries however would be manifested via differences in the

1intensity profiles associated with the same spot pattern After hydrogen

o 0adsorption to 015 monolayer at 60 C and -150 C both the LEED pattern symmetr~

c(2x2) and the elastic intensity profiles are the same Thus this data would indicate hydrogen adsorbs into the same surface atomic geometry at the two

temperatures A comparison of elastic intensity profiles from the undosed and

hydrogen dosed cold surface is given in Figure 47 The LEED pattern for both

conditions has a c(2x2) symmetry The profiles are not the same particularly

the (11) profile above 100 eV and the (1212) profile below 50 eV Hence

the atomic geometry responsible for the two sets of profiles may be different

even though the observed pattern symmetry c(2x2) is the same

The intensity dependence on temperature of the LEED beams has been

observed The intensity of integral order beams monitored from the clean

surface increases with decreasing temperature as shown in Figure 324 The

22 95 exponential temperature dependence obtained is pred1cted from a kinematic

treatment of electron scattering in which thermal vibrations are included via

an effective Debye-Waller factor Experimental Debye temperatures aD can

be calculated from the slopes of the straight lines in Figure 324 22 96

For the (10) beam taken with a primary energy of 1105 eV aD is

calculated to be 280oK 97 This is on the order of the Debye temperature for

~ 0bulk tungsten and higher than the Debye temperature of 183 K found by

157

Figure 47 Comparison of experimental (10) (11) and (1212) elastic intensity profiles from a cold tungsten (100) surface for hydrogen adsorption in the fast state (undosed surface) and in the ~2 state

158

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(100)

g (10)

1 o

o

OJ 0deg T -150degC Undosed and Dosed with H2

shyCl shy+shy 1 0 shyCl

o gt +shy(J)

c Q)

C 0 H

g (1212)

1

o

o

o 140

159

Estrup13 for the (10) beam for intensities taken between 6000K and 8000K

0The Debye temperature for the (11) beam is calculated to be 410 K The

middot h 1 1 95va1ues 0f eD f ound h ere seem to be anoma1ous 1y h19 S1nce ca cu at10ns

indicate that the surface Debye temperature should be lower than the bulk

Debye temperature

The temperature dependence of the half order beam is not the same

as found for the integer order beams Figure 325 shows that the intensity

of this beam increases at different exponential rates over two temperature

regions Down to about -750C the intensity increase is exponential but with

a steeper temperature dependence than observed with the integer order beams

Below -75oC the intensity increases at approximately the same exponential

rate as the integer order beams This same result is found at primary

energies of both 42 eV and 115 eV The effect is reversible with temperature

Yonehara and Schmidt19 measured the temperature dependence of the half order

beams and fit their results to a straight line on a linear scale However

for the data they took immediately after flashing to 25000K an exponential

dependence as found here appears to be as good if not better fit

0Below -75 C the half order beam intensity increases at approximately

the same exponential rate as the integer order beams This suggests that in

this lower temperature region the intensity increase can be explained by the

0 0Debye-Wa1ler factor However between 100 C and -75 C it is not known why

the (1212) spots appear and then increase in intensity so strongly

The intensity dependence on temperature of the (1212) beam

below OoC can be compared to the temperature dependence of the fast state H+

ion intensity These data are given in Figures 312 and 325 Because the

----------------~~ ~~~~~

160

a+ ion yield from the fast state also increases with decreasing temperature

a possible correlation between the appearance of this ion signal and the

appearance of the half order beams is suggested It is tempting to hypothesize

that the fast state is adsorbed into a c(2x2) array and hence half order spots

are produced on cooling However this connection probably cannot be made

For one thing the estimated coverage of the fast state is several orders of

magnitude below a coverage reasonably expected to exert an influence on the

LEED pattern In addition while the fast state has a high total desorption

cross section with the ion signal decaying rapidly after turning oriltthe

electron gun no evidence of this type of behavior is found for the LEED spot

intensities if a corresponding experiment is made A depletion of the fast

state in the electron beam does not affect the half order LEED spot intensities

oFinally in the region below middot75 C the ion signal increases reversibly with

temperature at a steep rate while the LEED spot intensity increases reversshy

ib1y at a slow rate ie the intensity correlation is not good in this

range These arguments do not refute the possibility that the half order

spots are a hydrogen phenomena They strongly indicate however that a

correlation cannot be made between the hydrogen ions observed from the undosed

surface and the appearance of the half order spots aside from the obvious

result that they both occur over the same temperature range It would appear

more reasonable to suggest that the formation of a c(2x2) scattering symmetry

on the surface via reconstruction or some other mechanism provides a

binding site into which a species from the ambient can adsorb and subseshy

quent1y be desorbed The identity of that species is not known

-----------shy

161

45 Electron Scattering Results

Energy loss spectra for electrons scattered from the clean and

hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surface are given in Figures 326 and 327

The second derivative mode has been employed in order to suppress background

as discussed in Appendix B Data have been presented for energy losses

between a and 40 eV for a primary electron beam energy of 110 eV

Several general comments can be made A comparison of the clean

spectra taken at the two temperatures shows they are nearly identical The

only difference is a slight enhancement in the low temperature data of the

shoulder at w = 75 eV (barely evident in the figures) It might be noted

that adsorption of hydrogen produces as peak at 75 eV and the small change

in the low temperature spectrum near this energy may be an indication of a

small hydrogen coverage An attempt was made to observe effects of the fast

state on the clean spectrum After cooling the crystal the fast state was

allowed to populate by turning the gun off for adsorption times of 10 minutes

The spectrum taken after preparing the crystal in this way was identical to

those obtained immediately after cooling Hence fast state hydrogen does

not perturb the electronic structure unlike ~ state hydrogen This result

is not surprising because of the very low coverages calculated for the fast

state from the desorption measurement

Hydrogen adsorption into the ~ states perturbs the clean surface

o 0loss spectrum The same changes are observed at both 60 C and -150 C The

most dramatic changes that occur with increasing coverage are the growth of

a 75 eV loss the movement down in loss energy of the structure at 21 eV in

the clean spectrum and the annihilation of the peak at 25 eV In addition

the loss peak at 107 eV decreases in intensity somewhat

162

Definite changes in the loss spectra are seen (for example at

w = 75 eV) for work function changes of 003 eV This is a coverage of only

3 percent hydrogen At coverages corresponding to a work function change of

015 eV the 75 eV peak is well-developed and the 21 eV structure has moved

down ~ 1 eV While hydrogen is adsorbing at room temperature from 0 to 15

percent of a monolayer half order spots develop in the LEED pattern As

noted before half order spots also develop in the LEED pattern by cooling the

ocrystal to -150 C However electron loss measurements from the cold flashed

surface dont show any changes that correspond to hydrogen on the surface

Thus no correlation can be drawn using electron loss measurements between

the half order patterns obtained by hydrogen dosing and by cooling the crystal

Interpretation of the structure in the energy loss spectra taken

here is nontrivial Although the data incorporates information on the elecshy

tronic structure of the surface and near surface region ie represents

bulk and surface single particle transitions and collective oscillations

both theoretical and experimental complexities arise in attempting to extract

electronic structure from the data While the electron energy loss has been

measured with high resolution information on the momentum transfer ~ q

involved in the electron solid inelastic interaction is not retained since

1) the analyzer integrates over a wide range of ~ qs and 2) the backscattered

electron has undergone at least two collisions - an inelastic scattering

with an accompanying momentum transfer which is not enough to turn the

electron around and an elastic scattering which does Hence the analyzer is

expected to be sensitive to loss mechanisms which are well-defined in energy

but relatively independent of momentum transfer Transitions satisfying these

163

conditions are possible in tungsten Luscher has shown25 that at least one

relatively flat and narrow d-band in tungsten located near the Fermi level

acts as the final state for electron excitations involving core electrons

This d-band may be operative as a final state for transitions involving

valence and adsorbate electrons as well

25The structure at 210 eV and 255 eV has been identified as

resulting from surface and bulk plasmons Adsorption of hydrogen increases

the energy of the surface plasmon but does not affect the energy of the bulk

plasmon

The energy losses at 381 eV 346 eV and 324 eV remain constant

as a function of hydrogen coverage These losses correspond in both relative

strengths and separation in energy to tungsten core electron excitations from

he 5 an (doublet ) eve 1s f ound h at 36 Vt p d 4f 1 1nmiddot x-ray p otoem1SS10n 99 9 e

333 eV and 311 eV below the Fermi level A comparison of these photo-

emission values to the energy losses observed here would indicate the position

of the final state operative in the energy loss measurements is 13 eV above

the Fermi level

It would be convenient to use this value) 13 eV for the final

state energy in interpreting the rest of the sharply peaked structure arising

from electron transitions There are difficulties with such an approach

however The data being compared in calculating the final state energy

location have been obtained with two techniques that perturb the adsorbateshy

plus-solid system in distinctly different ways The observed energy losses

in electron scattering are strongly influenced by interband oscillators

electron screening and relaxation effects and these perturbations are not

164

constant as a function of loss energy Hence extension of the 13 eV value

in interpreting data at other loss energies may not be valid None the less

using the 13 eV final state the peaks in the clean ELS spectrum at 25 eV

and 40 eV would correspond to peaks in the photoemission spectra at 12 eV

(25 eV - 13 eV) and at 27 eV (40 eV - 13 eV) respectively There is

no obvious correspondence between these peaks and structure seen in clean

35 36surface photoemission spectra The structure changes on adsorption in

the ELS spectra for 0 eV S w ~ 4 eV may reflect the sharp photoemission loss

which appears at 25 eV as hydrogen coverage increases The strong 75 eV

energy loss which appears in the ELS spectra as hydrogen adsorbs onto the

crystal would correspond to structure in photoemission data near 62 eV

(75 eV - 13 eV) Recently photoemission peaks at 52 eV and between

10068 eV and 78 eV have been reported From these comparisons it can be

seen that quantitative interpretation of the fine structure in the energy

loss measurements cannot be made with this simple model

165

CHAPTER 5

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

An experimental apparatus for surface research has been designed

constructed and successfully placed in operation It incorporates the

necessary hardware and electronics for performing several complementary

surface probing techniques including Auger electron spectroscopy retarding

potential work function measurements low energy electron diffraction electron

energy loss spectroscopy and electron stimulated desorption of ions System

electronics allow the instrument to be easily switched between the techniques

The apparatus has been used to study the chemisorption of hydrogen on a

tungsten single crystal surface over the temperature range 600C to -150

0C

The instrument combines an electron gun with an energy spectrometer

a LEED display system and a crystal manipulator The electron gun is capable

of focusing a monoenergetic electron current of up to 21 ~A onto a

macroscopic sample The gun has been operated from 5 eV to 1800 eV The

high resolution high sensitivity spectrometer consists of a retarding field

analyzer in series with two electrostatic deflection analyzers The energy

resolution of the spectrometer is 21 without using the retarding field

analyzer This can be improved to less than 1 under some conditions by

applying a retarding field The spectrometer output can be detected using

a atemeter or using modulation techniques The instrument has been used to

analyze electron and ion signals from the sample and to determine the charge

to mass ratio of desorbed ions The experimental sample a tungsten crystal

which has been polished to within 01 0 of the (100) face is mounted on the

166

end of a crystal manipulator The manipulator is used to position the sample

as needed A two grid LEED display system has been used to study LEED

pattern symmetry The intensities of LEED spots have been monitored with a

spot photometer

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental conditions using Auger electron spectroscopy The Auger

spectrum obtained after flashing the crystal to 22000 K is free of carbon and

oxygen Auger structure The electron gun could be operated under normal

experimental conditions without contaminating the surface but a carbon Auger

peak appears if high gun currents and voltages are used This effect Crul

be taken into consideration when interpreting the data Some weak structure

in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface is seen between 475 eV and

525 eVa It is not possible to conclusively determine if this structure

results from Auger transitions in tungsten or from some other source

Retarding potential work function measurements have been made as

a reproducible measure of hydrogen coverage Adsorption of hydrogen onto

othe tungsten (100) crystal at 60 C yields a maximum work function change of

098 plusmn 004 eVa This is in good agreement with previously reported values

The work function change with exposure to hydrogen for the tungsten sample

at -lSOoc was found to be the same within experimental accuracy as found

at higher temperature The maximum work function change at -lSOoc is

092 plusmn 004 eVa Cooling the flashed crystal from 2200 C to -lSOoC resulted

in an increase in the work function of approximately 005 eVa An intrinsic

(clean surface) temperature dependence of this magnitude appears reasonable

from theoretical considerations

167

The time-of-flight technique employed for mass analysis was found

to work well Ion species H+ and 0+ as well as H + have been identified2

Relative intensities of the ion yields could only be estimated with this

technique as instrumented H+ ions are electron desorbed from the surface

after adsorption of hydrogen In addition H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface after a flash if the crystal was cooled below room temperature No

HZ+ ions were desorbed from the crystal However H2+ and H+ ions produced

by ionization of the background and also by ESD from surfaces in the experishy

mental chamber were detected under certain operating conditions This signal

could be separated from the ions originating at the crystal surface by biasing

the crystal several volts positive with respect to the spectrometer

The distribution in energy of H+ ions electron desorbed from a 60 0 C

tungsten (100) surface has been observed The distribution has a normal line

shape with a peak intensity at 30 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a half width

of Z6 eV No evidence of distinct ~l and ~Z adsorption states was found in

the energy distribution line shape the distribution is the same for coverages

corresponding to both the ~Z adsorption state and the ~l plus ~2 adsorption

states The intensity of the U+ ion signal is coverage dependent The deshy

pendence found here is in agreement with previously reported work The maxshy

imum in intensity of the ion yield occurs for a work function change of 018

eV The total desorption cross section for hydrogen ions from the ~2 state

is 5xlO-ZO cmZ bull

An H+ ion signal can be desorbed from the undosed (100) surface if

the crystal temperature is lowered below room temperature T~fs represents

a previously unreported hydrogen adsorption state Experiments in which

the pressure was carefully monitored indicate that this hydrogen results

168

from adsorption onto the crystal from the background However the state

labeled the fast state is not populated by the adsorption of H2 from the

gas handling system The adsorbing species that populates the fast state

is not known Hydrogen coverage in the fast state is estimated to be ~10-4

monolayer which is an extremely small coverage The fast state hydrogen

desorbs with a broad energy distribution which has a peak intensity at

25 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a tail extending up to gt9 eV The total

17 2desorption cross section for H+ from this state is high lxlO- cm This is

on the same order of magnitude as the cross section for desorption of the

~ hydrogen state However no evidence of CO or oxygen contaminants which

are associated with the ~ state was found The techniques used to chemshy

ically characterize the surface were sensitive to about 1 percent of a mono-

layer so these two contaminants could have been present at coverages less

than 1 percent

Hydrogen (H2) dosed onto the low temperature surface co-adsorbs

with the fast state in a separate e state This can be concluded from energy

distribution and desorption curve measurements The maximum ion yield obshy

tainable from the low temperature surface occurs for a work function change

of 011 eV This is 007 eV lower than the maximum in the ion yield from

the room temperature hydrogen dosed surface This difference may indicate

that the mechanism responsible for the decrease in ion yield as the ~l state

fills is operative at a lower hydrogen coverage at low temperatures An

alternative possibility is that hydrogen coverage at the low temperature can

not be measured by the same expression relating coverage to work function

change as used at the higher temperature

169

Low energy electron diffraction pattern changes observed as a

function of hydrogen coverage on the room temperature surface are in agreeshy

ment with those reported in the literature The surface translational symshy

metry is strongly coverage dependent The maximum in the c(2x2) pattern

associated with the ~2 state occurs at a work function change of 015 eV for

room temperature adsorption If the crystal is flashed to ~22000K and then

cooled below room temperature the (lxl) pattern characteristic of the clean

surface changes into a c(2x2) pattern Since H+ ions can be electron desorbed

from the flashed surface if the crystal is cooled to this same temperature

range and since the ~2 state hydrogen is known to produce a c(2x2) pattern

it has been suggested that the low temperature c(2x2) LEED pattern may result

from hydrogen on the surface However no evidence was found to support this

hypothesis The ions desorbed from the cold surface did not originate from

the f 2 state but from a distinctly different state labeled the fast state

It is questioned whether the low coverage in the fast state is sufficient to

produce half order LEED spots There is no indication from the ELS measureshy

ments that hydrogen has diffused to the surface from the bulk Electron

energy loss spectra show almost no change on cooling the crystal below room

temperature These spectra are sensitive to electronic structure changes

resulting from hydrogen adsorption of as little as 3 percent of a monolayer

The (10) and (11) LEED beam intensity profiles taken from the undosed surface

are not changed by cooling the crystal It would be of interest to compare

this experimental result to theoretical elastic intensity profile calculations

from both a normal and a recons tructed tungsten surface This would help

determine if reconstruction is a viable explanation for the cold surface

170

c(2x2) phenomenon

Low energy electron diffraction elastic intensity profiles for

several beams have been reported from the clean tungsten (100) surface and

from this surface dosed with hydrogen in the ~2 state These profiles have

been compared to published data where possible Careful control over expershy

imental parameters is essential in order to obtain agreement between the data

The clean surface intensity profiles have been compared to preliminary theoretshy

ical calculations While fair agreement Catl be obtained both experimental

and theoretical problems must be solved before a reliable calculation of

atomic geometry for the hydrogen over layer can be made A comparison of

experimental profiles for the low temperature undosed and hydrogen dosed

c(2x2) patterns suggests that the atomic geometries responsible for these

identical patterns arenot the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been presented as a

f~~ction of hydrogen coverage Changes in the electronic structure at the

surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption are observed Structure due to

the surface and hulk plasmons are identified and peaks due to tungsten

Sp and 4f core level transitions can be identified by comparison to published

photoemission data Interpretation of other structure in the spectra requires

more study

171

REFERENCES

1 C B Duke Jap J App1 Phys 13 (1974) to be published

2 For example see R R Ford Advan Catalysis 21 51 (1970) for review of CO adsorption on transition metals or J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chern Phys 54 4969 (1971) and T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et PrPri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155 for a review of hydrogen adsorption on tungsten (100)

3 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Vac Sci Techno1 ~ 63 (1971)

4 P A Redhead Vacuum~ 203 (1962)

5 G Ehrlich Advan Catalysis 14 221 (1963)

6 L A Petermann Progress in Surface Science vol 3 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1972) p 1

7 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chern Phys 21 5352 (1969)

8 T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et Propri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155

9 D L Adams and L H Germer Sur Sci 23 419 (1970)

10 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 40 295 (1973)

11 G Tibbetts PhD thesis University of Illinois 1967

12 D L Adams Sur Sci 42 12 (1974)

13 P J Estrup The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 191

14 C B Duke and C W Tucker Jr Sur Sci 11 231 (1969)

15 C B Duke Electron Emission Spectroscopy edited by W Dekeyser et a1 (D Reidel Publishing Co Dordrecht Holland 1973) p 1

16 C B Duke N O Lipari and G E Laramore J Vac Sci Techno1 11 180 (1974)

17 M G Laga11y T C Ngoc and M B Webb Phys Rev Lett 26 1557 (1971)

172

18 P J Estrup and J Anderson J Chern Phys 45 2254 (1966)

19 K Yonehara and L D Schmidt Sur Sci 12 238 (1971)

20 E W Plummer and A E Bell J Vac Sci Techno1 2 583 (1972) bull

21 C A Papageorgopoulos and J M Chen Sur Sc i 39 283 (1973)

22 R F Wallis B C Clark and R Herman The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 171

23 M R Leggett and R A Armstrong Sur Sci 24 404 (1971)

24 D Edwards Jr PhD thesis University of Illinois 1970

25 P E Luscher PhD thesis Northwestern University 1974 to be published

26 R Gomer Field Emission and Field Ionization (Harvard U Press Cambridge Ma ss 1961)

27 R D Young Phys Rev 113 110 (1959)

28 J W Gadzuk and E W Plummer Rev Mod Phys 45 487 (1973)

29 C B Duke and M E Alpounderieff J Chern Phys 46 923 (1967)

30 J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Bl 2110 (1970)

31 C N Berglund and W E Spicer Phys Rev 136 part A Al030 (1964)

32 F M Propst and T C Piper J Vac Sci Technol ~ 53 (1967)

33 G Herzberg Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure I Spectra of Diatomic Molecules (D Van Nostrand New York 1963) 2nd ed

34 E W Plummer and J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Lett 25 1493 (1970)

35 B J Waclawski and E W Plummer Phys Rev Lett 29 783 (1972)

36 B Feuerbacher and B Fitton Phys Rev Lett 29 786 (1972)

37 P A Redhead Can J Phys 42 886 (1964)

38 D Menzel and R Gomer J Chern Phys 41 3311 (1964)

39 D Lichtman and R McQuistan Progress in Nuclear Energy Analytical Chemistry edited by H A Elion and D C Stewart (Pergamon Press New York 1965) series 9 vol 4 p 93

173

40 U N Ageev and N I Ionov Progress in Surface Science vol 5 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1974) p 1

41 T E Madey Sur Sci 36 281 (1973)

42 A Benninghoven E Loebach and N Treitz J Vac Sci Techno1 2 600 (1972)

43 L W Swanson A E Bell C H Hinrichs L C Crouser and B E Evans Literature Review of Adsorption on Metal Surfaces vol 1 NASA CR-72402 (NASA Lewis Research Center Cleveland Ohio 1967) p 76

44 R V Culver and F C Tompkins Advan Catalysis l 67 (1959)

45 See reference 43 p 49

46 J A Becker Actes du 2ieme Congres International de 1a Cata1yse (Edition Technip Paris 1961) 1777

47 R A Armstrong Can J Phys 44 1753 (1966)

48 B J Hopkins and K R Pender Sur Sci ~ 316 (1966)

49 R A Collins and B H B1ott J App1 Phys 40 5390 (1969)

50 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chem Phys 54 4969 (1971)

51 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 42 485 (1974)

52 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 52 1150 (1970)

53 See reference 7 Fig 8

54 K Fujiwara J Phys Soc Japan 11 7 (1957)

55 G D Bond Disc Faraday Soc 41 200 (1966)

56 F M Propst unpublished

57 R L Park The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 281

58 T B Grime1y Adsorption-Desorption Phenomena edited by F Ricca (Academic Press New York 1972) p 215

59 L W Anders R S Hansen and L S Bartell J Chern Phys 595277(1973)

60 J R Schrieffer J Vac Sci Techno1 2 561 (1972)

174

61 D M Newns Phys Rev 178 1123 (1969)

62 J R Schrieffer and R Gomer Sur Sci 25 315 (1971)

63 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn Phys Rev Lett 30 610 (1973)

64 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn to be published

65 P J Jennings and E G McRae Sur Sci 23 363 (1970)

66 W H Weinberg J Vac Soc Technol lQ 89 (1973)

67 L A Harris J Appl Phys 39 1419 (1968)

68 C C Chang Sur Sci 25 53 (1971)

69 T Cooper PhD thesis University of Illinois Urbana Illinois 1970

70 E M Purcell Phys Rev 54 818 (1938)

71 R Herzog Zeits F Physik 89 449 (1934)

72 Coordinated Science Laboratory Progress Report for July 1970 through June 1971 University of Illinois Urbana Illinois

73 See for example Handbook and Catalog of Operational Amplifiers BurrshyBrown Research Corp 1969 p 44

74 R W Jnyner J Rickman and M W Roberts Sur Sci 39 445 (1973)

75 C Lea and C H B Mee Sur Sci 11 332 (1971)

76 W A Coghlan and R E Clausing A Catalog of Calculated Auger Transitions for the Elements ORNL-TM-3576 (Oak Ridge National Lab Oak Ridge Tenn 1971)

77 As read by optical pyrometer the edge of the target measured 22000 K and the center 2500oK

78 B B Dayton Trans 3rd AVS National Vacuum Symposium 1956 (Pergamon Press New York 1957) p 5

79 T E Madey Sur Sci 33 355 (1972)

80 S C Brown Basic Data of Plasma Physics (Technology Press of MIT Cambridge Mass and John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 115

81 H D Hagstrum Rev Mod Phys 23 185 (1951)

175

82 M Nishijima PhD thesis University of Illinois 1969

83 G D Watts A R Jones and B J Hopkins Sur Sci 45 705 (1974)

84 R A Armstrong Sur Sc i sect 478 (1967)

85 E H B1evis and C R Crowell Phys Rev 133 part A A580 (1964)

86 C R Crowell and R A Armstrong Phys Rev 114 1500 (1959)

87 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 55 4253 (1971)

88 R Frauenfelder J Vac Sci Technol sect 388 (1969)

89 G E Moore and F C Unterwald J Chem Phys 40 2639 (1964)

90 S Dushman Scientific Foundations of Vacuum Technigue (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 19

91 P S P Wei J Chem Phys 53 2939 (1970)

92 J C Tracy private communication

93 J J Lander and J Morrison J Appl Phys 34 3517 (1963)

94 M Fink and A C Yates Atomic Data (to be published)

95 G E Laramore and C B Duke Phys Rev ~ I 4783 (1970)

96 J F Wendelken PhD thesis University of Illinois 1975

97 An inner potential of 8 eV has been assumed in this calculation

98 A Guinier X-Ray Diffraction (W H Freeman and Co San Francisco 1963) p 192

99 K Seigbahn C Nordling A Fahlman R Nordberg K Hamrin J Helman G Johansson T Bergmark S E Karlsson K Lindgren and B Lindberg ESCA - Atomic Molecular and Solid State Structure Studied by Means of Electron Spectroscopy (Almqvist Wiksells Uppsala 1967)

100 W F Egelhoff and D L Perry Phys Rev Lett 34 93 (1975)

176

APPENDIX A

A tungsten tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple spot-welded to the

side of the crystal is used to measure target temperatures The thermocouple

was calibrated against a copper-constantan standard A low temperature

freezing slush of isopentane (2-methylbutane) was made in a dewar by adding

liquid nitrogen (Isopentane freezes at -15989degC) The solution was allowed

to slowly warm up to room temperature over three hours during which a semi-

static calibration was made The reference junction was kept in a slush of

distilled ice water The calibration is shown in Figure AI

Using an identical technique a tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26

rhenium thermocouple was also calibrated as shown in Figure A2 TIlis thermoshy

couple does not have an inflection point in the range 00 to -195degC and it

00 h t t1mes more sens1t1ve over t he temperature range to -lSOoC than the1S e1g

tungstentungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple A tungsten-S rhenium wire should

spot-weld to tungsten more readily than a pure tungsten wire Thus because

of its increased sensitivity and ease of attaching to the tungsten crystal a

tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple appears a better

temperature sensor for low temperature research on tungsten

In the apparatus used the wires associated with the target manipulashy

tor including the thermocouple leads wind around the manipulator shaft to

provide rotational motion In order to get the 76 mm (003 in) diameter

thermocouple wires to wind smoothly around the shaft it was found necessary to

spring load them by turning a short segment of the wires into a 16 mm diameter

spring Unfortunately the tungsten-5 rhenium wire available proved too

brittle to turn into a spring and thus could not be used

012 _ ___r____~_-r____~_-r____~_ ___r______r___r____r__r___

C- WI W-26 Re Thermocouple Calibration Reference Junction at OdegC W Lead +

~ 008-lJ

W-26 Re LeadshyiE w 004 ~ 0shy

8J

0 o E

t-shy-I -I

Q)

c -004 tshy

-008 I I I I I I I

-200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 shy

Temperature (OC) SP-1069

Figure Al Calibration curve for W-5 ReW-26 Re thermocouple

o

-gt -04E -lL ~ w -OS 2 0shy

8J -12

o E

W-5 Re I W-26 Re Thermocouple Co libration Reference Junct ion at OdegC W-5Re Lead + W-26 Re Leadshy

J shy --shy~ ~ t- 16 0----

-20 I I

-200 -ISO -160 -140 -120 -100 -SO -60 -40 -20 0

Temperature (OC)

SP-1l73

Figure A2 Calibration curve for WW-26 Re thermocouple

-J 00

179

APPENDIX B

When operating the spectrometer in the electron mode at an effective

pass energy E the output current of the electron multiplier N(E) is proporshy

tional to the electron current originating at the target with energy between E

and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance solid angle of the analyzer

An energy distribution of the electron signal from the target can be measured

by sweeping the effective pass energy of the instrument This distribution

consists of rapidly varying true secondary and characteristic loss structure

interpretable in terms of electron transitions and collective oscillations in

the target plus a smoothly varying background In order to separate the

structure ~rom the background the energy distribution is electronically

67differentiated using a technique proposed by Harrismiddot A small sinusoidal

oscillation is applied to the effective pass energy of the spectrometer so

that the energy of the electrons passing through the spectrometer oscillates

around the instantaneous dc pass energy E If the detected current N(E) is 3

expanded in a Taylors series around the energy E where the sinusoidal 3

oscillation is E-E = K sin wt the first four terms are 3

N(E) N(E ) + K dN (E l (1 - cos 2wt)3 dE

E=E E=E i3

(3 sin wt - sin 3wt) +

E=E 3

Rearranging

180

dN(E) ) + K3 term + S1n wt (B2)N(E) = N(E ) + + K dE(i E=E

i

K2 d2N(E) 4 )+ K term + cos 2wt + + ( 4 2dE E=E1

The coefficients of the sin wt and cos 2wt terms are found to be proportional

respectively to the first two derivatives of N(E) providing K is small enough

such that the higher order terms in K can be dropped Under this assumption

a signal proportional to the first or second derivative of N(E) is obtained

by synchronously detecting the appropriate harmonic of the output

If a peak structure in the output signal is represented by a

Gaussian G(E) centered at E and the background represented by a polynomialo

in E B(E) then N(E) and the first two derivatives of N(E) evaluated at E o

become

N(E) = B(E) + G(E) (B3) -~(E-EO)2

2 d N(E) = a + bE + cE + + 1 e 2 (B4)

(2TT)2

2N(E=E ) = a + bE + cE + d 1 (B5)o o 0 cr (2TT)2

dN(E) = b + 2cE + 0 (B6)o E=E

dE

o

-d 1 = 2c + (B7)1 2 0 (2TT)2 0

E=E o

- -

2

181

From Equation B6 the first derivative evaluated at E has no contribution o

from the structure G(E) Extremum points in dN(E)dE occur at (E ~ E )2 = 0 o

if the background terms of order 3 or greater are not considered Using this

result in Equation B6 gives

~dltplusmng) edN(E) = b + 2c (E to) + bull I (B8)dE

0- 0 (2n)2E=E + 0

0shy

The relation between the original signal N(E) and the synchronously

detected signals can be seen from Equations B4 through B8 There is some

background suppression in both modes If N(E) is slowly varying the higher

order background terms that remain are small The peak to peak height of

the first harmonic signal is

1dN dN = 4ccr + - 2cb 1 e-2~-2crG(E-E ~ 0) (B9)

dE dE 0 (2n)2 0

E=E -0E=E +u o o

The intensity of the second harmonic signal evaluated at E is approximately 0

proportional to1 G(E) Hence using the stated assumptions the detected 0 2 0

first and second harmonics of N(E) contain structure which is directly

proportional to G(E)

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as is

commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in looking at

electron scattering energy loss measurements

182

APPENDIX C

The process of desorption of ions from a surface by electron

bombardment is referred to as electron stimulated desorption The theory to

account for this phenomenon was independently proposed by Redhead37 and by

38Menzel and Gomer A brief explanation of their model follows

In Figure Cl schematic potential energy diagrams are given for the

metal plus ground state adsorbate CM + A) and metal plus ionic state (M- + A+)

as a function of separation distance x of the adsorbing atom or ion from the

metal surface These two curves are labeled VG(x) and V(x) for the ground

state and ionic state respectively The nature of these interactions has

been described37 8l and several interaction calculations for hydrogen on metal

59 63surfaces have been g~ven The zero in potential energy in Figure 41 is

defined as the energy of the ion A+ at rest at infinity from the surface of M

The nucleus of the chemisorbed adsorbate is located at the minimum in the

ground state potential energy curve The wave function ~G(x) of the adsorbate

in the ground state on the surface is shown centered at a position x which ~

corresponds to the minimum in energy of VG

VG determines ~G(x) Vertical

transitions from the ground state to the ionic state (labeled 1 in the

diagram) are induced by incident electron bombardment of the surface

Secondary electrons leaving the surface also can cause such transitions

Once excited the ion is subjected to a repulsive force and moves away from

the surface (indicated by 2) The ionized adsorbate can be neutralized as it

leaves the surface and hence desorb as a neutral (indicated by 3) or it can

be de-excited back to the ground state and not desorb (indicated by 4) Ions

183

V(x)

gt ~ Ion ~ ~ 2 )III V(xi)(I) c +E K M-+A+w 0 f (v)+=c (I) +shy0 Cl

14 3 I-ltP Neutral

M+A

Ede t

ltPG (x)

~

DistanceX SP-1201

Figuze Cl Schematic diagram of adsorbate-metal interactions showing the transitions involved in the theory of electron stimulated desorption

184

that originate at x x leave the surface with energy V(x) The energyL L

80distribution of the desorbed ions f(V(xraquo is determined by the reflectionL

2of the probability density distribution I~G(xi)1 through the ionic state

energy curve This can be given by the expression

P(x ) f(V(xraquo

L (Cl)L ~~Ix = x

L

where N is the number of species A adsorbed in the ground state per unit

area a is the cross section for excitation of the species A from the groundex

state to the ionic state (transition 1) ~G(x) is defined above and P(x ) isi

the probability that an ion starts from the position x = x and moves awayL

from the L gLvensurface without being neutralized P(x) can be by373881

P(x ) exp(- J~dx ~)i x v(x) (C2)

i

where R(x) is the rate that the ions produced at the surface by electron

impact are reneutralized v(x) is the velocity of the ion at a distance x

from the surface This depends explicitly on V(x) as shown by Equation C3

for an ion of mass M and charge q

2q (V(X i ) - V(Xraquo)21

v(x) ( M (C3)

Additional complexities for example multiple initial and ionic states or

electron induced state conversion can be added to this simple model

185

The mass transport occurring at the surface during an ESD measurement

can be described in a kinetic treatment which relates the observed ion signal

to physical parameters characteristic of the experimental conditions The

change with time of the surface coverage per area of an adsorbate dNdt is

given by the rate of arrival of the adsorbate onto the surface minus the rate

of desorption from the surface In the simplest formulation of these proshy

cesses only adsorption from the background and desorption due to electron

bombardment need be considered The electron stimulated desorption flux of

ions is assumed proportional to the electron current density j and to the e

surface coverage per unit area N The proportionality constant is

tthe total desorption cross section Q (NE ) Qt(NE ) is in general a pr~ pr~

function of both the coverage and the primary electron energy For the

simple model given above the total desorption cross section is the sum of

the ionic Q+ and neutral Qn desorption cross sections The adsorption

rate is equal to the striking rate times the sticking probability s(N)

which in general is a function of the coverage The time dependence of N can

now be written as

j Qt(NE )N dNdt = s(N)yP _ ~ pu (C 4)e

where P is the partial pressure of the adsorbing species and y is a constant

equal to the number of molecules that strike unit area of the surface per unit

time and pressure

The measured electron stimulated desorption yield of A ions i + isA

assumed proportional to the incident current i the coverage of A per unit e

area N and the detection efficiency of the instrument G The proportionality

186

constant is the ionic desorption cross section Q+(NE ) (Since the only pr~

adsorbate being considered in this work is hydrogen the subscript A will be

replaced by H) This relation for iH+ can be written

= i Q+(NE )NG (CS)e pr~

Equation C4 can be solved for N in closed form under certain

simplifying assumptions The dependence of the cross section on primary

energy does not affect the form of the solution (if the primary energy is

kept constant) Then Qt can be written Qt (E ) if the cross section canpri

be shown to be independent of coverage This is not the case in general so

its validity for each metal-adsorbate system has to be examined This is

done in the text for H2 adsorbed on W(100) so the assumption will be assumed

here Likewise the sticking probability will be assumed independent of N

Equation C4 can now be solved to yield

(C6)

N is the initial hydrogen coverage at t o and T is given by ~

(C7)

Combining Equations CS and C6 gives for the g+ ion yield

(C8)

187

where i is the initial ion yield at t = 0 and iH+ is given byH~ equil

+ esyPAG ~ (C9)

Q

Equation C8 shows that the H+ yield decreases with time to a

saturation value iH+ This decay of the ESD ion yield with time is equil

called a desorption curve A semilogarithmic plot of iH+ - i + versusHequil time should yield a straight line the slope of which is -17 From this

slope and the definition of 7 the total desorption cross section charactershy

izing the hydrogen binding state can be calculated

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

1S considerably more dbull40 a diffusionpressure ~nvo1ve Conceptually such

process can be considered in two steps 1) the diffusion of hydrogen from the

bulk to just inside the surface or to a near surface layer and 2) the

jumping from this configuration to surface sites Diffusion from the bulk to

the near surface layer could be described by Ficks law If N is the conshy

centration of hydrogen in the near surface layer and N the surface concentrashy

tion of hydrogen then the time dependence of N + N due to bulk diffusion

can be written as

d(N+Nl _ D dn (C 10)dt - dx

where D is the diffusion constant for hydrogen in tungsten and dndx is the

concentration gradient of hydrogen just inside the surface The coverage N

in surface sites will change as a result of hydrogen jumping from the near

188

surface layer to the surface and vice versa The rate of jumping to the

surface d( N )dt can be assumed proportional to the concentration Nt

and to some function f(N) which describes the availability of surface sites

The diffusion rate to the surface from the near surface layer would also be

exponentially dependent on an activation barrier energy E The reversebs

flux from the surface to the near surface layer can be written in an

equivalent form An expression for the change in surface concentration with

time due to diffusion to and from the near surface layer can be written as

-E kT -E kTb~~ = CbsNte s f(N) - CsbNe sb g(N) (ClI)

The first term on the right-hand side represents the rate of diffusion from

the near surface layer to the surface and the second term represents the

rate of diffusion from the surface back to the near surface layer cbs and

are constants Esb and g(N) correspond toE and f(N) respectivelycsb bs

A term representing depletion of the surface state due to incident electron

bombardment similar to the second term on the right of Equation C4 could

be added in Equation Cll This has been omitted since only the case je = 0

will be considered here In principle an expression for N can now be

obtained by solving Equations ClO and Cll A general solution is not easily

obtained However it is evident that the time dependence of N due to

diffusion could realistically be similar to that expected from background

adsorption For example for the isothermal case if Nt is assumed constant

and f(N) assumed equal to (1 - NN ) assumptions that are reasonable for max

small coverages it can be shown from Equation 44 that N increases

189

exponentially in time to an equilibrium value For N small this solution

would be approximately linear in time the same result obtained for the time

dependence of background adsorption However background pressure doesnt

enter into the above diffusion calculation If the fast state phenomena is

diffusion related N would be expected to be independent of background

pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence for

adsorption from the background

_ _

190

VITA

Stephen Parker Withrow was born in Washington DC on February 2

1945 He attended Northwestern Senior High School in Hyattsville Maryland

graduating in 1963 He enrolled at Cornell University in Ithaca New York in

September 1963 In June 1967 he received a Bachelor of Science in

Engineering Physics In September 1967 he enrolled in the Physics Department

at the University of Illinois in Urbana Illinois He received his Masters

of Science in Physics in February 1969 He served at a Teaching Assistant

in the Physics Department for four years and also as a Research Assistant in

the Coordinated Science Laboratory while doing his thesis research He is

the coauthor of the publication Environmentally Assisted Crack Growth in

Glass G M Sinclair and S P Withrow Naval Research Laboratory Report

6635

_-------------shy-----------_ bull

Page 8: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …

1

CHAPTER 1

MOTIVATION AND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

11 Introduction and Motivation

The experimental investigation of chemisorption of gases onto metallic

surfaces has uncovered in the past decade a baffling complexity of adsorption

geometries and binding state kinetics and energetics A growing interest in

surface phenomena generated by the questions raised in these researches and

by the long anticipated use of the answers has led to the rapid development

of new surface probing techniques and to an increase in the availability of new

technologies compatible with surface research Aided by the new technologies

and techniques chemisorption research has been undertaken on many different

systems (system =solid substrate + gas adsorbate) under a wide range of

environmental conditions Surface theoreticians have proposed microscopic and

phenomenological models with which data have been analyzed and compared A

large experimental and theoretical literature in the field has resulted

The study of adsorption on metal surfaces has among its primary

objectives a detailed description of the physical geometry of the atoms in the

surface layers and a quantitative understanding of electronic and chemical

surface phenomena While considerable progress has been made in documenting

gas-surface phenomena it has been only in the past three years that any

credible claims to understanding specific surface overlayer geometries have

1been made At the same time many basic questions involving system kinetics

and energetics have not been adequately resolved 2

It has become apparent from the failure of the research effort to

satisfy the above objectives and from seemingly conflicting data that adequate

2

characterization is basic to all surface experimentation The need for such

characterization has been strongly emphasized by disagreement between quasishy

similar research performed at different locations Small impurity concentrashy

tions small changes in crystal orientation minor temperature differences etc

often have considerable effects on experimental measurements

A corollary to the necessity of being able to characterize the

surface is the importance of being able to control the surface characterization

In order to compare data it is necessary to reproduce all experimental paramshy

eters accurately The theory to which experimental data are compared is

constrained by complexity to be based on ideal clean substrates with a

definable gas-surface interaction It is desirable to be able to choose the

adsorbate-substrate system and experimental parameters that can also be used

with theoretical models Of course compromises are inevitable

One approach in surface research has been to incorporate several

experimental techniques into one apparatus At the present time this approach

is increasingly more common A combination of surface sensitive probes offers

many advantages It provides for more checks of the data against results

published in the literature It allows for better characterization of the

experimental parameters It allows surface phenomena to be probed in more than

one way in order to eliminate ambiguities andor to reinforce conclusions It

eliminates the uncertainties that arise from data taken at different locations

using the techniques separately hence it allows better correlations between

data taken using the different techniques

In this study several aspects of the chemisorption interaction of

hydrogen with the low index (100) plane of single crystal tungsten denoted

3

W(100) have been investigated The choice of the tungsten-hydrogen system is

motivated by several factors The literature raises questions on the unusual

state behavior observed when hydrogen adsorbs on W(100) questions which our

apparatus is especially well-suited to study In addition the interaction of

hydrogen with close packed planes of single crystal metals including W(100)

is of particular interest to theoreticians since hydrogen is the simplest

molecular gas as detailed in Sections 128 and 129 below recent theories

of chemisorption have been applied to the hydrogen-tungsten system Tungsten

was chosen as the substrate metal because of its relative ease of preparation

and cleaning and because the large body of literature on the hydrogen-tungsten

system indicates wide interest in this interaction

In particular this research is concentrated in three areas Tung~

sten when cleaned and subsequently cooled to below room temperature exhibits

an anomalous centered (2x2) denoted C(2x2) low energy electron diffraction

pattern The possibility that this is caused by hydrogen diffusing from the

bulk or adsorbing from the background has been investigated Secondly the

room temperature and low temperature hydrogen adsorption binding states have

been studied using electron stimulated desorption and electron spectroscopy

Finally low energy electron diffraction has been used in an investigation of

the atomic geometry of the clean tungsten surface and the geometry of one of

the hydrogen binding states

The remaining sections of this chapter summarize literature relating

to this research Chapter 2 details the construction and performance of the

experimental apparatus A presentation of the experimental data is made in

Chapter 3 A discussion of the results is made in Chapter 4 A summaryof

4

the research and conclusions from it are given in Chapter 5

12 Review of Literature

121 Introduction

Experimental investigation of the adsorption of hydrogen on tungsten

has been carried out using field emitter tips macroscopic polycrystalline

surfaces and all the low index orientation single crystal faces including

W(lOO) From the wide range of results it is clear that the substrate exerts

a strong influence on the adsorption properties The question has been raised

whether adsorption models postulated from polycrystalline substrates can be

3extended even qualitatively to single crystal systems Likewise there are

such sharp differences in the chemisorption behavior of hydrogen onto the

different single crystal tungsten surfaces that the specific physical process

governing adsorption on each face appears to be unique to that face This

review will therefore be concerned for the most part with literature dealing

with hydrogen adsorption on W(lOO) the gas-substrate system used in this

research

The following data review is presented in subsections each concenshy

trating on a specific experimental technique or class of experiments Subsecshy

tion 127 includes some gas mixing literature which was considered relevant

and Subsection 129 gives a bibliography of some related chemisorption

theoretical papers

122 Thermal Desorption

One technique widely employed in investigation of the kinetics of gas

456adsorption has been thermal or flash desorption By monitoring the system

5

pressure changes of a species while rapidly heating the crystal inferences

can be made on the existence of binding states adsorption energies and reaction

7 8 order Heating is accomplished by a focussed light beam electron bombardshy

7 9ment or ohmic losses bull

The strongest indication that hydrogen exhibits multiple state

adsorption behavior on W(lOO) comes from flash desorption data Tamm and

8Schmidt 7 and Madey and Yates found for room temperature adsorption that two

large peaks are observed in the plot of pressure of H2 versus temperature

These peaks are centered at 4500 K and approximately 550oK Only hydrogen

molecules are observed to be desorbed from the surface Using desorption rate

456theory the lower temperature (~l) state is found to obey first order

kinetics the peak temperature being independent of initial coverage The

higher temperature (~2) state obeys second order kinetics the peak temperature

moving down from approximately 5800 K to 5500 K as the initial coverage is

increased

In addition to the two main peaks several small peaks comprising a

total of less than 10 percent of the desorbed hydrogen are observed during a

flash when the crystal is cooled to nitrogen temperature before hydrogen

exposure These states are believed to result from adsorption onto edges and

other non-(lOO) crystal orientations 8

The dependence of the desorption energy Ed on coverage is weak

~l 8 ~2 8with Ed = 252 kcallmole and Ed = 323 kcalmole As would be predicted

from this result the ~2 state is largely populated before the ~l state begins

to fill The ratio of the populations in the states at full coverage n~1n~2

8 lOis 2111 Jelend and Menzel point out that the cross section for electron

6

desorption (see Subsection 125) from the ~1 state is considerably smaller

than that of the ~2 state a result not predicted from the experimental flash

desorption binding energies

11Tibbetts using a stepped temperature flash desorption technique

has shown that hydrogen is bound to the surface of po1ycrysta11ine tungsten

W(110) and W(lll) with a distribution of binding energies ranging from

162 kca1mo1e (07 eV) to 415 kca1mo1e (lS eV) Using this technique

desorption at a constant temperature from a distribution of states can be easily

distinguished from desorption from a state with a unique binding energy While

he did not extend his work to W(100) these results suggest that hydrogen does

not bind to the surface at a few energies but rather with a range of binding

energies Tibbetts also shows that the determination of the order of the

desorption process is difficult for adsorption into a range of binding energies

In experiments using a combination of hydrogen and deuterium as room

temperature adsorbates the elemental composition of the desorbed ~1 and ~2

states shows complete isotopic mixing between the states7S independent of the

adsorption sequence or ratios However for low temperature adsorption

complete state conversion is not observed for all the additional small peaks

Where mixing is observed atomic adsorption is suggested Where mixing is not

observed molecular adsorption is inferred

Some theoretical models indicate that multiple peak flash desorption

spectra may be due to binding energy changes caused by adsorbate-adsorbate

interactions12 or order-disorder transactions during f1ash3 13 rather than

actual distinct multiple binding states under the adsorption conditions

7

123 LEED and HEED

Low energy electron diffraction or LEED refers to the coherent

scattering of a monoenergetic focused electron beam from the surface of a

crystalline solid Electrons in the energy range 0 lt E lt 300 eV interact

strongly with the ion cores and valence electrons of the solid The inelastic

mean free path is on the order of 10 X As a consequence electrons which are

observed elastically have been backscattered within the first several surface

layers in the solid making LEED a surface sensitive probe 14 15 The periodic

translational symmetry of the surface leads to the momentum conservation laws

I

= (11)~I ~II + g

= (2mEh2)t sin reg (12)~II

where ~II is the momentum parallel to the surface of the emerging electron and

~ is the parallel momentum of the incident electron The vector g is a

reciprocal lattice vector of the solid surface and reg is the polar angle of the

incident beam As a result of the conservation laws the scattered electrons

emerge in a series of beams called a spot pattern which is a manifestation

of the surface symmetry The beams are labelled by their corresponding g

vectors Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores is

extracted from the plot of elastically scattered electron intensity versus

16 17incident energy called elastic intensity profiles or I-V curves

Changes in the LEED spot pattern resulting from hydrogen adsorption

18onto W(lOO) at room temperature have been reported by Estrup and Anderson and

19by Yonehara and Schmidt As hydrogen is adsorbed at room temperature the

8

(lxl) pattern characteristic of clean tungsten changes into a weak C(2x2)

pattern at a hydrogen coverage e of less than 005 monolayer (where e = 1

15 2monolayer at a coverage of 2xlO hydrogen atomsem which is 2 hydrogen atoms

for each surface tungsten atom) The (1212) spots become sharp and intense

with increased hydrogen adsorption reaching a maxima in intensity at approxishy

19 18mately 015 monolayer or e = 025 monolayer (Coverage in both cases was

determined by flash desorption) The (1212) spots split into four new spots

which move apart continuously and upon further hydrogen adsorption eventually

19form 13-order streaks at a coverage of ~ 035 monolayer These in turn

change at higher coverage into poorly developed 14-order features with the

(012) spots missing Finally near e = 10 all extra diffraction features

are gone and the LEED pattern returns to a (lxl) symmetry This series of LEED

pattern changes is reversible with coverage

For hydrogen adsorption at 1950 K the C(2x2) pattern develops

maximizes in intensity at e ~ 18 and splits into four beams similar to room

temperature adsorption However the higher coverage LEED structures third

19 0order streaks and fourth order spots are not observed At 78 K adsorption

of hydrogen produces half-order C(2x2) spots that maximize in intensity at

e ~ 027 Additional hydrogen adsorption beyond this causes the half-order

19spot intensity to decrease but with no splitting of the spots

If clean W(lOO) is allowed to cool below room temperature a sharp

19and intense C(2x2) pattern is observed even though total coverage due to the

background of H2 and CO is less than e = 001 as determined by flash desorption

measurements The intensity of these half-order beams can be altered by

additional hydrogen adsorption or by various hydrogen and oxygen heat treatmenm

9

l9Yonehara and Schmidt have postulated that the extra spots may result from

hydrogen endothermally soluble in tungsten diffusing to the surface Possible

alternative explanations include the reconstruction of the clean tungsten

surface or impurity over layer adsorption from the background It should be

20noted that Plummer and Bell saw no effects upon cooling their field emitter

tip to 78 0 K that they could attribute to hydrogen diffusion to the surface

Elastic intensity profiles for several beams have been measured by

18 21Estrup and Anderson and by Papageorgopoulos and Chen at room temperature

Estrup and Anderson reported profiles for (00) and (1212) tEED lJeams out

to 300 eV The intensity variation for the (OO) beam was found to be indepenshy

dent of hydrogen coverage a manifestation of the relatively weak scattering

cross section of a hydrogen ion core relative to that of tungsten The

additional beams observed on adsorption would be expected to be more sensitive

13to the adsorbed overlayer Estrup found the intensity of the (1212) beams

for H W(100) and D W(100) to decrease as a function of temperature between2 2

300o

K and 6000 K at a constant incident energy but neither obeyed the Debyeshy

22Waller relation Estrup interpreted this result to imply the adsorbed

species are directly involved in the diffraction process

19Yonehara examined the tEED spot intensities as a function of

temperature down to liquid nitrogen temperatures His results are examined

in the data discussion in Chapter 4

The hydrogen-WlOO) system has also been studied using high energy

electron diffraction or HEED23 This technique utilizes the strong forward

scattering of high energy electrons in probing the surface by having the

incident beam strike the solid at grazing incidence The resulting diffraction

10

patterns are sensitive to the translational symmetry of the surface As in

LEED a diffraction pattern with C(2x2) symmetry is observed during initial

hydrogen adsorption With further hydrogen exposure the beams broaden some

splitting is observed and eventually the half-order intensity decreases

completely The width of the observed half-order beams has been interpreted to

indicate hydrogen initially adsorbs into a large number of small square or

rectangular domains each consisting of 20 to 25 atoms with sides parallel to

the [100J directions

124 Electron Scattering Field Emission and Photoemission

The electronic structure of the surface layers of solids can be

characterized by electron emission spectroscopies Such techniques require a

surface sensitive perturbation on the gas-solid system leading to an electron

yield A spectrometer is used to energy analyze the emitted or scattered

24 25electrons In electron scatter~ng a monoenergetic beam of electrons is

directed onto a crystal The inelastically scattered signal containing

quantitative information about electronic excitations at the surface is

measured as a function of energy loss Field emission is a technique in which

application of a high positive electric field to the surface lowers the potenshy

26tia1 barrier for electrons to tunnel out of the system The total energy

distribution of electrons emitted as a result of the applied field contains

bull 27 28spectroscopic data on the adsorbed spec~es Structure induced by the

adsorbate in the elastic tunneling spectrum is thought to be a measure of the

d f i h f h d b 2930e1ectron~c ens~ty 0 states n t e v~c~n~ty 0 tea sor ate The

inelastic tunneling spectrum reveals discrete excitation energies in the

11

gas-surface system In photoemission or ftotoelectron spectroscopy an incident

monochromatic light beam incident on the solid induces emission of electrons by

interband transitions with or without an inelastic scattering after the initial

31 exc i tat~on

The vibrational spectrum of hydrogen adsorbed on the tungsten (100)

32surface has been observed by Propst and Piper using inelastic low energy

20electron scattering and by Plummer and Bell using field emission Propst

and Piper found two peaks in the energy loss distribution E - E pr~mary scattered

at 135 meV and 69 meV for all coverages used up to saturation These results

are interpreted as indicating hydrogen atoms are multiply bonded to tungsten

33atoms No losses near 550 meV the vibrational energy of molecular hydrogen

were observed Plummer and Bell measured the total energy distribution of

field emitted electrons from tungsten (100) as a function of coverage of

hydrogen and deuterium at several temperatures Discrete losses at 100 meV

and 50 meV for deuterium which correspond to the 135 meV and 69 meV vibrational

losses observed by Propst and Piper were evident for deuterium in the a state2

No discrete energy losses at 550 meV or 390 meV the molecular vibrational

levels of H2 and D2 respectively were measured Hence there was no observable

molecular adsorption at room temperature

Additional structure in the field emission total energy distribution

is observed as a function of hydrogen adsorption The clean surface spectrum

has two peaks 04 eV and 15 eV down from the Fermi level which have been

d ifi d h h d f d h h f 34 A h d ~ ent e as ~g ens~ty 0 states assoc~ate w~t t e sur ace s y rogen

(or deuterium) coverage increases between 0 and 5xl014 atomscm2

ie while

the ~2 state is filling the surface states disappear and the field emitted

12

energy distribution changes from that of clean tungsten to a spectrum indicative

of resonance tunneling through a level positioned 09 eV below the Fermi energy

There is a shoulder at -11 eV and an energy dependent background With

further adsorption up to saturation this energy distribution characteristic

of the ~2 state shifts to a broad level centered at 26 eV below the Fermi

level This is interpreted to indicate that the ~1 state does not adsorb on

top of the ~2 state

35The photoemission results of Wac1awski and P1ummer and Feuerbacher

36and Fitton are in agreement with those obtained using the field emission

technique As hydrogen adsorbs on the surface emission from the 04 eV

surface state decreases The level 09 eV down from the Fermi energy as well

as a level 5 eV down remain unchanged by adsorption At full coverage a strong

peak at -25 eV is observed

125 Electron Stimulated Desorption

Desorption of energetic ions and neutrals from a gas over layer can

be induced by electron bombardment This process termed electron stimulated

desorption or ESD37383940 is described below in the discussion of the data

in Chapter 4 In brief intensity and energy measurements of the ion yield can

be interpreted in terms of the parameters characterizing the binding energy

curve of the adsorbed state and adsorption states can be classified by cross

section for desorption_ ion energy distributions primary energy threshold for

desorption etc

ESD has been employed to study adsorption kinetics for the hydrogenshy

41 ~ tungsten (100) system Madey obtained a coverage dependence yield of H ions

13

observing an ion signal during the initial stages of hydrogen adsorption that

reached a maximum at a coverage of e = 017 and then decayed to zero yield

23 2after e = 075 the maximum cross section obtained was 18x10- cm at a

primary electron energy of 100 eV Tamm and Schmidt7 reported a maximum cross

section for H+ desorption of 10- 21 cm 2bull Benninghoven Loebach and Treitz42

10and Je1end and Menze1 obtained qualitatively similar (to Madey) coverage

dependencies on tungsten ribbons which were believed to be predominantly of

(100) crystallites the main difference between these results and Madeys is

the observation of a residual signal at high hydrogen coverage

The cross section results indicate that the a state even though it2

is more tightly bound than the a state provides more hydrogen ions upon1

electron impact The cross section for ion desorption from the a1 state is

d41 10-25est1mate to be 1ess t han cm2 bull

+No energy distributions of the desorbed H ions have been reported

The dependence of the desorption cross section on the primary electron energy

10has not been investigated Je1end and Menzel found their results independent

of temperature for temperatures above room temperature No ESD results for

otemperatures less than 300 K have been reported

126 Work Function

The work function is the minimum amount of energy required to remove

43 an electron from a meta1 An adsorbate may alter the potential barrier for

electrons at the surface and hence change the work function Such is the case

for hydrogen on W(100) Hydrogen adsorbs as an electronegative ion on W(100)

thereby increasing the work function

14

44Using a retarding potential current-voltage techn~que Madey and

8Yates reported a linear relation between work function change and hydrogen

coverage over the entire coverage range for adsorption occurring at a

temperature 0 f 2= 300 0 K Coverages were determined by flash desorption

Total work function change at one monolayer was found to be 090 eV which

corresponds to a constant dipole moment per adsorbed atom of 015 Debye

15 2(assuming a total coverage of 15xlO atomsem)

Estrup and Anderson18 using the retarding potential technique and

Plummer and Bel120 using a field emission Fowler-Nordheim plot45 found a

work function change versus coverage relationship which deviated only slightly

8from being linear in near agreement with the results of Madey and Yates

46 47Becker using field emission and Armstrong using a retarding potential

technique found a work function change for the H W(100) system of approximately2

48090 eV when e = 10 Hopkins and Pender obtained an anomalously low value

49of 054 eV while Collins and Blott obtained a high value of 109 eV for the

same coverage

127 Chemical Probes

Hydrogen adsorption has also been studied using a chemical probe

ie by coadsorbing some additional different gas with the hydrogen and

observing the effect this additional species had on results obtained using

techniques discussed in previous sections

50Yates and Madey found using flash desorption that CO coadsorption

onto a hydrogen monolayer displaces both the Sl and S2 binding states with

near unity probability in doing so initially replacing these states with a

15

less tightly bound hydrogen state After high CO exposure no hydrogen remains

on the surface if the coadsorption is done at room temperature At lower

temperatures only about 10 percent of the hydrogen is desorbed Jelend and

Menzel lO 5l found that the ionic and total desorption cross sections for

hydrogen the sticking probability and bond strength of hydrogen are all

affected by preadsorption of CO or oxygen Yates and Madey3 found that N2

slowly replaces preadsorbed hydrogen at temperatures greater than 300oC Below

2730

K the displacement of hydrogen by N2 does not occur

These results all show that small impurity concentrations of CO N

and 0 if intentionally introduced do affect the resulting hydrogen chemishy

sorption properties These experiments underscore the necessity of surface

chemical characterization

128 Chemisorption Models

7 18 19 52 Several models have been proposed to account for the

experimental results from hydrogen chemisorption on W(lOO) Each of these

models embodies some combination of the following three phenomenological

assumptions 1) The tungsten surface is ideal planar and free of contamishy

nants 2) There are available two types of adsorbates namely hydrogen atoms

53and molecules 3) There are three high symmetry logical bonding sites on

a BCC (100) face usually designated by the letters A B and C These

positions are A a bridge site with 2 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen

equidistant from two adjacent surface tungsten atoms B a four fold symmetric

site with 5 nearest neighbors and the hydrogen located on a surface normal that

passes through the center of a surface primitive unit cell and C the hydrogen

16

located directly above a surfac~ atom with one nearest neighbor There are

15 152x10 A sitescm2 and 1x10 B ore sites~m2 on middotW(100)

The proposed models attempt to explain or at least be consistent

with empirical results presented in Sections 121 through 127 A summary

of salient features of the reported research includes a) a linear work function

15change with coverage b) a saturation coverage of between 15 and 20x10 H

2atomscm c) a coverage dependent adsorption layer symmetry including a we11shy

ordered surface at low coverages d) the appearance at low temperatures of a

surface translational symmetry not equivalent to room temperature clean

tungsten e) adsorption into states which produces a two state thermal desorpshy

tion spectrum with relative coverages in the two states of nQ n = 21 f) a ~1 ~2

coverage dependence for the observed electronic structure including the

absence at high coverage of structure observed at low coverages and g) no

observed vibrational levels which correspond to free H2 molecule

Following is a short review of several proposed surface models

18Estrup and Anderson account for their LEED spot pattern results

using a model wherein the hydrogen molecules dissociate upon adsorption and

migrate initially to form islands of hydrogen atoms located at type A sites in

a e(2x2) structure Dissociation is assumed since the e(2x2) pattern maximizes

15 2at a coverage of 25x10 mo1ecu1escm whereas without dissociation it would

maX1m1ze at 5 1015 mo ecu1es cm2bull e site adsorptionx 1 Although type B or type

could also produce the initial e(2x2) LEED pattern these sites are rejected

15 2because of the following 1) There are only 1x10 B or e sitescm This is

not enough sites to accommodate a full monolayer coverage if all binding is

atomic and if it is into equivalent sites as suggested by the linear work

17

function change with coverage 2) While a complete 14-order LEED pattern is

possible with type B or type C sites it is not possible to produce a 14-order

54pattern with (012) spots missing using B or C sites As the adsorption

14 2proceeds past a surface density of 5xlO hydrogen atomscm the adatoms conshy

tinuously rearrange into long period superlattices with antiphase domains

that produce successively the 12-order spot splitting the 13-order streak

(only partly ordered domains) the 14-order pattern and finally the (lxl)

full coverage structure

This model has been criticized for not accounting for the two

observed binding states and for predicting a maximum in intensity of the half

order spots at e = 025 these beams maximize at less than that coverage In

addition the authors themselves questioned the idea of well-ordered super-

lattices

In order to explain the relative intensity of the two states at

saturation seen in flash desorption n~~ = 21 Tamm and Schmidt7

propose a 1 2

model wherein the initial hydrogen adsorption is atomic and at B sites in a

C(2x2) pattern At full coverage the remaining B sites are filled with

hydrogen molecules B sites are chosen over C sites using molecular orbital

55arguments A sites are rejected as there are too many to satisfy this model

This model satisfies the second order kinetics observed for the ~2 state and

the first order kinetics observed for the ~l state In addition it explains

14 2 7 their saturation coverage of gt 3xl0 moleculescm One weakness of this

model pointed out by Tamm and Schmidt is that it is not obvious the model can

account for the observed LEED and work function results Also no molecular

vibrations have been observed

18

19yonehara and Schmidt propose a three bonding state model that is

more consistent with the low temperature LEED results In their model an

additional state labeled ~3 is always present at the surface in A or B

2sites with a density of 5xl014 atomscm bull This state orders on the surface at

low temperatures to give the C(2x2) pattern observed At room and higher

temperatures it goes into solution (or perhaps disorders) becoming invisible

to LEED In the type A site model adsorption from the background fills in the

remaining A sites sequentially with the ~2 and ~l states This model is similar

18to that proposed by Estrup and Anderson except that the ~3 state although

invisible to LEED at room and higher temperatures occupies 14 of the type A

sites This model eliminates the stoichiometric objection to Estrup and

Andersons model The model depends on the possibility of type A sites being

occupied by states with considerably different properties If the ~3 state

occupies type B sites ~2 state adsorption fills in the remaining type B sites

and then ~l hydrogen adsorbs into random or possibly type C sites This

second model does not explain satisfactorily work function or LEED spot pattern

experimental data

56Propst found using a point defect type calculation that only a

B-site model of adsorption would produce the observed vibrational energies of

5769 meV and 135 meV Park using LEED intensity arguments found that only

adsorption into sites with 4-fold symmetry on the (100) surface (type B or type

C sites) would be consistent with broadening and splitting of the half-order

beams while the integral beams remain sharp

8Madey and Yates offer a critique of several of the proposed models

19

No adsorption geometry adequately accounts for all the observed data

It is possible that surface hydrogen mobility adsorbate-adsorbate interactions

tungsten surface reconstruction and other surface phenomenon must be better

understood before this system can be adequately characterized

129 Theoretical Treatment

Several theoretical treatments of hydrogen-tungsten chemisorption

phenomenon have been reported in the literature as discussed below

7 18 19 52 The most elementary geometric models already have been

mentioned in Section 128 Grimley58 considers the hydrogen on W(lOO) system

59in an Anderson-Hamiltonian formalism Anders and Hansen obtain the relative

bonding energies of hydrogen chemisorbed at the three high symmetry adsorption

sites of W(lOO) using an extended Ruckel molecular orbital theory Their

results indicated a preference for hydrogen adsorption at type C sites

60Schrieffer offers a review on the theory of chemisorption in which he

concludes the Hartree-Fock approximation to the Anderson model for hydrogenshy

61metal adsorption is invalid Newns using the same approximation also shows

62the one-electron HF theory to be invalid Schrieffer and Gomer study the

exchange interaction between the adatom and the solid which results from the

nonorthogonality of the adatom and solid wave functions Smith Ying

h 63 64 h h d 1 h bl band Ko n lnvestlgate t e y rogen-meta c emlsorptlon pro em y

requiring complete self-consistency between the three-dimensional electrostatic

potential used and charge density obtained They calculate electron scattering

resonance levels and ground state vibrational frequency Jennings and McRae

using a multiple scattering LEED theory (but neglecting inelastic collision

65

20

damping) show that there can be half-order beams of high intensity in the H -W2

k W b 66 1 b dsystem even t hough h ydrogen 1S a wea scatterer e1n erg app 1es a on-

energy bond-order model of chemisorption to the hydrogen-W(100) system and

predicts binding energies for the molecular state and atomic state of hydrogen

on W(100) to be 262 kca1mo1e and 322 kca1mo1e respectively

1210 Literature Summary

Some conclusions can be drawn concerning the state of understanding

of the hydrogen-tungsten system and in particular the H W(100) system2

Despite considerable research experimental uncertainties still exist

in the H W(100) interaction It is still not clear if hydrogen adsorbs as a2

molecule The preponderance of evidence from electron scattering vibrational

levels field emission and H -D gas mixing flash desorption measurements2 2

indkates most hydrogen probably adsorbs atomically Multiple state behavior

is exhibited It is not known however if this observed state behavior is a

result of distinct hydrogen-tungsten interactions it is believed that to a

large extent it is driven by coverage dependent adsorbate-adsorbate interacshy

tions There is no model that can successfully incorporate the measured work

function flash desorption and ESD parameters The adsorption sites are not 15 15 2

known Total coverage at one monolayer is between 15xlO and 2x10 atomsem

which is more than the number of surface tungsten atomscm2 in the (100) face

LEED results at different temperatures indicate a possible temperature depenshy

dence for the adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO) Particularly confusing is

the anomalous LEED result obtained at low temperatures for the clean surface

Only small adsorption temperature dependencies are found in sticking probability

21

work function changes and flash desorption results

13 Review of Experimental Techniques

As indicated in Section 11 this research has been undertaken in an

attempt to characterize more fully the hydrogen-W(lOO) interaction A multi-

technique spectrometer has been used Chapter 2 gives a discussion of the

instrument This instrument is capable of making work function Auger electron

spectroscopy electron scattering ESD (including a pulsed time-of-flight mode)

and LEED measurements These techniques except AES have been well-reviewed

43 44 67 68 24 25 3 37 3839 40 as referenced prevlously (work function AES ES ESD

151617LEED ) Their use in this research can be summarized as follows work

function changes are a measure of adsorption coverage Auger electron

spectroscopy has been used to characterize the contamination of the experimental

surface ES and ESD are sensitive probes of surface and adsorption parameters

Time-of-flight has been used to determine the ion species desorbed LEED has

been used here to indicate the orientation of the surface and to attempt to

take initial data useful in calculation of overlayer geometries A more

detailed discussion of these techniques as used in this research is given in

Section 32

A discussion of the instrument constructed and used for this research

is given in Chapter 2 Sections 31 and 32 deal wIth organization and

experimental procedures Experimental data are presented starting with Section

33 A discussion of the data and conclusions from the research are given in

Chapter 4

22

CHAPTER 2

EXPERIMENTAL APPARATUS

21 General Description

The apparatus used in this research is designed to probe an experishy

mental macroscopic crystal with several surface sensitive techniques It

combines an electron gun which focuses a monoenergetic beam of electrons onto

the crystal a new high resolution electrostatic spectrometer capable of energy

analysis of electrons and ions a low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system

and a crystal manipulator The crystal manipulator allows positioning of the

experimental sample and provides sample cooling heating and electrical

biasing Also included in the apparatus are a mass spectrometer and a gas

handling system System electronics allow the spectrometer to perform work

function electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated desorption

Auger electron spectroscopy and low energy electron diffraction measurements

The spectrometer can be operated over a wide range of primary electron energies

and currents and analyzer pass energies It can be biased in both electron and

ion pass modes and in a pulsed time-of-flight mode for species identification

An external spot photometer is used for LEED intensity measurements The

instrument is housed in an ultrahigh vacuum chamber A schematic diagram of

the overall system is given in Figure 21 The construction and performance

characteristics of each of the components are discussed in the following

sections of Chapter 2

22 Vacuum System and Magnetic Shielding

The requirement that the experimental surface has to remain clean

23

Analyzer Support

Magnetic Shielding

Ion Gauge

Analyzer

Crystal Target

Window

Openings in Magnetic Shield to Gas Jet and Quadrupole Mass Spectrometer

LEED Screen Viewing Mi rror

To Ion Pumps _

Analyzer Wiring Feedthroughs

Liquid Nitrogen Dewar for Cooling Strap Heat Sink

Insulator

Crystal Manipulator

Cooling Strop

Titanium Sublimotion Pump

Figure 21 Schematic diagram of mu1titechnique apparatus

24

while making measurements necessitates housing the apparatus in an ultrahigh

vacuum chamber A commercial Varian vacuum chamber and pumping station have

been used Ultrahigh vacuum was achieved in several steps after the chamber

-2 was rough pumped down to 10 Torr using cryosorb pumps main system pumping

was accomplished using a 400 litersec ion pump and a titanium sublimator

oAfter a bakeout of 24 hours at temperatures up to 270 C to outgas the system

-10walls the system pressure read about lxlO Torr as measured with a Bayard-

Alpert ion gauge The pressure decreased somewhat during the first weeks of

spectrometer operation after bakeout The final system background pressure

-11 was less than 8xlO Torr or below the x-ray limit of the gauge When

-10operating in the Auger mode the background rose to lxlO Torr presumably

because of the large currents involved A mass spectrometer scan indicated

that the main components of the background were H2 CO CO2 and H 0 The ion2

gauge which can affect the composition of the background was turned off while

taking data except if noted otherwise

In an electrostatic deflection analyzer such as used here magnetic

fields can introduce spurious results In order to reduce the earths magnetic

field in the region of electron or ion trajectories three concentric cylinders

of Eagle AAA ultrahigh nickel steel alloy magnetic shielding are placed around

the spectrometer The shielding is mounted on a stainless steel and ceramic

support which rests in a groove in the inside wall of the vacuum chamber This

shielding is electrically isolated so it can be floated at any desired voltage

The ambient magnetic field in the target region is less than 5 milliGauss

The region inside the shielding and below the spectrometer (the

region shown in Figure 214) is referred to in this work as the experimental

25

chamber There are apertures cut in the magnetic shielding which allow the

crystal to be put in (and out of) the experimental chamber Apertures also

allow line-of-sight access to this region of the gas dosing jet mass spectromshy

eter and allow the crystal to be viewed

23 Electron Gun and Gun Electronics

The electron gun provides the incident focused electron beam used

in all the surface probing techniques Figures 22 and 23 show a schematic

drawing of the electron gun and a photograph of the gun assembled and disshy

dOf d f dOd b P 0 69assembled h a mo 1 1e verS10n 0 a gun eS1gne y er1aT e gun 1S The

comporients of the gun are a thermal cathode or source of electrons three

electrodes and four deflection plates The cathode is a Philips Metalonics

Type M barium calcium aluminate impregnated tungsten emitter The cathode was

0generally operated at 875 C with the heating accomplished indirectly with a

tungsten filament behind the heater The electrons emitted are focused into

a beam by two lenses the crossover formed by the lens action of the control

grid and first anode is focused onto the target by a second lens formed by the

first anode and second anode The incident primary beam thus formed can be

deflected along two axes in the target face by means of deflection plates

located at the entrance to the drift tube

The guns electronic circuitry is shown in Figure 24 Three 6 V

lead storage batteries in series power the cathode heater through an integrated

circuit voltage regulator The gun electrodes are biased using a resistor

chain voltage divider circuit This arrangement scales the guns lenses thus

keeping the beam focused as the primary beam energy is changed by varying the

26

Heat Shield

Cathode Heater

Cathode

Control Grid

First Anode

Second Anode

Coaxial Cathode Heater Feed through

~~f-------+-+-~ Paraxial Ray Aperture

---J7j7j--shy -~f-~ Accelerating ~~pt=-=a~~ or Decelerating

Lens Region

Deflection Plates

SP-1Oeuro7

Figure 22 Schematic diagram of electron gun

I)

-J

Figure 23 Photograph of electron gun assembled and disassembled

~ ~1 ~

h

I __-t--------+--

Defl + ---t---------

i---VV----110K I10K 93K

Supply

BHK 2000

I

Dec Mode

Ace 15K Mode

10K I 15K

l8V Leod

Gun X Deflection Plates (Y Defl Plates Rotate 90 not shown)

Storage Batteries

tv 00

Acc Mode Connections

To First Anode

To Second Anode X Defl shy

X

To Gun Deflection

Plates 10K 10K 57K 15K55K

1-_________----1+I Electron Gun

sp- 1125

Figure 24 Diagram of the electron guns biasing circuitry

29

gun power supply a Kepco BHK-2000 supply The gun can be operated in two

modes In the accelerating mode (ace mode) the second anode is biased more

positive than the first anode With this biasing the gun has been operated

from 30 V to 1825 V primary energy In the decelerating mode (dec mode) the

first anode is biased more positive than the second anode This allows for

higher field gradients at the cathode surface resulting in higher currents at

lower energies In the dec mode the gun can be operated from 10 V to 200 V

A spatial profile of the primary beam was taken using a two grid

retarding field analyzer mounted on the target manipulator at the position of

the target Electrode bias settings that optimized the beam line shape were

determined over the guns energy range These results are summarized in

Figure 25 The spatial full width at half maximum of the spot intensity is

less than 025 mm at 1825 V less than 075 mm at 100 V (dec mode) and about

25 mm at 10 V The energy width of the primary beam can be estimated by

retarding the primary beam between the drift tube and target At E = 100 eVpr1

the current to the target goes from 90 maximum to 10 maximum over a retarding

voltage of ~V $ 0360 meV This is an upper estimate on the energy spread in

the primary beam A lower limit would be the thermal spread of the cathode

~ 2kT or about 200 meV

24 Energy Spectrometer

A schematic diagram of the spectrometer used in this research to

energy analyze electrons and ions is given in Figure 26 The spectrometers

operation can be summarized as follows Electrons and ions originating at

the target with some energy distribution are accelerated or decelerated to the

Dec Mode --1r+shy

Probe Aperture Diameter

+10

E~

~ ~ 10Decelerating Lens Dec Mode aJLL- c E 0- E ~ ~ -051=-- Accelerating Lens Acc Mode Q)O - a WU)

o 200 600 1000 1400

E ~Ugt o Q)()cme=)

Q)

cO ~ e+- (+-Clo OQ)Q)loc

-lolo Wllaquo

u-

Electron Beam Energy Epri (eV) w o

Epri= 10eV Electron Beam Spatial Profiles Epri =1745 eV Epri =100eVf Epd=1000 eV Ace ModeAce Mode Aee Mode

-05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 -05 0 +05 Probe Aperture Position (mm)

SP-1084

Figure 25 Spatial characteristics of primary electron beam Top panel - Full width at half maximum of beam as a function of primary energy Bottom panel - Line shape of beam at several primary energies

-10 0

31

Cylindrical Electrostatic Analyzer

Spherical Elect rostat ic Analyzer

~____- __Gylindrical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

Coaxial Repulsion Cylinder

--__-___Spherical Analyzer Energy Resolving Aperture

~-- Electron Gun

Deflection Plates

-Gun Wiring

Concentric ~--- Deflection

Spheres

~-- LEED Screen

Scattered Electrons SP-l066

and Desorbed Ions

Figure 26 Schematic diagram of energy spectrometer

32

pass energy of the spectrometer by three spherical sector grids prior to

entering the spherical analyzer section of the instrument (An annular slot

cut in the LEED screen which is located between the grids and the spherical

analyzer allows particles to pass into the analyzer) Energy selection is

accomplished by a combination of two electrostatic deflection analyzers The

first is a high resolution spherical deflection analyzer This is backed by

a cylindrical mirror-type electrostatic analyzer referred to in this work as

the cylindrical or tandem analyzer Particles that pass through the spectromshy

eter impinge on the first dynode of a high gain electron multiplier The

output signal of this multiplier is detected using the electronics discussed

in Section 25

The spectrometer is constructed mainly of 304 stainless steel which

has been hydrogen and vacuum fired to reduce residual magnetism to less than

5 milliGauss Most interior surfaces have been rhodium plated to eliminate

surface charging problems Final design dimensions used in the spectrometer

are listed in Table 21 Refer to Figure 27 for a diagram of the variables

used in this table

The emission angle at the ta~get of the central trajectory that

passes 1nto t he spectrometer 1S 350 bull The entrance aperture (slot) accepts

particles that originate within plusmn0045 radians of this central ray making a

total solid angle accepted of 032 steradians

The spherical electrostatic deflection analyzer section is a

70spherical velocity selector of the type first investigated by Purcell The

analyzer is designed to focus an object spot of electrons or ions originating

at the front surface plane of the target onto the first energy resolution

33

TABLE 21 FINAL DESIGN DIMENSIONS FOR SPECTROMETER

SPHERICAL ANALYZER

l Inner sphere radius 342 cmr l

2 Outer sphere radius r 419 cm2

3 Radius of central ray a = 381 cm

04 Emission angle of central ray e = 35

05 Angular range of accepted rays 3244

0 - 3756

6 Angle subtended between entrance and exit planes of spherical analyzer section ~ = 51660

7 Acceptance solid angle of spectrometer 032 steradians

8 Diameter of first ERA D 025 cm

9 Distance of target from center of spherical analyzer P 665 cm

10 Distance of first ERA from center of spherical analyzer Q 1328 cm

CYLINDRICAL ANALYZER

11 Distance from first ERA to entrance diaphram S = 330 cm

12 Distance between entrance and exit diaphrams T 399 cm

13 Distance from exit diaphram to second ERA U = 330 cm

14 Inner cylinder radius Rl = 0099 cm

15 Distance from second ERA to electron multiplier V ~ 254 cm

16 Radius of entrance aperture R2 099 cm

17 Radius of repulsion electrode R3 = 330 cm

18 Radius of exit aperture R4 093 cm

19 Width of exit aperture G 037 cm

20 Diameter of second ERA E 044 cm

21 Width of entrance aperture F = 053 cm

34

Plane of First ERA

~

D

Spherical Analyzer

First ERA

I

I1 I~~ f F

S

]R4 II f ~

R3

11 [1

I II

U v~ cT t t

Plane of Plane of First ERA Second ERA

Cylindrical Analyzer

Figure 27 Schematic diagram of particle trajectories in spherical analyzer section Spatial configuration of tandem cylindrical analyzer section also shown

35

aperture or image plane The spatial configuration of the analyzer is such

as to give maximum reduced dispersibn according to the relations derived by

Purcell The magnification of the source at maximum reduced dispersion is 2

Diaphrams at the entrance and exit apertures of the spherical analyzer are

designed to minimize problems caused by the fringing fields as discussed by

71Herzog

Initial tests using only the spherical analyzer indicated electrons

that scattered from the interior surfaces could be passed through the first

energy resolving aperture over a range of analyzer pass energies To eliminate

this erroneOus signal a second low resolution cylindrical mirror-type

72electrostatic analyzer was designed and constructed by P Luscher

Electrons or ions that pass through the first energy resolving

aperture at the correct energy are deflected by the repulsion electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer and pass through the second energy resolving aperture

This signal impinges on the first dynode of the electron multiplier Trajectory

tracing calculations indicated that the cylindrical analyzer would eliminate

the scattered signal if this second analyzer had a full width energy resolution

~EE = 028 where E is the energy of the particle executing the pass pass

correct central trajectory through the spectrometer This is not a stringent

design requirement

The energy resolution of the spectrometer is defined as the ratio

~EEp where ~E is the width of the line shape passed as the spectrometer is

scanned in pass energy for a monochromatic source of particles with energy Ep

For the spectrometer configuration here the energy resolution is determined

by the resolution achieved in the high resolution spherical analyzer section

36

at least down to low pass energies Line shape broadening effects in the

spherical analyzer originate from three sources 1) the finite diameter D

of the first energy resolving aperture 2) the finite radius R of the source

disk and 3) the use of a finite range of emission angles of particles from

the crystal surface which can enter and be passed by the spectrometer This

third source of line broadening results from the spherical analyzer having

imperfect second order focusing at the first energy resolving aperture The

effect on the line shape of the finite range of emission angles goes as the

square of the acceptance half width which in this analyzer is small In

the calculation of energy resolution below the third source of line broadening

will not be considered

A numerical value for the energy resolution for the spectrometer

used in this research can be calctilated To do so it is necessary to derive

an expression for 6EEp in terms of the diameter D and radius R given above

In the calculation below these two sources of line broadening will be

considered independent and the effective line shape and energy resolution

from each will be calculated separately Following an analysis by Purcell an

energy resolution can be expressed in terms of the velocity resolution S bull ~

S is defined by ~

where v is the velocity of a particle which the analyzer passes along the pass

central trajectory when and v is the velocity of a particle withset at Epass ~

slightly different energy E bullbull (For convenience E and v will be ~ pass pass

shortened to Ep and vp in the following discussion Lower case subscripts are

37

used to distinguish this derivation from the defined energy resolution above)

A resolution can be calculated as follows

(22)

Using Equation 21 this becomes

(23)

(24)

If the line shape width ~E is written as

fiE = E - E = (E - E ) + (E - Emn) (25)max max p pm~n ~

then the energy resolution can be expressed as

(26)

D and R can be related to Q and Q bull as shown belowf-I max f-Im~n

Line shape broadening due to the finite diameter D of the first

energy resolving aperture (1st ERA) can be calculated from the velocity

70dispersion given by Purcell

(27)

9 00 ~ (28)

Refer to Figure 27 for a definition of the variables in these equations

38

Assume a current j(a) emanating from the center of the target

along xl with energy distribution

j (e) = 1 (29)

All of this current crosses the plane of the 1st ERA at a position d given by

d = Y2cOS a = 900 acos a (210)

A 1st ERA of diameter D will pass all the current for which Y2 Y2 leading

to the relation for the limiting values of 13

(211)

D bull cos a a lt D cos a (212)2 bull 900 - 2 bull 900

The energy resolution due to a finite 1st ERA is then calculated from Equation

26 to be

~E (~st ERA) = 2 [053D + 053DJ = 02l2D (213) P

For D = 025 cm (010 in) this evaluates to

8E (1st ERA) = 0021 (214)E P

The line shape of the current distribution resulting from the finite 1st ERA

is a unit function for the allowable e values (Equation 214) since all the

current j(S) is passed by the 1st ERA and j(S) is a unit function in S

The above line shape and resolution have been obtained effectively

by varying the energy of the signal current (via Equation 29) rather than

39

using a monochromatic current source and varying the pass energy as initially

used in defining the spectrometer resolution That the results given in

Equation 214 are the same as would be obtained from a more complicated

calculation using a monochromatic current source can be seen by considering a

monochromatic source v == (1 + l)vp and noting that it will be deflected tol

the edge of the 1st ERA by a pass energy Ep

Line shape broadening and an energy resolution due to a finite radius

to the source disk can be determined in a manner analogous to that used above

Consider a point source of particles at the 1st ERA that travel back through

the analyzer Such reverse trajectories would cross the target plane at a

position

(215)

where for these reverse trajectories using Equation 27

Yl = 491 a (216)

p being a variable representing the radius at which these trajectories cross

the plane of the target p is analogous to d in the earlier calculation

Using reciprocity particles emanating from a position on the target at radius

p with a velocity corresponding to S will cross the plane of the 1st ERA at

the axis For a source of radius R the line width is found by using the

arguments leading up to Equation 211 to be

R bull cos e S lt R cos e (217)491 ~ 491

For a spot size 2R == 1 rom (0039 in) the energy resolution due to a finite

source disk is

40

A (source) = 2[017R + 017R] (218)E p

~ (source) 013 for 2R = 1 mm (219)E p

At low primary energies for which the beam spot size is greater than 1 mm

the above broadening and resolution due to spot size are correspondingly larger

The line shape associated with a finite source disk is linearly

proportional to~ The functional dependence of source current on ~ which

essentially determines the line shape due to the finite source is not given

by Equation 29 Rather it can be obtained by assuming uniform emission over

the area of the source knowing that ~ and the radial position at the source

p are linearly related by Equation 216 and using the area relation

(220)

(221)

If the current from the source with velocity (1 + ~)v that passes the 1st ERA p

is designated JI(~) then

(222)

49lmiddotApJ I (~l) 0 2TT cos e ~ 1 (223)

From Equation 223 the line shape of the current due to finite source is seen

to be linearly related to ~

41

The overall resolution of the instrument can be approximated by the

sum of the two resolutions calculated above which is approximately 2

Experimentally the resolution of the spectrometer is measured as the full

width at half maximum (FWHM) of the elastic peak The bottom panel of Figure

28 shows the FWHM of the elastic peak as a function of the spectrometer pass

energy At 90 eV the experimental energy resolution is

bE FWEM 2 (224)Ep = ~ = 90 = 022

which is close to the theoretical calculations

The effective resolution of the spectrometer can be greatly increased

by retarding the beam using the three grids located between the target and

spherical analyzer This can be seen by repeating the calculation of Equation

224 using data from Figure 28 at a lower energy The measured effective

energy resolution of the spectrometer varies between 22 percent and 06

percent as the elastic peak is retarded by 10 percent to 90 percent of its

initial value Over this same range the intensity decreases almost 98 percent

Hence increased resolution is obtained at the expense of signal intensity

This is shown in the top panel of Figure 28 The solid curve in the top panel

is the transmission function of the spectrometer for a primary beam of 100 eV

The transmission function shows the fractional decrease in signal passed by

the spectrometer as a function of pass energy of the spectrometer The data

points were taken by retarding the 100 eV elastic peak between the grids until

it was passed by the spectrometer The transmission function is the ratio of

the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer at E to the peakpass

42

Figure 28 Top panel - Transmission function of spectrometer This function was obtained by retarding the 100 eV elastically scattered electron signal between the spectrometer grids and then measuring the ratio of the peak signal intensity passed by the spectrometer to the peak signal passed at Epass = E = 100 eV Bottom panel - Full width at half maX1mum of ~K~ elastically scattered electron signal passed by the spectrometer when the 100 eV signalis retarded using the grids to an energy E

pass

43

09

08

07

c006 U ()

E()05 c e 1-04

03

02

01

Epri =100eV

~ -Transmission of Spectrometer

Peak Intensity at Eposs Peak Intensity at Epass 100 eV

--Transmission for flEE Constant

() +shy

o gt-

20

10

Full Width at Half Maximum of Elastic Peak

100 eVEpri =

o~oo 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Spectrometer Pass Energy J Epass (eV) SP-1l22

0

44

signal passed at E = E i = 100 eV The dotted line in Figure 28 pass pr

indicates the transmission function for ~ = constant for a monochromatic

point source Deviations from the straight line are due 1) to the nonidea1

elastic peak (ie finite breadth) and spectrometer geometry 2) to field

penetration at the grids as a function of the retarding potential (which was

varied to obtain the graph) and 3) to the varying response of the electron

multiplier as a function of the voltage of the electrons incident on the

multiplier For the data presented here electrons were incident on the

multiplier with an energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer The

bottom panel of Figure 28 shows the experimental full width at half maximum

of the elastic peak as a function of pass energy (in this case pass energy =

(100 eV - retarding voltage))

The energy spectrometer has been operated successfully in both the

electron and ion pass modes over a pass energy range from 2 eV to 400 eV

The spectrometer is normally operated at a fixed pass energy and ideally

fixed energy resolution Energy sweeps are made by retardation (acceleration)

of electrons or ions between the first (screen grid) and third (tEED grid)

grids prior to entering the spherical analyzer section of the spectrometer

The third grid which was added primarily to eliminate charging problems

associated with the LEED screen (see Section 26) also improved the effective

resolution this improvement is due to decreased field penetration of the

applied retarding (accelerating) potential since the retarding (accelerating)

can be done over a 50 percent longer distance In addition the third grid is

made of smaller mesh which also reduces field penetration

45

The spectrometer is supported vertically from the electrical feedshy

through turret as shown in Figure 29 This assembly attaches at the top of

the main vacuum chamber (see Figure 21) and can be removed completely wired

independent of other parts of the instrument

The electron multiplier is an EMI model 96434B detector with 17

BeCu venetial blind dynode stages

25 Spectrometer Electronics

Figure 210 shows a schematic diagram of the electronic circuitry

used for taking electron energy loss spectroscopy electron stimulated

desorption and Auger electron spectroscopy measurements Some details for

example capacitors used to eliminate noise and some switches used to change

from one mode to another are not shown Only the most common biasing

arrangement used in this work will be discussed

In the electron pass mode (including Auger measurements) the LEED

grid LEED screen Herzog diaphrams driftspace and center electrode of the

cylindrical analyzer are grounded Energy sweeps of the spectrometer are made

by varying the retardation or acceleration voltage applied between the three

73grids A variable frequency variable height floating sawtooth generator

plus a variable dc offset bias are summed at the inverting input of a Kepco

OPS-2000 operational power supply the output of which biases the three grids

through a resistor chain When the output signal from the multiplier is being

detected using a phase sensitive detector a 3 kHz sinusoidal signal is also

fed into the summing junction VT the target bias with respect to the screen

grid is zero in the electron pass mode The spherical analyzer deflecting

46

Figure 29 Photograph showing support of spectrometer from electrical feedthrough turret

W(100) Crystal

lOOK

Vr=O-6V

Dec Mode

Ace Mode (E Il

VOFFS

VOFFS=O-6V

Ratemeter ~

INlOO

=

Drift Space

epUISion Electrode

i -----In

(Ion Mode Only)

Jshy-l

Hamner N-780A Ortec 410 Linear Amp

Pulse Count Mode

Synchronous Detection Mode

PAR PAR Type A HR-8 Preamp

47K To Recorder Y

SP-1126

Figure 210 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer electronics for operation in the electron pass and ion pass modes

48

electrodes and the repulsion electrode of the cylindrical analyzer are scaled

using a resistor chain powered by a second OPS-2000 operational amplifier power

supply The voltage scaling for these electrodes was determined from particle

trajectory calculations The voltage applied to the repulsion electrode using

this resistor chain can be varied using a potentiometer this adjustment can

in effect vary the resolution of the cylindrical analyzer The OPS-2000

supply also biases the outer electrodes of the analyzer deflection plates by

means of a separate resistor chain The inner electrodes of these deflection

plates are fixed at the potential of the analyzers Herzog diaphrams The

ripple voltage on the output of both operational power supplies is less than

20 meV at 100 eV

Electrons impinge on the first dynode of the multiplier with an

energy equal to the pass energy of the spectrometer plus a voltage equal to

(R (36MO + R raquoV where R is shown in Figure 210 and V is the voltagem m M m M

across the multiplier In the synchronous detection mode V was variedM

between 1100 V and 1700 V In the pulse counting mode the voltage was normally

set at 2800 V The output of the multiplier after being passed by an

isolation capacitor is either pulse counted with a ratemeter or is detected

using a PAR HR-8 phase sensitive detector The reference signal for the HR-8

is either 3 kHz when taking dN(E)dE distributions (see Section 324 and

2Appendix B) or Auger data or 6 kHz when taking d N(E)dE distributions

When the spectrometer is operated in the ion pass mode the polarity

of the biasing on the analyzer deflecting electrodes is switched In addition

the positive pole of the electron mUltiplier supply is grounded This biasing

arrangement causes the ions to impinge on the multiplier at an energy

49

E pass + VM

which was usually 3040 kV In the ion pass mode the spectromshy

eter is generally operated at E = 40 eV This requires an acceleration of pass

the ions between the screen and LEED grids since the initial ion energies are

between 0 eV and 10 eV In addition to accelerating between the grids the

ions were normally accelerated between the target and screen grid using VT

in order to facilitate interpretation of the data as discussed in Section

325

The electronic circuitry for operating the analyzer in the time-ofshy

flight mode is identical to that just described for the ~on pass mode except

a pulsed voltage is applied to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a

schematic of this arrangement Unlike continuous operation in this mode ions

can enter the analyzer only during the on pulse In the lower part of

Figure 211 the energy of an ion is shown as a function of its position in the

spectrometer with the pulse on and off

In the work function mode the target is fixed at ground potential

through a picoammeter Retardation of the incident current is accomplished by

driving the drift tube positive in voltage

26 LEED Display System

The low energy electron diffraction (LEED) system consists of a

phosphor-coated screen located at the entrance to the spherical analyzer and

othree grids The screen a 1096 stainless steel sector (of which approxishy

omatelya 98 sector is visible) was coated with a P-l phosphor The first

two grids are constructed of 50 mesh rhodium-coated stainless steel The

LEED screen and these two grids are operated as a standard two grid LEED

50

II

Vr V

Ion Trajectory

ACC

Linear Amp Preamp

To Oscilloscope Trace

VRG~+ To O~oopeP I If Trace and Time u se t Base Trigger Genera or -

(l)~ os

CIgt () o cC u (l) E t gt - C N a (l) (l) (u~CIgt (l) 0 ~ shy - c 0 c 0 0 ti (l) ac o c

()

f- (j) a (j)lt f-lt u ~----~~------~~ ~I

0 1--A I ----5----------------

ElON I

VACC

I (l) ()

5 Q

gt CIgt t c

~---J8w c o H

SP-I027

EPAS S + V L-____________________---- M

Figure 211 Circuit diagram of the spectrometer for operation in the time-of-f1ight mode

51

system with the retarding grid biased to pass only electrons elastically

scattered from the target and with the LEED screen accelerating voltage

normally set at 5000 V Slots cut through the screen allow electrons and

ions to pass into the spectrometer Initial operation of the instrument

indicated that charging of the LEED screen caused a significant perturbation

on electron trajectories below 100 eV The third grid a 100 mesh stainless

s tee 1 spherical sector is loca ted 0050 em in front of the LEED screen to

alleviate this problem

An aluminum-coated glass plate mirror located below the spectrometer

reflects the LEED screen through a 6Lch indo in the chamber wall (see

Figure 21) LEED spot intensities are measured through this window using a

Gamma Scientific Model 2000 telephotometer

27 Crystal Manipulator Assembly

The crystal manipulator assembly is shown schematically in Figure

212 and a photograph is given in Figure 213 The assembly is designed to

provide thermal and electrical control of the target while allowing the

target face to be rotatable between the gas dosing port the LEED screenshy

energy spectrometer position and the quadrupole mass spectrometer This

rotation is indicated in Figure 214 The manipulator assembly is composed

of a commercial Physical Electronics specimen manipulator a long shaft which

supports the rotary electrical connections a liquid nitrogen dewaI and

aluminum foil strap to provide target cooling and a target mounting assembly

The long shaft of the manipulator assembly is constructed of

different materials as follows A1 0 for electrical isolation (Figure 2122 3

52

Figure 212 Schematic diagram of the target manipulation and thermal control system showing (1) kovar-glass-kovar dewar insulation (2) Miniconflat flanges (3) Physical Electronics Industries specimen manipulator Model 10-501M mounted on 8 inch od Conflat flange (4) six 5 kV - 150 A electrical feedthroughs (5) clamp assembly (6) A1 03 rod (7) molybdenum spring2(8) stainless steel electr1cal connectors (9) electrical connecshytion (1 shown) (10) A1203 spacers (11) Pyrex plates (12) molybshydenum (13) 001 wall stainless tube (14) Pyrex tubes (15) tantalum rods (16) copper rod (17) vacuum chamber wall (18) liquid riitrogen dewar (19) 001 wall stainless tube (20) copper radiation shield (21) strap-to-dewar clamp (22) crystal support (23) 12 pole heater (24) strap-to-copper rod clamp (25) aluminum foil strap (26) pancake heater supp~rt~ (27) thermocouple (28) crystal (29) pancake heater (30) tanta~ lum section (31) molybdenum section (32) molybdenum-to-copper rod clamp assembly

53

Jl ~

Figure 213 Photograph of crystal manipulator The retarding field analyzer used to characterize the primary electron beam is shown mounted on the manipulator in place of the tungsten crystal mounting assembly

55

Magnetic Shielding

Tungsten Crystal

Energy Spectrometer and LEED Gas Dosing Optics Aperture

To Gas Bottle

Line -of-Sight Quadrupole Mass Crystal Holder Spectrometer and Manipulator

SP-1072

Figure 214 Schematic of the experimental chamber of the apparatus (see Section 22 for a discussion of the experimental chamber) Rotation of the crystal is indicated by the dotted line

56

no 6) molybdenum rod (no 12) 304 stainless steel tubing for thermal

isolation (no 13) and copper rod (no 16) Six electrical leads separated

by glass discs (no 11) wind around the shaft ~his configuration allows for

rotary motion of the shaft while still providing electrical control at the

targetJ The electrical leads then enter glass tubing parallel to the shaft

and end up at the target mounting assembly For clarity only one of these

leads is shown in Figure 212

An aluminum foil strap (no 25) made of 150 pieces of 254 cm x ~254

em x 00025 cm foil connects the liquid nitorgen reservoir to the copper rod

end of the manipulator shaft This provides conduction cooling to the target

A copper radiation shield (no 20) is constructed around the strap This

cooling system is sufficient to cool the target from flash temperatures to

approximately -1500

C in 5 minutes

The tungsten single crystal target is supported 095 cm above a

tantalum and molybdenum right angle mount (nos 30 31) on one 0038 cm

diameter tungsten wire The wire was spot-welded to the back face of the

tungsten disc prior to its final electropolishing The target is heated by

electron bombardment of its back face from a tungsten pancake heater (no 29)

The target can also be heated by conduction through its support wire using a

25 watt 12 pole 25L6 RCA heater which is mounted inside the tantalum part

of the right angle mount as shown dotted in Figure 212 (no 23) Using this

heater the target temperature can be varied between -20oC and -150

0 C Tungsten

and tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple leads 0076 cm in diameter are spot-

welded to the side of the target The thermocouple wires are each supported

by being fed along the axis of a tungsten wire helix (not shown in Figure

57

212) The helices are made of 025 cm diameter wire and are spot-welded to

supports near the center of the molybdenum part of the right angle mount

Calibration of the thermocouple was made out of the vacuum chamber using a

copper-constantan reference thermocouple The calibration procedure is

described in Appendix A and the calibration is given in Figure A1

28 Crystal Preparation and Cleaning Procedures

The experimental sample is a single crystal tungsten disc cut from

a (100) oriented tungsten rod using a diamond impregnated stainless wire in a

string saw The tungsten rod supplied by Metals Research Ltd was taken

from the purest 75 cm of a triply zone refined 25 cm length

Both the front and back surfaces of the disc were polished using in

succession 15 micron 3 micron and 1 micron alumina After being mechanishy

cally polished the crystal was e1ectropo1ished using a 1 NaOH solution The

final dimensions of the target disc are 0033 cm (013 in) thick and approxishy

mate1y 080 cm in diameter

After the final e1ectropo1ish the orientation of both the front and

back surfaces was checked using an x-ray diffractometer and was determined to

be within 0100 of the (100) face A back reflection Laue picture of the final

surface showed sharp well-defined beams indicating a high degree of crystalshy

line order

The target was o 74cleaned initially by heating to at least 2200 K in

a -61x10 Torr oxygen atmosphere for 9 hr to remove carbon The choice of

temperature and time were somewhat arbitrary as there is considerable debate

in the literature as to the proper method for cleaning tungsten for surface

58

research 74 A standard method7 1823 has been to heat the target to some

temperature above 11000 K (commonly above 20000 K) in an oxygen environment for

times varying up to 200 hr or more This process is generally followed by a

high temperature degassing in ultrahigh vacuum However there is evidence

othat if the temperature is held above 2000 K bulk carbon will not diffuse to

75 74the surface The possibility of thermal etching must also be considered

For the tungsten used in this research the amount of contamination

on the surface was determined using Auger spectroscopy Figure 215 is an

Auger spectrum taken from a dirty surface showing the Auger peaks resolved in

our system Carbon oxygen and tungsten peaks are seen clearly Also shown

76in Figure 215 are theoretical Auger transition energies for C 0 and W

with the relative theoretical strengths of the transitions indicated by the

normalized height of the lines In Figure 216 are shown Auger spectra taken

after different crystal treatments or under different experimental conditions

Curve a shows the spectrum taken after saturating the surface with CO Note

the carbon and oxygen peaks There is no measurable carbon peak after a

flash as seen in curve b Structure does remain between 475 eV and 525 eV

It is doubtful that this structure is a result of oxygen contamination since

there are normally three oxygen Auger peaks with the 490 eV oxygen peak

stronger than the 475 eV oxygen peak in this spectrum no 490 eV peak is

observed In order to reduce any oxygen contamination the target was heat

0 treated to 2200 K in a hydrogen atmosphere of 5x10- 7 Torr for 4 minutes 74

The structure above 475 eV is seen to remain unchanged as seen in curve c

This is a further indication that this structure is not oxygen Curve d shows

that sitting in a 400 eV 4 ~ primary beam close to typical operating

59

Carbon Oxygen

o 100

dN(E) dE

200 300 400 500 600 Electron Energy (eV) SP-U44

Figure 215 Auger electron spectrums obtained at different instrument sensitivities from dirty tungsten crystal Also shown in upper part of figure are theoretical Auger transitions for tungsten carbon and oxygen calculated by Coghlan and C1ausing76 Heights of the lines represent relative theoshyretical strengths of the transitions

60

(a) CO Monolayer

~5Ab) Heate~toCleon x25

d ~5dN(E) dE (e) Heat Treated

x25 in H2

_~5 ~ (d) 400V4fLA

x25 Primary Beam for

25~

d x5

(e) 1700V 211-A Primary Beam for 10 Min

200 300 400 500 Electron Energy (eV) SP-1l45

Figure 216 Comparison of Auger electron spectrums taken over the energy range 200 eV to 550 eV under different experimental condition

61

conditions for 25 minutes causes only a slight change in the slope of the

curve at the energy at which the carbon peak occurs (Note that curve d was

taken with a primary beam of 1700 eV after the crystal had been sitting in

the lower energy beam for 25 minutes) The absence of the carbon peak in curve

d means that the crystal surface is not contaminated from the gun while taking

measurements After bombarding the target for 10 minutes with a primary beam

of 1700 eV and 21 ~ typical Auger spectroscopy beam conditions a carbon

peak is observed as shown in curve e Using the peak to peak height of the

272 ~V carbon peak obtained near CO saturation as an indication of carbon

monolayer coverage the electron gun in the Auger mode is seen to deposit

approximately 013 monolayer of carbon in 10 minutes

From the above results it is concluded that the tungsten surface

could be flashed clean and that no carbon or oxygen contamination is deposited

during most experimental measurements Some carbon is deposited when operating

in the Auger mode Two unexpected small peaks are observed between 475 eV

and 525 eV Identification of the source of this weak structure could not be

made with certainty although two possible causes are worth noting The

unexpected structure could be tungsten Auger transitions Theoretically

several relatively strong tungsten peaks have been predicted at 477 eV and

486 eV and also between 510 eV and 520 eV However no observations of

tungsten transitions in this energy range have been reported in the experimenshy

tal literature A second possible source of this structure mighL be chromium

There is considerable chromium in the spectrometers stainless steel parts and

chromium Auger peaks occur at 489 eV and 529 eV However if it is assumed

that Auger spectroscopy is sensitive to one percent of a monolayer it would

62

13 2require surface coverages of 10 chromium atomscm or more to yield these

peaks It is extremely unlikely that either 1) a concentration of chromium

this large could diffuse to the tungsten surface from the stainless parts or

2) enough chromium could be sputtered (at the ambient pressure) into the backshy

ground from the stainless parts and subsequently adsorb onto the surface A

spark vaporization mass spectroscopy analysis of a tungsten sample cut from

the same boule as the tungsten used in this research revealed no chromium

thus eliminating the possibility of a bulk chromium concentration in the

crystal Hence although the weak structure corresponds to some degree to

chromium Auger lines it is believed that the crystal is not contaminated with

this element In an Auger spectrum taken between 500 eV and 900 eV (not shown)

some additional very weak structure was seen but none of it could be

attributed to any specific element

o 77In this research the crystal was always flashed to gt 2200 K for 30

seconds prior to experimentation Any reference to a clean tungsten surface

means that this procedure has been followed

The crystal surface exhibited what appeared to be furrows which

increased in density during the course of the research Because the coolest

part of the crystal during a flash that region next to the tungsten wire

support remained visibly polished and flat it is believed that the uneven

appearance was temperature related

29 Gas Handling System

The gas handling system used to obtain adsorption overlayers is

shown in Figure 217 Research grade hydrogen (impurity level less than 2

To Quadrupole Moss Spectrometer

Alternate Gas Source Control Valve

Thermocouple Gouge

Plenum

~-----Viewing Port

Jet Position Adjustment

Ion Gouge

Cryosorb Pump

0 t)

S-1l28

Figure 217 Schematic drawing of gas handling system

64

ppm) is admitted from a glass flash into a pyrex manifold and stainless steel

reservoir Reservoir pressure was kept near 50 microns as read using a

thermocouple gauge From the reservoir hydrogen is admitted into the vacuum

system through a 126 cm diameter tube by opening valve A Figure 217 or is

admitted as a gas jet by opening valve B The jet is formed as hydrogen

effuses through a small orifice at the end of a 063 cm dia tube78J~9 Leaking

hydrogen through the 126 em diameter tube increases the background and is used

when hydrogen is to be adsorbed from the background The jet can be used

with the target rotated in front of the gas dosing port for rapid over layer

adsorption with a low hydrogen background pressure The gas jet is designed

so that only that fraction of the effusing gas which will strike the target is

allowed to pass through an aperture in a skimmer The rest of the gas jet is

reflected back from the skimmer and out of the experimental chamber When the

target is rotated up to face the spectrometer the gas jet if left on passes

out of the experimental chamber through holes in the opposite side of the

magnetic shielding

The gas manifold and reservoir can be pumped down to less than 1

micron using a liquid nitrogen cryosorb pump

210 Mass Spectrometer

A quadrupole mass spectrometer Varian Residual Gas Analyzer Model

974-0003 is mounted on a vacuum chamber port opposite the gas jet port In

this research it was used for vacuum chamber leak testing and determination of

the components of the background pressure

65

CHAPrER 3

EXPERIMENTAL PFGCEDURE AND RESULTS

31 Introduction

The experimental data taken on the hydrogen-W(lOO) system are

presented in this chapter The apparatus used in obtaining the data has been

discussed previously in Chapter 2 A further explanation of experimental

procedures used in measuring parameters follows in Section 32 The experishy

mental results are presented in the remaining sections of this chapter A

general discussion of the data is given in Chapter 4 and a summary of the

research is given in Chapter 5

32 Experimental Procedure

321 Work Function and Coverage Measurements

Contact potential measurements in this case the difference between

the work functions of the target and of the cathode in the electron gun are

43 44measured using a retarding potential techn1que The primary or incident

electron beam current is retarded between the electron gun drift tube and the

target The measured current to the target goes to zero at a retarding voltage

VR

given by

V = (rn + V - rn ) + E (31)R Tcath sc TW pr1

where Cfgtcath is the cathode work function CfgtW is the W(lOO) work function Vsc

is the potential due to space charge immediately in front of the cathode and

E is the applied potential between the cathode and the drift tube Changespr1

66

in the work function of the target ~ are calculated by measuring changes

in VR

LlVR

From Equation 3la change in V is found to equalR

(32)

with the assumptions of constant rn h V and E The assumptions usedTcat sc pr1

are reasonable since the cathode in thermal equilibrium and since it

is exposed to very small changes in the ambient during the measurements The

applied potential E i can be maintained constant pr

A typical retarding potential curve is given in Figure 31 The

electron current to the target the ordinate in this figure is given by

(33)

where I i is the current incident on the target from the electron gun and pr

I (E N) the secondary current represents the electron current leavingsec pri

the target surface This secondary current is a function of both primary

47electron energy and hydrogen coverage Because of the dependence on coverage

the intensity and line shape of the retarding potential curves change somewhat

upon adsorption

In determining LlVR

or equivalently the target work function change

a retarding potential curve taken from the clean tungsten surface and a curve

taken after hydrogen adsorption are normalized at a position on the curve where

the target current begins to falloff sharply (position A in Figure 31) The

work function change is then measured as the voltage difference between the

two curves at half the normalized height

Changes in the work function of 001 eV can be resolved The

10

(J)

c I

I

AE lt( l-~ c Q)

-

05 U ~ I I ~ Q) 0) shy0 I-

omiddot ~ middot 10 20 30

Cathode Potential-Target Potential (volts)

SP-1142 Figure 31 Retarding potential curve showing the current to the target as

a function of the difference in applied potential between the electron gun cathode and the target The curve is shifted in energy with changes in hydrogen coverage due to changes in the target work function 6~ 6~ is measured as the difference between two retarding curves at the height A2

68

measurement was sensitive to target rotation position because of the retarding

field in the target region However with the target positioning stop used

the retarding potential curve could be repeated with an accuracy better than

002 eV after rotating the target Since the work function change is the

difference between two such curves the error in the measurement is ~004 eV

Changes in hydrogen coverage are monitored by changes in the work

function of the tungst~n tlurface No experimental attempts have been made

to calibrate the measureci ork fUllction change to an absolute change in the

coverage of atomssurface area Such a calibration requires an accurate measure

of system pumping speed or dosing flux However as discussed in Section 34

such a calibration can be made using results from the literature

322 Primary Electron Beam Energy and Current Measurements

The total electron beam current incident on the target Ipri is

measured by biasing the target at a potential of +45 volts with respect to the

surrounding experimental chamber Tests indicated that the current measured

in this manner is within 3 percent of the total current leaving the electron

gun which is also I The current leaving the gun is measured by summingprJ

electron currents to the target grids LEED screen magnetic shielding

analyzer Herzog diaphrams and front shield plate This current sum measureshy

ment of I was more difficult to make experimentally than biasing the targetprJ

at +45 volts

The primary electron energy E refers to the energy of theprJ

incident electrons referenced to the vacuum level Themiddotpritnarymiddot energy is

measured between the cathode and drift tube of the electron gun A contact

potential correction between the guns cathode and the target of between

69

-17 eV and -22 eV has been applied to the measured primary energy given in

the data This correction is found by using the measured cut off potential VR

and Equation 31 The spread in the correction is a result of th~ change in

space charge and hence change in V which occurs when the potential gradientsc

at the cathode is altered by changing the voltage on the control grid The

control grid voltage determines the potential fields in the region of the

cathode surface and hence affects the emitted current and space charge

323 Target Temperature Measurement

Prior to taking any data the target was cleaned by rapid electron

bombardment heating (flashing) at gt 22000 K for 30 seconds Figure 32 shows

the temperature of the target versus time from end of flash with and without

liquid nitrogen in the dewar Residual heat in the crystal supports due

to previous flashes does affect the temperature versus time curves somewhat

The higher temperature data were normally taken starting 3 to 4 minutes after

flashing at a target temperature of 600 C + lSoC Data taken under these

conditions are sometimes referred to as room terr~erature or higher temperature

data Low temperature data were taken starting 4 to S minutes after flaShing

when the target temperature was less than -l45 0 C

324 Electron Scattering and Auger Measurements

The electron scattering data consists of the electron signal emanating

from the target in the acceptance solid angle of the spectrometer following

impingement of the primary electron beam on the target An energy distribution

of these electrons is taken by fixing the pass energy of the spectrometer at

E and sweeping a retarding or accelerating voltage between the screen gridpass

and LEED grid as described previously in Section 25 The output current of

70 300~----~----~----~--------------------

200

-u 1000

-~ J

e ltlgt 0 E ~ -ltlgt ~ 0 ~

Liquid Nitrogen in Dewar

-100

-2000~----~----~----~----~----~----~61 2 345

Time from Flash (min) SP-ll40

Figure 32 Temperature of the tungsten crystal versus time elapsed since a crystal flash The upper curve represents the temperature versus time relation when there is no crystal cooling The lower curve shows this relation when there is liquid nitrogen in the cooling dewar

71

the electron multiplier N(E) is pulse counted or as discussed below Cld in

Appendix B synchronously detected

N(E) is proportional to the electron current originating at the

target with energy between E and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance

solid angle of the analyzer This distribution consists of rapidly varying

true secondary and characteristic loss structure interpretable in terms of

transitions and collective oscillations in the target plus a smoothly varying

background In order to separate the structure from the background the energy

distribution is electronically differentiated using a technique proposed by

67Harrls As shown in Appendix B a signal proportional to the first or to

the second derivative of N(E) is obtained by synchronously detecting the

appropriate harmonic of the output of the electron multiplier The relation

between the electron signal N(E) and the synchronously detected signal can

be seen from Equations B4 through B9 In these equations it is assumed a

peaked structure G(E) being inv~stigatedcan be represented by a Gaussian

centered at E with standard deviation o The detected first harmonic of o

N(E) has structure which has a peak-to-peak height proportional to G(E plusmn a)o

The detected second harmonic of N(E) has structure at E proportional to o

G(E ) a2 In addition there is t contribution to the detected signal from o

the background Since the background which can be represented by a polynomial

in energy is slowly varying the higher order terms which remairr in the difshy

feren tiated signals are small

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as

is commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in taking electron

scattering characteristic energy loss measurements

72

325 Ion Measurements

g+ ions desorbed from the crystal following electron impact could

be detected by the spectrometer when operated in the ion pass mode It was

found convenient to operate the instrument at a pass energy of 40 eV in this

mode operation at a lower pass energy while increasing the resolution

decreased the already weak signal intensity Since the ions have between 0 eV

and 10 eV energy when desorbed acceleration between the target and spectromshy

eter was necessary An accelerating voltage V (the output of an OPS-2000 acc

power supply) was applied between the screen grid and the entrance to the

spectrometer In addition a second accelerating voltage V was appliedT

between the target and the screen grid This latter voltage was needed in

order to energetically separate the ion signal which originated at the target

from a background signal produced by 1) ions electron desorbed from the screen

grid andor other surfaces in the experimental chamber and 2) ionization of

the background The ions that passed into the spectrometer were accelerated

into the first dynode of the electron multiplier The output pulses of the

multiplier were amplified and then counted with a ratemeter

Prior to taking ion data the target was flashed and allowed to

cool to the experimental temperature It was then exposed to hydrogen with

the hydrogen coverage being monitored using work function measurements Ion

energy distributions were taken by fixing E and V and sweeping the pass T

accelerating voltage V Desorption curve measurements which are a measureshyacc

ment of the decrease of the ion signal in the electron beam were taken by

fixing V V and E and monitoring the ion signal as a function of acc T pass

time

73

The kinetic energy of the detected ions is equal to the spectrometer

pass energy E minus the acceleration of the ions between the target and pass

spectrometer V + VT

plus a contact potential correction term due to the acc

difference in work functions of the clean target and surfaces of the spectromshy

eter The pass and acceleration energies are chosen for each experiment The

contact potential difference between the tungsten target and the rhodium

coated stainless steel surfaces of the spectrometer is less than 015 eV

This was determined using a retarding potential measurement between the

target and screen grid Dosing the target with hydrogen did not change the

work function of the grid Hence it is assumed that 015 eV can be used for

the correction at all target hydrogen coverages Since this correction is

on the order of the error in the measurement it has not been made in the

data

The analyzer is operated in a time-of-f1ight mode by applying a

pulsed voltage to the retarding grid Figure 211 shows a schematic of this

arrangement Incident ions can enter the analyzer only during the pulse By

measuring the path length d = ab (see Figure 211) from the retarding grid

to the electron multiplier knowing the pass energy E of the spectromshypass

eter and experimentally measuring the time for the entering species to

traverse the distance d the mass of singly-charged ions passing through the

analyzer can be calculated using the following formulation of the distance

equals velocity times time equation

m _ dxrt J 2 (34)La J2E(X~

74

The flight time is measured by making a trace on an oscilloscope of both the

pulse applied to the retarding grid that allows ions to pass into the specshy

trometer and also the output pulses of the linear amplifier The flight time

t is the time difference between these two signals minus the transmission

time of the pulse from the first dynode of the electron multiplier to the

oscilloscope This transmission time is estimated to be several hundred

nanoseconds

The data taken in this research is presented in the remaining

sections of this chapter

33 Ion Species Identification

The ion species desorbed from the tungsten crystal by electron imshy

pact are identified using a time-of-flight technique as described above For

these measurements the spectrometer was set to pass 40 eV ions A total

acceleration voltage V + V of 370 eV was applied between the crystalT acc

and the entrance to the spectrometer Hence the energy of the ions origishy

nating at the crystal surface and passed by the spectrometer was 3 eV (3 eV

corresponds to the maximum in intensity of the ion energy dist~ibution given

in Section 35) Figure 33 shows an oscilloscope trace obtained when opershy

ating in the time-of-flight mode The trace was taken by applying a 22 ~sec

4pulse to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl0 pulsessec) This is the

large pulse at the left in the figure Several output pulses from the linear

amplifier can be seen approximately 4~sec after the retarding grid pulse

These are pulses that have been produced by the electron multiplier following

ion impingement onto the first dynode Taking into consideration the transshy

mission time the experimental flight time is 37~sec Using Equation 34

75

ill22fLsec Window Amplifier Output Pulses

o 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Time (fLsec)

Time of Flight (H+) =J2~m ES 40 eV d=029 m

~ 33 fLsec

Figure 33 Oscilloscope trace showing the pulses observed when operating the spectrometer in the time-of-flight mode The 22 ~sec trace at the left is the analyzer on pulse applied to the retarding grid (duty cycle of 2xl04 pulsessec) During this pulse ions pass into the spectrometer Several output pulses from the linear amplifier resulting from ions striking the electron multiplier can be seen delayed by their flight time in the spectrometer and the pulse transmission time from the multiplier to the oscilloscope The output pulses have been enhanced for reproduction purposes

76

with the analyzer pass energy of 40 eV a path length of 029 m and a time of

37 ~sec the mass of the desorbed ions is calculated to be 14 amu The unshy

certainty in this calculation is estimated to be~05 amu Sources of error

include the estimate of transmission time and the uncertainty in the time difshy

ference read from the oscilloscope trace In adqition over part of the path

length (the region between the retarding and LEED grids and in the cylindrical

analyzer) the ions have less than 40 eV energy Hence from this calculation

alone it is not possible to identify the ions as H+ However in experiments

in which the length of the retarding grid pulse was shortened to~ 1 ~ sec

flight times that differed by gt1 ~sec could be distinguished on the oscilloshy

scope The calculated flight time for ions of mass one is 3 3 ~ sec and for

ions of mass two is 46 ~sec or 13 ~sec longer Thus H+ could be resolved

from Hiions The ions detected in the time-of-flight experiment of Figure 33

+have been identified as H For certain spectrometer biasing conditions

+pulses appear on the oscilloscope 1 5 ~ sec later than the H pulses The ions

causing these pulses have been identified as having mass two

When oxygen is adsorbed on the surface the signal pulses on the osshy

cilloscope occur approximately 135 ~sec after the retarding grid pulse This

is in good agreement with the expected flight time for 0+ ions

+In addition to the H ions observed after adsorbing hydrogen from the

jet H+ ions were unexpectedly desorbed by electron impact from the undosed

tungsten surface upon cooling the crystal to below OoC Possible sources for

the hydrogen desorbed under these conditions are discussed in Chapter 4

If E is set at 40 eV set at 0 eV and V varied above pass VT acc

40 eV no ions originating at the crystal surface can be passed by the spectromshy

77

eter However with these biasing conditions both H+ and H + ions are obshy2

served This ion signal has to originate at the walls of the experimental

+ +chamber from a ESD process andor from the ambient Both the H and H2 sigshy

nals increased when H2 was admitted into the background from the gas handling

system an indication that at least part of the signal origtnates from ionizashy

tion in the background It is not easy to determine the intensity of the

+ +H or H2 desorbed from the chamber walls However it is possible to show that

ionization of ambient H2 could be a serious noise problem The cross section

+ -17 2for electron impact ionization of H2 to H2 is 48xlO cm and of H2

22xlO-17 cm2 for 400 eV electrons 80 An electron current of lxlO-6 A at 400

eV would produce about llxlO3 H2+ ions per cm3-Torr-sec and 5xl012 H + ions

3 per cm -Torr-sec Thus it is reasonable to assume that at the background presshy

sures here a sizable ion Signal is produced although most of it undoubtedly

is not detected In the ESD eXperiments performed here it was desired to

detect only ions produced at the surface of the crystal It has been possible

to bias the spectrometer such that this is the case Almost none of the extra

signal has the correct energy to pass through the spectrometer when V isT

held several volts positive and when V is kept less than E - V bull acc pass T

34 Work Function Results

Work function changes resulting from hydrogen adsorption have been

monitored as a measure of hydrogen coverage Figure 34 shows the tungsten

surface work function change as a function of exposure to hydrogen The crysshy

tal was at 600 C for this experiment To obtain this data the crystal was roshy

tated into the gas jet dosed for a measured time and then rotated back to a

position in front of the spectrometer where a retarding potential curve was

78

Figure 34 Change in work function 6~ of a room temperature tungsten (100) surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption 6~ is plotted versus exposure of the crystal surface to hydrogen For comparison the results reported by Madey820 are also shown Exposures for the data taken here have been determined by normalizing the measured adsorption time to Madeys absolute exposure at a work function change ~ of 041 eV

------o 0 Withrow

10

08

gt06 OJ--amplt]04

02

0~013

Madey and Yates

Max bcp=~~

Data Normalized at bcp =041

0

10M 101610~ Exposure (Moleculescm2) SP-1121

80

S o Max ltltgt=09S-~ 6 A Max ltltgt =092 --eshy

lt34 o Adsorption at 60degC A Adsorption at -150degC

2

20 40 60 SO 100 120 140 160 ISO 200 220 Exposure (arbitrary units)

SP-1214

Figure 35 Comparison of work function changes at 600 C and -lSOoC resulting from hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten (100)

OlO~i--~----~--~----~--~----~--~--~~--~~

- W(lOO)gt (J) 008

- shy

-u 006 o o

00 ~ 004 --Sshy

I 002-I shy--S- 0

-200 -100 o 100 200 Temperature (OC) SP-U56

Figure 36 Change in the work function of the undosed tungsten (100) surface versus crystal temperature for the temperature range -150oC to 220oC The ordinate in the graph represents the work function at temperature T measured with respect to the work function at 220degC The data was obtained in three_separate experimental runs indicated by different symbols as discussed in the text

82

taken This procedure was followed repeatedly without closing the jet in order

to assure a constant hydrogen flux (molecm2-sec) from the jet onto the

-8crystal face An incident primary electron current oflt2xlO A at a primary

energy of 100 eV was used The saturation coverage work function change

8tCP ) is 098 + 004 eV For comparison results obtained by Madey and Yates

max

for the work function change resulting from adsorption of hydrogen on W(lOO)

are given in Figure 34 Absolute exposures for the data taken here have been

obtained by normalizing the dose time to Madey and Yates exposure at a work

function change of 041 eV Using this normalization good agreement beshy

tween their results and the data obtained here is found

The work function change of the tungsten surface as a function of hyshy

drogen exposure was also measured when the crystal was at -150degC The data are

given in Figure 35 The procedure used in obtaining the 600 c data was fallowed

in taking these data The maximum work function change at this lowtemperature

is 092 + 004 eV

The dependence of the work function on crystal temperature is shown

in Figure 36 The work function is seen to decrease 005 eV as the temperashy

ture is raised from -lSOoC to 220degC The data in this figure were obtained in a

series of retarding potential curve measurements taken at different crystal

temperatures The temperature was varied by radiation heating the ~rystal on

its back face using the pancake heater It was found impossible to take decent

retarding potential curves when the crystal was heated more than about ISOoC

above its initial temperature As the current through the pancake heater was

increased electron emission from this heater also increased This emission

current interfered with the retarding potential measurement when it became a

83

fraction of the incident current The three different symbols in Figure 36

represent data taken when the initial temperature prior to heating was -150oC

work function change has been reported Assuming this result and using the

-1350 C and 50oC The change in work function with temperature was reversible

In this research no attempts have been made to measure absolute covshy

erages Coverages are defined in terms of ~ the measured work function

change As discussed in Section 126 a linear relation between coverage and

8

room temperature data taken here cover~ge and work function can be described

by the expression

e = 102 ~ (35)

where ~ is measured in eVe e represents coverage in fraction of a mon6laye~

15 2 8 A monolayer is assumed to be 2xlO H atomscm Estimates of coverage in this

work will be made by measuring work function changes and using Equation 35

However it should be noted that the data will be presented in terms of the

measured quantity~ and therefore are not dependent on any assumptions

made relating coverage and work function

35 H+ Ion DesoEPtion Measurements

The electron stimulated desorption of H+ ions from the W(lOO) surface

has been studi~d under different experimental conditions Detection of the

ion signal has been discussed in Section 325 The results follow below

351 H+ Ion Energy Distribution

Ions desorbed from a surface by electron impact have a characteristic

distribution in energy This distribution is dependent on the adsorption states

from which the ions originate In the simple models used to describe this

phenomena changes in the observed energy distribution except some intensity

84

changes result from changes in the adsorption states Hence this measurement

can be used to characterize the states from which ions are desorbed A theore~

ieal discussion of the ion energy distribution is given in Appendix C

Figure 37 shows the energy distribution of H+ ions electron desorbed

-6from W(IOO) using a primary beam current of IxlO A at an energy of 400 eV

This current was sufficiently low such that the energy distribution was obtained

without desorbing the hydrogen coverage to any extent The choice of 400 eV for

the primary energy was to some extent arbitrary although it was found that

below 400 eV the ion signal was weaker and the measurements required more time

to take To obtain the data the crystal was flashed and then allowed to cool

several minutes to 60oC It was then dosed with hydrogen from the jet until a

work function change of 018 eV corresponding to a substantial coverage in the

~2 state was measured The distribution was obtained by scanning V while acc

holding V at 4 volts The distribution has an intensity maximum at 3 + 05 eVT

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV No correction to the energy scale

has been made for the target-spectrometer contact potential difference since

this amounts to only 015 eV which is smaller than the accuracy in the meashy

s~remertt A small part of the detected ion signal which did not originate at

the crystal surface has been subtracted out The amount of this contribution

was determined by monitoring the ion signal from the flashed undosed surface

This extra signal amounted to no more than 10 percent of the total signal and

was entirely on the low side of the energy distribution

+For comparison the energy distributions of H ions produced by elecshy

tron impact of gas phase hydrogen81 and hydrogen-covered polycrystalline tungshy

82sten are included in Figure 37 All three curves have been normalized to

the same peak intensity The three curves have characteristically different

85

Figure 37 Energy distribution of H+ ions from a tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen Hydrogen coverage for this measurement corresponds to a work function change of 018 eV (approximately 019 monolaYS2) F~r comparison the energy distribution reported by Nishijima of H ions des orbed from hydrogen covered polyshycrystalline tungsten is given ASIo shown is an ion energy distribution obtained by Hagstrum from gas phase hydrogen The three distributions have been normalized at their peak intensities

-Ugt-

Q)

gtshyc o

H

+ r

86

H+ Ion Energy Distribution

- Withrow H2 W(lOO) -- Nishijima H2 I W (polycrystol) _- HagstrumH2 gas

1 J

ii ~ I I iiI ~ I

iii middot VI 1

I I bull

o 2 468

H+ Ion Energy (eV)

87

distributions in energy

Energy distributiol1s of H+ ions taken at different hydrogen coverages

are shown in Figure 38 Experimental conditions for these measurements were

the same as used to obtain the previous figure There is no change in peak

position or line shape as a function of coverage except for heavy dosings

where the distribution appears to be slightly broader The maximum intensity

is a function of coverage as discussed below

Figure 39 shows a series of ion energy distributions taken after

adsorption from the jet with the target temperature approximately -150o

C For

these data the target was flashed and allowed to cool 5 minutes before

adsorption All other experimental conditions were identical to the correshy

sponding 600

C data The distributions peak at 3 eV (except at high coverage

where the peak appears to be slightly higher) and have full widths at half

maxima of 26 eV identical to the results found for 600 C adsorption The

high energy tail of these low temperature distributions appears to be somewhat

wider than the corresponding higher temperature data however

After flashing the target to 22000 K and allowing it to cool five

ominutes to a temperature of lt-145 C hydrogen ions can be detected without

dosing the surface from the jet An energy distribution for this signal is

shown in Figure 310 A time-of-flight measurement confirmed that the observed

signal is indeed H+ ions The energy distribution peaks at 25 05 eVvith a

full width at half maximum of 58 eV The peak intensity of the ion signal

obtained without dosing depends on the previous history of the sample and on

the experimental parameters as discussed in Section 35~ This intensity

change is indicated by arrows in Figure 310 For this measurement the

88

H+ from H2 W (100) T=600C

Zero Levels

fI)

cshy s gt

~

c-0 ~

0 ~ --0

CIgt

gt-shyc 0

1-1

+J

o 2 4 6

6cent= OSSeV

6cent=06geV

6cent=045eV

6cent=0lSeV

Acent=OlOeV

Acent=003eV

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1l96

Figure 38 Comparison of energy distributions of g+ ions desorbed from a 600 c tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

89

-ffl middotcshy

l

gtshy 0 shy

0 0-0 ltlgt

gt= C 0

H

+I

H+ from H2 W(100) T =-150degC

Zero Levels

Dcp=067 eV

Dcp= 043eV

---_Dcp=Olle~

___

Dcp=017eV

D_cp=004eV

o 246 H+lon Energy (eV)

SP-1197

Figure 39 Comparison of energy distributions of H+ ions desorbed from a low temperature (-lSOOC) tungsten (100) surface after adsorption of hydrogen to different coverages Coverages are given in terms of measured work function changes ~~

90

--(J) H+ from Undosed W(lOO)

T=l50degC

H+ from H2 Dosed W

ot 60degC

-0

-Q)

~l ~ + I O~~~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~--~ o 2 4 6

H+ Ion Energy (eV) SP-1202

Figure 310 Energy distribution obtained from a flashed but undo sed tungsten (100) surface which has been cooled to -150oC For comparison the energy distribution of a+ ions from the tungsten (100) surface after dosing with hydrogen is shown by the dashed line The two distributions are normalized at their maximum intensities The intensity of the ion signal from the undosed surface changes as a function of sample history as discussed in the text This is indicated by the arrow

I

91

primary energy was 400 eVe A relatively low incident electron current

of lxlO-7 A was used so that the coverage in the surface state being probed

would not be strongly depleted during the measurement This state has a high

desorption cross section as calculated in Chapter 4 and hence depletion is

a possibility It should be noted that the same energy distribution is obshy

tained from the low temperature state using a beam current of 2xlO-6 A The

latter high current measurement reflects the distribution in energy of H+ ions

desorbed from the fast state when its coverage is in equilibriumll as disshy

cussed in Section 352

The intensity of the ion signal desorbed from the surface at both

60 0 C and -1500 C is strongly coverage dependent In Figure 311 is plotted the

intensity of the 3 eV H+ ion signal as a function of work function change upon

adsorption of hydrogen The signals from the 60 0 C and -lSOoC surfaces have

maximum intensities at work function changes of 018 eV and 011 eV respecshy

tively This difference indicates that adsorption at the low temperature

differs somewhat from that at 600C At higher hydrogen coverages theion

signals decrease to less than 15 of their peak intensities indicating that

the cross section for ion desorption decreases as the ll state fills The

41 reason for this decrease is not well understood although Madey has sug~_

gested that it results from a coverage dependent rate of reneutralization of

the ions produced by the incident beam At near monolayer coverages the 3 eV

ion signal increased somewhat

The data in Figur~ 311 are normalized at the peak intensity The

absolute maximum yields at the two temperatures are the same within 25

Also shown normalized at the peak intensity are Madeys intensity versus

41 coverage data for hydrogen adsorbed on W(lOO) at room temperature The

--

en + ~ H from H2 W (100) J ~ ~ Withrow 60degC ~ 0 Withrow -150degC shye __ -- Madey 22degCA

c

C li)

gtshy 0

c N

o H + I o x ~

cf c

o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Il cp (eV)

Figure 311 Intensity of the 3 eV g+ ion signal from the tungsten (1ampH)-1195 surface as a function of the change in work function resulting from hydrogen adsorption Data for adsorption at 600 C and -l50oC are plotted For comparison the results obtained by Madey4 from a room temperature tungsten (100) surface are included

93

maximum in his ion signal occurs for the same coverage as the maximum in the

room temperature data taken here His results are more sharply peaked howshy

ever This difference may be due to the different conditions under which the

two sets of data were obtained Madeys results represent ions desorbed in a

narrow cone normal to the surface whereas the spectrometer used here collected

only those ions desorbed from the surface at 350 + 2 120 Madey also used a

lower primary energy

352 Desorption Curve Measurements

The H+ ion signal is observed to decrease with time if a primary

electron beam current of sufficient intensity per surface area is used A

theoretical description of this measurement referred to as a desorption

curve is given in Appendix C It can be shown that the expected ion signal

decreases to an equilibrium value The rate of decay of the desorption curve

and the equilibrium value are used to calculate parameters characteristic of

the adsorption state being probed

Figure 312 shows the decay of the 3 eV H+ ion signal from tungsten

(100) initially covered with hydrogen to a work function change of 010 eV

oThe temperature of the crystal for this measurement was 60 C An incident

-6 -3 2current of 5xlO A (a current density of 25xlO Aem) at a primary energy

of 400 eV was used The decrease in ion yield is seen to be quite slow The

equilibrium value shown in this figure iH+ was estimated from the equil

analysis of the data in Chapter 4

+As noted above H ions could be desorbed from a cold but undosed

tungsten (100) surface The desorption curve for this undosed state is shown

in Figure 313 For this data the crystal was flashed and allowed to cool

5 minutes to -150o

C Then the incident electron current was turned on (see

94

I I I t I I I I I H+ from H2 W(l00) Epri =400 eV-(f) Ipri =5 X 10-6 A

a ~rp =010 eV82000r- shy

-(f)

c (l) I- shy iHquil-c

-~1000 shyo

H + I

t I I I I I o 100 200 300 400

Time (sec) SP-1203

Figure 312 Change in the a+ ion current during electron obombardment of a 60 C tungampten (100) surface

Hydrogen was initially adsorbed to a coverage of 010 monolayer

95

200 -()

a ~160 gt

if) -c ~120 c

H c ~ 80

+r 40

H+ Ions fromW(lOO) Epri=400eV

Ipri=lA

Temp =- 1500 C

IH~qUil ------------shy

Figure 313 Change in the a+ ion current during electron bombardment of a flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface cooled to -150oC

140

96

Section 354 for a discussion of how the current was controlled) and the

ion signal decay monitored The signal is seen to undergo a rapid decay It

reaches its equilibrium value in several minutes in sharp contrast with the

desorption curve obtained after hydrogen dosing at room temperature An inshy

-6 -4 2cident current of lxlO A (a current density of 5lxlO Alcm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV was used to take the desorption curve from the undosed cold

surface This current density is only 20 percent of the value used for the

room temperature data of Figure 312 It was found convenient to use this

smaller value since the decay of the ion signal was so rapid Additional

desorption measurements on this fast decaying or fast state are given in

the following two sections

A desorption curve obtained after dosing the cold tungsten (100)

surface with hydrogen is shown in Figure 314 The data were taken using a

-6 -3 2primary current of 3xlO A (a current density of 15xlO Acm) at a primary

energy of 400 eV The surface was dosed to a work function change of 007 eV

Initially there is a rapid decay of the ion signal which is similar to the

desorption curve obtained from the fast state Following this initial decaYt

the signal continues to fall for a time but at a much slower rate of decay

This desorption pattern different than either of the desorption curves given

in Figures 312 or 313 can be described in ter~ of simultaneous desorption

from two adsorption states This is discussed further in Chapter 4

+353 Temperature Dependence of the Fast State H Ion Signal

The ion yield from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface

has been studied as a function of temperature These data were obtained by

continuously monitoring both the tungsten temperature and the 3 eV H+ ion

97

-() a u

t gt

800()

c (J) +shy

~600 c o

+ H

400 r

200

o

Figure 314

r-

i-

r-shy

I I I I I I I I I

H+ from H2 W(lOO Epri =400eV

I I I

o 100

Iprl =3xlO-6 A

ilq= O07eV T=-150degC

I 1 I I

T

I

-

-

-

200 300 400 Time (sec)

Change in the H+ ion current during electron bombardment oof a -150 C tungsten (100) surface Hydrogen was

initially adsorbed to a coverage of 007 monolayer

98

signal following a crystal flash The current for this measurement was

-6 -4 2IxlO A (a current density of 5lx10 Aem) The primary energy was 400

eV As can be determined from the previous section this current density was

such that the electron beam caused Significant perturbations on the hydrogen

state during the measurement None the less several conclusions can be inshy

ferred from the intensity versus temperature data presented in Figure 315

The ion signal from the fast hydrogen state is strongly temperature dependent

+ 0The H intensity is seen to increase sharply below approximately -50 C The

results are reversible with temperature the ion signal decreases if the crysshy

tal is heated and the signal returns to its original intensity when the crysshy

tal cools back down

Several mechanisms could be responsible for the appearance of a

H+ ion signal below room temperature For example a temperature dependent

bulk to surface diffusion of hydrogen could produce a desorbable hydrogen

state Likewise adsorption from the background rtight pro(luce desorbable H+

only below room temperature In order to better understand the fast state

some additional measurements were made as described in the following section

354 Additional Measurements on the Fast State

Additional experiments were performed to further elucidate the nature

of the low temperature fast state Experiments were made to determine the

source of hydrogen which populates this state The effect of co-adsorption

of hydrogen from the jet with this state was probed In addition the possishy

bility that the appearance of the state was related to surface contamination

was investigated Possible correlations between the fast state hydrogen and

the low temperature LEED phenomena described in Section 123 were probed

99

50----~----~----r---_~--_r----_--_

20

-(J)-c

gt l shye ~10 c l shye gt

00 -c Q)-~ 5 c o

H

+ I

2

-150 -100 -50 0 100 150 Temperature (OC)

Figure 315 Intensity of the 3 eV a+ ion signal from the flashed but undosed tungsten (100) surface as a function of tungsten temperature

-200

100

In these measurements it was desired to study the appearance of

+the fast state H ion signal without the complicating effects of simultaneous

significant depletion of this hydrogen state with the primary electron beam

This possibility exists since the cross section for electron sesorption of

the fast state is high as shown in Chapter 4 It was found that a measure

of the change of coverage in the fast state could be obtained in experiments

in which the electron beam was turned off for short times During the time

the gun was off referred to as adsorption times the fast state populated

The increase in the coverage in this state during the adsorption time could be

monitored by taking a desorption curve right after the adsorption time The

change in coverage is assumed proportional to the difference iH+ - iH+ initial equi1

where iH+ is the ion intensity immediately after turning the gun back on initial

and ~+ has been discussed above The difference iH+ - iH+ will equil initial equi1

be referred to as ~iH+(adsorption time) The rate of increase in coverage of

the fast state is assumed proportional to ~~+(adsorption time)adsorption

time

To turn the gun off the control grid was biased 6 volts negative

with respect to the cathode This method of controlling the gun current

kept the cathode temperature constant during the adsorption time while at

the same time no current could reach the crystal The primary beam could be

turned off (or subsequently back on) in fractions of a second No effects on

the observed measurements could be attributed to this biasing procedure

The change in the population of the fast state has been monitored as

a function of the tungsten crystal temperature Figure 316 shows the results

of a series of measurements each done at a different crystal temperature in

101

() --c s gtshy

0 -0

0 100-~ 0shy+Q)

J 50

0 shy

+S a J

-150 -100 -50 a 50 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1215

Figure 316 The quantity igt - i~ measured initial eqpil

from desorption curves from Ehe fast state as a function of crystal temperature

102

which the above procedure has been used with adsorption times of 150 seconds

From the desorption curves taken following the adsorption times the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) has been calculated This quantity is plotted versusH

the crystal temperature in Figure 316 The quantity 6iH+(adsorption time)

ie the fast state signal is small and less than 5 of the maximum signal

owhen the temperature of the tungsten crystal is higher than OOC Below 0 C

the change in population in the fast state during the adsorption time inshy

creases as the temperature decreases This temperature dependence is in

agreement with the the results of Figure 315 which was taken continuously

with a high primary current as the crystal was cooled after a flash Thus the

procedure used to obtain Figure 316 appears reasonable

The rate of population of the fast state can be an indication of the

source of hydrogen as discussed in Chapter 4 The rate of population of this

state has been investigated as a function of adsorption time using the proceshy

dure given above Figure 317 shows a plot of the quantity 6i +(adsorptionH

time) versus adsorption time From the figure it is concluded that the rate

of popUlation is constant in time at least for coverages of the fast state

obtained in 26 minutes

The effect of co-adsorption of hydrogen from the jet on the fast

state has been probed The purpose of these measurements has been to detershy

mine if hydrogen (H2) from the gas dosing system is the source of the fast

state In a series of measurements the cold crystal surface was dosed with

hydrogen and then an ESD ion signal monitored until it reached equilibrium

Following this the fast state was allowed to populate during an adsorption

time of 150 seconds Finally a desorption curve from the co-adsorbed fast

lO3

Growth of H+ Ion Yield with Electron Gun Off T=-150degC--(f) c

s gt 0-0 0-

J 0shy

+0gt r

0 +shy

+pound r

200

100

SP-122J

Figure 317 The quantity igt bull i~ff measured from initial flequil

desorption curves from the fast state as a function of adsorption time Adsorption time is defined in the text

104

state and dosed hydrogen states was taken In Figure 318 the quantity

6i +(adsorption time) calculated from these desorption curves is plotted versusH

work function change due to adsorption from the jet For low doaes of hydroshy

gen (6cplt 010 eV) there is almost no change in the quantity t~+(adsorption

time) ie the rapid decay of the ion signal characteristic of the fast

state is observed However preadsorption of hydrogen from the jet clearly

affects the ion signal from the fast state for 6cplt010 eV The signal is

decreased forhy5irogen coverages in the 13 state in qualitative agreement1

with the data presented in Figure 311

For ~lt 010 eV the change in coverage in the fast state during

adsorption times of 150 seconds is seen to be independent of the amount of

hydrogen in the dosed or 13 2 state This result was used in a series of

experiments in which the rate of population of the fast state was measured

2at different hydrogen background pressures The flux (molecules per cm per

second) of H2 onto the surface from the background is directly proportional

to the partial pressure of hydrogen If H2 is the source of the fast state

changing the background pressure would be expected to have an effect on the

measured change in coverage in the fast state as long as the total adsorption

is lower than about 010 monolayer (which corresponds to a work function

change of 010 eV) For the data in Figure 318 the background pressure of

-11hydrogen was less than 7xlO Torr (the Bayard-Alpert gauge pressure) In

a series of experiments this hydrogen pressure was raised by letting gas in

from the the gas handling system for times ranging from one to two minutes

While the pressure was raised the electron gun was turned off so that simulshy

taneous adsorption into the fast state and the 13 2 state could take place The

105

() --C J

gt 10shy

0 10shy-0 10shy

S

0shy

+lt11 c

2-+~ c

200

100

0

8

DCP(eV) SP-1222

Figure 318 The quantity iHt 1nitial

desorption curves from

- iHplusmn measured from equil

the low temperature hydrogen dosed surface as a function of work function change ~~ ~~ results from hydrogen coverage

o 1 2 3 4 5 6

106

total hydrogen coverage in the Sz state was kept below 10 percent of a monoshy

layer Desorption curves were then taken and the quantity 8iH+(adsorption

time) calculated An interesting result was obtained It was found that the

coverage in the fast state was unrelated to the background pressure of HZ and

hence unrelated to the total impingement of HZ Even though experiments were

made in which the background pressure was varied over two orders of magnitude

the change in coverage in the fast state during equal adsorption times was

always the same Hence it is concluded that the fast state is not populated

by hydrogen added to the background from the gas handling system

It was found however that the fast state signal intensity could be

correlated to a pressure reading under certain experimental conditions

Normally during flashing the crystal manipulator was rotated so that the

tungsten crystal faced away from the entrance to the spectrometer (a rotation

oof 180 from the crystal position shown in Figure Z14) This normal flashing

posi tion is referred to as the down position The crystal could also be

flashed while it was in the IIUp position or facing the s~ectrometer It was

observed that when the crystal was flashed in the up position an increase in

the ion signal from the fast state could be obtained over that measured when

the crystal was flashed in the down position This unexpected result sugshy

gested that the fast state might be correlated to a thermal instrumental

effect Radiation heating from the crystal raised the temperature of the

surrounding experimental chamber surfaces If the crystal is close to the

surfaces during a flash as for example when flashed in the up position the

heating is greater One consequence of greater heating would be an enhanced

thermal desorption from the surfaces and a higher pressure in the experimental

107

chamber Hence the incident flux of gas thermally desorbed from the chamber

surfaces would be increased Unfortunately the best test of this hypothesis

a measurement of the temperature of the surfaces in the experimental chamber

could not be made However an interesting pressure related result could be

obtained when the x-ray current in the Bayard-Alpert gauge (which is equivalent

to approximately 7xlO-11 Torr pressure) was nulled out so that ambient pressure

-12increases at the gauge of as little as 05xlO Torr could be easily detected

It was observed that during a crystal flash when the crystal was in the up

position the gauge pressure showed a maximum pressure burst of approximately

3x10-l0 Torr This was higher than the pressure burst when the crystal was

flashed in the down position a strong indication that some surfaces in the

experimental chamber became hotter during an up flash When the crystal was

flashed in the down position the pressure fell quickly after the flash was

terminated to the nulled or equilibrium level However after a flash in the

up position the pressure fell to a quasi-equilibrium level which was higher

-12than the true equilibrium pressure by as much as 2xlO Torr The quasi-

equilibrium pressure was dependent on the number of prev~ous flashes in the

up position and on how long after flashing the pressure was read Once the

crystal had been flashed in the up position the pressure remained elevated

for several hours slowly decreasing to the equilibrium level It should be

noted that these pressure increases are read outside the experimental chamber

The actual pressure increase in the experimental chamber and hence the inshy

creased gas flux at the crystal surface can only be estimated to be proshy

portional to the gauge pressure

The magnitude of the pressure increases following a flash in the

108

up position was linearly related to both the change in coverage of the fast

state during the adsorption time and to the desorption curve equilibrium level

This can be seen from the data presented in Figure 319 The lower panel shows

the results of a series of measurements in which desorption curves were taken

after letting the fast state populate for adsorption times of 150 seconds

The ordinate in the lower panel is 6ia+ (adsorption1 time) The abscissa in the

figure is the increase in pressure over the equilibrium pressure as a result of

flashes in the up position The change in ion yield is seen to be directly

proportional to the observed pressure increase The top panel shows the equishy

librium ion signal observed for the desorption curves plotted versus the same

pressure increase as the lower panel A direct proportionality between the

equilibrium ion signal and the pressure increase is seen These two linear

results would be expected if the fast state populated as a result of adsorption

from the background This is discussed further in Chapter 4 On the other

hand no dependence of the fast state ion signal on background pressure would

be expected if the source of the hydrogen were bulk to surface diffusion Thus

while there may be hydrogen on the surface which is not desorbed by incident

electrons it can be concluded from this measurement that the fast state is

populated by adsorption from the ambient

A possible explanation for the fast state is suggested by the work

51of Jelend and Menzel They found that co-adsorption of oxygen or CO with

hydrogen leads to the ~ hydrogen state which has similar characteristics as

the fast state observed here The possibility that impurities are on the surshy

face in the temperature range in which the fast state is observed has been inshy

vestigated using Auger electron spectroscopy andel~tTon stimulated desorption in

lO9

Figure 319 Lower panel - The quantity iH+ - ig+ measured from initial eaui1

desorption curves from the fast state as S tunction of gauge pressure change The fast state populated during adsorption times of 150 seconds The pressure change results from flashing the tungsten crystal while it is in the up position Upper panel - Equilibrium ion current iH+ measured from the

-equildesorpt~on curves taken for the data in the lower panel

110

-(J)-C J gt 0 -0 0

100-s

+1)cr

J

C-+ J

0

--(J)

c J 200 gt 0 -0 0-

s +1)

cr J

- 100 I 2

012

Gauge Pressure Change (X10-12 Torr)

111

the time of flight mode In order to test for these elements the flashed

tungsten surface was cooled with the gun turned off allowing the fast state

to populate Total adsorption times of up to 15 minutes were used times in

which a strong fast state signal could be obtained However no carbon or

oxygen Auger peaks were observed and no desorbed oxygen or carbon ions that

could be attributed to the fast state were monitored with ESD Hence any

oxygen or CO present on the surface would have had a coverage below the deshy

tection sensitivity of the techniques used or less than approximately 1 pershy

cent of a monolayer It can be noted here that coverage calculations given in

Chapter 4 indicate the fast state hydrogen coverage is well below 1

36 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Data

The low energy electron diffraction (LEE D) system used here has

been described previously in Section 26 LEED data has been optained using

hydrogen coverage crystal temperature and primary electron energy as

variable parameters as described below

The symmetry of the LEED spot pattern has been noted as a function

of hydrogen coverage at room temperature Results from these observations are

in good agreement with previously reported research (see Section 123) Half

order diffraction spots become visible with initial hydrogen coverage The

intensity of the half order spots maximize at a coverage corresponding to

~~ = 015 eV at a primary energy of 115 eVe Additional adsorption causes

the half order spots to split into four poorly defined spots This pattern

upon further adsorption becomes blurred At full coverage a (lxl) pattern

is observed Figure 320 shows a photograph of the LEED pattern observed

from a clean room temperature tungsten surface and also the c(2x2) LEED patshy

112

W(100)

Clean

T=60degC Epri = 1387eV

(1 xl) Clean (100) Surface

W (100)

Do 4gt =015eV

T =-150degC

Epri =115eV

C (2x2) Hydrogen Overoyer

SP-1200

Figure 320 Photo~raDh of LEED screen showing a clean (lxl) pattern and a c(2x2) pattern Models of possible surface atom configurations for the LEED patterns are also shown

113

tern that occurs with a hydrogen over1ayer in the ~2 state

When the crystal is cooled to below room temperatures half order

spots are visible without any dosing of the crystal from the gas system

Graphs of LEED spot intensity versus primary electron energy called

elastic intensity profiles are shown in Figures 321 322 and 323 for the

(10) (11) and (1212) diffraction beams A normally incident primary

electron beam was used in these measurements Data were taken at two tempera-

o 0tures 60 C and -150 C for both the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorbed on

the surface to a coverage corresponding to a ~~ of 015 eV This coverage corshy

responds to the maximum in intensity for the 115 eV half order beams All obshy

servable equivalent beams show the same line shape and peak positions There

are some intensity differences between equivalent beams probably due to an

uneven phosphor coating of the LEED screen particularly near its edge bull

Small misalignments might also affect the intensities The effect of hydrogen

adsorption on the intensity profiles is seen to be small except above 100 eV

in the (11) beam profile and below 50 eV in the (1212) beam profile Some

small shifts (~ 2 eV) in the energy positions of the peaks are observed as a

function of coverage but not as a function of temperature

The intensities of the (1212) (10) and (11) spots have been

measured as a function of crystal temperature for the clean (flashed) surface

These results are presented in Figures 324 and 325 using a semilogarithmic

scale The data were obtained by continuously monitoring both the tungsten

temperature and the intensity of the beams following a crystal flash Primary

energies of 115 eV for the (1212) beam 1105 eV and 67 eV for the (10)

beam and 113 eV for the (11) beam and currents of 10xlO-6 A were used The

114

- (j) +shyC l

gt 1loshy0 0 loshy+shy0

loshy0

- 0gt

+shy(j)

c Q) +shyC

H

o

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j = 0deg g=(10)

T =60degC Clean

T =-150degC fjcent = 015 eV

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l109

Figure 321 Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degc and -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsoroed in the S2 state

llS

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

U)-C J

1

-~ l0shy

a loshy

0 0l0shya-~-U) 0c OJ

C -H

o

o

o 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-lloa

8i =0deg g = (1 1)

T = 60degC Clean

T =60degC IJcp = 015 eV

T = -150degC IJcp = 015 eV

Figure 322 Elastic intensity profiles for the (11) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A work function change 6~ of 015 eV corresponds to hydrogen adsorbed in the 62 state

116

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO) 8j =00

g = (12 12 )

o 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Primary Energy (eV) SP-l107

Figure 323 Elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam from both clean and hydrogen covered tungsten surfaces Profiles have been taken at 60degC and at -150degC A vJork function change Acp of 015 eV corresponds to hydrocn adsorbed in the 13

2 state

117

100~--~--~----~--~-------~--------

--VI

c s gtshyt shyc -t shycl

010 -

gtshy-VI c Q)

c -I-f

tr c Q)

a

WOOO) 81 =0deg

9 = (ItO) 0-

-0- Epri = 1105 eV --0-- -0shy -0

9 = (ItI)

0 Epri= 113 eV =0shy o 0 0

9 = (ItO) Epri= 67 eV

0

Figure 324 Temperature dependence of (10) and (11) LEED beams from a flashed tungsten (100) surface Primary energies used are indicated on the graph

118

W (100) 9 =(12 t 12)

8j=0deg50

CJ)-

~ 5 o Q)

Q

2

-100 o 100 Temperature (OC)

SP-1l55 Figure 325 Temperature dependence of the (1212) LEED

beam from flashed tungsten (100) surface A primary electron energy of 115 eV was used

200

119

intensities of the (10) and (11) beams are seen to increase exponentially

(linearly on the semilogarithmic scale) as the temperature is lowered The

intensity of the (1212) order beam also increases as the temperature is

lowered Down to approximately -750 C the rate of increase with temperature is

ogreater than that for the integral order beams Below -75 C the intensity

changes at about the same rate as the integral order beams The results are

reversible with temperature

In Sections 353 and 354 a hydrogen ion signal has been reported

from the flashed surface LEED measurements have been made to ascertain if

this ion yield from the fast state could be correlated to the intensity of the

LEED spots After flashing the crystal the photometer signal from the

(1212) beam was measured as the crystal cooled to -lS0 0 C Then the incishy

dent electron current was turned off for 300 seconds in order to allow the

fast state to populate When the electron current was turned back on the

photometer signal immediately returned to the same intensity as obtained prior

to turning off the incident current There was no decay in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the desorption curve phenomena seen with

the ion signal The intensity of the photometer signal from the (10) and

(11) beams as well as from the background was monitored ilsing this same

procedure In no case was there any structure observed in the photometer

signal that could be correlated to the rapid decay in the fast state ion

yield

37 Electron Scattering Data

The electron signal backscattered from the crystal has been observed

as a function of hydrogen coverage and crystal temperature using synchronous

120

detection of the second harmonic of the energy distribution N(E) as disshy

cussed in Appendix B and in Section 324

Figure 326 shows the characteristic loss structure for electrons

scattered from a clean room temperature tungsten (100) surface and also from

this surface after dosing with hydrogen The abscissa in this figure represhy

sents electron loss energy w where 0 eV s w s 40 eV A primary~nergy of

-6110 eV and a primary current of lxlO A were used to take these data Since

25for tungsten true secondary structure extends out to 60 eV there is no

overlap of secondary and characteristic loss structure down to losses of 50

eV when operating at 110 eV primary energy The data of Figure 326 were taken

in the second derivative mode in order to suppress the background The data

were taken at a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV with a 1 volt peak to peak

oscillation on the retarding potential

Coverage dependent changes in the spectra are seen The peak at

w = 25 eV in the clean spectrum decays as the hydrogen coverage in increased

At the same time the narrow peak at 4 eV becomes broader and a peak grows at

a loss energy of 75 eV The structure at 210 eV in the clean spectrum moves

down in loss energy as hydrogen adsorbs Below w ~ 30 eV very little change

in the spectra as a function of hydrogen coverage is observed

Figure 327 shows characteristic loss structure for electrons

oscattered from a tungsten surface cooled to -150 C The data were taken using

the same electron gun and spectrometer operating conditions as used for the

data of Figure 326 The low temperature clean spectrum is nearly identical

to that obtained at the higher temperature The only change is a slight enshy

hancement of the shoulder at about 45 eV Changes in the clean spectrum with

121

Figure 326 oCharacteristic electron energy loss spectra from a 60 C

tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverages A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modulation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

---

N w -0 shyw-Z

N -0

I

122

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl=110 eV Iprl c5xlO-6 A

T= 60degC Modulation =1 V Peak to Peak

6ltl 080eV

060eV

O 35eV

023eV

014eV

003eV

Clean

o

SP-1219

123

Figure 327 Characteristic electron energy loss spectra from a -lSOoC tungsten (100) surface Data are given for the clean surface and for hydrogen adsorption up to near monolayer coverage A primary energy of 110 eV and a spectrometer pass energy of 30 eV were used to obtain the spectra The second derivative of the spectra taken with a modushylation voltage of 1 volt peak to peak is shown

124

N lJJ 0

~ lJJ Z N 0 I

H2 Dosed W(100) Eprl =110 eV Iprl =5x10-6 A T=-150degC Modulation 1 V Peak to Peak

bcent OS6eV

O5geV

O35eV

O25eV

O16eV

O05eV

Cleon

SP-1220

-~--------~- -- -----------

125

hydrogen adsorption are identical to those seen for adsorption at the higher

temperature

Loss spectra were also taken for 0 eV ~ w ~ 10 eV from the flashed

but undosed cold surface after turning off the electron gun for 10 minutes

These measurements were made to see if the fast state hydrogen would affect

the loss measurements No changes in the electron loss spectrum from those

taken immediately after cooling the flashed crystal were found

A discussion of the data presented in this chapter follows in

Chapter 4

126

CHAPTER 4

DISCUSSION OF RESULTS

Hydrogen chemisorption on single crystal tungsten (100) has been

probed in this research using complementary surface sensitive techniques

Auger measurements have been given in Section 28 Work function ESD LEED

and electron scattering results have been given in Chapter 3 A discussion

of this data is presented here

41 Auger Electron Spectroscopy Measurements

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental condition using Auger electron spectroscopy The procedures

used have been previously described with the spectrometer electronics Section

25 The Auger data have been given and discussed in Section 28 A brief

summary of these results follows

Tungsten carbon and oxygen Auger transitions have been observed

using this technique It can be seen from Figure 216 that after flashing the

cryLl to 2200oK no structures attributable to carbon or oxygen Auger elecshy

trons remain in the Auger spectrum The Auger measurement is estimated to

be sensitive to approximately 1 percent coverage Operation of the electron

gun in the high current high voltage Auger mode results in a slow deposition

of carbon from the background Since the Auger mode is used to chemically

characterize the surface the net effect of this beam related contamination

is an overestimation of the carbon impurity concentration at the surface

Some weak structure in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface

occurs between 475 eV and 525 eV No definite conclusions regarding the

127

origin of these peaks can be made The possibility that the structure results

from transitions in tungsten andor other elements is discussed in Chapter 2

83It is worth noting that Watts Jones and Hopkins recently published an

Auger spectrum from a flashed W(lOO) surface in which weak structure can be

seen at approximately the same energies as the unidentified structure observed

here This similarity lends support to the hypothesis that the peaks are

tungsten Auger transitions However it does not rule out other possibilities

The similarity of the data indicates at least that if the structure in

question results from some contaminate the problem is not unique to the

apparatus here It should be emphasized that work function ESD and LEED

data taken here are in good agreement with the literature any possible

contamination has not had a noticeable effect on the measurements

42 Work Function Results

Retarding potential work function measurements have been taken as

a measure of hydrogen coverage Plots of work function changes versus

exposure to hydrogen are presented in Figures 34 and 35 Adsorption of

hydrogen at 600 C yields a maximum work function change of 098 plusmn 004 eV

This is within 10 percent of 090 eV the most consistent monolayer coverage

work function chan~e reported in the literature for the H2 on W(lOO)

8 18 46 47 84system As argued by Armstrong agreement with the values from

the literature is an indication of good (100) orientation This is because

the work function of a faceted surface is a weighted average over the work

44functions of the facets Since hydrogen adsorption increases the work

function of the (100) face far more than the expected facet orientations a

128

faceted (100) surface would have a lower full coverage work function change

than a true (100) surface

Hydrogen adsorption onto W(lOO) at low temperatures increases the

work function by 092 plusmn 004 eV at full coverage This is slightly lower

than the room temperature maximum increase although within experimental

error the two measurements are the same

The increase in work function with hydrogen coverage can be intershy

preted using a simple model in which each adsorbed hydrogen atom acts as a

negative dipole at the surface The work function change on adsorption

43 6~ can be shown to equal the total added dipole moment at the surface

divided by the permittivity Using this and assuming a hydrogen coverage of

15 22xlO atomsem for a 6~ of 098 eV the average dipole moment permax

adsorbed hydrogen atom is calculated to be -013 Debye This result can be

compared to a theoretical account of the dipole moment of a hydrogen ion

63adsorbed onto metal surfaces given by Smith Ying and Kohn Their

calculation indicates that in order to observe a negative dipole moment the

hydrogen ion must be closer than 061 Kto the top plane of substrate ion

cores This would be an upper estimate of the proximity of the hydrogen atoms

to the tungsten substrate The minimum theoretical dipole moment per

63 -2 adsorbed hydrogen ion obtained by Smith et al is -lxlO au (1 au

equals 24 Debye) This value is lower than the observed value of -013

Debye by a factor of 5

o 0Cooling a clean tungsten (100) crystal from 200 C to -150 C

results in a work function increase of approximately 005 eV as shown in

Figure 36 This is an average change with temperature d~dT of 14xlO -4

129

oeV K The temperature dependence of work function for tungsten in this

temperature range has not previously been reported However temperature

dependent changes in work function of this magnitude have been reported for

85 86 85 86Cu Ag Na and K and have been described theoret~ca11y in terms of

both a thermal expansion of the crystal lattice and a temperature dependence

of the crystal electronic structure The work function change observed

here is quantitatively in agreement with experimental data for other elements

and with a theoretical model that describes the temperature dependence solely

in terms of intrinsic properties of a clean metal surface While perturbashy

tions on the crystal surface such as gas adsorption from the background or

bulk to surface diffusion can reasonably be expected to affect the work

function it is not necessary to invoke these causes to explain the changes

seen on cooling the crystal

43 Electron Stimulated Desorption Results

Under electron bombardment H+ ions can be desorbed from the

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface and from the low temperature undosed

surface The theory that describes this ESD process was first proposed by

37 38Redhead and by Menzel and Gomer A discussion of their model including a

derivation of the energy distribution of ions from the surface is given in

Appendix C In addition a discussion of the ESD phenomena in terms of

surface kinetics is also given in this appendix

ESD has been used to study the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system at

ocrystal temperatures from slightly above room temperature to -150 C Energy

distributions of It ions desorption curves and ion yield versus temperaturemiddot

and coverage data have been obtained

130

431 Room Temperature Results

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from room temperature

W(lOO) is given by the solid curve in Figure 37 The distribution has a

Gaussian line shape with a peak intensity at an ion energy of 30 plusmn 05 eV

and a full width at half maximum of 26 eV The line shape of the energy

distribution remains virtually unchanged as a function of hydrogen coverage

at least to near saturation coverage as shown by the curves in Figure 38

Near full coverage the distribution appears to broaden somewhat This latter

change requires further study which has not been done here

From Equation Cl of Appendix C the energy distribution of the

desorbed ions is given by the expression

(41)

where x is the coordinate normal to the surface Ions that start at x X ]

desorb with energy V N is the surface density of hydrogen atoms adsorbed in

the ground state ~ is the cross section for electron induced excitation ex

of hydrogen from the ground state to the ionic state I~G(xi)12 is the

probability density of hydrogen at Xi P(x ) is the probability that an ioni

starts from the position x and escapes from the surface as an ion and J

dV(X)dxlxi is the slope of the ion-metal interaction evaluated at Xi The

line shape of the energy distribution depends on the metal-neutral intershy

action VG(x) via ~G and depends on the ion-metal interaction V(x) via P(x)

and the slope dV(x)dx

--------------------------~-~~----------------

131

One manifestation of multistate adsorption in which VG(x) and V(x)

are dependent on the binding state is a change in the experimentally

observed energy distribution Multistate adsorption has been observed with

ESD for some systems for example as a function of oxygen coverage on

W(lOO)25 A similar result might be expected for hydrogen adsorption on

W(lOO) since two states ~l and ~2 are seen in thermal desorption spectra

However from the ion energy distribution line shapes for hydrogen on W(lOO)

no evidence of multistate adsorption as a function of coverage is seen The

line shapes of the energy distribution curves are the same at hydrogen

coverages corresponding to both thermal desorption states Hence coverage

dependent interactions which have been proposed to account for the thermal

desorption results and other phenomena reported for this system are not

observed using this technique

Another conclusion to be drawn from the energy distributions is

that the ions originate at an energy position which remains constant with

respect to the Fermi level of the tungsten independent of hydrogen coverage

A shift of nearly a volt in the work function is observed as hydrogen

adsorbs However the ion energy distribution which would be sensitive to

changes of this magnitude if it shifted with the work function remains

fixed in energy

The decay of the room temperature 3 eV a+ ion yield is shown in

Figure 312 A theoretical account of the desorption curve measurement has

been given in Appendix C From that discussion it is seen that a semi logshy

arithmic plot of i ~ - i ~ versus time yields a straight line The totalH Hequil desorption cross section of the adsorption state being probed can be

132

1determined from the slope of the straight line - T where T is given by

T e = (42)

je is the current density used to obtain the desorption curve and e is the

unit of electric charg~

The discussion of the desorption process leading to Equation 42

is based on the assumptions that the total desorption cross section and the

hydrogen sticking probability are independent of hydrogen coverage N The

validity of these assumptions for the hydrogen on tungsten (100) systems

should be examined An indication that the ionic cross section is indepenshy

dent of N for low coverages can be gotten from data presented in Figure 311

The H+ ion yield versus work function change is nearly linear for A~ lt 01 eV

8If coverage is linearly related to work function change as shown by Madey

then the ion yield is directly proportional to N in this low coverage region

A direct proportionality between ion yield and coverage satisfies

Equation C5 only if the ionic desorption cross section Qtis not a

function of coverage In a series of experiments it has been observed that

the equilibrium ion yield which is proportional to the ratio Q+Qt as

given by Equation C8 is independent of N for low coverages Since Q+ and

an expression proportional to Q+Qt are both independent of N it is assumed

tthat Q is a180 independent of N

The dependence of the sticking probability on coverage has been

reported in the literature for the hydrogen-tungsten (100) system Tamm and

87Schmidt found s(N) to be independent of N for coverages of less than 15

133

41 percent Madey found s(N) to be proportional to (l-NN ) Hence the

max

assumption that the sticking probability is independent of N appears valid

to within ~ 10 percent for low coverages For coverages less than 10 the

analysis in Appendix C of the desorption curve measurements can be applied to

the data

A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ for the desorption curve ~quil

shown in Figure 312 is given in Figure 41 The equilibrium level has been

chosen approximately 5 lower than the ion intensity obtained after monishy

toring the decay curve 30 minutes (the final recorded data) since it appeared

from the data the signal was still slowly decreasing In addition with

this correction the data give a better fit to the predicted straight line

t -20 2From the slope of the line -lIT and Equation 41 a Q (400 eV) of 5xlO cm

is calculated Without making the 5 correction in iH+ the best visual equil

straight line fit to the data gives a Qt(400 eV) approximately three times

larger Because the initial hydrogen coverage for this data was 010 monoshy

layerp this cross section represents the total desorption cross section

from the ~2 hydrogen adsorption state ie represents ~ (400 eV) For 2

coverages corresponding to the ~l state the assumptions leading up to

tEquation 42 are not valid and no attempt has been made to calculate 93 bull t 1

The value obtained for 93 (400 eV) is somewhat larger than the cross section 2

38results reported by Menzel and Gomer for hydrogen desorption from a field

emitter tip and is a factor of 10 lower than reported by Jelend and

Menzel10 for desorption from a tungsten ribbon The latter researchers

corrected for readsorption effects which would partly explain their higher

value The value of ~2(400 eV) found here is over three orders of

134

500----~----~--~------------~----

400

- 300 ()

a 0- CT Q)

+ I I 200

+ I

100~__~_____~____~____~__~____~__~ o 200 400 600 800 1000

Time (sec)

SP-1198

Figure 41 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iHt asequil

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 312

----------- -------shy

51

135

magnitude smaller than the total cross section found by Jelend and Menzel

for hydrogen coadsorption with either carbon monoxide or oxygen This is a

verification that these contaminants are not present to any great extent

432 Low Temperature Fast State Results

oIf the tungsten crystal was flashed to 2200 K and subsequently

allowed to cool below room temperature H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface The state from which this hydrogen is desorbed has been labeled

the fast state Experiments have been made to characterize the energetics

and kinetics of this undosed state and also to address the important question

of the origin of the hydrogen which is desorbed These data are discussed

below

The energy distribution of H+ ions desorbed from the fast state

shown in Figure 310 is considerably broader than the distribution obtained

after room temperature hydrogen dosing into the ~ states The peak intensity

is somewhat lower in energy 05 eV than the peak obtained from the ~

states The distribution has a tail extending up several electron volts on

the high energy side It should be noted that the same energy distribution

line shape could be obtained from the state at any position on its desorpshy

tion curve that is the broad distribution is not an anomalous result

reflecting a depletion of the hydrogen fast state during the measurement

A low primary current of lxlO- 7 A was used to take the distribution in

Figure 310 so that electron desorption effects were minimal From a

comparison of energy distributions as given in Figure 310 it is possible

to conclude that the fast state is a separate state from the ~ states

136

This conclusion is supported by cross section calculations below

The intensity of the ion yield from the fast state is temperature

dependent As shown in Figures 315 and 316 the ion yield increases as

the temperature is lowered This phenomena is reversible Using the

assumption that the ion yield is proportional to coverage it is concluded

that the fast state coverage is a function of temperature

The desorption curve obtained from the undosed tungsten (100)

surface has been measured and is given in Figure 313 The decay time is

seen to be extremely rapid compared to the analogous measurement taken after

hydrogen dosing at room temperature A semi logarithmic plot of iH~ - i ~ ~quil

measured from the data in Figure 313 is given in Figure 42 The total

tdesorption cross section for the fast state Qf(400 eV) calculated from the

slope of the straight line in Figure 42 is -17lxlO 2 cm This is nearly

three orders of magnitude higher than ~2(400 eV)

Since Q~(400 eV) is on the same order of magnitude as the cross

section obtained for hydrogen desorption from carbon monoxide or oxygen

51contaminated surfaces the possibility that the fast state results from

surface contamination has been examined No direct evidence was obtained to

support such a hypothesis No carbon or oxygen peaks were observed in Auger

electron spectra from the cold surface It is estimated that these spectra

were sensitive to 1 percent of a monolayer coverage No carbon or oxygen

ions that could be attributed to the fast state phenomena were observed in

time of flight measurements It might be noted that Jelend and Menzel

observed the high cross section state labeled ~ at room temperature after

simultaneously adsorbing hydrogen plus CO or oxygen Almost no fast state

137

100

-fJ)

Q U

50 J CT

+0gt I I

+ I

10~~~--~~~~~~--~~~--~~~~

o 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Time (sec)

sp- J~4l

Figure 42 Semi logarithmic plot of the quantity iH+ - iH+ as equi1

a function of time The data are illeasured from the desorption curve given in Figure 313

138

o lOhydrogen was detected here above 0 c Jelend and Menzel did not observe

any H+ ion yield from a cleaned surface if cooled to _13 0 C Since the gt

signal is weak at that temperature it is possible their apparatus did not

detect it It is also possible that they did not populate their surface

with hydrogen by cooling In any case its not possible to make any

simple correlations between the fast state and the contamination related x

state However as discussed below the equivalence of the two states

cannot be ruled out

It is of interest to determine the origin of the hydrogen which

populates the fast state There are several possibilities This state

could populate as a result of adsorption from the background Alternatively

88 89 hydrogen since it is endothermically soluble in tungsten m~ght

diffuse from interstitial sites to surface sites as the temperature of the

crystal is lowered A discussion of these phenomena has been given in

19Appendix C The latter suggestion has been offered as a possible

explanation of the c(2x2) LEED pattern observed on cooling In addition a

combination of these two processes could be occurring

Experiments have been performed in which the coverage in the fast

state has been monitored as a function of both adsorption time and system

background pressure If the source is external the dependence of N on

adsorption time and ambient pressure can be determined by solving Equation

C4 For the case of no incident electron beam (je = 0) and if the sticking

probability is assumed constant with coverage (probably a good assumption

since the change in coverage due to adsorption from the background would be

extremely small at the experimental ambient pressures) then the change in

139

coverage in the fast state would be expected to be linearly related to the

time during which adsorption occurs ie linearly proportional to the

variable adsorption time Furthermore for a fixed adsorption time the

coverage would be expected to be linearly proportional to the partial pressure

of the populating species

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

40 pressure is considerably more invo1ved Several points can be made

however from the discussion in Appendix C The time dependence of N due

to diffusion could be similar to that expected from background adsorption

ie linear with adsorption time However background pressure doesnt

enter into the diffusion process If the fast state phenomena is only

diffusion related the coverage N would be expected to be independent of

background pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence

for adsorption from the background

The rate of populating the fast state has been measured by turning

off the electron gun for various time intervals (setting j = 0) referred to e

as adsorption times and observing the build up of the ion signal while the

gun is off The increase in the fast state is then assumed proportional to

the increase in the ion yield i ~ - i ~ when the electron gun is Hinitia1 Hequi1

turned back on The dependence of the population rate on adsorption time is

shown in Figure 317 N is found to be linearly related to adsorption time

As discussed above this time behavior can reasonably be expected to be

observed for either an external or an internal source

The rate of population of the fast state has also been observed as

140

a function of hydrogen pressure admitted to the background from the gas

handling system As discussed in Section 354 the rate of population did

not depend on the impingement rate from the hydrogen background Hence it

is concluded that hydrogen from the gas handling system does not populate

the fast state This does not rule out external adsorption however Other

sources of hydrogen in the ambient such as rrt H H2 in an excited state or

hydrogen from a simple compound such as H 0 could be the source2

Although the population of the fast state was not affected by the

background pressure of hydrogen (H ) from the gas handling system there is2

evidence that this state does result from adsorption from an external source

This conclusion is based on experiments in which the Bayard Alpert gauge

sensitivity was increased by nulling out the x-ray limiting current Changes

-12in the background pressure on the order of 2xlO Torr were observed experishy

mentally if the crystal was flashed while it was facing the spectrometer

One explanation of this observation is that a flash in the up position warms

experimental chamber surfaces most likely the grids and electron gun drift

tube The resulting pressure increase occurs because of an increased rate of

thermal desorption from these surfaces The linear dependence of the

equilibrium current i ~ with pressure change as found experimentallyHequil

and shown in the top panel of Figure 319 is expected if external adsorption

populates the fast state This can be seen from Equation C9 Likewise the

rate of change of coverage in the fast state is seen to be proportional to

the pressure change in the lower panel of Figure 319 This is also expected

for external adsorption If bulk to surface diffusion were the source of the

hydrogen no dependence on pressure would be expected Hence Figure 319

141

indicates that hydrogen becomes desorbable because of adsorption from the

background It is not possible to say what species is adsorbing

An interesting calculation that can be made from the current nulling

experiments is an estimate of the coverage in the adsorption state responsible

for the fast state hydrogen ions Since the relation

(43)

can be obtained easily from Equation C9 and since ~i + is on the same Hequil

order as iH+ the background partial pressure that populates the undosed equil

-12state is on the same order of magnitude as ~P or about lxlO Torr The

coverage N at equilibrium can now be obtained by setting Equation C4 equal

-12to O At a pressure of 10 Torr the impingement rate of hydrogen molecules

9 2 90 for example is 15xlO moleculescm -sec and the impingement rate of other

species would be of this same magnitude Assuming a sticking probability of

-17 21 a total desorption cross section of 10 cm as calculated and a current

-4 2density of 5lxlO Acm the surface coverage in the fast state would be

~ 10-11

atomscm2 or 10-4 monolayer This calculation depends on the

assumption that the pressure change at the crystal face in the experimental

chamber is the same as measured at the gauge Experiments performed in which

the crystal was rotated to the down position after flashing in the up position

indicated that the flux of the populating species at the surface was about

twice as great when the crystal faced the spectrometer than when it faced

down Since the pressure at the bottom of the experimental chamber should

142

be about the same as the gauge pressure the calculated coverage could be

low by 50 percent It should be noted however that this is still 50 times

too low to amount to 1 percent of a monolayer

From the above discussion it can be concluded that the fast

state is related to both the temperature of the crystal and to the

background pressure of some unidentified species It is not possible to

determine if this state is a separate state from the K hydrogen state

previously reported even though it appears under different circumstances

In fact since the coverage in the state is so low Auger spectroscopy

would not be sensitive to any contamination of this same magnitude The

possibility of undetected contamination accompanying the fast state cannot

be ruled out It is possible that the adsorbing species does not contain

hydrogen as such but rather is a species which promotes a small amount

of surface hydrogen (from the background or diffusion) to the fast state

It can also be concluded that since coverages less than 1 percent of a

monolayer would not be expected to strongly alter the LEED spot symmetry

the half order spots seen on cooling do not arise from the fast state

433 Low Temperature Dosed Surface Results

ESD measurements have been made on the low temperature tungsten

crystal after dosing with hydrogen from the jet Energy distributions at

different coverages of hydrogen are given in Figure 39 The distributions

143

are seen to have a peak at 3 ~ 05 eV in agreement with the peak positions

in the data obtained from the ~ states at 60oC However the energy distri shy

butions are somewhat broader than the higher temperature data The fast

state yields a broad energy distribution and it is possible that the results

of Figure 39 represent simultaneous desorption from both the fast state and

the ~ states This hypothesis can be tested by analyzing a desorption curve

from the low temperature dosed surface If two states with different cross

sections are being desorbed then a semilogarithmic plot of the desorption

curve should be the sum of two straight lines The quantity i ~ - i ~ H HSquil

measured from the data of Figure 315 is plotted in Figure 43 The curve

can be separated into two straight line segments from which total desorption

17 19 2 cross sections of 16xlO- cm2 and 12xlO- cm are calculated These

cross sections correspond within plusmn 60 percent to the calculated values of

t tQf(400 eV) and QS2(400 eV) Hence it is concluded that at low temperatures

the fast state and S-like states co-adsorb

It should be noted however that the interaction of hydrogen from

the jet with the tungsten surface at low temperatures is not exactly the

o same as at 60 C This can be seen from the plot of 3 eV ion yield versus

work function change given in Figure 311 At both 600 C and at -lSOoC the

results are qualitatively similar the ion yield increases steeply with

initial hydrogen adsorption reaches a maximum and then decreases to less

than lS percent of the maximum value with additional hydrogen adsorption

Hence it is assumed that a similar phenomena is occurring at both temperashy

tures However the work function change at maximum intensity for the low

temperature measurement was found to be repeatedly lower by 007 eV than the

144

SP-H24

Figure 43 Semilogarithmic plot of the quantity ia+ - ia+ as equ~l

a function of time The data are measured from the desorption curve given in Figure 314

145

peak ~ntens~ty for measurements taken at 600 C If the expression relating

coverage to work function change Equation 35 is valid at both 600

C and

at -1500 C then the 007 eV shift would represent a dosed coverage difference

of 7 of a monolayer The ion yield at the low temperature would maximize at

a dosed coverage of 11 which is 40 lower than the coverage for the maximum

ion yield at the higher temperature If the decrease in ion yield for higher

hydrogen coverages arises from interactions between adsorbed atoms these calshy

culations suggest that the interactions observe a different coverage dependence

at the two temperatures Alternate explanations are possible for the measured

difference Equation 35 may not be valid at both temperatures It is possible

that the work function change per adsorbed atom is smaller at the lower tempshy

erature and the dosed coverages are the same at the ion yield maximas It is

also possible that hydrogen not visible in ESD or electron loss spectroscopy

measurements~ but capable of interacting with dosed hydrogen~ diffuses to the

surface at the low temperature This latter alternative~ while a possible exshy

planation for the LEED phenomena would raise many questions as to why such

hydrogen is not detectable with other techniques

44 Low Energy Electron Diffraction Measurements

Low energy electron diffraction measurements made on the clean and

hydrogen dosed tungsten (100) surface have been presented in Section 36 The

symmetry of the LEED patterns has been noted as a function of hydrogen coverage

and crystal temperature Elastic intensity profiles for three LEED beams are

given in Figures 321 through 323 LEED beam intensities as a function of

temperature have been monitored These are given in Figures 324 and 325

General agreement between symmetry patterns seen here and those

published in the literature18 19 is good The (lxl) LEED pattern

146

characteristic of clean tungsten at room temperature changes into a c(2x2)

pattern with initial hydrogen adsorption With further adsorption the LEED

pattern splits into four spots becomes blurred and finally at full coverage

returns to a (lx1) pattern When the crystal is cooled to temperatures below

room temperatures half order spots become visible without any dosing of the

crystal from the gas system

The intensity of the room temperature half order spots maximizes at

a coverage corresponding to ~~ = 015 eV or 015 monolayer using Equation

35 This is close to the 016 monolayer coverage at which Yonehara and

19 18Schmidt found these beams to maximize Estrup and Anderson on the

other hand observed sharp and intense half order LEED spots at a coverage

of 029 monolayer The coverages reported here were calculated from work

function changes using the linear relation between work function change and

coverage obtained by Madey by a flash desorption technique In both other

18experiments 19 coverage was measured directly using flash desorption The

c(2x2) pattern is associated with the ~2 adsorption state The structures

proposed to account for this state as given in Section 128 predict that

the maximum of the half order spots should occur at 025 monolayer coverage

15(one monolayer being 2x10 atomscm2) Estrup and Andersons measurement is

closest to this coverage While it is not known why there is such a large

discrepancy between the results it should be noted that determination of

coverage using flash desorption techniques is difficult with large uncershy

tainties in pressure gauge calibration and system volume The results given

here in terms of ~~ should be considerably more accurate

_ _____---__---shy

147

Elastic intensity profiles for the (10) (11) and (1212) LEED

beams are given in Figures 321 through 323 respectively The profiles

o 0 were taken at 60 C and -150 C from both a clean tungsten surface and a

surface dosed with hydrogen to 015 monolayer (This coverage corresponded

to the observed maximum in the half order pattern) As seen in these three

figures corresponding clean room temperature and low temperature profiles are

nearly identical Adsorption of hydrogen to a coverage of 015 does cause

some changes in the clean profiles with the same changes being observed at

both temperatures Hydrogen adsorption considerably enhances the 42 eV peak

observed in the (1212) profile and shifts it in energy approximately + 1 eVe

Adsorption also leads to a change from a single peak to a double peaked

structure of decreased intensity in the (11) profile above 100 eVe Adsorption

causes very little change in the (10) profile line shape above 60 eV

although the 65 eV 835 eV and 110 eV peaks are lowered in energy approxishy

mately 15 eV 05 eV and 15 eV respectively Between 30 eV and 60 eV

there are some adsorption effects on the profiles

These elastic intensity profiles can be compared to corresponding

data previously reported in the literature In Figure 44 a comparison is

made between clean surface (10) and (11) profiles taken here and reported

9lby Wei The agreement is good except in the energy range below 50 eVe

This poor agreement below 50 eV is also true for the (00) beam which is not

compared here The low energy discrepancies may be caused by the ambient

magnetic field present in Weis target region In fact it is surprising

that the data agrees as well as it does considering the different experimenshy

tal conditions under which the two sets of data were obtained Figure 45

148

Figure 44 Comparison of (11) and (10) elastic intensity profiles from the clean tungsten (100) surface Data includes profiles taken here at 60degC and -150degC and results reported by Wei94 bull

149

() --c 1

gt 0-Q 0-gt-()

c OJ-c

H

o 50 100 150 200

xl

xl

X2

Elastic Intensity Profiles W (100) Clean 8i = 0deg

g = (11)

g = (10)

Withrow (-150degC)

Withrow (60degC)

Wei (250-300degC)

Pr imary Energy (eV) SP-1l92

150

Figure 45 Comparison of (1212) elastic intensity profiles from tungsten (100) surface after hydrogen adsorption into the ~2 state Data includes profiles obtained here and results reported by Estrup and Anderson18 and Papageorgopoulos and Chen2l

0

151

- ()-

--()

c Q)-c H

Elastic Intensity Profiles H2 on W(lOO) 8j =0deg 9 = (1212)

Withrow

Estrup and Anderson

Papageorgopoulos and Chen

o 50 100 150 Primary Energy (eV) SP-1l93

200

152

shows a comparison of elastic intensity profiles for the (1212) beam taken

after hydrogen adsorption From the general appearance of the data Estrup

18and Andersons profi1e appears shifted up in energy about 5 eV with respect

to the profile taken here This suggests the possibility of a discrepancy

in the energy measurement The line shapes are similar howeve~ although

Estrup and Anderson found one well-defined peak around 75 eV whereas in this

work a peak at 67 eV and an additional shoulder between 85 eV and 90 eV is

21seen Papageorgopou1os and Chen did not observe the large peak below 50 eV

nor the double peaked structure above 100 eV reported by both other researchers

These discrepancies cou1deasi1y be due to a residual magnetic field in the

work of Papageorgopou1os and Chen It can be concluded from these comparishy

sons that control over experimental conditions is crucial for the reproduction

of data

Information on the actual configuration of the surface ion cores

16 17 can be extracted from a sufficient set of elastic intensity proh1es

Although the data base is small here a preliminary analysis of the clean

tungsten data has been conducted by Duke using a microscopic quantum-field

16theory formalism of low energy electron diffraction In this formalism a

model for the electron-solid interaction is used in an attempt to match

theoretical line shape predictions to experimentally observed elastic LEED

intensity profiles An important feature of this microscopic approach is the

strong interactions between the incident electron and valence electrons in

the solid The inelastic mean free path A is about 3-8 X for most ee

materials for electron energies of 30 ~ E S 200 As a consequence electrons

which are observed elastically have been backscattered within the first

--------------

153

several surface layers of the solid and hence LEED elastic profiles are

surface sensitive Elastic backscattering of the electrons is described by

short range electron-ion core interactions Information on the configurashy

tion of the surface ion cores is extracted from the elastic energy profiles

by varying parameters in the theory and obtaining the best fit to the data

Theoretical analysis of elastic energy profiles from tungsten at energies

above 100 eV is computationally difficult because of the large number of

phase shifts needed to describe the electron-ion core scattering Hence the

exp arimental profiles were taken only for energies E 1gt 125 eV pr~

Comparisons of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity

profiles for the (00) (10) and (11) beams are given in Figure 46 The

theoretical fit to the experimental data was made by taking an inelastic

mean free path Aee equal to 8 K and an inner potential Vl which represents

t he rea1 part 0 f h 1 1 i on16 equa1 to 8 eV Thetee ectron-e ectron 1nteract

agreement in peak position is good for the (10) beam in the range

25 eV lt E lt 125 eV and for the (11) beam in the range 60 eV lt E lt 100 eV ~ ~ ~ ~

The theoretical and experimental line shapes of the (10) beam show remarkable

agreement but the line shapes of the (11) beam do not fit as well For the

(00) beam the theoretical profile is not similar to the experimental plot

except for the peak at 117 eV Most of this discrepancy for the (00) beam

probably arises from the differences in theoretical and experimental incishy

dence and aximuthal angles used to obtain the profiles The theoretical

profile was calculated assuming a primary electron beam normally incident

experimentally this is not possible with the spectrometer ~sed here since

the (00) beam would not be visible on the LEED screen under these conditions

~~ ~~-----------

---------------------~------------------

154

o

III C

~ C

H 1 o

1

o

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(lOO)

-Experiment Withrow and Luscher

g =(00)

o-o-oTheory Duke T = 10 K ej =cpj =0 V=8eVI Aee 811

o 140 SP-1l91

Figure 46 Comparison of theoretical and experimental elastic intensity profiles for clean tungsten (100) surface Theoretical results have been calculated by Duke

155

Data has been obtained for the temperature dependence of clean

elastic intensity profiles No differences in the clean surface (10) and

(11) profiles taken at 600 C and -1500 C are seen even though the LEED pattern

symmetry changes from a (lxl) pattern to a c(2x2) pattern Apparently these

two elastic intensity profiles are not sensitive to the scattering geometry

changes that are manifested in the LEED pattern change

19 92 It has been speculated that the extra half order spots may

result from hydrogen on the surface As shown above the (10) and (11)

profiles dont change even though the half order spots appear on cooling

This may not be surprising if the extra spots seen on cooling the undosed

crystal are related to hydrogen on the surface The cross section for hydrogen

92 93backscattering 1S very weak compared to scattering from tungsten While

a priori it is not necessarily true that the addition of a weak scatterer will

have little effect on intensity profiles this does seem to be the case for

hydrogen adsorption onto tungsten Adsorption of hydrogen has no effect on

18the (00) profile from tungsten (100) and it was found here that~daorption

of hydrogen has very little effect on the (10) beam profile out to 015

monolayer coverage as can be concluded from Figure 321 On the other hand

it is true that adsorption of hydrogen did alter the (11) beam A second

explanation for the extra spots seen on cooling the crystal is that they

result from a tungsten surface reconstruction No theoretical calculations

have been performed which would indicate how reconstruction would affect the

intensity profiles The sensitivity of the profiles to an hypothesized

surface atom reconstruction could be determined from calculations similar to

those leading to the theoretical profiles given in Figure 46 Such a

156

theoretical calculation would be of interest as it would help evaluate how

much credence should be given to a reconstruction hypothesis

More than one atomic geometry may be associated with a given surface

translational symmetry ie associated with the same LEED spot pattern

Different geometries however would be manifested via differences in the

1intensity profiles associated with the same spot pattern After hydrogen

o 0adsorption to 015 monolayer at 60 C and -150 C both the LEED pattern symmetr~

c(2x2) and the elastic intensity profiles are the same Thus this data would indicate hydrogen adsorbs into the same surface atomic geometry at the two

temperatures A comparison of elastic intensity profiles from the undosed and

hydrogen dosed cold surface is given in Figure 47 The LEED pattern for both

conditions has a c(2x2) symmetry The profiles are not the same particularly

the (11) profile above 100 eV and the (1212) profile below 50 eV Hence

the atomic geometry responsible for the two sets of profiles may be different

even though the observed pattern symmetry c(2x2) is the same

The intensity dependence on temperature of the LEED beams has been

observed The intensity of integral order beams monitored from the clean

surface increases with decreasing temperature as shown in Figure 324 The

22 95 exponential temperature dependence obtained is pred1cted from a kinematic

treatment of electron scattering in which thermal vibrations are included via

an effective Debye-Waller factor Experimental Debye temperatures aD can

be calculated from the slopes of the straight lines in Figure 324 22 96

For the (10) beam taken with a primary energy of 1105 eV aD is

calculated to be 280oK 97 This is on the order of the Debye temperature for

~ 0bulk tungsten and higher than the Debye temperature of 183 K found by

157

Figure 47 Comparison of experimental (10) (11) and (1212) elastic intensity profiles from a cold tungsten (100) surface for hydrogen adsorption in the fast state (undosed surface) and in the ~2 state

158

Elastic Intensity Profiles W(100)

g (10)

1 o

o

OJ 0deg T -150degC Undosed and Dosed with H2

shyCl shy+shy 1 0 shyCl

o gt +shy(J)

c Q)

C 0 H

g (1212)

1

o

o

o 140

159

Estrup13 for the (10) beam for intensities taken between 6000K and 8000K

0The Debye temperature for the (11) beam is calculated to be 410 K The

middot h 1 1 95va1ues 0f eD f ound h ere seem to be anoma1ous 1y h19 S1nce ca cu at10ns

indicate that the surface Debye temperature should be lower than the bulk

Debye temperature

The temperature dependence of the half order beam is not the same

as found for the integer order beams Figure 325 shows that the intensity

of this beam increases at different exponential rates over two temperature

regions Down to about -750C the intensity increase is exponential but with

a steeper temperature dependence than observed with the integer order beams

Below -75oC the intensity increases at approximately the same exponential

rate as the integer order beams This same result is found at primary

energies of both 42 eV and 115 eV The effect is reversible with temperature

Yonehara and Schmidt19 measured the temperature dependence of the half order

beams and fit their results to a straight line on a linear scale However

for the data they took immediately after flashing to 25000K an exponential

dependence as found here appears to be as good if not better fit

0Below -75 C the half order beam intensity increases at approximately

the same exponential rate as the integer order beams This suggests that in

this lower temperature region the intensity increase can be explained by the

0 0Debye-Wa1ler factor However between 100 C and -75 C it is not known why

the (1212) spots appear and then increase in intensity so strongly

The intensity dependence on temperature of the (1212) beam

below OoC can be compared to the temperature dependence of the fast state H+

ion intensity These data are given in Figures 312 and 325 Because the

----------------~~ ~~~~~

160

a+ ion yield from the fast state also increases with decreasing temperature

a possible correlation between the appearance of this ion signal and the

appearance of the half order beams is suggested It is tempting to hypothesize

that the fast state is adsorbed into a c(2x2) array and hence half order spots

are produced on cooling However this connection probably cannot be made

For one thing the estimated coverage of the fast state is several orders of

magnitude below a coverage reasonably expected to exert an influence on the

LEED pattern In addition while the fast state has a high total desorption

cross section with the ion signal decaying rapidly after turning oriltthe

electron gun no evidence of this type of behavior is found for the LEED spot

intensities if a corresponding experiment is made A depletion of the fast

state in the electron beam does not affect the half order LEED spot intensities

oFinally in the region below middot75 C the ion signal increases reversibly with

temperature at a steep rate while the LEED spot intensity increases reversshy

ib1y at a slow rate ie the intensity correlation is not good in this

range These arguments do not refute the possibility that the half order

spots are a hydrogen phenomena They strongly indicate however that a

correlation cannot be made between the hydrogen ions observed from the undosed

surface and the appearance of the half order spots aside from the obvious

result that they both occur over the same temperature range It would appear

more reasonable to suggest that the formation of a c(2x2) scattering symmetry

on the surface via reconstruction or some other mechanism provides a

binding site into which a species from the ambient can adsorb and subseshy

quent1y be desorbed The identity of that species is not known

-----------shy

161

45 Electron Scattering Results

Energy loss spectra for electrons scattered from the clean and

hydrogen covered tungsten (100) surface are given in Figures 326 and 327

The second derivative mode has been employed in order to suppress background

as discussed in Appendix B Data have been presented for energy losses

between a and 40 eV for a primary electron beam energy of 110 eV

Several general comments can be made A comparison of the clean

spectra taken at the two temperatures shows they are nearly identical The

only difference is a slight enhancement in the low temperature data of the

shoulder at w = 75 eV (barely evident in the figures) It might be noted

that adsorption of hydrogen produces as peak at 75 eV and the small change

in the low temperature spectrum near this energy may be an indication of a

small hydrogen coverage An attempt was made to observe effects of the fast

state on the clean spectrum After cooling the crystal the fast state was

allowed to populate by turning the gun off for adsorption times of 10 minutes

The spectrum taken after preparing the crystal in this way was identical to

those obtained immediately after cooling Hence fast state hydrogen does

not perturb the electronic structure unlike ~ state hydrogen This result

is not surprising because of the very low coverages calculated for the fast

state from the desorption measurement

Hydrogen adsorption into the ~ states perturbs the clean surface

o 0loss spectrum The same changes are observed at both 60 C and -150 C The

most dramatic changes that occur with increasing coverage are the growth of

a 75 eV loss the movement down in loss energy of the structure at 21 eV in

the clean spectrum and the annihilation of the peak at 25 eV In addition

the loss peak at 107 eV decreases in intensity somewhat

162

Definite changes in the loss spectra are seen (for example at

w = 75 eV) for work function changes of 003 eV This is a coverage of only

3 percent hydrogen At coverages corresponding to a work function change of

015 eV the 75 eV peak is well-developed and the 21 eV structure has moved

down ~ 1 eV While hydrogen is adsorbing at room temperature from 0 to 15

percent of a monolayer half order spots develop in the LEED pattern As

noted before half order spots also develop in the LEED pattern by cooling the

ocrystal to -150 C However electron loss measurements from the cold flashed

surface dont show any changes that correspond to hydrogen on the surface

Thus no correlation can be drawn using electron loss measurements between

the half order patterns obtained by hydrogen dosing and by cooling the crystal

Interpretation of the structure in the energy loss spectra taken

here is nontrivial Although the data incorporates information on the elecshy

tronic structure of the surface and near surface region ie represents

bulk and surface single particle transitions and collective oscillations

both theoretical and experimental complexities arise in attempting to extract

electronic structure from the data While the electron energy loss has been

measured with high resolution information on the momentum transfer ~ q

involved in the electron solid inelastic interaction is not retained since

1) the analyzer integrates over a wide range of ~ qs and 2) the backscattered

electron has undergone at least two collisions - an inelastic scattering

with an accompanying momentum transfer which is not enough to turn the

electron around and an elastic scattering which does Hence the analyzer is

expected to be sensitive to loss mechanisms which are well-defined in energy

but relatively independent of momentum transfer Transitions satisfying these

163

conditions are possible in tungsten Luscher has shown25 that at least one

relatively flat and narrow d-band in tungsten located near the Fermi level

acts as the final state for electron excitations involving core electrons

This d-band may be operative as a final state for transitions involving

valence and adsorbate electrons as well

25The structure at 210 eV and 255 eV has been identified as

resulting from surface and bulk plasmons Adsorption of hydrogen increases

the energy of the surface plasmon but does not affect the energy of the bulk

plasmon

The energy losses at 381 eV 346 eV and 324 eV remain constant

as a function of hydrogen coverage These losses correspond in both relative

strengths and separation in energy to tungsten core electron excitations from

he 5 an (doublet ) eve 1s f ound h at 36 Vt p d 4f 1 1nmiddot x-ray p otoem1SS10n 99 9 e

333 eV and 311 eV below the Fermi level A comparison of these photo-

emission values to the energy losses observed here would indicate the position

of the final state operative in the energy loss measurements is 13 eV above

the Fermi level

It would be convenient to use this value) 13 eV for the final

state energy in interpreting the rest of the sharply peaked structure arising

from electron transitions There are difficulties with such an approach

however The data being compared in calculating the final state energy

location have been obtained with two techniques that perturb the adsorbateshy

plus-solid system in distinctly different ways The observed energy losses

in electron scattering are strongly influenced by interband oscillators

electron screening and relaxation effects and these perturbations are not

164

constant as a function of loss energy Hence extension of the 13 eV value

in interpreting data at other loss energies may not be valid None the less

using the 13 eV final state the peaks in the clean ELS spectrum at 25 eV

and 40 eV would correspond to peaks in the photoemission spectra at 12 eV

(25 eV - 13 eV) and at 27 eV (40 eV - 13 eV) respectively There is

no obvious correspondence between these peaks and structure seen in clean

35 36surface photoemission spectra The structure changes on adsorption in

the ELS spectra for 0 eV S w ~ 4 eV may reflect the sharp photoemission loss

which appears at 25 eV as hydrogen coverage increases The strong 75 eV

energy loss which appears in the ELS spectra as hydrogen adsorbs onto the

crystal would correspond to structure in photoemission data near 62 eV

(75 eV - 13 eV) Recently photoemission peaks at 52 eV and between

10068 eV and 78 eV have been reported From these comparisons it can be

seen that quantitative interpretation of the fine structure in the energy

loss measurements cannot be made with this simple model

165

CHAPTER 5

SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

An experimental apparatus for surface research has been designed

constructed and successfully placed in operation It incorporates the

necessary hardware and electronics for performing several complementary

surface probing techniques including Auger electron spectroscopy retarding

potential work function measurements low energy electron diffraction electron

energy loss spectroscopy and electron stimulated desorption of ions System

electronics allow the instrument to be easily switched between the techniques

The apparatus has been used to study the chemisorption of hydrogen on a

tungsten single crystal surface over the temperature range 600C to -150

0C

The instrument combines an electron gun with an energy spectrometer

a LEED display system and a crystal manipulator The electron gun is capable

of focusing a monoenergetic electron current of up to 21 ~A onto a

macroscopic sample The gun has been operated from 5 eV to 1800 eV The

high resolution high sensitivity spectrometer consists of a retarding field

analyzer in series with two electrostatic deflection analyzers The energy

resolution of the spectrometer is 21 without using the retarding field

analyzer This can be improved to less than 1 under some conditions by

applying a retarding field The spectrometer output can be detected using

a atemeter or using modulation techniques The instrument has been used to

analyze electron and ion signals from the sample and to determine the charge

to mass ratio of desorbed ions The experimental sample a tungsten crystal

which has been polished to within 01 0 of the (100) face is mounted on the

166

end of a crystal manipulator The manipulator is used to position the sample

as needed A two grid LEED display system has been used to study LEED

pattern symmetry The intensities of LEED spots have been monitored with a

spot photometer

The chemical composition of the surface layer has been characterized

under experimental conditions using Auger electron spectroscopy The Auger

spectrum obtained after flashing the crystal to 22000 K is free of carbon and

oxygen Auger structure The electron gun could be operated under normal

experimental conditions without contaminating the surface but a carbon Auger

peak appears if high gun currents and voltages are used This effect Crul

be taken into consideration when interpreting the data Some weak structure

in the Auger spectra from the flashed surface is seen between 475 eV and

525 eVa It is not possible to conclusively determine if this structure

results from Auger transitions in tungsten or from some other source

Retarding potential work function measurements have been made as

a reproducible measure of hydrogen coverage Adsorption of hydrogen onto

othe tungsten (100) crystal at 60 C yields a maximum work function change of

098 plusmn 004 eVa This is in good agreement with previously reported values

The work function change with exposure to hydrogen for the tungsten sample

at -lSOoc was found to be the same within experimental accuracy as found

at higher temperature The maximum work function change at -lSOoc is

092 plusmn 004 eVa Cooling the flashed crystal from 2200 C to -lSOoC resulted

in an increase in the work function of approximately 005 eVa An intrinsic

(clean surface) temperature dependence of this magnitude appears reasonable

from theoretical considerations

167

The time-of-flight technique employed for mass analysis was found

to work well Ion species H+ and 0+ as well as H + have been identified2

Relative intensities of the ion yields could only be estimated with this

technique as instrumented H+ ions are electron desorbed from the surface

after adsorption of hydrogen In addition H+ ions could be desorbed from the

surface after a flash if the crystal was cooled below room temperature No

HZ+ ions were desorbed from the crystal However H2+ and H+ ions produced

by ionization of the background and also by ESD from surfaces in the experishy

mental chamber were detected under certain operating conditions This signal

could be separated from the ions originating at the crystal surface by biasing

the crystal several volts positive with respect to the spectrometer

The distribution in energy of H+ ions electron desorbed from a 60 0 C

tungsten (100) surface has been observed The distribution has a normal line

shape with a peak intensity at 30 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a half width

of Z6 eV No evidence of distinct ~l and ~Z adsorption states was found in

the energy distribution line shape the distribution is the same for coverages

corresponding to both the ~Z adsorption state and the ~l plus ~2 adsorption

states The intensity of the U+ ion signal is coverage dependent The deshy

pendence found here is in agreement with previously reported work The maxshy

imum in intensity of the ion yield occurs for a work function change of 018

eV The total desorption cross section for hydrogen ions from the ~2 state

is 5xlO-ZO cmZ bull

An H+ ion signal can be desorbed from the undosed (100) surface if

the crystal temperature is lowered below room temperature T~fs represents

a previously unreported hydrogen adsorption state Experiments in which

the pressure was carefully monitored indicate that this hydrogen results

168

from adsorption onto the crystal from the background However the state

labeled the fast state is not populated by the adsorption of H2 from the

gas handling system The adsorbing species that populates the fast state

is not known Hydrogen coverage in the fast state is estimated to be ~10-4

monolayer which is an extremely small coverage The fast state hydrogen

desorbs with a broad energy distribution which has a peak intensity at

25 + 05 eV kinetic energy and a tail extending up to gt9 eV The total

17 2desorption cross section for H+ from this state is high lxlO- cm This is

on the same order of magnitude as the cross section for desorption of the

~ hydrogen state However no evidence of CO or oxygen contaminants which

are associated with the ~ state was found The techniques used to chemshy

ically characterize the surface were sensitive to about 1 percent of a mono-

layer so these two contaminants could have been present at coverages less

than 1 percent

Hydrogen (H2) dosed onto the low temperature surface co-adsorbs

with the fast state in a separate e state This can be concluded from energy

distribution and desorption curve measurements The maximum ion yield obshy

tainable from the low temperature surface occurs for a work function change

of 011 eV This is 007 eV lower than the maximum in the ion yield from

the room temperature hydrogen dosed surface This difference may indicate

that the mechanism responsible for the decrease in ion yield as the ~l state

fills is operative at a lower hydrogen coverage at low temperatures An

alternative possibility is that hydrogen coverage at the low temperature can

not be measured by the same expression relating coverage to work function

change as used at the higher temperature

169

Low energy electron diffraction pattern changes observed as a

function of hydrogen coverage on the room temperature surface are in agreeshy

ment with those reported in the literature The surface translational symshy

metry is strongly coverage dependent The maximum in the c(2x2) pattern

associated with the ~2 state occurs at a work function change of 015 eV for

room temperature adsorption If the crystal is flashed to ~22000K and then

cooled below room temperature the (lxl) pattern characteristic of the clean

surface changes into a c(2x2) pattern Since H+ ions can be electron desorbed

from the flashed surface if the crystal is cooled to this same temperature

range and since the ~2 state hydrogen is known to produce a c(2x2) pattern

it has been suggested that the low temperature c(2x2) LEED pattern may result

from hydrogen on the surface However no evidence was found to support this

hypothesis The ions desorbed from the cold surface did not originate from

the f 2 state but from a distinctly different state labeled the fast state

It is questioned whether the low coverage in the fast state is sufficient to

produce half order LEED spots There is no indication from the ELS measureshy

ments that hydrogen has diffused to the surface from the bulk Electron

energy loss spectra show almost no change on cooling the crystal below room

temperature These spectra are sensitive to electronic structure changes

resulting from hydrogen adsorption of as little as 3 percent of a monolayer

The (10) and (11) LEED beam intensity profiles taken from the undosed surface

are not changed by cooling the crystal It would be of interest to compare

this experimental result to theoretical elastic intensity profile calculations

from both a normal and a recons tructed tungsten surface This would help

determine if reconstruction is a viable explanation for the cold surface

170

c(2x2) phenomenon

Low energy electron diffraction elastic intensity profiles for

several beams have been reported from the clean tungsten (100) surface and

from this surface dosed with hydrogen in the ~2 state These profiles have

been compared to published data where possible Careful control over expershy

imental parameters is essential in order to obtain agreement between the data

The clean surface intensity profiles have been compared to preliminary theoretshy

ical calculations While fair agreement Catl be obtained both experimental

and theoretical problems must be solved before a reliable calculation of

atomic geometry for the hydrogen over layer can be made A comparison of

experimental profiles for the low temperature undosed and hydrogen dosed

c(2x2) patterns suggests that the atomic geometries responsible for these

identical patterns arenot the same

Electron scattering energy loss spectra have been presented as a

f~~ction of hydrogen coverage Changes in the electronic structure at the

surface resulting from hydrogen adsorption are observed Structure due to

the surface and hulk plasmons are identified and peaks due to tungsten

Sp and 4f core level transitions can be identified by comparison to published

photoemission data Interpretation of other structure in the spectra requires

more study

171

REFERENCES

1 C B Duke Jap J App1 Phys 13 (1974) to be published

2 For example see R R Ford Advan Catalysis 21 51 (1970) for review of CO adsorption on transition metals or J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chern Phys 54 4969 (1971) and T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et PrPri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155 for a review of hydrogen adsorption on tungsten (100)

3 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Vac Sci Techno1 ~ 63 (1971)

4 P A Redhead Vacuum~ 203 (1962)

5 G Ehrlich Advan Catalysis 14 221 (1963)

6 L A Petermann Progress in Surface Science vol 3 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1972) p 1

7 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chern Phys 21 5352 (1969)

8 T E Madey and J T Yates Jr Structure et Propri~t~s des Surfaces des Solides (Editions du Centre National de 1a Recherche Scientifique Paris 1970) No 187 p 155

9 D L Adams and L H Germer Sur Sci 23 419 (1970)

10 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 40 295 (1973)

11 G Tibbetts PhD thesis University of Illinois 1967

12 D L Adams Sur Sci 42 12 (1974)

13 P J Estrup The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 191

14 C B Duke and C W Tucker Jr Sur Sci 11 231 (1969)

15 C B Duke Electron Emission Spectroscopy edited by W Dekeyser et a1 (D Reidel Publishing Co Dordrecht Holland 1973) p 1

16 C B Duke N O Lipari and G E Laramore J Vac Sci Techno1 11 180 (1974)

17 M G Laga11y T C Ngoc and M B Webb Phys Rev Lett 26 1557 (1971)

172

18 P J Estrup and J Anderson J Chern Phys 45 2254 (1966)

19 K Yonehara and L D Schmidt Sur Sci 12 238 (1971)

20 E W Plummer and A E Bell J Vac Sci Techno1 2 583 (1972) bull

21 C A Papageorgopoulos and J M Chen Sur Sc i 39 283 (1973)

22 R F Wallis B C Clark and R Herman The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 171

23 M R Leggett and R A Armstrong Sur Sci 24 404 (1971)

24 D Edwards Jr PhD thesis University of Illinois 1970

25 P E Luscher PhD thesis Northwestern University 1974 to be published

26 R Gomer Field Emission and Field Ionization (Harvard U Press Cambridge Ma ss 1961)

27 R D Young Phys Rev 113 110 (1959)

28 J W Gadzuk and E W Plummer Rev Mod Phys 45 487 (1973)

29 C B Duke and M E Alpounderieff J Chern Phys 46 923 (1967)

30 J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Bl 2110 (1970)

31 C N Berglund and W E Spicer Phys Rev 136 part A Al030 (1964)

32 F M Propst and T C Piper J Vac Sci Technol ~ 53 (1967)

33 G Herzberg Molecular Spectra and Molecular Structure I Spectra of Diatomic Molecules (D Van Nostrand New York 1963) 2nd ed

34 E W Plummer and J W Gadzuk Phys Rev Lett 25 1493 (1970)

35 B J Waclawski and E W Plummer Phys Rev Lett 29 783 (1972)

36 B Feuerbacher and B Fitton Phys Rev Lett 29 786 (1972)

37 P A Redhead Can J Phys 42 886 (1964)

38 D Menzel and R Gomer J Chern Phys 41 3311 (1964)

39 D Lichtman and R McQuistan Progress in Nuclear Energy Analytical Chemistry edited by H A Elion and D C Stewart (Pergamon Press New York 1965) series 9 vol 4 p 93

173

40 U N Ageev and N I Ionov Progress in Surface Science vol 5 part 1 edited by S G Davison (Pergamon Press New York 1974) p 1

41 T E Madey Sur Sci 36 281 (1973)

42 A Benninghoven E Loebach and N Treitz J Vac Sci Techno1 2 600 (1972)

43 L W Swanson A E Bell C H Hinrichs L C Crouser and B E Evans Literature Review of Adsorption on Metal Surfaces vol 1 NASA CR-72402 (NASA Lewis Research Center Cleveland Ohio 1967) p 76

44 R V Culver and F C Tompkins Advan Catalysis l 67 (1959)

45 See reference 43 p 49

46 J A Becker Actes du 2ieme Congres International de 1a Cata1yse (Edition Technip Paris 1961) 1777

47 R A Armstrong Can J Phys 44 1753 (1966)

48 B J Hopkins and K R Pender Sur Sci ~ 316 (1966)

49 R A Collins and B H B1ott J App1 Phys 40 5390 (1969)

50 J T Yates Jr and T E Madey J Chem Phys 54 4969 (1971)

51 W Je1end and D Menzel Sur Sci 42 485 (1974)

52 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 52 1150 (1970)

53 See reference 7 Fig 8

54 K Fujiwara J Phys Soc Japan 11 7 (1957)

55 G D Bond Disc Faraday Soc 41 200 (1966)

56 F M Propst unpublished

57 R L Park The Structure and Chemistry of Solid Surfaces edited by G A Somorjai (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1969) p 281

58 T B Grime1y Adsorption-Desorption Phenomena edited by F Ricca (Academic Press New York 1972) p 215

59 L W Anders R S Hansen and L S Bartell J Chern Phys 595277(1973)

60 J R Schrieffer J Vac Sci Techno1 2 561 (1972)

174

61 D M Newns Phys Rev 178 1123 (1969)

62 J R Schrieffer and R Gomer Sur Sci 25 315 (1971)

63 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn Phys Rev Lett 30 610 (1973)

64 J R Smith S C Ying and W Kohn to be published

65 P J Jennings and E G McRae Sur Sci 23 363 (1970)

66 W H Weinberg J Vac Soc Technol lQ 89 (1973)

67 L A Harris J Appl Phys 39 1419 (1968)

68 C C Chang Sur Sci 25 53 (1971)

69 T Cooper PhD thesis University of Illinois Urbana Illinois 1970

70 E M Purcell Phys Rev 54 818 (1938)

71 R Herzog Zeits F Physik 89 449 (1934)

72 Coordinated Science Laboratory Progress Report for July 1970 through June 1971 University of Illinois Urbana Illinois

73 See for example Handbook and Catalog of Operational Amplifiers BurrshyBrown Research Corp 1969 p 44

74 R W Jnyner J Rickman and M W Roberts Sur Sci 39 445 (1973)

75 C Lea and C H B Mee Sur Sci 11 332 (1971)

76 W A Coghlan and R E Clausing A Catalog of Calculated Auger Transitions for the Elements ORNL-TM-3576 (Oak Ridge National Lab Oak Ridge Tenn 1971)

77 As read by optical pyrometer the edge of the target measured 22000 K and the center 2500oK

78 B B Dayton Trans 3rd AVS National Vacuum Symposium 1956 (Pergamon Press New York 1957) p 5

79 T E Madey Sur Sci 33 355 (1972)

80 S C Brown Basic Data of Plasma Physics (Technology Press of MIT Cambridge Mass and John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 115

81 H D Hagstrum Rev Mod Phys 23 185 (1951)

175

82 M Nishijima PhD thesis University of Illinois 1969

83 G D Watts A R Jones and B J Hopkins Sur Sci 45 705 (1974)

84 R A Armstrong Sur Sc i sect 478 (1967)

85 E H B1evis and C R Crowell Phys Rev 133 part A A580 (1964)

86 C R Crowell and R A Armstrong Phys Rev 114 1500 (1959)

87 P W Tamm and L D Schmidt J Chem Phys 55 4253 (1971)

88 R Frauenfelder J Vac Sci Technol sect 388 (1969)

89 G E Moore and F C Unterwald J Chem Phys 40 2639 (1964)

90 S Dushman Scientific Foundations of Vacuum Technigue (John Wiley and Sons Inc New York 1959) p 19

91 P S P Wei J Chem Phys 53 2939 (1970)

92 J C Tracy private communication

93 J J Lander and J Morrison J Appl Phys 34 3517 (1963)

94 M Fink and A C Yates Atomic Data (to be published)

95 G E Laramore and C B Duke Phys Rev ~ I 4783 (1970)

96 J F Wendelken PhD thesis University of Illinois 1975

97 An inner potential of 8 eV has been assumed in this calculation

98 A Guinier X-Ray Diffraction (W H Freeman and Co San Francisco 1963) p 192

99 K Seigbahn C Nordling A Fahlman R Nordberg K Hamrin J Helman G Johansson T Bergmark S E Karlsson K Lindgren and B Lindberg ESCA - Atomic Molecular and Solid State Structure Studied by Means of Electron Spectroscopy (Almqvist Wiksells Uppsala 1967)

100 W F Egelhoff and D L Perry Phys Rev Lett 34 93 (1975)

176

APPENDIX A

A tungsten tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple spot-welded to the

side of the crystal is used to measure target temperatures The thermocouple

was calibrated against a copper-constantan standard A low temperature

freezing slush of isopentane (2-methylbutane) was made in a dewar by adding

liquid nitrogen (Isopentane freezes at -15989degC) The solution was allowed

to slowly warm up to room temperature over three hours during which a semi-

static calibration was made The reference junction was kept in a slush of

distilled ice water The calibration is shown in Figure AI

Using an identical technique a tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26

rhenium thermocouple was also calibrated as shown in Figure A2 TIlis thermoshy

couple does not have an inflection point in the range 00 to -195degC and it

00 h t t1mes more sens1t1ve over t he temperature range to -lSOoC than the1S e1g

tungstentungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple A tungsten-S rhenium wire should

spot-weld to tungsten more readily than a pure tungsten wire Thus because

of its increased sensitivity and ease of attaching to the tungsten crystal a

tungsten-S rhenium tungsten-26 rhenium thermocouple appears a better

temperature sensor for low temperature research on tungsten

In the apparatus used the wires associated with the target manipulashy

tor including the thermocouple leads wind around the manipulator shaft to

provide rotational motion In order to get the 76 mm (003 in) diameter

thermocouple wires to wind smoothly around the shaft it was found necessary to

spring load them by turning a short segment of the wires into a 16 mm diameter

spring Unfortunately the tungsten-5 rhenium wire available proved too

brittle to turn into a spring and thus could not be used

012 _ ___r____~_-r____~_-r____~_ ___r______r___r____r__r___

C- WI W-26 Re Thermocouple Calibration Reference Junction at OdegC W Lead +

~ 008-lJ

W-26 Re LeadshyiE w 004 ~ 0shy

8J

0 o E

t-shy-I -I

Q)

c -004 tshy

-008 I I I I I I I

-200 -180 -160 -140 -120 -100 -80 -60 -40 shy

Temperature (OC) SP-1069

Figure Al Calibration curve for W-5 ReW-26 Re thermocouple

o

-gt -04E -lL ~ w -OS 2 0shy

8J -12

o E

W-5 Re I W-26 Re Thermocouple Co libration Reference Junct ion at OdegC W-5Re Lead + W-26 Re Leadshy

J shy --shy~ ~ t- 16 0----

-20 I I

-200 -ISO -160 -140 -120 -100 -SO -60 -40 -20 0

Temperature (OC)

SP-1l73

Figure A2 Calibration curve for WW-26 Re thermocouple

-J 00

179

APPENDIX B

When operating the spectrometer in the electron mode at an effective

pass energy E the output current of the electron multiplier N(E) is proporshy

tional to the electron current originating at the target with energy between E

and E + dE and with momentum in the acceptance solid angle of the analyzer

An energy distribution of the electron signal from the target can be measured

by sweeping the effective pass energy of the instrument This distribution

consists of rapidly varying true secondary and characteristic loss structure

interpretable in terms of electron transitions and collective oscillations in

the target plus a smoothly varying background In order to separate the

structure ~rom the background the energy distribution is electronically

67differentiated using a technique proposed by Harrismiddot A small sinusoidal

oscillation is applied to the effective pass energy of the spectrometer so

that the energy of the electrons passing through the spectrometer oscillates

around the instantaneous dc pass energy E If the detected current N(E) is 3

expanded in a Taylors series around the energy E where the sinusoidal 3

oscillation is E-E = K sin wt the first four terms are 3

N(E) N(E ) + K dN (E l (1 - cos 2wt)3 dE

E=E E=E i3

(3 sin wt - sin 3wt) +

E=E 3

Rearranging

180

dN(E) ) + K3 term + S1n wt (B2)N(E) = N(E ) + + K dE(i E=E

i

K2 d2N(E) 4 )+ K term + cos 2wt + + ( 4 2dE E=E1

The coefficients of the sin wt and cos 2wt terms are found to be proportional

respectively to the first two derivatives of N(E) providing K is small enough

such that the higher order terms in K can be dropped Under this assumption

a signal proportional to the first or second derivative of N(E) is obtained

by synchronously detecting the appropriate harmonic of the output

If a peak structure in the output signal is represented by a

Gaussian G(E) centered at E and the background represented by a polynomialo

in E B(E) then N(E) and the first two derivatives of N(E) evaluated at E o

become

N(E) = B(E) + G(E) (B3) -~(E-EO)2

2 d N(E) = a + bE + cE + + 1 e 2 (B4)

(2TT)2

2N(E=E ) = a + bE + cE + d 1 (B5)o o 0 cr (2TT)2

dN(E) = b + 2cE + 0 (B6)o E=E

dE

o

-d 1 = 2c + (B7)1 2 0 (2TT)2 0

E=E o

- -

2

181

From Equation B6 the first derivative evaluated at E has no contribution o

from the structure G(E) Extremum points in dN(E)dE occur at (E ~ E )2 = 0 o

if the background terms of order 3 or greater are not considered Using this

result in Equation B6 gives

~dltplusmng) edN(E) = b + 2c (E to) + bull I (B8)dE

0- 0 (2n)2E=E + 0

0shy

The relation between the original signal N(E) and the synchronously

detected signals can be seen from Equations B4 through B8 There is some

background suppression in both modes If N(E) is slowly varying the higher

order background terms that remain are small The peak to peak height of

the first harmonic signal is

1dN dN = 4ccr + - 2cb 1 e-2~-2crG(E-E ~ 0) (B9)

dE dE 0 (2n)2 0

E=E -0E=E +u o o

The intensity of the second harmonic signal evaluated at E is approximately 0

proportional to1 G(E) Hence using the stated assumptions the detected 0 2 0

first and second harmonics of N(E) contain structure which is directly

proportional to G(E)

The first derivative mode has been used in taking Auger data as is

commonly done The second derivative mode has been used in looking at

electron scattering energy loss measurements

182

APPENDIX C

The process of desorption of ions from a surface by electron

bombardment is referred to as electron stimulated desorption The theory to

account for this phenomenon was independently proposed by Redhead37 and by

38Menzel and Gomer A brief explanation of their model follows

In Figure Cl schematic potential energy diagrams are given for the

metal plus ground state adsorbate CM + A) and metal plus ionic state (M- + A+)

as a function of separation distance x of the adsorbing atom or ion from the

metal surface These two curves are labeled VG(x) and V(x) for the ground

state and ionic state respectively The nature of these interactions has

been described37 8l and several interaction calculations for hydrogen on metal

59 63surfaces have been g~ven The zero in potential energy in Figure 41 is

defined as the energy of the ion A+ at rest at infinity from the surface of M

The nucleus of the chemisorbed adsorbate is located at the minimum in the

ground state potential energy curve The wave function ~G(x) of the adsorbate

in the ground state on the surface is shown centered at a position x which ~

corresponds to the minimum in energy of VG

VG determines ~G(x) Vertical

transitions from the ground state to the ionic state (labeled 1 in the

diagram) are induced by incident electron bombardment of the surface

Secondary electrons leaving the surface also can cause such transitions

Once excited the ion is subjected to a repulsive force and moves away from

the surface (indicated by 2) The ionized adsorbate can be neutralized as it

leaves the surface and hence desorb as a neutral (indicated by 3) or it can

be de-excited back to the ground state and not desorb (indicated by 4) Ions

183

V(x)

gt ~ Ion ~ ~ 2 )III V(xi)(I) c +E K M-+A+w 0 f (v)+=c (I) +shy0 Cl

14 3 I-ltP Neutral

M+A

Ede t

ltPG (x)

~

DistanceX SP-1201

Figuze Cl Schematic diagram of adsorbate-metal interactions showing the transitions involved in the theory of electron stimulated desorption

184

that originate at x x leave the surface with energy V(x) The energyL L

80distribution of the desorbed ions f(V(xraquo is determined by the reflectionL

2of the probability density distribution I~G(xi)1 through the ionic state

energy curve This can be given by the expression

P(x ) f(V(xraquo

L (Cl)L ~~Ix = x

L

where N is the number of species A adsorbed in the ground state per unit

area a is the cross section for excitation of the species A from the groundex

state to the ionic state (transition 1) ~G(x) is defined above and P(x ) isi

the probability that an ion starts from the position x = x and moves awayL

from the L gLvensurface without being neutralized P(x) can be by373881

P(x ) exp(- J~dx ~)i x v(x) (C2)

i

where R(x) is the rate that the ions produced at the surface by electron

impact are reneutralized v(x) is the velocity of the ion at a distance x

from the surface This depends explicitly on V(x) as shown by Equation C3

for an ion of mass M and charge q

2q (V(X i ) - V(Xraquo)21

v(x) ( M (C3)

Additional complexities for example multiple initial and ionic states or

electron induced state conversion can be added to this simple model

185

The mass transport occurring at the surface during an ESD measurement

can be described in a kinetic treatment which relates the observed ion signal

to physical parameters characteristic of the experimental conditions The

change with time of the surface coverage per area of an adsorbate dNdt is

given by the rate of arrival of the adsorbate onto the surface minus the rate

of desorption from the surface In the simplest formulation of these proshy

cesses only adsorption from the background and desorption due to electron

bombardment need be considered The electron stimulated desorption flux of

ions is assumed proportional to the electron current density j and to the e

surface coverage per unit area N The proportionality constant is

tthe total desorption cross section Q (NE ) Qt(NE ) is in general a pr~ pr~

function of both the coverage and the primary electron energy For the

simple model given above the total desorption cross section is the sum of

the ionic Q+ and neutral Qn desorption cross sections The adsorption

rate is equal to the striking rate times the sticking probability s(N)

which in general is a function of the coverage The time dependence of N can

now be written as

j Qt(NE )N dNdt = s(N)yP _ ~ pu (C 4)e

where P is the partial pressure of the adsorbing species and y is a constant

equal to the number of molecules that strike unit area of the surface per unit

time and pressure

The measured electron stimulated desorption yield of A ions i + isA

assumed proportional to the incident current i the coverage of A per unit e

area N and the detection efficiency of the instrument G The proportionality

186

constant is the ionic desorption cross section Q+(NE ) (Since the only pr~

adsorbate being considered in this work is hydrogen the subscript A will be

replaced by H) This relation for iH+ can be written

= i Q+(NE )NG (CS)e pr~

Equation C4 can be solved for N in closed form under certain

simplifying assumptions The dependence of the cross section on primary

energy does not affect the form of the solution (if the primary energy is

kept constant) Then Qt can be written Qt (E ) if the cross section canpri

be shown to be independent of coverage This is not the case in general so

its validity for each metal-adsorbate system has to be examined This is

done in the text for H2 adsorbed on W(100) so the assumption will be assumed

here Likewise the sticking probability will be assumed independent of N

Equation C4 can now be solved to yield

(C6)

N is the initial hydrogen coverage at t o and T is given by ~

(C7)

Combining Equations CS and C6 gives for the g+ ion yield

(C8)

187

where i is the initial ion yield at t = 0 and iH+ is given byH~ equil

+ esyPAG ~ (C9)

Q

Equation C8 shows that the H+ yield decreases with time to a

saturation value iH+ This decay of the ESD ion yield with time is equil

called a desorption curve A semilogarithmic plot of iH+ - i + versusHequil time should yield a straight line the slope of which is -17 From this

slope and the definition of 7 the total desorption cross section charactershy

izing the hydrogen binding state can be calculated

If the hydrogen source is bulk to surface diffusion a calculation

of the dependence of coverage in the fast state on time and background

1S considerably more dbull40 a diffusionpressure ~nvo1ve Conceptually such

process can be considered in two steps 1) the diffusion of hydrogen from the

bulk to just inside the surface or to a near surface layer and 2) the

jumping from this configuration to surface sites Diffusion from the bulk to

the near surface layer could be described by Ficks law If N is the conshy

centration of hydrogen in the near surface layer and N the surface concentrashy

tion of hydrogen then the time dependence of N + N due to bulk diffusion

can be written as

d(N+Nl _ D dn (C 10)dt - dx

where D is the diffusion constant for hydrogen in tungsten and dndx is the

concentration gradient of hydrogen just inside the surface The coverage N

in surface sites will change as a result of hydrogen jumping from the near

188

surface layer to the surface and vice versa The rate of jumping to the

surface d( N )dt can be assumed proportional to the concentration Nt

and to some function f(N) which describes the availability of surface sites

The diffusion rate to the surface from the near surface layer would also be

exponentially dependent on an activation barrier energy E The reversebs

flux from the surface to the near surface layer can be written in an

equivalent form An expression for the change in surface concentration with

time due to diffusion to and from the near surface layer can be written as

-E kT -E kTb~~ = CbsNte s f(N) - CsbNe sb g(N) (ClI)

The first term on the right-hand side represents the rate of diffusion from

the near surface layer to the surface and the second term represents the

rate of diffusion from the surface back to the near surface layer cbs and

are constants Esb and g(N) correspond toE and f(N) respectivelycsb bs

A term representing depletion of the surface state due to incident electron

bombardment similar to the second term on the right of Equation C4 could

be added in Equation Cll This has been omitted since only the case je = 0

will be considered here In principle an expression for N can now be

obtained by solving Equations ClO and Cll A general solution is not easily

obtained However it is evident that the time dependence of N due to

diffusion could realistically be similar to that expected from background

adsorption For example for the isothermal case if Nt is assumed constant

and f(N) assumed equal to (1 - NN ) assumptions that are reasonable for max

small coverages it can be shown from Equation 44 that N increases

189

exponentially in time to an equilibrium value For N small this solution

would be approximately linear in time the same result obtained for the time

dependence of background adsorption However background pressure doesnt

enter into the above diffusion calculation If the fast state phenomena is

diffusion related N would be expected to be independent of background

pressure This is different than the expected coverage dependence for

adsorption from the background

_ _

190

VITA

Stephen Parker Withrow was born in Washington DC on February 2

1945 He attended Northwestern Senior High School in Hyattsville Maryland

graduating in 1963 He enrolled at Cornell University in Ithaca New York in

September 1963 In June 1967 he received a Bachelor of Science in

Engineering Physics In September 1967 he enrolled in the Physics Department

at the University of Illinois in Urbana Illinois He received his Masters

of Science in Physics in February 1969 He served at a Teaching Assistant

in the Physics Department for four years and also as a Research Assistant in

the Coordinated Science Laboratory while doing his thesis research He is

the coauthor of the publication Environmentally Assisted Crack Growth in

Glass G M Sinclair and S P Withrow Naval Research Laboratory Report

6635

_-------------shy-----------_ bull

Page 9: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 10: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 11: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 12: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 13: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 14: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 15: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 16: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 17: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 18: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 19: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 20: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 21: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 22: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 23: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 24: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 25: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 26: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 27: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 28: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 29: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 30: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 31: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 32: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 33: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 34: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 35: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 36: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 37: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 38: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 39: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 40: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 41: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 42: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 43: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 44: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 45: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 46: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 47: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 48: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 49: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 50: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 51: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 52: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 53: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 54: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 55: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 56: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 57: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 58: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 59: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 60: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 61: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 62: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 63: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 64: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 65: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 66: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 67: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 68: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 69: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 70: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 71: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 72: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 73: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 74: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 75: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 76: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 77: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 78: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 79: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 80: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 81: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 82: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 83: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 84: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 85: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 86: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 87: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 88: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 89: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 90: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 91: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 92: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 93: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 94: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 95: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 96: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 97: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 98: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 99: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 100: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 101: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 102: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 103: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 104: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 105: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 106: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 107: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 108: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 109: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 110: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 111: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 112: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 113: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 114: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 115: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 116: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 117: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 118: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 119: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 120: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 121: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 122: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 123: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 124: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 125: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 126: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 127: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 128: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 129: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 130: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 131: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 132: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 133: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 134: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 135: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 136: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 137: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 138: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 139: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 140: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 141: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 142: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 143: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 144: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 145: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 146: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 147: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 148: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 149: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 150: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 151: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 152: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 153: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 154: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 155: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 156: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 157: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 158: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 159: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 160: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 161: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 162: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 163: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 164: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 165: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 166: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 167: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 168: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 169: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 170: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 171: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 172: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 173: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 174: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 175: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 176: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 177: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 178: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 179: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 180: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 181: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 182: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 183: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 184: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 185: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 186: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 187: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 188: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 189: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 190: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 191: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 192: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 193: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 194: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 195: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 196: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …
Page 197: INVESTIGATION OF HYDROGEN CHEMISORPTION ON THE …